JP7497823B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachinko machines") and reel gaming machines (commonly referred to as "slot machines").

Conventionally, as shown in Patent Document 1, for example, gaming machines are known that offer special games in which a large amount of prize can be won when a winning jackpot is won.

That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not a gaming ball has entered the starting hole. Then, when a gaming ball has entered the starting hole, a determination process is performed to determine whether or not a winning prize has been won. At this time, a special pattern is displayed variably on a specified display for a specified variable time. Then, when the specified variable time has elapsed, the special pattern is displayed stationary in a display mode indicating that a winning prize has been won, and the opening and closing member of the large winning hole is operated, thereby providing the player with a special game in which many prizes can be won.

JP 2017-006393 A

In such conventional gaming machines , there is a demand for further increasing the gaming interest.

This invention was made in light of these circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

Means 1: A specific operation means operable by a player;
A determination means for making a determination;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judging means;
an operation state detection means for detecting a state of the specific operation means;
a post-operation sound output means for outputting a post-operation output sound in response to detection by the operation state detection means that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which the specific operation means is operated,
A gaming machine in which a multiple operation effective state is prepared as an operation effective state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, and the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times, so that the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times,
As the multiple operation valid state,
an indefinitely variable multiple operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operating state, and at that time, the post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times so that the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated does not become a constant time ;
a constant-change multiple-operation effective state is provided in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operating state, and at this time, the post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times so that the interval until a new output sound is generated is a constant time;
the indefinitely-changing multiple-operation valid state is generated as a multiple-operation valid state of a type that can be ended based on the fact that it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives,
The fixed-change multiple operation valid state may occur as a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives, or as a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the state may be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives.
A gaming machine characterized by:

This invention can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 2 is a left side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front right. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame open from the main frame and the main frame open from the outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine viewed from the front, disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. This is an oblique view of the outer frame from the front. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from the rear. This is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. 1A is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 1A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame has been removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. 1B is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the outer upper hinge member. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of a locking member in the outer frame. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. FIG. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front left. This is a perspective view of the door frame from the rear. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame disassembled into its main components from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of a door frame base unit in a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components from the rear. (a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. 1A is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the back. An explanatory diagram showing the performance operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a). This is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 34B is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the decorative board unit of the performance operation unit, viewed from the front. An explanatory diagram showing the state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit of Figure 37. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the area where the operation button is cut out and hidden by the first button decorative part and button frame of the operation button, etc., in a view of the performance operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the area where the operation button is hidden by the first button decorative part and button frame, etc., in a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an oblique view of the appearance of the performance operation unit from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 1A is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 1B is an oblique view of the left side unit of the door frame from the front, and FIG. 1C is an oblique view of the left side unit of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). 1A is a front view of the right side unit of the door frame, FIG. 1B is an oblique view of the right side unit of the door frame from the front, and FIG. 1C is an oblique view of the right side unit of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in Figure 51(a). 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is an oblique view of the door frame top unit from the front, and (c) is an oblique view of the door frame top unit from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame top unit from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame top unit from the rear. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in Figure 56. FIG. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board, broken down into its main components, as seen from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as viewed from the front. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the rear. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged front view of the function display unit with the game board attached to the pachinko machine; FIG. This is an exploded oblique view of a game panel of a different configuration from that of Figure 63, seen from the front, along with its front components, board holder, and main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 seen from behind. This is a block diagram of the main control board, dispensing control board, and peripheral control board. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 69. This is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input and output to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board, which relays the electrical connection between the payout control board that constitutes the main board and the CR unit and degree display board. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 69. 2 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU; This is a block diagram of the liquid crystal and sound control unit and the surroundings of the VDP with built-in sound source. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 75. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a power outage monitoring circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an interface circuit for communication between a main control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing the circuits of a dispensing control unit. FIG. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a dispensing control input circuit. This is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of Figure 81. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a dispensing motor drive circuit. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit. 4 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to and from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on an external terminal board. This is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws on the display area of the upper tray liquid crystal display device. A table showing examples of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the dispensing control board. 11 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a peripheral control board. A table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board in Figure 89 to the peripheral control board. This is a table showing examples of various commands received by the main control board from the dispensing control board. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process performed when the main control side is powered on; This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 92. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a main control side timer interrupt processing. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process; 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a LOCKN signal history creation process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection malfunction determination process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection recovery process. 11 is a timing chart explaining the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper tray side liquid crystal transmitter IC. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special symbol and special electric device control processing (step S114). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing processing (step S5232). A flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing processing (step S5234). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern process processing (step S5238). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern normal processing (step S5280). A flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305). 1A is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing a pattern determination table. A flowchart showing the steps of the first special pattern stop pattern setting process (step S5281). A flowchart showing the steps of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282). A flowchart showing the steps for the first special pattern change processing (step S5283). A flowchart showing the steps of the first special pattern stop processing (step S5284). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbol and normal electric device control processing (step S116). 5 is a flowchart showing the procedure for gate passage processing (step S5402). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal processing of normal symbols (step S5403). This is a diagram showing a judgment table T1 of the presentation pattern (variable presentation) referenced in the above-mentioned presentation pattern variation start process when in the normal game state. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a sound definition table. This figure shows the notification content, notification mode, and notification time for each type of notification sound exemplified in Figure 119, as well as the conditions for terminating the notification (cancellation conditions). FIG. 2 is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword effect operation unit. 1 is a right side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword effect operation unit. FIG. This figure shows an example of a selection table for presentation patterns in a presentation mode in which the sword-drawing presentation can be executed, where (A) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to display the sword-drawing preparation transition presentation depending on the type of variation pattern, and (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to display the actual sword-drawing presentation. This is a state transition diagram explaining the unsheathing action of a sword decoration when an aura member is attached to the sword portion (blade portion) itself, showing (A) a sheathed state, (B) a first unsheathing state, and (C) a second unsheathing state. 4 is a vertical cross-sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member. FIG. 11 is a state transition diagram explaining the unsheathing action of a sword decoration when an aura member is attached to the sheath, showing (A) a sheathed state, (B) a first unsheathing state, and (C) a second unsheathing state. 4 is a vertical cross-sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member. FIG. A diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device and the operation transitions of the sword decorations during the princess reach performance. A diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device and the operation transitions of the sword decorations during the princess reach performance. A diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device and the operation transitions of the sword decorations during the princess reach performance. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration in a reach performance that includes the operation performance of the operation buttons that are used in various ways. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration in a reach performance that includes the operation performance of the operation buttons that are used in various ways. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration in a reach performance that includes the operation performance of the operation buttons that are used in various ways. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration during a reach performance. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration during a reach performance. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration during a reach performance. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration during a reach performance. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration during a reach performance. A diagram explaining the shape of the sword decoration used in the pseudo-consecutive performance. This figure shows an example of a transition of a reach presentation in which a pre-operation suggestion presentation of a first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined by lottery by the peripheral control board that either the operation button or the sword decoration is enabled for operation during a reach presentation based on the change presentation (reach presentation) of a change pattern selected by the main control board. This figure shows an example of a transition of a reach presentation in which a pre-operation suggestion presentation of a first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined by lottery by the peripheral control board that either the operation button or the sword decoration is enabled for operation during a reach presentation based on the change presentation (reach presentation) of a change pattern selected by the main control board. This figure shows an example of a transition of a reach performance in which a pre-operation suggestion performance of a second suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is enabled for operation during the reach performance, as with the first suggestion pattern described above. This figure shows a step-up pattern pre-operation suggestion performance in which, even though the second suggestion pattern is performed as a pre-operation suggestion performance, the sword decoration does not become operable, but the operation button becomes operable at first, and then the sword decoration becomes operable. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an integrated model image. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of an integrated mock-up image from the start to the end of a valid period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first A reception permission state. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first A reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the first A reception allowance state occurs. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a second A reception permission state. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a second A reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which a second A reception-permitting state occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a third A reception permission state. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a third A reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which a third A reception allowance state occurs. 4 is a time chart showing an example of a fourth A reception permission state. 4 is a time chart showing an example of a fourth A reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which a 4A reception allowance state occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a fifth A reception permission state. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a fifth A reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the 5A reception allowance state occurs. 6 is a time chart showing an example of a sixth A reception permission state. 6 is a time chart showing an example of a sixth A reception permission state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern in which the 6A reception allowance state occurs.

[1. Overall structure of a pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 1 to 10. Fig. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, Fig. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and Fig. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Fig. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the right front, Fig. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the left front, and Fig. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the rear. Fig. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Fig. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame as seen from the front, and Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame as seen from the rear.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a game board 5 that is detachably attached to the main frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player's side through the door frame 3, and has a game area 5a into which the player shoots game balls.

As shown in Figures 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 comprises an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically spaced apart and extend horizontally, and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width from front to back. Furthermore, the vertical length of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 is longer than the horizontal length of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 also includes a panel member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left and right frame members 30 and 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, an upper outer frame hinge member 60 that is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, and a lower outer frame hinge member 70 that is attached to the upper left end side of the panel member 50 when viewed from the front and to the left frame member 30. The upper outer frame hinge member 60 and the lower outer frame hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be attached so as to be able to open and close.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 with a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a through hole 111 penetrating from front to back, a handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front face below the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and can be operated by the player to shoot game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plate unit 320 that is attached to the lower front face below the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100, and a participatory type display unit 320 that is attached to the center of the plate unit 320 and allows the player to select a participatory type display depending on the game state that changes as game balls are shot into the game area 5a. It is equipped with a performance operation unit 400 capable of presenting performances, a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the left of the front side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the top of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, above the door frame top unit 570.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 comprises a frame-shaped main body frame base 600, a portion of which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; a main body frame upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame lower hinge member 640 which are attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and which are rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and to which the door frame upper hinge member 140 and the door frame lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 are rotatably attached, respectively; a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front; and a reinforcing frame 670 attached to the lower front part of the main body frame base 600. The game machine includes a ball launcher 680 for shooting game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a locking unit 700 attached to the right side of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front and locking the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, an inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 attached to the rear side along the upper and left sides of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front and pays out game balls to the player, a base unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a back cover 980 attached to the rear side of the main frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable, covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 600.

The payout unit 800 of the main frame 4 comprises an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600, a ball tank 802 attached to the top of the payout unit base 801, which is a box-shaped tank that is open upward and extends to the left and right, and which stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), a tank rail 803 that is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 and extends to the left and right to guide the game balls in the ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front and guides the game balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine shape, and a ball guide unit 820 that is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball guide unit 820, and which stores the game balls guided by the ball guide unit 820 in a payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 pays out balls one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 951; an upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward and releasing the game balls from either the normal release port 850d or the full release port 850e depending on the storage state of the game balls in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320; and a lower full ball path unit 860 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 and having a normal guide path 861 that guides the game balls released from the normal release port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides them from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and a full guide path 862 that guides the game balls released from the full release port 850e forward and guides them from the front end to the full ball receiving port 274 of the door frame 3.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear of the main body frame base 600, a speaker unit 920 attached to the rear of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front and having a lower low-pitched speaker 921 inside, a power supply board box 930 attached to the rear of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front and housing a power supply board inside, an interface control board box 940 attached to the rear of the speaker unit 920 and housing an interface control board inside, and a payout control board box 950 attached across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and housing a payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls inside.

As shown in Figures 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that define the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which game balls are shot and guides game balls launched from the ball launcher 680 to the upper part of the game area 5a, and a flat game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when game balls are stored in the upper tray 321 and the player rotates the handle 302, the ball launcher 680 shoots the game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the handle 302. When the game balls shot into the game area 5a are received by a winning hole, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 by the payout device 830 according to the winning hole into which the game ball was received. This payout of game balls can increase the player's interest, so that the game balls in the upper tray 321 can be shot into the game area 5a, allowing the player to enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 11 to 16. Figure 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and Figure 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Figure 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and Figure 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. Figure 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. Figure 16(a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame upper hinge member in the outer frame as seen from below with the left frame member omitted, and Figure 16(b) is an exploded perspective view of Figure 16(a). The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an amusement hall or the like.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 comprises an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically spaced apart and extend left and right, and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and extend up and down. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed with the same width from front to back. Furthermore, the vertical length of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 is longer than the horizontal length of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Furthermore, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end faces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side faces facing outward in the horizontal direction of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are flush with each other.

The outer frame 2 also includes an outer frame upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a lock member 66 attached to the underside of the outer frame upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the front view of the apron member 50 and to the left frame member 30. The outer frame upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be attached so as to be able to open and close.

The outer frame 2 also includes a fascia member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left and right frame members 30 and 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, a fascia reinforcement member 80 that is attached to the rear side of the fascia member 50 and has both ends attached to the left and right frame members 30 and 40, respectively, a flat left sliding member 81 that is attached to the top surface of the fascia member 50 at a position to the left of the center, and a flat right sliding member 82 that is attached to the top surface of the fascia member 50 at a position near the right end. The fascia reinforcement member 80 is made of a solid member (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

The outer frame 2 further includes connecting members 85 that respectively connect the upper frame member 10 to the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 to the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 to the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 to the right frame member 40. The outer frame 2 also includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 that are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and engage with an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described below.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed from a solid material (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. This upper frame member 10 has an engagement notch 11 that penetrates from top to bottom and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. Upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of a connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached within this engagement notch 11. In addition, the upper frame member 10 has an attachment step 12 that is recessed from the general surface on the top surface and front surface of the left end portion when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to this attachment step 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid material (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The left-right length and top-bottom thickness of this lower frame member 20 are the same as those of the upper frame member 10, and the front-to-back width is longer than that of the upper frame member 10. The lower frame member 20 has engagement cutouts 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the left-to-right center at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-to-back direction at both left and right ends. Lower lateral fixing portions 88 of a left lower connecting member 85C and a right lower connecting member 85D (described later) of the connecting member 85 are attached within the engagement cutouts 21.

The lower frame member 20 also has front end notches 22 recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. The width of the lower frame member 20 from the rear end of the front end notches 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 in the front-to-rear direction is formed to be the same dimension as the front-to-rear width of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the area between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the fascia board member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and are formed of extruded metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a shape symmetrical to each other in a plan view. When assembled into the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have, on the side surfaces that are on the outside in the left-right direction, recesses 31, 41 recessed inwardly between a position rearward of the center in the front-rear direction and near the rear end, and protrusions 32, 42 that bulge out from the side surfaces opposite the recesses 31, 41 and are formed with a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32, 42. In addition, the rear lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are inserted into the protrusions 32, 42 and attached.

The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 also have multiple grooves formed on their surfaces that extend vertically. These multiple grooves allow the operator to easily hold the pachinko machine 1 by providing finger rests when installing or transporting the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility such as an amusement hall, and also enhance the design quality of the pachinko machine 1's exterior.

[2-4. Skirting panel members]
The fascia board member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The fascia board member 50 includes a rear extension portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the top surface when viewed from the front, a left discharge hole 52 cut out in a U-shape from the left end of the rear extension portion 51 to a size that allows game balls to pass through and penetrating vertically, a right discharge hole 53 penetrating vertically to the right of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 to a size that allows game balls to pass through, a standing wall portion 54 extending upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the top surface of the fascia board member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension portion 51, and a return portion 55 bulging forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 and inclining rearward as the front surface moves upward.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (described later) is attached to the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on it. The left discharge hole 52 of the front panel member 50 is formed in a position that coincides with a discharge hole 74 (described later) of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed in a position that is to the right of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

The top surface of the fascia board member 50 to the right of the rear extension 51 is inclined so that the front end is lower. The fascia board member 50 also has a left attachment portion 56 for attaching the left sliding member 81 to a portion of the top surface to the right of the rear extension 51, and a right attachment portion 57 for attaching the right sliding member 82 near the right end of the top surface. The bottom surface of the main frame 4 is placed on the top surface of the fascia board member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the front of the fascia board member 50 is decorated with a shallow relief. Although not shown in the figure, the box-shaped interior of the fascia board member 50 is divided into a lattice pattern by multiple ribs, which increases its strength and rigidity. The fascia board member 50 is also formed so that the front half of the fascia board reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 comprises a horizontally extending, flat, rectangular upper fixing portion 61, a flat forward extension portion 62 extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61, a bearing groove 63 extending forward from the right end of the forward extension portion 62 to the center of the left and right sides of the forward extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, a flat lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left edge of the upper fixing portion 61 in a planar view, and a flat hanging portion 65 extending downward from the edge from the left end of the forward extension portion 62, around the front end to the position where the bearing groove 63 opens, and which is continuous with the lateral fixing portion 64 (see Figure 16 (b) etc.).

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 has its upper fixing portion 61 placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed with screws (not shown). The forward extension portion 62 extends forward beyond the front end of the upper frame member 10. The lateral fixing portion 64 is inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 and is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws.

By inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, the outer frame upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame lower hinge member 70 to support the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Locking member]
As shown in Fig. 16, the locking member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped locking body 66a extending forward and backward with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, an operating portion 66b protruding to the right from the rear end of the locking body 66a, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the locking body 66a and then extending diagonally forward to the left, and a mounting hole 66d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the locking body 66a. The locking member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the underside of the forward extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by mounting screws 67.

The rear end of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 is attached through the mounting hole 66d at a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the forward extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. Furthermore, when the locking member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the locking body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end extends forward so as to be able to abut against a portion of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a abuts against the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward around the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 abuts against the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 (described later) of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in the portion of the bearing groove 63 forward of the lock body 66a.

By operating the operating portion 66b, the locking member 66 can rotate the locking body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. By operating the operating portion 66b, the locking body 66a can be rotated in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, so that the locking body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 can be fully opened. This makes it possible to insert the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 into the bearing groove 63 or remove the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 from within the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 comprises a flat horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally, a flat rising portion 72 rising upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 rearward of the center in the front-to-rear direction, a lower outer frame hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a discharge hole 74 that penetrates the horizontal portion 71 from top to bottom and is large enough to allow only one game ball to pass through. This lower outer frame side hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is cylindrical and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the vertical center. This outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to contact the central part of the rising portion 72 in the front-to-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. This discharge hole 74 is formed to be approximately the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the fascia board member 50.

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has a horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the fascia board member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71 is fixed to the fascia board reinforcement member 80 by a screw (not shown) that penetrates the upper surface of the fascia board member 50. Also, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached by a screw (not shown) to a portion forward of the protruding portion 32 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30. This outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can cooperate with the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 to attach the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main frame 4.

In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the skirting board member 50. This allows game balls on the horizontal portion 71 to fall (discharge) to the rear side of the skirting board member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. In more detail, when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, game balls that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 roll to the rear side where the gap is wider, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74, because the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 gradually narrows as the main frame 4 is closed. In this case, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 in a state where it is assembled into the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, game balls that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling rearward beyond the main frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and game balls can be made less likely to become stuck in the area of the outer frame lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, a lower left connecting member 85C that connects the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side of the horizontal fixing portion 86 as the part from which the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. This connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, an upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-to-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. In other words, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart in the front-to-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of abutting against the underside of the upper frame member 10. In addition, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left-to-right ends of the upper frame member 10. Additionally, the front lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces forward of the protruding parts 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the rear lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, by screws that are inserted into the protruding parts 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed in from the outer side surfaces.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the lower end of the part of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 that protrudes further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 86. In addition, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of abutting against the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. In addition, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface forward of the protruding portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end faces of the lower frame member 20, respectively.

[2-9. Locking mechanism for outer frame upper hinge member]
Next, the locking mechanism for the main body frame 4 upper hinge member 620 by the locking member 66 in the outer frame upper hinge member 60 in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 17 and 18. Figure 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body upper hinge member is attached to the outer upper hinge member. Figure 18 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the locking member in the outer frame.

When the locking member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the forward extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c abuts against the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65, and the locking body 66a closes a part of the L-shaped bent bearing groove 63. At the same time, the tip of the locking body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, and a space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In this embodiment, the support mechanism for the main frame hinge pin 622 using the outer frame upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 is such that in the normal support state, in which the main frame hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a is close to the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a small gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65, and they are not in contact), the centers of the main frame hinge pin 622 located in the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock body 66a are offset diagonally and face each other.

In this normal support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main frame, which supports the heavy main frame 4, is in contact with the front end of the bearing groove 63, so there is almost no load from the hinge pin 622 on the front end of the lock body 66a. In other words, there is no load on the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. In the figure, the center of the arc on the front end of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the action force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is pulled out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a L-shape and abuts against the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock body 66a, when the action force F is divided into a component force F1 (normal to the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the abutment portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and a component force F2 acting on the abutment portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main frame and the inner surface of one side of the bearing groove 63, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (rotation center of the lock member 66), so no moment is applied to rotate the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in a direction away from the right hanging portion 65, and the state in which the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is sandwiched between the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the inner surface of one side of the bearing groove 63 is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal support state or when the force of the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is applied to the locking member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66 is not constantly loaded, preventing plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c which is integrally formed from synthetic resin, and preventing the hinge pin 622 on the main frame from falling off the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 is rotated in a direction moving to the right, the front right side of the locking body 66a abuts against the hanging portion 65 and does not rotate any further, so that the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the forward extension 62.

In addition, even if the shape of the front end surface of the locking body 66a is not arc-shaped, by positioning the center of rotation of the locking member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or at a position where a rotational moment is generated that rotates the front end of the locking member 66 toward the outside of the forward extension portion 62, no load is constantly applied to the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66, and even if the locking member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the locking body 66a only abuts the hanging portion 65, so the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the forward extension portion 62.

When the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper hinge member 620 on the outer frame side is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, the upper hinge pin 622 on the upper hinge member 620 on the outer frame side is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. When the upper hinge pin 622 on the upper hinge member 622 on the outer frame side is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the upper hinge pin 622 on the upper hinge member 620 on the upper hinge member 620 on the outer frame side is abutted against the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the lock member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67 so that the front end of the lock body 66a moves leftward against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. As a result, the lock body 66a that had been closing the bearing groove 63 retreats, opening the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 on the upper hinge member 620 on the outer frame side can be moved to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

When the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main frame and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock body 66a moves to the right due to the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c, and the lock member 66 returns to its normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is housed in the space in front of the front end of the lock body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is held (locked) in a rotatable state in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63.

When removing the main frame hinge pin 622 from the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the locking member 66 is operated to rotate the locking member 66 so that the front end of the locking body 66a moves to the left, and the locking body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. This places the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 in communication with the opening, and the main frame hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Anti-theft mechanism and ball-trapping prevention mechanism at the outer frame lower hinge member]
The following describes the anti-theft mechanism at the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, and the ball trap prevention mechanism for preventing game balls from getting caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the fascia board member 50 when viewed from the front. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the fascia board member 50 and on the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. This fascia board member 50 has a vertical wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the rear side of the main frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640, the tip of the illegal tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the fascia board member 50, so that the illegal tool cannot be inserted any further to the rear side, and illegal acts can be prevented from being performed through the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

In addition, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54 is provided with a return portion 55 that extends forward. If an unauthorized tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 and bends upward, the return portion 55 can bend the tip of the unauthorized tool further forward, preventing unauthorized tools from being inserted into the rear of the main body frame 4 and reliably preventing unauthorized acts from being performed through the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

When the rear end of the upper surface of the fascia board member 50 is provided with a vertical wall portion 54 extending upward, if a game ball falls onto the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71) while the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, so there is a risk of it being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. In contrast, in this embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the fascia board member 50 are provided with a discharge hole 74, a left discharge hole 52, and a right discharge hole 53 through which the game ball can pass, so that the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74, etc., and the game ball can be reduced from being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

This prevents a game ball from getting caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, which could cause damage around the outer frame lower hinge member 70, or the main frame 4 not closing normally and creating a gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, which could then be used to commit fraud.

[3. Overall structure of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 19 to 30. Figure 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, Figure 20 is a right side view of the door frame, Figure 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and Figure 22 is a rear view of the door frame. Figure 23 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the right front, Figure 24 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front, and Figure 25 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the rear. Figure 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in Figure 19, Figure 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along line B-B in Figure 19, and Figure 28 is a cross-sectional view cut along line C-C in Figure 19. Figure 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and Figure 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and seen from the rear.

As shown in Figures 29 and 30, the door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 that is a rectangular frame-shaped unit that extends vertically when viewed from the front, a handle unit 300 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame base unit 100, a plate unit 320 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right front of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, comprises a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a rectangular (quadrilateral) outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a through hole 111 penetrating from front to back, a frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, a door frame upper hinge member 140 and a door frame lower hinge member 150 attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left end side when viewed from the front of the reinforcement unit 130 and hingedly rotatably attached to the main frame 4, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, and a glass unit 190 attached to the rear underside of the glass unit 190. The door frame 3 and main frame 4 are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward, and can be opened and closed. An opening and closing cylinder unit 210 is used to lock the gap between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2. A ball sending unit 250 is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 to send game balls to the ball launcher 680. A foul cover unit 270 is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 to receive game balls that have been launched by the ball launcher 680 but have not reached the play area 5a and discharge them into the lower tray 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302 to shoot the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

The tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the lower part of the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, with the front side bulging forward and the performance operation unit 400 attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 comprises an upper tray 321 for storing game balls to be shot into the game area 5a, a lower tray 322 arranged below the upper tray 321 and capable of storing game balls supplied from the upper tray 321 or the foul cover unit 270, an upper tray ball removal button 327 for removing game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, a ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to a player within the amount of cash inserted into the ball lending machine or the remaining balance on a prepaid card, and It is equipped with a return button 329 for returning cash or prepaid cards minus the amount of game balls loaned from the ball loan machine, a ball loan return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining amount of cash or prepaid cards inserted into the ball loan machine, a left effect selection button 331 and a right effect selection button 332 that can be operated by the player when an effect is presented, and a lower tray ball removal button 333 for ejecting game balls in the lower tray 322 below the tray unit 320.

The performance operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the center of the left and right direction when viewed from the front of the tray unit 320, and can be operated by the player by pressing it, and can present performance images to the player. This performance operation unit 400, which will be described in detail later, is equipped with a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side performance display device 460 that is positioned within the operation button 410 so that it can be seen from the player side and can display performance images.

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, the details of which will be described later, is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320, on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and serves to decorate the left outer side of the through hole 111 (play area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 is equipped with a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be illuminated for decoration.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, the details of which will be described later, is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320, on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, to the right of the through hole 111, and decorates the right outer side of the through hole 111 (play area 5a). This door frame right side unit 550 protrudes farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and is equipped with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 at the front end. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate and decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, and decorates the upper part of the door frame 3. The door frame top unit 570, the details of which will be described later, is equipped with a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart on the left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward from the center of the front surface, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 31 to 33. Figure 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the back. Figure 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the back.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed (hinged) so that the left side when viewed from the front closes the front of the main frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 attached to the lower front corner of the front, a tray unit 320 to which the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front surface of the through opening 111, a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the left outer front surface of the through opening 111, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right outer front surface of the through opening 111, and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper outer front surface of the through opening 111.

As shown in Figures 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 with a through hole 111 that is a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and penetrates from front to back, a frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, a door frame upper hinge member 140 and a door frame lower hinge member 150 attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left end side when viewed from the front of the reinforcement unit 130, protruding forward from the door frame base 110 and rotatably attached to the main body frame upper hinge member 620 and main body frame lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4, a door frame left side decorative board 160 that is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 to the left of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front side, and a glass unit mounting member 170 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably mounting the glass unit 190.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a cylindrical handle mounting member 180 for mounting the handle unit 300, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, an opening/closing cylinder unit 210 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Furthermore, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 is equipped with various decorative boards, ball sending solenoid 255, handle rotation detection sensor 307, handle touch sensor 310, single button operation sensor 312, ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending/returning display unit 330, performance selection left button 331, performance selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side performance display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461), upper speaker 573, etc., which are provided on the door frame 3, and a door body relay board for relaying the connection with the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the main body frame 4.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 has an outer shape in a front view that is a square (rectangle) extending vertically. The door frame base 110 has a through hole 111 that penetrates from front to back and has an inner periphery shape in a front view that is approximately a square extending vertically. The through hole 111 has an upper side and both left and right sides that form the inner periphery close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, and a lower side that forms the inner periphery is located at about 1/3 height in the vertical direction from the lower end of the door frame base 110. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through hole 111 that penetrates from front to back. This door frame base 110 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is provided with a handle mounting surface 112 formed in the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward more than the right end side, a cylinder mounting section 113 recessed from the rear surface toward the front near the right end when viewed from the front between the handle mounting surface 112 and the through hole 111 and to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached, a cylinder insertion hole 114 that penetrates from the front to the back in the cylinder mounting section 113 and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted, and a ball feed opening 115 that penetrates from the front to the front on the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting surface 112 when viewed from the front, allowing the entrance 251a and ball removal opening 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to be exposed forward.

The door frame base 110 also has a lower tray passage hole 116 that penetrates from front to back at a position to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and exposes the ball discharge hole 276 of the foul cover unit 270 to the front, an upper tray passage hole 117 that penetrates from front to back near the left end of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, adjacent to the lower edge of the through hole 111, and exposes the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 to the front, a glass unit mounting section 118 that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the through hole 111, and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and a speaker insertion hole 119 that penetrates from front to back at both upper left and right corners of the door frame base 110 and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcement unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 31 and 33. The reinforcement unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcement unit 130 includes an upper reinforcement metal plate 131 extending left and right and attached along the upper edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, a middle reinforcement metal plate 132 extending left and right and attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, a left reinforcement metal plate 133 extending up and down and attached along the left edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 as viewed from the front, a right reinforcement metal plate 134 extending up and down and attached along the right edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 as viewed from the front, and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcement metal plate 134 and engaging with the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

The left and right ends of the upper reinforcing metal plate 131 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing metal plate 133 and the right reinforcing metal plate 134 with screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 is connected and fixed to the left reinforcing metal plate 133 with screws. The right end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing metal plate 134 via the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed into a frame shape by the upper reinforcing metal plate 131, the middle reinforcing metal plate 132, the left reinforcing metal plate 133, and the right reinforcing metal plate 134, etc.

The upper reinforcing metal plate 131, the middle reinforcing metal plate 132, the left reinforcing metal plate 133, the right reinforcing metal plate 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing metal plate 132 has a notch 132a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the upper tray passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has portions that are bent in the front-to-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing metal plate 131, the middle reinforcing metal plate 132, the left reinforcing metal plate 133, and the right reinforcing metal plate 134, which increase the strength and rigidity of the plate and also prevent the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as piano wire or flathead screwdrivers from outside.

[3-1c. Door frame upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33 etc. The door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 comprises: a door-frame-upper hinge axis bracket 141 attached to the door-frame base 110 and having a pair of protruding pieces 141a spaced apart vertically; a cylindrical door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 which passes through the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door-frame-upper hinge axis bracket 141 and has an upper end which is inserted into the door-frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main-frame-side upper hinge member 620; a disk-shaped flange member 143 attached to a position between the pair of protruding pieces 141a on the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142; and a lock spring 144 which is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, through which the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 is inserted, and which urges the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 upward.

The door frame upper hinge axis bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece that connects the rear ends of a pair of protruding pieces 141a (not shown), and is U-shaped in side view with an open front. The door frame upper hinge axis bracket 141 has a mounting piece that connects the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and the mounting piece is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, which protrudes above the upper protruding piece 141a, is rotatably inserted into the upper door frame hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620. Although not shown, the upper door frame hinge pin 142 has a portion that protrudes below the lower protruding piece 141a that is bent horizontally. This bent portion abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

The flange member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring that can be inserted through the door frame upper hinge pin 142, with its upper end abutting the flange member 143 and its lower end abutting the lower protruding piece 141a. This lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a, and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143.

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 141a, restricting further upward movement. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes a predetermined amount above the top surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

When an operator holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and pulls that portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144, the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the upper hinge member 140 of the door frame side upper hinge member 620 can be inserted from below into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, or removed downward. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be supported so as to be hinged and rotatable relative to the main body frame 4.

The upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side is supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the upper hinge axis bracket 141 on the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame, and is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152 of the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side, which will be described later. This allows the upper hinge member 140 and the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side to hinge rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1d. Door frame bottom hinge member]
The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 of the door-frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 and 32. The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 includes a door-frame-side lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat extension piece 151a attached to the door-frame base 110 and extending forward, and a cylindrical door-frame-side lower hinge pin 152 (see Figures 21 and 22) protruding downward from near the front end of the extension piece 151a of the door-frame-side hinge shaft bracket.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) that extends upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending flat extension piece 151a, and has an overall shape that is roughly L-shaped when viewed from the side. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape that narrows toward the bottom. This door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described below. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

This door frame side lower hinge member 150 can support the door frame 3 so that it can rotate relative to the main frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame side lower hinge member 640.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 and 32. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110, on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front. The door frame left side decorative board 160 includes a door frame left side upper decorative board 161 that extends vertically from a position lower than the speaker insertion hole 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front to a height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction, and a door frame left side lower decorative board 162 that extends vertically from a position lower than the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to a height approximately the same as the lower end of the upper tray passage hole 117.

The upper left side decorative board 161 and the lower left side decorative board 162 of the door frame left side decorative board 160 each have a number of LEDs 161a, 162a on their front surfaces that can radiate light forward. These LEDs 161a, 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530 (described later) when the door frame 3 is assembled, and by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 161a, 162a provided (mounted) on the front, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 31(b) etc. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably mounting the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably attached around an axis extending forward and backward on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a protruding portion 172 that protrudes in a rod shape from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of rotation.

The glass unit mounting members 170 are rotatably attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below a pair of speaker insertion holes 119, at a location outside the glass unit mounting portion 118.

By rotating the glass unit mounting member 170 so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 is positioned outward from the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from behind, allowing the glass unit 190 to be inserted into or removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 while the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protrusion 172 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190, restricting the rearward movement of the upper part of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be mounted to the door frame base 110.

The glass unit mounting member 170 has a protruding portion 172 protruding from a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110, so that the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located within the protruding portion 172. For this reason, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which it can rotate freely, the protruding portion 172 is stable in a state in which it protrudes downward from the base 171. In addition, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is in a rotation position in which the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171, the protruding portion 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 170, the entire member does not rotate so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is not naturally released.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the protrusion 172 is moved outward beyond the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190, allowing the upper side of the glass unit 190 to be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1g. Handle attachment member]
The handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in Figures 32 and 33, the handle attachment member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 182 extending from the rear end of the tube portion 181 outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181, a plurality of (three in this example) protrusions 183 protruding into the tube portion 181 and extending over the entire axial length of the tube portion 181 and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tube portion 181, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 connecting the outer circumferential surface of the tube portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and arranged in the circumferential direction of the tube portion 181.

The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the handle mounting surface 112 with screws, with the rear surface of the flange portion 182 abutting against the front surface of the handle mounting surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side of the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side of the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed in positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three grooves 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned, and the rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated relative to the door frame base 110.

In addition, since the axis of the tube portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 extends perpendicular to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, by mounting it on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110, the axis of the tube portion 181 is inclined to extend forward to the right, and the handle unit 300 can be mounted to the door frame base 110 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and two transparent glass plates 192 that close the inside of the frame of the glass frame 191 and have their outer peripheries attached to the glass frame 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and rear directions so that a space is formed between them (see Figure 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a that extend outward in a flat shape from a position lower than the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band-shaped locking piece 191b that protrudes downward from the lower end and extends along the lower edge. The mounting pieces 191a of the glass frame 191 are capable of abutting the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b is capable of being inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

This glass unit 190 is attached to the door frame base 110 by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110, abutting the front end of the glass frame 191 against the rear surface of the glass unit mounting part 118 of the door frame base 110, and rotating the glass unit mounting member 170 to abut the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 against the rear surface of the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191.

To remove the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the above steps can be reversed. This allows the glass unit 190 to be attached and detached to the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Anti-theft cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 includes a flat body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear projection 202 projecting rearward along the outer periphery of the body 201, and a pair of locking pieces 203 spaced apart on the left and right, projecting forward beyond the body 201, and capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that its lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. The upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape that conforms to the lower end of the play area 5a of the play board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. In more detail, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape that conforms to a part of the inner rail 1002, the out guide portion 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the component 1000 described below, and is formed so as not to protrude into the play area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 202 is formed around almost the entire outer periphery of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed by the main body 201 and the rear protrusion 202 into a shallow box shape that is open to the rear, and has high strength and rigidity. As shown in FIG. 33, the rear protrusion 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 that is different from the outer periphery of the main body 201. This rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed to fit along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear protrusion 202 is not formed in the area located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5. As a result, game balls (game balls launched by the ball launcher 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 do not come into contact with the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200, and do not impede the shooting of game balls into the game area 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. This allows the security cover 200 to be easily attached and detached to the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts against the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the rear projection 202, excluding the portion projecting rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 201, is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the component 1000 described below. Also, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projection 202 projecting rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 201 projects rearward beyond the front surface of the component 1000 so as to contact the bottom surface of the component 1000. As a result, the area between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a through the gap between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, the attempt will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening and closing cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder attachment part 113 located near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view and between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112, and is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 in cooperation with a locking unit 700 (described later).

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is equipped with a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 that has a keyhole 211a on the front and extends forward and backward, a rotation transmission member 212 that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and transmits the rotation operation of the key inserted into the keyhole 211a to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700, and a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can be rotated by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a, and if the key is a corresponding one, it can be rotated a specified angle in either the clockwise or counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and has a pair of notches 212a cut from the rear end toward the front at positions facing each other across the central axis. This rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 can be inserted from the rear, and by inserting the protrusions of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 into the pair of notches 212a, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted in the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed into a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. In detail, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a rectangular, flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically in a front view, a pair of side plate portions 213b extending flatly backward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a, and a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending flatly from the respective rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b in a direction away from each other. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 from the rear at a position approximately in the center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is such that the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side as viewed from the front is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side as viewed from the front is attached to the right reinforcing metal plate 134 of the reinforcing unit 130. As a result, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 connects the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 and the right reinforcing metal plate 134 of the reinforcing unit 130.

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 114 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and a pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 are housed within the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is open to the rear.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 34 to 41. Fig. 34(a) is a front view of the performance operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the performance operation unit. Also, Fig. 35(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the back. Fig. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the performance operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Fig. 37 is a cross-sectional view cut along line D-D in Fig. 34(a), and Fig. 38 is a cross-sectional view cut along line E-E in Fig. 34(b). Fig. 39(a) is a cross-sectional view cut along line F-F in Fig. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). Fig. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and Fig. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into main members and seen from the back. The performance operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the tray unit 320, and can be operated by the player by pressing it, and can also present performance images to the player.

The performance operation unit 400 is equipped with an operation button 410 that has a circular outer shape and is transparent at the center except for the outer edge, which can be pressed by the player, a frame unit 415 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the plate unit cover 326, a decorative board unit 420 that is positioned behind the operation button 410 and can illuminate and decorate the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, a base unit 430 that is attached to the rear of the frame unit 415 and has the operation button 410 and decorative board unit 420 attached to the front, and a door frame side performance display device 460 that is attached to the base unit 430 so that it can be seen from the player side through the operation button 410 and can display performance images.

[3-4a. Operation buttons]
The operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 39 to 42. Fig. 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the front, and Fig. 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the back. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the vertical height of the dish unit 320, and the center side except for the outer periphery is formed transparent. The operation button 410 is equipped with a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical shape) with a circular periphery and a central side bulging forward, an annular button frame 412 attached to the front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of a material that is difficult for light to pass through.

The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially uniform thickness throughout. The front side of the button lens 411 is formed to have a smooth curved surface without any irregularities. The button lens 411 includes a first button decoration part 411a that extends a predetermined length toward the center (inside) at a position on the inner periphery of the button frame 412, recessed from the back surface into a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and a plurality (six) of second button decoration parts 411b that extend on an axis toward the center at a position on the outer periphery side of the first button decoration part 411a, recessed from the back surface into an arc-shaped cross section, and are arranged in a row within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction.

As shown in the figure, when assembled to the operating button 410, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 toward the center, with the groups on the left and right sides extending further toward the center than the groups on the top and bottom sides.

The multiple second button decorations 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, with three formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decorations 411b are formed to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that their front sides are approximately flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 has a lens effect that refracts light due to the unevenness of the W-shaped or arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411b, making it difficult to see clearly from behind.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape and has multiple (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-to-rear direction and extend in an arc shape for a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided three on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decorative parts 411b of the button lens 411. This button frame 412 has a plating layer with a metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 includes a main body 413a that is approximately cylindrical and extends in the front-rear direction, a ring-shaped flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, a plurality of guide bosses 413c (four in number) that protrude cylindrically from the rear side of the flange 413b along the outer periphery of the main body 413a and are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction, a plurality of detection pieces 413d (three in number) that protrude in a strip-like shape from the rear side of the flange 413b along the outer periphery of the main body 413a and are arranged in the circumferential direction, a base opening 413e that penetrates the flange 413b in the front-rear direction outside the main body 413a, extends a predetermined length along the outer periphery, and is formed in the circumferential direction in a plurality of (six) base openings 413e, and an inner extension 413f that extends forward from the front end of the main body 413a in a cylindrical shape and narrows inward (toward the center) so that the front end side fits along the inner surface of the button lens 411.

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange 413b. The four guide bosses 413c are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners of the main body 413a in the circumferential direction. These four guide bosses 413c are each slidably inserted into the retaining holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction, with two on the upper side and one on the lower side, in the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e are provided three on each side, and correspond to the second button decorative part 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the base opening 413e in the button base 413, the main body 413a and a part of the inner extension 413f are recessed inward from the outer periphery. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extension 413f, which tapers inward, is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of an approximately spherical surface) and is formed transparent, so that the display screen of the door frame side performance display device 460 arranged on the rear side can be seen from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and is biased forward by the operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431. The operation button 410 is restricted from moving further forward by the front side of the outer periphery abutting against the frame unit 415 due to the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and moves backward until the rear end abuts against the front surface of the base unit 430 by pressing against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. When the pressure detection sensor 440 detects the detection piece 413d, it means that the operation button 410 has been operated.

In addition, when the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the first button decoration 411a is formed around the entire circumference of the operation button 410, extending from the inner edge of the button frame 412 of the transparent button lens 411 toward the center, making it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

The front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 of the operation button 410 is closed by the button lens 411 and button frame 412, and the button frame 412 attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 makes the transparent portion through which the rear can be seen narrow inward from the outer periphery relative to the outer diameter of the operation button 410. The presence of this button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner periphery of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body 413a) protrudes rearward from the front surface of the decorative board unit 420 through the inner periphery of the decorative board unit 420. This prevents light irradiated forward from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420 from leaking from the outside to the inside of the button base 413, and prevents light irradiated forward from the LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, operation button right inner decorative board 434, operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and operation button lower inner decorative board 436 of the base unit 430 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the LEDs mounted on the first LED 422a, 423a and second LED 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, and the operation button left interior decorative board 433, operation button right interior decorative board 434, operation button above interior decorative board 435, and operation button below interior decorative board 436 of the base unit 430 can prevent areas other than those intended for illumination decoration from being illuminated, allowing for attractive illumination decoration.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 39 to 41. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed into a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the performance operation unit attachment part 326a.

The frame unit 415 comprises a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a and attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached to the frame body 416 from the rear side on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 from the front side above the central opening 416a.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates from front to back, a plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b that penetrate from front to back on both the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a and extend in an arc along the periphery of the central opening 416a and are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and a cutout portion 416c that is cut out to a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. The central opening 416a is formed to be approximately the same size as the diameter of the outer periphery side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. This allows the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 to abut against the outer periphery rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a, three on each side, and are closed from the rear by frame side lenses 417. The cutouts 416c also penetrate in the front-to-rear direction, and a frame top lens 418 is fitted into them from the front.

The frame body 416 also has a generally cylindrical inner tube portion 416d that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the periphery of the central opening 416a. The inner tube portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and is cut out at a portion corresponding to the cutout portion 416c. When the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner tube portion 416d is located between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, and separates the first LEDs 422a, 423a from the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Furthermore, the frame body 416 has a pair of mounting parts 416e that extend outward from the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery and are attached to the performance operation unit mounting part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. The frame body 416 (performance operation unit 400) is attached to the performance operation unit mounting part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of mounting parts 416e and the cutout part 416c.

The frame body 416 has a plated layer with a metallic luster formed on almost the entire surface, except for a region of the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite the central opening 416a from the notch 416c (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached).

The frame side lens 417 closes the peripheral openings 416b, three of which are formed on each side of the frame body 416 from the rear. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed as a smooth surface without any irregularities, and the rear side has multiple irregularities formed along the periphery of the central opening 416a (see Figures 39 and 46). These multiple irregularities refract light, making it impossible to see behind the frame side lens 417.

The frame top lens 418 has a generally rectangular outer shape so that it fits into the cutout 416c of the frame body 416 from the front. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. In addition, the rear side of the frame top lens 418 has multiple rows of irregularities that extend in a zigzag pattern along the periphery of the central opening 416a in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see Figures 37 and 46). Light is refracted by these multiple irregularities, making it impossible to see the rear side of the frame top lens 418.

When the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 are positioned in front of the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, and the frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decorative board 437 of the base unit 430, and each can be illuminated and decorated by the second LEDs 422b, 423b etc. mounted thereon.

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 39 to 43. Fig. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the performance operation unit when viewed from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415, and can impart vibration to the performance operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 comprises a C-shaped board base 421 that is open on the upper side, a left outer decorative board for operation buttons 422 and a right outer decorative board for operation buttons 423 that are respectively attached to the front of both the left and right sides of the board base 421, a vibration motor 424 that is attached to the lower front of the board base 421, and a motor cover 425 that is attached to the front of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

The inner circumference of the substrate base 421 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer circumference is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 and smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The left operation button outer decorative board 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421. The left operation button outer decorative board 422 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outward from the plurality of first LEDs 422a. The right operation button outer decorative board 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421. The right operation button outer decorative board 423 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outward from the plurality of first LEDs 423a. Both the front and rear surfaces of the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotation shaft, and vibrations can be generated by rotating this weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. In addition, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a, 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In addition, when assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the inner cylindrical part 416d of the frame unit 415 is located between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 can illuminate and decorate only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 with light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, and can illuminate and decorate only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light from the second LEDs 422b, 423b.

In addition, the decorative board unit 420 can generate vibrations by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, causing the entire performance operation unit 400 to vibrate.

[3-4f. Effects of the Production Operation Unit]
The effect of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 44 to 46. Fig. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in Fig. 37. Fig. 45(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the operation button that is cut out and hidden by the first button decoration part and button frame of the operation button in the view of the performance operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and Fig. 45(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the operation button that is hidden by the first button decoration part and button frame of the operation button in the cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit. Fig. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit in a perspective view seen from the front, and Fig. 46(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends.

The presentation operation unit 400 of this embodiment can show the player presentation images according to the game state that changes as the game ball is shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and can have the player operate the operation button 410 to participate in the presented presentation, allowing the player to enjoy it.

The performance operation unit 400 is formed so that its overall height is approximately the same as the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the performance operation unit 400 is formed so that its overall width is slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. When viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 is positioned in the center in the left-right direction below the play area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110).

The performance operation unit 400 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 at the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. When the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which forms the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In other words, only the upper portion of the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, and it is attached in a suspended state.

The performance operation unit 400 is attached so that the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the performance operation unit attachment part 326a. As a result, the performance operation unit 400 is inclined so that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410, which bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of an approximately spherical surface), moves upward as it moves forward at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. As a result, when a player sits in front of this pachinko machine 1 to play a game using this pachinko machine 1, the player's head is located in front of the center of the play area 5a on the game board 5 located above the plate unit 320 (performance operation unit 400), so that the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the play area 5a to the performance operation unit 400 (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 will be seen as close as possible to its front view (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL), allowing the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 inside the operation button 410 to be clearly visible.

In the performance operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four retaining holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are biased forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not being pressed), the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to abut against a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415.

In the normal state of the performance operation unit 400, the center side (the side of the central axis CL) from near the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of an approximately spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the part that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37, etc.).

In this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is approximately 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) protrudes approximately 4 cm forward from the front surface of the frame unit 415 in the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410.

Under normal conditions, when a player presses the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts against the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement of the operation button 410 is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 stops. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411, which bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of an approximately spherical surface).

This operation button 410 has a much larger outer diameter than the operation buttons for effects provided on conventional pachinko machines, so there is a high possibility that the peripheral area away from the center of the button lens 411 will be pressed. In more detail, the operation buttons for effects on conventional pachinko machines are attached so that their central axes extend approximately parallel to the vertical, whereas the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment is attached so that its central axis CL is inclined relative to the vertical. Therefore, when a player presses the operation button 410 from above as in conventional pachinko machines, the player will press a part of the operation button 410 away from the central axis CL, as shown by the hollow arrow in FIG. 44.

However, in conventional pachinko machines, the operation buttons for effects are formed on a flat surface that is pressed by the player. If the operation button is made larger while keeping the part that is pressed on a flat surface, when a part of the operation button that is not in the center is pressed, the surface that is pressed will tilt so that the part that is pressed will move back first, and the operation button will not be able to move back in a straight line, which could make it impossible to press the operation button.

In contrast, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment has a curved surface (a part of a roughly spherical surface) that bulges forward at the part (button lens 411) that the player presses, so when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 can move straight backward. Therefore, no matter where on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can move back smoothly without tilting, so the pressing operation can be detected reliably, and the effect of pressing the operation button 410 can be fully enjoyed.

In addition, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower front part of the board base 421 of the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part of the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 so that the performance operation unit 400 can be suspended. Therefore, when the vibration motor 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, the vibration occurs at the part farthest from the part where it is attached, so the entire performance operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly) and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the performance operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is located directly below a position where it is relatively easy for the player to press (the position of the white arrow in Figure 44), a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player who is pressing the operation button 410, surprising the player and allowing him to enjoy the performance.

Furthermore, the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg 442a of the relay board cover 442 that forms the lower surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, so that when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or hit, the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., can bend downward to absorb the impact until the lower surface of the leg 442a abuts against the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. In addition, after the lower surface of the leg 442a abuts against the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the performance operation unit 400 is restricted, and excessive force is prevented from acting on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and damage to the performance operation unit 400, etc. can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a lot of force when a performance is presented to the player in which the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 is pressed, the operation button 410 or the performance operation unit 400 will not be damaged, and interruption of the game due to damage can be avoided, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be prevented, and by making it less likely to be damaged, an increase in the burden on the game hall can be prevented.

As mentioned above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses is formed into a curved surface (the shape of a part of a roughly spherical surface) that protrudes forward, making it stronger and more rigid than if it were flat. Even if it is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed throughout the entire button lens 411, making it less likely to break.

As shown in FIG. 46, the button lens 411, frame side lens 417, frame top lens 418, and operation button interior decorative member 432 of the performance operation unit 400 are made of transparent materials, so that the uneven decorations formed on the back sides of the first button decoration part 411a, second button decoration part 411b, first button interior decorative part 432f, and second button interior decorative part 432g can be seen from the front side (player side). In addition, in the areas where the uneven decorations are formed, the plate thickness changes and light refracts in a complex manner, making it difficult to see the rear side through the areas where the uneven decorations are formed.

The performance operation unit 400 is provided with a first button decoration part 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center, and the uneven decoration of this first button decoration part 411a makes it difficult to see behind at the outer edge of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the part where the first button decoration part 411a is formed (behind the direction of the central axis CL), there is a gap between the inner peripheral surface of the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall part 432a of the operation button inner decoration member 432, but the first button decoration part 411a located in front of the gap makes it difficult to see the gap on the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player side). This prevents the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating even if the operation button 410 is provided with an internal decorative member 432 that is fixed in position, preventing players from feeling uncomfortable when they see the operation button 410, and also allows the internal decorative member 432 to be positioned without problems inside the transparent operation button 410, improving the appearance of the operation button 410.

In more detail, the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 prevent the unit base 431 and the decorative board unit 420, which are located outside the outer periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 and on the rear side (back side) from being seen by the player through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross-hatched area surrounded by a dashed line is made invisible to the player. In this way, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, and the button frame 412, the outside and back side of the operation button interior decorative member 432 can be hidden and made difficult to see, improving the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the entire performance operation unit 400.

In addition, in the performance operation unit 400, the first button decoration 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, while the second button interior decoration 432g formed on the front plate 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 located on the inside rear of the operation button 410 extends in a modified octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL and is arranged in a row in concentric circles, so that, as shown in FIG. 46, the uneven lines of the first button decoration 411a and the uneven lines of the second button interior decoration 432g intersect, allowing the player to see a geometric decoration.

In addition, because the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g of the performance operation unit 400 are separated in the front-to-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis line CL extends), the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g can present the player with a geometric pattern that has a deep, three-dimensional feel, allowing the player to enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 400, the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g are separated in the front-to-rear direction, so that when the player's eye position moves, the overlapping degree between the uneven lines of the first button decoration 411a and the uneven lines of the second button inner decoration 432g changes, allowing the player to see a moving decoration and entertaining the player.

In this way, the performance operation unit 400 can present a dynamic, three-dimensional decoration to the player through the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, which strongly attracts the player's attention and makes the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In addition, the operation unit 400 has a left operation button interior decorative board 433, a right operation button interior decorative board 434, an upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and a lower operation button interior decorative board 436 arranged behind the operation button interior decorative member 432 within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and by illuminating multiple LEDs mounted on the front of these, the operation button interior decorative member 432 within the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated. In other words, the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated by the left operation button interior decorative board 433, the right operation button interior decorative board 434, the upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and the lower operation button interior decorative board 436. The LEDs mounted on the front of the left operation button interior decorative board 433, the right operation button interior decorative board 434, the upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and the lower operation button interior decorative board 436 are positioned inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, as shown in Figure 38, so that the light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a, and only the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated well.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 has a first LED 422a on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and a first LED 423a on the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the decorative board unit 420 arranged behind the second button decorative part 411b facing through the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and by illuminating these first LEDs 422a, 423a, the six second button decorative parts 411b of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a on the left outer decorative board 422 of the operation button and the first LED 423a on the right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button are positioned between the cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the cylindrical inner tube 416d in the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415, so that light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body 413a or to the outside of the inner tube 416d, and only the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated well.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 400, the second LED 422b of the left outer decorative board 422 of the operation button and the second LED 423b of the right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button are arranged behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by illuminating these second LEDs 422b, 423b. The second LED 422b of the left outer decorative board 422 of the operation button and the second LED 423b of the right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button are located between the cylindrical inner tube portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer circumference of the frame body 416, and the light from the second LEDs 422b, 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner tube portion 416d or to the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated well.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 has a frame top lens decorative board 437 in the base unit 430 disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated and decorated by illuminating a number of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative board 437. A flat light-shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward from the lower side of the portion where the frame top lens decorative board 437 of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430 is attached, up to the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418, so that light from the LEDs of the frame top lens decorative board 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or frame side lens 417, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated well.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 47 to 50. Figure 47(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the rear. Figure 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Figure 50 is a cross-sectional view cut along line L-L in Figure 47(a). The door frame left side unit 530 is attached to the left of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the front left side so as to cover the front sides of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160) on the upper side of the plate unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 comprises a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front; a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 attached to the front of the left unit base 531; a translucent left unit decorative lens member (not shown) disposed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at its front end; and a cylindrical frame-shaped member attached to the upper front of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member. a left unit upper decorative base 534 that extends vertically along with the left unit upper decorative base 534; a left unit lower decorative base 535 that is attached to the lower front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534; a transparent left unit decorative cover 536 that is attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 from the front sides of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member; and a plurality of decorative members 537 that are attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has multiple openings 531a penetrating the front from front to back. As shown in the figure, the multiple openings 531a include circular holes and rectangular holes extending vertically. The left unit base 531 is attached to the left front side of the door frame base 110 so that the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) face forward from the multiple openings 531a. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that each LED 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 is located approximately in the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. This left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque material.

The left unit base 531 also has a left reflective standing wall 538 (see Figs. 5 and 23) that stands toward the front from the glass plate 192 that is arranged to close the through hole 111. The left reflective standing wall 538 has a flat inner surface that faces the through hole 111 and is provided as a reflective surface that can reflect light. The reflective surface can be provided by forming the inner surface of the left reflective standing wall 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective sticker to the inner surface. As will be described later, the left reflective standing wall 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side) of the above-mentioned reflective standing wall 33.

The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is made of a transparent member and is divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a that is circular when viewed from the front and corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a rectangular lens portion 532b that is rectangular when viewed from the front and corresponds to the rectangular opening 531a. The door frame left side unit 530 is formed so that the LEDs 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the centers of the circular lens portion 532a and the rectangular lens portion 532b when assembled to the door frame 3.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed into a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. This circular lens portion 532a allows the light from the LEDs 161a, 162a arranged at the rear to be irradiated forward as a point. The light irradiated forward from this circular lens portion 532a allows the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member to be illuminated and decorated.

The rectangular lens section 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 comprises a central diffusion reflection section 532c that is recessed backward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, a front diffusion lens section 532d that is formed outside the central diffusion reflection section 532c on the front surface, an input lens section 532e that bulges backward in a curved shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffusion reflection section 532c), and a front reflection section 532f that is outside the input lens section 532e on the rear surface and is generally inclined so as to move forward as it moves away from the input lens section 532e.

The front diffuse lens section 532d of the rectangular lens section 532b is formed by a number of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the central diffuse reflection section 532c. More specifically, when the front diffuse lens section 532d is cut in the radial direction, the cross-sectional shape is such that the grooves are recessed in an arc shape toward the rear, and the peaks between the grooves are bulged in an arc shape toward the front, forming a smooth wavy front surface. The front diffuse lens section 532d is also formed such that the grooves and peaks are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radial lines dividing it in the circumferential direction as the boundary.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 532e. These grooves are V-shaped from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the front reflecting portion 532f when cut along the radial direction is a sawtooth shape, with the mountain parts between the grooves being triangular and pointed backward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the grooves and mountain parts move forward as they move away from the center. The front reflecting portion 532f is also formed so that the groove parts and mountain parts are alternately located in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending lines dividing the front reflecting portion 532f ...

When this rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a on the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately behind the input lens portion 532e.

In the rectangular lens section 532b, the light irradiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens section 532e into the rectangular lens section 532b. Since the input lens section 532e bulges backward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), it can refract the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a so that it travels parallel to the front, and guide almost all of the input light to the cone-shaped central diffuse reflection section 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection section 532c is reflected by the inclined cone surface of the central diffuse reflection section 532c so as to be diffused in a direction perpendicular to the axis extending forward and backward (a direction parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160), and travels from the center to the outside along the front surface of the rectangular lens section 532b. Furthermore, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflector 532c travels from the center to the outside (away from the center line of the central diffuse reflector 532c) throughout the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center to the outside in the rectangular lens portion 532b approximately parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 reaches the saw-shaped forward reflecting portion 532f, it is reflected forward by the surface of the forward reflecting portion 532f. At this time, the forward reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, so that the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-rear direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center (see FIG. 50). As a result, the light reflected outward over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-rear direction at the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c can be sequentially reflected forward by the forward reflecting portion 532f as it moves from the center to the outside.

The light reflected forward by the front reflector 532f passes through the front diffuser lens section 532d and is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens section 532b. At this time, since the front diffuser lens section 532d has a wavy cross section, it can diffuse the light reflected forward by the front reflector 532f in various directions, and can irradiate the light forward (to the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) approximately uniformly from the front surface of the rectangular lens section 532b.

In the front diffusion lens section 532d and the front reflection section 532f of this rectangular lens section 532b, the multiple concentric grooves are divided by multiple lines extending radially, and the multiple concentric arc grooves are shifted radially at the dividing lines so that the concentric arc grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. This makes it possible to prevent the light irradiated forward from the front surface of the rectangular lens section 532b from becoming light with a concentric striped pattern of light and shade, and to irradiate light with a more uniform shade forward. This allows the multifaceted decorative section in front of the rectangular lens section 532b in the left unit decorative lens member to be illuminated and decorated in an approximately uniform manner.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed to fit the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member has a circular decorative portion formed in a portion located in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532, and a polyhedral decorative portion formed in a portion located in front of the angular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape with a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion that is recessed in the front and extends short in the front and rear directions. The polyhedral decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped that extends vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons consisting of a plurality of triangles are arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. The circular decorative portion and the polyhedral decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the polyhedral decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be seen from the front (player's side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member is illuminated by light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532, and the multifaceted decorative portion is illuminated by light irradiated forward from the angular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532.

The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a rectangular tube that extends from front to back. The part that forms the underside of the outer periphery of the left unit upper decorative base 534 is inclined so that it protrudes downward as it moves from the front end to the rear end, and the lower part of this part is perforated from front to rear. This left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed from an opaque material.

The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, which is open upward. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined from approximately the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it moves upward. This left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed from an opaque material.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the vertical middle part is concave backwards, and is composed of an L-shaped part whose lower part is bent backwards to fit along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534, an L-shaped part whose upper part is bent backwards to fit along the front end of the left unit lower decorative base 535, and a straight part connecting the lower end of the upper L-shaped part and the upper end of the lower L-shaped part.

The left unit decorative cover 536 is attached at both the top and bottom ends to the front of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front of the left unit lower decorative base 535. This left unit decorative cover 536 is made of a transparent material, so that the left unit decorative lens member located at the rear can be seen from the front.

The decorative members 537 extend vertically and are attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative members 537 are made of an opaque material.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 51 to 55. Figure 51(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. Figure 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and Figure 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. Figure 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line M-M in Figure 51(a). Figure 55(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line N-N in Figure 51(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line O-O in Figure 51(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

The door frame right side unit 550 is equipped with a box-shaped right unit base 551 that extends vertically and is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front, a door frame right side decorative board 552 that is attached to the front of the right unit base 551, a transparent flat right unit left diffusion lens member 553 that is attached to the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552, to the left of the center when viewed from the front, on the front of the right unit base 551, and extends in the vertical and front-to-rear directions, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 that is attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and is decorated, and a transparent flat right unit left cover 555 that is attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the right unit left decorative member 554.

The door frame right side unit 550 also includes a transparent flat right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the right side of the center in front view on the front surface of the right unit base 551 and to the right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 in a front view, extending in the up-down and front-to-back directions, a sheet-like right unit right decorative member 557 that is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated, and a transparent flat right unit right cover 558 that is attached to the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is equipped with a right unit left light blocking member 559, which is a shallow box-like opaque member that is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and extends in the vertical and front-to-rear directions with the front and right sides open, and a right unit right light blocking member 560, which is a flat, opaque member that is attached to the left of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light blocking member 559.

The door frame right side unit 550 is provided with a right unit decorative lens member 561 having translucency and a polyhedral decoration at the front end, which is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, a right unit decorative base 562 in the form of a frame that penetrates from front to back and is attached to the front of the right unit base 551 so as to cover both the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the right unit cover 563. Although not shown in the figure, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right unit base 551 so as to penetrate vertically, and is provided with a connection cable for connecting the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame top unit relay board 589 of the door frame top unit 570.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, extending vertically and horizontally, and a short rectangular cylindrical shape extending front to back, with the center in the front to back direction closed off in a box shape. This right unit base 551 is made of an opaque material.

The right unit base 551 also has a right reflective wall portion 568 (see Figs. 6 and 24) that stands toward the front side from the glass plate 192 that is arranged to close the through hole 111. In this right reflective wall portion 568, the inner surface that is flat and faces the through hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface that can reflect light. In addition, like the inner surface of the left reflective wall portion 538, this reflective surface can be provided by forming the inner surface of the right reflective wall portion 568 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective sticker to the inner surface. As will be described later, this right reflective wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a part (right side portion) of the above-mentioned reflective wall portion 33.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is equipped with a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a plurality of middle LEDs 552c mounted in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is for illuminating and decorating the right unit left decorative member 554 through the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552b is for illuminating and decorating the right unit right decorative member 557 through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for illuminating and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 is formed in white on both the front and back. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although not shown in the figure, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is connected to the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B.

The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 comprises a flat main body 553a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall 553b protruding in a short, flat shape from the rear edge of the main body 553a to the right as viewed from the front, a rectangular cutout 553c cut from the right end side of the rear wall 553b to the left as viewed from the front and formed in multiple places at regular intervals in the vertical direction, a shallow storage recess 553d on the left side of the main body 553a as viewed from the front so that the right unit left decorative member 554 can be stored in it, input lens portions 553e protruding rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 553a and provided in multiple vertical directions, and side reflecting portions 553f arranged in multiple vertical directions on the right side of the main body 553a as viewed from the front so that each input lens portion 553e is centered in the vertical direction.

The main body 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a shape in side view that is rectangular extending vertically, with the upper corner on the front end side cut out at an angle in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is inclined so that it moves upward as it moves forward. Also, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body 553a as a whole is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that it moves to the right as viewed from the front as it moves forward from the rear end side. When assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the main body 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the right end of the rear wall 553b extends to approximately the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of this rear wall 553b abuts against the left end of the rear wall 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

The multiple cutouts 553c are formed at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward from the multiple cutouts 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be effectively illuminated and decorated by the multiple middle LEDs 552c.

The storage recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of its outer periphery roughly matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. This allows the right unit left decorative member 554 to be stored therein.

The input lens parts 553e protrude rearward at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body part 553a. Specifically, they are formed at approximately the vertical center of each of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 when it is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens part 553e has a rectangular part with a rectangular shape extending vertically protruding rearward, and a part that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular part so as to curve spherically. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, these input lens parts 553e are each located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552. This allows the light from the left LED 552a to be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body part 553a.

Six (multiple) side reflectors 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflector 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arc grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 553e extends perpendicularly to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. When cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens portion 553e, the side reflector 553f has a cross-sectional shape formed in a pointed triangle shape with the mountain portion between the grooves facing toward the center, and the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflector 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc grooves as the boundary.

In this right unit left diffusion lens member 553, light irradiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is incident from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Since the rear end of this input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted so that it spreads out due to the curved surface, and within the main body portion 553a, the light is diffused radially toward the front with each input lens portion 553e as the center.

The main body 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the main body 553a moves to the right as seen from the front as it moves forward, so that the light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens section 553e hits the flat left surface inside the main body 553a. However, due to the angle of incidence with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted to the outside from the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected by the inner surface of the left surface toward the side reflector 553f.

The light that is incident forward from the input lens section 553e into the main body section 553a hits the sawtooth side reflecting section 553f and is reflected to the left when viewed from the front, and is irradiated outward from the left surface of the main body section 553a. Note that light is also irradiated outward (to the right when viewed from the front) from the right surface (side reflecting section 553f) of the main body section 553a, but since the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body section 553a is a white material, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 passes through the main body section 553a and is irradiated to the left. Therefore, the light reflected to the left by the side reflector 553f inside the main body 553a and the light irradiated to the right from the side reflector 553f, reflected to the left by the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559, and passed through the main body 553a are irradiated to the left from the left surface of the main body 553a, allowing the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a to be illuminated and decorated with good brightness.

In addition, in the side reflector 553f, the multiple concentric grooves are divided by multiple radially extending lines, and the multiple concentric arc grooves are shifted radially at the dividing lines to alternately arrange the concentric arc grooves in the circumferential direction, so that the light irradiated outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body 553a does not become light with a concentric striped pattern of light and shade, and light with a more uniform shade can be irradiated to the left. This allows the right unit left decorative member 554 housed in the housing recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a to be illuminated and decorated in a substantially uniform manner.

The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is made of a transparent material, so that from the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front (the side where the storage recess 553d is formed), the pattern consisting of multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines of the side reflector 553f formed on the opposite side can be seen. Therefore, if a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflector 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be seen through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right unit left decorative member 554 can be decorated with the side reflector 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape and is decorated with translucent decorations such as the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that matches the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed approximately symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. In detail, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a flat body portion 556a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 556b protruding in a short flat shape from the rear edge of the body portion 556a to the left as viewed from the front, a rectangular cutout portion 556c cut from the left end side of the rear wall portion 556b as viewed from the front to the right and formed in a plurality of predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, a storage recess 556d that is shallowly recessed on the right side of the body portion 556a as viewed from the front so that the right unit right decorative member 557 can be stored, input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the body portion 556a and are provided in the vertical direction, and side reflecting portions 556f that are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is centered in the vertical direction on the left side of the body portion 556a as viewed from the front.

The body 556a of the right diffusion lens member 556 of the right unit has a shape in side view that is rectangular extending vertically, with the upper corners on the front end side cut out at an angle in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is inclined so that it moves upward as it moves forward, and is formed in approximately the same shape as the body 553a of the left diffusion lens member 553 of the right unit. Also, as shown in FIG. 55, the body 556a as a whole is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that it moves leftward as viewed from the front as it moves forward from the rear end side. The front end of the body 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the left end of the rear wall 556b extends to approximately the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left end of this rear wall 556b abuts against the right end of the rear wall 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553.

The multiple cutouts 556c are formed at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and some correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These multiple cutouts 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the multiple cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the cutouts 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 form a square opening that penetrates from front to back, and the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward from this opening, allowing the right unit decorative lens member 561 to be well illuminated and decorated by the multiple middle LEDs 552c.

The storage recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of its outer periphery roughly matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. This allows the right unit right decorative member 557 to be stored therein.

The input lens parts 556e protrude rearward at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body part 556a. Specifically, they are formed at approximately the vertical center of each of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 when it is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens part 556e has a rectangular parallelepiped part with a rectangular shape extending vertically protruding rearward, and a part that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped part so as to curve spherically. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, these input lens parts 556e are each located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552. This allows the light from the right LED 552b to be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body part 556a.

Six (multiple) side reflectors 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflector 556f is formed of multiple concentric arc grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens 556e. In each of these multiple concentric arc grooves, the surface closer to the input lens 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body 556a, and the surface farther from the input lens 556e extends perpendicularly to the surface of the main body 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. When cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens 556e, the side reflector 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed in a pointed triangle shape with the mountain part between the grooves facing the center, and the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflector 556f is formed so that the groove parts and mountain parts are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial lines dividing the multiple concentric arc grooves in the circumferential direction as the boundary.

In this right unit right diffusion lens member 556, light irradiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is incident from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Since the rear end of this input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted so that it spreads out due to the curved surface, and within the main body portion 556a, the light is diffused radially toward the front with each input lens portion 556e as the center.

The main body 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the main body 556a moves to the left as seen from the front as it moves forward, so that the light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens section 556e hits the flat right surface inside the main body 556a. However, due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted to the outside from the left surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected by the inner surface of the right surface toward the side reflector 556f.

The light incident forward from the input lens section 556e into the main body section 556a hits the sawtooth side reflecting section 556f and is reflected to the right when viewed from the front, and is irradiated outward from the right surface of the main body section 556a. Note that light is also irradiated outward (leftward when viewed from the front) from the right surface (side reflecting section 556f) of the main body section 556a, but since the right unit right light shielding member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body section 556a is a white member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 passes through the main body section 556a and is irradiated to the right side. Therefore, the light reflected to the right by the side reflector 556f inside the main body 556a and the light irradiated to the left from the side reflector 556f, reflected to the right by the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560, and passed through the main body 556a are irradiated to the right from the right surface of the main body 556a, allowing the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a to be illuminated with good brightness.

In addition, in the side reflector 556f, the concentric grooves are divided by multiple radially extending lines, and the concentric grooves are shifted radially at the dividing lines so that the concentric grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. This makes it possible to prevent the light irradiated outward (to the right) from the right surface of the main body 556a from becoming a concentric striped light and shade, and to irradiate light of a more uniform shade to the right. This allows the right unit right decorative member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a to be illuminated and decorated in a substantially uniform manner.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is made of a transparent material, so that from the right side of the main body 556a when viewed from the front (the side where the storage recess 556d is formed), the pattern consisting of multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines of the side reflector 556f formed on the opposite side can be seen. Therefore, if a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflector 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be seen through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right unit right decorative member 557 can be decorated with the side reflector 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and is decorated with translucent material, such as the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that matches the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed approximately symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. The decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same or different.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shape in a side view that is substantially the same as the shape in a side view of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape that is open on the front and right sides. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is provided with a flat body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b that protrudes in a short flat shape from the rear edge of the body portion 559a to the right when viewed from the front, a rectangular cutout portion 559c that is cut out from the right end side of the rear wall portion 559b when viewed from the front to the left and is formed in a plurality of predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a plurality of flat reinforcing portions 559d that extend to the right from the right surface of the body portion 559a and extend from the rear wall portion 559b to the front end of the body portion 559a.

The body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in side view that is vertically extending rectangular with the upper corner on the front end side cut out at an angle in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is inclined so that it moves upward as it moves forward, and is formed to have approximately the same external shape as the body parts 553a, 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the left end of the rear wall 559b extends to the right of approximately the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of this rear wall 559b abuts against the left surface of the right unit right light blocking member 560.

The multiple cutouts 559c are formed at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and some correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These multiple cutouts 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the multiple cutouts 553c, 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward from the multiple cutouts 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be well illuminated and decorated by the multiple middle LEDs 552c.

The multiple reinforcing parts 559d are provided in three sets spaced a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction, with each set consisting of a pair of reinforcing parts 559d spaced apart in the vertical direction at approximately the same height as the left-right width. Each set of reinforcing parts 559d is formed in a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. These multiple reinforcing parts 559d increase the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in side view that is rectangular extending vertically with the upper corner on the front end side cut out at an angle in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is slanted so that it moves upward as it moves forward, and is formed in approximately the same shape as the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the right unit right light shielding member 560 closes the right side opening that opens to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559, which is formed in a shallow box shape.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white material. As shown in FIG. 55, when the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the respective main body parts 559a and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged in close proximity to the main body parts 553a, 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. As a result, the main body parts 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are spaced apart in the left-right direction, forming a space that extends up-down and front-back by a predetermined width in the left-right direction. Light emitted forward from the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is irradiated to the rear side of the right unit decorative lens member 561 through the space formed between the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed from an opaque material, preventing the light irradiated forward from the left LED 552a, middle LED 552c, and right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552 from interfering with each other, and the right unit left decorative member 554, right unit right decorative member 557, and right unit decorative lens member 561 can be illuminated and decorated only by the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and middle LED 552c, respectively.

Furthermore, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 have their internal spaces vertically divided into four by three sets of reinforcing parts 559d, so that the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552, which are located at the rear of each divided space, can prevent light interference between the spaces, and the parts located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be illuminated and decorated independently. In other words, the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550 can be divided vertically into multiple (four) areas, and each can be illuminated and decorated independently.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shapes of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 has a circular decorative part 561a that is circular when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative part 561b that extends vertically and has multiple polyhedrons formed thereon. The circular decorative part 561a is formed in a shape with multiple triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical part that is concave on the front and extends short in the front and rear directions. The polyhedral decorative part 561b is formed in a shape in which multiple rows of quadrangular pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front of a rectangular parallelepiped that extends vertically, and multiple rows of polyhedrons made of multiple triangles are arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part.

In more detail, the right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed so that, in the areas located in front of each of the spaces divided into four by the three sets of reinforcing parts 559d in the right unit left shading member 559, in the top three areas, one multifaceted decorative part 561b is arranged on both the top and bottom sides of the circular decorative part 561a located in the vertical center, and in the lowest area, only the multifaceted decorative part 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be seen from the front (player's side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. This right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 located at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in the shape of a cylindrical frame that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front and upper ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so that it can cover both the left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and both the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward beyond the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. This right unit decorative base 562 is formed from an opaque material.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that it can close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562. This right unit cover 563 is formed from a transparent material, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 located on the rear side can be seen from the front side.

The decorative members 564 extend vertically and are attached to the front of the right unit cover 563 at regular intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative members 564 are made of an opaque material. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes forward in a plate shape farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and protrudes slightly forward than the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. The door frame right side unit 550 can independently illuminate and decorate the right unit left decorative member 554 and right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the protruding left and right sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end.

The door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes significantly forward, so when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility in an amusement hall, the door frame right side unit 550 can act as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side. This gives players playing with this pachinko machine 1 the illusion that they are playing in a private room, allowing them to play in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around them.

In addition, because the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes significantly forward, in amusement halls where pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row, even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, it can be seen from the side along the island equipment, making the pachinko machine 1 stand out in amusement halls where many pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are illuminated, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be made known from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a malfunction such as ball jamming or an error occurs in this pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, right unit right decorative member 557, and right unit decorative lens member 561 on both the left and right sides are illuminated and decorated in a unique manner, so that the occurrence of the malfunction can be immediately notified to the game hall staff and they can quickly respond to the malfunction, which can quickly resolve the interruption of the player's play and prevent the player from becoming frustrated and losing interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 56 to 59. Figure 56(a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the rear. Figure 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and Figure 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the rear. Figure 59 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line P-P in Figure 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, and to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 comprises a central base 571 attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, a pair of side bases 572 attached to both the left and right sides of the central base 571 and attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and a box-shaped base 573 extending left and right with the center in the left-right direction protruding forward and open at the rear, penetrating forward and backward at the front position of the pair of upper speakers 573. The unit body 271 has a pair of openings 574a and multiple slits 574b (three on each side) that extend from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center, penetrate in the front-rear direction, and are spaced apart vertically, and is attached to the front of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572; and speaker covers 575 made of punching metal that are disposed in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear of the unit body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a.

Although not shown in the figures, each of the pair of side bases 572 (left side base 572a, right side base 572b) has an internal space that is open only toward the side where the opening window is provided, and in these internal spaces, the outer peripheral external light emitter 34 (left outer peripheral external light emitter 34a, right outer peripheral external light emitter 34b) is provided to emit light from outside the outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and the outer peripheral external light detector 35 (left outer peripheral external light detector 35a, right outer peripheral external light detector 35b) detects light from inside the outer periphery of the opening window outside the outer periphery.

The door frame top unit 570 is made up of a top middle decorative member 576 that is attached to the front of the unit body 271 in the center in the left-right direction and has translucency, a door frame top middle decorative board 577 that is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a plurality of transparent flat light guide members (three on each side) that are attached to the front of the unit body 271, close the plurality of slits 574b, and extend from near the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 across the opening 574a to near the left and right ends of the unit body 271. 578, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that are respectively attached to the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271 and cover the front surfaces of the multiple (three) light guide members 578, and a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 that are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 and extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to near the center end of the opening 574a.

The door frame top unit 570 further includes a door frame top left decorative board 583 and a door frame top right decorative board 584, which are attached to the inside of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 271, respectively, and have LEDs mounted on the portions facing the left and right outer ends of the multiple (three) light-guiding members 578, a pair of board bases 585 attached to the portions through which the multiple (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271 penetrate, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and a door frame top middle right decorative board 587 attached to the front of the pair of board bases 585, respectively, and have multiple LEDs 586a, 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit body 271, and a pair of light-shielding members 588 attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 in front of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587.

The door frame top unit 570 also includes a door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front of the central base 571 within the unit body 271, a relay board cover 590 attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the front of the door frame top unit relay board 589, an upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and a lower cover 592 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed into a rectangular shape that extends left and right when viewed from the front. The central base 571 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear, and has multiple projections and recesses on the front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to both the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached at an angle so that the front surface of each of the pair of upper speakers 573 moves backwards on the side closer to the left-right center of the door frame top unit 570 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers that can output sound over a wide frequency band.

The unit body 271 is formed in a shape seen from the front, such that the lower portions near both the left and right ends of a rectangle extending left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit body 271 is formed in a shape seen from the front, such that a rectangle extending left and right is cut out with a trapezoid that narrows upward from the lower edge. The unit body 271 is formed in a shape seen from the front, such that the shape seen from the front combines a rectangle extending left and right, a trapezoid that protrudes forward with a base that is about 1/2 the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the left and right center of the front edge of the rectangle, and a rectangle that protrudes forward a short distance with the front edge of the trapezoid as the long side. Therefore, both sides of the part that protrudes forward at the left and right center on the front surface of the unit body 271 are located behind (recessed) the line connecting the left and right ends of the unit body 271 and the left and right ends of the front end of the part that protrudes forward.

The unit body 271 has openings 574a that penetrate from the front to the rear in areas from both left and right ends of the front surface to positions outside the area protruding forward. In addition, the unit body 271 has a plurality of slits 574b that extend left and right at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front and rear direction in areas that extend diagonally from the area protruding forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from near the front end of the area that extends diagonally forward on the front surface of the unit body 271 to near the opening 574a. The plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center in the left and right direction of the unit body 271, three on each side, spaced apart vertically.

The unit body 271 also has an upper opening 574c cut into a square shape from the rear end to the front in the center of the left-right direction on the top surface, and a lower opening 574d cut into the bottom surface from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 271 is closed by an upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by a lower cover 592.

The unit body 271 also has a top left decorative part 574e and a top right decorative part 574f that extend vertically on both the left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative part 574e is formed at approximately the same position in the front-to-back direction as the front surface of the area where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative part 574f is formed so that its front surface is located further forward than the front surface of the area where the opening 574a is formed. This unit body 271 is formed from an opaque material.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion that protrudes forward from the left-right center on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a shape that, when viewed from the front, combines a roughly square irregular pentagon bent so that the left-right center of the bottom side is located downward, and a roughly right-angled triangle that connects the tips of the sides that extend outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the irregular pentagon to the lower ends of the left and right sides of the irregular pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the irregular pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it moves downward. This top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape overall and is translucent.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is attached to the rear of the top middle decorative member 576 in a tilted state, with its front surface aligned with the front surface of the irregular pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576, and moving rearward as it moves downward. The door frame top middle decorative board 577 has multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface, and by illuminating these LEDs, the top middle decorative member 576 can be illuminated and decorated.

The light guide member 578 is made of a transparent material. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that conforms to the shape of both the left and right outer sides of the front end of the portion protruding forward on the front surface of the unit body 271. If the side closer to both left and right ends of the unit body 271 is the end side, and the side closer to the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is composed of a straight portion 578a that extends straight from the end side to the center side, and an arc portion 578b that extends in an arc shape with a large radius so as to move forward as it moves from the end side of the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the up-down direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the height in the up-down direction in the arc portion 578b. In addition, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the up-down direction is constant in the straight portion 578a, and the height in the up-down direction in the arc portion 578b decreases as it moves toward the center side. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately in front of the opening 574a of the unit body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 271 from the front.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection section 578c consisting of sawtooth projections and recesses formed on the rear surface of the straight section 578a, and a diffuse input section 578d consisting of multiple projections and recesses formed on the rear surface of the arc section 578b.

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the outer ends in the left and right directions face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584, and the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the outer ends in the left and right directions, the light travels toward the center inside the straight portion 578a and is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffusion reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light-guiding member 578, and the portion of each of these in front of the straight portion 578a is illuminated and decorated.

When light from the LEDs 586a, 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is incident on the light guide member 578 through the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. This allows the area located in front of the arc portion 578b on the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 to be illuminated and decorated.

In this way, the light-guiding member 578 guides the light from the LEDs 583a, 586a on the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the LEDs 584a, 587a on the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, allowing the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 located in front to be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guiding members 578 located to the left of the center in the left-right direction on the front of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently accommodate the three light guiding members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 are formed in a shape that imitates the light guiding members 578, and cover the front and both the upper and lower sides of the light guiding members 578. The front of each decorative lens portion 579a has a row of rectangular pyramidal projections protruding forward on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. In other words, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates almost the entire area to the left of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. This top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a, 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 via the three light-guiding members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guiding members 578 located to the right of the center in the left-right direction on the front of the unit body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens sections 580a that accommodate the three light guiding members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens section 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that imitates the light guiding member 578, and covers the front and both the upper and lower sides of the light guiding member 578. The front of each decorative lens section 580a has a row of rectangular pyramidal projections protruding forward on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative part 574f of the unit body 271. In other words, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates almost the entire area to the right of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570. This top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a, 587a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 via the three light-guiding members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front of the unit body 271, between the left opening 574a on the front side of the unit body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576, from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579. When assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the gap between the three decorative lens parts 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579, with the center of the front surface protruding further forward than the front surface of the top left decorative lens member 579. This top middle left decorative member 581 is formed from an opaque material.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580, between the right opening 574a on the front side of the unit body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens parts 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side protrudes forward further than the front side of the top right decorative lens member 580. This top middle right decorative member 582 is made of an opaque material.

The door frame top left decorative board 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative part 574e) inside the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. The door frame top left decorative board 583 has the LED 583a mounted in a position facing the left end face of the three light-guiding members 578 attached to the front side to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see Figure 59). Each of the three LEDs 583a can be made to emit light independently. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 can illuminate and decorate the part of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit body 271 through the straight parts 578a of the three light-guiding members 578.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative part 574f) inside the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. The door frame top right decorative board 584 has the LED 584a mounted in a position facing the right end face of the three light-guiding members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see Figure 59). Each of the three LEDs 584a can be made to emit light independently. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 can illuminate and decorate the part of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit body 271 through the straight parts 578a of the three light-guiding members 578.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion in the unit body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed approximately symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 has a side wall that is approximately square in side view with sides extending up and down and front and rear, a rear wall that is rectangular in front view extending from the rear side of the side wall at a right angle outward in the left and right direction, an upper wall that is approximately right-angled triangular in shape connecting the upper sides of the side wall and the rear wall with a line connecting the front end of the upper side of the side wall to the middle of the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and a lower wall that is approximately right-angled triangular in shape connecting the lower sides of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side to the upper wall, and is formed in a triangular prism-like box shape with the upper and lower hypotenuses open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. This board base 585 is fitted with a door frame top center left decorative board 586 or a door frame top center right decorative board 587 so that the open areas are closed.

The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 on the left side of the left-right center, so as to close the box-shaped open area from the front. By attaching the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 to the front of the board base 585, the front surface is inclined relative to the plane extending left and right so that it moves forward as it approaches the left-right center of the unit body 271. As a result, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is approximately parallel to the surface of the area where the three slits 574b are formed to the left of the left-right center of the unit body 271.

The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 has multiple LEDs 586a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the multiple LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b to the left of the center of the unit body 271. By illuminating the multiple LEDs 586a, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 can illuminate and decorate the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 close to the top middle decorative member 576 through the arc portion 578b of the light-guiding member 578.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 on the right side of the left-right center, so as to close the box-shaped open area from the front. By attaching the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 to the front of the board base 585, the front surface is inclined relative to the plane extending left and right so that it moves forward as it approaches the left-right center of the unit body 271. As a result, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface of the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is approximately parallel to the surface of the area where the three slits 574b are formed to the right of the left-right center of the unit body 271.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 has multiple LEDs 587a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the multiple LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b to the right of the center of the unit body 271. By illuminating the multiple LEDs 587a, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 can illuminate and decorate the area of the top right decorative lens member 580 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light-guiding member 578.

The pair of light-shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit body 271. The pair of light-shielding members 588 are formed approximately symmetrically with each other by opaque materials. The light-shielding members 588 separate the upper and lower portions of the multiple LEDs 586a, 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, which are arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit body 271. This light-shielding member 588 allows light to be guided forward by the light-guiding members 578 only by the LEDs 586a, 587a located immediately behind each light-guiding member 578, and the decorative lens parts 579a, 580a of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well illuminated and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 relays the connections between the pair of upper speakers 573, the door frame top middle decorative board 577, the door frame top left decorative board 583, the door frame top right decorative board 584, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of this door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered by a relay board cover 590.

This door frame top unit 570 is equipped with a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward from the center in the left-right direction, and the front sides of the top middle decorative member 576 on both the left and right sides are curved as if carved out backwards, giving the player the illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes significantly forward, strongly drawing the player's attention to this pachinko machine 1.

The door frame top unit 570 also has a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 located in the center, and are formed to extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on both the left and right ends of the unit body 271. This allows the door frame top unit 570 to decorate the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3.

In this case, the door frame top unit 570 is provided with upper speakers 573 whose front faces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal, located behind each of the left and right ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are located, and the speaker covers 575 face forward from between the three decorative lens parts 579a, 580a spaced apart above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, allowing the player to hear the sounds output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in good condition and enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

The door frame top unit 570 can also guide light from the door frame top left decorative board 583, the door frame top right decorative board 584, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 through a plurality of light-guiding members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, allowing the entire front of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 to be illuminated and decorated satisfactorily. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the entire front of the upper part of the door frame 3, including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Function and effect of door frame]
The effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the through hole 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in conventional pachinko machines, and the vertical height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 is reduced. As a result, the front of the game board 5 (play area 5a) attached to the main frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190), and this corresponds to the game board 5 with a wide play area 5a.

The door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the left-right center of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward below the through hole 111, and the front surface (front surface of the dish front lower decorative part 326c) of the lower half (part below the upper dish 321) on both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 is formed in a concave shape that is carved out backwards (a concave curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 are located further back than the straight line connecting the front ends of both the left and right ends of the dish unit 320 and the front ends of both the left and right ends of the performance operation unit 400). As a result, the performance operation unit 400 attached to the front surface at the left and right center of the dish unit 320 appears to protrude forward, so that the performance operation unit 400 can be made to stand out and be emphasized to the player, and the performance operation unit 400 can be strongly drawn attention to it.

The door frame 3 is attached with the performance operation unit 400, which is located on the front side of the tray unit 320 below the through hole 111, tilted so that the large, semi-spherical, transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Therefore, when a player sits in front of this pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face). When the player lowers his or her eyes to look at the performance operation unit 400, the operation button 410 appears almost directly ahead, allowing the large, round operation button 410 to be strongly visible, heightening anticipation for the performance using the operation button 410. At the same time, the performance image displayed on the door frame side performance display device 460, which is located inside the transparent operation button 410, can be clearly seen, allowing the player to fully enjoy the performance image.

The door frame 3 is also provided with a large operation button 410 that bulges forward in a round shape and has a diameter roughly the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320, so that when operating the operation button 410, any part of the operation button 410 can be touched by moving the hand a short distance, making it relatively easy to "quickly press" the operation button 410. In addition, the large-diameter operation button 410 that bulges forward in a round shape is attached in an inclined state, so not only can it be pressed from above like the operation buttons of conventional pachinko machines, but it can also be easily operated from the left, right, or front, and the easy-to-operate operation button 410 makes the performance using the operation button 410 even more enjoyable.

The door frame 3 also has the effect of attaching the operation unit 400 to the tray unit 320 in a suspended state, and is equipped with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibrations at the bottom of the operation unit 400. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibrations according to the game status, strong vibrations can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the top of the operation button 410, surprising the player and making the effect using the operation button 410 even more enjoyable.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a large operation button 410 (performance operation unit 400) that spans the entire height of the tray unit 320 in the center of the front of the tray unit 320, making the lower tray 322 located below the upper tray 321 less noticeable compared to conventional pachinko machines, making it easier for players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines to recognize that it is clearly different, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and strongly attracts the interest of players.

In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower dish 322 wraps around the rear of the performance operation unit 400 with respect to the lower dish opening 326d that opens to the left of the performance operation unit 400 on the front of the dish unit 320. This allows the volume of the lower dish 322 to be large relative to the size of the lower dish opening 326d, and ensures a sufficient number of game balls can be stored in the lower dish 322. In addition, since the rear of the lower dish 322 wraps around the rear of the performance operation unit 400, when a player puts his/her left hand inside the lower dish 322 or places his/her fingers on the lower dish opening 326d, it is difficult for the player's fingertips to touch the rear wall of the lower dish 322, making it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, suppressing a decrease in interest in the game, and allowing the player to recognize by touch that the volume of the lower dish 322 is larger than the size of the lower dish opening 326d.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c, through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are released into the lower tray 322, and a lower tray ball removal hole 322a, through which game balls on the lower tray 322 are removed into a money box or the like below the tray unit 320, arranged in a straight line from front to back, and are located on the outer right side of the lower tray opening 326d when viewed from the front (to the right of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the performance operation unit 400). In other words, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are located at the rear of the performance operation unit 400, the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a (the outer right side of the lower tray opening 326d) on the tray unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower tray cover 340, etc., so that the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are not visible from the player side, which makes the appearance of the tray unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) neater and improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a located below (directly in front of) the lower tray ball supply port 323c in the lower tray 322. Therefore, when the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is opened, the game balls released from the upper tray 321, etc. to the lower tray 322 are immediately ejected from the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a to the dollar box, etc. below as soon as they enter the lower tray 322. At this time, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a are not visible from the player's side, so the flow of game balls ejected from the upper tray 321, etc. through the lower tray 322 to the dollar box cannot be seen. This gives the player the illusion that the game balls in the upper tray 321 or the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 when the upper tray 321 is full are being discharged directly into the coin box, making it less annoying for the game balls to pass through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game (the operation of shooting the game balls, the presentation images, etc.) and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball removal hole 322a located in a position on the lower tray 322, forward and to the left of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, and the raised wall portion of the lower tray 322 to the right of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is curved diagonally toward the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, so that game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be directly guided to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, or indirectly guided to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a by being reflected off the right wall portion. As a result, when the lower tray ball removal hole 322a remains open, game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without entering the area to the left of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a in the lower tray 322 (lower tray first area A1). This means that the game balls can be discharged below the lower tray 322 (to the cash box) without the player being able to see the game balls circulating inside the lower tray 322, achieving the same effect as described above.

The door frame 3 also has a lower dish opening 326d of the dish unit cover 326, through which the lower dish 322 faces forward, between the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a (performance operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if a player places his/her hand on the lower dish opening 326d or places his/her hand in the lower dish 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. Therefore, the sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 can be output forward well, allowing the player to enjoy the sound from this pachinko machine 1. In addition, when a player places his/her hand in or approaches the lower dish 322, the player can tactilely feel the vibrations caused by the deep bass sound from the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

The door frame 3 is also equipped with a door frame right side unit 550 that protrudes forward in a plate-like shape from the right side of the through hole 111. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility in an amusement hall, the door frame right side unit 550 acts as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, giving players playing with the pachinko machine 1 the illusion that they are playing in a private room, allowing them to play in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around them.

Furthermore, the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-like and protrudes significantly forward, can be decorated with illuminating light, so that even if you are not located in front of this pachinko machine 1 in an amusement hall where pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, the presence of this pachinko machine 1 can be made known from a distance, such as from the side along the island equipment, making it possible to make this pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

The door frame 3 is provided with a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward in the left-right center in the door frame top unit 570 above the through hole 111, and the front left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are formed in a concave shape that carves out the front rearward (a concave curved shape such that the front left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 are positioned further rearward than the straight line connecting the front ends of both the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of both the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576). This makes it appear as if only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 protrudes forward significantly, making the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasized to the player, drawing strong attention to the top middle decorative member 576.

In the conventional pachinko machine, the upper part of the door frame is provided with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and the two upper speakers stand out. In contrast, the door frame 3 of this embodiment is provided with a pair of upper speakers 573 whose front faces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, and also includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that extend from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576, passing in front of the speaker covers 575, to both left and right ends, so that the entire front of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated. This allows the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 to be decorated, making the pair of upper speakers 573 less noticeable at the top of the door frame 3, and allowing players to immediately recognize that the decoration is clearly different from that of conventional pachinko machines, making the pachinko machine 1 more appealing to players, and allowing players to enjoy high-quality stereo sound from the pair of upper speakers 573.

In this way, the door frame 3 of this embodiment has the performance operation unit 400 attached to the tray unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 each protruding significantly forward at the center in the left-right direction below and above the through hole 111, allowing the player to see a unified decoration from top to bottom with a prominent imaginary line passing through the center in the left-right direction, and the sophisticated decoration makes the machine stand out more than other pachinko machines, making it a highly appealing pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the performance operation unit 400, which are arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction, protruding forward. Therefore, when the top middle decorative member 576 and the performance operation unit 400 are illuminated, the player can see an illuminated line extending vertically in the center in the left-right direction on the front of the door frame 3, and the player's gaze can be guided to the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400, which is arranged in the center in the left-right direction.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall structure of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 60 to 66. Fig. 60 is a front view of the game board. Fig. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Fig. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components as seen from the back. Fig. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, Fig. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of Fig. 63 disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Fig. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of Fig. 63 disassembled into its main components as seen from the back. Fig. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the function display unit in an enlarged view from the front when the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which game balls are shot by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. The game board 5 also includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit 1300 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and has a main control board 1310 that controls the game content that is played by shooting game balls into the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

The game board 5 further includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, a peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear of the game panel 1100, a game board side performance display device 1600 that is located in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and can display a predetermined performance image, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a rear unit 3000 attached to the rear of the game panel 1100. The game board side performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear of the rear unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear of the game board side performance display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 is equipped with a transparent, flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110 and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, with the rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface.

The front unit 2000 is equipped with a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive game balls that have been shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 2002 that is always open to receive game balls at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of general winning openings 2001, a gate unit 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of game balls, a second starting opening 2004 that can receive game balls depending on the result of a normal lottery that is drawn when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and a special winning opening 2005 that can receive game balls depending on the result of a first special lottery or a second special lottery that is drawn when a game ball is received at the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

The front unit 2000 also includes a start port unit 2100 that is attached directly above the outlet 1126 in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002 and a large prize port 2005, a lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has multiple general prize ports 2001, an upper side unit 2300 that is attached to the upper left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, and a frame-shaped center device 2500 that is attached approximately in the center of the play area 5a and has a gate section 2003 and a second start port 2004.

The rear unit 3000 is equipped with a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a locking mechanism 3020, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 and allows the game board side performance display device 1600 to be detachably attached.

The rear unit 3000 further includes a rear left middle decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the rear box 3010, from the center to the top on the left side when viewed from the front, a rear lower rear movable performance unit 3100 attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, a rear upper left movable performance unit 3200 attached to the left side when viewed from the front above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, a rear left movable performance unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a when viewed from the front inside the rear box 3010, a rear upper middle movable performance unit 3400 attached from the center to the right edge when viewed from the front above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, and a rear lower front movable performance unit 3500 attached in front of the rear lower rear movable performance unit 3100 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010.

[5-1. Previous constituent members]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 and 65. The front component 1000 has an outer shape of a substantially square in front view, an inner shape of a substantially circular shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the play area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side of the center in the front view to the upper right diagonal direction in a clockwise circumferential direction, passing the upper end of the center in the front view to the upper right diagonal direction, an inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the front view to the upper left diagonal direction in the front view, and an out guide portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the play area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in the front view and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

The component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 when viewed from the front to near the right side of the component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the lower right rail 1004 along the right side of the component 1000 to below the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with the upper part curved inward of the component 1000; and a collision stop section 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and comes into contact with a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001.

The component 1000 is also provided with a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and can rotate only between a closed position in which it extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap with the outer rail 1001, and an open position in which it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the component 1000 has security recesses 1008 recessed rearward from the front end at the outside of the areas extending approximately vertically from the lower ends of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, the underside of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, the security recesses 1008 are inserted into the rear protruding pieces 202 of the security cover 200 on the door frame 3. As a result, the area between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a through the gap between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, the attempt will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also has multiple positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. These positioning protrusions 1009 can be inserted into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 to position and fix the inner rail 1002 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 has a number of mounting bosses 1010 protruding rearward from the rear surface. The mounting bosses 1010 can be inserted into mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100 to determine the position relative to the panel holder 1120 (gaming panel 1100).

The component 1000 also has a notch 1011 cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full ball guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 pass through these notches 1011 and 1127 and face forward.

[5-2. Game Panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 61, 62, 64, 65, etc. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 made of transparent synthetic resin and having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110 and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and has a rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed from a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is set to the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that is sufficient to hold obstacle nails planted on the front and the front unit 2000 attached. In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel board 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the bottom end at the lowest point within the play area 5a. The panel board 1110 also has multiple openings 1112 that penetrate from front to back and are used to attach the front unit 2000.

The panel plate 1110 also has a number of fitting holes 1113, which are round holes that are arranged near the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1114 that is arranged near the outer periphery in the lower left corner and penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction. These fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 are arranged outside the play area 5a and are used to position the panel plate 1110 with respect to the panel holder 1120. The panel plate 1110 also has step-shaped engagement steps 1115 with a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and lower side. These engagement steps 1115 are cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the play area 5a, just like the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114, to engage and fix the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

The panel plate 1110 also has multiple inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed in a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusions 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has an external shape that is roughly rectangular and large enough to encompass the panel board 1110, and is thicker than the panel board 1110 (approximately 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (e.g., thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step 1121 that detachably holds the panel board 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a through hole 1122 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction inside the holding step 1121 and is roughly the same size as the game area 5a.

The holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface that is approximately the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, so that the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step 1121 is approximately flush with the front surface of the panel holder 1120. The holding step 1121 is also sized so that its front inner peripheral surface forms a predetermined amount of clearance with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. This clearance allows the panel plate 1110 to absorb any expansion or contraction that occurs relative to the panel plate 1110 due to temperature changes or changes over time.

The panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step 1121, extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121, and has a number of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into and into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw 1124 and an engagement piece 1125 that engage with the engagement step 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. In detail, the engagement claw 1124 is disposed at the top of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, protrudes forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121, and elastically engages with the engagement step 1115. The engagement claw 1124 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is disposed at the bottom of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. This engagement piece 1125 extends a predetermined distance upward (towards the center) along the front surface of the panel holder 1120, with a gap formed between the front surface of the holding step 1121 and the engagement piece 1125 large enough to insert the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. By engaging the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with these engagement claws 1124 and engagement piece 1125, the panel plate 1110 is removably held relative to the panel holder 1120.

The panel holder 1120 also has an outlet 1126 that penetrates from front to back at the lowest point within the play area 5a. The lower rear surface of the panel holder 1120 is recessed forward to the bottom end with the same width as the outlet 1126.

The panel holder 1120 further includes a notch 1127 that is cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the previous component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 pass through these notches 1011 and 1127 and face forward.

The panel holder 1120 also has a number of mounting holes 1128 that penetrate from front to back at positions corresponding to the multiple mounting bosses 1010 on the previous component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the previous component 1000 into these multiple mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the rear side of the previous component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned between the previous component 1000 and the panel holder 1120.

The panel holder 1120 also has a square insertion hole 1129 that penetrates in the front-rear direction above the cutout 1127. The rear end of the functional display unit 1400 is inserted into this insertion hole 1129.

When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear of the previous component 1000, the outlet 1126 of the panel holder 1120 opens to the rear of the out-guide section 1003 of the previous component 1000. As a result, gaming balls that flow down to the bottom end of the gaming area 5a are guided by the out-guide section 1003 to the rear outlet 1126, and are discharged through the outlet 1126 to the rear of the gaming panel 1100.

[5-2a. Second embodiment of the gaming panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the game panel 1100 described above will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 67 and 68. Fig. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel of a different form from that shown in Fig. 63, together with a front component, a board holder, and a main control unit. Fig. 68 is an exploded perspective view of Fig. 67, seen from the rear. This game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board material such as plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

The gaming panel 1150 has an outer shape formed to be approximately the same as that of the previous component 1000. The gaming panel 1150 has an outlet 1151 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guide portion 1003 of the previous component 1000 at the lower portion approximately in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower side of the rear surface of the outlet 1151 of the gaming panel 1150 is recessed forward to the bottom end with the same width as the outlet 1151.

The game panel 1150 also has a notch 1152 that penetrates horizontally in the front-to-back direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front and is open downward and has the same shape as the notch 1011 of the previous component 1000, and a square insertion hole 1153 that penetrates in the vertical direction above the notch 1152 and through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

The gaming panel 1150 also has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1154 penetrating from the front to the rear, into which the positioning protrusions 1009 can be fitted, at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000. The gaming panel 1150 also has a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating from the front to the rear, at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 of the previous component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the previous component 1000 into these mounting holes 1155, the gaming panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the previous component 1000, and the gaming panel 1150 can be positioned between the previous component 1000.

Furthermore, although not shown, the gaming panel 1150 is provided with multiple openings that run through it from front to back for mounting the front unit 2000, similar to the openings 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the gaming panel 1100 described above.

When the game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the previous component 1000, the outlet 1151 opens to the rear side of the out guide section 1003 of the previous component 1000. As a result, game balls that flow down to the bottom end of the game area 5a are guided by the out guide section 1003 to the rear outlet 1151, and are discharged through the outlet 1151 to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 and 65. The board holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top and front open, and the bottom surface is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the bottom side. This allows the board holder 1200 to receive all game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1126 and game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and to discharge them downward from the discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom surface.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 to 65. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls the game content and the payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with multiple sealing mechanisms, and when one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, that sealing mechanism must be destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320, leaving traces of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be discovered, and the deterrent effect against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board box 1320 and the various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, 3042 are all made of transparent materials so that they can be visually inspected from the outside. As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 are provided with surface mounting areas that are inferior in terms of fraud prevention performance, and therefore it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain the various effects related to the fraud prevention measures described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 64 to Fig. 66. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the play area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 when the play board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see Fig. 66). This function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game status (play situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 comprises a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, a normal pattern indicator 1402 consisting of four LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, a normal hold indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball through the gate unit 2003, a first special pattern indicator 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn when the game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2002, and a second special pattern indicator 1404 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn when the game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2002. It mainly comprises a first special reserved number display 1404 consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number; a second special pattern display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs that displays the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of game balls into the second starting port 2004; a second special reserved number display 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of game balls into the second starting port 2004; and a round display 1407 consisting of three LEDs that displays the number of times (number of rounds) the opening and closing pattern of the big winning port 2005 is repeated when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "jackpot", etc.

This functional display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, designs, etc., by turning on, off, blinking, etc. the LEDs provided as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to Fig. 62. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side performance display device 1600, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the performance presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Although not shown in the figure, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission performance, sound performance, moving performance, etc., and a performance display control unit for controlling performance images.

[5-7. Game board side performance display device]
Next, the game board side performance display device 1600 will be described with reference to Figs. 61 and 62. The game board side performance display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. In detail, the game board side performance display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the approximate center of the rear wall of the rear box 3010. This game board side performance display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. This game board side performance display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and videos.

The game board side performance display device 1600 has two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side as viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side as viewed from the front. With the LCD screen facing forward, the game board side performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear box 3010 by inserting the two left fixed pieces 1601 from the diagonal rear of the rear box 3010 into two fixed grooves 3010c opening on the left inner peripheral surface as viewed from the front in the frame-shaped LCD mounting part 3010b of the rear box 3010 described later, and then moving the right fixed piece 1602 side forward to insert the right fixed piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020 and sliding the locking mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 will be described with reference to Figures 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, with the front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and the rear end penetrating the opening 1112 and protruding rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The front unit 2000 of this embodiment is equipped with a plurality of regular winning openings 2001 that are always open and can receive game balls shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 2002 that is always open and can receive game balls at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of regular winning openings 2001, a gate unit 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, a second starting opening 2004 that can receive the game ball depending on the result of the regular lottery that is drawn when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and a special winning opening 2005 that can receive the game ball depending on the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery that is drawn when the game ball is received at the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

Multiple general winning openings 2001 are located at the bottom of the play area 5a. The first starting opening 2002 is located directly above the outlet 1126 in the left-right center of the play area 5a. The gate section 2003 is located in the upper right corner of the play area 5a when viewed from the front, and approximately directly below the impact stop section 1006. The second starting opening 2004 is located directly below the gate section 2003 and to the right when viewed from the front. The large winning opening 2005 is located between the first starting opening 2002 and the outlet 1126.

The front unit 2000 also includes a start port unit 2100 that is attached directly above the outlet 1126 in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002 and a large prize port 2005, a lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has multiple general prize ports 2001, an upper side unit 2300 that is attached to the upper left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, and a frame-shaped center device 2500 that is attached approximately in the center of the play area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004.

The starting port unit 2100 is located directly above the outlet 1126 near the bottom end of the left-right center in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. This starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that opens upward and is large enough to accept only one game ball at a time, and a large winning port 2005 that extends left and right and is large enough to accept multiple game balls at a time (e.g., 4 to 6 balls), and is formed so that it can be opened and closed depending on the game status.

The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting hole unit 2100 within the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has multiple general winning holes 2001 that can always receive game balls.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front, slightly below the vertical center, at the upper left of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, within the play area 5a. When the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front of the panel board 1110, the left end of the shelf portion is close to the inner rail 1002, and game balls that flow down along the inner rail 1002 can be guided to the right (the left-right center of the play area 5a).

The center role 2500 is located in the game area 5a, above the starting opening unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200, and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center role 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the game board side performance display device 1600 located behind the game panel 1100 and the performance units provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen from the front. The center role 2500 has a gate section 2003 and a second starting opening 2004.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center device 2500, except for the bottom edge, protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, so that a game ball shot into the game area 5a cannot enter the frame.

The center device 2500 is provided with a warp entrance 2520 on the outer periphery on the left side when viewed from the front, which opens to allow game balls in the game area 5a to enter, a warp exit 2522 which opens into the frame and allows game balls that have entered the warp entrance 2520 to be released, and a stage 2530 which releases game balls released from the warp exit 2522 into the game area 5a after rolling them left and right. A start opening unit 2100 is located directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, there is an extremely high probability that the game ball will be received by the first start opening 2002.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5 will be described with reference to Figures 60 to 62. The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In addition, the game board side performance display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the rear unit 3000.

The rear unit 3000 comprises a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a box-shaped performance drive board box 3042 which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending left and right along the bottom edge of the opening 3010a and which houses the performance drive board.

The rear unit 3000 also includes a rear left middle decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the rear box 3010, from the center to the top on the left side when viewed from the front, a rear lower rear movable performance unit 3100 attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, a rear upper left movable performance unit 3200 attached to the left side when viewed from the front above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, a rear left movable performance unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a when viewed from the front inside the rear box 3010, a rear upper middle movable performance unit 3400 attached from the center to the right edge when viewed from the front above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, and a rear lower front movable performance unit 3500 attached in front of the rear lower rear movable performance unit 3100 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010.

The rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 is box-shaped with an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, a flat frame-like LCD mounting section 3010b that protrudes rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed from the inside to the outside of the frame on the left side of the LCD mounting section 3010b when viewed from the rear, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side performance display device 1600 is inserted, and a cutout 3010d cut from the rear end to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 in the vertical center of the right side of the LCD mounting section 3010b when viewed from the rear, into which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a is formed to be approximately the same size as the display screen of the game board side performance display device 1600. The LCD mounting portion 3010b is formed to be large enough to fit the game board side performance display device 1600 into the frame. The rear box 3010 has a locking mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from behind, so that the locking mechanism 3020 can slide up and down.

The rear box 3010 also has a flat fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface abutting against the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The rear box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes formed at appropriate positions for mounting each movable performance unit, etc.

The back unit 3000 can provide light-emitting effects, movement effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the back-down rear movable performance unit 3100, the back-upper left movable performance unit 3200, the back-left movable performance unit 3300, the back-upper middle movable performance unit 3400, and the back-down front movable performance unit 3500, etc., and can entertain players with various effects, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Game Contents]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 are shot into the upper part of the game area 5a through the gap between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged in the front right lower corner of the door frame 3, and the game with the game balls is started. The game balls shot into the upper part of the game area 5a flow down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the shooting strength. The shooting strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the rotation amount of the handle 302, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the balls can be shot, and up to 100 game balls can be shot continuously in one minute, that is, at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). When the game ball hits the obstacle nails, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed and various movements are imparted to the game ball, allowing the player to enjoy its movements. In addition to the obstacle nails, within the game area 5a, there is also provided at an appropriate position a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball hits it.

When a game ball is shot into the top of the center device 2500 and enters the left side of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center device 2500 when viewed from the front, it will flow down the area to the left of the center device 2500 while abutting multiple obstacle nails (not shown). Then, when the game ball flowing down the area to the left of the center device 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 that opens into the outer periphery of the center device 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522.

The game balls supplied to the stage 2530 roll back and forth on the stage 2530 before being released forward. When a game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, it is highly likely to be received by the first starting hole 2002, since it is located directly above the first starting hole 2002. When a game ball is received by the first starting hole 2002, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

When a game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from anywhere other than the center, it flows down toward the start opening unit 2100. A game ball released into the game area 5a from the stage 2530 of the center device 2500 may be received by the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 or an open big prize opening 2005.

If a game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center device 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it may be moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300 and accepted into the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the lower side unit 2200. When a game ball is accepted into the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when a game ball is hit into the upper part of the center device 2500 in the game area 5a and enters to the right of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center device 2500 (i.e., hits to the right), the game ball flows down through an area downstream where the gate section 2003 and the second starting hole 2004 are provided.

When the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and if the result of the normal lottery is a "normal win," the second starting hole 2004 opens for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 to 10 seconds), allowing the game ball to be received by the second starting hole 2004. When the game ball is received by the second starting hole 2004, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., four balls) are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery, which is conducted when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the indication of the normal lottery result (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also called the normal fluctuation time). This indication of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 opens after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

In addition, if a gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003 between the time the gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003 and the time the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot begin, so the start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is reserved until the previous suggestion of the normal lottery result has ended. In addition, the number of reserved normal lottery results is limited to four, and any more than this are discarded rather than reserved, even if the gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003. This prevents the burden on the gaming hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result that will generate a favorable game state (e.g., "big win", "medium win", "small win", "probability-changing win", "time-saving win", etc.) that is favorable to the player. The drawn special lottery result is then suggested to the player over a predetermined time (e.g., 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as the special fluctuation time). The special lottery results drawn when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "miss", "small win", "2R big win", "5R big win", "15R big win", "probability-changing (probability-changing) win", "time-saving (time-saving) win", "probability-saving time-saving win", "probability-saving time-saving win", "probability-saving time-saving win", and "no time-saving win".

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of game balls into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 is a special lottery result that generates a favorable game state, the large prize opening 2005 becomes capable of receiving game balls in a predetermined opening and closing pattern after the special variable time has elapsed. When the large prize opening 2005 is in an open state and a game ball is received into the large prize opening 2005, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 or 13 balls) are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Therefore, when the large prize opening 2005 is capable of receiving game balls, by having the large prize opening 2005 receive game balls, a large number of game balls can be paid out, which can entertain the player.

If the special lottery result is a "small win", the large prize opening 2005 repeats an opening and closing pattern multiple times (e.g., twice) in which it is open for a predetermined short time (e.g., between 0.2 and 0.6 seconds) to receive game balls, and then closes. On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "big win", when either a predetermined time (e.g., about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the large prize opening 2005 has been open to receive game balls, or a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) have been received by the large prize opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is called one round) in which it is closed and cannot receive game balls is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, if there is a "2R big win", it repeats two rounds, if there is a "5R big win", it repeats five rounds, if there is a "15R big win", it repeats fifteen rounds, and creates an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, after the jackpot game ends, there are "hits" that change the probability of a special lottery result such as a "jackpot" being drawn ("probability hit"), or that change the display time of the presentation image suggesting the special lottery result ("time-saving hit").

In this embodiment, if game balls are received into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 between the start of the special lottery and the indication of the drawn special lottery result due to the reception of game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the indication of the special lottery result cannot be started, so the start of the indication of the special lottery result is suspended until the indication of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for any more than this, the special lottery result is not reserved but discarded even if game balls are received into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special lottery result. The function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off multiple LEDs and flashing them for a predetermined period of time, and then suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the game board side performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a performance image. The performance image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side performance display device 1600 displays three pattern rows consisting of multiple patterns lined up in the left-right direction, and changes each pattern row, sequentially stops and displays the pattern rows that are displayed in a variable manner, and each pattern row that is stopped and displayed is displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows are a combination that corresponds to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "miss," after the three pattern rows have stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and an advantageous game state (for example, a small win game, a big win game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

The time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) is different from the time indicating the special lottery result on the game board side performance display device 1600 (the time until the pattern row changes and the final image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying a performance image to suggest the result of the special lottery by the game board side performance display device 1600, depending on the special lottery result, it is possible to appropriately use the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 in the door frame 3, the door frame side performance display device 460, various decorations of the center role 2500, various decorations of the back unit 3000, the back bottom rear movable performance unit 3100, the back top left movable performance unit 3200, the back left movable performance unit 3300, the back top middle movable performance unit 3400, and the back bottom front movable performance unit 3500, etc. to perform light-emitting performance, movable performance, display performance, etc., so that the player can be entertained by various performances and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[Relationship between this embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in this embodiment corresponds to the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in this embodiment corresponds to the main body unit of the present invention, the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment corresponds to the window portion of the present invention, the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment corresponds to the bulge portion of the present invention, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 in the performance operation unit 400 and the second performance operation unit 400A of this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

In addition, the decorative member inside the operation button of the base unit in this embodiment, and the main screen 471 and sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the second performance display device 460A on the door frame side correspond to the second decorative body of the present invention, while the second button decorative part 432g of the decorative member inside the operation button 432 in this embodiment, the peripheral decorative part 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the peripheral decorative member 478 correspond to the second decorative part of the present invention.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the LEDs mounted on the operation button left interior decorative board 433, operation button right interior decorative board 434, operation button above interior decorative board 435, and operation button below interior decorative board 436, as well as the LED 477a on the sub-screen decorative board 477, correspond to the light-emitting bodies of the present invention, the door frame side performance display device 460 in this embodiment corresponds to the rear decorative means of the present invention, and the frame unit 415, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 in this embodiment correspond to the base parts of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic Effects of the Present Embodiment]
In this way, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 (or the second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3 is viewed from the outside, the player can see a decoration that is full of unprecedented perspective, such as a decoration in which the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second performance display device 460A, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) overlap, and a decoration in which the first button decorative portion 411a and the door frame side performance display device 460 overlap, etc., and therefore it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing and capable of differentiating itself from other pachinko machines.

In addition, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A (screen unit 470)) and the door frame side performance display device 460, etc. are arranged in the direction of movement of the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the unit base 431 (unit base 451) supports the button lens 411 so that it can be moved by the player's operation. Therefore, when the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) move closer to or farther away from each other, and the first button decorative portion By changing the distance between 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), it is possible to change the perspective of the decoration in which the first button decoration 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) appear to overlap, and the player can change the decoration (intersection pattern) of the first button decoration 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) by himself, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward on the opposite side to the operation button interior decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A), a space is formed between the first decorative body and the second decorative body. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the distance between the first button decorative part 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button interior decorative part 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 (or the peripheral decorative part 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member This makes the distance to the first button decoration 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub-screen decoration member 476, peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) more different, and even when the button lens 411 is not being moved by operation, when the player's eye position moves, the intersection (degree of overlap) between the first button decoration 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub-screen decoration member 476, peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) changes, allowing the player to see a moving decoration, which strongly attracts the player's attention.

Furthermore, the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with a first button decoration part 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, so that the rear operation button internal decoration part 432 (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) and the door frame side performance display device 460 can be clearly seen through the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration part 411a is not provided, and the radial decoration of the first button decoration part 411a can direct the player's gaze toward the center of the button lens 411, so that the player's attention can be strongly directed to the operation button internal decoration part 432 (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) and the door frame side performance display device 460 through the center of the transparent button lens 411.

In addition, the operation button interior decorative member 432 is equipped with a second button interior decorative portion 432g having multiple polygonal decorations in a concentric circle centered at the center. When viewed from the outside, the decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 intersect with each other, ensuring a sense of perspective for the decorations of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decorative portion 432g. This makes the decorations of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decorative portion 432g stand out, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

In addition, the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 has multiple polygonal decorations in a concentric circle centered on the center, so that the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g can direct the player's gaze and attention to the door frame side performance display device 460 that can be seen in the center of the operation button interior decorative member 432, allowing the player to enjoy the decoration (performance image) of the door frame side performance display device.

Furthermore, when each LED mounted on the left operation button inner decorative board 433, the right operation button inner decorative board 434, the upper operation button inner decorative board 435, and the lower operation button inner decorative board 436 (or the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative board 477) is illuminated, the light can be used to illuminate and decorate the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476), and further, the button lens 411 can also be illuminated and decorated, so that in addition to the decoration of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476), the player can be entertained by the illuminated decoration. At this time, the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) can diffuse the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the left operation button interior decoration board 433, the right operation button interior decoration board 434, the upper operation button interior decoration board 435, and the lower operation button interior decoration board 436. Therefore, the second button interior decoration part 432g is illuminated and decorated by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the left operation button interior decoration board 433, the right operation button interior decoration board 434, the upper operation button interior decoration board 435, and the lower operation button interior decoration board 436, whereas the first button decoration part 411a is illuminated and decorated by direct light from the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). The second button decorative part 432g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is illuminated and decorated with indirect light diffused by the light source, and the first button decorative part 411a is illuminated and decorated with a weak light, so that when the LEDs (or LEDs 477a) of the left operation button decorative board 433, the right operation button decorative board 434, the upper operation button decorative board 435, and the lower operation button decorative board 436 are illuminated, when the first button decorative part 411a and the second button decorative part 432g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) are viewed from the outside, the player can see decorations with a more emphasized sense of perspective, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 with a strong appeal that strongly attracts the player's interest.

In addition, since the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) is arranged in the direction in which the button lens 411 moves, there is no need to secure space for the button lens 411 to move in the area outside the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A), and it is possible to expand the button lens 411 or the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) outward and make it as large as possible, and by making it larger, the button lens 411 or the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be made more noticeable. Also, as described above, since there is no need to secure space outside the button lens 411 to move it, by arranging the frame unit 415 in the area outside the button lens 411, the decorativeness of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good and have a high appeal that strongly attracts the interest of players.

In addition, because the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, when a player strikes the button lens 411 or applies impact to part of its surface, the applied impact force is more likely to be dispersed over the entire button lens 411 than if the button lens 411 had a flat shape, making the button lens 411 less likely to break (be damaged). Therefore, damage to the button lens 411 during play can be prevented, which can cause the game to be interrupted and can lead to frustration for some players and a loss of interest, and because the button lens 411 is less likely to be damaged, an increase in the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the door frame 3 that allows the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 arranged in the main frame 4 to be viewed from the front through the through hole 111, the operation button 410, which is a circular shape of about 15 cm in outer diameter within the range of 10 cm to 30 cm and can be moved (advanced and retreated) by the player, and the transparent button lens of the operation button 410 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward below the through hole 111. Since the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) which can be seen from the front through the lens 411, and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged within the frame are attached, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) having the largest possible operation button 410 can be seen in a position where the game ball storage tray would be prominent in a conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can recognize at a glance that this is different from conventional pachinko machines, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and a translucent second button decorative part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative part 411b. First LEDs 422a, 423a are provided for illuminating and decorating the second button decorative part 411b, and second LEDs 422b, 423b are provided for illuminating and decorating the frame side lens 417. The frame body 416 has an inner cylinder 416d that separates the frame side lens 417 from the second button decoration 411b, and a main body 413a and an inner extension 413f that separate the second button decoration 411b from the center of the button lens 411. The inner cylinder 416d, the main body 413a, and the inner extension 413f prevent the light from the first LED 422a, 423a from illuminating the center of the frame side lens 417 or the button lens 411, and prevent the light from the second LED 422b, 423b from illuminating the second button decoration 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration 411b, which are adjacent to each other, can be illuminated and decorated independently. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration 411b can be clearly illuminated and decorated, and a good-looking illumination can be produced. In addition, by appropriately combining the off, on, blinking, brightness, color, etc. of the adjacent frame side lens 417 and second button decoration 411b, a variety of light-emitting patterns can be produced, preventing the player from becoming bored and entertaining the player, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the first LEDs 422a, 423a that illuminate and decorate the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b that illuminate and decorate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are provided on a single operation button left outer decorative board 422 and operation button right outer decorative board 423, and the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450). Therefore, compared to the case where a board is provided on the second button decorative part 411b (operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be placed as far away as possible from the second button decorative part 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be irradiated to the second button decorative part 411b in a sufficiently diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration 411b can be uniformly illuminated, the appearance of the illuminated decoration of the second button decoration 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, which can strongly attract the player's attention and entertain the player, preventing a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, because the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the wiring connected to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 does not bend or extend as the operation button 410 moves back and forth, eliminating the risk of the wiring breaking due to fatigue. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decorative part 411b) is moved, the wiring will not break, so the player can enjoy the movement (operation) of the operation button 410 and the illuminated decoration of the frame side lens 417 and second button decorative part 411b without any problems, and a decline in the player's interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since a second button decorative part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, when the rear operation button internal decorative part 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) are viewed through the transparent button lens 411, the second button decorative part 411b decorates the outer edges of the operation button internal decorative part 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. By appropriately illuminating the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, the second button decoration 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411, from which the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be seen to the rear, can be illuminated and decorated in various patterns as described above, so that the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), and the player can enjoy the illumination effects, the operation of the operation button 410, and the performance images by the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the button lens 411 (operation button 410) with the second button decoration 411b on its outer edge can be operated by the player, so that by having the player operate the operation button 410 while a player-participation type performance is being executed, the player can enjoy operating the operation button 410 (player-participation type performance), and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Furthermore, by illuminating and decorating the second button decoration 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 when a player-participation type performance is being executed, the player's attention can be attracted to the operation button 410, so that the player can be encouraged to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be made to participate in the player-participation type performance and enjoy it.

Furthermore, since the operation button 410 is provided with an opaque main body portion 413a and an inward extension portion 413f which enable only the second button decorative portion 411b to be illuminated and decorated by the first LEDs 422a, 423a, the portion of the operation button 410 which is closer to the center than the second button decorative portion 411b is not illuminated (decorated) by the first LEDs 422a, 423a, and the central portion of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) becomes brighter, which prevents the operation button internal decorative member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) located at the rear from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration 411b can be illuminated and decorated in good condition, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be viewed in good condition through the transparent button lens 411, allowing the player to fully enjoy the decorations and illumination effects, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, since the inner tube portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 which is equipped with the frame side lens 417, at the rear side of the frame unit 415, the inner tube portion 416d can completely separate the frame side lens 417 from the second button decorative portion 411b of the operating button 410. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the inner tube 416d closer to the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423, the rear end of the inner tube 416d is located closer to the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423 than the diffusion range of the light from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b, so even if a gap is formed between the front of the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423, the light from the first LED 422a, 423a will not illuminate the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b, 423b will not illuminate the second button decorative part 411b. Therefore, the light can be reliably blocked by the inner tube 416d, and a pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-mentioned effects can be realized.

In addition, since the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f can completely separate the second button decorative part 411b and the center side of the button lens 411 on the rear side of the operation button 410. On the other hand, the end (rear end) of the main body 413a close to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 extends further rearward than the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, so that the light from the first LED 422a, 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body 413a, and the intrusion of light into the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be completely blocked. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a can illuminate and decorate the second button decoration 411b in good condition, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be viewed in good condition through the transparent button lens 411, allowing the player to fully enjoy the decorations and illumination effects, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the second button decorative part 411b is located in front of the outer part of the operation button internal decorative member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) which is arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Therefore, the second button decorative part 411b makes it difficult to see the outer parts and rear side (rear side) of the operation button internal decorative member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), thereby preventing the appearance of the operation button 410 from being deteriorated. In addition, when the second button decoration 411b is illuminated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the outside and rear of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) become relatively dark compared to the brightness of the second button decoration member 411b, making it difficult to see the components on the outside and rear of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A). This can further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, frame unit 415, operation button interior decoration member 432, door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), etc., and suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, since the outer periphery of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame side lens 417 adjacent to the second button decoration 411b are formed in an arc shape. Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b, the player can see a light-emitting effect in which light goes around the outer edge of the operation button 410, a light-emitting effect in which light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410, a light-emitting effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., so that the player is less likely to get bored with the various light-emitting effects, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper tray 321, in which the stored game balls are shot into the game area 5a and used for playing, is attached to the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3, and the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and below the upper tray 321 to form the remaining space of the mounting space 326j of a predetermined width behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is A portion corresponding to the lower tray first area A1 in the lower tray main body 325 is disposed on the left side of the space, and a portion corresponding to the lower tray second area A2 in the lower tray main body 325 is extended from that portion into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j to mount the lower tray 322 capable of storing game balls. This makes the lower tray 322 appear smaller when viewed from the front, making the lower tray 322 less noticeable, and relatively making the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) more noticeable. Therefore, when the present pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be seen in the position where the upper tray and the lower tray were seen lined up and down in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can recognize at a glance that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and it can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of the player.

In addition, in the lower tray second area A2 portion of the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322, lower tray covers 340, 340A are provided which extend upward from the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b which extends upward from the outer periphery and restrict the movement of game balls toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, thereby preventing the game balls in the lower tray 322 from contacting the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) and preventing the game balls supplied into the lower tray 322 or the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 from abutting or pressing against the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A). Therefore, the game ball will not come into contact with the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), and the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) will not be damaged by the game ball, which prevents the player's interest from being reduced by interrupting the game due to damage to the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), and also prevents an increase in the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, the lower tray second area A2 in the lower tray body 325 of the lower tray 322 is equipped with the main body vertical wall portion 325b and the lower tray cover 340, 340A that restricts the movement of the game balls toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, so that the game balls can be prevented from entering (spill) from the lower tray body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling like he or she has lost money or is uncomfortable if the game ball enters the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the lower tray covers 340, 340A cover the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray body 325 in the lower tray 322, even if the game ball supplied into the lower tray 322 bounces up inside the lower tray 322, it can be reliably prevented from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the above-mentioned effect can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the lower tray covers 340, 340A cover the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray body 325, when a player inserts his/her hand into the lower tray second area A2 from the lower tray first area A1 side (lower tray opening 326d) of the lower tray body 325, the lower tray covers 340, 340A can restrict the fingertips, etc. from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, so that it is possible to prevent the fingertips, etc. from touching the underside of the upper tray 321 or the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) and causing injury, and the player can play in a safe environment.

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower tray cover 340, 340A and the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), even if an impact or pressure is applied to the lower tray cover 340, 340A due to a game ball hitting it, the impact or pressure is not transmitted from the lower tray cover 340, 340A to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and damage to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be reliably prevented.

In addition, in the lower tray second area A2 portion of the lower tray body 325 of the lower tray 322, a lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is provided in front of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, so that when the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is open, the game ball released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can enter the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a directly and be discharged downward (to the dollar box), making it difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a, as described above, since the lower tray covers 340, 340A are provided, the game ball can be prevented from abutting against the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), so that damage to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be prevented, and the interruption of the game can be reduced, suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 becomes higher as it moves forward, the game ball moving toward the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 climbs the inclined bottom surface, and the moving speed of the game ball can be reduced. Therefore, the speed of the game ball that abuts against the lower tray cover 340, 340A can be slowed down, so that the lower tray cover 340, 340A can reliably restrict the game ball from moving toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the impact when the game ball abuts against the lower tray cover 340, 340A or the main body vertical wall portion 325b can be reduced, thereby preventing them from being damaged.

In addition, since at least the lower tray covers 340, 340A are separate components, when the lower tray covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower tray covers 340, 340A, which reduces the burden on the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game is played in which game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, etc., a dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 is provided, which bulges furthest forward from the center of the left and right direction of the front, and the performance operation unit 400 and the second performance operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forward bulging portion, and the dish unit cover 326 is provided with a storage dish consisting of an upper dish 321 and a lower dish 322 capable of storing game balls, and the storage dish (upper dish 321 and lower dish 322) In addition, the lower tray first area A1 is located outside the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front, and the lower tray second area A2 is located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front, so that the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out when viewed from the front, and the storage tray (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) can be made to look smaller and less noticeable. Therefore, since the conspicuous performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be seen in the area where the upper tray and lower tray were visible in conventional pachinko machines, the player can be made to recognize at a glance that this is a gaming machine different from conventional pachinko machines, and it can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players.

In addition, since the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the left and right direction of the front of the dish unit cover 326, the area where the lower dish 322 is open on the surface of the dish unit cover 326 is small, but since the first extension part 325B, second extension part 325C, and lower dish cover 340, 340A of the lower dish main body 325 having the lower dish second area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j, which is behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front, it is possible to store game balls in the area (lower dish second area A2) that cannot be seen from the front of the lower dish 322. Therefore, contrary to the appearance from the front, a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored, so that the player can concentrate on playing without worrying about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower dish 322, and the player can enjoy the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the lower tray 322 is formed by attaching (combining) the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the first and second extension parts 325B and 325C having the lower tray second area A2 to the lower tray main body 325 and main body part 325A having the lower tray first area A1.By preparing multiple lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first and second extension parts 325B and 325C of different sizes in advance and attaching the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first and second extension parts 325B and 325C of sizes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the width of the mounting space 326j within the tray unit cover 326, the volume of the lower tray 322 can be optimized. Also, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the first and second extension parts 325B and 325C, it is possible to accommodate the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j, and since the size of this rear space depends on the amount of rearward protrusion of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), it is possible to make the lower tray 322 compatible with various performance operation units 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) with different amounts of rearward protrusion, thereby increasing the versatility of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the lower tray 322 has a bottom wall portion 325a and a main body vertical wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, so that the lower tray 322 is in the shape of a container recessed downward, and game balls can be stored reliably. In addition, the lower tray cover 340, 340A has a cover vertical wall portion 340a rising from the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325, so by preparing lower tray covers 340, 340A of various shapes in advance and combining (attaching) lower tray covers 340, 340A of shapes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j, it is possible to accommodate various forms and achieve the same effects as described above.

In addition, in the lower dish 322, which is composed of the lower dish main body 325 and the lower dish covers 340, 340A, the lower dish covers 340, 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower dish main body 325, so the part on the lower dish 322 where the game balls are placed is the lower dish main body 325, and the boundary (seam, dividing line PL) between the lower dish main body 325 and the lower dish covers 340, 340A is not located in the part where the load of many game balls is applied due to storage. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is only received by the lower dish main body 325, no force is applied that pulls the lower dish covers 340, 340A away from the lower dish main body 325 even if many game balls are stored, and it is possible to prevent the lower dish covers 340, 340A from coming off the lower dish main body 325.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, an upper tray 321 and a lower tray 322 capable of storing game balls are provided below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where games are played such as receiving game balls into the general winning port 2001, etc., and the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction makes more than half of the lower tray 322, including the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a in the lower tray 322, difficult to see (makes it difficult to see) from the front (player), so that the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made neat and attractive, and it can be made into a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract the interest of players. In addition, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see the game balls moving from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, making it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls inside the lower tray 322, preventing the player from becoming distracted and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see the game balls guided by the guidance means such as the ball guide section 322c and the buffer section 322d, which are located between the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322 that guides the game balls from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a. Therefore, if the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c are guided by the guidance means and smoothly (instantly) ejected downward from the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a, giving the player the illusion that the game balls are being ejected below the lower tray 322 (to the money box) without passing through the lower tray 322. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game balls passing through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and suppressing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) makes more than half of the lower tray 322, including the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, difficult to see from the front, it is likely that the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are located behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A). In other words, since more than half of the lower tray 322 is made to wrap around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), the actual size (capacity) of the lower tray 322 is larger than the size of the lower tray 322 as it appears from the front, so that the amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be secured sufficiently compared to appearance.

In addition, when the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is open, the game balls released into the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be smoothly guided to the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a by the guide means such as the area between the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322, the ball guide section 322c and the buffer section 322d, and discharged to the bottom of the lower tray 322 (dollar box). This prevents the game balls from circulating inside the lower tray 322, and makes it possible to reliably make the game balls circulating inside the lower tray 322 difficult to see from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls inside the lower tray 322, preventing the player from being distracted and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be instantly ejected downward from the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a by the ball guide section 322c etc. without the player noticing, giving the player the illusion that the game balls are being ejected below the lower tray 322 (to the money box) without passing through the lower tray 322. This makes it less likely for the player to feel annoyed by the game balls passing through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) makes more than half of the game ball storage area (storage area) of the lower tray 322 in a plan view difficult to see from the front, so the actual size of the lower tray 322 is more than twice the size that appears from the front, so a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored, just like the lower trays of conventional pachinko machines.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a for mounting a large presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) of the same height as the overall height of the plate unit cover 326 is provided at the left-right center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, which bulges forward when viewed from the front below the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 where games such as receiving game balls into the general winning port 2001 are played. In addition, the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on both the left and right sides of the presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, which is lower than the approximate center in the up-down direction, is shaped to be concave so as to be carved out toward the rear. This makes it possible for the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) attached to the presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a to appear to protrude significantly forward, making the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) stand out. Therefore, in the position where the upper tray and the lower tray are lined up in a vertical direction in the conventional pachinko machine, the large presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) is emphasized, so that the player can recognize at a glance that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing. And, from the tray front lower decoration part 326c which is recessed backward on both the left and right outer sides of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) on the front of the tray unit cover 326, the lower tray 322 is recessed backward and a part of it is wrapped around the rear of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), so that the storage amount of game balls in the lower tray 322 (the volume of the lower tray 322) can be sufficiently secured, so that the player does not have to worry about the lower tray 322 being filled with game balls while playing, and can concentrate on playing, and it is possible to enjoy the game and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, because a portion of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), when a player puts his or her hand into the lower tray 322 from the front, the player's fingertips are less likely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322 (the front surface of the tray unit base 323) or the lower tray cover 340. This allows the player to recognize by touch that there is a sufficient amount of game balls stored, and when game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, the player can recognize that many game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, which gives the player a sense of satisfaction and allows the player to enjoy the game and suppress a decline in interest. In addition, because the fingertips of the hand placed on the lower tray 322 are unlikely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322 or the lower tray cover 340, the player is given the same sensation as with the lower tray in a conventional pachinko machine, which reduces the sense of discomfort felt by players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines, putting the player at ease and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, because the lower tray 322 is formed so that it becomes wider toward the back (rear), even if the front side is small, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of storage for game balls. In other words, because the front end portion of the lower tray 322 is small, it is possible to make the lower tray 322 less noticeable on the front surface (lower tray front decorative portion 326c) of the tray unit cover 326 where the lower tray 322 opens, and relatively, it is possible to make the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) more noticeable. Therefore, it is possible to provide the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) while securing a sufficient amount of storage for game balls in the lower tray 322, which can increase the appeal to players and entertain the players and prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, the lower tray cover 340 covers the sides and top of the part of the lower tray 322 that wraps around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), so when a player puts their hand inside the lower tray 322, their fingertips are prevented from touching the inner surface of the tray unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) and causing injury, allowing the player to play in a safe environment. The lower tray cover 340 also prevents game balls from entering (spill) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326.

Furthermore, since the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) is positioned in the center in the left-right direction on the front side of the tray unit cover 326, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) can be made more noticeable to the player, making the pachinko machine 1 more appealing and able to strongly attract the player's attention. In addition, the decorations provided by the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) can be made more visible, allowing players to enjoy the decorations and presentations of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) and preventing a decline in player interest.

In addition, the lower tray 322 is equipped with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321, and a lower tray ball removal hole 322a that can be opened and closed and penetrates vertically, so that it has the same function as the lower tray in a conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, when a player who is accustomed to conventional pachinko machines plays this pachinko machine 1, he or she will not be confused by the function of the lower tray 322, and can play in the same way as before, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. In addition, since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side when viewed from the front, which makes the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 neat and good-looking, and makes it possible to make a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and can strongly attract the interest of players.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is attached to the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the play area 5a in the door frame 3. The operation button interior decorative member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second performance display device 460A) that decorates the outside of the door frame side performance display device 460 that can present a performance to the player is attached to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A). The operation button interior decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) has an outer diameter of about 15 cm and a center that is in a direction away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). ), and the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is provided with a first button decoration part 411a, a second button decoration part 411b, and a button frame 412, and a cylindrical button base 413 protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided. Therefore, the first button decoration part 411a and the button base 413 can reduce the visibility of the outer edge and the inner side (rear side) of the operation button inner decoration part 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second performance display device 460A) from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration part 432 (screen unit 470), and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decoration part 432 provided inside, the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, the first button decorative part 411a, the second button decorative part 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button internal decorative part 432 (screen unit 470) through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative part 432 (screen unit 470). Therefore, even if the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative part 432 (screen unit 470) becomes relatively large by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, it can be well hidden by the first button decorative part 411a, etc., so that a large operation button 410 (button lens 411) with an outer diameter of approximately 15 cm can be realized without any problems while preventing a deterioration in appearance. Therefore, the operation buttons 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be enlarged, making the pachinko machine 1 stand out and strongly attracting the player's attention, making it a highly appealing pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since it is equipped with a button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes cylindrically from the button lens 411 side toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side, when the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and make invisible anything outside the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470), thereby further improving the appearance of the operation button 410.

In addition, since the transparent button lens 411 is made to have a three-dimensional shape (semispherical) that bulges outward (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the surface near the outer edge of the button lens 411 is inclined with respect to the plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are lined up, that is, a plane perpendicular to the forward and backward direction of the operation button 410), so light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, by combining the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411b provided on the outer edge, and the button frame 412 and the button base 413, it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration part 432 (screen unit 470) from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration part 432 (screen unit 470), and the above-mentioned effect can be reliably achieved.

In addition, because the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 is increased, so the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) placed inside the operation button 410 can be made larger and easier to move, making it easier to provide the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) that entertains the player inside the operation button 410, and realizing a pachinko machine 1 that provides even more entertainment for players.

Furthermore, because the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given a design (decorative) quality, which makes the operation button 410 stand out on this pachinko machine 1 and attracts the player's attention, making it easier for the player to select this pachinko machine as the machine to play.

In addition, the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412, which are provided on the outer periphery of the button lens 411, are opaque, so that the button frame 412 can reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410 and the operation button internal decoration part 432 (screen unit 470) from being seen through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration part 432 (screen unit 470), thereby reducing deterioration in the appearance of the operation button 410, etc., and improving its appearance.

The button lens 411 also has an opaque button frame 412 that extends from the outer edge of the button to the inside at a specified width all around, and in cooperation with the first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 411b, makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 and the decorative member inside the operation button 432 (screen unit 470). This makes it possible to enlarge the gap between the main body 413a and the decorative member inside the operation button 432 (screen unit 470), which makes it easier to secure space for the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second performance display device 460A to move, allowing them to move smoothly.

Furthermore, because the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, there is no directionality to the outer periphery compared to when it is polygonal, making it easier to move the operation button 410 smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is made large, it can be pressed without any problems, allowing the player to enjoy the player-participation presentation using the operation button 410 without losing interest.

In addition, because the operation button 410 is enlarged, when a player-participation type presentation is executed in which the player operates the operation button 410, the player can easily touch and press the operation button 410 without having to check the position of the operation button 410 while operating it. This makes it easier for the player to participate in the player-participation type presentation using the operation button 410, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the operation button 410 is equipped with the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), by presenting a performance image according to the game state, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) in the operation button 410, and the player can enjoy the performance by the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A). At the same time, the performance image and light-emitting performance by the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can encourage the player to operate the operation button 410, and by having the player actively participate in the player participation type performance and enjoying it, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. Also, by executing the performance within the operation button 410, it is possible to make some players think that something good will happen, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, because the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 (the area inside the first button decorative part 411a) of the large operation button 410, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of this pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation buttons of conventional pachinko machines, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players and increasing the player's anticipation for the performance using the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) inside the operation button 410, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest.

The present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention, as described below.

In other words, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine is a pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, and in this case too, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 is shown to have the first button decoration part 411a formed on the inner circumference side of the button frame 412, but this is not limited to this, and the button lens 411 may have no first button decoration part 411a formed thereon.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, but this is not limited to this. Instead of attaching the button frame 412, a decorative part for hiding the rear side over the entire circumference may be formed at the part of the button lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the operation button 410 is shown to have a button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes cylindrically from the outer periphery of the button lens 411 toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side so as to surround the entire periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side second performance display device 460A, but this is not limited to this, and at least one may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side so as to surround only a part of the entire periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side second performance display device 460A. The shape of this button base 413 may be a shape that follows the outer periphery of the button lens 411, or a shape that does not follow the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have decoration (flat decoration by pasting a sticker or printing, etc., three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief) at least on the inner wall side. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be translucent or non-translucent. The button base 413 may be colored or colorless and transparent. If the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to apply light diffusion processing such as embossing, slits, prisms, etc. to at least one of the inner wall side or the outer wall side.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the lower tray 322 is recessed rearward only from the outer left portion of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) on the front of the tray unit cover 326, but this is not limited to this, and the lower tray 322 may be recessed rearward from both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) and connected to each other behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), or may be recessed rearward only from the outer right portion of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), with a portion of it wrapping around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A).

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the shape (shape of the front end of the lower dish 322) of the portion (lower dish front decorative portion 326c) on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 where the lower dish 322 is recessed rearward is shown as a curved surface recessed rearward, but this is not limited to this, and the front surface may be recessed in the shape of a polygonal column or polyhedron.

In the above embodiment, the example of attaching the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) to the front of the plate unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to attach a unit or panel or other member that includes "one with an operation device such as an operation dial or touch panel," "one with a rotating body with a decoration on its surface," "one with a decorative body with a decoration and a movable device for moving the decorative body," "one with a decorative body that three-dimensionally imitates characters, items, logos, and scenes (dioramas) that match the concept of the gaming machine," "one with characters, items, logos, and predetermined patterns, etc., that are decorated by stickers or printing, etc., that match the concept of the gaming machine." Also, the member attached to the mounting space 326j (performance operation unit mounting portion 326a) does not have to be one, and multiple (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the mounting space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the mounting space 326j.

In the above embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 is shown to have a presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a that opens forward for mounting the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), but this is not limited to this. The plate unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) may not have an opening (presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), and a space equivalent to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the plate unit cover. It is preferable to decorate the front of such a plate unit cover with characters, items, logos, specific patterns, etc. that are in line with the concept of the gaming machine by means of stickers, printing, mounting decorative members, etc.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which an area slightly larger than half of the game ball storage area (storage area) in a planar view of the lower tray 322 is covered by the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) as a covering part to make it difficult to see from the front, but this is not limited to this, and an area less than half of the game ball storage area in the lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front, or the entire lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown as being arc-shaped and partially arranged in the circumferential direction, but this is not limited to this, and the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be annular and extend around the entire circumference.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the second button interior decorative part 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 in the performance operation unit 400 is shown as a decoration having multiple polygonal shapes in a concentric circle centered on the center, but this is not limited to this, and the second button interior decorative part 432g may also be a decoration having multiple circular shapes (including ovals) in a concentric circle centered on the center.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the rear members such as the operation button interior decorative member 432, the door frame side performance display device 460, and the door frame side second performance display device 460A, which are arranged on the rear side, are always visible through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410, but this is not limited to this, and at least one of the front and rear members arranged in the front and back (or up and down) may have a variable light transmission means that makes the rear side visible when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, examples of the variable light transmission means include "a magic mirror, which makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front and rear sides," and "a liquid crystal film, which becomes transparent or opaque by turning the power on and off, making the rear side visible." The front and rear members may be movable relative to each other, or may not be movable relative to each other.

By providing a variable light transmission means in at least one of the front and rear members, in the normal state, only the front member, or both the front and rear members, are visible, and the decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. Then, in the special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, the rear member (the rear member, or the member arranged behind the rear member) that was not visible in the normal state becomes visible, and a decoration in which the front and rear members, or the front member, the rear member, and the member behind the rear member overlap can be shown. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player using the front and rear members, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored, entertains the player, and suppresses a decline in the player's interest.

To go into more detail, for example, if the front member has a variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, the rear side of the front member is darkened, allowing the player to see only the decoration of the front member. Then, by brightening the area between the front and rear members, or the rear side of the rear member with light from a light-emitting element such as an LED, the conditions for the variable light transmission means in the front member are met, making the rear member visible through the front member, and allowing the player to see the overlapping decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member.

Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has a variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, under normal conditions the surface of the rear member is visible through the front member, allowing the player to see the decoration of the front member and the surface of the rear member. Then, if the rear side of the rear member is illuminated with light from a light-emitting element such as an LED, the fulfillment condition of the variable light transmission means in the rear member is satisfied, making the rear side visible through the rear member, allowing the player to see the components behind the rear member (e.g., display devices, decorations such as characters, etc.) through the front and rear members.

Furthermore, if both the front and rear members have a variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be seen by the player, and when the area between the front and rear members is brightened by the light of a light-emitting unit such as an LED, the fulfillment condition of the variable light transmission means in the front member is met, the surface of the rear member becomes visible through the front member, and the decoration of the front and rear members can be seen by the player. On the other hand, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light-emitting unit such as an LED (or the area between the front and rear members and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of a light-emitting unit such as an LED), the fulfillment conditions of the variable light transmission means in the front and rear members are respectively met, and the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a character, or other decoration) can be seen by the player through the front and rear members. As a result, by appropriately selecting the area to be brightened by the light of the light-emitting unit, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and a variety of decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

In the above specific example, the variable light transmission means is something like a magic mirror, so when the back side is darkened, it looks like a mirror, allowing the player to see the sparkling decorations on the surfaces of the front and back members.

In the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means was described as something like a magic mirror, but the same effect can be achieved if it is something like a liquid crystal film. In addition, if something like a liquid crystal film is used as the variable light transmitting means, it can transmit light even in an opaque state (it has translucency), so if the area between the front and rear members and the rear side of the rear member can be made brighter (or decorated with light) with the light of light-emitting elements such as LEDs, the player can be shown a wider variety of light-emitting effects, decorative effects, and other effects.

[7. Main control board, dispensing control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 69 to Fig. 74. Fig. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, Fig. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of Fig. 69, Fig. 71 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input and output to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board that relays the electrical connection between the payout control board constituting the main board and the CR unit and the degree display board, Fig. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of Fig. 69, Fig. 73 is a block diagram showing the outline of the peripheral control MPU, and Fig. 74 is a block diagram of the periphery of the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal display control unit.

As shown in FIG. 69, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that generates a control power source (e.g., +5V, etc.) and controls the game, including the payout of prize balls, and a second control unit SCG that performs presentations related to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing multiple boards, and includes a main control board 1310, a payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931 as the first control unit MCG, and a peripheral control board 1510 as the second control unit SCG. In explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first control unit MCG will first be explained in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931, and then the second control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510).

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the above-mentioned first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is mainly composed of a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on and has various control programs such as a main control program that controls the game operation, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, as shown in FIG. 69, a main control input circuit 1310b to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring for signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of a predetermined voltage.

The main control MPU 1310a has built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), as well as a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The main control MPU 1310a also has built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a as a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) to identify the individual unit. Once this ID code is assigned, it cannot be rewritten even using an external device, as it is stored in the non-volatile RAM. The main control MPU 1310a is capable of retrieving the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and referencing it.

The main control MPU 1310a also includes a built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an") that uses hardware to update random numbers for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, among various random numbers related to the game. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 32767 as the maximum value is preset), and is configured so that the predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (i.e., the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first selects one value within a predetermined numerical range as the initial value, and then rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping based on a clock signal (a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator, described later) input to the main control MPU 1310a. When all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an again extracts one value within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such rapid lottery selection, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time when it obtains a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an as a random number for determining a jackpot.

The main control input circuit 1310b does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals as detection signals from the various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from the main control system reset described below. In other words, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described below, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type circuit with an emitter terminal grounded to ground (GND), and is composed of a main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, which has a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input to various input terminals for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., and a main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which does not have a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal is input from the main control system reset described later. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit in which information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to external boards, etc. is reset by the main control system reset described later, so that no signal based on that information is output from its various output terminals. In contrast, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal is not input from the main control system reset described later. In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit in which the information for outputting the various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described below, and signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

As shown in FIG. 60, the first start port sensor 4002 that detects game balls that have entered the first start port 2002, the second start port sensor 4004 that detects game balls that have entered the second start port 2004, and the general winning port sensor 4020 that detects game balls that have entered the general winning port 2001, as well as the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Also, the detection signals from the gate sensor 4003 that detects game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003, the count sensor 4005 that detects game balls that have entered the large winning port 2005, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 and detects fraudulent acts using magnets are input to the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Based on the detection signals from each of these switches, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, which outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacca solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of a specific output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs a drive signal to the first special pattern display 1403, the second special pattern display 1405, the first special reserved number display 1404, the second special reserved number display 1406, the normal pattern display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1407 via the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400.

The main control MPU 1310a also outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of a specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, so that the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs various information (game information) related to the game to the payout control board 951, and outputs a signal (power outage clear signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e by outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e.

In this embodiment, the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches, while the general winning hole sensors 4020, 4020 use contact type ON/OFF operation mechanical switches. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start hole 2002 and the second start hole 2004 and frequently pass through the gate section 2003, so the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 frequently detect game balls. For this reason, the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 use long-life proximity switches. In addition, when a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning hole 2005 is opened and game balls frequently enter, so the count sensor 4005 frequently detects game balls. For this reason, a proximity switch with a long lifespan is also used for the count sensor 4005. In contrast, detection by the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 does not occur frequently at the general winning openings 2001, 2201, where game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch with a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various commands related to dispensing as serial data from the output terminal of a specified serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, which then transmits the various commands as serial data to the dispensing control board 951. When the dispensing control board 951 has successfully received the various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 1310 to inform the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

The main control MPU 1310a also receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, and receives various commands as serial data from the main control input circuit 1310b at the input terminal of its specified serial input port. When the main control MPU 1310a has successfully received various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) indicating this from the output terminal of its specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various commands related to the control of game presentations and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of a specified serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, which then transmits the various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, we will briefly explain the main serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I/O ports, is circuit-connected via the bus 1310ah (see FIG. 79). The main serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, and is mainly configured of the transmission shift register 1310aea, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb, the serial management unit 1310aec, etc. (see FIG. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 1310aea and starts transmitting it to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa sets multiple commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, thereby continuously transmitting multiple commands to the peripheral control board 1510.

The power supply board 931, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is equipped with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") BC0 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 of the dispensing control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is output from the dispensing control board 951 and input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a.

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., is equipped with a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, an operation switch 954 that performs various functions, and an error LED indicator 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in Fig. 70. The operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase information stored in the RAM (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in RAM") built into the main control MPU 1310a, based on a detection signal output by being operated.

[7-2-1. Dispense control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952, which performs various controls related to payout, is equipped with a payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor that has built-in a ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, including a payout control program that controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on and controls the payout operation of the gaming media executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, a payout control input circuit 952b to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. The payout control MPU 952a has built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as the ``payout control built-in RAM'') and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as the ``payout control built-in ROM''), as well as a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control program receives various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 as serial data in a serial manner as a main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame status 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game balls, and creates a 16-bit (2-byte) error release navigation command (corresponding to a first error release command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) of the operation switch 954 as an error release unit, and outputs these error occurrence commands and error release navigation commands as serial data in a serial manner as a payout main serial data transmission signal to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, if an error occurs with respect to the payout operation after a predetermined time has elapsed since power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed and payout control is started, this payout control program releases the error based on a detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954 and stops the output of warning information corresponding to the error (error release control means).

In addition, this dispensing control program outputs a door frame open command (first door open command) when a detection signal (door frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame open switch 618, and outputs a main frame open command (first main frame open command) when a detection signal (main frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the main frame open switch 619. On the other hand, this dispensing control program also outputs a door frame close command (first door frame close command) when a detection signal (door frame close detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame open switch 618, and outputs a main frame close command (first main frame close command) when a detection signal (main frame close detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the main frame open switch 619.

The dispensing control input circuit 952b does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals as detection signals from the various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the dispensing control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from the dispensing control system reset described below. In other words, the dispensing control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit in which the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to its various input terminals is not reset by the dispensing control system reset described below, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type with an emitter terminal grounded to ground (GND), and is composed of a payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information inputted to various input terminals for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and a payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function that does not have a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is inputted. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit in which information for outputting various signals inputted to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is reset by a payout control system reset described later, and a signal based on that information is not outputted from its various output terminals at all. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not inputted. In other words, the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is configured as a circuit in which the information for outputting the various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is not reset by the dispensing control system reset described below, and signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The detection signals from the ball exhaustion detection sensor 827, which detects the exhaustion of game balls in the supply passage of the ball guide unit 820 of the payout unit 800, the payout detection sensor 842, which detects game balls released from the payout outlets 831b, 832b of the payout device 830, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840, which detects the rotation of the payout blade 839, are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. For the sake of explanation below, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

In addition, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618, which detects the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the main frame opening switch 619, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, which detects whether the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in Figure 1 is full of stored game balls, is first input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the handle relay terminal board 315, the power supply board 931, and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 in serial data format at the input terminal of its serial input port via the payout control input circuit 952b, and outputs the operation signal (detection signal) of the operation switch 954 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a has successfully received various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, which then outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 1310.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb from the output terminal of its serial output port, and thereby transmits various commands as serial data from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 has successfully received various commands as serial data from the dispensing control board 951, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to inform the dispensing control board 951. This signal (main payout ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a also outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which outputs a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 834 from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d from the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which outputs a drive signal to the error LED display 860b to display the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display 860b.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display that displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following: For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it notifies that it is "normal", when the number "0" is displayed, it notifies that it is "connection abnormal" (specifically, that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951), when the number "1" is displayed, it notifies that it is "ball out" (specifically, that there are no game balls in the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 827), when the number "2" is displayed, it notifies that it is "ball stuck" (specifically, that at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotor and the game ball are engaged near the entrance, making it difficult for the payout rotor to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 840 detects ... 2, a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842; when the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, the number of payout retry attempts has reached a preset upper limit); when the number "6" is displayed, a "full" has occurred (specifically, the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279); when the number "7" is displayed, a "CR not connected" has occurred (electrical connection has been cut somewhere between the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6); and when the number "9" is displayed, a "stocked (there are prize balls in stock (unpaid))" has occurred (specifically, the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a preset number).

The payout control MPU 952a also outputs the number of game balls actually paid out, etc., from the output terminal of a specified output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, which then outputs the number of game balls actually paid out, etc., to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor not shown.

Furthermore, the payout control board 951 outputs various information related to the game (game information) from the main control board 1310 via resistors (not shown) to the external terminal board 784. The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (configured with built-in infrared LEDs and photo ICs), and is configured to transmit the number of game balls and various information (game information, error content related to the payout operation of game balls or a notice that an error has occurred) to a hall computer installed in the game center (hall) via these multiple photocouplers.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by multiple photocouplers to prevent the hall computer from malfunctioning or breaking down due to an abnormal voltage being applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1, and also to prevent the hall computer from malfunctioning or breaking down due to an abnormal voltage being applied from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 which proceeds with the game or the payout control board 951 which controls the payout, etc. The hall computer monitors the player's play by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball loan request signal from the ball loan button 328 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 329 are first input to the CR unit 6 via the degree display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be loaned in accordance with the ball loan request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, and this signal is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the CR unit input/output circuit 952e. The CR unit 6 also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls lent out, and outputs a signal to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the degree display board 365 to display the remaining balance on the ball lending and return display unit 330, and this signal is input to the ball lending and return display unit 330. The CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending and return display unit 330 is also configured to receive the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880.

The power supply board 931, which supplies various voltages to the dispensing control board 951, is equipped with a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the dispensing control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor BC1 allows the dispensing control MPU 952a to store various information in the dispensing control built-in RAM (dispensing memory unit) during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control input circuit 952b, and the dispensing control MPU 952a judges it as a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the dispensing control built-in RAM, and the information is completely erased (cleared) from the dispensing control built-in RAM by the dispensing control MPU 952a using this as a trigger. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the game ball lending device connection terminal board]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6, and between the CR unit 6 and the point display board 365 will be described with reference to Fig. 71. As shown in Fig. 71, the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, and also relays the electrical connection between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the point display board 365 (to be precise, the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the point display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880, the CR unit 6 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay terminal board 880 and the point display board 365 are electrically connected). The CR unit 6 and the board of the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, the board of the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, the board of the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880, and the board of the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the degree display board 365 are electrically connected by each wiring (harness). In addition, AC 24V described later from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, direct current +12V (DC +12V, hereafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V using an internal voltage generation circuit (not shown) and supplies this voltage, together with the ground LG, to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, while also supplying it to the degree display board 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880.

The degree display board 365 has a ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, mounted on its component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328 on the ball lending unit 360, a return button 329, which is a push button switch, mounted on a position corresponding to the return button 329 on the ball lending unit 360, and a ball lending/return display unit 330, which is a segment display, mounted on a position corresponding to the remaining loaned amount display unit 363 on the ball lending unit 360.

The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the switch of the ball lending button 328 is turned on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is input to the CR unit 6 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the switch of the return button 329 is turned on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input to the CR unit 6 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

The ball lending/return display unit 330 has three segment displays arranged in a row, and the lighting of these three-digit segment displays is controlled by a so-called dynamic lighting method, which sequentially drives each digit of the three-digit segment displays. By controlling the lighting in this way, the ball lending/return display unit 330 can display the remaining balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6, or display errors in the CR unit 6. When the ball lending/return display unit 330 receives digit signals DG0-DG2 (a total of three signals) for specifying one of the three-digit segment displays, and segment drive signals SEG-A-SEG-G (a total of seven signals) for specifying the content to be displayed by lighting up the specified one-digit segment display from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880, the one-digit segment displays are sequentially illuminated according to the input digit signals DG0-DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A-SEG-G, and the content displayed by the illumination of these three-digit segment displays can be viewed through the remaining loan display unit 363.

The CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the degree display board 365 adjacent to the ball lending/return display unit 330. This CR unit lamp 365d receives a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending possible signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 generates the predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 using an internal voltage generation circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are active and ball lending is possible, the logic of the ball lending possible signal TDL is controlled to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be seen through the remaining loan display unit 363. In addition, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending/return display unit 330 through a current limiting resistor implemented on the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

When the ball loan button 328 is pressed and the ball loan operation signal TDS from the ball loan button 328 is input from the degree display board 365 through the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball etc. loan device connection terminal board 869, the CR unit 6 outputs a ball loan request signal BRDY to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball etc. loan device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 then outputs a BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of loaned balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, equivalent to 100 yen) in one payout operation, to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball etc. loan device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input outputs an EXS signal to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to inform the CR unit 6 that one payout operation has started or ended, and outputs a PRDY signal to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to inform the CR unit 6 that a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is possible or impossible. For example, if the hall staff or the like has preset the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed twice in succession, and when 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out next, for a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen.

When the return button 329 is pressed and a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the point display board 365 through the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, the CR unit 6 ejects and returns the prepaid card from an insertion port (not shown). This returned prepaid card stores the remaining balance obtained by subtracting the amount equivalent to the number of game balls dispensed as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board 931
Next, a brief description will be given of the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG. The power supply board 931 electrically connects and disconnects the 24 volt AC (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment. 5. A power switch 934 for switching on and off the power supply, a power supply control unit 935 for generating various power supplies, and a control unit for controlling the launching of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 by the launching solenoid 682 and the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG. It is equipped with a launch control unit 953 that controls ball delivery using the delivery solenoid 255.

[7-3-1. Power supply control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies the 24 volt alternating current (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment when the power switch 934 is operated, a power factor correction circuit 935b that improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a smoothing circuit 935c that smoothes the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and a power supply creation circuit 935d that creates various DC power supplies from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to supply to various boards.

[7-3-2. Launch control section]
The launch control section 953, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball sending control by the ball sending solenoid 255, is mainly composed of a launch control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 302, a detection signal from a handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 302, and a detection signal from a single button operation sensor 312 that detects whether the launch (launch) of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will, via the handle relay terminal board 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal that notifies the player is input to the launch control circuit 953a via the payout control board 951.

The launch control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for shooting (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and controls the output to the launch solenoid 682, while at the same time controlling the ball sending member of the ball sending unit 250 to receive one of the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 and send the received game ball to the ball launching device 650 by outputting a constant current to the ball sending solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal board 315.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
In contrast to this first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG, as shown in FIG. 72, is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 and exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the performance display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460 shown in FIG. 19, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, while controlling the sound of music, sound effects, etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds calendar information specifying the year, month, and day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, and a volume adjustment volume 1510a that adjusts the volume of the music, sound effects, etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the presentation includes a peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, such as a sub-control program that controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on and that controls the presentation operation after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, and various information (e.g., game board, It is equipped with a peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores various information (such as information for managing schedule data that specifies the screen to be drawn on the side performance display device 1600 and schedule data that specifies the light emission modes of various LEDs, etc.), a peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores various information that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of when a jackpot game state has occurred and information for managing special performance flags, etc.), and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as ``peripheral control external WDT 1511e'') for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can only retain the stored contents for the time it takes for power to be restored after a momentary power outage, and loses its contents if power is cut off for a long period of time (if a long-term power outage occurs), whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power from a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as the "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"), allowing it to retain its stored contents for approximately 50 hours. By providing the SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is no longer supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is no longer able to retain its stored contents and loses its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a system is out of control, and when this timer expires, a hardware reset is applied. In other words, if the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to clear the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period of time (until the timer expires), a reset is applied. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within the certain period of time, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so a reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has multiple built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it transmits game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to the lamp drive board 4170 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), and transmits game board side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 to the motor drive board via the serial I/O port for the motor drive board and the peripheral control output circuit. The motor drive board 4180 is sent to the motor drive board 4180, door side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is sent from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is sent from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the performance operation unit 400 and the detection signal from the pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressure operation unit 405 are serialized by a door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided in the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and this serialized performance operation unit detection data is input from the door side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit via the serial I/O port for performance operation unit detection of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

The detection signals from various detection switches (e.g., photosensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit via a peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input and output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as the "peripheral control built-in WDT") and uses the peripheral control built-in WDT in conjunction with the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to diagnose whether the system itself is out of control.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in Fig. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is composed of a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa at the center, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, a peripheral control various serial I/O port 1511ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, a peripheral control various parallel I/O port 1511ag, and a peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, etc.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data from the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while reading and writing various data from the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

In addition, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading and writing various data from the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a dedicated controller that transfers data independently between storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It has four channels, DMA0 to DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac communicates, via the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, between the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In order to transfer data independently, data is read from and written to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, while data is read from and written to input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

In addition, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac independently transfers data between storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d that are external to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak that are built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. To transfer data, data is read from and written to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and external bus 1511h, while data is read from and written to input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad is a dedicated controller that controls the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral bus 1511ai, and external bus 1511h to exchange various data between the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak.

The various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae include a serial I/O port for the lamp drive board, a serial I/O port for the motor drive board, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for acquiring information from the performance operation unit.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a system is running out of control, and when this timer times out, a hardware reset is applied. In other words, when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, if it does not output a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer times out), a reset is applied. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within the certain period, it can restart the timer count, so a reset is not applied.

The peripheral control various parallel I/O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and serializes detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 using a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving this serialized movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the motor drive board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-brightness white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that a jackpot game state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag are electrically connected directly to each other, shortening the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag, thereby taking measures against noise in the lighting control of the LED, which is important in the game. The lighting control of the LED is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the other LEDs, etc., except for this LED, are executed in the peripheral control unit regular process described later.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume control volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into 1024 levels of values from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source described later) is controlled to set the volume to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob.

In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the hall staff of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, and notification sounds for notifying the contents of the game performance (for example, making the screen displayed on the game board performance display device 1600 more impressive, notifying the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.) are also played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. However, the notification sounds and notification sounds are played completely independent of volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and the volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (the sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the board volume divided into seven levels described above. As a result, for example, even if a hall staff member or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects coming from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be low, but when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is committing a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is low, it is possible to prevent the hall staff member or the like from being difficult to notice the malfunction or the player's fraudulent act due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be low so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, while the volume of the advertising sound can be high to make the screen unfolding on the game board side performance display device 1600 more impressive in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral Control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, etc. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, sound generation schedule data for generating music, sound effects, etc., and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by screen data that specifies the configuration of the screen being arranged in chronological order, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is specified. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by light emission data that specifies the light emission modes of various LEDs being arranged in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by sound command data that is arranged in chronological order, and the order in which the music and sound effects are played is specified. This sound command data specifies an output channel number for specifying which of a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later is to be used, and a track number for specifying which of a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is to be incorporated with sound data such as music and sound effects. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in chronological order, and specifies the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Some of the various control programs stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, while others are copied to various control program copy areas of peripheral control RAM 1511c (described below) when power is turned on, and then read and executed. Also, some of the various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from peripheral control ROM 1511b, while others are copied to various control data copy areas of peripheral control RAM 1511c (described below) when power is turned on, and then read.

In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b includes, as one of the various control programs that control the RTC control unit 4165, a brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side performance display device 1600. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness that occurs with aging of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the game board side performance display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight, and obtains the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and corrects the obtained brightness setting information based on the correction information. This correction information is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. The brightness setting information, as described below, includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 in 5% increments within a range from 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600. For example, based on the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information obtained for this 75% is used. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80%, which is an additional 5% of the positive information, and if 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information obtained for this 75%.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral Control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a backup management subject work area 1511ca for exclusively storing information to be backed up among various information updated by the execution of various control programs, a first backup area 1511cb and a second backup area 1511cc for exclusively storing copies of the various information stored in the backup management subject work area 1511ca, a various control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing copies of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, a various control data copy area 1511ce for exclusively storing copies of various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and a non-backup management subject work area 1511cf for exclusively storing information not to be backed up among various information updated by the execution of various control programs.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored after a momentary or power outage), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf to clear it to zero, whereas the backup managed work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc are cleared to zero when the power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on).

The backup management target work area 1511ca is composed of Bank0 (1fr), which is dedicated to storing, as a backup target, the performance information (1fr), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit regular processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and Bank0 (1ms), which is dedicated to storing, as a backup target, the performance information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs described later. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the memory area for storing various information, and the "0" following "Bank" means that it is a memory area that is normally used to store various information that is updated by the execution of various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the memory area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Furthermore, "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4", which are provided in the area spanning from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc described below, have the same memory area size as "Bank 0". As described below, when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to inform the peripheral control MPU 1511a that it is in a state where it can accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Therefore, each time a V blank signal is input, in other words, every frame (1 frame), the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and therefore "(1fr)" is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" respectively (the same meaning is also used for performance information (1fr) and performance backup information (1fr) described below)). "(1 ms)" is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" because, as described below, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs (the same meaning is also used for the performance information (1 ms) and the performance backup information (1 ms) described below).

Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab, a received command memory area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad, and a schedule data memory area 1511cae. The lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa is a memory area in which game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab is a memory area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT is set for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. The received command memory area 1511cac is a memory area in which the main control The RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad is a memory area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set, and the schedule data memory area 1511cae is a memory area in which various schedule data corresponding to commands received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) is set based on the commands received. In the schedule data memory area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce is read and set, and in some cases, various schedule data is read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and set.

Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a motor transmission data memory area 1511caf on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, a motor drive board transmission data memory area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah, a performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai, and a drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak, etc. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf is a memory area in which door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is set. The motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag is a memory area in which game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is set. The movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah is a memory area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 is set. The performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai is a memory area in which various detection switches provided on the performance operation unit 400 are set. It is a storage area in which various information (for example, rotation (direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the press operation unit 405, etc., created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 400) is set, which is obtained by acquiring the rotation (direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the press operation unit 405 based on detection signals from the switches, and the drawing status information acquisition storage area 1511cak is a storage area in which various information is set, which is obtained by acquiring the frequency of malfunctions and the occurrence state of malfunctions between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance display drive board 4450 based on a LOCKN signal (described later) that is output by the performance display drive board 4450 when it receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control board 1510 and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data.

The lamp drive board transmission data memory area 1511caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data memory area 1511cab in Bank0 (1fr), and the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmission data memory area 1511caf and the motor drive board transmission data memory area 1511cag in Bank0 (1ms) are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing described below is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa, and when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa. Each time the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit routine processing is executed, and for example, when game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit routine processing, processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT that was set in the first area of lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa when the previous peripheral control unit routine processing was executed.

When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the first area of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board, and when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. Each time the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. Peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and for example, when door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control unit regular processing, processing proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT that was set in the first area of frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab when the previous peripheral control unit regular processing was executed.

When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described below is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the first area of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board, and when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, for example, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the process proceeds based on the door side motor drive data STM-DAT that was set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed.

When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag, and when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag. Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag. When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, for example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT that was set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed.

Next, we will explain the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, which are dedicated to storing copies of the performance information, which is the various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs, each consisting of two banks, are managed as one page. The performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1fr) to the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the performance information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1ms) to the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. The consistency of one page is determined by whether the contents of the two banks that make up the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb manages two pairs as one page: Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match, and whether the contents of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) match.

In addition, the backup second area 1511cc has Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair, with a total of two pairs being managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match, and whether the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

In this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb is an area for managing two pairs as one page, one pair consisting of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair consisting of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), and the backup second area 1511cc is an area for managing two pairs as one page, one pair consisting of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair consisting of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms). Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1fr) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the performance information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, and the program that executes these high-speed copies by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is common. In other words, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and performance information (1ms) are managed using a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral Control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing backup targets among various information updated by the execution of various control programs, and a backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are not cleared to zero even when a power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 instructs the start of a RAM clear performance and a game state when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored after a momentary stop or blackout) (for example, when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power). This is completely different from the above-mentioned backup management target work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c being cleared to zero. In addition, after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for setting the mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, a history of when a jackpot game state occurred) can be cleared, while the content (item) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c is not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. In this respect, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

The backup management target work area 1511da is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) which exclusively stores various information (SRAM) that continues across days, such as information for managing the history of occurrence of jackpot game states and information for managing special performance flags, as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the name of Bank0 (SRAM), "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the memory area for storing various information, as described above, and the "0" following "Bank" means that it is a memory area that is normally used to store various information that is updated by the execution of various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the memory area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. And, "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area spanning from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc described later have the same memory area size as "Bank0". "(SRAM)" is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d external to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is the target for backup (the same meaning is also used for performance information (SRAM) and performance backup information (SRAM) described below).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc are described, which are dedicated to storing copies of the performance information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc are managed as one page, with two banks as one pair. The performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (SRAM) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The consistency of one page is determined by whether the contents of the two banks that make up the page match.

Specifically, the first backup area 1511db is managed as a page, with Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

The second backup area 1511dc also consists of a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), which are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the first backup area 1511db is an area for managing a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page, and the second backup area 1511dc is an area for managing a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
The liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 and controls the sound of the music and sound effects etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, has a built-in sound source for controlling the sound of music and sound effects etc. (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in sound source") as shown in FIG. 72, and also has a built-in sound source VDP (Video Display a liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data for the screens displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460; an audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194; and a door frame side performance transmitter 1512b for transmitting serialized drawing data to the door frame side performance display device 460 to a performance display drive board 4450 located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored within the plate unit 320. the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511; a differential circuit 1512e that differentiates, into a positive signal and a negative signal, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511; and a forced switching circuit 1512f that receives a signal from the differential circuit 1512e in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, and when a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, connects the circuit to transmit this signal, but when a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, connects the circuit to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, sprite data used for displaying screens and images described later, such as ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), operation menu background image data used for displaying an operation menu background image described later, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, volume setting icon image data used for displaying a volume adjustment icon described later, and the like, are stored. In addition, main body frame back image data used for displaying a main body frame back image in which the position of each part on the back of the main body frame 4 is visible from the player's perspective, service mode screen image data used for displaying a service mode screen, break timer setting screen image data used for displaying a break timer setting screen, and break screen image data used for displaying a break screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying suggestion display objects for encouraging the player to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the performance operation unit 400.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts schedule data for screen generation corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, sets it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and copies the first screen data of the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control ROM 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting the screen data from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the next screen data following the first screen data from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one, starting from the first screen data, according to the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the first sound command data of the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, sets it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and transfers the first sound command data of the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control R After extracting the sound command data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the OM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the next sound command data following the first sound command data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a when a V blank signal is input. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one starting from the first sound command data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
In addition to the built-in sound source mentioned above, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in VRAM") which, when screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, extracts game board side character data and upper tray side character data from the LCD and sound control ROM 1512b based on this input screen data, as shown in FIG. 74, creates sprite data, and generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data generated on its built-in VRAM, which is for the game board side performance display device 1600, from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600, and outputs (transmits) drawing data for the door frame side performance display device 460 from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, thereby synchronizing the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

The drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side performance display device 1600, while the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output (transmitted) from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 which is located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored within the plate unit 320. In this way, the drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side performance display device 1600, as described above. Since the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side performance display device 1600 are each attached to the game board 5, the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600 is short. However, the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, as described above. Since the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5, while the performance display drive board 4450 is stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and then the performance display drive board 4450 is extremely long compared to channel CH1, making it extremely susceptible to the effects of noise. For this reason, for channel CH2, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is significantly longer than that for channel CH1, the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d uses a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics, Inc., making it less susceptible to the effects of noise.

Channel CH1 is LVDS (Low Voltage Differential
The channel CH1 uses a differential interface based on a serial method called 4610d Signaling, whereas the channel CH2 uses an interface based on a parallel method. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, namely, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronous signals, namely, a horizontal synchronous signal, a vertical synchronous signal, and a clock signal, and is serialized by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 4610d and transmitted to the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The various serialized signals are then restored to parallel signals by the performance display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side performance display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs one screen (one frame) of screen data to be displayed on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on this input screen data, creates sprite data, and generates one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be displayed on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460. is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side performance display device 1600 is output from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600, and image data for the door frame side performance display device 460 is output (transmitted) from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. In other words, "one screen (one frame) of screen data" refers to data for generating one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 on the built-in VRAM.

In addition, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600, and outputs (transmits) image data for the door frame side performance display device 460 from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When this is done, a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to inform that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so the interval at which the V blank signal is output is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives this V blank signal, it executes the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described below. The interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the LCD size of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. The interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted.

The sound source built-in VDP 1512a uses a frame buffer system. This "frame buffer system" is a system in which one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is stored in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM), and one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame) stored in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source as shown in FIG. 74, and incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects into tracks according to the track number specified in the sound command data, sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number, and serializes the music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, and outputs them as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and in addition to the sound data of the performance sounds such as music and sound effects and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume thereof, the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a incorporate sound data of the notification sounds for notifying the hall staff of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume thereof. Specifically, for the performance sounds, the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sounds, the maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending at all on the volume adjustment based on the rotating operation of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the performance sounds can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 to switch to a setting mode described later.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a combine the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a with a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used, and amplify the volume of this combined effect sound to the master volume value that is actually the volume played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, and serialize this amplified effect sound and output it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized performance sound is at the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value so that the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 becomes the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the performance sound, the sound data of the performance sound incorporated in the track to be used among the multiple tracks and the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the performance sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized performance sound is amplified to the master volume value that is actually the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified performance sound is serialized and transmitted as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the alarm sound, the sound data of the alarm sound incorporated in the track being used is mixed with the maximum volume that is not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, which is set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the alarm sound incorporated in the track being used, and the volume of this mixed alarm sound is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that is actually played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified alarm sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Here, a brief explanation of the control of playing an alarm sound to notify parlor staff of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 when the sound effect is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be given. First, the sub-volume value of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the alarm sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the alarm sound volume is set to maximum volume are mixed together, and the volume of this mixed sound effect and alarm sound are amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that is actually played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified sound effect and alarm sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, the only sound that actually flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is the notification sound at the maximum volume. At this time, since the performance sound is muted, it is not played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the performance sound proceeds according to the schedule data for sound generation described above. In this embodiment, the notification sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the performance sound that has been proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation that has been forcibly set to mute is set again as the sub-volume value to the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, if the volume has been adjusted by switching to the setting mode by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400, it is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted performance sound), and is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, when the sound effects are being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and an alarm sound is played to notify the parlor staff of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the sound effects is muted and the alarm sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. However, since this muted sound effects progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, when the alarm sound stops being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the sound effects do not resume from the point where the alarm sound started, but rather from the point where it progressed according to the sound generation schedule data until the predetermined period of time had elapsed since the alarm sound started.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b pre-stores game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and upper tray side character data for drawing in the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, and also pre-stores various sound data such as music, sound effects, alert sounds, and notification sounds.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When serialized audio data is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c transmits the right-side audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and transmits the left-side audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882. As a result, music and sound effects according to various performances are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as differential serial data for the left and right sides between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. This means that even if the positive and negative signals of the left audio data are affected by noise, when the noise components on the positive and negative signals are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to form a single left audio data, the noise components cancel each other out, eliminating the noise components, and thus providing a noise countermeasure.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side performance transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, namely, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronous signals, namely, a horizontal synchronous signal, a vertical synchronous signal, and a clock signal, and the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, totaling 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d are each composed of 6 bits, totaling 18 bits, so the upper 6 bits of each video signal are input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. The lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, so the lower 2 bits containing weak color information are invalidated even though they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

When the three video signals, red, green, and blue video signals, and the three sync signals, horizontal, vertical, and clock signals, which are the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, are input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d serializes the three video signals, red, green, and blue video signals, and the three sync signals, horizontal, vertical, and clock signals, into differential type serial signals (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd., and transmits these various signals from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 using only a differential one-pair cable.

As described above, the drawing data output from channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side performance display device 1600, so the length of the wiring required for the path (first path) from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600 is short, but the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output (transmitted) from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 to the door frame side performance display device 460, so the length of the wiring required for the path (second path) from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 is much longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, making it extremely susceptible to the effects of noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in Fig. 1, various wirings must be passed along the open side of the main body frame 4 on the closed side opposite the locking unit 700 shown in Fig. 5 to electrically connect various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side to various boards provided on the door frame 3 side, such as the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 provided on the door frame 3. However, in addition to the payout device 830, a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged on the closed side of the main body frame 4, which can guide the game balls paid out by this payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 and can branch and guide the paid out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the upper tray 321 is full of game balls.
5, which is a unit made up of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 6 and other boards supplied with power from the pachinko island equipment, is disposed below the main body frame 4. In this way, the various wirings electrically connecting the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are routed near the payout device 830, the full tank branch unit 770, the power supply board 931, etc., and are in an environment subject to noise caused by the driving of the payout motor 834 provided on the payout device 830, as well as noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game balls and noise that has invaded the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Corporation is adopted for the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, making it less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, as described above, a differential one pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, but this differential one pair cable is not a parallel line in which two wires are simply arranged in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair cable.

Here, we will briefly explain the case where parallel wires are used as a differential one-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver. For channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 adopts a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise. However, with only this hardware configuration, the serial data in the parallel wires may be corrupted by noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the game balls, noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. If affected, the noise is not cancelled (removed) when received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 mounted on the performance display drive board 4450 housed within the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, so the serial data is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in an affected state, and the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 as distorted data different from the normal data, causing a problem that an image resembling a snow storm is displayed in the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, making it impossible to discern what the image is.

Therefore, in this embodiment, for channel CH2 of the sound source-embedded VDP 1512a, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1 of the sound source-embedded VDP 1512a, a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Inc. is adopted in the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 to make it less susceptible to the effects of noise. In addition to this hardware configuration, a twisted pair cable is adopted as a differential one pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver, which is capable of canceling (removing) noise on the receiving side even if the differential method serial data is affected by noise that has entered the wiring. As a result, even if the serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable by noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the game balls, noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the noise is cancelled (removed) when it is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, so that the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is reliably received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side performance display device 460, so that the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side performance display device 460. By cancelling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent images such as sandstorms that make it impossible to recognize what the image is, from being displayed on the door frame side performance display device 460, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play. This helps prevent players from losing motivation to play due to noise.

In this embodiment, between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, that is, between the transmitter and receiver, there are a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally constructed, but are assembled separately, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. After the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4, various wiring such as harnesses and twisted cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, so that the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side can be electrically connected to the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. With this configuration, after opening the door frame 3 from the main frame 4 and removing the various wiring, the door frame 3 can be removed from the main frame 4 to perform maintenance on the main frame 4 and the door frame 3. If a problem with the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3' can be attached to the main frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the various wiring from the various boards on the door frame 3' side can be electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 on the main frame 4 side, thereby electrically connecting the various boards on the main frame 4 side to the various boards on the door frame 3' side.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 adopts a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) noise on the receiving side even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring is adopted as a differential one pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, the boards between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the boards between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the boards between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive board 4450 are each electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the power wiring and wiring that transmits various other signals are each electrically connected by a harness. As a result, in the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, a power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. Therefore, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are each formed with the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern at a predetermined distance from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver crosses multiple relay terminal boards, namely the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, a problem occurs in that a part of the signal transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise or the output level of the signal decreases between the input and output of the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these multiple relay terminal boards. Therefore, in this embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these multiple relay terminal boards.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power wiring and the wiring that transmits various other signals are electrically connected by harnesses, with one of the twisted pair cables being red and the other being gray, and the wiring that supplies power in the harness being red and the other multiple wirings being gray. Note that the wiring that supplies power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differentiating circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, the forced switching circuit 1512f receives the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, which is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e and input. In this differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential type serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side performance display device 460 to check whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or during the period when the pachinko machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600. The forced switching circuit 1512f is configured to connect the circuit to transmit two signals when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, and to connect the circuit to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and to the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, so that the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and to the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data to the performance display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and during the period when the machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600.

The performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V, which receives serial signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 via the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described below, restores the various serialized signals to parallel signals, and outputs them to the door frame side performance display device 460.

The door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it outputs a LOCKN signal (described later) to inform the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is met based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a to generate an image to inform the game board side performance display device 1600, and outputs the image to the game board side performance display device 1600, thereby displaying it in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the user.

When the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, it outputs a LOCKN signal (described later) to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can determine that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem with the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, while when the LOCKN signal is not input, it determines that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is a problem with the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, and controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to output an alert image to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred with the liquid crystal display device on the upper tray side. Please call a store clerk.") to the game board side performance display device 1600, and controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to output an alert sound to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred with the liquid crystal display device on the upper tray side.") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, thereby playing the alert sound from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. This allows notifications to be made by notification images displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and notification sounds that are repeatedly played from speakers or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for decorative illumination provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be lit up.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
The RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, is configured with the RTC 4165a at its core, as shown in Fig. 72. This RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as the "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") in which calendar information and time information are held. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). This allows the RTC 4165a to update and retain calendar information and time information using power supplied from the battery 4165b even if power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a and sets it in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and is able to display effects based on the acquired calendar information and time information on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. Examples of such effects include a screen of a Christmas tree or reindeer on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 on December 25th, or a screen performing a New Year countdown on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 on New Year's Eve. The calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the game board side performance display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. When the game board side performance display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 in 5% increments over a range from 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

In addition to calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores input date and time information, which is the date and hour, minute, and second when the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information were first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa.

When the backlights of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 are cold cathode fluorescent tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the backlight ON/OFF or only turns it ON.

The various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information, is set on the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. On the production line, in order to perform various tests, such as display tests of the gaming board side performance display device 1600, for example, the input date and time information is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second input on the production line as the date and time when the gaming board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on.

In this way, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa can store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (such as the probability of a low or high probability jackpot game state occurring), such as brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is of the LED type, and input date and time information.

In addition, the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright or too dark for the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 set at the time of manufacture depending on the environment of the hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400, it is possible to switch to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. After the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for setting the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600, a screen for setting the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, it is possible to reset the calendar information and time information, and adjust the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 to the desired brightness. This adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LEDs stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the brightness correction program described above to correct the decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is an LED type. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 to identify the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, acquires calendar information specifying the year, month, and day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second to identify the current date and time, and acquires brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 in 5% increments over a range from 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information previously stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if it has already been six months since the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, based on the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, corresponding correction information (e.g., 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness becomes 80%, which is 5% higher than this 75%, which is the obtained correction information. The brightness of the backlight is adjusted and turned on, and if 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is 75% plus the obtained correction information of 10%.

The current date and time may be determined by directly acquiring calendar information specifying the year, month, and date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or the current date and time may be determined by acquiring the current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 and the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the peripheral control unit power-on process described below.

[834. Volume Control]
As described above, the volume control volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music and sound effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the volume control volume 1510a has a resistance value that can be changed by rotating the knob, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob from an analog value to a digital value, and converts it into 1024 levels of values from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512 a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation of the knob. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the hall staff of the occurrence of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, and notification sounds for notifying the contents of the game performance (for example, making the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 more impressive, notifying the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.) are also played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sounds and notification sounds are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, and the volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) by a program.

Unlike the board volume, which is divided into seven stages as described above, the volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. As a result, even if, for example, a hall staff member or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the sound effects such as music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be low, but when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is cheating, a warning sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound effects is low, it is possible to prevent hall staff and the like from having difficulty noticing malfunctions or player cheating due to the warning sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume that is set by adjusting the volume by rotating the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, while the volume of the advertising sound can be increased to make the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 more impressive in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a more advantageous gaming state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 to switch to the setting mode. After the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for setting the mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration in a customer waiting state, a screen for setting the mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to the desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode. Specifically, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a is converted from an analog value to a digital value by the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and a predetermined value is added or subtracted from this converted value in response to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400, thereby increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume. This adjusted volume is updated as a sub-volume value for the tracks in which sound data for performance sounds such as music and sound effects are incorporated among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the performance sounds, but is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above-mentioned alert sounds and notification sounds.

In this way, in this embodiment, there are two ways to adjust the volume of music and sound effects: by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, or by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400. Since the volume adjustment volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to always keep the main body frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. In that case, the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a can be rotated by the hall staff. However, the volume adjusted by the hall staff may be too low for the player to hear the music and sound effects, or may be too high for the player to hear the music and sound effects. Therefore, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, if the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a specified time, or if the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600, a screen for entering the setting mode will be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and the volume of the music and sound effects can be adjusted to the desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 in accordance with this setting mode screen. This allows the player to adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to the desired volume, so if the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too low and the music and sound effects are difficult to hear, the player can operate the dial operation unit 401 or press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 to increase the volume to the desired volume, or if the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too high and the music and sound effects are too loud, the player can operate the dial operation unit 401 or press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 to decrease the volume to the desired volume.

In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not being played for a predetermined period of time and is in a waiting state for customers and the demonstration by the game board side performance display device 1600 is repeated (for example, 10 times), the volume adjusted by the player who was previously seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing is cancelled and the volume is initialized. This volume initialization is set to the volume adjusted by the hall staff, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall staff by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. As a result, if a player who played while seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time felt that the adjusted volume was low and that the music and sound effects were difficult to hear, a player who is currently seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can increase the volume to the desired level by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400, and if a player who played while seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time felt that the adjusted volume was high and that the music and sound effects were loud, a player who is currently seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can decrease the volume to the desired level by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400.

[8. Power Supply System]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 75 and 76. Figure 75 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine, and Figure 76 is a block diagram continuing from Figure 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, followed by the power supplied to each control board, etc. Note that the grounds (GND) of the various boards and the grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931, and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island equipment. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is turned on. is supplied to the power supply board 931, allowing the pachinko machine 1 to be powered on.

As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 is equipped with a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from 24 volts AC (24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, and the launch control unit 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball sending solenoid 255 of the ball sending unit 250 shown in FIG. 1.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply creation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 via the power supply board 931, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies the AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. This power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create direct current +37V (DC +37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes ripples from the +37V supplied, smoothing the +37V and supplying it to the launch control circuit 953a and power supply circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953.

Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and capacitor BC1 supplies backup power to the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built into the dispense control MPU 952a of the dispense control unit 952 in the dispense control board 951.

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as the driving power source to adjust the drive current to be output to the launch solenoid 682 in order to launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 5a shown in FIG. 1 with a launch strength (launch strength) corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 302, while outputting a constant current to the ball sending solenoid 255 of the ball sending unit 250, so that the ball sending member of the ball sending unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, and sends the received game ball to the ball launching device 650.

The power supply generating circuit 935d generates DC +5V (DC +5V, hereafter referred to as "+5V"), DC +12V (DC +12V, hereafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC +24V (DC +24V, hereafter referred to as "+24V") from the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c, and supplies these to the dispensing control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The power supply system to which +5V is applied and supplied is the +5V power supply line, the power supply system to which +12V is applied and supplied is the +12V power supply line, and the power supply system to which +24V is applied and supplied is the +24V power supply line.

The +5V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d is supplied to the dispensing control board 951, as described below. The +5V supplied to the dispensing control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. The +12V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951. This +5V generating circuit 1310g generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from the +12V from the dispensing control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM of the dispensing control board 951 and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the dispensing control board 951. In other words, the +5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 flows toward the power terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and the current flows toward the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM, which is in the forward direction due to the diode PD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1. In this way, the capacitor BC1 can be charged by being supplied with +5V by an electrical connection method in which the +5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 flows to the dispensing control board 951 and then returns from the dispensing control board 951 to the power supply board 931. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power supply circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the dispensing control board 951, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the dispensing control board 951 as the dispensing VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a due to the diode PD0, and the dispensing control MPU 952a does not operate, the memory contents are retained by supplying the dispensing VBB to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, the +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is in the forward direction due to the diode MD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. In this way, the capacitor BC0 can be charged by being supplied with +5V by an electrical connection method in which the +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied to the main control board 1310 and then from the dispensing control board 951 to the power supply board 931. As a result, when the +12V generated by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the +5V generating circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V, the charge stored in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 as the main VBB, so that the current is prevented from flowing through the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by the diode MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, but the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, so that the memory contents are maintained. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the above diode MD0 and the above capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, an overview of the voltages supplied to each control board, etc. will be provided, followed by an explanation of the voltages supplied primarily to the dispensing control board and the voltages supplied to the main control board.

The three voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the dispensing control board 951 as shown in FIG. 75, and of these three voltages, the two voltages, +12V and +24V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951. The three voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are also supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and are supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 via this frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively.

The three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are respectively supplied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 76(a). The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, blinking signals, and gradation lighting signals to the various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 outputs drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the game board 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a +3.3V generation circuit 1510b that generates direct current 3.3V (DC +3.3V, hereafter referred to as "+3.3V") from the +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, the +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side performance display device 1600.

In response to this, the three types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, as shown in FIG. 76(b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is equipped with a +9V generation circuit 194a that creates direct current +9V (DC +9V, hereafter referred to as "+9V") from the +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. In addition to the +9V created by the +9V generation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, are supplied to various decorative boards, etc. of the door frame 3.

The +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is also supplied to the upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x creates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3V created by the upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to the various electronic components that make up the LCD module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, as well as to the upper tray side LCD module backlight power supply circuit 4450y and the door frame side performance display device 460. The voltage created by the upper tray side LCD module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side performance display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a and the like of the payout control unit 952. The +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b and the like of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal conveying the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game center (hall). The hall computer monitors the player's play by obtaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is not used by the payout control board 951 at all, but is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in Fig. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generating circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, etc., in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, etc. The +5V generating circuit 1310g receives +12V from the power supply board 931 via the output control board 951, and generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which the +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is applied and supplied becomes the +5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the circuit is configured so that the +5V power line created by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected, so that the +5V power line created by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to the various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 is not electrically connected to the various electronic components of other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a, etc. The +12V from the dispensing control board 951 is supplied, for example, to the main control input circuit 1310b, etc., and the +24V from the dispensing control board 951 is supplied, for example, to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the dispensing control board 951, and monitors signs of a power failure or momentary interruption of these +12V and +24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of a power failure or momentary interruption of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control board 951. The power failure warning signal is also input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. In addition, the power outage warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, as shown in FIG. 76(b), and is also input to the door frame decoration board, etc. via this frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to the two power lines, the +12V power line and the +24V power line, respectively, and is therefore able to more accurately detect signs of a power failure or momentary interruption, etc., compared to monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 69 will be described with reference to Figs. 77 to 79. Fig. 77 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, Fig. 78 is a circuit diagram showing the power failure monitoring circuit, and Fig. 79 is a circuit diagram showing the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in Fig. 75 will be described, followed by the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, various input/output signals to the main control MPU, and the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510.

The main control board 1310 is mainly composed of the main control MPU 1310a, main control input circuit 1310b, main control output circuit 1310c, main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, +5V generation circuit 1310g, and main control filter circuit 1310h shown in Figs. 69 and 75, as well as the main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and the main control crystal oscillator MX0 (24 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal, as shown in Fig. 77.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in Fig. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h is mainly composed of a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics, magnetically shielded with ferrite. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has a first terminal to which +5V generated by a +5V generating circuit 1310g is applied, a second terminal to which is grounded (GND), and a third terminal to which +5V with noise components removed is output. The +5V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC0, the other end of which is grounded (GND), so that ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) are first removed and the voltage is smoothed.

The +5V output from terminal 3 is electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC1 and electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), which are grounded to ground (GND), to further remove ripple and smooth the voltage. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. Note that if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC3, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed to further remove ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to ground (GND).

In addition, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the capacitor MC3 and the anode terminal of the diode MD0. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 through a resistor MR0. In other words, the +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 through the diode MD0. As a result, as described above, when the +12V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the output control board 951 and the +5V generating circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V, the charge stored in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Therefore, since the current is prevented from flowing through the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by the diode MD0, the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, but the main VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM, thereby retaining the memory contents.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
The +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 as shown in Fig. 77. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC5, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit can be set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. Specifically, when the +5V input to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 reaches a threshold value (e.g., 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The output terminal is an open collector output type, with one end electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR1, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC6, which is grounded to ground (GND). This capacitor MC6 removes ripples and smoothes them out. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR1, and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is input to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, while when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is less than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is input to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are both negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes less than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC7, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed and ripples are removed. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in Fig. 77. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC8, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. With +5V applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, the main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is the output terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input to it. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the divided wave of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b is a circuit to which detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in Fig. 69 are input, as well as operation signals (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in Fig. 70. The circuit configuration to which the detection signals from each switch are input is the same, so here, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is operated when clearing the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on, or when an error is notified after power-on, it is operated to cancel the error, and has a function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on and a function of canceling the error after power-on (after the period during which it functions as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on). Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the dispensing control board 951 has, when an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954 within a predetermined period from power-on, it is judged to be a RAM clear signal for clearing the main control built-in RAM and performs a process of clearing the main control built-in RAM.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal with a logic LOW is input from the dispensing control board 951 to the main control board 1310, whereas when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal with a logic HI is input from the dispensing control board 951 (this point will be explained in detail later).

The transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the dispensing control board 951 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on is electrically connected to one end of the pull-up resistor MR2, which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via resistor MR3, as shown in Fig. 77. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4, which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR5, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (MIC10A) shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input without inverting it).

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the dispensing control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the dispensing control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and input with a logic LOW, whereas when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal from the dispensing control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and input with a logic HI.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR3 and MR4 and transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an operation signal from operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, a logically LOW operation signal is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR0, turning transistor MTR0 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR5, and a logically HI operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this is not an instruction to perform a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal, which has been pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has a logic HI, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, turning the transistor MTR0 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954, which has a logic LOW, is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this is an instruction to perform a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the dispensing control board 951. In other words, between the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951, in order to suppress the effects of noise that may invade the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, a voltage of +12V, which is higher than the control reference voltage of +5V, is used to increase the reliability of the signal. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning hole sensor 4020, the first starting hole sensor 4002, and the second starting hole sensor 4004 that are directly input to the main control board 1310 are pulled up to the +5V side by pull-up resistors, while the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning hole sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003 that are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69 are not directly input to the main control board 1310, and are therefore pulled up to the +12V side by pull-up resistors, just like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltage, +12V and +24V, from the power supply board 931 via the dispensing control board 951, and +12V and +24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, and when it detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, it outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning to the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of a power failure or momentary power failure of +24V, the monitoring of a power failure or momentary power failure of +12V, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is mainly composed of a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR20, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and +5V is applied to the REF terminal, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (set to 2.495V in this embodiment) that serves as the comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC20, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is smoothed by removing ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V with the reference voltage Vref, and the other (MIC21B) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V with the reference voltage Vref. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied to the terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the terminal 2, which is the negative terminal of MIC21A. The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is applied to the terminal 5, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the terminal 6, which is the negative terminal of MIC21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC21, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The +5V applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is smoothed by the capacitor MC21 to remove ripples, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is grounded to ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of +24V power outage or momentary power outage]
As described above, the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 compares the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref to monitor the +24V power supply. The 3rd terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR21, one end of which is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor MR22, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), as shown in Fig. 78, and is also electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the other end of the capacitor MC23, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the 3rd terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC23. The values of resistors MR21 and MR22 are set so that when the +24V power supply experiences a power outage or momentary interruption and the voltage starts to drop from +24V to a preset power outage detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment), the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref.

The output terminal of comparator MIC21A, terminal 1, is an open collector output, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end of capacitor MC24, which is grounded to ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 acts as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic HI is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to ground (GND), and the signal with a logic LOW is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of +12V power outage or momentary power outage]
As described above, the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 compares the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref to monitor the +12V power supply. The 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR24, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and to the other end of the resistor MR25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), as shown in Fig. 78, and is also electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and to the other end of the capacitor MC25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC25. The values of resistors MR24 and MR25 are set so that when the +12V power fails or is momentarily interrupted and the voltage starts to drop from +12V to a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment), the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref.

Terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A described above. As a result, one end is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC24, which is grounded to ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. As described above, capacitor MC24 serves as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic HI is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power outage warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, in response to a change in edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and outputs this stored value (logic) from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and also outputs the inverted value of the stored value (logic) from the negative logic 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. When a signal with a logic LOW is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state and outputs a signal with the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, a signal with the logic of the signal output from 1Q inverted, that is, a signal with the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a signal with a logic HI is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latched state. In addition, when a signal with a logic HI is input to the clear terminal CLR terminal to set the latched state, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 maintains a state in which a signal with a logic LOW is input to the preset terminal PR terminal, so that the D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a signal with a logic HI from the output terminal 1Q terminal (at this time, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 maintains a state in which a signal with the logic of the inverted signal output from 1Q is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal).

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured so that the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, and the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, are grounded to ground (GND), so that there is no change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal from the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors for a power outage or momentary interruption of +24V, and a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors for a power outage or momentary interruption of +12V, at the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, and outputs a signal from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The power supply terminal Vcc terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC22, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The +5V applied to the power supply terminal Vcc terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has ripples removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC22, the ground terminal GND terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the output terminal 1Q terminal, is not electrically connected to the outside.

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function at the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal. This power failure clear signal is output during the main control side power-on process performed by the main control MPU 1310a, which will be described later, and is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state, and at this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state when the power outage clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state with the logic becoming LOW at the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal. In addition, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is output from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the output control board 951 as a power outage warning signal, and is output to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

As shown in Fig. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR26, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27 and to the other end of a resistor MR28, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR29, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (MIC23A) shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input without inverting it).

The circuit consisting of resistors MR27 and MR28 and transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor MTR20 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, the transistor MTR20 is turned ON, and the switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, a signal with a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, turning the transistor MTR20 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and a power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23.

On the other hand, when either the condition that the voltage of +24V is less than the power failure detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is less than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, turning the transistor MTR20 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a power failure warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23.

The main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage warning signal, is configured as an open collector output type circuit as shown in Fig. 78, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 via resistor MR30. The base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor MR30 and is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage via a resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33 and to the other end of a resistor MR34, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), and is also electrically connected to the dispensing control board 951 via a wiring (harness). In addition, when the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the dispensing control board 951 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power line in the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 in the dispensing control board 951, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a shown in FIG. 70.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR30, MR31 and the front-stage transistor MTR21 is the front-stage switch circuit, and the circuit consisting of resistors MR33, MR34 and the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is the rear-stage switch circuit, which is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage and the preceding switch circuit also turns OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR22 in the succeeding stage, is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR32, turning transistor MTR22 in the succeeding stage and the succeeding switch circuit also turns ON. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V, turning the transistor MTR21 ON and the preceding switch circuit ON, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, is pulled down to ground (GND), turning the succeeding transistor MTR22 OFF and the succeeding switch circuit OFF.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, a signal with a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, turning the succeeding transistor MTR22 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the dispensing control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the dispensing control board 951.

On the other hand, when either the condition that the voltage of +24V is less than the power failure detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is less than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, turning the succeeding transistor MTR22 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the downstream transistor MTR22 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor in the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control unit 952 in the dispensing control board 951 via wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, is configured as an open collector output type circuit as shown in FIG. 78, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35 and the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness).
In addition, when the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power line in a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 72, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 72.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR35 and MR36 and transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor MTR23 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning the transistor MTR23 ON and the switch circuit ON.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, a signal with a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, turning the transistor MTR23 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and a peripheral power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either the condition that the voltage of +24V is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, turning the transistor MTR23 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and a peripheral power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b, which transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, each have one transistor, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510 are While the logic is the same, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage warning signal, has two transistors, one in the front stage and one in the rear stage, and the logic of the dispensing power outage warning signal is the inverted logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

In addition, the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a non-inverting buffer ICMIC23, while the collector terminal of transistor MTR22 in the rear stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to the other end of a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951, and the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are mounted on the main control board 1310, and between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, a power outage warning is issued by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage warning signal using +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. However, between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951, and between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards, a power outage warning is issued by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage warning signal using +12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of +5V of the main control MPU 1310a, dispensing control MPU 952a, and peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the master control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to Fig. 77. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the master control MPU 1310a, receives serial data from the dispensing control board 951 shown in Fig. 69 as a dispensing master serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, transmit serial data to be sent to the dispensing control board 951 from the TXA terminal to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb as a main payment serial data transmission signal, and transmit a main payment serial data transmission signal from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the dispensing control board 951, and transmit serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 69 as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the TXB terminal to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, and transmit a main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal), each input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a receives, for example, a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951, which indicates that the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal has been successfully received, via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in Figure 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main pay ACK signal indicating that the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal has been normally received is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the main pay ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or a drive signal is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca for the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the drive signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310 d to the start port solenoid 2107, and outputs drive signals to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca for various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. 69, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs drive signals to the various displays, and outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 951, etc.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to Fig. 79. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 75 via the output control board 951, and the +5V generation circuit 1310g generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted using +12V, which is a higher voltage than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, thereby increasing its reliability.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 has the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit is mainly composed of resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and transistor MTR50. In contrast, the peripheral control board 1510 has a communication interface circuit mainly composed of a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (composed of a built-in infrared LED and photo IC).

+12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacity: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) whose negative terminal is grounded to ground (GND). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness).
As a result, if, for example, a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the discharge control board 951, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 can continue to be applied as +12 V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacity: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a can at least transfer the command set in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission shift register 41aea via the serial management unit 1310aec, and complete transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main serial data.

As described above, the main serial data transmission signal sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted using a voltage of +12V, which is higher than the control reference voltage of +5V for the main control MPU 1310a, in order to reduce the effects of noise that may enter the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. This increases the reliability of the signal.

In this embodiment, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, when the main control CPU core 1310aa transfers the command set in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the main control serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it as main serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 can transmit a main serial data transmission signal with a logic HI due to +12V.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a is 32 bytes, and since one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data, a maximum of 10 packets of data can be stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. In this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19,200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of transistor MTR50 on the main control board 1310 via resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). Resistor AR10 on the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor that limits the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal, which outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR50, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor MTR50 via a resistor MR51. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR52, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to ground (GND).

The circuit consisting of resistors MR51 and MR52 and transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main loop serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, transistor MTR50 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10 of peripheral control board 1510, so photocoupler AIC10 is turned OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the main loop serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR50, transistor MTR50 is turned ON, and the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10 of peripheral control board 1510, so photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON.

The anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the negative terminal of which is grounded to ground (GND). The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, as well as to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6), which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11 electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler AIC10 changes, and that signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of peripheral control MPU 1511a as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal.

As a result, as described above, if the +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power outage or momentary interruption, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can continue to be applied as +5V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. When a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, the +5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is applied, so that the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 can complete transmission of the data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main serial data, is reliably received by the peripheral control board 1510 without being cut off or missing.

When the logic of the main loop serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor MTR50 OFF and turning the photocoupler AIC10 OFF. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the main loop serial data transmission signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the photocoupler AIC10, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main serial data transmission signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this way, the logic of the main serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same logic as the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this embodiment, measures are taken when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs on the +5V power line to which +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is applied, and the +12V power line to which +12V, which is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50, is applied, causing the control reference voltage and communication voltage to drop. In other words, the +5V power line and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, which uses the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power source, are electrically connected in parallel to the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a, so that even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power line drops, the control reference voltage is applied from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power source, so that the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and the control reference voltage is configured to be connected to the +5V power line by the resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and transistor MTR50. For the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as a communication interface circuit, +12V applied to the +12V power line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50 is electrically connected in parallel with the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source. Even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the communication voltage applied from the +12V power line through the diode MD50 drops, the communication voltage is applied from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source, so that the communication voltage can be maintained. This makes it possible to prevent commands being sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being cut off, and also prevents them from being lost, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive commands being sent. This makes it possible to eliminate the risk of missing commands immediately after a power outage or during a momentary interruption.

In addition, the capacitance of electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h is set to 470 μF, and the capacitance of electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF so that all of the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a can be completely transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which is composed of resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and transistor MTR50 and functions as a communications interface circuit. As a result, even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb can be completely transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as an interface circuit, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb without interruption or loss.

[10. Circuit of the dispensing control board]
Next, the circuit of the dispensing control board 951 shown in Fig. 70 will be described with reference to Figs. 80 to 85. Fig. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the dispensing control unit, Fig. 81 is a circuit diagram showing the dispensing control input circuit, Fig. 82 is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of Fig. 81, Fig. 83 is a circuit diagram showing the dispensing motor drive circuit, Fig. 84 is a circuit diagram showing the CR unit input/output circuit, and Fig. 85 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. First, the dispensing control filter circuit will be described, followed by the circuit of the dispensing control unit, and then the various input/output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board.

[10-1. Dispense control filter circuit]
The payout control filter circuit 951a is mainly composed of a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 as shown in Fig. 80. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics, magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 75, and is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC0, which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V from the power supply board 931 is smoothed by first removing ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The second terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V with noise components removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is electrically connected to the capacitor PC1, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacity: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), so that the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is further smoothed by removing ripples. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal which is the power terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc., which will be described later. Note that, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is applied as +5V for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption occurs to the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the payout control MPU 952a.

The VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC3, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by the capacitor PC3 to further remove ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, is grounded to ground (GND).

In addition, the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the capacitor PC3 and the anode terminal of the diode PD0. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (dispensing control built-in RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The VBB terminal of this dispensing control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 through the resistor PR0. In other words, the +5V smoothed by removing the noise components by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a and is applied to the VBB terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 through the diode PD0. As a result, as described above, when the +5V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB, so that the current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a by the diode PD0, and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, but the payout VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, so that the memory contents are maintained. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of the dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 952 is mainly composed of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a reset signal, a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) as peripheral circuits, in addition to a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, as shown in Fig. 80. Here, we will first explain the payout control system reset, and then explain the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Payout control system reset]
The +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 as shown in FIG. 80. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit can be set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. Specifically, when the +5V input to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the dispensing control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the dispensing control output circuit with reset function 952ca. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC6, which is grounded to ground (GND). This capacitor PC6 acts as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, respectively, while when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is less than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, respectively. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes less than the threshold, the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC7, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed and ripples are removed. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispatch control crystal oscillator]
The +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in Fig. 80. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC8, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0. When +5V is applied to the OE terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is the output terminal.

The OUT terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The dispensing control input circuit 952b is a circuit to which a dispensing power failure notice signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the main frame opening switch 619, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 75, the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in Fig. 70, and the full tank detection sensor 279 via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954, etc. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input, the circuit to which the dispensing power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input, and the circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch is input. In addition, the full tank detection sensor 279 and the various detection switches such as the bulb out detection sensor 827, dispensing detection sensor 842, and rotation detection sensor 840 shown in Figure 70 have output terminals of the open collector output type, so the circuit configurations to which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input are almost identical, and therefore here we will explain the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit to which detection signal from door frame open switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and is turned ON (conductive) when the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4 as shown in FIG. 1, and turned OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR22, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC20, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR23, the other end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a door open signal.

In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and is also pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through the wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor (not shown) of which one end is electrically connected to the +12V power line on the external terminal board 784. When transistor PTR21 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 changes, and that signal is input to external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

Furthermore, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through resistor PR21, and is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through resistor PR24. It is also pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 through resistor PR26. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to resistor PR26 and to the other end of resistor PR27, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 through a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wire (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose other end is electrically connected to the +12V power line in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69. When transistor PTR22 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR20 and capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 caused by the fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that make up the door frame opening switch 618 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, or when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, the circuit consisting of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR20 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and a door frame opening signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. Also, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR21 OFF and the switch circuit OFF.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic HI is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR22 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a main frame door open signal with a logic HI is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20, turning the transistor PTR20 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a door frame opening signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. Also, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5V, turning the transistor PTR21 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND), and an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +5V, turning transistor PTR22 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled down to ground (GND), and a main frame door open signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned ON, and a door frame opening signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, the outer end frame door opening information output signal with a logic of HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal with a logic of HI is input to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned OFF, and a door frame opening signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, the outer end frame door opening information output signal with a logic of LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal with a logic of LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3(b). Circuit to which detection signal from main body frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 is of a normally closed type (NC), and is turned on (conductive) when the body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 1, and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR28, one end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29 and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR30, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28 and is also electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC21, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR21, and is also electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) on the external terminal board 784, one end of which is electrically connected to a +12V power line. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via resistor PR29, and is also pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to resistor PR31 and is also electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR32, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above and is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wire (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose other end is electrically connected to the +12V power line in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69. When transistor PTR24 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR28 and capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the main frame opening switch 619 caused by the fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main frame opening switch 619 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, or when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR29, PR30 and transistor PTR23, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR31, PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619.

When the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR23 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and an outer end frame door opening information output signal with a logic of HI is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR24 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a main frame door open signal with a logic HI is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28, turning the transistor PTR23 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and an outer end frame door opening information output signal with a logic LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28, turning the transistor PTR24 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a main frame door open signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned ON, and the outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic of HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal with a logic of HI is input to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned OFF, and the outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic of LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal with a logic of LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, as described above, even if the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, or if both of these states occur, a main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 cannot determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 based on the main frame door open signal, but it can be used to determine whether the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 are open during normal play. Since an outer end frame door open information output signal is input to the external terminal board 784, this outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and although the hall computer cannot determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 based on the outer end frame door open information output signal, it can determine that a state that does not occur during normal play by the player, that the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 are open, has occurred.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, by adopting normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619, even if the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON (conductive), the door frame 3 will be opened from the main frame 4, and even if the main frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON (conductive), the main frame 4 will be opened from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619, even in the event of a short circuit, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

When the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (normally open (NO)) switches (door frame opening switch 618' and main frame opening switch 619'), the door frame opening switch 618' turns ON (conductive) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, and turns OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is open to the main frame 4. The main frame opening switch 619' turns ON (conductive) when the main frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turns OFF (disconnected) when the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 3 will be released from the main frame 4, and even if the main frame opening switch 619' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the main frame 4 will be released from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618' and the main frame opening switch 619' are normally open switches, even in the event of a disconnection, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c) Circuit to which the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line that transmits a power failure warning signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR40 that is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR40 via a resistor PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR42 that is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR43, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the transistor PTR40 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a dispensing power failure warning signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR41 and PR42 and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two types of voltage, +12V and +24V, from the power supply board 931, and when it detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the power supply control board 951 as a power failure warning via the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power failure or momentary power failure of the +12V and +24V voltages, and when both conditions, that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, are met, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply control board 951 via the wiring (harness) and the logic of the power failure warning signal becomes LOW. When a signal is input to the dispensing control board 951, and either of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is less than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is less than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is met, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via the wiring (harness), and a dispensing power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf are met, that is, when there are no signs of a power outage or momentary interruption of the voltages of +12V and +24V, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the dispensing control board 951, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR40 OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the +12V and/or +24V voltages, a dispensing power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 by the dispensing power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, turning the transistor PTR40 ON, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the dispensing power failure warning signal with the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 being LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

In this way, when there are signs of a power outage or momentary interruption in the +12V and/or +24V voltages, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, whereas when there are no signs of a power outage or momentary interruption in the +12V and +24V voltages, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage of the +12V and/or +24V voltages, a power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, while when there is no sign of a power outage or momentary power outage of the +12V and +24V voltages, the power outage warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the logic of the payout power outage warning signal input to the payout control MPU 952a due to a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e and the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the fall cover unit 270 shown in Fig. 1 is input to the dispensing control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in Fig. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 6. The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type circuit in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR44a, one end of which is electrically connected to a +12V power line, and to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor in the dispensing control board 951. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit that is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The second terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to ground (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor through resistor PR44b, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 through resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed in the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and to the other end of the capacitor PC40, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND). The capacitor PC40 plays the role of a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR47, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (PIC40B) shapes the logic of the signal waveform input to it without inverting it and outputs it). When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a full tank signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR45 and PR46 and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and a signal with a logic HI is input to the payout control board 951. On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and a signal with a logic LOW is input to the payout control board 951.

When the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes HI, which is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 mentioned above, turning the transistor PTR41 ON and also turning the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a full tank signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the signal with a logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 mentioned above, turning off the transistor PTR41 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by resistor PR47, and a full tank signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to a switch circuit consisting of resistors PR45, PR46, and transistor PTR41 via the three-terminal filter for the full tank detection sensor PIC50. However, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the bulb out detection sensor 827 and the dispensing detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 are input directly to each switch circuit without passing through a T-type filter circuit such as the three-terminal filter for the full tank detection sensor PIC50. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the fault cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, the path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long and extremely susceptible to noise compared to the bulb out detection sensor 827, the dispensing detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the dispensing device 830 attached to the main frame 4.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with stored game balls, and when the payout control MPU 952a determines that the storage space is full with stored game balls based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, it performs control to forcibly stop the drive control of the payout motor 834 and stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotor. In other words, if noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a may forcibly stop the drive control of the payout motor 834 and stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotor even if the storage space is not full of stored game balls, or if the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled to rotate the payout rotor to continue paying out game balls even though the storage space is full of stored game balls, and the upstream side of the prize ball passage is filled with game balls, the payout rotor itself cannot rotate and an abnormal load is applied to the payout motor 834, the payout motor 834 becomes overloaded and abnormally heats up, or the mechanism that transmits the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 to the rotational motion of the payout rotor may break down. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent such problems from occurring, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first filtered out by the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor to remove noise components.

[10-2-3(e). Circuit to which operation signals from operation switches are input]
The first and second terminals, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded to ground (GND), and the third and fourth terminals, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the resistor PR49 and to the other end of a resistor PR50, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48 and to the other end of a capacitor PC41, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR51, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 via a resistor PR52. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR53, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR54, the other end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the rear transistor PTR43 changes when the front and rear transistors PTR42 and PTR43 are turned ON/OFF, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a RWMCLR signal.

In addition, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via resistor PR49, and are also pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR44 via resistor PR55. The base terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to resistor PR55 and is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR44 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wire (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of pull-up resistor MR2, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77. When transistor PTR44 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 changes, and this signal is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR48 and capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 954 caused by the fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that make up the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time when the operation switch 954 is pressed.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is the front-stage switch circuit, the circuit consisting of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is the rear-stage switch circuit, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR55, PR56 and transistor PTR44 is the switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on, or to cancel an error when an error is notified after power-on. It has a function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and a function to cancel an error after power-on (after the period during which it functions as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on). The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, while it becomes an error cancellation signal in the function of clearing the error after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on).

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal with a logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, turning the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage ON and the switch circuit in the previous stage ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the next stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR43 in the next stage OFF and the switch circuit in the next stage OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the next stage is pulled up to +5V by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a determines that when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is HI during a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, it does not indicate that a RAM clear should be performed to erase the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from when the power is turned on), it determines that it does not indicate that an error should be cleared.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR48, and an operation signal with a logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, turning the transistor PTR44 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a RAM clear signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control board 1310. When a RAM clear signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, as described above, the RAM clear signal with a logic LOW shown in FIG. 77 is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, turning the transistor MTR0 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR5, and a RAM clear signal with a logic HI is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to input terminal PA0 is HI, main control MPU 1310a determines that this does not indicate an instruction to perform RAM clearing to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and an operation signal with a logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the front stage, turning off the transistor PTR42 in the front stage and turning off the switch circuit in the front stage, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage, is pulled up to +5V by the resistor PR51, turning on the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage and turning on the switch circuit in the rear stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a determines that when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from power-on, this indicates that a RAM clear should be performed to erase the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is LOW after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on), this indicates that an error should be cleared.

When the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled down to ground (GND) by the pull-up resistor PR48, and an operation signal with a logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, turning off the transistor PTR44 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a RAM clear signal with a logic HI is input to the main control board 1310. When a RAM clear signal with a logic HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as described above, inputs the RAM clear signal with a logic HI to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 shown in FIG. 77, turning the transistor MTR0 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a RAM clear signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this is an instruction to perform RAM clearing to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 834 of the dispensing device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d is mainly composed of a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive IC PIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12 and +5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is grounded to the ground (GND). A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via a Zener diode PZD60, and is also electrically connected to the power terminal of the dispensing motor 834.Based on a voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da, +12V or +5V is supplied as a motor drive voltage to terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the Zener diode PZD60, and to the dispensing motor 834.

The drive ICPIC60 has four Darlington power transistors, and in this embodiment, terminals 6 and 7, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are each grounded to ground (GND), and terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, receive the dispensing motor drive signal via resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminal 2, terminal 4, terminal 9, and terminal 11, correspond to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminal 1, terminal 5, terminal 8, and terminal 12, respectively, and when a dispensing motor drive signal is input to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminal 1, terminal 5, terminal 8, and terminal 12 via resistors PR60 to PR63, a drive pulse, which is an excitation signal, is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834. This dispensing motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminal 1, terminal 5, terminal 8, and terminal 12, respectively, via resistors PR60 to PR63. These drive pulses are generated by switching the excitation current flowing through each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the dispensing motor 834, causing the dispensing motor 834 to rotate. When the drive pulses (excitation signals) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) are cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC60, the drive ICPIC60 will be damaged, so as a protection measure, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the above-mentioned Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected in front of terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60.

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting and outputting various signals with the CR unit 6 shown in Fig. 71 will be described. The payout control board 951 receives the ball loan request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 as described above, and is supplied with a predetermined voltage VL (+12V) and ground LG created from AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 71. The payout control board 951 outputs an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out loaned balls is possible or impossible, via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The input/output circuit for inputting and outputting these various signals is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (in which an infrared LED and a phototransistor are built in) as shown in Fig. 84.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 through a resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, while when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 through a resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 through a resistor PR72. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to resistor PR71, and also to one end of a pull-up resistor PR73, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a shown in FIG. 80 via the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the transistor PTR70 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a as the CR connection signal 1.

Meanwhile, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and is also electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR76, the other end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) in the power supply board 931, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. When the transistor PTR71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR71 and PR74 and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning photocoupler PIC70 ON/OFF.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned OFF and pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR70 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1, whose logic is now HI, is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR72, PR76, and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning photocoupler PIC70 ON/OFF.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned OFF and pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal with a logic LOW is input to the power supply board 931.

On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR71 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal with a logic HI is input to the power supply board 931.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 as well as to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 receives the BRDY signal from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of the BRDY signal from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON, whereas when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of the BRDY signal from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR78, the other end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, and the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, and the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, and also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 receives the BRQ from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is ON, whereas when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR80, the other end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from CR unit 6.

The EXS signal, which indicates that a single dispensing operation has started or ended from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, is output to the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 from the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb via resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to one end of resistor PR82, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. Resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82 and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is LOW, photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, whereas when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82 and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL within the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR83 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and is electrically connected to its built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82, and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is LOW, photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS with a logic LOW is input to the built-in control device of CR unit 6. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 turns OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a specified voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the EXS with a logic of HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the same logic as the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function.

The PRDY signal, which indicates whether or not a payout operation for dispensing loaned balls is possible from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU 952a, is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR84. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to one end of resistor PR85, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. Resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85 and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is LOW, photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON, whereas when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85 and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL in the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR86 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and is electrically connected to its built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85, and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is LOW, photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY with a logic LOW is input to the built-in control device of CR unit 6. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a through the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a specified voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the PRDY with a logic of HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same logic as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a through the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to the dispensing control MPU]
Next, we will explain the various input/output signals that are input/output from the input/output terminals of the various input/output ports of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main dispensing serial data reception signal via the dispensing control input circuit 952b. On the other hand, the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, transmits the serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 as a main dispensing serial data transmission signal to the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and transmits the main dispensing serial data transmission signal from the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function to the main control board 1310.

In addition to the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, dispensing power failure warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection signal 1, etc.), each input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a receives, for example, a main dispensing ACK signal from the main control board 1310 indicating that the above-mentioned main dispensing serial data reception signal has been successfully received, via the dispensing control input circuit 952b, and detection signals from the bulb out detection sensor 827, dispensing detection sensor 842, rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are input via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, and the EXS signal and PRDY signal are output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da, and the payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function In addition to outputting a dispensing motor drive signal from the circuit 952ca to the dispensing motor 834 via the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d, for example, a payer ACK signal indicating that the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal has been successfully received is output to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payer ACK signal is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the main control board 1310, and a drive signal for the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the drive signal is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b, etc.

[10-3. Various input/output signals to/from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the dispensing control board 951 and the main control board 1310, and various output signals from the dispensing control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be explained with reference to Figure 85.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals to/from the main control board]
The dispensing control board 951 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 85(a), the dispensing control board 951 outputs the above-mentioned payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, in addition to the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal, main pay ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 951 receives game information signals related to the game, such as the main prize ball number information output signal, 15-round jackpot information output signal, and 2-round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time-saving information output signal, and starting hole winning information output signal, as well as payout power outage warning signals, from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the outer end frame door opening information output signal described above, the payout motor 834 outputs a prize ball number information output signal every time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls, and the main control board 1310 outputs a main prize ball number information output signal, a jackpot information output signal of a 15-round jackpot information output signal and a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, a time reduction information output signal, and a starting hole winning information output signal, and other game information signals to the external terminal board 784. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784. In other words, two signals are output to the external terminal board 784 from the payout control board 951: an outer end frame door opening information output signal, and a prize ball number information output signal, and eight signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310: a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, information output signal during time reduction, and a starting port winning information output signal.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in the game center (hall), not shown, and the hall computer monitors the player's play, etc. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer calculates the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1 by adding up the number of jackpots with two rounds (the number of 2-round jackpots) and the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (the number of 15-round jackpots). Therefore, the hall computer cannot determine the number of 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots from the total number of jackpots, and therefore cannot determine whether the number of jackpots that have actually occurred on the pachinko machine 1 is 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is placed above the pachinko machine 1, and some players refer to the number of times a jackpot game state has occurred, which is displayed on the data counter, when deciding whether or not to play.

However, the number of times the jackpot game state has occurred as displayed on the data counter may actually be biased towards the number of times a 2-round jackpot has occurred, so that even when a player starts playing, there may be only 2-round jackpots occurring and no 15-round jackpots occurring for a while. In this way, although the number of times a jackpot game state has occurred as displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of hope, it may also stimulate the player's gambling spirit more than necessary.

In this embodiment, the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal are output separately to the hall computer as the jackpot information output signal, so that the hall computer can accurately grasp the number of 2-round jackpots and the number of 15-round jackpots. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the jackpots that have actually occurred more frequently in the pachinko machine 1 are 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots, and the data counter can display the number of 15-round jackpots and the number of 2-round jackpots separately, or only the number of 15-round jackpots, as the number of jackpot game states, so that the player's gambling spirit is not unnecessarily stimulated.

In this embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from when the 2-round jackpot occurs until the end of the 2-round jackpot, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also output to the hall computer during the period from when the 15-round jackpot occurs until the end of the 15-round jackpot. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in this embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. Such a method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of output terminals on an external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to a hall computer installed in an amusement facility (hall) will be described with reference to Fig. 86. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of a prize ball base that is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and its rear side is covered by an external terminal board cover 786. Fig. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on the external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal board 784 outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the jackpot information output signal of the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal, the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special pattern display information output signal, the normal pattern display information output signal, the time-saving information output signal, and the starting port winning information output signal when they are input from the payout control board 951.

To briefly explain these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal is a signal that informs the player that a state that does not occur during normal play has occurred, in which the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open; the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that informs the player each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10; the main prize ball number information output signal is a signal that informs the player each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning ports, such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning port 2001, 2201, and the large winning port 2005 shown in FIG. 8, reaches 10; the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that informs the player that a 15-round jackpot has occurred; The information output signal is a signal that indicates that a two-round jackpot has occurred, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring, the special pattern display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the first special pattern display 1403 or the second special pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has ended (stopped) the variable display of the special pattern, the normal pattern display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the normal pattern display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has ended (stopped) the variable display of the normal pattern, the time-saving information output signal is a signal that indicates that a time-saving state is occurring, and the start hole winning information output signal is a signal that indicates that each time a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 shown in FIG. 8.

As shown in FIG. 86, the external terminal board 784 has output terminals PT1 to PT10 arranged horizontally in a row. The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies the user that the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 has actually paid out 10 prize balls, and in this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 has paid out 10 prize balls each time the prize ball number information output signal is input, and can count the number of paid out prize balls to determine the total number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer frame door open information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open, a state that does not occur during normal play, and in this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 are open. When the outer frame door open information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 are open while the outer frame door open information output signal is being input.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal is a signal that conveys that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT3 for 0.128 seconds when the variable display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 has ended (stopped). When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1, and can count the number of times this has happened to determine the total number of times the special symbol has been displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a start port winning information output signal. As described above, the start port winning information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that a game ball has entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8, and in this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT4 for 0.128 seconds each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. When the start port winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a game ball has entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the start port winning information output signal is input, and can count the number of times the start port winning information output signal is input to determine the total number of game balls that have entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 15-round jackpot has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT5 while a 15-round jackpot is occurring. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a 15-round jackpot is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is being input, and can count the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input to determine the total number of times a 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2-round jackpot has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT6 while a 2-round jackpot is occurring. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a 2-round jackpot is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is being input, and can count the number of times the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input to determine the total number of times that a 2-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that conveys that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has finished (stopped) the variable display of the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the output terminal PT7 is output for 0.128 seconds when the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 has finished (stopped). When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can know that the variable display of the normal symbol has finished (stopped) in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1, and can count the number of times to know the total number of times the normal symbol has been displayed variable in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time-saving information output signal. As described above, the time-saving information output signal is a signal that indicates that a time-saving state is occurring, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time-saving state is occurring. When the time-saving information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is able to determine that a time-saving state is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 when the time-saving information output signal is input, and is able to count the number of times the time-saving information output signal is input and determine the total number of times the time-saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT9 while a probability fluctuation is occurring. When the probability fluctuation information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a probability fluctuation is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 when the probability fluctuation information output signal is input, and can count the number of times that the probability fluctuation information output signal is input to determine the total number of times a probability fluctuation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning holes such as the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, the general winning hole 2001, 2201, and the large winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 8 reaches 10 balls, and in this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can know that the pachinko machine 1 is planning to pay out 10 game balls as prize balls each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input, and can count the number of game balls to be paid out and know the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. For example, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning ports, such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001, 2201, and the large winning port 2005, reaches 20 or more, and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is output at intervals of 0.128 seconds so that it does not become one continuous signal for 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2) seconds.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the dispensing control board 951 side, while output terminals PT3 to PT10 are arranged so that various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are output via (passing through) the dispensing control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are each colored, and by electrically connecting wiring having connectors colored the same to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, respectively, it is possible to prevent other wiring from being electrically connected in error. In order to prevent the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side from being mixed with the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 for transmitting the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are arranged in a row from the left center of the external terminal board 784 to the right side. In this respect, it is possible to prevent the wiring for transmitting the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and the wiring for transmitting the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer from being mistakenly electrically connected.

In this embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are each configured to be transmitted to the hall computer from the external terminal board 784. For example, in a state where game balls are no longer being supplied from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some kind of trouble in the pachinko island equipment, if a 15-round jackpot occurs in the pachinko machine 1 at the point when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are running low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to pay out as prize balls will be insufficient, and therefore payout will not be possible (also, for example, if a ball jam or ball clogging occurs in the payout device 830, game balls cannot be paid out unless this can be resolved). In this case, as described above, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side is a signal that notifies the fact that the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. Therefore, when the game balls cannot be paid out, the payout control board 951 cannot output the prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls the hall staff. The hall staff, for example, checks the hose-shaped supply nozzle for supplying game balls from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 720 to identify the location of the ball jam (and also identifies the location of the ball jam or ball jam that occurred in the payout device 830, for example) and resolves it, thereby returning to the state where the game balls are paid out.

However, even when the hall staff is working, the game is still in progress using the main control board 1310. When the hall staff returns to a state where game balls are being paid out after the 15-round jackpot has ended, the payout control board 951 will pay out unpaid game balls one after another. Even though the 15-round jackpot has ended and no 15-round jackpots have occurred, the payout control board 951 will output a prize ball number information output signal that notifies the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 reaches 10. As a result, even though no 15-round jackpots have occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out, which creates a problem in that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 to actually pay out prize balls, that is, as a signal separate from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310 outputs a main prize ball number information output signal as a signal to inform the hall computer of the fact that the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered various winning holes such as the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001 and 2201, and the large winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 8 reaches 10 balls, and transmits the signal to the hall computer via the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles (ball clogging in the supply nozzle, ball clogging or ball clogging in the payout device 830, etc.) occur, the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in this game state can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out during that game state.

[12. Circuit of the performance display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the performance display drive board 4450 which draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460 will be described with reference to Fig. 87. As described above, the performance display drive board 4450 is located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored within the tray unit 320, and is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 450V which draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460. Fig. 87 is a circuit diagram showing the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of the upper tray side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
The liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 is mainly composed of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, as shown in Figure 87.

When serial signals (serial data) using a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Inc. are transmitted as positive and negative signals from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V inputs these signals to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and this common mode choke coil SDL0 is able to separate noise from the positive and negative signals. The positive and negative signals from which noise has been separated are input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals. This resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator) that prevents the positive and negative signals from reflecting at the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively, and prevents distortion of the serial signal.

The door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 restores three video signals, red, green, and blue video signals, and three synchronization signals, horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively (i.e., restores the parallel signals before being serialized). As mentioned above, the red, green, and blue video signals output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a are each 8 bits, but the red, green, and blue video signals that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d are each 6 bits, totaling 18 bits, so the red, green, and blue video signals are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

In addition to the signal from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V is also configured to receive two signals, which are serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, and which are differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510. The forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to connect the circuit to transmit these two signals when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, as described above, while connecting the circuit to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so the two signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, so the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

When the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f transmits the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the serial signal (serial data) using a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d as a positive signal and a negative signal from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. The signal is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is then input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and are then input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that this is a request to output a LOCKN signal, and outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal described later to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 to the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side performance display device 460 to check whether or not there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration in a waiting state for customers. The LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differential circuit 1512e, but has a structure whose data format is completely different from that of the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned differential type serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics, Inc. For this reason, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the signal is not that output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, and determines that the data is abnormal, and outputs a LOCKN signal from a LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the function of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 to output a LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal is used to forcibly output a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal described below, and LOCKN signal output request data having a data format structure different from that of the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby making it possible to check whether the device called the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 are each supplied with +3.3V generated by the upper tray side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in Figure 76, and the GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND terminal, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 are each grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the digital circuitry, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between this terminal and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground for the digital circuitry, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line supplied to the VDD terminal.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between this terminal and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground for the TTL output, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power line supplied to the VDDO terminal.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input. A capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between this terminal and the LVDSGND terminal, which serves as the ground for the LVDS input, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit. A capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between this terminal and the PLLGND terminal, which serves as the ground for the PLL circuit, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power line supplied to the PLLVDD terminal.

When +3.3V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, indicating normal operation, but when the supply of +3.3 is stopped, the logic becomes LOW, indicating power down. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via resistor SDR1, and is electrically connected to one end of varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage on the +3.3V power line supplied via resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal is a terminal for specifying whether the transmission of various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal (described later) is a rising edge (logic transition from LOW to HIGH) or a falling edge (logic transition from HIGH to LOW). In this embodiment, as described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal. Incidentally, if the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3V, the rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal indicates whether or not to permit output from the various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described below. In this embodiment, as described above, the OE terminal is grounded to enable output at all times. Incidentally, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, output is not permitted.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting the operating mode, and the operating mode can be selected by grounding both. There are two operating modes: normal mode and handshake mode. In normal mode, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 restores a parallel signal consisting of three video signals (18-bit video signals) - a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal - and three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signals) - a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal - based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. This is the normal operating mode. In handshake mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request the transmission of a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and receiver. This handshake mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, if the parallel signals that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 restores based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, which are three video signals (18-bit video signals) of red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, and three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signals) of horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal, are abnormal data for some reason and are difficult to display on the door frame side performance display device 460, the normal mode is automatically switched to the handshake mode and a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistor SDR2, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to inform the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the satisfaction. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d transmits a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the connection between the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) at the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily recovered. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 may be electrically connected directly via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is a terminal that outputs a request to transmit a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistor of the performance display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are terminals that output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, that are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) that are input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In this embodiment, the three restored synchronization signals, the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal, are not used, so the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that indicates whether the clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and the data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, as described below. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via resistor SDR3, which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built into the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via resistor SDR4, which is a damping resistor.

The D0 to D17 terminals are data output terminals that output three video signals (18-bit video signals): a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively. The D0 to D5 terminals are 6-bit data output terminals that output blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0, which is a damping resistor. The D6 to D11 terminals are 6-bit data output terminals that output green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1, which is a damping resistor. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via ladder resistor SDRA2, which is a damping resistor.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the performance display drive board 4450, and the door frame side performance display device 460 are electrically connected and share the same ground.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to Figures 88 to 91. Figure 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, Figure 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, Figure 90 is a table showing a continuation of the various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in Figure 89, and Figure 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described, followed by a description of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and a description of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the dispensing control board]
When detection signals are input from various winning switches such as the general winning hole sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting hole sensor 4002, the second starting hole sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in Fig. 69, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a prize ball command to the payout control board to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (a device that communicates with the pachinko machine 1 and drives the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to pay out game balls as loan balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322, which are the storage trays) are electrically connected (such pachinko machines are called "CR machines"). As shown in FIG. 88(a), the prize ball commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents hexadecimal), with command 10H specifying one prize ball, command 11H specifying two prize balls, ..., and command 1EH specifying fifteen prize balls. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 and the ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls as loan balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322, which are storage trays) are installed adjacent to each other in an amusement hall (hall) and the pachinko machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such pachinko machines are called "general machines"). As shown in FIG. 88(b), the prize ball commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 20H to 2EH, with command 20H specifying one prize ball, command 21H specifying two prize balls, ... and command 2EH specifying 15 prize balls. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 88(c), command 30H is provided as a common command for CR machines and general machines, and this command 30H specifies a self-check.
If the sending side does not receive an ACK signal from the receiving side for a predetermined period of time after sending a command, the sending side transmits command 30H and checks whether an ACK signal is received to confirm the connection state. In the case of a CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 checks the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in Figures 89 and 90, are composed of a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a mode indicating a variation of the presentation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in Figures 89 and 90, the various commands are categorized into those related to special chart 1 synchronization effects, those related to special chart 2 synchronization effects, those related to big wins, power-on, those related to regular chart synchronization effects, those related to regular electric role effects, notification displays, status displays, and others.

[13-2-1. Special Chart 1 Synchronized Performance Related]
The special symbol 1 synchronization performance-related commands are based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the commands are composed of commands named "Start special symbol 1 synchronization performance", "Specify special symbol 1", "End special symbol 1 synchronization performance", and "Specify state at time of change" related to the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands are assigned "A*H" as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 1 synchronization performance start command instructs the start of the special pattern synchronization performance with the performance pattern specified in the mode, the special pattern 1 designation command designates a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, the special pattern 1 synchronization performance end command instructs the end of the special pattern 1 synchronization performance, and the variable time state designation command instructs the probability and time-saving state. The probability and time-saving state are composed of a low probability time-saving state that indicates a low probability state and a time-saving state, a high probability time-saving state that indicates a high probability state and a time-saving state, a low probability non-time-saving state that indicates a low probability state and a non-time-saving state, and a high probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high probability state and a non-time-saving state (the low probability non-time-saving state is set as the normal game state). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set higher than that of the low probability state (normal game state), and the time-saving state is, for example, a state in which the time for variably displaying the normal symbols by the normal symbol display device 1402 shown in FIG. 10 is shortened compared to the non-time-saving state (normal game state) and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, so that the number of times the normal lottery result is stopped and displayed by the normal lottery described later in a predetermined time is increased compared to the non-time-saving state, and further, a pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. This state allows players to get a chance to win a special pattern without losing balls by lengthening the period during which the game balls are opened and closed in comparison to the non-time-saving state (normal game state) and increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of the game balls into the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 8 (in other words, compared to the non-time-saving state, there are more decisions to make as to whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces, and when the pair of movable pieces are opened and closed, the period for which the pair of movable pieces are opened and closed is longer, thereby increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of the game balls into the second starting opening 2004).

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the special pattern 1 synchronization performance start command is sent when the special pattern 1 fluctuation starts, the special pattern 1 designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern 1 synchronization performance starts, the special pattern 1 synchronization performance end command is sent when the special pattern 1 fluctuation time has elapsed (when special pattern 1 is confirmed), and the fluctuation time state designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern win/loss information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special Chart 2 Synchronized Performance Related]
The special symbol 2 synchronization performance-related is based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the classification is composed of commands named special symbol 2 synchronization performance start, special symbol 2 designation, and special symbol 2 synchronization performance end, which are related to the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands include "B*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents hexadecimal).
) is assigned ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined based on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 2 synchronization performance start command instructs the start of the special pattern synchronization performance with the performance pattern specified in the mode, the special pattern 2 designation command specifies a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, and the special pattern 2 synchronization performance end command instructs the end of the special pattern 2 synchronization performance.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the special symbol 2 synchronization performance start command is sent when the special symbol 2 starts to change, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the special symbol 2 synchronization performance starts, and the special symbol 2 synchronization performance end command is sent when the special symbol 2 change time has elapsed (when special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
The "jackpot-related" category, as shown in Figure 89, is made up of commands named "jackpot opening", "Nth large prize slot 1 open display", "large prize slot 1 closed display", "large prize slot 1 count display", "jackpot ending", "jackpot pattern display", "small prize opening", "small prize open display", "small prize count display", and "small prize ending". These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, the display command for displaying the Nth opening of the 1st to 16th rounds of the 1st to 16th rounds of the 1st to 16th rounds of the 1st to 16th rounds of the 1st to 16th rounds of the 1st to 16th rounds of the 2nd ...

The small win opening command instructs the start of a small win opening, the small win opening display command instructs the start of a small win opening (when the large winning port 2005 of the start port unit 2100 is open or has started to open during a small win), the small win count display command instructs the large winning port winning presentation during a small win (the presentation when a game ball that has entered the large winning port 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during a small win), and the small win ending command instructs the start of a small win ending.

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, the Nth opening large prize opening command is sent when the large prize opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened in the Nth round), the closing large prize opening 1 display command is sent when the large prize opening 1 is closed (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 starts to close), the large prize opening 1 count display command is sent when the large prize opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large prize opening 1 (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened and when the game ball that entered the large prize opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is sent at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot pattern display command is sent when the large prize opening is opened (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened).

The small win opening command is sent when the small win opening starts, the small win opening display command is sent when the small win opens (when the large winning port 2005 of the start port unit 2100 opens during a small win), the small win count display command is sent when the ball enters the large winning port during a small win (when the game ball that entered the large winning port 2005 during a small win is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the small win ending command is sent when the small win ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power On]
The power-on category consists of commands named "power-on state" and "power-on main control return destination," as shown in FIG. 89. These various commands include the status "D*H " and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1). (This was done).

The power-on state command indicates the start of the RAM clearing effect and the game state. The power-on state command is composed of information that indicates when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated to perform RAM clear when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), information that indicates which state (probability and time-saving state) to return to when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), among the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet type, specifies which copyright of the work it is for and what kind of game specifications it is (for example, a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, and a game specification in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times of special pattern fluctuation (for example, 30 times or 70 times) (so-called ST machine)). In other words, the information of the model code of a pachinko machine is mainly composed of a series code that specifies which type it is, among the max type, middle type, and sweet type that indicate the model type, a copyright code that specifies the copyright of the work, and a game specification code that specifies the game specification (for example, a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, and a game specification in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times of special pattern fluctuation (ST machine)).

The main control return destination command at power on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power on is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69.

The power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command are sent when the main control board is powered on (including when the power is turned on and when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when it recovers from a power outage or momentary power outage, the main control side power-on process described below is executed, and the power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command are sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-5. General-purpose synchronous performance related]
The normal symbol synchronization performance-related commands are based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the commands are composed of commands named "normal symbol synchronization performance start", "normal symbol designation", "normal symbol synchronization performance end", and "change state designation" related to the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands are assigned "E*H" as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal pattern synchronization start command instructs the start of the normal pattern synchronization performance with the performance pattern specified by the mode, the normal pattern designation command designates a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, the normal pattern synchronization end command instructs the end of the normal pattern synchronization performance, and the variable state designation command instructs the probability and time-saving state. As described above, the probability and time-saving state consists of a low-probability time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and a time-saving state, a high-probability time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and a time-saving state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and a non-time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and a non-time-saving state (the low-probability non-time-saving state is set as the normal game state).

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the normal pattern synchronization start command is sent when normal pattern 1 starts to change, the normal pattern designation command is sent immediately after the normal pattern synchronization start, the normal pattern synchronization end command is sent when the normal pattern change time has elapsed (when the normal pattern is confirmed), and the change time state designation command is sent immediately after the normal pattern win/lose information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Regular Electric Role Performance Related]
The normal electric role performance-related relates to a pair of movable pieces shown in Fig. 8 that are opened and closed by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in Fig. 69, and this section is composed of commands named "normal winning opening", "normal power opening display", and "normal winning ending" as shown in Fig. 89. These various commands are assigned "F*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal map opening command instructs the start of normal map opening, the normal power release display command instructs the start of normal power release (when the pair of movable pieces are in a state where they have been opened to the left and right by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107, or when they are about to open), and the normal map ending command instructs the start of normal map ending.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the normal map opening command is sent when the normal map opening starts, the normal power release display command is sent when the normal power is released (when the pair of movable pieces open left and right due to the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107), and the normal map ending command is sent when the normal map ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in Fig. 90, the notification display categories are made up of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door open, and door close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H" (where "H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command instructs the start of a winning abnormality notification when a winning ball is entered into the large winning port other than during a jackpot (when a game ball enters the large winning port 2005 of the start port unit 2100 and the count sensor 4005 detects the game ball even when there is no jackpot). The connection abnormality display command instructs the start of a connection abnormality notification when there is an electrical connection abnormality in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command instructs the start of a disconnection/short circuit abnormality display when there is a disconnection/short circuit in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc., for example. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command instructs the start of a magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69.

The door open command instructs a door open notification when the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the door frame open switch 618 input via the dispensing control board 951 shown in FIG. 70, and the door frame close command instructs the end of the door open notification when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame open switch 618. On the other hand, the main frame open command instructs a main frame open notification when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the main frame open switch 619 input via the dispensing control board 951 shown in FIG. 70, and the main frame close command instructs the end of the main frame open notification when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main frame open switch 619.

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is sent when a big prize is won in the big prize winning port other than during a big win (when the condition device is operating), the connection abnormality display command is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951, the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command is sent when any of the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. is disconnected or shorted, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is sent when an abnormality is detected in the magnetic detection sensor 4024. In addition, the door open command is sent when the door is opened (when the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), and the door frame close command is sent when the door is closed (when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618). The main frame open command is sent when the main frame is detected as open (when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619), and the main frame close command is sent when the main frame is detected as closed (when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in Fig. 90, the status display is made up of commands named Frame Status 1 Command (corresponding to the error occurrence command), Error Clear Navigation Command (corresponding to the error clear command), and Frame Status 2 Command. These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The slot status 1 command, the error clear navigation command, and the slot status 2 command are each commands with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) sent from the dispensing control board 951, and a detailed description of these will be given later. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the slot status 1 command, the error clear navigation command, and the slot status 2 command from the dispensing control board 951, it sets "7*H" as the status as shown in FIG. 90, and sets the received command as the mode as is. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the slot status 1 command, the error clear navigation command, and the slot status 2 command from the dispensing control board 951, it adds the additional information "7*H" to these received commands, thereby forming them into commands with a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted Frame State 1 command is sent when power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when error clear navigation is performed, the Error Clear Navigation command is sent when error clear navigation is performed, and the Frame State 2 command is sent when power is restored and when the frame state changes. Note that these formatted Frame State 1 command, Error Clear Navigation command, and Frame State 2 command are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test-related]
The test-related section is made up of various commands named "test" as shown in Fig. 90. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" represents a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various tests of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, tests of various boards such as the peripheral control unit 1511, LCD display control unit 1512, lamp drive board 4170, motor drive board 4180, and frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in Figure 72).

The test command is sent when the main control board is powered on, the RAM is cleared, and at times other than RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when it recovers from a power outage or momentary power outage, and the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on process described below is executed, and the test command is sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. Others]
Other categories, as shown in Fig. 90, are made up of commands named "Starting hole winning", "Variation shortening operation end designation", "High probability end designation", "Special symbol 1 memory", "Special symbol 2 memory", "Normal symbol memory", "Special symbol 1 memory pre-reading performance", and "Special symbol 2 memory pre-reading performance". These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start hole entry command instructs the start of the start hole entry presentation, and instructs the start of the presentation when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, and the start of the presentation when the game ball enters the second start hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004, respectively. The fluctuation shortening operation end designation command instructs the state transition from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation shortening non-operation state, and is a high probability end designation. The set command instructs a transition from a high probability state to a low probability state, the special symbol 1 storage command conveys 0 to 4 reserved special symbols 1 (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the changing special symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 after a game ball has entered the first start hole 2002 shown in FIG. 8), and the special symbol 2 storage command conveys 0 to 4 reserved special symbols 2 (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the changing special symbols on the second special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 after a game ball has entered the second start hole 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The normal symbol memory command conveys 0 to 4 normal symbol 1 reserved (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 after the game ball has passed through the gate section 2003 shown in FIG. 8), and the special symbol 1 memory pre-reading performance command conveys the number of reserved special symbol 1 reserved balls (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the variation of the normal symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400). This command instructs the start of a look-ahead performance that reads ahead and notifies a preview of the display result by the first special pattern display 1403 based on the reserved special pattern 1 before it is used to display the changing patterns, and the special pattern 2 storage look-ahead performance command instructs the start of a look-ahead performance that reads ahead and notifies a preview of the display result by the second special pattern display 1405 based on the reserved special pattern 2 before the reserved special pattern 2 is used to display the changing special patterns on the second special pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400.

Regarding the timing of sending these various commands, the start hole entry command is sent from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 when the game ball enters the start hole (when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second start hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004) to notify the fact mainly by voice, and the fluctuation reduction operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation confirmation that the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been consumed (after the miss stop period has elapsed), and the high probability end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation confirmation that the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been consumed (after the miss stop period has elapsed). The fixed command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the high probability count in the case of "high probability N times" is consumed and the fluctuation is confirmed (after the miss stop period has elapsed), and the special symbol 1 memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 activation changes (when a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 and there is a reserved number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, and when a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the reserved number decreases). The pattern 2 memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 activation changes (when a game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and there is a reserved number that has not yet been used to display the special pattern variation on the second special pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400, and when a game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is used to display the special pattern variation on the second special pattern display 1405 and the reserved number decreases). The normal pattern memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for normal pattern 1 activation changes (when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and there is a reserved number that has not yet been used to display the special pattern variation on the normal pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400, and when a game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is used to display the special pattern variation on the second special pattern display 1405 and the reserved number decreases). When there are reserved numbers that have not yet been used to display the normal pattern variation in 402, and the reserved number increases when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, or when the reserved number is used to display the normal pattern variation in the normal pattern display 1402 and the reserved number decreases), the special pattern 1 memory read-ahead performance command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1 activation increases (when a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 and the reserved number increases), and the special pattern 2 memory read-ahead performance command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 activation increases (when a game ball enters the second start hole 2004 and the reserved number increases). Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

As described above, the start hole entry command is transmitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly to notify the player of the start hole entry (when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second start hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004) by voice, but how the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 uses the start hole entry command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in addition to notifying the player of the start hole entry by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the command is also used to monitor for the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. In contrast, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start hole entry command, and does not notify the player of the start hole entry by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands received by the main control board from the dispensing control board]
Next, we will explain the various commands received by the main control board 1310 from the dispensing control board 951.

As shown in Figure 91, the classification of various commands from the dispensing control board 951 consists of commands named Slot Status 1, Error Clear Navigation, and Slot Status 2, and the priority is set in the order of Slot Status 1, Error Clear Navigation, and Slot Status 2.

The Frame Status 1 command (corresponding to the error command) has the following statuses: out of bulb, full, 50 or more bulbs in stock, connection abnormality, and CR not connected; for out of bulb, bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit) is set to value 1, for full, bit 1 (B1) is set to value 1, for 50 or more bulbs in stock, bit 2 (B2) is set to value 1, for connection abnormality, bit 3 (B3) is set to value 1, and for CR not connected, bit 4 (B4) is set to value 1. Bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the Frame Status 1 command have B5 set to value 1, B6 set to value 0, and B7 set to value 0.

The error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command) is prepared for ball detection, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. For ball detection, a value of 1 is set to bit 2 (B2), for payout detection sensor error, a value of 1 is set to bit 3 (B3), and for retry error, a value of 1 is set to bit 4 (B4). Here, "payout detection sensor error" indicates whether or not there is a malfunction in the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70. "Retry error" indicates that inconsistent payouts of game balls have been performed repeatedly by the retry operation. Bits (B0), (B1), and bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command are set to 0 for B0, 0 for B1, 0 for B5, 1 for B6, and 0 for B7.

The Frame State 2 command has a "ball removed" status, during which a value of 1 is set to bit 0 (B0). Bits 1 (B1) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 2 command have the following settings: B1 has a value of 0, B2 has a value of 0, B3 has a value of 0, B4 has a value of 0, B5 has a value of 1, B6 has a value of 1, and B7 has a value of 0.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: Slot Status 1 command is sent when power is restored, when the slot status changes, and when error clearance navigation is performed; Error Clear Navigation command is sent when error clearance navigation is performed; and Slot Status 2 command is sent when power is restored and when the slot status changes. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the command sending process of step S558 in the payout control unit main processing of the payout control unit power-on processing described below.

[14. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 69 according to the progress of the game on the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figs. 92 to 94. Fig. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, Fig. 93 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on process in Fig. 92, and Fig. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. First, various random numbers used in game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
The various random numbers used for game control include a jackpot determination random number used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, a reach determination random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach (reach miss) when a jackpot game state is not generated, a variable display pattern random number used to determine the variable display pattern of the special patterns displayed in a variable manner on the first special pattern display 1403 and the second special pattern display 1405 shown in FIG. 69, and a random number used to determine the first special pattern display when a jackpot game state is generated. The following random numbers are provided: a jackpot pattern random number for use in determining the jackpot pattern to be derived and displayed by the first special pattern display device 1403 and the second special pattern display device 1405; a jackpot pattern initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of this jackpot pattern random number; a small win pattern random number for use in determining the small win pattern to be derived and displayed by the first special pattern display device 1403 and the second special pattern display device 1405 when a small win game state is generated; and a small win pattern initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of this small win pattern random number. In addition to these random numbers, there are also prepared random numbers for determining whether or not to open or close the movable piece shown in Figure 8, random numbers for determining an initial value for determining whether or not to win a normal pattern, which are used to determine the initial value of the random number for determining whether or not to win a normal pattern, and random numbers for a normal pattern variable display pattern, which are used to determine the variable display pattern of the normal pattern that is variably displayed on the normal pattern display device 1402 shown in Figure 69.

Of the various random numbers used in this type of game control, the random numbers used to determine jackpots are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the random number for determining a jackpot is updated directly by hardware using the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built into the main control MPU 1310a shown in Fig. 69. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in Fig. 77) input to the main control MPU 1310a. After extracting all values within the predetermined numerical range, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. This type of high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of obtaining the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an as the random number for determining a jackpot.

In contrast, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated within a predetermined fixed range of values from the minimum to the maximum, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control timer interrupt process described below is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum to the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit from the minimum to the maximum value, the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated. This type of counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter." The random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed range of values of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit.

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69 in the main control side power-on processing described later does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off), etc., the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is set by executing an initial value derivation process in which the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69 retrieves an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on the retrieved ID code, the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit executes an ID code derivation process to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter, and this derived fixed value is set. In other words, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning symbol is derived using the ID code, and analysis is prevented by taking two security measures: the first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even using an external device when the ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a, and the second security measure is that the same fixed value is derived based on the ID code by executing an initial value derivation process when the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM is cleared.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit judgment will be explained. For example, even if a person who is trying to illegally acquire game balls paid out as prize balls obtains and disassembles the game board 5 in some way, illegally obtains the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and is able to grasp the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is given a unique code for identifying the individual, so it will be completely different from the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a' equipped with other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the acquired game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', i.e., other pachinko machines 1'. Therefore, even if a momentary interruption is generated at the predetermined intervals obtained by disassembly and analysis, and game balls are passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at the predetermined intervals, it is not possible to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 to generate a game state in which game balls can be received by the second starting opening 2004.

[14-2. Processing when power is turned on on the main control side]
First, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) in use, or an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when ending a subroutine and returning to this routine, and the stack pointer advances each time a new item is added to the stack.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as shown in Figures 92 and 93. When this main control side power-on processing begins, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). This RAM access permission setting allows updates to be made to the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit).

Following step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in Fig. 69 (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310af that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a timer setting value is set in a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT control register") built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started to start timing until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts timing, and if a timer clear setting value is not set in the watchdog timer clear register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT clear register") built into the main control MPU 1310a before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the main control built-in WDT 1310af will forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started and starts timing, if a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the timed time by the main control built-in WDT 1310af will be cleared and timing will be started again. In this way, by repeatedly clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af before the time set by the timer setting value is reached and then starting the timekeeping again, it is possible to monitor whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally.

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power outage clear process (step S14). In this power outage clear process, first, the power outage clear signal is output to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78. This power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between +24V and a reference voltage, or between +12V and a reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. When no power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the logic of this comparison result becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power outage clear process, the power outage clear signal is first output to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, which starts outputting the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of this D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power outage clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, with its logic set to LOW from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latched state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Next, in the electric power clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage, and a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power outage warning voltage after power is turned on and stabilizes, and in this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) are set as the waiting time (wait timer). The determination of whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 described above, as the power outage warning signal.

If, after power-on, the voltage becomes greater than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes, but no power outage warning signal is input, the main control program stops outputting the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Here, the power outage clear signal is input from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a, with its logic set to HI, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to a latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the logic is LOW and input to its preset terminal, the PR terminal, the D-type flip-flop outputs the power outage warning signal from the output terminal, the 1Q terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute a RAM clear process that initializes the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit) for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (game side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program performs this determination based on whether an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, the main control program determines that the operation switch 954 is not operated, judging that it does not instruct to perform RAM clearing, whereas when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, the program determines that the operation switch 954 is operated, judging that it instructs to perform RAM clearing.

In step S16, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20). That is, the main control program makes the RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit)) executable for a predetermined time from the time of power-on (game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit) of the main control MPU 1310a, and is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the program waits until the system that controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 starts up (boots up). In this embodiment, the standby time until booting (boot timer) is set to 2.5 seconds (s).

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. When the power outage warning signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af cannot be cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs the main control side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Note that a detailed explanation of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby processing in step S22 will be provided later.

If it is determined in step S24 that no power outage warning signal has been input, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1 when game information is to be erased, and to 0 when game information is not to be erased. If the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 0 in step S26, that is, when game information is not to be erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

Following step S28, the main control program judges whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off process (power-off) described later (step S30). If they match, the main control program judges whether the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG is a flag indicating whether game backup information such as game information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG have been stored and held in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process has been normally completed, and to a value of 0 when the main control side power-off process has not been normally completed. Note that the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after production for inspection in the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310 will be described in detail later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power cut processing is normally completed, the main control program sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery (step S34). This setting is done by reading the power recovery information from the ROM (i.e., the main control built-in ROM) built into the main control MPU 1310a, and setting this power recovery information in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and the state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with high frequency from fraudulent means (for example, a high frequency output device hidden in the hem of the fraudster's arm) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). This causes the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. to change as various subsequent processes are performed. Therefore, unless the main control power failure process described below is normally completed and the backup flag BK-FLG is not set to a value of 1, the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared, as described below.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30, or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, the main control program clears the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing in response to the input of a detection signal accompanying the operation of the above-mentioned operation switch 954 (payout control side power on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program does this by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. In addition, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates RAM clearing and game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, the main control MPU 1310a retrieves a unique ID code previously stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol win based on this retrieved ID code, and sets this fixed value as the random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol win, which is used to determine the initial value of the random number for determining the normal symbol win described above.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control's built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control's built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt process described below is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, the transmission serial port prescaler corresponding to the various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the dispensing control board 951 and the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the peripheral control board 1510) is set to the communication speed and whether or not parity is enabled, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and allow transmission, etc.

Following step S44, the main control program initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, the gaming machine testing facility initializes the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information when the power is turned on (setting it to output OFF data).

Following step S46, the main control program performs startup settings for the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an shown in Fig. 69 (step S48). Here, the main control program performs settings such as latching and acquiring random numbers in a hardware random number control register built into the main control MPU 1310a to update the jackpot determination random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state, among various random numbers related to the game, by hardware, and sets the startup of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an in the hardware random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is started by these settings, it extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), and when all values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts one value in the predetermined numerical range, and extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Note that when the main control MPU 1310a obtains a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and obtains the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when this latch signal is input from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets this acquired random number as the random number for determining a jackpot.

Following step S48, the main control program reserves the command to be sent when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, a power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 and a main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in order to inform the user that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various commands corresponding to the game information read from the game backup information may be stored in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later. A detailed explanation of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control program sets interrupt permission (step S52). This setting causes the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S42, i.e., every 4 ms.

Following step S52, when a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, that is, when the main control side main processing has begun, the main control program will regulate the execution of the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by receipt of an error clear navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to handle the detection signal input in association with the operation of the operation switch 954, and executes the RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the error clear navigation command for a predetermined time from power-on as described above (game control side power-on operation control means), and regulates the execution of the RAM clear processing even if the error clear navigation command is input after the predetermined time has elapsed (game control side normal operation control means), treating it as a release switch for releasing an error notification associated with an error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error clearing section), which would normally be used to clear an error that occurs during the payout operation, can instead function as an operation section for executing a RAM clear process to start the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as the payout memory section, described later) for a predetermined period of time from when the power is turned on, or as an operation section for clearing an error that occurs during the payout operation of the game balls after the predetermined period of time has elapsed.

The main control program then determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

When no power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-win/lose random number update process (step S56). In this non-win/lose random number update process, the random numbers for reach determination, the random numbers for variable display patterns, the random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot pattern, and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small jackpot pattern, etc., are updated. In this way, in the non-win/lose random number update process, random numbers that are not related to the win/lose determination (jackpot determination) are updated by software. Note that the random numbers for normal pattern hit determination, the random numbers for determining the initial value for normal pattern hit determination, and the random numbers for normal pattern variable display patterns, etc., are also updated by this non-win/lose random number update process.

After step S56, the program returns to step S54, where the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, the program performs a non-win/lose random number update process in step S56, and repeats steps S54 to S56. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as the "main control side main process."

On the other hand, when a power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S58). This setting disables the main control timer interrupt process described below, prevents writing to the main control's built-in RAM, and protects game information from being overwritten.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process is performed as the process in which the power outage clear signal was started to be output in the power outage clear process in step S14. This allows the main control program to release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program stops the drive signals output to the start port solenoid 2107, the attacca solenoid 2108, the first special pattern display 1403, the second special pattern display 1405, the first special reserved number display 1404, the second special reserved number display 1406, the normal pattern display 1402, the normal pattern memory display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407, etc., as shown in FIG. 69 (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information in the working area of the main control internal RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets a prohibition on access to the RAM (step S68). This prohibition on access to the RAM makes it impossible to access the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit), thereby making it possible to prevent updates to the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit).

After step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. The main control program then performs this main control side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and performs main control power-on processing when power is subsequently restored.

In step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32 it is checked whether the main control's power-off processing has been completed normally. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

Here, we will explain the point that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is made following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, we will explain the problems that arise when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is carried out.

As described above, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary interruption or power outage, the charge stored in the hardware, the electrolytic capacitor MC2, is applied as +5V, so that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed within the period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off. This ensures that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off while the player is playing, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is being performed.

However, in an extremely rare phenomenon, when power is restored, the wait time standby process of step S22 starts timing the standby time (boot timer: in this embodiment, set to 2.5 seconds) until the system that controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 by the LCD display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 72 starts (boots), and if an instantaneous interruption or power outage occurs just before reaching that standby time, a charge of +5 V stored in the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, but within a period of approximately 7 ms, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side timer interrupt processing described below is performed, and even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing. As a result, the checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control's built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control's power-on processing will begin again when power is restored.

If this is the case, when power is restored, the main control side power-on process is started and the wait time standby process in step S22 is completed without an instantaneous or power outage. After that, when the checksum calculated in step S28 based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is compared in step S30 with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous or power outage occurred, the checksum values will not match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared in step S38. In other words, there is a problem that when power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by a hall staff member or the like, and the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no intention from the hall staff member or the like to clear the RAM.

Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step S24 to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control built-in WDT 1310af can forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. Although a value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time standby process in step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a as described above, so even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step 24. When a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, when it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 has been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, so that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game cannot proceed and the game information can be prevented from being updated, and the calculation result of the checksum does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 are consistent, so the game information immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. This prevents game information from being initialized immediately before a momentary or power outage occurs when power is restored.

In addition, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step 24 for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. When a power outage warning signal has not been input (i.e., when it is determined by the judgment of step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has not been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing a game, the power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77, and the game information due to the progress of this game is maintained. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control side power failure process consisting of the process of steps S58 to S68, which is a backup process for storing information, and an infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (i.e., the value calculated and stored for the checksum in step S64), when restarted, and therefore does not initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary interruption or power outage occurs. In other words, the game information is restored to the state immediately before the momentary interruption or power outage occurs, and the main control board 1310 can be started.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT 1310af, thereby making it possible to start the main control side power outage processing again without updating the contents of the main control's built-in RAM at all. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power outage processing within the "power supply assurance period during momentary power outage or power outage" of approximately 7 ms determined by hardware, as before. That is, in this embodiment, when a momentary or power outage occurs during the main control side power-on process upon power recovery, and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, and the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the "momentary or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms due to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, then the process in step S24 immediately follows the wait time standby process in step S22. In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and when a power failure warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination in step S24. As long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated, and a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af using such software, it is possible to prevent the progress to the step after step S24 (specifically, the control flow in which the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is set in step S52 to start the main control side timer interrupt processing described later), thereby avoiding the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated. In this way, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the system is divided into two parts: a software part that ensures that the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all, and a hardware part that ensures that the main control's power cut processing is completed reliably and that the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all. By configuring the system in two ways, it is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) from being changed.

Next, the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, in order to inform the user that the power has been turned on (restored), a power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 and a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. Here, we will first explain the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69; in other words, the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not reserve the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game state screen (e.g., a jackpot game presentation screen) in the display area of the game board side presentation display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8, and the main control board 1310 drives the attacca solenoid 2108 to open the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 by the opening/closing member 2107, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and starts driving the attacca solenoid 2108, causing the large prize opening 2005 to transition from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member 2107 to a state in which it is open.

However, when a momentary or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, and thus when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can restore based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot game state as a game state and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can display a screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but cannot display at all which round of the jackpot game state it is. In other words, even if, for example, a gaming ball enters the large prize opening 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69, and the main control board 1310 transmits a large prize opening 1 count display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the number of gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the number of gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005 on the screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state, but cannot display at all which round of the large prize game state (i.e., which round).

In this situation, for example, when the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state is ended, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacca solenoid 2108 and transmits a large prize opening 1 closed display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the large prize opening 2005 to transition from an open state to a closed state by the opening/closing member 2107 (i.e., the start of closing the large prize opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 between rounds), and when the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, it starts driving the attacca solenoid 2108 and transmits a large prize opening 5th open display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the large prize opening 2005 to transition from a closed state by the opening/closing member 2107 to an open state (i.e., the start of opening the large prize opening 2005 for the fifth round). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen corresponding to the probability and time-saving state described above to a screen indicating the start of five rounds of the jackpot game state in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

Also, for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen (for example, a screen informing the player that the movable pieces are being opened) on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to inform the player that the game ball can be received in the second starting hole 2004 and that the game state is favorable to the player, and when the main control board 1310 drives the starting hole solenoid 2107 to open the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 to the left and right, if an instantaneous or power outage occurs and power is then restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the instantaneous or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and the driving of the starting hole solenoid 2107 is started, and the pair of movable pieces transition from a state in which they are approximately vertically standing to a state in which they are opened to the left and right.

However, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 and recover when power is restored. Therefore, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004, generating a gaming state advantageous to the player, and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return to normal by displaying a screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration, but the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display at all in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 a screen informing the player that the gaming state has become advantageous to the player, in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004. For this reason, a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine may be surprised by the occurrence of a momentary or power outage and forget that when power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred was one in which a game ball could be received into the second starting hole 2004. In such a case, even though the game state at the time of power restoration is restored to one in which a game ball can be received into the second starting hole 2004, a screen instructing the game to be played (i.e., a screen instructing the game to put a game ball into the second starting hole 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 at the time of power restoration, and the player may not know what game to play.

As described above, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary or blackout could not be quickly restored after power was restored. In other words, there was a problem that a player seated in front of the pachinko machine would mistakenly think that the pachinko machine's system had frozen when power was restored after a momentary or blackout.

In this embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is restored), in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control side timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, based on the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the peripheral control board 1510 that, for example, in the above example, when a momentary or power outage occurs during the fourth round of the jackpot game state and power is then restored, the main control board 1310 will return to the destination by initiating the drive of the attacca solenoid 2108 and transitioning the jackpot opening 2005 from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member 2107 to a state in which it is open. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the big win game state (i.e., a screen showing which round it is) in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but can display a screen informing that it is a big win game state, that the attacca solenoid 2108 has started to be driven, and that the big win opening 2005 has been opened by the opening and closing member 2107 (for example, a screen saying "It's a big win. The big win opening is open. Please enter the game ball into the big win opening"). Please play your game.") can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which a game ball will enter the large prize opening 2005 after power is restored. Also, for example, in the above example, in a game state in which game balls can be received by the second start opening 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the return destination of the main control board 1310 can be Then, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen informing the player that the start port solenoid 2107 has started to be driven and the pair of movable pieces have been opened to the left and right (for example, a screen informing the player of the message "The movable pieces are being opened. Please play so that the game ball enters the lower start port.") on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and the player seated in front of the pachinko machine can be instructed to play a game in which the game ball enters the second start port 2004 after power is restored. This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 when a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and then power is restored. Therefore, after power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout can be quickly restored. In other words, it is possible to prevent a player seated in front of the pachinko machine from mistaking the system of the pachinko machine for a malfunction, as appearing to be frozen when a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and then power is restored.

Next, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, will be described. When the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the above-mentioned backup process of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power off process consisting of an infinite loop. Therefore, even if a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, the checksum values will not match in the comparison judgment in step S30, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will necessarily be cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on as shown in FIG. 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, so that only the two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, the power-on state command is transmitted first, followed by the power-on main control return destination command. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is transmitted as the first command from the main control board 1310 to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

As described above, the power-on state command is composed of information that instructs the user to clear the RAM when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), information that instructs which state (probability and time-saving state) to return to when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), among the low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state, and information that indicates the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, we will explain the problem that occurs when the power-on state command does not include information that indicates the model code of the pachinko machine.

As mentioned above, the model code of the pachinko machine is used to determine which copyright of the work it is for and what kind of game specifications it has when creating the so-called max type, mid type, or sweet type pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310) (for example, in addition to game specifications in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, there are game specifications in which the number of times the special pattern can fluctuate is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) and a probability fluctuation occurs (so-called ST machine)).

In the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, when the main control boards 1310 are manufactured, main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works may be mixed together.
As a result, workers on the production line may not know which of the multiple types of work copyrights (for example, the copyrights of Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) the main control board 1310 is being sent down the production line to manufacture for which of the multiple types of work copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Movie D), or they may mistakenly believe or believe that even though the main control board 1310 is being sent down the production line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for one of the multiple types of work copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Movie D), it is being sent down the production line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). For this reason, when the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is manufactured on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is mixed, the workers on the manufacturing line cannot confirm which work copyright the main control board 1310 manufactured on the manufacturing line is for, and even for the same work copyright, they cannot confirm which model type (max type, middle type, sweet type) and what game specifications (game specifications in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, or ST machine) are. As a result, when the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is manufactured on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is mixed, and it will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, there were cases where workers on the game board assembly line attached a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that did not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. As a result, there was a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreased.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs and power is restored), in order to transmit a power-on status command including information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine to the peripheral control board 1510, the power-on status command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 and the power-on main control return destination command are created in step S50 and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, during the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the manufacturing line, an operator on the production line of the manufacturer that produces the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310, and based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received by the inspection device from the main control board 1310, the inspection device 201 determines the model code of the pachinko machine, i.e., the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, including the series code for identifying which of the above-mentioned model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next big win game state occurs, By visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for which a special pattern can be changed (such as an ST machine), in addition to the game specification in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for which a special pattern can be changed, it is possible to determine which copyright of the work the main control board 1310 corresponds to, and even for the copyright of the same work, it is possible to determine which model type (one of the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type) and what kind of game specification it is (such as a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big win game state occurs, or an ST machine). As a result, even if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when manufacturing the main control boards 1310 on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the workers in the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, and can send the main control boards 1310 for each copyright of the work to the subsequent game board assembly line. Then, the workers on the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and can prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at an interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in Figures 92 and 93.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control program in the main control board 1310 switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the above-mentioned main control side power-on processing, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, the register bank is switched from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second register bank. Note that in this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to a stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric role control processing described later, the time during which the normal symbol display 1402 is lit according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric role control processing described later, as well as the time of the ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal that informs the payout control board 951 that various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) have been input. Specifically, when the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the change time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, thereby accurately measuring the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input judgment time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input judgment time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input judgment time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0. These various times and the ACK signal input judgment time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program, for example, detects a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020, 4020 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2001, 2201 shown in FIG. 8, detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, detects a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, detects a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 8, detects a game ball that has entered the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, which detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8, the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69, which detects fraudulent acts using a magnet, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69, which informs that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later, are read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. In addition, when the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, which detects the game ball that has entered the first start hole 2002, and the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004, which detects the game ball that has entered the second start hole 2004, are read, the corresponding start hole winning command classified as others shown in FIG. 90 is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, the corresponding start hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and when there is a detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004, the corresponding start hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020, 4020 that detects the game ball that entered the general winning opening 2001, 2201, the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 that detects the game ball that entered the big winning opening 2005, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first starting opening 2002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second starting opening 2004, and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that passed through the gate section 2003 are first read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read the second time is compared with the result read the first time. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again a third time, and the result read the third time is compared with the result read the second time. It is again determined whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again a fourth time, and the result read the fourth time is compared with the result read the third time. It is again determined whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, it is treated as if no game balls have entered the game.

In this way, in the switch input process, the main control program performs a total of two double readings of the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003, by performing a double reading that compares the detection signals from the first to third times and a double reading that compares the detection signals from the second to fourth times, thereby making it possible to avoid false detections due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., and thus improving the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003.

Following step S104, the main control program performs a random number update process (step S106). In this random number update process, the random numbers for the big win symbol and the small win symbol are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random numbers for determining the initial value for the big win symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small win symbol, which are updated in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93, are also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big win symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small win symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further increase randomness. In contrast, the random numbers for the big win symbol and the random numbers for the small win symbol are random numbers related to the win/lose judgment (big win judgment), so the respective counters are counted up only each time this random number update process is performed. In addition, the random numbers for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning combination and the random numbers for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning combination are also updated by this winning/losing random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won is an initial value update type counter that is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. It counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won, from the minimum to the maximum value, the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether or not a jackpot has been determined is updated by this random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won.

In this embodiment, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the big win symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win symbols are updated by the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93, and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. However, if the processing time of this routine becomes uneven each time the interrupt timer occurs and the main control side main process is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer occurs, causing the number of times the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 is executed to become random, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the big win symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win symbols may be updated only in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 is created for paying out game balls based on this input information. If the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify this, and stored in the output information storage area as output information, and a self-check command shown in FIG. 88 is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The created prize ball command and self-check command are then sent to the payout control board 951 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 shown in Figure 8, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls, and since the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to inform the player of this, and stored as output information in the output information memory area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 951.If a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a specified period of time, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, and sent to the payout control board 951. In addition, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, such as when creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 prize balls, the excess number is added to the number of game balls that will be paid out as prize balls based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area in the next prize ball control process, and when the added number of game balls is reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to inform the user of this fact, and the information is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S108, the main control program performs a frame command receiving process (step S110). In the dispensing control board 951, the dispensing control program transmits various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) classified into the status display shown in Fig. 91 (for example, a frame status 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame status 2 command). On the other hand, as described later, the dispensing control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the dispensing operation, and outputs an error release navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the above-mentioned frame command receiving process, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, it stores information to that effect to the payout control board 951 as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The main control program also formats the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified as status displays in FIG. 90 (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command)) and stores it as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. Note that the frame status 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to the first error release command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the winning ball is confirmed. For example, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal is input from the count sensor 4005 when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005), etc., a winning abnormality display command classified as the notification display shown in FIG. 90 is created as an abnormal state, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric role control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric role control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and this obtained random number value is set as the random number for jackpot determination. Then, it is judged whether the random number for jackpot judgment (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot judgment value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM (judging whether a jackpot game state is generated (called a "special lottery").), or it is judged whether the value of the counter for updating the random number for jackpot symbols matches the probability hit judgment value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM (judging whether a probability fluctuation is generated). Here, "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of winning a jackpot changes to a high probability (probability fluctuation) that is set higher than normal (low probability). In this embodiment, as the range of the jackpot judgment value (jackpot judgment range) described above, the value 32668 to the value 32767 is set for low probability and is read from the normal judgment table, while the value 31768 to the value 32767 is set for high probability and is read from the probability fluctuation judgment table. Thus, in the special symbol and special electric device control process in step S114, when determining whether the random number for determining a jackpot (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, this is done based on whether the random number for determining a jackpot (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) is included in the jackpot determination range.

If these determination results are due to the first start hole sensor 4002, various commands related to the special pattern 1 synchronization performance shown in Figure 89 are created, whereas if the lottery result is due to the second start hole sensor 4004, various commands related to the special pattern 2 synchronization performance shown in Figure 89 are created and stored in the transmission information memory area as transmission information. In addition, the output of a lighting signal to the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 is set so as to light up the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 in accordance with the determined special pattern variable display pattern, and stored in the above-mentioned output information memory area as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot game state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related commands shown in FIG. 89 (jackpot opening command, command to display Nth opening of jackpot opening 1, command to display closing of jackpot opening 1, command to display count of jackpot opening 1, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored in a transmission information storage area as transmission information, the output of a drive signal to an attacca solenoid 2108 to open and close the opening/closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is set, and stored in an output information storage area as output information, and the number of times (rounds) that the jackpot opening 2005 changes from a closed state to an open state is set to 2. When the number of rounds is 15, the output of a lighting signal to the 2 round indicator lamp 1407a shown in FIG. 10 is set to light up the 2 round indicator lamp 1407a, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. When the number of rounds is 15, the output of a lighting signal to the 15 round indicator lamp 1407b shown in FIG. 10 is set to light up the 15 round indicator lamp 1407b, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. When the number of rounds is 15, the output of a lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 is set to light up a specified color to indicate the occurrence or absence of a probability fluctuation, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric role control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric role control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning processing, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the result of this determination, when a detection signal has been input to the input terminal, the counter value for updating the random number for determining whether the normal symbol has been hit is extracted and stored as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

This gate information storage area has 0th to 3rd sections (four sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. For example, if gate information is stored in 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the 1st section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the 2nd section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 1st section of the gate information storage, and the gate information in the 3rd section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the 3rd section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the 1st section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the 1st section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information in the 2nd section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 1st section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the 2nd section of the gate information storage and the 3rd section of the gate information storage become an empty area. Here, when gate information is stored in the 1st section to the 3rd section of the gate information storage, the output of the lighting signal of the normal pattern memory indicator 1188 is set based on the above-mentioned gate information so that the total number of the stored gate information is set as a reserved ball and the normal pattern memory indicator 1188 is turned on, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the working area of the RAM built into the main control is read out, and the value of the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has been hit is extracted from the gate information read out to determine whether or not it matches the normal symbol winning determination value previously stored in the ROM built into the main control (called the "normal lottery"). This determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery) determines whether or not to open or close the movable pieces. If this decision is made to open or close the movable pieces are opened in the left and right directions, creating a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second starting hole 2004, creating a game state that is advantageous to the player. The normal pattern variable display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal pattern variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the normal pattern synchronization performance shown in Figure 89 are created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area as transmission information.In addition, the output of a lighting signal to the normal pattern display device 1402 is set so as to light up the normal pattern display device 1402 according to the determined normal pattern variable display pattern, and stored in the above-mentioned output information memory area as output information. Also, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol hits is the same as the normal symbol hit determination value previously stored in the ROM with the built-in main control, various commands related to the normal electric role performance shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2107 is set to open and close the movable piece, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol hits is the same as the normal symbol hit determination value previously stored in the ROM with the built-in main control, a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of a light signal to the normal symbol display device 1402 is set to light up the normal symbol display device 1402 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following step S116, the main control program performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above through the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951 when various commands from the payout control board 951 have been normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, outputs a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the large winning opening 2005 when in a jackpot game state, outputs a drive signal to the start opening solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece, and also outputs various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, time-saving information output information, and a start opening winning information output signal, to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads out the transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In this transmission information, various commands classified as related to special chart 1 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to special chart 2 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to big wins (for example, a large prize opening 1 count display command corresponding to a large prize opening count command based on a detection signal from a count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball entering a large prize opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to normal electric role performance, various commands classified as shown in FIG. 90, various commands classified as notification display (door open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, main body frame close command, etc.), various commands classified as status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command), various commands classified as test related, and various commands classified as other are stored. The main circuit serial data is configured with 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main serial data is composed of a status indicating the type of command with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating the variation of the performance with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and adding them up; this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits various commands as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 can at least transfer the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec, and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main serial data. When power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 93, in order to inform the user that power has been restored, a power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 and a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information, so that the power-on state command is transmitted as main serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. Note that in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, various commands corresponding to the game information read from the game backup information may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In such a case, the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information is first completed, and then the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a slot status 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a slot status 1 command (second error occurrence command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the slot status 1 command, which has the form shown in FIG. 91 and which it has received from the payout control board 951, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a slot status 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error clear navigation command (first error clear command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits an error clear navigation command (second error clear command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error clear navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as an error clear navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main frame open command (first main frame open command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a main frame open command (second main frame open command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (main frame command transmission means, second main frame transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main frame open command, which is in the form shown in FIG. 91, received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a main frame open command, which is in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main frame close command (first main frame close command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a main frame close command (second main frame close command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (main frame command transmission means, second main frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main frame close command, which has the form shown in FIG. 91, received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a main frame close command, which has the form shown in FIG. 90.

In addition, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door open command (first door open command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a door open command (second door frame open command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame close command, which is in the form shown in FIG. 91 and received from the dispensing control board 951, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command, which is in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door close command (first door close command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a door close command (second door close command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door close command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared in step S22 by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, by restarting the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af, the main control MPU 1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

As described above, the main control board 1310 can execute and complete the above-mentioned backup process for storing game information as the game progresses before power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is in progress, and when power is restored, based on the game information for which the backup process has been executed, the main control board 1310 can output to the peripheral control board 1510 the main control return destination command at power on of Figure 89 which instructs the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and attacker solenoid 2108, which are the electrical drive sources due to the port output process of step S118 in this routine, when power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, as the return destination for the game progress by the main control board 1310. In other words, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when power is turned on in step S50 of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 93, the main control board 1310 creates a power-on state command classified as power-on in Figure 89 and a power-on main control return destination command, based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 of the same processing, to inform the user that power has been turned on (power has been restored), and stores them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.In the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 of this routine, these are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on state command, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return the game when power is restored in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 when power is turned on. This allows the game to be quickly restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage when power is restored while the player is playing, and the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return the game can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the player, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 does not appear to be in a frozen state, or in other words, in a frozen state, which prevents the player from mistaking it for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage after power is restored, the game can be prevented from being misunderstood for a malfunction by the player.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in Figure 92. As a result, when the reservation setting for the command to be sent when the power is turned on is made in step S50 of the same process, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on as shown in FIG. 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area of the main control's built-in RAM, so that only the two commands, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area of the main control's built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power-on status command is transmitted as main peripheral serial data to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process is configured to display detailed model information on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310, that is, based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which comprises the above-mentioned series code for identifying which of the model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, in addition to the game specifications in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that a special pattern can fluctuate (ST machine)).

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control units]
[16-1-1. Processing when peripheral control unit is powered on]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. 95. When this peripheral control unit power-on process starts, the performance control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the performance control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a process of determining whether it is a hot start or a cold start, and a process of setting a wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be initialized in an extremely short time. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is in a state where interrupt permission is set, and is able to receive various commands, such as commands regarding the control of game presentations and commands regarding the status of the pachinko machine 1, output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command receiving interrupt processing described below, as shown in Figures 89 and 90.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the performance backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1fr) and Bank 2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb is compared, and the performance backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1ms) and Bank 2 (1ms) is compared. In the backup second area 1511cc, the performance backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) is compared, and the performance backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1ms) and Bank 4 (1ms) is compared. The performance backup information (1 ms) stored in Bank0 (1fr) and Bank1 (1fr) is compared, and if the compared contents match, the performance backup information (1fr) stored in Bank1 (1fr) for Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and the performance backup information (1 ms) stored in Bank1 (1ms) for Bank0 (1ms) are copied back to perform a hot start, whereas if the compared contents do not match (i.e., there is a mismatch), a value of 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are the normally used memory areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, to perform a cold start.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73 is compared with the performance backup information (SRAM) backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in its backup first area 1511db, and the performance backup information (SRAM) backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in its backup second area 1511dc. When the compared contents match, the performance backup information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is copied back to Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used memory area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73, to perform a hot start, whereas when the compared contents do not match (i.e., when they are inconsistent), a value of 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used memory area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, to perform a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to clear it to zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1000, the performance control program performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. 72, and are set in the calendar information storage unit as the current calendar information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and are set in the time information storage unit as the current time information. In addition, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process for the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this brightness setting process for the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and performs a process of adjusting and lighting the brightness of the backlight of the performance display device 1600 on the game board side so that it becomes the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 in 5% increments over a range from 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600.

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 80% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Note that in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, no correction similar to the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side performance display device 1600 described above is performed. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of this LCD display device, preventing the LED brightness from being corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the LCD display device is executed.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing this current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1002, the performance control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing described later, and is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later, which is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is in a state where it is possible to accept screen data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is input. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0. In addition, after the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, it outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1006, the performance control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not equal to the value 1 (it is equal to the value 0), the program returns to step S1008 and repeatedly determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1. By repeating such determinations, the program enters a standby state until the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is to be executed, the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is first set to a value of 1 (step S1009). This steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed.

Following step S1009, the performance control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer start process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start process, a 1 ms interrupt timer is started to execute the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described below, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value of 1 to count the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer has been started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed, thereby initializing the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

Following step S1010, the presentation control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output processing, the presentation control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 72. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board. When this serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board is started, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the multiple LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 is created and set in the lamp data creation processing described later in the lamp data creation processing described later.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies transmission of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board as the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data in the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK.

Whenever a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac reads the remaining game board side light-emitting data stored in the transmission data memory area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side. The serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers and writes the data SL-DAT one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the lamp drive board then transfers the data written in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the one byte of data in the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

In addition, in the lamp data output process, the performance control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in Figure 72. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When this serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created and set in the lamp data creation process described below in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the top address of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data memory area 1511cab to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data in the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK.

Each time a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the LEDs of the frame decoration drive amplifier board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the LEDs of the frame decoration drive amplifier board is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, it transfers the remaining door side light emission data stored in the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs of the frame decoration drive amplifier board. The data STL-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the LED of the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the LED of the frame decoration drive amplifier board transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the LED of the frame decoration drive amplifier board.

Following step S1012, the presentation control program performs a presentation operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this presentation operation unit monitoring process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later performs a presentation operation unit information acquisition process. In the presentation operation unit information acquisition process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later performs a process to acquire information such as the operation of the operation button 410 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the presentation operation unit 400. In the presentation operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is set to acquire information such as the operation of the operation button 410. In this process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described below monitors whether the operation of the operation button 410 is performed and appropriately determines whether the operation of the operation button 410 is reflected in the game presentation.

Following step S1014, the performance control program performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output process, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the display data creation process described below to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 from channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. 74. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. In addition, in the display data output process, if drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capacity of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the output of the generated one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is canceled. This prevents delays in processing time, but may result in dropped frames. However, this allows for a mechanism that prioritizes synchronization between the effects of the multiple LEDs on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 and the multiple LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3, as performed by the lamp data output process in step S1012, and the effects of music and sound effects, etc., that are in sync with the various effects, as performed by the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2, as performed by the sound data output process described below.

Following step S1016, the performance control program performs a sound data output process (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the performance control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described below as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, and outputs sound data of notification sounds and announcement sounds in addition to music and sound effects as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When serialized audio data is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c transmits the right audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and transmits the left audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. This allows music and sound effects to be played in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 in accordance with various performances, as well as notification sounds and announcement sounds to be played in stereo.

Following step S1018, the performance control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the performance control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. For example, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which light emission data, from the first light emission data, among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating light emission modes set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is to be used as the light emission mode for each type of LED.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which sound command data, starting from the first sound command data, should be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a among the sound command data that indicates sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data such as alarm sounds and notification sounds, arranged in chronological order that constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is updated to indicate which drive data from the first drive data is to be output among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data is updated in the motor and solenoid drive process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, as described below. In this motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated every time the process itself is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so even if for some reason the pointer in the motor and solenoid drive process changes from the drive data it was originally supposed to point to to other drive data, the scheduler update process forces it to point to the drive data it was originally supposed to point to.

Following step S1020, the performance control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the performance control program analyzes the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception means) described later (command analysis means). Based on the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the performance control program extracts screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The performance control program analyzes whether the command received from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command for instructing the start of a start port winning performance, a normal pattern memory command for identifying the number of reserved normal patterns (0 to 4), a pattern synchronization performance start command for instructing the start of a pattern synchronization performance, a pattern memory command output when the start reserved number changes, a large prize port 1 count display command (large prize port count command) output every time a game ball is received in the large prize port 2005, or a frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command, full tank error occurrence command) showing the content of full tank shown in Fig. 90 (command analysis means), and recognizes which game state is currently in. Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the performance control program analyzes whether the command received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is a main body frame open command, a main body frame close command, a door open command, or a door frame close command. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command memory area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and in the reception command analysis processing, the performance control program analyzes the various commands stored in the reception command memory area 1511cac. The various commands include the various commands classified as related to special chart 1 synchronization performance shown in FIG. 89, the various commands classified as related to special chart 2 synchronization performance, the various commands classified as related to big wins, the various commands classified as power-on, the various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance, the various commands classified as related to normal electric role performance, the various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 90, the above-mentioned door frame open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, and main body frame close command, as well as the various commands classified as status display such as the error release navigation command (corresponding to the second error release command) and frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), the various commands classified as test-related, and the various commands classified as others.

Following step S1022, the performance control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above include various commands classified as the notification display shown in FIG. 90, the performance control program extracts the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, and the electrical drive source schedule data, which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications, from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In addition, in the warning process, if multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and automatically transitions to other remaining abnormality notifications after the abnormality is resolved. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one anomaly has occurred because another anomaly occurs after the first anomaly has occurred but before the first anomaly has been resolved.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, if the command analyzed by the performance control program in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (step S1022) is one of the various commands classified into the status display shown in FIG. 90, such as the error reset navigation command (second error reset command), the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled in a manner different from the normal performance manner associated with the performance operation, for example, a visual warning is given to the outside using the game board side performance display device 1600 (performance device), the door frame side performance display device 460 (performance device), or a lamp (performance device), or an auditory warning is given to the outside using a speaker (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error reset navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even though the game is in progress, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, which prevents fraudulent acts against the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the performance control program performs an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the performance control program updates the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit and the time information stored in the time information storage unit that were acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. This RCT acquisition information update process updates the time information stored in the time information storage unit, which is the hour, minute, and second, and updates the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, which is the year, month, and day, based on the updated time information.

Following step S1026, the performance control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the performance control program extracts game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the light emission data indicated by the pointer, which is arranged in chronological order and constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emission mode, from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The data is extracted and created, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73.

Following step S1028, the performance control program performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the performance control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and extracts the screen data indicated by the pointer from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) on the built-in VRAM to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

Following step S1030, the performance control program performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the performance control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and extracts the sound command data indicated by the pointer from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for sound generation, and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source, incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and setting the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is started each time the sound data creation process is performed (i.e., each time the peripheral control unit performs steady-state processing), and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a is converted into 1024 levels of values from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6, with board volume 0 being set to mute and board volume 6 being set to maximum volume, with the volume increasing from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled to set the volume to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the sound data is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above, so that music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sounds and announcement sounds are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, and the volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 by a program. Unlike the board volume divided into seven stages described above, the volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a hall staff member or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be low, but when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is committing a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is low, it is possible to prevent the hall staff member or the like from being difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by adjusting the volume by rotating the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, while the volume of the advertising sound can be increased to make the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 more impressive in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a more advantageous game state.

Following step S1032, the performance control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the performance control program copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, respectively, and also copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d to the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab, the received command memory area 1511cac, and the RTC information acquisition record included in Bank 0 (1fr) that is the backup target are backed up for each frame (1frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, each time the peripheral control unit routine process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in the memory area 1511cad and the schedule data memory area 1511cae, to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb as performance backup information (1fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies it to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) to the last address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in the backup first area. All contents are copied in order from the first address of Bank1 (1fr) in the rear 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb, and the contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied in order from the first address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb in a predetermined number of consecutive bytes (e.g., 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) to the last address of Bank0 (1fr) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request cause for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) from the first address to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

In the backup process, for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) that is the backup target, to Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db as performance backup information (SRAM) for each frame (1frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed, and then the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (SRAM) to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied consecutively by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time to the backup first area. All contents are copied in order from the first address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the rear 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) be copied to Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and the contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied in order from the first address of Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, consecutively by a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) from the first address to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request cause for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) from the first address to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

Following step S1034, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1036, the performance control program sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 0 as the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006, initializes the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG by setting it to a value of 0, and repeats the judgment of step S1008 until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below. In other words, in step S1008, the program waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, and if it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, it performs the processing of steps S1009 to S1038, and returns to step S1006 again. In this way, if it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, it performs the processing of steps S1009 to S1038. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit regular processing."

This peripheral control unit routine processing starts with the performance control program first setting the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1009, indicating that the peripheral control unit routine processing is being executed, then in step S1010, it executes the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, and in step S1012, step S1014, ..., and step S1036, it finally completes in step S1038 when it sets the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 0, indicating that the peripheral control unit routine processing has been completed. The peripheral control unit routine processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later, which is executed in response to the input of a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, which indicates that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is in a state where it can accept screen data. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeated approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process which is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the peripheral control unit 1511 is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, as shown in Fig. 72. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 judges whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 as shown in Fig. 96 (step S1045). As described above, this steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Fig. 95 is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed.

When the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing, and is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is not executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is equal to the value 0, i.e., whether the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, and when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in step S1050. This is because, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, if a V blank signal is input and the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed as determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95, and the currently executing peripheral control unit steady-state processing is forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is started from the beginning. In order to prevent this, In step S1009 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and in step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) of FIG. 95, the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. In other words, this is a procedure for when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed by the time the next V blank signal is input after the V blank signal is input, resulting in a so-called processing lag.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing cannot be completed within the time of about 33.3 ms and the processing is delayed, the determination in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95 will result in a standby state until the next V blank signal is input. In other words, the time to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed will be about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. 95, is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit regular processing, but if there is a peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times, not 64 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit regular processing is delayed, the consistency between the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit's normal processing slows down, the progress of the presentation can be reliably maintained.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 95, will be described. When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 judges whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in Fig. 97 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is a counter that counts the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 95 and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed every approximately 33.3 ms, so after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, and the second, ..., and 32nd 1 ms timer interrupts occur in sequence.

When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the routine is terminated. In the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal occurs, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is set to have a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process as the interrupt process priority, but the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, in the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal occurs, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. Then, after the V blank signal is generated and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started again when the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs.

On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 in step S1100, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is incremented by a value of 1 (step S1102). By adding the value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95, and the number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, has been executed, is increased by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 72 are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is performed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive process, DMA serial continuous transmission process is performed to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Here, continuous transmission is performed to the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor by utilizing the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the performance operation unit 400 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the top address of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and starts transmitting the byte of data in the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK.

Each time a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the motor of the frame decoration drive amplifier board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor of the frame decoration drive amplifier board is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, it reads the remaining door side motor drive data stored in the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor of the frame decoration drive amplifier board. The data STM-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor then transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor.

In addition, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing is performed to the motor drive board 4180. Here too, continuous transmission is performed to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board by utilizing the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for the motor drive board is started, first, based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to the motors and solenoids for moving the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 8 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a then specifies transmission of the motor drive board serial I/O port as the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored at the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK.

Whenever a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, it reads the remaining game board side motor drive data stored in the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag. The data SM-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the motor drive board then transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the motor drive clock signal SM-CLK on the game board side, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, a movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches provided on the game board 5 (for example, original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created by determining whether or not detection signals have been input from the various detection switches, and set in the movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The original positions, movable positions, etc. of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in this movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah.

Following step S1106, a production operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals are being input from the various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400, history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, operation history information of the operation button 410, etc.) is created and set in the production operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated can be obtained from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in this production operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, a drawing status information acquisition process is performed (step S1110). In this drawing status information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and set in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. As described above, the LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Specifically, the LOCKN signal is a signal that is output to request the transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The drawing status of the door frame side performance display device 460 can be obtained by obtaining the frequency of malfunctions and the occurrence state of malfunctions between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance display drive board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied and backed up to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, respectively, and the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up to the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, each time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf, motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag, movable body information acquisition memory The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the area 1511cah and the performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai, as performance backup information (1 ms) to Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb, and then quickly copies it to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) of the second backup area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) are copied in a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time to the backup first area. All contents are copied in order from the first address of Bank1 (1 ms) in the rear 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) be copied to Bank2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are copied in order from the first address of Bank2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined number of consecutive bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) in succession, starting from the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, in a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) be copied to Bank4 (1 ms) of the second backup area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the last address of Bank0 (1 ms) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank4 (1 ms) of the second backup area 1511cc.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, various processes related to the performance described above in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the performance progresses within a period of 1 ms. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 95, various processes related to the performance described above in steps S1012 to S1032 are executed as the performance progresses within a period of approximately 33.3 ms. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as is. Therefore, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal occurs, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled, and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing by the occurrence of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, the progress state of the performance can be reliably matched.

As mentioned above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, and the interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are implemented. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly, the time lag caused by the slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 starts transmitting various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a takes this as a trigger to capture 1 byte (8 bits) of information from the main control board serial I/O port built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a into a reception buffer, and when this capture is completed, an interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is performed. The main serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, with the status assigned to the first byte, the mode assigned to the second byte, and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and calculating their sum to the third byte.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200), as shown in FIG. 98. This 1-byte reception period timer sets the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within a period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a retrieves the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I/O port built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1202), and adds (increments) the value of the reception counter SRXC by 1, step S1204. This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times information has been retrieved from the reception buffer, and when the first byte of the main serial data, the status, is retrieved from the reception buffer, the value is 1, when the second byte of the main serial data, the mode, is retrieved from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the third byte of the main serial data, the sum value, is retrieved from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on, etc.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the receive counter SRXC is equal to the value 3, i.e., whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been retrieved from the receive buffer (step S1206). In this determination, it is determined whether the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order.

If the receive counter SRXC is not equal to 3 in step S1206, that is, if the status, which is the first byte of the main loop serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main loop serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main loop serial data, have not yet been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, a 1-byte receive period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte receive period timer in step S1208, a period is set in which the mode, which is the second byte of the main loop serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main loop serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the receive counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, when the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, are retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, the receive counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210) and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which were already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main loop serial data from the main control board 1310, so it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they discharge electrostatically, generating noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is in an environment where it is subject to noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values, calculates their sum (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main control board 1310. This allows the peripheral control MPU 1511a to determine whether the main serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to main serial data that is different from the normal data.

In step S1214, if the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already taken out of the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data are stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 (step S1216), and this routine ends. This receive command memory area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status assigned as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data are stored in the peripheral control unit receive ring buffer of the receive command memory area 1511cac. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and beginning of the buffer are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it returns to the beginning and stores it. When storing the received main loop serial data in the peripheral control unit receive ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the status assigned as the first byte of the main loop serial data in association with the mode assigned as the second byte, and discards the sum value assigned as the third byte.

On the other hand, if the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded, or if, in step S1214, the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is terminated.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process shown in Fig. 75 will be described, which is executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1320) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1302). If it is determined that the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has not been input, the routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this determination, the timer started in step S1320 determines whether 2 microseconds have passed. If 2 microseconds have not passed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has not been input, the routine ends. However, if a power outage warning signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have passed. In other words, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether a power outage warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, was started.

When the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds, power saving process is performed (step S1306). This power saving process reduces the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 by sequentially turning off the backlights of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, turning off the excitation to the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, etc., thereby ensuring stable operation for the period of 20 milliseconds during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby processing, assuming that there are various commands being sent by the main control board 1310, the processing waits for at least 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the command being sent. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the received command is stored in the reception command memory area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 at high speed to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and then copies the contents at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the copying of the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command memory area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb as a request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command memory area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the contents stored in the start address of the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All of the received command memory area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup area 1511cb is copied in order from the top address, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies, as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the received command memory area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored from the top address of the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are copied in order from the top address of the received command memory area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup area 1511cb in a predetermined number of consecutive bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies, as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the receive command memory area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command memory area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in sequence, starting from the first address of the receive command memory area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, in succession of a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies, as a request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the receive command memory area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in order from the first address of the receive command memory area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, consecutively by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Following step S1310, it is determined whether a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input (step S1312). If it is determined that a power outage warning signal has been input, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether the power failure warning signal is input. In other words, the process continues to determine indefinitely whether the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing to determine indefinitely in this manner, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a cannot output a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

In this way, if the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset just before the power outage state occurs. On the other hand, if the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the output of the clear signal is interrupted to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for a period exceeding 2 microseconds, and the determination of step S1302 is passed, if the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, so that it is possible to respond to such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, a description will be given of the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 97. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 shown in Fig. 87 is created. As described above, this LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user when it determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 74 is abnormal data; specifically, it is a signal that is output to request the transmission of a specified data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 reads out LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST from the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. 100 (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, where "B" represents a bit), and the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 is stored as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (step S1502). This determination is made when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data and determines that a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) is being requested to be sent to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (it is normal data) and determines that there is no request to send a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In this shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, in the following order: most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to a value of 1 (step S1506), and this routine is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In this shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same process as the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, in the following order: most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to a value of 0 (step S1510), and this routine is terminated.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then the least significant bit B0 is set to a value of 1 or 0, making it possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0.

[16-1-7. Connection malfunction determination process]
Next, a connection failure determination process will be described which is executed as one of the processes of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Fig. 95. In this connection failure determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in Fig. 87, it is determined whether or not a failure has occurred between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 reads out the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST from the drawing state information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Fig. 73 as shown in Fig. 101 (step S1520). As described above, this LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450. As described above, this LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user when it determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data; specifically, it is a signal that is output to request the transmission of a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 (step S1522). This determination is made by determining whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit)," with the upper four bits B7 to B4 having a value of 0 and the lower four bits B3 to B0 having a value of 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, if the lowest four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lowest four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation judgment value, it is determined that there is no malfunction between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and receiver, and this routine is then terminated.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lowest 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lowest 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation judgment value, it is judged that there is a problem between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (step S1524). This communication check counter CC-CNT counts up (counts the cumulative number of times) the number of times it has been judged that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver in the judgment of step S1522 each time this routine is executed. In addition, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, but is not reset by a momentary or power outage, and is restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power outage when power is restored.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the upper limit value CC-LMT of the cumulative count (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the upper limit value CC-LMT of the cumulative count, it is determined that the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the upper limit value CC-LMT. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the upper limit value CC-LMT of the cumulative count, it is determined that the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, when the cumulative count at which it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, when the cumulative count at which it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is a flag that indicates whether the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT and whether a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is set to a value of 1 when a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and to a value of 0 when the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. Note that the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1, but is not reset by a momentary or power outage and is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the momentary or power outage when power is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, a connection recovery process will be described as one of the processes of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Fig. 95. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure judgment process shown in Fig. 101, and outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (recover) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, while notifying that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 judges whether the screen generation schedule data is being started among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 (step S1540). In this judgment, in the scheduler update process, it is judged whether the pointer is updated to indicate which screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the screen generation schedule data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the performance is progressing according to the screen generation schedule data, so it is judged that the screen generation schedule data is being started, whereas when the performance is completed according to the screen generation schedule data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is judged that the screen generation schedule data is not started. In addition, this judgment can be made based on the screen generation schedule data to determine whether or not the period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board performance display device 1600, or the period during which the game machine is waiting for customers and is performing a demonstration by the game board performance display device 1600, and if the period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board performance display device 1600, or the period during which the game machine is waiting for customers and is performing a demonstration by the game board performance display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later, whereas if the period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board performance display device 1600, or the period during which the game machine is waiting for customers and is performing a demonstration by the game board performance display device 1600 (when the game machine is simply waiting for customers), the routine is ended as is.

When the performance is progressing according to the schedule data for screen generation in step S1540, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation is running, this routine is terminated as it is, whereas when the performance is completed according to the schedule data for screen generation in step S1540 and all pointer updates are completed, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation is not running, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed, this communication check counter CC-CNT counts up (counts the cumulative number of times) the number of times that it is determined that a failure has occurred between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. In this determination, it is determined whether the number of times that it has been determined that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred at least once.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it has not been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, the routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, when it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, it is determined whether the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is a flag that indicates whether the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT and there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the flag is set to 1, and when the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the flag is set to 0.

When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, when the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546) and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is pre-stored in the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and is output to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, restoring the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, a communication error display process is performed (step S1548) and this routine is terminated. In this communication error display process, in order to inform the user that there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, a process of drawing is performed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 8. For example, a message saying "There is a malfunction in the upper tray side LCD display device. Please call a store attendant" is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, in the communication error display process, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration in a waiting state for customers, in order to check whether or not a problem has occurred between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation check request for the door frame side performance display device 460, and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 is output. CSDIC0 outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and if this LOCKN signal is not input, it determines that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver and that a problem has occurred in the door frame side performance display device 460, and performs processing to display an alert image (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call a store clerk.") in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to that effect, and performs processing to repeatedly play an alert sound (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device.") from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, processing may be performed to light up all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be explained using the timing chart in FIG. 103.

First, to briefly explain the decorative patterns displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8, the variable display of the decorative patterns is executed by the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, and the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002 shown in FIG. 8, or the first special lottery result shown in FIG. 8, is executed by the main control side main processing of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69, or the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 94, etc. If the result of the second special lottery drawn by the reception of a game ball into the second starting opening 2004 is a "jackpot," the number of times (number of rounds) the opening and closing operation of the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is repeated will be 15 rounds in total, from round 1 to round 15. In each round, when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005 within a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9 balls), the round is completed, and each time a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005, a predetermined number (e.g., 15 balls) of game balls are paid out.

Based on a command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the LCD display control unit 1512 to start the varying display of the left decorative pattern on the left side of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the central decorative pattern in the center, and the right decorative pattern on the right side, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the varying display of the left decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern is stopped, allowing the player to recognize the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. At this time, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can also be confirmed from the first special pattern or the second special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66. When the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a variably manner, the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern become semi-transparent to an extent that the background image can be seen, and the left side decorative pattern is displayed in a variably manner from the upper left to the lower left of the display area, the central decorative pattern from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right side decorative pattern from the upper right to the lower right of the display area, as if a reel is spinning, and when the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state, the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern become opaque so that the background image at the positions corresponding to the stopped and displayed left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is difficult to see. In this way, the first special pattern or the second special pattern that starts to be displayed variably and then stops being displayed on the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 is synchronized with the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern that starts to be displayed variably and then stops being displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

When the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command from the main control board 1310 conveying the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of a gaming ball into the first starting port 2002, or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of a gaming ball into the second starting port 2004, the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on the received command, and as shown in FIG. 103, when the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8 starts to display the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern (timing K0), in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The pointer is updated to indicate which screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in a column is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the performance is progressing according to the schedule data for screen generation, so the schedule data for screen generation is running, and while the schedule data for screen generation is running, that is, during the time from when the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern starts to when they are stopped, even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95, the routine is forcibly terminated as it is by the judgment of step S1540 in this connection recovery process.

As a result, during the period from when the varying display of the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern starts to be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 until it stops, even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, even if it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver) even once, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the connection between the transmitter and receiver is The process to recover the connection is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. For example, the message "A problem has occurred with the upper tray LCD display device. Please call a store attendant" is not displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal, is invalidated, and the door frame side performance display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d.

When the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 starts to display the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in a variable manner and stops (timing K1), in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the performance is completed according to the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and all pointer updates are completed. In other words, in the scheduler update process, the schedule data for screen generation is not yet started. While the schedule data for screen generation is not yet started, in the judgment of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102, which is executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the process proceeds to step S1542 in the same process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, the transmitter If it has not been determined even once that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, if it has been determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, the routine proceeds to step S1544 in the same process. If the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, if the accumulated number of times it has been determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the routine proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, where the above-mentioned SYNC pattern output process is performed and the routine is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (it is 1), that is, if a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, where the above-mentioned communication error display process is performed and the routine is terminated. In other words, while the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, if there is a malfunction occurring even once between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, and the accumulated number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, then the SYNC pattern output process is always performed to ensure that there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. While processing to restore the connection is performed, if the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (i.e., there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver), a communication error display process is always performed, for example, a message such as "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray LCD display. Please call a store attendant" is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the user, and the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data, is enabled.

During the interval period in which the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 starts and stops displaying the varying left decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern, and then starts displaying the varying left decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern again, the left decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Therefore, as described above, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is activated, and if there has been a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, even once, When the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a connection malfunction has occurred does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a SYNC pattern output process is always performed to restore the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a connection malfunction has occurred between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), a communication error display process is always performed to, for example, display a message in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 saying, "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side LCD display device. Please call a store staff member." to notify the user.

When the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern starts again (timing K2), as described above, since the schedule data for screen generation is running, during the period until the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed (timing K3), even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, even if it has been determined that there is a malfunction between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver) even once, the SYNC pattern output of step S1546 in the connection recovery process No power processing is performed, no processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and the communication error display processing of step S1548 in the connection restoration processing is not performed. For example, the message "A problem has occurred with the upper tray side LCD display device. Please call a store attendant" is not displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated, and the door frame side performance display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, during the interval period when the varying display of the left side decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right side decorative pattern starts and then stops in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and until the varying display of the left side decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right side decorative pattern starts again, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal, is enabled, whereas during the interval period when the varying display of the left side decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right side decorative pattern starts and then stops in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal, is disabled. This is because the combination results of the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern displayed in a static manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 are the information of most interest to the player, and the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state that will give the player a profit will occur. Therefore, when the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variably manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, even if the image of the performance displayed in the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460 becomes distorted due to the influence of noise and cannot be displayed correctly until the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a static manner, the performance is not interrupted midway and a process is performed to restore it to a state where it can be displayed correctly, but rather the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a static manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, completing the display of the information that the player is most interested in.

In this respect, it is significantly different from the case where the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits LOCKN signal output request data to the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510 during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration while waiting for customers. This LOCKN signal output request data is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511a during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and during the period when the game machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600. It is sent as a request to check the operation of the door frame side performance display device 460 to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided on the performance display drive board 4450 determines that the two signals it receives are LOCKN signal output request data, it determines that the LOCKN signal output request data is abnormal data because, as described above, the data format of the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is different, and outputs a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can determine that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem with the performance display drive board 4450, while when the LOCKN signal is not input, it can determine that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is a problem with the performance display drive board 4450, and control the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to output an alert image to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred with the liquid crystal display device on the upper tray side. Please call a store staff member.") to the game board side performance display device 1600, and control the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to output an alert sound to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred with the liquid crystal display device on the upper tray side.") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, thereby playing the alert sound from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. This allows notifications to be made by notification images displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and notification sounds that are repeatedly played from speakers or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be lit up.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 sends the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit so that the LOCKN signal output request data can be received by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which receives the LOCKN signal output request data, outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCK terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 as a response signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a.Therefore, when a LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem with the door frame side performance display device 460, whereas when a LOCKN signal is not input, it can be determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is a problem with the door frame side performance display device 460. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device 460, it can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects a malfunction in the door frame side performance display device 460, it can notify the hall staff, etc., of the malfunction by executing the notification process, so that the hall staff, etc. can check very easily whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device 460 before the player plays, and the check is not time-consuming. Therefore, the malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460 can be detected without much effort.

As described above, the LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Specifically, the LOCKN signal is a signal that is output to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Since the LOCKN signal is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, when the image transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d cannot be normally received, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 can output a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 to inform that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the received drawing data is abnormal data. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input can eliminate the communication failure between the image communications by outputting a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to inform that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) will be started to be transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of detecting a malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460 caused by a communication malfunction during image communication at an early stage and instructing the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to resolve the malfunction. Therefore, by detecting and resolving a malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, when the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which receives the image transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and outputs it to the door frame side performance display device 460, is unable to properly receive the image transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, it is capable of outputting a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal that notifies the user that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, which is the performance control microprocessor.The peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the LCD display control unit 1512 to generate a message saying "A failure has occurred in the upper tray side LCD display device. Please call a store staff member," which is an image that notifies the user that a communication failure has occurred, and this generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the user. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of detecting a malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460 caused by a communication malfunction during image communication at an early stage and notifying the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 so that the player can inform a hall staff member or directly notify a hall staff member who happens to be passing by the pachinko machine 1, so that the hall staff member can begin work to resolve the malfunction at an early stage after it occurs. Therefore, by detecting and resolving a malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460 at an early stage, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2, if there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, even once, and the accumulated number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is capable of repeatedly outputting a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, which indicates that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and eliminating the communication malfunction between the image communications will begin to be transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can continue to repeatedly output a connection confirmation signal only during the period when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is not executing the progress of the game by starting and stopping the first special pattern or second special pattern game on the first special pattern display 1403 or second special pattern display 1405, thereby helping to resolve the communication problem.

Then, during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2, if there is a malfunction between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, and if the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 activates the LOCKN signal and sends a connection confirmation signal to inform the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to start transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 for eliminating the communication malfunction between the image communications. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts to vary the first special pattern or second special pattern play on the first special pattern display 1403 or the second special pattern display 1405 and starts the game progress again, the connection confirmation signal is stopped from being output, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d stops transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 and is able to output an image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can move in the direction of resolving the communication malfunction by repeatedly outputting a connection confirmation signal, which is a malfunction resolution signal, only during the period in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts varying and stops the first special symbol or second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and is not executing the game progress. When the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the display is stopped and the game is not being played, even if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts varying the first or second special pattern play on the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 and starts the game again, the distortion of the performance (image distortion) progressing on the display screen of the door frame side performance display device 460 can be eliminated each time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and ends the game again (each time the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2 occurs).

According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. 70. The main control board 1310 is equipped with the main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the game ball launched by the ball launching device 650 toward the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004, which are start areas provided in the game area 5a. The payout control board 951 is equipped with the payout control MPU 952a of FIG. 70, which is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball command of FIG. 88 (a) and (b), which is a payout command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, is equipped with at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM is designed to store information related to the game even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, is equipped with at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built into the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM is capable of storing information related to payouts even after a power outage.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 in Fig. 70. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on until the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process in Fig. 92 is performed, it outputs a RAM clear signal in Fig. 77 for erasing information related to the game stored in the main control built-in RAM to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and when it is operated within a period from when the power is turned on until the payout control unit power-on process is performed, it outputs a RWMCLR signal in Fig. 82 to the payout control microprocessor It also has a RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor, which is the payout control MPU 952a, which is the game control microprocessor, as an error release signal for releasing an error that has occurred regarding the payout device 830, when it is operated after the period from when the power is turned on until the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process in FIG. 92 has elapsed (or the period from when the power is turned on until the payout control unit power-on process is performed), without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor.

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from when the power is turned on until the judgment process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, it outputs the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor, to erase the information regarding the game stored in the main control built-in RAM, and when it is operated within the period from when the power is turned on until the payout control unit power-on process is performed, it outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor, which is the payout control MPU 952a, as a RAM clear signal to erase the information regarding the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM; When operated after the period from power-on to when the judgment process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process in FIG. 92 is performed (or the period from power-on to when the payout control unit power-on process is performed), the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 82 is output to the payout control microprocessor, payout control MPU 952a, as an error release signal for releasing an error that has occurred in the payout device 830, without being output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor. Therefore, by operating a single operation switch 954, two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function, can be provided in the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, a RAM clear function and an error release function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input section of the panel relay board 4161 is a circuit to which detection signals are input from various detection sensors arranged on the game board, such as the general winning hole sensor 4020, the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, the vibration detection sensor, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, etc. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signals from each detection sensor are input is the same, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is given here as an example of a detection sensor, and a circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described.

In gaming machines, there has been a continuous stream of fraudulent gaming tactics in which players try to gain unfair advantages by manipulating the flow of gaming balls at will by bringing magnets (e.g. permanent magnets or electromagnets) close to the gaming balls that have been shot into the playing area.

In order to detect such fraudulent gaming behavior and prevent fraudulent behavior by using light emitting means or audio warnings, etc., a magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the gaming area.

The following provides an overview of the control over game progress and presentation in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the results of the processes. Based on the control signals (control commands) output by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display mode of the performance display device 1600 (display images such as designs, various background images, letters, characters, etc.) and the display mode and operation mode of various components that contribute to the performance (performance operation unit 400, movable components, etc.).

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs special symbol process processing each time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, the first and second start port winning process is performed. In this first and second start port winning process, a determination is made as to whether or not the game ball has won a start port, and when it is determined that a winning has occurred, a process is performed to increase the number of reserved balls on the corresponding special symbol side by 1.

When the first and second start port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is 0, the fluctuation start processing is executed. In this fluctuation start processing, on the condition that the number of reserved balls is 1 or more, the pending jackpot judgment is consumed and executed, and the result of this jackpot judgment (whether it was a win or a loss, its type, etc.) is stored, and then the processing flag is updated to "1".

On the other hand, when the first and second starting port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is 1, a variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern (such as the variation time from when the special pattern starts to vary until it stops) and the stop pattern (such as a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) of the special pattern (identification pattern) displayed on the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device are determined and set based on the stored jackpot determination result and the current game state, and then the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, when the first and second start port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is 2, the during-fluctuation processing is executed. In this during-fluctuation processing, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting processing is monitored by a timer, and the variable display of the special pattern on the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device is stopped when the timer times out. After this, if the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is a jackpot, the processing selection flag is updated to "3", and if the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is not a jackpot (miss), the processing selection flag is updated to "0". In other words, in this case, the next interrupt processing will start over from the fluctuation start processing.

On the other hand, when the first and second start port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is 3, the jackpot game processing is executed. In this jackpot game processing, the condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is activated to set the jackpot game mode (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of jackpot won, and the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2106 is controlled based on this. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, the operation of the condition device is stopped, and if the type of jackpot won is a special type, the game state flag is updated to indicate that it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time-saving state or a special state, and then the processing flag is updated to "0". In other words, in this case, the next interrupt processing will start over from the variable start processing.

Note that, as the variation pattern, multiple types of variation patterns are stored. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the pattern variation of the special pattern, and the type of the performance pattern that appears in the performance display device 1600 can be determined by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. In this embodiment, the multiple types of variation patterns can be classified into a variation pattern for a jackpot variation, a variation pattern for a miss-reach variation, and a variation pattern for a miss variation. The jackpot variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot, and the performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which the variation display of the decorative pattern is finally developed to display the jackpot pattern in a fixed stop after the reach performance. The miss-reach variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot judgment is a miss and it is determined that a reach will be performed by the reach judgment based on the reach random number, and the performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which the variation display of the decorative pattern is finally developed to display the miss pattern in a fixed stop after the reach performance. The miss variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot judgment is a miss and the reach judgment based on the reach random number does not determine that a reach should be made, and the performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which the decorative pattern variation display is ultimately developed to display the miss pattern as a confirmed stop without going through the reach performance. Also, the variation pattern is specified so that it is possible to identify whether it is a variation pattern on the first special pattern side or the second special pattern side.

In other words, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires game information such as the results of jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to this to make it possible to make such decorative pattern change patterns appear. Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 not only makes the decorative pattern change patterns appear on the performance display device 1600 based on the acquired game information, but also executes control to change the performance display (background and reserved image) related to the expectation level, change the state (display and movement) in the performance operation unit 400, and operate movable members such as the back-down movable performance unit 3100.

Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. Figure 104 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric device control process (Figure 94: step S114).

Now, assuming that the main control program has transitioned to the special symbol and special electric device control processing (Figure 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes a first start hole passing processing such as obtaining a first jackpot determination random number from the random number counter and storing this in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5232), provided that the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002 is in the on state (ball has entered the first start hole 2002) (YES in step S5231), as shown in Figure 104. In addition, if the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004 is in the on state (the ball has entered the second start hole 2004) (YES in step S5233), a second special random number for the second special symbol (random number for determining a second big win) is obtained from the random number counter and a second start hole passing process is executed, such as storing this in the second special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether a jackpot in progress flag, which indicates that control is being exercised in a jackpot gaming state, is set (step S5235), and if the jackpot in progress flag is set, a jackpot control process (step S5240a) is executed to control the jackpot gaming state.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
When the result of the judgment process regarding the display state when the variable display of the first special symbol stops indicates either an "8R sure jackpot A" or an "8R normal jackpot", control is made to an 8R jackpot game state in which the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize winning port 2005, repeating an opening and closing pattern (round game) eight times,
When the result of the determination process regarding the display state when the variable display of the second special symbol stops indicates a state suggesting a "16R guaranteed jackpot", the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize winning port 2005, and the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated 16 times to enter a 16R jackpot game state.
When the result of the determination process regarding the display state when the variable display of the second special symbol stops indicates an "8R sure-win B", the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize winning port 2005, and then the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to enter an 8R big win game state.
When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special pattern stops indicates a mode suggesting a "2R normal jackpot", the game is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which the large prize opening 2005 is opened for a short period of time (for example, 0.6 seconds) and then closed, repeating an opening and closing pattern (round play) twice.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in a situation where the time-saving control is executed, right-handed hits are more advantageous for the player than left-handed hits, as described above, and in a situation where the time-saving control is not executed, left-handed hits are more advantageous for the player than right-handed hits. In this regard, in the left-handed hit state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special pattern in response to the reception of the game ball in the first starting port 2002, only a maximum of eight rounds of long-term open jackpot game state (approximately 1,000 game balls can be won) will occur.

In contrast, in the right-hand hitting state, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol in response to the reception of a game ball into the second starting port 2004, there is an approximately 50% probability (allocation rate of the winning type) of entering a long-open jackpot game state of 16 rounds (approximately 2000 game balls can be won). Since the expected number of prize balls that can be won when a jackpot is won is high, when the machine is controlled to transition to the right-hand hitting state, it is expected that a larger number of prize balls will be won than when it is in the left-hand hitting state.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, when starting the opening control of the jackpot opening 2005, first, a process is performed to start the operation of the condition device, a process to reset the fluctuation count counter described below, etc.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after controlling the opening of the jackpot opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 110, the process of setting the high probability flag and the time-saving flag is executed according to the type of jackpot that triggered the jackpot game.

The high probability flag is a flag indicating that a high probability state is being entered, and is used in the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 109 described below. It is set when the jackpot game state based on a jackpot controlled by a special probability (8R special probability jackpot A, 16R special probability jackpot, 8R special probability jackpot B) ends after the jackpot game state ends, and is reset when the next jackpot occurs by the first special pattern stop process shown in FIG. 114 described below or the second special pattern stop process not shown.

The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that time-saving control is being executed (low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state), and as shown in FIG. 110, it is set when the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (8R special jackpot A, 16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B) that is time-saving controlled (high probability time-saving state) after the jackpot game state ends, and is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown when the next jackpot occurs. Alternatively, it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are consumed 100 times without winning a jackpot after the low probability time-saving state occurs.

The change count counter is a counter that indicates the number of times the special symbol has changed since the change count counter was reset, and is used in the first change pattern setting process (second change pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112 described later. It is updated (e.g., counted up) when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) changes, and is reset when a jackpot game state based on at least a specific type of jackpot (16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B) is started.

If the big win in progress flag is not set (NO in step S5235), the next step S5236 is to determine whether the small win in progress flag, which indicates that control is being exercised to a small win gaming state, is set. If the small win in progress flag is set, a small win control process (step S5240b) is executed to control the small win gaming state. Note that in the small win control process, a process is performed to open the big win opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds).

Here, in the small win control process (step S5240b), unlike the big win control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of the big win opening 2005 is performed, the various set processes such as the high probability flag, time-saving flag, and time-saving count counter are not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(a), a small win is not won in the big win determination.

In addition, if the small win in progress flag is not set (NO in step S5236), on condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of random numbers for determining a second big win stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area, is "0" (step S5237), a first special pattern process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops is executed (step S5238).

In contrast, if the value of the second special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of random numbers for determining a second jackpot stored in the second special symbol reserved memory area, is not "0" (step S5237), a second special symbol process is executed (step S5239), including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol stops. As a result, as long as the game is played so that the lottery for the reserved second special symbol does not run out (as long as the value of the second special reserved number counter is not "0"), only the lottery for the random numbers for determining a second jackpot will be performed continuously without interruption, regardless of the reserved status of the lottery for the first special symbol (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player can perform the lottery (determination process) for the second jackpot determination random number continuously and uninterruptedly by simply maintaining hitting the game ball to the right side of the center device 2500 (right hit) in the time-saving state (high probability time-saving state).

Note that the special symbol game (symbol change) using the second special symbol (second special symbol) is not limited to being executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (first special symbol), and for example, the special symbol game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the second special symbol from the stored data.

Figure 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S5232).

Now, in the processing of step S5231, if it is determined that the first start hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 2002, as shown in FIG. 105, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for jackpot determination, random number for reach determination, random number for jackpot symbol, random number for variable display pattern) from the random number counter as processing of step S5241.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and judges whether the reserved number of the first special symbol is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" based on this counter value (step S5242). If it is determined in the processing of this step S5242 that the reserved number of the first special symbol is not its maximum value, the processing of the following steps S5243 to S5245 is performed to set the variable display of the first special symbol (determination processing for the first special symbol) to a new reserved state.

That is, first, in the process of step S5243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in the process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is stored in a first special symbol reserved memory area in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM that corresponds to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter.

Next, the first special pattern pre-reading process is executed to execute the pre-reading performance on the first special pattern side, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the pre-reading performance on the first special pattern side is a performance that suggests the judgment result (or its expectation) of the first special pattern in advance before starting the variable display of the first special pattern. In this first special pattern pre-reading process, information required for the peripheral control board 1510 to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading performance and the performance content, etc. (information on winning or losing for pre-reading judgment, information on the pattern type for pre-reading judgment, information on the variable pattern number for pre-reading judgment, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding memory area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the judgment result of the first special pattern itself, information on the stopping pattern of the special pattern as information suggesting the type of jackpot game may be included in the command. For example, information before the final decision, such as the SP reach group, normal reach group, potential hit group, and small hit group of the variable pattern, may be transmitted as a pre-reading command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of step S5242 that the reserved number of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved.

Figure 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S5234).

Now, in the processing of step S5233, if it is determined that the second start hole sensor 4004 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has entered the second start hole 2004, as shown in FIG. 106, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second jackpot determination, random number for second reach determination, random number for second jackpot symbol, random number for second variable display pattern) from the random number counter as processing of step S5251.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and judges whether the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value of "4" based on this counter value (step S5252). If it is determined in the processing of this step S5252 that the reserved number of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the processing of the following steps S5253 to S5255 is performed to set the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) to a new reserved state.

That is, first, in the process of step S5253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in the process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 is stored in a second special symbol reserved memory area in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM that corresponds to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter.

Next, the second special pattern pre-reading process is executed to execute the pre-reading performance on the second special pattern side, and the process is terminated (step S5255). As will be described later, the pre-reading performance on the second special pattern side is a performance that suggests the judgment result (or its expectation) of the second special pattern in advance before starting the variable display of the second special pattern. In this second special pattern pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (win/lose information, pattern type, variable pattern number, etc.) required to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading performance and the performance content, and stores it in the corresponding memory area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the judgment result of the second special pattern itself, information regarding the stopping pattern of the special pattern as information suggesting the type of big win game may be included in the command. For example, information before the final decision stage, such as the SP reach group, normal reach group, potential hit group, and small hit group among the variable patterns, may be transmitted as a pre-reading command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of step S5252 that the reserved number of the second special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbols is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbols is not newly reserved.

When the reserved number of first special symbols changes based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) sets a command indicating the reserved number of first special symbols (first reserved number designation command 0-4) and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510. Also, when the reserved number of second special symbols changes based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 2004, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) sets a command indicating the reserved number of second special symbols (second reserved number designation command 0-4) and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510.

Figure 107 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S5238). Note that the first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric device control process and the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric device control process are similar program modules, and only the random numbers and tables used for judgment are different. Therefore, only the first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric device control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes will be selectively executed depending on the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. First special symbol normal processing (step S5280) in which a random number for determining a jackpot corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and a lottery process is performed for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read random number for determining a jackpot.

2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) in which a process for determining the display mode when the first special symbol change control is stopped is performed based on the result of a process for determining the display mode when the first special symbol change control is stopped.

3. A first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process is performed for the variation mode of the first special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern, and the variation mode of the performance display executed in response to the special pattern on the performance display device (game board side performance display device) 1600.

4. First special symbol change processing that waits until the display of the first special symbol change on the first special symbol display 1403 stops (step S5283)

5. A first special pattern stop process (step S5284) that stops the display of the first special pattern so that the display mode of the first special pattern when the control of the first special pattern is stopped is displayed on the first special pattern display 1403 in the mode determined based on the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the control of the first special pattern is stopped.

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is set to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280) should be performed.

Figure 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal processing of the first special pattern (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 108, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the reserved state based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter as the processing of step S5301. If it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the reserved state, then, as the processing of step S5302, the random number stored in the earliest memory area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (for example, the random number for first jackpot determination, the random number for first reach determination, the random number for first jackpot symbol, the random number for first variable display pattern) is read from the main control built-in RAM. Next, in the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and random numbers related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the first special pattern reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (for example, the random number for first jackpot determination, the random number for first reach determination, the random number for the first jackpot pattern, and the random number for the first variable display pattern), are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas (first special symbol reserved memory area a to first special symbol reserved memory area d), and random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a start winning in the first start port 2002 are stored in the first (first) memory area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) memory area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 3) memory area, and when the start condition for the variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is established, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) memory area. As a result, the order in which the reservation of the variable display of the first special symbol occurred is stored in a specific order, and the reservation of the variable display is released in order from the first reservation (the reservation that occurred first). Similarly, the second special symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas (second special symbol reserved memory area a to second special symbol reserved memory area d), and random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a start winning in the second start port 2004 are stored in the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) memory area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 3) memory area, and when the start condition for the variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is established, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) memory area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol is reserved is identifiable and the reservation of the variable display is released in order from the first reservation (the reservation that occurred first).

Then, in step S5305, a jackpot determination process is performed, which is a process for determining whether or not the jackpot has been won, based on the first jackpot determination random number that has been read out. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process ends.

Figure 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

If the current game state is a high probability state (high probability time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the high probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 110(A) (step S5312), and if the current game state is a low probability state (step S5311), it selects the low probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 110(A) (step S5313), and compares the selected jackpot determination table with the random number for jackpot determination read out in step S5302 of the first special pattern normal processing (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 110(A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the ROM built into the main control, and for each type of special random number (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number), there is a low probability jackpot determination table used when the game state is low probability (low probability non-time-saving state, low probability time-saving state), and a high probability jackpot determination table used when the game state is high probability (high probability non-time-saving state, high probability time-saving state). In the low probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, the first jackpot determination random numbers (65,536 types) are associated with each other so that the 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot win, and the 65,332 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the miss determination value indicating a miss (low probability jackpot probability: approximately "1 in 321"). In contrast, in the low probability jackpot determination table that is referenced for comparison with the second special pattern jackpot determination random number (second jackpot determination random number) in the second special pattern process executed in step S5239 of the special pattern and special electric device control process, the 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot win, and the 65,332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value indicating a miss (low probability jackpot probability: approximately 1 in 321).

In addition, in the high probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, the 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value, and the 63496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value (high probability jackpot probability: approximately 1 in 32). In contrast, in the high probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric device control process, the 2040 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot win, and the 63496 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value indicating a miss (high probability jackpot probability: approximately 1 in 32). In addition, the jackpot determination values (the number of jackpot determination values may be the same but the jackpot determination values are different (same jackpot probability), or the number of jackpot determination values may be different (different jackpot probability)) set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number may be different, in which case it is sufficient to make the jackpot determination values of at least one of the low probability jackpot determination table and the high probability jackpot determination table different (both may be different).

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a jackpot has occurred as a result of comparing the selected jackpot determination table with the random number for jackpot determination read in step S5302 of the first special pattern normal processing, the main control MPU 1310a sets a jackpot flag indicating that the corresponding variation has resulted in a jackpot (step S5316), and ends the jackpot determination processing.

Also, if it is determined in step S5315 that the player has not won the jackpot, a determination is made based on the selected jackpot determination table as to whether the read random number for jackpot determination matches the small jackpot determination value indicating that the player has won a small jackpot (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) in this example, a random number for jackpot determination that matches the small jackpot determination value is not read out (small jackpot probability: 0 in 65,536), so in this step S5317, it is determined that the player has not won a small jackpot (determined to have missed).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that the result is a miss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach judgment table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM and includes a reach judgment table for a high probability non-time-saving state used when the game state is in a high probability non-time-saving state, a reach judgment table for a high probability time-saving state used when the game state is in a high probability time-saving state, and a reach judgment table for a low probability state used when the game state is in a low probability state (low probability non-time-saving state).

Here, in the reach judgment table for the high probability time-saving state, the above-mentioned reach judgment random numbers are associated so that one type of reach judgment random number matches a reach judgment value indicating a reach, and 71 types of reach judgment random numbers match reach judgment values indicating no reach. However, in the reach judgment table for the high probability time-saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game when in the time-saving state, all 72 types of reach judgment random numbers may match reach judgment values indicating no reach, and may not match reach judgment values indicating a reach.

In addition, in the reach judgment table for the low probability state, five types of reach judgment random numbers, including the same reach judgment random numbers as those set in the reach judgment table for the high probability time-saving state, are associated with the reach judgment values indicating that a reach will occur, and 67 types of reach judgment random numbers are associated with reach judgment values indicating that a reach will not occur. Thus, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach judgment value indicating a reach will occur is higher than in the high probability time-saving state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table for the high probability non-time-saving state, five types of reach determination random numbers, including the same reach determination random numbers as those set in the reach determination tables for the high probability time-saving state and the low probability state, are associated with the reach determination values indicating a reach will occur, and 67 types of reach determination random numbers are associated with reach determination values indicating no reach will occur. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-time-saving state, the reach determination value indicating a reach will occur is the same as in the low probability non-time-saving state.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is missed (YES in step S5120) based on the comparison between the selected reach judgment table and the random number for reach judgment read in step S5302 (step S5319), it sets a reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is a reach and ends the process (step S5121).

Figure 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305). The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the pattern determination table shown in FIG. 110(B) and compares the random number for the first jackpot pattern read in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the selected pattern determination table to determine the jackpot pattern as the state when the variable control of the first special pattern stops (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 110(B), the pattern determination table for the first special symbol stores random numbers for the first jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200 random numbers for the first jackpot symbol) associated with each of the judgment results (8R special jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot). As shown in FIG. 110(C), the pattern determination table for the second special symbol stores random numbers for the second jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200 random numbers for the second jackpot symbol) associated with each of the judgment results (16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by identifying the judgment result associated with the acquired random number for the jackpot pattern. In the pattern determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot pattern and the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot pattern are set to be different. More specifically, the allocation rate (allocation) between the special jackpot that triggers a transition to a high probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger a transition to a high probability state is the same, but the expected value of the game balls that can be obtained by the jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot pattern is greater than the expected value of the game balls that can be obtained by the jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot pattern.

The specific gameplay and presentation content for each type of jackpot is briefly summarized as follows.
1. After the big win symbol combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2103, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to control the state to an 8R big win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big win opening 2103, and after this 8R big win game state, the state is controlled to a high probability time-saving state until the next big win game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big win game state, a battle performance (battle victory performance) in which a specific character wins is performed, and the performance display device 1600 shows that the high probability time-saving state is a relatively advantageous state. 8R certainty big win A

2. After the big win pattern combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2103, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to control the game state to an 8R big win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big win opening 2103, and after this 8R big win game state, the game state is controlled to a low probability time-saving state until the special pattern variable display is consumed 100 times (or a big win is won within the period until it is consumed 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R big win game state, a battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which a specific character is defeated is performed, and in the low probability time-saving state, the game state is controlled to a performance mode that is shown on the performance display device 1600 as being relatively unfavorable. 8R normal big win

3. After the big win symbol combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2103, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated 16 times to control the state to a 16R big win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big win opening 2103, and after this 16R big win game state, the state is controlled to a high probability time-saving state until the next big win game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R big win game state, an additional challenge performance is performed in which a performance (success performance) is performed regarding whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (whether it becomes 16 rounds), and after a predetermined period has passed since the control to the high probability time-saving state, the performance mode is controlled to one in which a relatively advantageous state is indicated on the performance display device 1600. 16R sure-win

4. After the big win pattern combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2103, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to control the state to an 8R big win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big win opening 2103, and after this 8R big win game state, the state is controlled to a high probability time-saving state until the next big win game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big win game state, an additional challenge performance is performed in which a performance (failure performance) is performed regarding whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (whether it becomes 16 rounds), and after a predetermined period has passed since the control to the high probability time-saving state, the performance mode is controlled to a relatively advantageous state as indicated by the performance display device 1600. 8R sure-win B

5. After the big win pattern combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2103, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated twice to control the game state to a 2R big win game state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the big win opening 2103, and after this 2R big win game state, the game state is controlled to a low probability time-saving state until the special pattern variable display is consumed 100 times (or a big win is won within the period until 100 times are consumed), and during the execution period of the 2R big win game state, a battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which a specific character is defeated is performed, and in the low probability time-saving state, the game state is controlled to a performance mode that is shown on the performance display device 1600 as being relatively unfavorable. 2R normal big win

In addition, in the above-mentioned left-hand hitting state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting hole 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-hand hitting state, the game ball does not enter the second starting hole 2004, and only the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, and only the variable display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display 1403 is executed except when there is a reserved ball with the second special pattern, and a jackpot related to the first special pattern (8R special jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot) occurs. Similarly, in the above-mentioned right-hand hitting state, the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 2002. Therefore, in the right-hand hitting state, only the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 2004 occurs, and unless there is a reserved ball with the first special pattern, only the variable display of the second special pattern on the second special pattern display 1186 is executed, and a jackpot related to the second special pattern (16R sure-win jackpot, 8R sure-win jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) occurs.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot associated with the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern that keeps the large prize opening 2103 open for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) is repeated up to 8 times, and approximately 1000 game balls are paid out, whereas in the case of a jackpot associated with the second special symbol, the opening and closing pattern that keeps the large prize opening 2103 open for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) is repeated up to 16 times, and approximately 2000 game balls can be paid out.

In addition, if the first special symbol stop symbol setting process determines that the jackpot symbol is an 8R special jackpot A, the jackpot symbol is determined to be an 8R regular jackpot, and if the first special symbol stop symbol setting process determines that the jackpot symbol is an 8R regular jackpot. Also, although not shown, if the second special symbol stop symbol setting process determines that the jackpot symbol is a 16R special jackpot, the jackpot symbol is determined to be a 16R special jackpot, if the second special symbol stop symbol setting process determines that the jackpot symbol is an 8R special jackpot B, the jackpot symbol is determined to be an 8R special jackpot B, and if the second special symbol setting process determines that the jackpot symbol is a 2R regular jackpot, the jackpot symbol is determined to be a 2R regular jackpot.

If the big win flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next determines whether the small win flag is set in step S5333. If the small win flag is set in the process corresponding to step S5333 in the second special symbol process (step S5239), the small win symbol (unique symbol stop mode) is determined as the mode when the second special symbol stops changing (step S5334), and then the process proceeds to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small win flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the pattern when the special pattern stops changing to a losing pattern (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337.

After the determination process for the stopping symbols has been performed in this manner, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a judgment result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results so that the lottery results (indicating the type of big win, small win, reach miss, or miss (which may also indicate the type of the stopping symbol of the first special symbol)) are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as the process of step S5337. Then, as the process of step S5338, the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282), at which point this process ends.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the performance display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command (variably displays the left, center, and right decorative patterns and stops and displays them in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → center decorative pattern (note that the left, center, and right decorative patterns may be displayed synchronously as the same pattern and stopped and displayed simultaneously)). For example, when a type other than a 2R normal jackpot is won as a jackpot, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination of three left, center, and right decorative patterns. In contrast, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific pattern combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, center, and right decorative patterns is not the same as the other patterns) is determined. In addition, if a reach miss is identified, a miss pattern with a reach (a combination of the same left and right decorative patterns from "0" to "9" but with a different center decorative pattern; a reach miss pattern) is determined, and if a miss is identified, a miss pattern without a reach (a combination of the left, center, and right decorative patterns in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different). The stopped pattern thus determined is displayed on the performance display device 1600 when the change time specified by the change pattern command has elapsed (when the game performance ends).

In any case, when a win is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays a display showing the winning effect (special display mode) before the jackpot game starts, and displays a display showing the jackpot game after the jackpot game starts.

Figure 112 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 112, if the big win flag is set (step S5341), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the big win corresponding to the type of big win determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5342); if the small win flag is set (step S5343), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small win is selected (step S5344); if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of the reach is selected (step S5346); if none of the big win flag, small win flag, and reach flag are set, that is, if it is a normal miss (a miss where the reach performance is not executed), the variation pattern table at the time of the miss is selected (step S5347).

Then, the selected variation pattern table is compared with the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol to determine the variation pattern to be executed (step S5348), and a variation pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the determined variation pattern is to be started, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 is started (step S5349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283) (step S5355), this process is terminated. As a result, the first special symbol variation display device 1403 performs the variation display control of the first special symbol for only the variation time determined in this way, and the performance control is performed in the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

In this example, multiple types of fluctuation pattern tables are provided for each judgment result based on the random numbers for jackpot determination (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number) and the random numbers for jackpot patterns (first jackpot pattern random number, second jackpot pattern random number). In addition, the fluctuation patterns set in each fluctuation pattern table are stored in a form associated with each of the random numbers for the first fluctuation display pattern, with multiple fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (fluctuation time) required for controlling the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern). Thus, the main control MPU 1310a compares the selected variation pattern table from among multiple types of variation pattern tables according to the judgment results based on the random number for jackpot judgment and the random number for jackpot pattern with the random number for the variable display pattern read in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern, and obtains from this table the variation time information associated with the random number for the variable display pattern read out, thereby determining the variation pattern of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern). This allows the judgment process to be performed on the variation pattern of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern). The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, since a small win will not be won, the variation pattern table for a small win will not be used. In this example, a small win will not be won, but it may be possible to win a small win.

In addition, in the variable display pattern table during reach in this example, the type of reach performance to be executed is determined by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach performance to execute with the random number for the variable display pattern. For example, in the non-time-saving state, 164 types of random numbers for variable display patterns out of the 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach performances will be executed, 59 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach performances with low jackpot expectation will be executed, and 18 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super reach performances with high jackpot expectation will be executed.

The Super Reach effect (SP effect) has a higher chance of winning than the normal Reach effect, and for players hoping for a jackpot game state, the player's chance of winning the jackpot game state increases when the Super Reach effect is executed. In other words, such a Super Reach effect has the highest selection rate in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table, and this makes it possible to increase the player's chance of winning the jackpot game state even if a miss is ultimately displayed. However, in reality, in order to sufficiently increase the player's chance of winning the jackpot game state, it is necessary for a highly anticipated preview effect, which is drawn separately from the fluctuation pattern, to appear (combined) during the period in which the Super Reach effect is being executed.

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of failure, which is provided in correspondence with the first jackpot determination random number and the first jackpot pattern random number and is used when determining the variation time of the first special pattern, a variation time of 12 seconds is set in common to the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of failure, which is provided in correspondence with the second jackpot determination random number and the second pattern random number and is used when determining the variation time of the second special pattern, a variation time of 0.1 to 12 seconds can be set for the time-saving state, and a variation time of 12 seconds is set for the non-time-saving state. In this way, the variation time of the first special pattern is set to be the same during the time-saving state and during the non-time-saving state, and during the variation of the first special pattern in the time-saving state, the game ball is encouraged to enter the second start hole 2004 and time is secured for the player to enter the game ball into the second start hole 2004.

In addition, if 0.1 seconds is selected as the variable time when the second special symbol is a miss, it is possible to prevent each game ball that is shot into the game area 5a at 0.6 second intervals in a time-saving state (such as a high-probability time-saving state) from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

That is, the game ball hit to the right is supplied to the area directly above the gate section 2003. Then, when the game ball is received from this area by the gate section 2003 during a time-saving state (such as a high-probability time-saving state), a win as a normal pattern is obtained (for example, the probability of winning is 100%), and the movable piece related to the opening and closing of the second starting hole 2004 is maintained in an open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, even in a situation where balls can be continuously received by the second starting hole 2004 one after another (a time-saving state in which almost all game balls hit to the right of the center device 2500 can be received by the second starting hole 2004), control can be executed so that the lottery on the second special pattern side can be consumed one after another with a high probability of winning (probability in a high-probability state) of approximately "1 in 32" each time the game ball is received.

In this example, since the game balls are launched at 0.6 second intervals while the player is operating the handle 302, in the time-saving state (such as the high-probability time-saving state), the second starting port 2004 often receives game balls at 0.6 second intervals. In this respect, in this example, as described above, the variation pattern table for the time-saving state (such as the high-probability time-saving state) can be set to an extremely short variation time of 0.1 seconds when the second special pattern is not obtained based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004. In other words, in this case, when a miss is obtained, the pattern variation ends in a time (0.1 seconds) that is less than the launch interval (0.6 seconds) of the game balls, so that even in a situation where game balls launched at 0.6 second intervals are received one after another by the second starting port 2004, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

Figure 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern change process (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol fluctuation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 113, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process for the fluctuation pattern (step S5282) is set as the process of step S5371. As a result, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery-selected fluctuation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284), this process ends.

If the variable time timer has not reached 0 despite having been decremented by 1 (step S5371), the above steps S5371 and S5372 will be executed each time the timer interrupt process is executed until the variable time timer reaches 0 (until the time to stop the pattern is reached).

Figure 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern stop process (step S5284).

When the first special pattern process flag indicates that the first special pattern stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 114, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs display control to display the stop pattern determined in the first special pattern stop pattern setting process on the first special pattern display device 1403 as the process of step S5381, and sets a stop display command to instruct the performance display device 1600 to derive and display the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the first special pattern as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

When the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game state is to start (step S5387), and sets the waiting time until the jackpot game state starts (the time to display the jackpot game state to start, etc.) in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, the main control MPU 1310a sets a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed, and resets the high probability flag if the high probability flag is set, and resets the time-saving flag if the time-saving flag is set (step S5389), and further resets the fluctuation counter, and updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is transferred to the initial value of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5394), at which point this processing ends. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the processing in step S5235 above will determine that the jackpot execution flag has been set, and the jackpot game state will be executed in the jackpot control processing described above (step S5240a).

The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, the jackpot start command (8R special jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R special jackpot command, 8R special jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (8R special jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R special jackpot command, 8R special jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) is set. As a result, the performance of the jackpot game state (battle performance or additional challenge performance) corresponding to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the performance display device 1600, each lamp/LED, each speaker, etc.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of step S5386 that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the game is in a low-probability time-saving state (step S5390). Then, when the game is in a low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of times the special symbol has changed since the game was controlled to the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit (here, 100 times) (step S5391). In other words, when the number of times the special symbol has changed since the game was controlled to the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit (100 times), it is determined that the condition for ending the low-probability time-saving state has been met, and the time-saving function is stopped and the game is switched to a normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) (step S5392).

After the processing related to the time-saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether the small win flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small win flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small win start command indicating that the small win game state is started is set (step S5394), and the waiting time until the start of the small win game state (the time to display the fact that the small win game state is started, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, a small win execution flag indicating that the small win game state is being executed is set (step S5396), and when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol normal processing, which is the initial value (step S5394), this processing is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small win execution flag is set in the processing of the above step S5236, and the small win game state is executed in the above-mentioned small win control processing (step S5240b). By the way, unlike when a big win is won, the game state does not change when this type of small win game state is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set (NO in step S5393), it is determined to be a miss, and no processing related to the big win or small win is performed. The first special symbol process flag is updated to the initial value of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5394), and this processing ends. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big win in progress flag or the small win in progress flag is not set (steps S5235, S236), and processing related to the progress of a new game (lottery or symbol control) is performed according to the pending status (steps S5237 to S5239).

Figure 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol and normal electric device control process (step S116).

Now, in the processing of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. 115, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs gate section passing processing as the processing of step S5402, such as first obtaining a normal random number for a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing this in the normal symbol reserved memory area of the RAM.

Next, in the normal pattern process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed depending on the normal pattern process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number (step S5403).
2. A normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process is performed on the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Regular symbol variation processing (step S5405) that waits until the regular symbol variation display on the regular symbol display device 1402 is stopped
4. A normal pattern stop process (step S5406) for stopping the variable display of the normal pattern so that the mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the normal pattern determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the normal pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display device 1402.
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the state when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped indicates a state that suggests a "normal symbol win", the above-mentioned movable piece is opened to execute a process for controlling the second starting hole 2004 to be able to receive a game ball (step S5407).

The normal symbol process flag is manipulated so that its initial value indicates that the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403) should be performed.

Figure 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate section passing process (step S5402).

Now, in the processing of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. 116, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value of the normal reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the processing of step S5411. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether the reserved number of normal symbols is the maximum value of "4".

If it is determined in step S5411 that the reserved number of the normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed to set the variable display control of the normal symbols to a new reserved state. That is, first, in step S5412, the normal reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in step S5413, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are obtained from the random number counter. Next, in step S5414, the random numbers thus obtained are stored in the normal symbol reserved memory area of the memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a that corresponds to the counter value of the normal reserved number counter.

However, if it is determined in the processing of step S5411 that the reserved number of the normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly reserved. In other words, by not executing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly placed on hold.

Figure 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal processing of normal symbols (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 117, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines whether there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the reserved state based on the counter value of the normal reserved number counter as the processing of step S5421. If it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the reserved state, then, as the processing of step S5422, the random number stored in the earliest memory area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the normal symbol (e.g., normal random number, normal variable random number) stored in the normal symbol reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read from the RAM. Next, in the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and the random numbers (normal random numbers, normal pattern variable random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the normal pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the normal reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

Specifically, the normal symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted in response to the passage of the game ball through the gate unit 2003 are stored in the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) memory area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n=1 to 3) memory area when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and when the start condition for variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4) memory area. This allows the order in which the variable display control of the normal symbols was reserved to be specified, and the reservations of the variable display control are released in order starting from the first reservation (the reservation that occurred first).

Next, if the current game state is a time-saving state (high probability time-saving state) (step S5426), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal winning judgment table (not shown) during time-saving (step S5426), and if the current game state is a non-time-saving state (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5425), it selects a normal winning judgment table (not shown) during non-time-saving (step S5427), and compares the selected normal winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal processing of the normal pattern (step S5428).

The normal winning judgment table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and includes a time-saving normal winning judgment table used when the game state is in time-saving (high probability time-saving state), and a non-time-saving normal winning judgment table used when the game state is not in time-saving (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state). In the time-saving normal winning judgment table, which is referenced for comparison with the normal random number, the normal random numbers are associated with each other so that all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal winning judgment value indicating that a normal winning has been won, and do not match the normal losing judgment value indicating that a normal losing has been won. In this way, when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003 during time-saving, a normal winning is always won, and the movable piece is opened to control the reception of game balls into the second starting port 2004. Instead of all 255 types, more normal random numbers than in non-time-saving mode may match the normal win determination value, which indicates that a normal win has been won.

In addition, in the normal winning judgment table during non-time-saving, which is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all of the 255 types of normal random numbers are associated with the normal winning judgment value indicating that a normal winning has occurred, and the normal random numbers are associated with the normal losing judgment value indicating that a normal losing has occurred. In this way, during non-time-saving, even if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal winning will not occur, and therefore the movable piece 2106 will not be in the open state and will not be able to control the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port 2004. However, as mentioned above, it may be possible to make it possible to win with a normal symbol even in the non-time-saving state. In this case, the probability of winning may be set to be lower than in the time-saving state (for example, 50%), and when the lottery result for a normal symbol is a winning one, the movable piece of the second starting hole 2004 may be opened for a shorter period of time than in the time-saving state, for example, 2 seconds, to allow the second starting hole 2004 to receive a game ball, and then moved forward again to prevent the second starting hole 2004 from receiving a game ball.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 judges that the normal pattern is a winning pattern as a result of comparing the selected normal pattern winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal pattern normal processing (step S5429), it sets a normal pattern winning flag indicating that the variation is a winning normal pattern (step S5430), and then determines the normal pattern winning pattern as the mode (stop pattern of the normal pattern) when the normal pattern variation control is stopped (step S5431). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 judges that the normal pattern is a losing pattern as the mode (stop pattern of the normal pattern) when the normal pattern variation control is stopped as a result of comparing the selected normal pattern winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal pattern normal processing, it determines the normal pattern losing pattern as the mode (stop pattern of the normal pattern) when the normal pattern variation control is stopped (step S5432). Then, when the above-mentioned normal pattern process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the above-mentioned normal pattern variation time determination process (step S5404) (step S5433), this process is terminated.

While this control is being performed by the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the various commands sent from the main control MPU 1310a, and is able to grasp the game situation at each stage within the peripheral control unit routine processing (received command analysis processing (step S1022)) and execute presentations according to the game situation.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether a start winning situation has occurred, and if so, controls the pending display and pre-reading effects according to the start winning situation. Then, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, it executes one of the following: waiting for a change pattern designation command to be received, effect pattern change start processing, effect pattern change in progress processing, effect pattern change stop processing, jackpot display processing, jackpot game in progress processing, and jackpot end effect processing.

Waiting for reception of a fluctuation pattern specification command: Until a fluctuation pattern command regarding the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, control is performed regarding the presentation (demo presentation, etc.) when the pattern is not in a fluctuation state and control regarding a jackpot is not being performed, and when a fluctuation pattern command regarding the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the presentation pattern fluctuation start processing.

Performance pattern change start processing: Various performance contents (performance patterns, preview performances, etc.) during the pattern change period are determined based on the change pattern command, etc., and the decorative pattern change is controlled to start based on the determined performance contents. After this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during performance pattern change. Among the variation patterns (performance patterns), many of the "variation patterns (performance patterns) that stop at a jackpot pattern" are provided in pairs with "variation patterns (performance patterns) that stop at a losing pattern," and by functioning as the same variation pattern (performance pattern), a performance is provided regarding whether a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern will appear. Therefore, when describing the fluctuation pattern (presentation pattern) below, "predetermined fluctuation pattern" or "specific fluctuation pattern" means both a "predetermined fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) that stops at a winning symbol" and a "predetermined fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) that stops at a losing symbol" unless otherwise noted, and the presentation content progresses in the same manner, resulting in a branching point where either a winning symbol or a losing symbol appears.

Processing during performance pattern change: This performs control to start the various performance contents determined in the performance pattern change start processing at the respective timing during the pattern change period, and when the change time ends, updates the value of the process flag to a value corresponding to the performance pattern change stop processing.
Performance pattern change stop processing: Controls the change of the decorative pattern to stop and the display result (stopped pattern) to be derived and displayed based on the reception of a command (pattern determination command) to stop all patterns. If the decorative pattern is to be stopped at a jackpot pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display processing, and if the decorative pattern is to be stopped at a losing pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the change pattern designation command reception waiting processing.

Jackpot display processing: Controls the effects (such as display effects that notify the occurrence of a jackpot on the effect display device 1600) during the period from when the decorative pattern stops on the jackpot pattern to when the jackpot game starts. After this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot game processing.

Processing during jackpot play: Controls various effects during the jackpot play state. When the jackpot play state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Jackpot end presentation processing: In the presentation display device 1600, the presentation (such as a display presentation that notifies the player that the jackpot play state has ended) during the period from the end of the jackpot play state to the transition to the change-permitted state is controlled. Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process of waiting for reception of a change pattern designation command.

FIG. 118 shows a judgment table T1 of the presentation pattern (variable presentation) referenced in the above-mentioned presentation symbol variation start process when in the normal gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the judgment table T1, each of the variation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the variation pattern command is associated with a presentation pattern (variation presentation). Therefore, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the presentation pattern (variation presentation) associated with the variation pattern command based on the judgment table T1, and controls the start of the variation of the decorative pattern based on the determined presentation pattern (variation presentation).

Note that the presentation pattern (variable presentation) does not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the variable number indicated by the above-mentioned variable pattern command. For example, multiple presentation patterns (variable presentations) may be associated with one variable number indicated by the variable pattern command, and one of these presentation patterns (variable presentations) may be determined based on a presentation lottery or the game situation. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a in this embodiment is also configured to associate multiple presentation patterns with some of the variable numbers 1 to 22.

Also, as will be described later, after the peripheral control MPU 1511a has determined the presentation pattern (variable presentation) in this manner, it performs a preview lottery (preview presentation determination process) based on the results of the jackpot determination, the pattern type, and the variation pattern, and also performs control (presentation pattern variation processing) to cause the preview presentation selected in the preview lottery to appear at a predetermined timing while the presentation pattern (variable presentation) determined above is being performed, thereby making it possible to combine multiple presentation contents and to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot pattern appearing based on the appearance mode of these presentation contents, etc.

In the past, among such composite effects, multiple occurrences of the same specific advance notice effect (for example, timer effect) would be displayed while one effect pattern (variable effect) was being executed, which was expected to maintain interest in the game. However, because advance notice effects can only be combined when there is a high probability of a winning symbol appearing, the frequency with which multiple timer effects are executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed naturally decreases, making it difficult to sufficiently increase interest in the game.

As will be described later, the "timer effect" refers to a predetermined effect that appears during the execution of an effect pattern (variable effect), and is executed as a count effect display that displays a count from a first predetermined value (e.g., "60 seconds") to a second predetermined value (e.g., "0 seconds") until the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed, or as a standby display (preparation, etc.) before the count display begins. In other words, in this case, when the count display (e.g., countdown) from the first predetermined value begins as a timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect will occur when the second predetermined value is reached. Or, when an effect (e.g., a conversation preview or cut-in A, B, etc.) that produces either a relatively unfavorable effect mode (a performance mode with low expectations) or a favorable effect mode (a performance mode with high expectations) for the player is the subject of the timer effect, it is guaranteed that a favorable effect result will occur when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (especially the preview side timer effect executed as a result of a preview lottery), it is desirable to keep secret at least at the time when the count display begins which effect is the target of the effect. Additionally, the "target of the timer effect" refers to the effect that appears when the countdown display (e.g., countdown) from a first predetermined value in the timer effect reaches a second predetermined value (e.g., "0 seconds"); in the timer effect, the countdown display is performed toward the timing at which the target of the effect occurs.

In addition, the "timer effect" according to this embodiment displays the time elapsed since the count started to two decimal places, accurately displaying the number of seconds, etc. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as a timer effect like this, and as long as it is executed as a count effect in which a count is displayed by counting up or down, etc., it does not have to accurately show the time elapsed (number of seconds, etc.) since the count started.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (pre-notification timer effect) that appears only when the pre-notification lottery is won, the timer effect (variable timer effect) that is pre-installed as the effect content of the above-mentioned effect pattern (variable effect) determined based on the judgment table T1 can be executed. In other words, in this case, the count effect display is executed not only as the pre-notification timer effect that functions to increase the jackpot expectation rate for the effect pattern determined based on the variable pattern command, but also as the effect content of the effect pattern itself determined based on the variable pattern command, so that it is possible to make the count effect display (timer effect) appear without unnecessarily increasing the jackpot expectation rate indicated by the effect pattern determined based on the variable pattern command (increasing the expectation rate by satisfying the condition of "winning the pre-notification lottery"). For example, if the expected probability of a jackpot is "20%" when a specific presentation pattern determined based on a fluctuation pattern command appears, if the advance notice timer presentation is further executed, the expected probability of a jackpot will be increased by the composite presentation function to, for example, "40%," and the frequency of appearance will have to be lowered accordingly. However, if the variable side timer presentation is executed as the presentation content of the specific presentation pattern itself, it is possible to execute the timer presentation while keeping the expected probability of a jackpot at "20%" (it can appear simply by selecting a specific fluctuation pattern), and the frequency of appearance can be maintained at an appropriate level.

In addition, the probability of winning when a performance pattern (variable performance) appears in the judgment table T1 varies depending on the variable number (and furthermore, the performance pattern), and basically, the probability of winning increases as the variable number increases. For example, in the performance patterns corresponding to variable numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), a variable side timer performance is executed in which the performance content is a "conversation notice", but the appearance ratio is variable number 5 (6) > variable number 9 (10) > variable number 17 (18), while the probability of winning when it appears is set to variable number 5 (6) < variable number 9 (10) < variable number 17 (18). For ease of explanation, only the judgment table referenced in the normal game state will be described in detail here, but even in the judgment tables referenced in the low probability time-saving state and the high probability time-saving state, the presentation pattern itself contains a presentation pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which a variable timer presentation can be executed as the presentation content, and it can appear with a different probability than when in the normal game state.

In addition, in judgment table T1, variable numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but variable numbers 5 and 6 differ from variable numbers 3 and 4 in that a variable side timer effect with a conversation preview as the effect target may be executed. Also, variable numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed, but variable numbers 9 and 10 are different in that a variable side timer effect with a conversation preview as the effect target is executed, variable numbers 11 and 12 are different in that a variable side timer effect with a cut-in A as the effect target is executed, and variable numbers 13 and 14 are different in that a conversation preview and cut-in A are executed and a variable side timer effect with them as the effect target may be executed. In addition, variable numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach performance is performed, but variable numbers 17 and 18 execute a variable side timer performance with the conversation announcement as the performance target, variable numbers 19 and 20 execute a variable side timer performance with the cut-in B as the performance target, and variable numbers 21 and 22 are different in that conversation announcement and cut-in B are executed and a variable side timer performance with them as the performance target may be executed. Note that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when a variable side timer performance with cut-ins A and B as the performance target is executed than when a variable side timer performance with conversation announcement as the performance target is executed, and furthermore, it is set so that the expectation of a jackpot tends to be higher when a variable side timer performance with both conversation announcement and cut-ins A and B as the performance target is executed.

Note that a "conversation preview" is a presentation that can appear relatively early after the presentation pattern (decorative pattern variation presentation) is executed, and often has a relatively low expected level, whereas cut-ins A and B are presentations that can appear relatively late after the presentation pattern (decorative pattern variation presentation) is executed, and often has a relatively high expected level (or always has a relatively high expected level). Therefore, a "conversation preview" is set to have a higher appearance rate (probability of execution) than other presentations with higher expected levels (cut-ins A and B, and the role A and B actions described below). Also, in character reach, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the variation presentation is executed so as to correspond to cut-in A that appears as the content of the preview presentation, whereas in SP reach, it is executed so as to correspond to cut-in B, not cut-in A, that appears as the content of the preview presentation.

Moreover, in the judgment table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the performance contents (performance patterns) are assigned as the variable side timer performance for a plurality of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22). In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is a "predetermined type such as shortened fluctuation or low expectation normal reach performance (e.g., fluctuation numbers 1-6, etc.)," the count performance display as the advance notice timer performance is prevented from winning the performance (increasing the degree of premium) to appropriately ensure an increase in expectation when the advance notice timer performance appears. When the fluctuation pattern is a "fluctuation pattern that executes the variable side timer performance (count fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.)," the proportion of the fluctuation pattern that corresponds to the above-mentioned predetermined type (e.g., fluctuation numbers 1-6, etc.) is lower than when it is not such a count fluctuation pattern.

Here, 14 count fluctuation patterns (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) are prepared as the count fluctuation patterns for which the timer performance on the fluctuation side is executed, but only two of these (fluctuation numbers 5 and 6) (which may be set to 0) correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (fluctuation numbers 1-6, etc.), so the corresponding ratio is "2/14". In contrast, eight fluctuation patterns (fluctuation numbers 1-4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as the fluctuation patterns for which the timer performance on the fluctuation side is not executed, and four of these (fluctuation numbers 1-4) correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (fluctuation numbers 1-6, etc.), so the corresponding ratio is "4/8".

In this configuration, when the performance content of the fluctuation pattern is one in which a count performance display (fluctuation side timer performance) can be performed (count fluctuation pattern), the percentage of times it is determined that the count performance display (pre-notification side timer performance) cannot be executed as the performance content of the preview performance is lower than in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation side timer performance is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the appearance of multiple count displays within one performance pattern (fluctuation performance) without unnecessarily increasing the expectation level and lowering the frequency of appearance.

As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the presentation pattern (variation presentation) determined in the presentation pattern variation start process is a count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22), the rate at which the above-mentioned advance notice timer presentation appears varies depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the presentation pattern corresponding to variation numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the above-mentioned advance notice timer presentation does not appear at all, when the presentation pattern corresponding to variation numbers 9-14 is executed, the above-mentioned advance notice timer presentation can appear with a medium probability of selection, and when the presentation pattern corresponding to variation numbers 17-22 is executed, the above-mentioned advance notice timer presentation can appear with a high probability of selection.

The above-mentioned advance notice timer effect may be made to appear with a low probability even when the performance patterns corresponding to variable numbers 5 and 6 are executed. Also, even if any of the performance patterns corresponding to variable numbers 15 to 22, which have a high probability of making the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect appear, are executed, the advance notice timer effect is actually made to appear with a higher probability in a performance pattern that results in a jackpot win than in a miss, and the advance notice timer effect is made to appear with an even higher probability in variable number 22 than in variable number 16.

In this configuration, the rate at which the count display is executed as the performance content of the preview performance (preview timer performance) differs depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is the first count fluctuation pattern (e.g., fluctuation number 10) or the second count fluctuation pattern (e.g., fluctuation number 22). Therefore, even among the above count fluctuation patterns (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) in which the rate at which multiple count displays appear within one performance pattern (fluctuation performance) is high, the rate at which multiple count displays appear can be made even higher depending on the type, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even in a presentation pattern in which the same reach type presentation content appears (e.g., character reach, SP reach), in a presentation pattern in which a variable side timer presentation is included as a presentation content (e.g., variable numbers 17 to 22), the rate at which the advance notice timer presentation appears within the execution period of the presentation pattern (the rate at which the advance notice timer presentation is decided to be executed in the advance notice drawing) is higher than in a presentation pattern in which a variable side timer presentation is not included as a presentation content (e.g., variable numbers 15, 16). In other words, in this case, it is possible to make two timer presentations (variable side timer presentation, advance notice timer presentation) appear within one presentation pattern by simply requiring a jackpot expectation level that is high enough for one advance notice timer presentation to be won in the advance notice drawing, and thus it is possible to realize a double timer presentation opportunity without needlessly increasing the jackpot expectation level.

In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the presentation pattern (variation presentation) determined in the presentation pattern change start process is a count change pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22), the count display mode (such as the shape and color of the count numbers) is different between the variable side timer presentation (variation side count presentation display) in which the "conversation announcement" is the presentation target and the variable side timer presentation (variation side count presentation display) in which the "cut-in" is the presentation target. In other words, in this case, even if a presentation pattern with the same reach presentation as the presentation content (for example, variable numbers 9 and 11) is executed, by checking the count display mode of the variable side timer presentation (variation side count presentation display), coupled with the fact that "the rate at which the above-mentioned announcement side timer presentation appears is different depending on which count change pattern it is," it becomes possible to recognize and expect the likelihood of the announcement side timer presentation appearing.

The mode of the count display that appears in the preview side timer performance (preview side count display) may be different from (or at least different from) the mode of the count display that appears in the variable side timer performance (variable side count display) (conversation preview, cut-in) regardless of whether the performance target is the same (conversation preview, cut-in) or not, or it may be the same as (or at least the same as) that mode.

However, for the count display executed as the preview side timer effect (preview side count display), it is beneficial to execute it in a common manner regardless of the type of effect that is the target of the effect, in order to make the player aware that a preview side timer effect with a relatively high expectation level is appearing, thereby increasing the sense of expectation. In this sense, it is more desirable for the preview side timer effect to be different from any of the count display modes (conversation preview, cut-in) that appear in the variable side timer effect (variable side count display). For the above common mode as the preview side timer effect (preview side count display), multiple modes with different expectation levels (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) are prepared, and any of these may be executed.

In addition, to make it easier to recognize that the advance notice timer performance is being performed, it is desirable to have a different count speed (for example, the speed at which the numbers change when counting up or down) between the count display when the advance notice timer performance is being performed and the count display when the variable timer performance is being performed. With this configuration, even during the period in which the count display is progressing after the timer performance has started, the player can pay attention to the count speed of the timer performance, creating interest in whether the relatively low expectation variable timer performance or the relatively high expectation advance notice timer performance is being performed, and this makes it possible to maintain an interest in playing during the timer consumption period.

In addition, in this case, in the variable side timer performance, depending on the performance target (conversation preview, cut-in), the count is displayed in a manner in which the count is displayed at a speed relatively close to (or the same speed as) the count speed of the preview side timer performance (cut-in), and in a manner in which the count is displayed at a speed relatively not close to the count speed of the preview side timer performance (conversation preview), it is possible to vary the difficulty of determining whether the preview side timer performance is being performed or not, thereby adding interest. Also, while in the variable side timer performance (or preview side timer performance), the count is displayed by repeatedly appearing and disappearing the count numbers, in the preview side timer performance (or variable side timer performance), the count may be displayed by continuously displaying the count numbers.

With this configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable timer effect and the count display of the advance notice timer effect are executed simultaneously, it becomes easy to know whether the advance notice timer effect is being executed or not, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, for the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable side timer performance (count fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.), multiple performance patterns with different start timing or end timing of the count display (total number of counts, or time required to consume all counts) are set as selectable performance patterns. When a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable side timer performance is acquired, one of the multiple performance patterns is determined based on a random number for performance, etc., and the ease of simultaneous execution of the count display of the variable side timer performance and the count display of the notice side timer performance (for example, the larger the total number of counts, the easier it is to overlap) is differentiated, and the ease of determining whether the notice side timer performance is being executed is differentiated, adding interest.

In this embodiment, multiple presentation patterns (the target of the timer presentation and the content of the reach presentation are the same) with different start or end timings of the count display (total number of counts or the time required to complete all counts) are prepared for one fluctuation pattern, but multiple different fluctuation patterns may be prepared for multiple presentation patterns (the type of presentation that is the target of the timer presentation and the type of reach presentation executed as the content of the fluctuation pattern are the same for each presentation pattern) with different start or end timings of the count display (total number of counts or the time required to complete all counts) and be matched one-to-one.

In addition, by making the count display number (total count number) different when it appears in the variable side timer effect and the preview side timer effect, or by making the selection rate of the specific count display number different between the variable side timer effect and the preview side timer effect even if the same specific count display number is selectable, it becomes possible to vary the difficulty of determining whether the preview side timer effect is being executed, thereby adding to the excitement.

In addition, if the preview side timer performance is executed with a countdown display, while the variable side timer performance is executed with a countup display, it will be possible to determine with certainty whether the preview side timer performance is being executed, which is expected to significantly increase interest in the game.In addition, if the preview side timer performance is executed with a countdown display, while the variable side timer performance targeted at a specific performance (e.g., a conversation preview) is executed with a countup display, and the variable side timer performance targeted at a performance different from the specific performance (e.g., a cut-in) is executed with a countdown display, it will be possible to vary the difficulty of determining whether the preview side timer performance is being executed depending on the performance target, adding to the excitement.

As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a in this embodiment controls the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect so that there are cases where the same effect is the target of the effect, and cases where different effects are the target of the effect. When the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are the target of the effect (for example, a conversation notice), the probability of the expectation of a jackpot being lower is set to be higher than when the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are the target of different effects, and even when the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are the target of the effect (for example, a conversation notice), the end timing of each count display is made different.

In other words, in this case, even if the same effect (e.g., a conversation announcement) is the target of the variable side timer effect and the announcement side timer effect, one of the variable side timer effect and the announcement side timer effect will reach a predetermined value first and end, while the count display of the other will continue, so at this point it looks as if a different effect is the target of the effect (the timer effect is being executed in a relatively high expectation mode). Then, after this, the other count display that was continued will also reach a predetermined value and end in a manner that makes it clear that the same effect (e.g., a conversation announcement) is the target of the effect, so even if it is clear that a conversation announcement with a relatively low expectation is the target of the effect by the timer effect that ended first, it is expected that the expectation that a different effect that can appear later is the target of the effect (the timer effect is being executed in a relatively high expectation mode) will be maintained, and interest in the game will be increased.

In addition, when the same effect (e.g., a conversation announcement) is the target of the variable side timer effect and the preview side timer effect, it is desirable to have separate count end corresponding displays (e.g., "Count successful!", "Chance UP!", etc.) appear when the variable side timer effect reaches a predetermined value and when the preview side timer effect reaches a predetermined value.

More specifically, the variable side timer performance and the notice side timer performance, which are targeted at the "conversation notice" executed as the variable side or notice side performance, are each made to appear within a single performance pattern. In this case, the count display of the variable side timer performance and the count display of the notice side timer performance progress simultaneously, but in the variable side timer performance, the count display progresses in accordance with the variable side specific performance that occurs as a variable side performance in relation to the "conversation notice" (such as "Count successful!" or an effect that coincides with the appearance of the conversation notice), whereas in the notice side timer performance, the count display progresses in accordance with the notice side specific performance that occurs as a notice side performance in relation to the "conversation notice" (such as "Chance UP!" or a timer end display that appears in accordance with the start timing of the conversation notice (or a specified number of seconds before the performance starts)), so that separate count end corresponding displays appear at different times.

The conversation preview and cut-in effects are required to be executed without fail if they are the target of the variable timer effect (if the count fluctuation pattern is determined). In particular, since the conversation preview and cut-in are effects that can be executed in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation, when they are the target of the variable timer effect, they are required to appear in a relatively highly expected manner when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Therefore, it is desirable to incorporate the effects that are the target of the variable timer effect as the performance content of the above-mentioned performance pattern (variable performance) in advance, so that the variable timer effect and the performance that is the target of the effect (the relatively highly expected manner) can each appear simply by executing the performance pattern. However, instead of this, it is also possible to control so that when the variable timer effect is executed, the performance that is the target of the effect (the relatively highly expected manner) is always selected in the preview lottery.

In addition, if the conversation preview and cut-in effects are not targeted for effect in the variable timer effect, not only is a determination made as to whether or not they will be made to appear as part of the preview side effect content in the preview lottery described below, but a determination is also made as to the manner in which they will be made to appear as part of the preview side effect content (a manner with a relatively high or low expectation), and the appearance is controlled based on the results of this determination.

The process of determining the presentation pattern using FIG. 118 will be summarized below.
That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains a variable pattern command or a symbol type command from the main control MPU 1310a, it first refers to a judgment table according to the current game state based on the variable number indicated by the variable pattern command or the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command. For example, if the presentation pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it becomes possible to give a bias (expectation) to the probability of a certain presentation pattern appearing or the number of rounds in a big win game state.

Next, if multiple presentation patterns (such as multiple presentation patterns with different start or end timings for the count display that appears in the variable timer presentation) are available for selection as presentation patterns associated with the variable number, one of the multiple presentation patterns with different start or end timings for the count display is selected based on whether the jackpot judgment is successful. In this case, the presentation pattern is set so that if the jackpot judgment is successful, the probability that the start or end timing of the count display will be delayed is high, so that the later the start or end timing of the count display is, the more likely the jackpot pattern will appear.

As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a special performance condition is met, even if a count fluctuation pattern (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) is acquired, a performance pattern that is set so that the variable timer performance does not appear is selected from among the multiple performance patterns.

Then, after the peripheral control MPU 1511a has selected the presentation pattern that will appear during the pattern change (the presentation from when the decorative pattern starts to change until it stops changing), it will decide what kind of preview presentation will be additionally executed (combined) and in what form during the execution period of that presentation pattern (preview lottery).

Figure 119 shows an example of a sound definition table for implementing a process in which various notification sounds (dispense notification sounds and abnormality notification sounds) excluding sound effects are output only on a specific channel (hereafter referred to as channel X) among a finite number of channels prepared as sound control using a fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, the definitions of the playback priority, left/right pan initial value, up/down pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound name. Note that for the sake of convenience, only the definitions for notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown here, and explanations of the definitions of other notification sounds and sound effects are omitted. Note that for sound effects, in addition to the definitions using the fixed channel method, it is also possible to use the definitions using the automatic channel method for each channel other than channel X to which the notification sounds are assigned.

The priority is a parameter used to determine which of multiple alarm sounds should be assigned to channel X for output when each of the alarm sounds satisfies the output condition, and an alarm sound with a higher priority value will be assigned to channel X for output regardless of the assignment status of an alarm sound with a lower priority value to channel X. As will be described later, when the priorities are the same, the alarm sound that was assigned to channel X first will be given priority, and will be assigned to channel X for output after the output of the alarm sound has been completed.

The left/right pan initial value represents the initial position of the sound image of the sound produced by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left/right pan setting value during sound playback, a difference in the volume output from the left and right speakers individually is created, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to "0x00", it indicates that the sound is output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L), and when set to "0x80", the difference in volume output from the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, a setting of "0xFF" indicates that the sound will be output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of the up/down pan represents the initial position of the sound image of the sound produced by the upper and lower speakers, such as the pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). By dynamically changing the setting value of the up/down pan during sound playback, a difference is created in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers individually, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. For example, when set to "0x00", it indicates that the sound is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573, and when set to "0x80", the difference in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers individually is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. When set to "0xFF", it indicates that the sound is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value indicates the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be set within the range of "0x00" to "0xFF", for example. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the sounds mentioned above. The playback type setting indicates whether the target sound is loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure), in which the target sound is played repeatedly, or 1 SHOT playback (corresponding to "1 SHOT" in the figure), in which the target sound is played once. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is played in mono or stereo.

Figure 120 is a table showing the notification content, notification mode, and notification time for each type of notification sound shown in Figure 119, as well as the conditions for terminating the notification (cancellation conditions). Note that in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for each notification sound, but this is a measure to make effective use of the single channel X by keeping it as free as possible and refraining from outputting subsequent notification sounds.

As shown in FIG. 120, the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is for notifying that a magnetic field has been detected by the magnetic sensor 4024 (a state in which there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity using a magnet). The alarm mode is a loop process for repeatedly outputting an alarm sound such as "beep, magnetic field has been detected," a display in the display area of the game board performance display device 1600 (for example, "magnetic field has been detected"), and lighting of various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. As for the alarm time, the loop process for repeatedly outputting an alarm sound such as "beep, magnetic field has been detected" is terminated 60 seconds (corresponding to six repeated alarm sounds) from the time of detection by the magnetic sensor 4024, while the display in the display area of the game board performance display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps are continued until the release condition "power re-on" is met.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), the alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) which notifies that a vibration has been detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity through banging is occurring), and the alarm sound 3 (big prize abnormality) which notifies that a detection has been made by the count sensor 4005 (first big prize opening sensor or second big prize opening sensor) even though the big prize game state (a state in which the big prize opening is open) is not in a big prize game state (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity is occurring by forcibly opening the big prize opening that is in a closed state to allow a game ball to enter) are regarded as belonging to a first alarm group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has occurred, and the alarm sounds belonging to the first alarm group are all set to have the same alarm mode, alarm time, and release condition.

For example, for alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality), the alarm mode involves a loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "Buzz buzz vibration has been detected," a display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 (for example, "Vibration has been detected"), and the lighting of various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5, and the loop process that repeatedly outputs the alarm sound ends 60 seconds (equivalent to six repetitions of the alarm sound) from the time of detection by the vibration sensor 2405, whereas the display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the lighting of the various lamps continue to be executed until the release condition of "power re-applying" is met. In addition, for the alarm sound 3 (big prize abnormality), the alarm mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "big prize abnormality detected," a display in the display area of the game board performance display device 1600 (for example, "big prize abnormality detected"), and the lighting of various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5. The loop process that repeatedly outputs the alarm sound ends 60 seconds (equivalent to six repeated alarm sounds) from the time of detection by the count sensor 4005, while the display in the display area of the game board performance display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps continue until the release condition of "power re-applying" is met.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group are displayed in different display modes within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group are illuminated in the same manner (not necessarily all of the various lamps are illuminated) by the various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. In addition, the notification sounds to be subject to the loop processing are a combination of a warning sound used in all of the notification sounds 1 to 3, such as "buzzing" that serves to notify that the notification belongs to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity), and a message sound (unique sound) that serves to notify the individual identification of the content of the notification. The warning sound is composed of a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning in a tense fraud situation, and it is desirable that the message sound is composed of a variety of sounds to clearly distinguish it from other notification sounds.

In other words, when reporting something that belongs to the first notification group (a state where there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity), it is more important to speed up the initial response of the hall to the fraudulent activity than to identify which notification type it is. In this regard, with the above configuration, it is possible to recognize that something belongs to the first notification group (a state where there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity) simply by outputting the "buzzing" notification sound or the lighting pattern unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light-emitting devices), so it is expected that the initial response of the hall to the fraudulent activity will be quicker. Furthermore, since a message sound notifying which notification type it is is output following the "buzzing" notification sound, and a display is made within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, it is expected that the hall's initial response will also be handled smoothly.

Meanwhile, the alarm sound 4 (door open) is to notify that the door frame 3 has been detected as open relative to the main frame 4 by the door frame open switch 618 (a state in which, although there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been committed by opening the door, there is also a possibility that the door has been opened as a result of abnormality response measures taken by the hall). The alarm mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "Door is open, ping pong ping pong," a display within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 (for example, "Door is open"), and the lighting of various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5. In addition, in terms of the alarm time, the loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "Door is open, ping pong ping pong" ends 30 seconds (equivalent to three repeated alarm sounds) from the time of detection by the door frame opening switch 618, whereas the display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps continue until the release condition "door closed detection (detection that the door frame 3 has been closed against the main frame 4 by the door frame opening switch 618)" is met.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the alarm sound 4 (door open), alarm sound 5 (frame open), which notifies that the body frame 4 has been detected as open relative to the outer frame 2 by the body frame open switch 619 (a state in which there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been committed by opening the body frame, but it is also possible that the body frame has been opened as a result of abnormality response measures taken by the hall), is considered to belong to a second alarm group when there is a moderate possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been committed and this cannot be denied, and the alarm modes, alarm times, and release conditions for the alarm sounds belonging to this second alarm group are all set to be the same.

For example, for the alarm sound 5 (frame opening), the alarm mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "The frame is open, ping pong ping pong," a display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 (for example, "The frame is open"), and the lighting of various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. The loop process that repeatedly outputs the alarm sound ends 30 seconds (equivalent to three repeated alarm sounds) from the time of detection by the main frame opening switch 619, while the display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps continue to be executed until the release condition of "frame closing detection (detection that the main frame 4 has been closed against the outer frame 2 by the main frame opening switch 619)" is met.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group are displayed in different display modes within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group are illuminated in the same manner (not necessarily all of the various lamps are illuminated) by the various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. However, the illumination mode of the lamps (light-emitting devices) when they belong to the second notification group is different from the illumination mode of the lamps (light-emitting devices) when they belong to the first notification group. In addition, for the notification sounds that are the subject of the loop processing, a combination of a message sound (unique sound) that serves to inform the individual identification of the content of the notification and an alarm sound that is used in both notification sounds 4 and 5, such as "ping pong ping pong," that serves to inform the user that the notification belongs to the second notification group (a state in which there is a medium possibility of fraudulent activity), is used by sequentially outputting the message sound.

That is, when reporting something belonging to the second notification group (a state where there is a moderate possibility of cheating), it is important to be able to take measures to deal with the abnormality on the part of the hall relatively quickly while not making people who are playing properly feel disgusted. In this regard, according to the above configuration, as with the case of something belonging to the third notification group described below, a message sound is output as the notification sound to inform people of which notification type it is, so that people who are playing properly are expected to feel less disgusted. On the other hand, in order to make it less disgusting for people who are playing properly, an alarm sound such as "ping pong ping pong" is output following the message sound, although it is a different alarm sound from the case of the first notification group, or various lamps are output in a different lighting mode from the case of the first notification group, but are not output in the case of the third notification group, in order to make it less disgusting for people who are playing properly, and it is expected that the hall's measures to deal with the abnormality will be relatively quickly taken.

On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left hand hit guide) notifies that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area of the game area 5a to the right of the center device 2500 despite the non-time-saving state (a state in which the game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player and should be corrected to an appropriate manner (left hand)). The notification mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please return to left hand hit" and a display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left hand hit"). The notification time is set to end 20 seconds (equivalent to two repetitions of the notification sound) from the time the gate sensor 4003 detects the game ball in the non-time-saving state.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the alarm sound 6 (left hit guide), the alarm sound 7 (ball removal guide) that notifies when the full tray detection sensor 279 detects that the lower tray 322 is full of game balls (a state in which the game balls in the lower tray 322 should be removed) is regarded as belonging to a third alarm group for when the possibility of fraud is low but game guidance should be given to ensure the game progresses properly, and the alarm sounds belonging to the third alarm group are all set to have the same alarm mode, alarm time, and release conditions.

For example, in the case of the alarm sound 7 (ball removal guide), the alarm mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "Please remove the balls from the lower tray" and a display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 (for example, "Please remove the balls from the lower tray"), and the alarm time is set to end 20 seconds (equivalent to two repeated alarm sounds) after detection by the full tank detection sensor 279, both of which are repeated to output an alarm sound such as "Please remove the balls from the lower tray" and the display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

However, for notification sound 6 (left hand hit guide) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guide), if the gate sensor 4003 and full tank detection sensor 279 are still in a detection state when the process is terminated 20 seconds after their detection, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left hand hit guide) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guide)) will be executed again from the beginning.

In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sound 6, 7, but more precisely, after the output of the message sound of, for example, 5 seconds of silent data is assigned to channel X and the corresponding sound is output (silent output), and a loop process is performed in which the message sound and the silent data are set to a 10-second notification sound that is repeated. Since the notification sounds 6, 7 are both configured to output silent data for the same amount of time, they function as unique notification modes different from the first and second notification groups, and the hall side can properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group just by checking the silent data portion rather than the message sound portion, which is difficult to hear in a noisy hall. It is preferable to prepare the silent data in advance as a single sound data (10 seconds of sound data) including the message sound, and to perform the loop process while keeping this assigned to channel X.

Incidentally, there may be silent parts within the alarm sounds used in the first and second alarm groups (such as between the warning sound and the message sound), but these are only for a very short period of time to create a "gap," and are clearly fundamentally different from the relatively long silent parts (third alarm group) mentioned above that have a group identification function.

With this configuration, warning sounds such as "beep beep" or "ping pong ping pong" are not output, and only the message sound is output repeatedly with a predetermined silent period in between, making it possible to notify the player of game information without making them feel uncomfortable.

In the examples shown in Figs. 119 and 120, the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group are set to the same priority, but the priority may be different between notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. In addition, the playback type setting is set to loop playback in which the target sound is repeatedly played back, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and one-shot playback in which the target sound is played back once may be used. In addition, the "buzzing" sound commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group and the "ping pong ping pong" sound commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group may be prepared separately for each notification sound as a single sound data linked to the message sound, or may be prepared as sound data separate from the message sound, and sound data combining the message sound and the alarm sound may be created when outputting and then assigned to a channel.

[Gaming machine equipped with multiple performance operation units]
In the above, a gaming machine is described in which the game machine is provided with the game machine operation unit 400 that can be operated by the player and can present the game machine operation image to the player, but in the following, a gaming machine that can further increase the player's motivation to operate the game machine will be described with reference to Figs. 121 to 143. The game machine operation unit is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

Figure 121 is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword effect operation unit 5000. Figure 122 is a right side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 disposed in the door frame 3 of the gaming machine 1 described above is described, and the same reference numerals are used for the same components as described above, and explanations will be omitted as appropriate.

The sword performance operation unit 5000 is installed on the front of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword performance operation unit 5000 constitutes a sword ornament 5001 consisting of a sword section 5010 having a blade section 5011, a handle section 5012, and a tsuba section 5013 sandwiched between the blade section 5011 and the handle section 5012, and a sheath section 5020 capable of housing the blade section 5011 of the sword section 5010.

The sword ornament 5001 is mounted on the door frame 3 so that the sheath 5020 can move left and right when viewed from the front. The sword 5010 is also mounted so that it can move in the unsheathing direction and the sheathing direction. The sword 5010 is normally in a sheathed state with the blade 5011 sheathed in the sheath 5020, and in the unsheathing performance, the blade 5010 is in an unsheathed state where the blade 5011 is visible to the player through the unsheathing action. The unsheathed sword 5010 can then function as an operating means that accepts a sheathing operation by the player and returns to the sheathed state.

Now, referring to FIG. 123, we will explain the opportunity to execute the unsheathing effect involving the movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration 5001). FIG. 123 shows an example of a selection table for effect patterns in an effect mode in which the unsheathing effect can be executed, and (A) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to execute the sword preparation transition effect according to the type of movement pattern, and (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to execute the actual unsheathing effect.

The performance patterns described here include a pattern in which the actual unsheathing performance is performed after the preparation for unsheathing transition performance is executed, a pattern in which the actual unsheathing performance is performed without a preparation for unsheathing transition performance being performed beforehand, a pattern in which the actual unsheathing performance is not performed even though a preparation for unsheathing transition performance has been performed beforehand, and a pattern in which neither the preparation for unsheathing transition performance nor the actual unsheathing performance is performed. Furthermore, there are two patterns for the shape of the sword decoration 5001 in the actual unsheathing performance: a form with an aura component and a form without an aura component.

As shown in FIG. 123(A), the main control board 1310 determines whether or not to execute the sword-drawing preparation transition effect depending on the type of variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the multiple types of variation patterns are classified into a variation pattern for a big win when a big win occurs, a variation pattern for a small win when a small win occurs, and a variation pattern for a miss when a miss occurs, and the more advantageous the variation pattern is for the player, the higher the probability of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect being executed is set. Specifically, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% when the variation pattern for a big win occurs, with a probability of 30% when the variation pattern for a small win occurs, and with a probability of 20% when the variation pattern for a miss occurs. Note that the probability of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect being executed may be changed depending on the presence or absence of a reach effect so that the probability of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect being executed is higher when a reach effect is performed than when it is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(B), whether or not the main unsheathing effect will be executed is selected by lottery depending on the type of fluctuation pattern and the presence or absence of the unsheathing preparation transition effect. Even if the type of fluctuation pattern is the same, if the unsheathing preparation transition effect is executed, the probability of the main unsheathing effect being executed is set to be higher than when the unsheathing preparation transition effect is not executed. Also, the more advantageous the fluctuation pattern is for the player, the higher the probability of the main unsheathing effect being executed. Here, even if the fluctuation pattern is less advantageous, the probability of the main unsheathing effect being executed is set to be higher when the unsheathing preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, when the unsheathing preparation transition effect is executed in the fluctuation pattern for miss fluctuation, the probability of the main unsheathing effect being executed is higher than when the unsheathing preparation transition effect is not executed in the fluctuation pattern for small win fluctuation. Note that in the case of the fluctuation pattern for big win fluctuation, the main unsheathing effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the unsheathing preparation transition effect.

In addition, when the main sword unsheathing effect is executed, a sword preparation transition effect is executed beforehand, and the more advantageous the variation pattern is for the player, the higher the probability that the main sword unsheathing effect with an aura component will be executed. Note that in this case, the main sword unsheathing effect with an aura component will not be selected in the case of a variation pattern for a small win.

(State transitions and aura component movements caused by the unsheathing of the sword decoration)
Next, the unsheathing action of the sword decoration 5001 in the unsheathing performance (the sword preparation transition performance and the actual unsheathing performance) will be described with reference to Figures 124 to 127. In addition, the action of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described for the case where the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword section 5010 (sword blade section 5011) itself that can accept the player's sword sheathing operation, and the sword section 5010 is transformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (Figures 124 and 125), and the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath section 5020 of the door frame 3 that stores the sword section 5010 (sword blade section 5011), and the sword section 5010 is combined with the member (aura member 5035) on the door frame 3 side to become an integrated decoration (Figures 126 and 127).

Figure 124 is a state transition diagram explaining the unsheathing operation of the sword accessory 5001 when the aura member 5030 is attached to the sword section 5010 (blade section 5011) itself, showing (A) the sheathed state, (B) the first unsheathing state, and (C) the second unsheathing state. Figure 125 is a vertical cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. Note that Figure 125 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the blade section 5011 extracted from the sheath section 5020 to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easier to understand.

In the normal state, the sword decoration 5001 is in a sheathed state with the blade 5011 sheathed in the sheath 5020, as shown in FIG. 124(A). After the unsheathing action in the preparation-to-unsheathe transition performance, the sword decoration 5001 is in a first unsheathed state, as shown in FIG. 124(B), in which only the habaki 5011a part of the blade 5011 that is fitted to the hand is unsheathed from the sheath 5020 and visible to the player. Then, after the unsheathing action in the main unsheathing performance, the sword decoration 5001 is in a second unsheathed state, as shown in FIG. 124(C), in which the blade 5011 is further unsheathed from the sheath 5020 and most of it is visible to the player. Here, the sword decoration 5001 in the second unsheathed state can function as an operating means capable of accepting a sheathing action by the player.

The aura member 5030 provided on the blade 5011 is configured to be able to operate independently of the unsheathing action of the blade 5011. When the sword ornament 5001 is in the form with the aura member, the aura member 5030 moves the range of motion as much as possible (maximum movement) from a closed state (FIG. 125(A)) to an open state (FIG. 125(B)) inside the sheath 5020 when the blade 5011 changes from the sheathed state (FIG. 124(A)) to the first unsheathing state (FIG. 124(B)), and deforms the blade 5011. Therefore, the player can see the aura member 5030 even during the change process when the blade 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 changes from the first unsheathing state to the second unsheathing state (FIG. 124(C)). As will be described later, the aura member 5030 is positioned below the habaki 5011a of the blade 5011 even when fully extended, so the player cannot see the aura member 5030 in the first unsheathing state.

In the normal state (closed state), the aura member 5030 is enclosed in the blade 5011 as shown in FIG. 125(A). The aura member 5030 is provided below the blade 5011a of the blade 5011, and has a right aura member 5031, a left aura member 5032, and a pinion 5033 that meshes with the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031 and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. When the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), the rotational force of the aura member 5030 is converted into linear motion in the right direction of the rack 5031a and the left direction of the rack 5032a, and as shown in FIG. 125(B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 each stop at a position (open state) where they protrude outward from the outer shape of the blade 5011.

In addition, an LED board 5011c having multiple LEDs is contained in the blade shaft 5011b below the habaki 5011a of the blade 5011. By emitting light from these LEDs, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the blade 50011 (aura member 5030).

Here, an example has been shown in which the timing of the movement of the aura member 5030 changes from a closed state to an open state when the sword decoration 5001 (sword section 5010) changes from the sheathed state to the first unsheathed state, and the movement of the aura member 5030 causes the sword body section 5011 to deform, and the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first unsheathed state to the second unsheathed state, but this is not limiting. The aura member 5030 may start moving (deforming) after the sword decoration 5001 reaches the second unsheathed state. It is sufficient that the sword decoration 5001 in the second unsheathed state reaches the final state (not limited to the state in which it moves to the maximum, but including a state in which it stops moving midway) based on the performance pattern set before it functions as an operating means.

Figure 126 is a state transition diagram explaining the unsheathing operation of the sword accessory 5001 when the aura member 5035 is attached to the sheath 5020, showing (A) the sheathed state, (B) the first unsheathing state, and (C) the second unsheathing state. Figure 127 is a vertical cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. Note that Figure 127 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the state in which the blade 5011 has been extracted from the sheath 5020 to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easier to understand. Here, the same symbols are used for the same components as those in the above-mentioned Figures 125 and 126, and explanations will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in Figures 126 (A) to (C), the aura member 5035 provided on the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword section 5010 (blade section 5011) can move up and down, whereas the aura member 5030 provided on the sword section 5010 (blade section 5011) itself can move left and right. The aura member 5035 is provided to surround the outer periphery of the sword section 5011. When the sword accessory 5001 is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 operates in accordance with the change in state of the sword section 5011 (sheathed state ⇔ first unsheathing state ⇔ second unsheathing state) while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the sword section 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sheathed state. This allows the sword section 5010 (blade section 5011) to be combined with the frame side member (aura member 5035) to appear as a unified decorative piece.

In the normal state (fully housed state), the aura member 5035 is housed in the sheath 5020 as shown in Fig. 127 (A). The aura member 5035 is arranged so that its upper end is below the habaki 5011a of the blade 5011 in the fully housed state, and has a hollow cylindrical surrounding aura member 5036 arranged to surround the outer periphery of the blade 5011, a right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b arranged below the hollow portion of the surrounding aura member 5036, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. The right pinion 5037a of the surrounding aura member 5036 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), and the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front. Both pinions are also engaged, and the rotational force is converted into linear upward motion of the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. 127(B), the surrounding aura member 5036 stops at a position where it combines with the blade 5011 to form the second unsworded state. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a fully-appearing state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 has moved to the upper limit of its range of motion (maximum movement).

Although not shown in the figure, the blade portion 5011 contains an LED board having multiple LEDs, making it possible to illuminate and decorate the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035.

Here, an example is shown in which the timing of the movement of the aura member 5035 combines with the blade part 5011 while maintaining a relative positional relationship according to the state change of the sword decoration 5001 (sword part 5010) (sword sheathed state ⇔ first drawn state ⇔ second drawn state), but this is not limiting. The aura member 5035 may start moving (combining) after the sword decoration 5001 enters the second drawn state. It is sufficient that the sword decoration 5001 in the second drawn state can reach the final state (not limited to the fully appeared state formed by maximum movement, but including the aura member-attached form in the halfway appeared state formed by stopping the movement midway) based on the performance pattern set before it functions as an operating means. In addition, the aura member 5035 may combine with the blade part 5011 so as not to be visible to the player when changing from the sheathed state to the first drawn state.

(Another presentation pattern 1 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, referring to Fig. 128 to Fig. 130, another reach performance using the sword decoration 5001 described above will be described. Fig. 128 to Fig. 130 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the performance display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword decoration 5001 in the princess reach performance. Here, the following points are the main differences from the sword decoration 5001 described above. First, the sword decoration 5001 in the sheathed state functions as an operation means, and detects the sword unsheathing operation by the player. Second, the sheath part 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left and right directions when viewed from the front, and the sword decoration 5001 in the second unsheathing state can move up to the center of the front of the performance display device 1600.

When the changing pattern reaches a reach state, the changing display of the three decorative patterns reaches a reach state in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Fig. 128 (A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (Fig. 128 (A2)). Here, a specific decorative member SDY (blind device) that can be moved up and down is provided above the display area of the performance display device 1600. In the normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and is stationary above the display area in a state where part of the blind is visible to the player (initial state). Also, at this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in a sheathed state.

In the princess reach performance, an image of the princess moving towards the back of the blinds is displayed (Fig. 128 (A3)), and then an operation performance suggestion image suggesting an operation performance is displayed (Fig. 128 (B1)). Then, the operation performance of the sword decoration 5001 starts, and the effective operation period during which the sword decoration 5001 can be operated begins. At the same time, an operation prompting image encouraging the player to unsheathe the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Fig. 129 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 and/or the specific decorative member SDY may be moved up and down in small increments from the time the operation performance suggestion image is displayed until the time the operation prompting image and the gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed. Then, when the unsheathing operation by the player is detected, a performance is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

The unsheathing operation by the player refers to the action of the player grabbing the handle 5012 of the sheathed sword decoration 5001 and lifting the sword 5010 upward to unsheathe the blade 5011 from the sheath 5020. When the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second unsheathing state, the unsheathing operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification action is performed to notify the player of the detection. The detection notification action may be any action that allows the player to sense an action other than the unsheathing operation through the handle 5012 that the player is holding, such as the movement or vibration of the sword 5010 (or the handle 5012) moving up and down. In addition, the detection notification action is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the action can be visually confirmed even if the player releases his or her hand from the handle 5012. Therefore, the player can visually confirm the operation detection, which reduces unnecessary contact with the sword decoration 5001 (such as grabbing it again to confirm the detection) and prevents malfunction or damage to the movable body.

When the player draws the sword here, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear, but depending on the degree of expectation, the aura member 5030 (5035) may appear so that it is visible to the player when the player draws the sword.

When the end pattern is performed, when the unsheathing operation by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the performance display device 1600, but remains stationary (initial state) above the display area, and a screen indicating the end of the operation performance by the sword decoration 5001 is displayed (Fig. 129 (C1)). Then, the decorative pattern is displayed stopped in the losing state "767" (Fig. 129 (C2)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is returned to the sheathed state when the stopping result of Fig. 129 (C2) is notified, but it may be returned to the sheathed state when the detection and notification operation ends.

On the other hand, when a development pattern is performed, when the player's unsheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved down to the front center where it overlaps with the display area of the performance display device 1600 (where only the reserved display area below the display area is visible (fully fallen state) (Fig. 129 (D1)). Next, the shadow of the princess is projected in the display area of the performance display device 1600. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 maintains the second unsheathing state (Fig. 129 (D2)). Note that there may be multiple patterns of the princess's shadow projected in the display area of the performance display device 1600 at this time, and for example, the color or size of the shadow, or the comment displayed afterwards may be changed to suggest the expected degree of the lottery result due to the princess reach (such as the expected degree of winning, or the gaming profit if a win occurs).

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the player has drawn the sword decoration 5001 into the second drawn state, i.e., since the shadow of the princess has been projected in the display area of the performance display device 1600, the sword decoration 5001 in the second drawn state moves to the center of the front left-right direction of the display area of the performance display device 1600 by moving the sheath 5020 attached to the door frame 3 (Fig. 129 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration 5001 reaches the center of the front of the display area of the performance display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the fully fallen state to its initial state, and an image of the princess being surprised that the blinds have been removed is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, which now has good visibility (Fig. 130 (D4)). After that, the sword decoration 5001 returns to the position where the original sword-drawing operation was performed, and in the display area of the performance display device 1600, if the result of this changing display is a hit, an image of the smiling princess is displayed to notify the winner (Fig. 130 (E1) (E2)), and if it is a miss, an image of the sad princess is displayed to notify the miss (Fig. 130 (F1) (F2)).

When the unsheathing operation by the player is detected, a detection notification operation is performed as described above, but if the player is unable to move the sword decoration 5001 when executing a moving performance in which the sword decoration 5001 moves to the center of the front left and right direction of the display area of the performance display device 1600 because the player is holding it, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is made. The performance itself will proceed even if the player does not stop holding the sword decoration 5001, but if the sword decoration 5001 is held in the position where the player performed the operation at the timing of the left and right moving performance of the sword decoration 5001 (Fig. 129 (D3)), a delay will be caused in the left and right moving performance. However, regardless of whether the left and right moving performance of the sword decoration 5001 is executed, the performance executed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 and the falling moving performance of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role object) are configured to proceed, so the progress of the game will not stagnate. In addition, the sword decoration 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a left-right movement effect when the player releases the sword decoration 5001, or it may be configured not to perform a movement effect.

In this way, in the princess reach performance, the specific decorative member SDY that suggested the operation performance (operation validity) of the sword decoration 5001 is dropped and moved by the unsheathing operation (up-down movement) of the sword decoration 5001 by the player, and the sword decoration 5001 itself, which was operated outside the display area of the performance display device 1600, can be moved forward (to the left of the operation position) of the performance display device 1600 by moving the sheath part 5020 provided on the door frame 3. In other words, based on the unsheathing operation by the player, the sword decoration 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position where the unsheathing operation was performed, which increases the operation value of the player and suppresses the decrease in the player's motivation to operate. In addition, since one operation means is configured to be able to operate in gradually different modes (up-down direction during operation, left-right direction after operation) by the operation by the player, a performance using multiple movable modes can be provided, and the operation value of the operation means can be increased compared to conventional operation means that have only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

The left-right movement of the sword decoration 5001 is performed by displacing it from an operating position outside the display area of the performance display device 1600 to an operating position in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600 for the purpose of performing an integrated performance with the performance image performed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (blind role), but this is not limited to this. For example, after performing the unsheathing operation with the sword decoration 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600, a left-right movement performance may be performed in which the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the left (left end of the frame) so that it is outside the display area of the performance display device 1600. In addition, since the operation of the sword decoration 5001 by the player in this example is an up-and-down movement (the unsheathing movement of pulling the sword part 5011 up from the bottom), it is desirable that the movement of the sword decoration 5001 that is performed after the operation based on the operation be in a direction (such as left-right as in this example) different from the direction of the movement when the player operates it (up-and-down in this case).

When the player's unsheathing operation is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so the player can accurately determine the timing of the operation end. The detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time so that the player can visually confirm it, so unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again to confirm the detection can be suppressed. This prevents the player from continuing the operation, which could delay the movement performance of the sword decoration 5001 thereafter, or damage the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Furthermore, if the movement performance cannot be executed due to contact with the sword decoration 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is made to the player to remove his/her hand, and even contact with the operation means that was required to be operated during the operation valid period is prohibited after the detection notification operation ends, so the operation value of the operation means can be increased.

(Another presentation pattern 2 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, with reference to Fig. 131 to Fig. 133, other reach effects using the sword decoration 5001 described above will be described. Fig. 131 to Fig. 133 are diagrams for explaining the screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, the state transitions of the operation button 410, and the motion transitions of the sword decoration 5001 in reach effects including the operation effects of the operation button 410 that are used in various ways. Here, a pattern ((A)(B)→N in the figures) in which an expectation suggestion effect is performed as the operation effect of the operation button 410, suggesting the expectation that the fluctuation during execution will result in a jackpot, and a pattern ((A)(B)→M in the figures) in which an operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 is suggested and developed as the operation effect of the operation button 410 will be described.

In this reach effect, when the variable display of the three decorative patterns reaches the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (Fig. 131 (A)), first, the effective operation period during which pressing of the operation button 410 is accepted is started, and an operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to press the operation button 410 (Fig. 131 (B)). An image of the operation means to be operated (operation button 410) and the effective operation period are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 maintains its sheathed state. Then, when pressing of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern.

First, in a pattern in which the expectation indication effect is performed by pressing the operation button 410, when the player's pressing of the operation button 410 is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (Fig. 131 (N1)), and then an image suggesting the expectation of a jackpot is displayed (Fig. 132 (N2)). After that, the result of the current variable display (jackpot, miss) is notified (Fig. 132 (N3) or (N4)). Note that a pre-reading effect may be performed instead of an expectation indication effect for the variable display being executed. For example, instead of an image showing the expectation (Fig. 132 (N2)), a character that changes the pending display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be displayed.

In addition, in a pattern in which the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is suggested and developed by pressing the operation button 410, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 suggesting that an operation performance requesting the sheathing operation of the sword decoration 5001 will be performed (Fig. 131 (M1)). Next, an image of the start of the operation performance of the sword decoration 5001 (here, the title "Chance to draw the sword" and the operation explanation message "Please sheathe your sword") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, and the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in a form with an aura member in which the blade part 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (Fig. 133 (M2)). Next, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the second unsheathing state and the effective operation period of the sword decoration 5001 has begun, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved up and down in small increments from its initial state, and an operation prompting image encouraging the player to sheathe the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Fig. 133 (M3)). Then, when the sheathing operation by the player is detected, a performance based on the results of this variable display is performed.

If the result of the current variable display is a jackpot, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved downward from the initial state to the fully fallen state (Fig. 133 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is returned to the initial state again, an image announcing a jackpot (the stopping state of the decorative pattern "777", the message "Well done") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is released (Fig. 133 (M5)). On the other hand, if the result of the current variable display is a miss, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) only stops moving in small increments in the initial state, and an image announcing a miss (the stopping state of the decorative pattern "767") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Fig. 133 (M6)).

In this way, by pressing the operation button 410, a variety of effects are possible, such as suggesting the degree of expectation or developing an operation effect using another operating means (sword decoration 5001), and the player cannot determine the subsequent development at the time of operating the operation button 410. This increases the player's interest in operating the operation button 410, and prevents a decrease in motivation to operate and a decline in interest in the game, which is a concern due to the monotony of the effects after operation.

In addition, in a series of reach performances, the player is required to perform different operation modes (pressing operation and sheathing operation) between the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sheathing operation of the sword decoration 5001) based on the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410). This can increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and can prevent a decrease in interest in the game, which is a concern due to the operation becoming monotonous and unchanging.

In this example, the operation button 410 is the valid operation means for the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (the operation of sheathing the sword decoration 5001) is given based on the pressing of the operation button 410, but this is not limited to this. The operation of sheathing the sword decoration 5001 may be the valid operation for the first operation opportunity. In this case, it is preferable that the operation means valid for the second operation opportunity targets the sword decoration 5001, rather than targeting the operation button 410, which has a relatively lower expectation than the first sword decoration 5001.

(Another presentation pattern 3 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, referring to Fig. 134 to Fig. 138, other reach effects using the sword decoration 5001 described above will be described. Fig. 134 to Fig. 138 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword decoration 5001 in the reach effect. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the figure) in which a big win occurs when the specific decoration member SDY (blind role) moves based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) in the figure → Q when the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 is given/R when the opportunity to operate the operation button 410 is given) will be described.

In this reach performance, when the three decorative patterns are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 in a reach state (Fig. 134 (A)), first, the start image of the operation performance of the operation button 410 (here, the message "One push of the button will move the movable body") is displayed (Fig. 134 (B)), and then the operation effective period during which the operation button 410 is pressed is started, and an operation promotion performance that encourages the operation of pressing the operation button 410 is performed (Fig. 134 (C)). In the display area of the performance display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation effective period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 maintains the sheathed state. Then, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, a performance is performed according to a preset performance pattern. Note that the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one hit (once), but may be repeated (multiple times). Also, to make it easier for the player to understand the object (movable object) that moves when operated, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) may be made to move in small increments up and down in the initial state during the effective operation period of the operation button 410. Also, if the sword decoration 5001 becomes the object of operation later, the state of the sword decoration 5001 may be changed from the sheathed state to the second unsheathed state at this point.

In a pattern where the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) moves to cause a jackpot, when the player's pressing of the operation button 410 is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved downward from its initial state to a fully fallen state (Fig. 135 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to its initial state again, an image announcing a jackpot (the stopping state of the decorative pattern "777" and the message "Well done") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) has been released (Fig. 135 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be made to vibrate.

In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) does not move, when the pressing of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) only stops its small movement but does not fall. Then, in the display area of the performance display device 1600, a decorative pattern in a miss mode ("767") is displayed swinging in the center of the screen (Figure 136 (P1)). After that, depending on the performance pattern that is set, the pattern develops into either one in which the decorative pattern is displayed as it is in a miss mode ("767") (Figure 136 (P2)), or a revival pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

In the revival pattern, a revival start image (a samurai image saying "Not yet") is inserted into the display area of the performance display device 1600, indicating that the display is not yet finished, from the swinging display of the decorative pattern in the losing state of FIG. 136 (P1) (FIG. 136 (P3)), and the decorative pattern is again in a reach state and is displayed in a reduced size in the upper right corner of the screen, while an operation valid indication image (the face of an ally samurai with his eyes closed) in which either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is valid is displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 136 (P4)). Then, as time passes, the eyes of the displayed samurai are enlarged, and the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is moved up and down in small increments from its initial state (FIG. 136 (P5)). This increases the player's sense of anticipation for the performance that will use the specific decorative member SDY (blind role). At this time, the operation button 410 may be illuminated in a high-speed flashing manner, or the sword decoration 5001 may be changed from the sheathed state to the first unsheathing state and moved up and down. Depending on the set performance pattern, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 functions as an effective operating means, and a specific decorative element SDY (blind device) is performed based on the pressing of the operation button 410 or the sheathing of the sword decoration 5001. The pattern in which the operation button 410 is the operation target is set to have a lower expectation than the pattern in which the sword decoration 5001 is the operation target.

When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image of sweat trickling from the samurai's forehead in the operation validity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (operation button confirmation image) is displayed, and the operation button 410 is illuminated (Fig. 137 (R1)). Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind mechanism) continues to move in small increments and the operation button 410 is illuminated, the operation valid period of the operation button 410 begins, and an operation promotion performance is performed to encourage pressing the operation button 410 (Fig. 137 (R2)). The image of the operation means to be operated (operation button 410), the number of operations, and the operation valid period are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600. Here, the operation button 410 is no longer illuminated when it has been operated the required number of times.

When the result of the variable display is a jackpot, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (curtain role) is moved from the initial state to a fully fallen state (Fig. 137 (R3)). At this time, the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the performance display device 1600 is displayed in a stopped state in the lower right corner of the screen so that it can be seen by the player. As described above (Fig. 133 (M4)), it is also possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the state of the decorative pattern at this point. Next, the specific decorative member SDY (curtain role) is returned from the fully fallen state to the initial state again, and an image announcing a jackpot (the stopping state of the decorative pattern "777" and the message "Well done") is displayed in the center of the screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (curtain role) has been released (Fig. 137 (R4)).

On the other hand, if the result of the varying display is a miss, when the player's pressing of the operation button 410 is detected, the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is stopped, and the decorative pattern in the miss state ("767") is displayed frozen in the center of the screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Figure 137 (R5)).

When the sword decoration 5001 is used as the operating means, an image (sword decoration confirmation image) is displayed in which the samurai, who had his eyes closed in the operation indication image displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, opens his eyes and his gaze becomes sharp, and the sword decoration 5001 changes from a sheathed state to a second drawn state with an aura component (Fig. 138 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 may be decorated with light. The player can tell from the image in the display area that the sword decoration 5001, not the operation button 410, is effective for operation, but at this point, the form of the sword decoration 5001, such as whether it is in a form with an aura component, can be determined by actually looking at the sword decoration 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved in small increments, a predetermined period of time passes in the second unsheathing state, and the effective operation period of the sword decoration 5001 begins. In the display area of the performance display device 1600, an operation prompting image that encourages the player to sheathe the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed (Fig. 138 (Q2)).

If the result of the current display is a jackpot, and the player's sheathing operation is detected, the same presentation transition as in Figure 137 (R3) and (R4) described above will occur (Figure 138 (Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, if the result of the display is a miss, and the player's sheathing operation is detected, the same presentation transition as in Figure 137 (R5) described above will occur (Figure 138 (Q5)).

In this way, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the state of the fall of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) which is executed based on the pressing of the operation button 410, so it is possible to provide a more powerful indication of the degree of expectation than an indication of the degree of expectation based on an image, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Furthermore, even if the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is not caused to fall based on the pressing of the operation button 410, the player is given another opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. Since the degree of expectation can be suggested by the operation means which is given the opportunity to operate, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game, which is a concern due to the sameness and monotony of the operation presentation.

Note that although three examples of reach effects using the sword ornament 5001 are given in the above-mentioned Figures 128 to 138, various types of effects may be combined. This allows a wide variety of effects to be provided, further increasing the interest in the game.

(Shapes of sword ornaments)
The form of the sword ornament 5001 of this example will be described with reference to Fig. 139. The sword ornament 5001 up to now has two forms, a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member, but here, two more forms are provided in which the sword part 5010 is transformed by operating the handle part 5012.

Figure 139 is a diagram explaining the form of the sword decoration 5001 used in the pseudo-repeat performance. The sword decoration 5001 here is characterized in that it is capable of changing its form in two stages by the deformation of the handle 5012, and has an aura member 5040 that is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 and appears visible to the player from the left and right sides of the sheath 5020. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 like the aura member 5035 described above, but its operating mode is movable in the left and right directions like the aura member 5030 described above. Figures 139 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the types of forms (stage changes) of the sword decoration 5001 in the sheathed state, and show, in order, stage 0 form to stage 3 form. The sword decoration 5001 takes one of the forms of stage 0 form to stage 3 form depending on the performance.

As shown in Fig. 139(A), the stage 0 form is a form in a normal state similar to Fig. 124(A) and Fig. 126(A) described above, and shows the initial form in which no movement is required for any of the components. As shown in Fig. 139(B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears on the outside of the side of the sheath 5012 by the movement of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in Fig. 139(C), the stage 2 form shows a form in which the handle 5012 spreads out from the center and moves so as to be divided into two parts to the left and right from the center from the stage 1 form, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from the inside. As shown in Fig. 139(D), the stage 3 form shows a form in which the second decorative part 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle 5012 in the stage 2 form to form an integral decoration with the first decorative part 5012a. Here, the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form allow the form change without putting the sword decoration body 5001 into the second drawn state. Furthermore, the sword section 5010, which can be operated by the player as the operating part of the operating means, and the sheath section 5020, which does not move, move together to form an integrated decorative body, providing a more impressive operating means.

(Pre-operation suggestion using specific decorative material SDY)
Next, referring to Figs. 140 to 143, a pre-operation suggestion effect executed before the operation effective period in which the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective in the reach performance will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective among the multiple operation means by the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role). Specifically, as suggestion patterns by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decorative member SDY (blind role), there are a first suggestion pattern in which the operation effective period occurs in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is positioned at the initial position, and a second suggestion pattern in which the operation effective period occurs in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is moved from the initial position to the suggested position, and when the sword decoration 5001 (set to have a higher hit expectation than the operation button 410) becomes effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, when a pre-operation suggestion performance of a first suggestion pattern (FIG. 140(B)) that generates a valid operation period with the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) positioned at the initial position even during the valid operation period is performed, the sword decoration 5001 becomes valid for operation with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 becomes valid for operation with a probability of 70%. In contrast, when a pre-operation suggestion performance of a second suggestion pattern (FIG. 142(AA1)) that generates a valid operation period with the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) moved to the suggested position is performed, the sword decoration 5001 becomes valid for operation with a probability of 70% (including the step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 becomes valid for operation with a probability of 30%. Below, an example of a performance transition according to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) in the first suggestion pattern and the second suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion performance will be described.

(First suggested pattern)
140 and 141 are diagrams showing an example of a reach effect transition in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of a first suggestion pattern is executed when the peripheral control board 1510 determines by lottery that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is enabled for operation during the reach effect based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. In this reach effect, when the three decoration patterns reach the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 140(A)), a pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the effective operation period for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, which has been determined by lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 to be enabled for operation, is generated. As a specific example of the first suggestion pattern, an operation suggestion image (aura rotation) is displayed in the display area of the display device 1600 before the operation effective period occurs, suggesting that the operation means will be effective (Fig. 140(B)). At this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) maintains its initial position. Also, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001.

Then, with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) maintained in its initial position, an effective operation period is generated for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) that has been determined in advance to be effective for operation. In this example, when the operation button 5001 is effective for operation, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as a pre-operation suggestion performance. In other words, when the effective operation period occurs with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) in its initial position, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation button 410 is more likely to be effective for operation than the sword decoration 5001.

When the operation button 410 becomes operable, as shown in FIG. 140(C), an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated with the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) maintaining its initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the performance display device 1600, an operation promotion performance is performed in which an operation promotion image that encourages the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. In addition, at this time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. In addition, even when the sword decoration 5001 becomes operable, the pre-operation suggestion performance may be executed in the first suggestion pattern, although the rate is lower than that of the operation button 410. In that case, as shown in FIG. 140(D), an operation effective period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated with the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) maintaining its initial position. In addition, in the display area of the performance display device 1600, an operation promotion performance is performed in which an operation promotion image that encourages the player to sheathe the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 changes state from the sheathed state to the second unsheathed state (with aura member), allowing the player to sheathe the sword.

When an operation to a valid operating means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) is detected in the above-mentioned Figure 140 (C) or (D), if the result of the current variable display is a jackpot, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved downward from its initial state to a fully fallen state (Figure 141 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is returned to its initial state again, an image announcing a jackpot (the stopping state of the decorative pattern "777" and the message "Well done") are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) has been released (Figure 141 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the current variable display results in a miss, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) will remain in its initial state and will not move, and an image announcing a miss (decorative pattern stop state "767") will be displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Figure 141 (CC3)).

(Second suggested pattern)
Fig. 142 is a diagram showing an example of a transition of a reach performance in which a pre-operation suggestion performance of a second suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is enabled for operation during the reach performance, as in the first suggestion pattern described above. Note that Fig. 143 is a diagram showing a pre-operation suggestion performance of a step-up pattern in which the sword decoration 5001 does not become enabled for operation, but the operation button 410 becomes enabled for operation at one time, and then the sword decoration 5001 becomes enabled for operation, even though the second suggestion pattern is executed as a pre-operation suggestion performance.

As shown in FIG. 142 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion performance of the second suggestion pattern is executed before the operation effective period occurs for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, which have been determined in advance to be operable by lottery on the peripheral control board 1510. As a specific performance content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation performance suggestion image (rotating aura) that suggests that the operation means will be operable is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 before the operation effective period occurs. The operation performance suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern, but in the second suggestion pattern, along with the display of the operation performance suggestion image, the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) moves from the initial position to a small falling state (suggested position) where it overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

Then, with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) in the suggested position, an effective operation period is generated for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) that has been determined in advance to be effective for operation. In this example, when the sword decoration 5001 is effective for operation, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as a pre-operation suggestion performance. In other words, when the effective operation period occurs with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) in the suggested position, it is possible to suggest to the player that the sword decoration 5001 is more likely to be effective for operation than the operation button 410.

When the sword decoration 5001 becomes available for operation, as shown in FIG. 142 (AA3), a valid operation period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) operating in the suggested position. At the same time, an operation promotion effect is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, in which an operation promotion image that encourages the player to sheathe the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the valid operation period are displayed. At this time, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second unsheathing state (aura-attached form), allowing the player to sheathe the sword. Also, even when the operation button 410 becomes available for operation, there is a low chance that the pre-operation suggestion effect will be executed in the second suggestion pattern. In that case, as shown in FIG. 142 (AA2), a valid operation period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is operating in the suggested position, and at the same time, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image that encourages the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the valid operation period are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition, in the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promotion effect, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved from the state in which it is operating in the suggested position to its initial state. Also, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) may be moved from the state in which it is operating in the suggested position to its full drop state or to its initial state without being returned to its initial state.

Then, when an operation to a valid operating means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) is detected in the above-mentioned FIG. 142 (AA2) or (AA3), similar to the above-mentioned FIG. 140 (C) or (D), if the result of this variable display is a jackpot, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved downward from its initial state to a fully fallen state (FIG. 141 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is returned to its initial state again, an image announcing a jackpot (the stopping state of the decorative pattern "777" and the message "Well done") are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) has been released (FIG. 141 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of this variable display is a miss, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) remains in its initial state and is not moved, and an image announcing a miss (decorative pattern stop state "767") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Figure 141 (CC3)). The performance transition after the operation prompt performance is the same as the performance transition after the operation prompt performance in the first suggestion pattern.

The movement pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) in the second suggestion pattern may not only be a pattern in which it is moved to a suggested position, but may also include multiple movement patterns. For example, if multiple types of movement patterns are provided so that the proportion of times the sword decoration 5001 is effective for operation differs, the player's interest in the movement can be heightened, thereby increasing the interest of the pre-operation suggestion performance and operation promotion performance using the specific decorative member SDY (blind role).

(Step-up pattern)
When a specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is operated to a suggested position and a pre-operation suggestion performance of a second suggestion pattern occurs in which an effective operation period is generated, and the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective for operation, in addition to the basic pattern that follows the performance transition of (AA1)->(AA3) in FIG. 142 described above until the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective for operation, a step-up pattern is provided in which the operation button 410 becomes effective for operation at one time and then the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective for operation.

As shown in Figures 143 (BB1) to (BB4), the step-up pattern pre-operation suggestion performance is executed before the operation effective period for the sword ornament 5001 that has been determined in advance to be operable by lottery on the peripheral control board 1510 occurs, that is, before the operation promotion performance for the sword ornament 5001 shown in Figure 142 (AA3) described above is executed.

In the step-up pattern, first, the operation performance suggestion image (aura rotation) similar to that of FIG. 142 (AA1) is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is moved in small increments (FIG. 143 (BB1)). Next, with the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) operated to the suggested position, an effective operation period for the operation button 410 is generated. At the same time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, and an operation promotion performance is performed in which an operation promotion image that encourages the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (FIG. 143 (BB2)). Here, even if the pressing of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the effective operation period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 141 above is not performed, and a switching suggestion image (mostly blacked-out image) that suggests switching the effective operation means is displayed (FIG. 143 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or when the operation effective period of the operation button 410 ends. After that, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state (aura-attached form), and a switching notification image (messages such as "Chance to draw sword" and "Please sheathe your sword") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 to notify that the operation effective means will be switched from the operation button 410 to the sword decoration 5001 (Fig. 143 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is in a state of operating in the suggested position. Then, when the operation effective period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, the operation promotion performance of the sword decoration 5001 shown in Fig. 142 (AA3) is performed. The performance transition after the operation promotion performance is the same as the performance transition after the operation promotion performance in the second suggestion pattern described above (Fig. 141).

Note that in the above-mentioned FIG. 143 (BB2), the button operation 410 may not be enabled (no operation promotion effect) and only an image of the button operation 410 may be displayed. It is sufficient to first direct the player's attention to the button operation 410 and then have the player operate the sword decoration 5001. Also, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when the second suggestion pattern is reached, but also when the first suggestion pattern is reached.

In this way, in the pre-operation suggestion performance of this example, the position of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) can be changed before the effective operation period of one of the multiple operating means is generated, and the position suggests the operating means that is to be effective. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (Fig. 140 (B)) in which the effective operation period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is in the initial position, there is a high expectation that the operation button 410 will be effective, and in the second suggestion pattern (Fig. 142 (AA1) in which the effective operation period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is in the suggested position, there is a high expectation that the sword decoration 5001 will be effective. For this reason, the player focuses on the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) to understand which operating means will be effective, which can increase the interest of the pre-operation suggestion performance.

In the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) moves up and down in small movements in the pre-operation suggestion performance. The movement performance (falling performance) of the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is also used in the result notification after the operation of the operation means (Fig. 141), so the falling performance can be made to look like a series of performances from the small up and down movements of the pre-operation suggestion performance, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. Note that, in the above, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind device), that is, the expectation that the operation means that is enabled for operation by the movable body will be enabled for operation, is shown, but this is not limited to this, and the expectation may be suggested by displaying a character during the pre-operation suggestion performance. In addition, when the operation means that is enabled for operation is decided, not only the operation button 410 is lit up or the sword decoration 5001 is changed to the second unsword state, but the operation means that is enabled for operation may be moved by vibration or the like.

The second suggestion pattern also includes a step-up pattern in which the operation button 410 becomes operable once (or appears to become operable) when the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is in the suggested position, and then the sword decoration 5001 becomes operable. This allows the player to become interested in both operation means. Even if the operation button 410 becomes operable immediately after the pre-operation suggestion performance, the player can have hope that the sword decoration 5001 may become operable afterwards, which prevents a decline in willingness to operate and a decline in interest in the game.

In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion performance, at the timing when an operation performance suggestion image is displayed before the operation effective period in which any of the multiple operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) is enabled for operation (Fig. 140 (B)), similarly to the second suggestion pattern (Fig. 142 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) may be moved from the initial position to a small drop state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and may be moved slightly up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. In addition, when the operation effective period is generated after that, the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) in the first suggestion pattern is partially the same as the operation in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that even when the operation performance suggestion image according to the first suggestion pattern is displayed to the player, it is possible to make the player believe that the pre-operation suggestion performance of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. For this reason, even when a pre-operation suggestion performance based on the first suggestion pattern is being executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the sword decoration 5001 will be effective for operation. And since the player strongly desires that the effective operation period occur with the specific decoration member SDY (blind role), which is operated at the timing when the operation performance suggestion image is displayed, being operated to the suggested position, the interest of the pre-operation suggestion performance can be increased.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained in the performance judgment according to the result of the jackpot judgment, the performance is executed in a specific performance pattern on the game board side performance display device 1600. In the performance period in which the specific performance pattern is executed, a specific performance acceptance period (valid period) in which a specific performance execution condition is established by an operation by the player can be generated, and when an operation is performed within the specific performance acceptance period, a specific operation-time performance (such as a performance that suggests the expectation of the award) can be executed based on the establishment of the specific performance execution condition. The expectation of the award suggested as a result of the specific operation-time performance may be 100% or 0%.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the operation button 410, another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) can be provided as an operation means for such an operation-time performance (such as a performance in which the expectation of the bonus is suggested when the operation is performed). In this regard, in a specific performance pattern, based on the result of the performance judgment, there are cases where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 (when a specific performance execution condition is established when the operation button 410 is operated) and cases where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) (when a specific performance execution condition is established when the other operation means is operated). When an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001), the player is made to recognize that the expectation of the bonus (expectation of a big win) is higher than when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, simply because the pre-operation performance in which the operation opportunity is given even if no operation is performed at that operation opportunity occurs. When an opportunity to operate another operating means (such as the sword decoration 5001) is given, the expected probability of receiving a bonus may be 100% or 0%.

With this configuration, when an opportunity to operate another operating means (such as the sword decoration 5001) is given, it is possible to increase interest in the game when the operation-time presentation corresponding to the operation of the other operating means (such as the sword decoration 5001) has not yet been performed and the operation is about to be performed. In other words, in this case, even if the desired presentation result (such as a presentation result suggesting a high expectation of a bonus being awarded) does not appear in the operation-time presentation corresponding to the operation of the other operating means (such as the sword decoration 5001) or if the operation of the operating means cannot be performed within the specific presentation acceptance period (validity period), it is possible to increase interest in the game through such operation-related presentation.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when an operation opportunity is given to any of the multiple operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) having such presentation properties, a common operation-related presentation (for example, see FIG. 142 (AA1)) can be executed when the operation opportunity is given.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least the following are modes of effect modes that generate a valid period (effect reception period) during which operation of the operation button 410 is enabled (effect reception is possible):
Multiple presentation modes are provided, such as: a first presentation mode which generates an effective period (performance acceptance period) during which operations on the operation button 410 are enabled (performance acceptance possible) after a "specific operation-related performance" which can also appear when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is enabled (performance acceptance possible), is started; and a second presentation mode which generates an effective period (performance acceptance period) during which operations on the operation button 410 are enabled (performance acceptance possible) without a "specific operation-related performance" being started. By executing any of these presentation modes, an effective period (performance acceptance period) during which operations on the operation button 410 are enabled (performance acceptance possible) is generated.

With this configuration, whether a period occurs during which an operation on a specific operation means (e.g., operation button 410) among multiple operation means (e.g., operation button 410) is eligible for effect acceptance, or a period occurs during which an operation means other than the specific operation means (e.g., sword decoration 5001) is eligible for effect acceptance, a common (specific) operation-related effect can be executed prior to the occurrence of such a period, so that it is possible to add interest in which of the specific operation means and the other operation means is eligible for effect acceptance, and by having the player perform operations while such effects are being performed, a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in such a common (specific) operation-related performance, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the performance, a performance acceptance period corresponding to one of the multiple operation means (e.g., the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) will occur, but it is desirable to keep secret which of the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) will have a performance acceptance period at least at the time the performance starts. In addition, for each operation-related performance exemplified below, it may be possible to indicate (make a performance result display appear) which of the multiple operation means (e.g., the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) will have an operation opportunity before the performance acceptance period occurs, or to indicate (make a performance result display appear) which of the multiple operation means (e.g., the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) will have an operation opportunity during the period after the performance acceptance period occurs, including at the same time as the performance acceptance period occurs, and it is possible to change the timing until which the operation-related performance is executed as appropriate.

[Automatic button effect status]
In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, control to an automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state) can be executed, and when the automatic button presentation state is controlled, if a presentation acceptance period for the operation button 410 (more precisely, a predetermined presentation pattern in which the presentation acceptance period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the big win determination, even if the operation by the player is not accepted during the presentation acceptance period, a process (automatic presentation function) can be executed to cause the same change in the presentation as when the operation by the player is accepted during the presentation acceptance period. According to such an automatic button presentation state, even if the player does not operate each time the presentation acceptance period occurs, a post-operation presentation occurs when the player operates, so that a decrease in the interest in the game due to forgetting to operate can be suppressed. Note that the automatic presentation function may cause the same presentation acceptance as when the operation actually occurred when it functions, so that a process according to the presentation acceptance is performed, or the same process as when the presentation acceptance occurs may be performed without causing the presentation acceptance.

In the embodiments of the "automatic performance function" described below, the above-mentioned operation-related techniques, performances, settings, etc. may be used in appropriate combinations or substitutions.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, during the period when the demo screen in which the pattern change is not yet executed is displayed, the operation means is operated multiple times to set the automatic button performance state. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation of the operation button 410, the "various settings" displayed in the menu screen is selected by the second operation of the operation button 410 (or an operation means other than the operation button 410) to display the "various settings" screen, and when the "automatic button performance state setting" displayed in the "various settings" screen is selected by the third operation of the operation button 410 (or an operation means other than the operation button 410), the automatic button performance state is set. Note that only the operation button 410 may be operated multiple times, or the operation of the operation button 410 and the operation of the operation means other than the operation button 410 may be operated multiple times in combination.

In contrast, during the period when the pattern change is in the execution state, the automatic button presentation state can be set by simply operating the operation button 410 once, and such a simplified operation makes it possible to set the automatic button presentation state while maintaining a close eye on the progress of the presentation during the pattern change. However, some players want to actively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether the valid period has occurred or not, and for such players, if the automatic button presentation state is set by simply operating the operation button 410, their interest in playing may decrease. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button presentation state during the period when the pattern change is in the execution state, it is required to operate the operation button 410 once in a state in which the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) (the so-called "long press state"). This makes it possible to make it difficult to erroneously set the automatic button presentation state even if the operation button 410 is actively operated regardless of whether the valid period has occurred during the period when the pattern change is in the execution state. In addition, it is desirable to prevent the automatic button effect state from being set even if a long press is performed at least when the effect acceptance period occurs during the period when the pattern change is in progress.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the automatic button performance state is set, a different operation mode is required for the period when a demo screen is displayed in which the pattern change is not yet performed and the period when the pattern change is being performed, even in the method of canceling this setting.

In other words, while the demo screen in which the pattern change has not yet been performed is displayed, the automatic button presentation state can be cancelled by operating the operation means multiple times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by operating the operation button 410 a first time, the "Various Settings" displayed in the menu screen is selected by operating the operation button 410 a second time (or an operation means different from the operation button 410) to display the "Various Settings" screen, and when the operation button 410 is operated a third time (or an operation means different from the operation button 410) to select "Cancel Automatic Button Presentation State" displayed in the "Various Settings" screen, the automatic button presentation state is cancelled.

In contrast, during the period when the pattern change is in an execution state, the automatic button presentation state can be cancelled by simply operating the operation button 410 once. This simplification of the operation makes it possible to cancel the automatic button presentation state while maintaining attention on the progress of the presentation during the pattern change. However, unlike when the automatic button presentation state is set, the automatic button presentation state is cancelled by simply detecting that the operation button 410 has been placed in an operation state (by simply operating in a single operation mode) without maintaining the operation state of the operation button 410 for a predetermined time (even if it is not a long press operation mode). In other words, the fact that some operation has been performed on the operation button 410 means that there is a desire to operate the operation button 410, and therefore it is expected that the interest in playing the game will be maintained in an appropriate manner by cancelling the automatic button presentation state at the time of the operation and quickly returning to the normal presentation state.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is configured to include a plurality of operating means including the operating button 410. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when in an automatic button performance state set by the operation of the operating button 410, a performance acceptance period (more precisely, a predetermined performance pattern in which the performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001, etc. is set) occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operating means (e.g., the sword decoration 5001, etc.) different from the operating button 410 based on the result of the big win determination, and even if the operation by the player (operation for the sword decoration 5001) is not accepted during the performance acceptance period, a process (automatic performance function) can be executed to cause the same change to the performance as when the operation by the player (operation for the sword decoration 5001) is accepted during the performance acceptance period. With this configuration, when the above-mentioned performance (specific operation-related performance (see FIG. 164 (AA1) etc.)) is executed regarding whether a period occurs during which operations on the operation button 410 out of multiple operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) are acceptable for performance, or whether a period occurs during which operations on another operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) are acceptable for performance, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 as a result of the performance, so that such specific operation-related performance can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
When a first-side performance reception period occurs in which a first operation means (e.g., operation button 410) among a plurality of operation means is set as an operation target while being controlled in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), if no operation is performed on the first operation means during the first-side performance reception period, an automatic process can be executed to cause the same change in the performance as when an operation is performed on the first operation means (first automatic performance means),
When a second side performance acceptance period occurs in which a second operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) among the multiple operation means is set as the operation target while being controlled in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), if no operation is performed on the second operation means during the second side performance acceptance period, an automatic process can be executed to bring about the same change in the performance as when an operation is performed on the second operation means (second automatic performance means).
With such a configuration, regardless of whether a first side performance reception period or a second side performance reception period occurs, automatic processing by the first automatic performance means or automatic processing by the second automatic performance means can be executed when the same specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the period.

With this configuration, when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), even if either the first side presentation acceptance period in which the first operating means is set as the operation target or the second side presentation acceptance period in which the second operating means is set as the operation target occurs within the execution period of the pattern change, the automatic presentation function will be able to function when the same specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of these periods, allowing you to enjoy the presentation with peace of mind.

However, when a first side performance acceptance period occurs with the first operation means (e.g., operation button 410) set as the operation target, the performance may progress within the pattern change so that automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side performance acceptance period, and automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a time different from the specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side performance acceptance period. With this configuration, while it is assumed that automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side performance acceptance period, the performance acceptance is performed at a different timing and a post-operation performance is automatically generated, making it possible to function as a surprise performance.

When the game is controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), the occurrence rate of the presentation acceptance period during which the operation opportunity is given to the operation means during the pattern change period may be higher than when the game is not controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state). In other words, in this case, it is expected that the frequency of the presentation acceptance period occurring will be higher, and the frequency of operation forgetting during the presentation acceptance period will also be higher. However, even if an operation forgetting occurs, the automatic presentation function will function to execute the post-operation presentation, so that the presentation acceptance period can be generated more frequently while suppressing a decrease in interest in the game due to frequent forgetting to operate. Incidentally, when the game is controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), it is desirable to increase the occurrence rate of both the presentation acceptance period for the first operation means and the presentation acceptance period for the second operation means, but it is more desirable to make the degree of increase in the occurrence rate different between the presentation acceptance period for the first operation means and the presentation acceptance period for the second operation means.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment (peripheral control MPU 1511a),
When the performance acceptance condition is satisfied within the performance acceptance period, a post-operation performance can be executed (post-operation performance execution means);
A process for satisfying the effect reception condition based on an operation performed by a player within the effect reception period (player operation reception means) can be executed.
When no operation is performed by the player within the effect reception period, a process can be executed to establish the effect reception conditions at a specific timing within the effect reception period without receiving an operation by the player (automatic effect reception means).
However, the specific timing within the effect reception period is set so as not to arrive until at least half of the time set as the effect reception period has elapsed since the start of the effect reception period. This allows the player ample time to operate the game himself before the automatic effect function starts, and also leaves the player with the option of causing the effect reception to occur through the player's operation, so that interest in the game can be maintained in a good condition.

In this case, when the performance progresses within the pattern change so that there are cases where the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side performance acceptance period, and cases where the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a time different from the specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side performance acceptance period, both the above "specific time" and the above "time different from the specific time" will be set to a time value that is at least longer than half the time set as the first side performance acceptance period.

Here, during the execution period of the pattern change when controlled in the automatic button performance state, a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs, and if an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted during the performance acceptance period, a process for generating a post-operation performance according to the performance acceptance is executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process for generating a post-operation performance according to the performance acceptance, a process for canceling the automatic button performance state may also be performed.

Similarly, if a performance acceptance period occurs for an operation means other than the operation button 410 (such as the sword decoration 5001) during the execution period of the pattern change when controlled to the automatic button performance state, and an operation for the sword decoration 5001 is accepted during that performance acceptance period, it is desirable to execute a process for generating a post-operation performance according to that performance acceptance and a process for canceling the automatic button performance state. Even in this case, the "post-operation performance according to performance acceptance" will be executed as a performance with the same content as the post-operation performance executed when a performance acceptance period occurs for the sword decoration 5001 during a period when control is not performed in the automatic button performance state, and an operation for the sword decoration 5001 is accepted during that performance acceptance period.

That is, after control has been made into an automatic button presentation state (a specific presentation state), the player may have a desire to return to a presentation state (normal presentation mode) in which the presentation can progress depending on the player's own operation (a desire to end the specific presentation state). This desire often arises when a presentation acceptance period occurs during which the player is given an opportunity to operate, but it is difficult to perform both an operation to end the specific presentation state and an operation to allow operation acceptance within the limited time from the start to the end of the presentation acceptance period, and if the opportunity to operate is lost as a result, interest in the game may decrease. In this regard, in the above configuration, when a performance acceptance period for a specific performance occurs while controlled in the automatic button performance state (specific performance state), a single operation of the operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001 that is given an operation opportunity during the performance acceptance period (simply operating in a single operation mode) is sufficient to perform both a process to end the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) and a process that may cause a change in the performance (a process to execute a post-operation performance). Therefore, even if a desire to end the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) and progress the performance depending on the player's own operation arises during the performance acceptance period, it becomes possible to smoothly switch the performance state.

However, when it comes to changing the settings for the automatic button presentation state (changing the setting to the automatic button presentation state or canceling the automatic button presentation state) during the period when the demo screen is displayed (when the pattern change is not being executed), the setting can be changed without requiring any operation on the sword decoration 5001. In other words, the sword decoration 5001 is given operation opportunities less frequently than the operation button 410 during the execution period of the pattern change, and when an operation opportunity is given, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than that of the operation button 410. Therefore, it is more desirable to prevent operations on the sword decoration 5001 for the sole purpose of changing the settings for the automatic button presentation state (a specific presentation state), thereby increasing the sense of premium when an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 and maintaining interest in the game. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while a demo screen in which no pattern change has been performed is being displayed, the automatic button performance state can be set or released by operating any of the multiple operating means other than the sword ornament 5001 (such as the operating button 410 or another operating means) multiple times.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the pattern change when the machine is not controlled to the automatic button presentation state, the setting can be changed to the automatic button presentation state without the need to operate the sword decoration 5001. In other words, as described above, the machine is controlled to the automatic button presentation state by operating the operation button 410 once in the "long press mode," but operations on the sword decoration 5001 are not permitted solely for the purpose of changing the setting to the automatic button presentation state.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the setting for the automatic button performance state can be changed by an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is limited to a case where a performance acceptance period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs during the execution period of the pattern change when controlled in the automatic button performance state, and an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted during the performance acceptance period, and a corresponding post-operation performance appears. With this configuration, it becomes possible to change the setting to the automatic button performance state by an operation on the sword decorative body 5001, without compromising the premium feeling when an opportunity to operate the sword decorative body 5001 is given.

The multiple operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment may include operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) that can be the target of the "automatic performance function that generates an operation-time performance without operation during the performance acceptance period" when in the automatic button performance state, as well as special operation means that are not the target of the "automatic performance function that generates an operation-time performance without operation during the performance acceptance period". That is, in this case, when the pattern variation is in an execution state, a performance acceptance period occurs in which an operation opportunity for the special operation means is given, and when an operation for the special operation means is accepted during the performance acceptance period, the expectation of a jackpot is suggested by the post-operation performance according to the performance acceptance. However, even if the machine is in a state controlled to the automatic button performance state, if an operation for the special operation means is not accepted during the performance acceptance period, the same post-operation performance as when the performance was accepted will not appear. However, in this case, the same post-operation performance as when the performance was accepted will not appear, but if it is a performance different from the performance accepted, it may be made to appear.

In addition, it is desirable that the setting of the automatic button performance state using the operation button 410 (operation in a long press mode) should not be permitted not only when a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the pattern change is in progress, but also when a performance acceptance period for an operation means other than the operation button 410 occurs (such as a performance acceptance period in which the expectation level is suggested when the sword decoration 5001 is operated, or a performance acceptance period in which the expectation level is suggested when a special operation means is operated). In other words, if an automatic button effect state were to be generated by operating the operation button 410 (by pressing and holding it) during a period in which effects are accepted for an operation means other than the operation button 410, the "automatic effect function that generates an effect upon operation without any operation during the effect acceptance period" would be enabled partway through the effect acceptance period, and the original effect acceptance (effect acceptance when an operation means other than the operation button 410 is operated) could occur without any operation. This would confuse players who are unfamiliar with such automatic button effect states as to whether the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 or the effect acceptance period for an operation means other than the operation button 410 had occurred, which could lead to a decrease in interest in the game.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the premonition effect can be executed prior to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period, but it may be possible to execute the premonition effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) in a different display mode from the premonition effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize in advance whether the automatic effect function is in a function state within the specific effect acceptance period, and to enjoy the effects with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image (e.g., a "bar display" indicating the remaining time) indicating the remaining time is displayed during the effect reception period, but when the effect reception period occurs, an effect image different from the specific image (e.g., an image of lightning falling toward the specific area) may be displayed (premonition effect) outside the specific area where the specific image is displayed at least until the specific image (e.g., the "bar display" indicating the remaining time) is displayed. That is, in this case, when the effect reception period occurs, by checking the movement of the effect image different from the specific image, it is possible to encourage attention to the location where the hidden "specific image indicating the remaining time" will appear, so that it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the specific effect reception period ends without the player being able to operate in time, and furthermore, even if the player is unable to operate in time, the automatic effect function will function to execute the post-operation effect, so that it is expected that interest in the game will be preferably maintained.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic button presentation state can be set or released by the player's operation, but the automatic button presentation state may be set or released depending on the progress of the game or presentation based on the result of the jackpot determination, including the following examples. Examples of state setting or release depending on the progress of the game or presentation include a control mode such as "the automatic button presentation state is controlled while the game is in the normal game state, but the automatic button presentation state is released when the game is moved to the jackpot game state or the high probability time-saving state", a control mode such as "the automatic button presentation state is generated during the execution period of the pattern change, and a presentation pattern that releases the setting when a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the automatic button presentation state before the pattern change in the execution state is terminated", and a control mode such as "the automatic button presentation state is generated over the period during which multiple pattern changes are executed". It is also possible for the pachinko machine 1 to be constantly controlled in the automatic button presentation state, in which case the automatic button presentation state will never be released, and there will be no processing such as setting or releasing the "automatic button presentation state."

The timing at which the automatic performance function described above functions may be when the remaining time of the performance acceptance period has been consumed, or at a specified timing thereafter, or it may be an intermediate timing (specific timing) while there is remaining time in the performance acceptance period. If the automatic performance function described above functions when the remaining time of the performance acceptance period has been consumed, or at a specified timing thereafter, the post-operation performance will be executed as if the performance acceptance had been made after the performance acceptance period had ended. In contrast, if the automatic performance function described above functions at an intermediate timing (specific timing) while there is remaining time in the performance acceptance period, the performance acceptance period will end at the time when the automatic performance function described above functions (specific timing) and the post-operation performance will be executed, just as if an operation had actually been performed.

However, in order to ensure a sense of security that a post-operation effect will occur without operation when the automatic button effect state is in effect, it is important to activate the automatic effect function and start the corresponding post-operation effect until the end of the effect acceptance period (at a specific timing within the effect acceptance period). In other words, in this case, if the automatic effect function does not function even though a specific timing within the effect acceptance period has arrived, the player can operate the game himself after the specific timing has arrived to cause a post-operation effect to occur, which makes it possible to suitably suppress feelings of anxiety when the game is in the automatic button effect state (for example, "I may mistakenly believe that I am in the automatic button effect state even though I am not in the automatic button effect state, and I may not be able to see the post-operation effect," or "Some kind of trouble may cause the automatic effect function to not work, and I may not be able to see the post-operation effect," etc.).

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has characteristic technologies related to this automatic button presentation state. Below, the characteristic technologies related to the automatic button presentation state will be explained in order, but these characteristic technologies may be applied to each of the presentation examples described above, or the following characteristic technologies may be used in appropriate combination.

In addition, in explaining each of the characteristic technologies below, the premise is that in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), when a presentation acceptance period occurs that can occur even when not controlled to the specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), a post-operation presentation is generated that is the same as when an operation is performed, even if no operation is performed during the presentation acceptance period. However, instead of this, a specific display presentation (a display presentation that can be selected based on the result of a jackpot determination) that can only be executed when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) may be prepared, and when a specific effective period related to this occurs while the specific display presentation is being performed, a post-operation presentation that is the same as when the operation is performed may be generated, even if no operation is performed during the specific effective period. According to such a configuration, not only is the performance enhanced when the game is controlled in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) (the performance is improved by allowing the occurrence of a specific display performance), but also, even if a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) occurs, the automatic performance function may not function during another performance acceptance period that is set when a specific display performance is not being performed, whereas in a specific effective period when a specific display performance is being performed, the automatic performance function functions, thereby saving the trouble of operating the game, and allowing the player to feel like a VIP, which is expected to favorably increase the interest in the game. Note that the automatic performance function does not necessarily have to be disabled during all of the other performance acceptance periods that are set when a specific display performance is not being performed, and if the automatic performance function is disabled during at least some of the performance acceptance periods, it is possible to expect the above-mentioned action and effect when a specific effective period occurs when a specific display performance is being performed (when a performance acceptance period in which the automatic performance function always works occurs). Furthermore, even if such a specific valid period occurs, if the player does not perform any operation until a specific timing within the specific valid period arrives, it is desirable to activate the above-mentioned automatic performance function at that specific timing to start a corresponding post-operation performance.

In addition, at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect are prepared as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination,
When a first specific effective period occurs while a first specific display effect is being executed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first specific effective period, and ends the first specific effective period and generates a corresponding post-operation effect.
When a second specific effective period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a timing when a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the second specific effective period, thereby ending the second specific effective period and generating a corresponding post-operation effect; and
- When the third specific effective period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, each process may be performed while in the specific effect state, such that if no operation is performed before the end of the third specific effective period despite being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed will not appear. With this configuration, even if the effect acceptance period (specific effective period) occurs while controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the effect acceptance period occurred, the above-mentioned automatic effect function will not function unless a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed, or the above-mentioned automatic effect function will not function at all even if the effect acceptance period ends. Therefore, even when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), it is possible to have the necessity to confirm which type of specific display presentation has been performed when a presentation acceptance period (specific valid period) occurs, and for example, when the above-mentioned automatic presentation function does not function even though a first predetermined time has elapsed, it is possible to progress the presentation with a sense of tension, such as whether the above-mentioned automatic presentation function will function when a second predetermined time has elapsed, or whether the above-mentioned automatic presentation function will not function at all. Note that the first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period are all ones that are accepted for presentation and generate a post-operation presentation when the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) to be operated is in an operating state (when a so-called single operation is performed).

The first, second, and third specific display effects may be executable only when the game is controlled to a specific display state (automatic button display state). In this way, when the game is controlled to a specific display state (automatic button display state), if a display mode that cannot appear when the game is not controlled to the specific display state (automatic button display state) can be displayed, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest in playing the game when the game is in the specific display state (automatic button display state). In addition, the first specific display effect (first specific valid period) and the second specific display effect (second specific valid period) are prepared, but the third specific display effect (third specific valid period) does not necessarily have to be prepared. In addition, the post-operation effects that occur when the effects are accepted in the first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period may have different effects.

In addition, when the automatic performance function described above functions to generate a post-operation performance, the bar display (a display whose image changes (here, the area changes) over time) indicating the remaining time of the performance reception period may be displayed rather than hidden when the automatic performance function functions, so that it is possible to recognize when the automatic performance function functions (how much time was left in the performance reception period when the performance was accepted) and generate a post-operation performance. With this configuration, for example, by checking the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that continues to be displayed when the automatic performance function functions, it becomes possible to recognize whether the performance reception period was a first specific effective period (a period during which the automatic performance function functions when a first specified time has elapsed, which is a relatively early stage after the performance reception period has occurred) or a second specific effective period (a period during which the automatic performance function functions when a second specified time has elapsed, which is a relatively late stage after the performance reception period has occurred).

In this sense, it is desirable to make the jackpot expectation different (for example, the second specific effective period is more advantageous) when the first specific effective period (the period during which the automatic performance function functions when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the performance reception period has occurred) occurs and when the second specific effective period (the period during which the automatic performance function functions when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the performance reception period has occurred). In this case, the first specific display performance and the second specific display performance may not necessarily be executed. However, if the first specific display performance and the second specific display performance are executed, the jackpot expectation will function to be different (for example, the second specific display performance is more advantageous) when the first specific display performance appears and when the second specific display performance appears. In addition, if a post-operation performance occurs due to an operation by the player during the performance reception period, the "bar display" may be made non-displayed when the post-operation performance occurs, or, as in the case where the above-mentioned automatic performance function has functioned, the "bar display" may not be made non-displayed and may be displayed to generate the post-operation performance. The post-operation performance does not have to be executed as a display change on the performance display device 1600, but may be executed, for example, as illumination by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an action by a movable decorative object.

In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the above-mentioned automatic performance function functioning, the post-operation effect is automatically generated without the player having any involvement in the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) that is the operation target, so there is a concern that the player will not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function is operated to generate a post-operation effect, it is desirable to first display an operation target suggestion image (e.g., an image display imitating the operation means to be operated) that suggests the operation target operation means during the performance reception period, and to generate the post-operation effect with the operation target suggestion image displayed rather than hidden, even if the above-mentioned automatic performance function has functioned. In this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transparency, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image before and after the post-operation effect occurs does not necessarily have to be the same, and it is sufficient that it is possible to recognize which operation means was the operation target even in the state in which the post-operation effect occurs. In contrast, if a post-operation effect occurs due to an operation by a player during the effect acceptance period, the operation target suggestion image may be made invisible when the post-operation effect occurs, or, as in the case where the above-mentioned automatic effect function has functioned, the post-operation effect may be generated with the operation target suggestion image displayed rather than hidden. When the above-mentioned automatic effect function has functioned, such as when the above-mentioned automatic effect function has functioned within the above-mentioned first specific effective period or when the above-mentioned automatic effect function has functioned within the above-mentioned second specific effective period, the post-operation effect may always be generated with the operation target suggestion image displayed rather than hidden.

In this case, if the post-operation effect is generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed in one of several modes with different odds of winning, it becomes possible to simultaneously check both the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect, thereby improving the interest in the game. Furthermore, the post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and may be executed, for example, as illumination by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body.

For example, even in a pachinko machine 1 that does not have the automatic performance function described above, multiple modes of operation target suggestion images (such as images that imitate the operating means) with different jackpot expectations (for example, the rate at which the post-operation performance is executed in a mode that appears only when a jackpot has been obtained) can be prepared, and when an operation is accepted by the player, the operation target suggestion image (such as an image that imitates the operating means) can be left displayed in one of the multiple modes with different expectations at the time the post-operation performance begins to be executed based on the operation acceptance. This allows the player to simultaneously check both the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation performance, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

When a valid period (performance reception period) during which a mock image is displayed is generated, it is desirable to have a display in which the display area is reduced over time (a first valid period generated by the establishment of a first condition) and a display in which the display area is not reduced over time (a second valid period generated by the establishment of a second condition) based on the type of the valid period (performance reception period) (such as the condition for the valid period to occur or the type of post-operation performance that occurs when an operation is accepted). In other words, during a valid period in which the display area is not reduced over time, it becomes difficult to recognize how much time is left for operation acceptance, and the sense of tension during the valid period can be appropriately maintained. Note that "not displaying a specific image with a reduced display over time" can be realized by, for example, adopting a method in which a gauge image is displayed in a manner in which the display area is reduced over time during a normal period (first valid period) but the gauge image itself is not displayed during a second valid period, or a method in which the gauge image is displayed but its display area is not reduced over time.

In this regard, when an operation is accepted during the second valid period (when the display area is not reduced over time), it is desirable that the imitation image be displayed rather than hidden when the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp illumination) begins to be executed. This allows the user to know that the operation has been accepted while the imitation image is displayed (before the valid period ends), and eliminates any anxiety that the user may have "missed the operation acceptance in time."

In this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transmittance, etc.) of the imitation image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light emission) occurs, and the imitation image may be made difficult to see by other images, as long as it is possible to recognize which operating means was the target of the operation even in a state in which a change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light emission) occurs. However, in order to preferably obtain such an effect, it is desirable to maintain the display state of the imitation image in the mode displayed before the operation was accepted, at least at the time when the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light emission) begins to be executed, and to prevent the imitation image from being made difficult to see by other images. Therefore, if the replica image is dynamically displayed during the valid period in which operation reception is permitted, it is desirable to continue the dynamic display even when a change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light) is started. In contrast, if a change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light) occurs due to an operation by the player during the first valid period, the replica image may be hidden when the change (display change, lamp light, etc.) occurs, or, as in the case of the second valid period described above, the replica image may be displayed instead of hidden, and a change in response to the operation reception (display change, lamp light, etc.) may occur while the replica image is displayed.

However, even during this effective period when "the display area of the specific image is not reduced over time," a dummy image that mimics the operating means to be operated should be displayed, and it is desirable to display this dummy image as a moving image that progresses at a specific speed. With this configuration, although the remaining time is not indicated by the gauge image, it is possible, though difficult, to grasp the remaining time during which operation acceptance is permitted based on how far the moving image of the dummy image has progressed, which is expected to maintain interest in the game in an optimal manner.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 in this example is equipped with a first operation means (e.g., operation button 410) and a second operation means (e.g., sword decoration 5001) as operation means, and there are cases where an effective period (effect reception period) during which operation reception for the first operation means is permitted is generated, and cases where an effective period (effect reception period) during which operation reception for the second operation means is permitted is generated, and of these effective periods, a first imitation image of the first operation means is displayed during the effective period during which operation reception for the first operation means is permitted, and a second imitation image of the second operation means is displayed during the effective period during which operation reception for the second operation means is permitted. Also, the effective period during which operation reception for the first operation means is permitted and the effective period during which operation reception for the second operation means are permitted have different jackpot expectancies (probability of execution of a mode that only appears at the time of a jackpot as a post-operation performance) suggested when an operation is received. In addition to the valid period during which operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted (performance acceptance period) and the valid period during which operation acceptance for the second operation means is permitted (performance acceptance period), other valid periods may be possible. In this regard, when an operation is accepted during a valid period with a high probability of winning (for example, a valid period during which operation acceptance for the second operation means is permitted), it is desirable that the model image (second model image) is not hidden but is displayed at the time when the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed.

As a result, in addition to cases where an operation is accepted in a situation such as that shown in FIG. 183(f) above, even if, for example, an operation is mistakenly performed on the first operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) despite the opportunity to operate the second operation means (e.g., the sword decoration 5001) being given, and an operation is performed on the second operation means (e.g., the sword decoration 5001) while the first operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) is still in an operating state (while operating), and this operation is accepted, the player can be made to recognize that this has been properly accepted.

In this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transmittance, etc.) of the imitation image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) occurs, and the imitation image may be made difficult to see by other images, as long as it is possible to recognize which operating means was the target of the operation even in a state in which a change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) occurs. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effect, it is desirable to maintain the display state of the imitation image in the same manner as it was displayed before the operation was accepted, at least at the time when the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed, and to prevent the gauge image from being made difficult to see by other images. Therefore, if the imitation image is dynamically displayed during the valid period in which operation acceptance is permitted, it is desirable to continue the dynamic display even when a change in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed. Also, in order to allow the player to recognize that the performance has been accepted properly, even if a change in response to the operation acceptance (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) occurs due to the player's operation during the first valid period, it is desirable to display the imitation image (first imitation image) rather than hiding it when the change (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) occurs, and to cause the change in response to the operation acceptance (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) to occur while it is displayed.

According to this configuration, "the game includes a determination means for making a determination, a performance means for performing a performance based on the result of the determination by the determination means, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the determination by the determination means, a specific operation receiving portion (operation button 410 that can be displaced between a normal position and a pressed position) that is displaceable between a first position and a second position, a first detection unit that can detect a specific action (a press operation) by a player based on the displacement of the specific operation receiving portion to the second position, and a second detection unit that can detect a special action (e.g., a sheathing operation) by a player to a special operation receiving portion (e.g., sword decoration 5001) different from the specific operation receiving portion, and a plurality of performance reception periods (different types of post-operation performances that occur when performance reception is made) including a first performance reception period and a second performance reception period. a performance acceptance period is provided, during the first performance acceptance period, a specific model image simulating the specific operation receiving portion is displayed, and performance acceptance is made by detection by the first detection unit, during the second performance acceptance period, a special model image simulating the special operation receiving portion is displayed, and performance acceptance is made by detection by the second detection unit, and even if the special model image simulating the special operation receiving portion is displayed during the second performance acceptance period and the specific operation receiving portion is displaced from the first position to the second position by a specific action by the player, even if the special action by the player is performed while maintaining the specific operation receiving portion at the second position, performance acceptance is made by detection by the second detection unit, and a post-operation performance can be executed based on the performance acceptance."

And in this configuration, "even if the special action is performed by the player while the specific operation receiving part is maintained in the second position, the effect is accepted upon detection by the second detection part, and at the point in time when the post-operation effect is started to be executed based on the effect acceptance, the special image imitating the special operation receiving part is not hidden but remains displayed, thereby enabling the player to recognize that the post-operation effect is being executed as an operation by the correct side, and not as an operation by the side that performed the operation erroneously.

When the special Momo image is displayed in one of a number of different modes with different odds of winning, the post-operation performance will start to be executed in that displayed mode. When the performance is accepted without such an erroneous operation, the Momo image may be left displayed rather than hidden when the post-operation performance starts to be executed, or the Momo image may be hidden when the post-operation performance starts to be executed.

The second performance acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to a special operation receiving part often occurs less frequently than the first performance acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation receiving part, and this is thought to be one of the factors that cause operation errors. Therefore, when the second performance acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to a special operation receiving part occurs, it is desirable to output an acceptance permission sound that indicates that the performance acceptance has been permitted or that the performance acceptance will be permitted. This allows the player to recognize that the second performance acceptance period has occurred, and is expected to make it difficult for operation errors to occur. The "acceptance permission sound" is a sound that, when the sound starts to be output, always occurs during the time that this sound is output (while the sound data is assigned), or is in a state in which the acceptance permission state (valid period) has already occurred. In other words, it indicates that the output has started within the set time during which the performance reception is permitted and that the performance reception is permitted, or that the output has started before the set time during which the performance reception is permitted starts and that the performance reception is permitted, and is output as a performance sound such as a "ping-pong."

However, even when the first performance reception period occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the specific operation receiving unit, a reception permission sound may be output to indicate that the performance reception has been permitted or to indicate that the performance reception will be permitted. In this case, however, it is preferable to make the manner (tone, etc.) of the reception permission sound different between the first performance reception period and the second performance reception period. Alternatively, in the first performance reception period, even if a performance reception is made while the reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound in the output state is not terminated but is continued, but in the second performance reception period, if a performance reception is made while the reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound in the output state is preferably terminated midway. Both of these configurations may be adopted. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to grasp whether the first performance reception period or the second performance reception period will occur, and it becomes possible to properly grasp whether an operation to the specific operation receiving unit or an operation to the special operation receiving unit has been accepted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a small gauge effective period (performance acceptance period) is generated by displaying a gauge image (small gauge image) with a relatively small display area, and then displaying the display area of the gauge image (small gauge image) to be smaller over time (for example, displaying the display area to be "0"), which indicates the remaining time during which operation acceptance is permitted, or a large gauge effective period (performance acceptance period) is generated by displaying a gauge image (large gauge image) with a relatively large display area, and then displaying the display area of the gauge image (large gauge image) to be smaller over time (for example, displaying the display area to be "0"), which indicates the remaining time during which operation acceptance is permitted. The small gauge effective period in which the small gauge image is displayed and the large gauge effective period in which the large gauge image is displayed are different in the jackpot expectation level (the rate at which a mode that appears only at the time of a jackpot is executed as a post-operation performance) indicated when operation acceptance is performed (for example, the large gauge effective period has a higher jackpot expectation level). In addition to the small gauge effective period and the large gauge effective period, other effective periods may be generated. The small gauge validity period and the large gauge validity period may provide operation opportunities for the same operation target, or may provide operation opportunities for different operation targets.

In this regard, when an operation is accepted during the large gauge valid period, it is desirable that the large gauge image is not hidden but remains displayed at the time when the change in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes resulting from the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed. It is also desirable that the display of the large gauge image getting smaller over time continues without ending even at the time when the change in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes in response to the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed. This provides a sense of security that there appears to be a lot of time remaining because the large gauge image is displayed, but after the operation is accepted, it is possible to create a sense of anxiety as to whether the operation was accepted properly, and it is possible to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

In this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transmittance, etc.) of the gauge image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after a change occurs in response to operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination), and the gauge image may be made difficult to see by other images. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effect, it is desirable to maintain the display state of the gauge image in the mode it was displayed in before the operation was accepted, at least at the point in time when the change in response to operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed, and to prevent the gauge image from being made difficult to see by other images. On the other hand, if a change occurs during the small gauge validity period due to an operation by the player in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination), the gauge image (small gauge image) may be made invisible when the change (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) occurs, or, as in the case of the large gauge validity period described above, the gauge image (large gauge image) may not be hidden, but may be displayed while a change occurs in response to the operation reception (display change, lamp illumination, etc.).

In addition, when the large gauge valid period occurs, it is desirable to output a reception permission sound that indicates that the performance reception is permitted or that the performance reception will be permitted. This allows the player to recognize that the large gauge valid period has occurred, and further emphasizes the sense of security until the operation reception is performed. The "reception permission sound" is a sound that, when the sound starts to be output, always generates a reception permission state (valid period) while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or is in a state where the reception permission state (valid period) has already occurred. In other words, it is a sound that starts to be output within the set time during which the performance reception is permitted and indicates that the performance reception is permitted, or starts to be output before the set time during which the performance reception is permitted begins and indicates that the performance reception is permitted, and is output as a performance sound such as a "beep".

However, even when a small gauge valid period occurs, a reception permission sound may be output that indicates that a performance reception is permitted or that a performance reception is permitted. In this case, however, it is desirable to make the manner (tone, etc.) of the reception permission sound different between when a small gauge valid period occurs and when a large gauge valid period occurs. Alternatively, during a small gauge valid period, even if a performance reception is made while the reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound in the output state is not terminated but is continued, but during a large gauge valid period, if a performance reception is made while the reception permission sound is being output, it is desirable to terminate the reception permission sound in the middle of it. Both of these configurations may be adopted. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to grasp whether a small gauge valid period or a large gauge valid period will occur, and it becomes possible to properly grasp whether an operation reception has been made during a small gauge valid period or a large gauge valid period.

The large gauge image and the small gauge image may not only differ in size, but may also differ in shape (e.g., images that are not similar to each other).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above (or below), during the period in which operation acceptance is permitted, the replica image is dynamically displayed to depict the operation receiving portion being displaced. In this regard, if the replica image is not hidden but is left displayed at the time when a change in response to operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed, the dynamic display of the replica image may also be continued without being terminated.

The model image and gauge image may also be displayed as an integrated model image, which will be described later.

In each of the above-mentioned examples and each of the examples described below, "operation reception" may be detection by a mechanical operation means such as a button, or may be reception of an operation by detecting contact with a specific operation receiving portion with a touch sensor, or reception of an operation by non-contact detection of the player's movement in a specific area.

In addition, when an effect that generates an effect acceptance period during which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (any of multiple operation means) is defined as an "operation-based effect", the operation-based effect may be executed in parallel with another specific effect that is unrelated to it (for example, a movable body effect, a count effect, etc.). In this case, however, when the "operation-based effect" is executed but the "other specific effect that is unrelated to it" is not executed in a performance situation, it is desirable to make the automatic performance function described above function more frequently than when the "operation-based effect" and the "other specific effect that is unrelated to it" are executed in parallel. That is, when the "operation-based effect" and the "other specific effect unrelated to this" are in a parallel performance situation, even if the "operation-based effect" does not receive a performance reception and the post-operation effect is not executed, the "other specific effect unrelated to this" is in an execution state, so that the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed, whereas when the "operation-based effect" is executed but the "other specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, if the "operation-based effect" does not receive a performance reception and the post-operation effect is not executed, the situation will be such that no performance is executed, and therefore the decrease in interest in the game is unavoidable. Therefore, when the "operation-based effect" is executed but the "other specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, the automatic effect function is set to function at a higher rate than when the "operation-based effect" and the "other specific effect unrelated to this" are in a parallel performance situation, so that the interest in the game can be favorably maintained when the operation-based effect occurs. The rate may be 100%. Incidentally, the premonition effect that is performed before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect in which the operation means to be operated is operated, can be said to be executed as an "operation-related effect" or an effect related thereto. In addition, if the "other specific effect" is generated, for example, before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the premonition effect), it is possible to suggest in advance that the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function will be high. In this case, it is desirable to execute it as an effect that ends after the end of the effect reception period (preferably, the post-operation effect). In contrast, if the "other specific effect" is generated, for example, after the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the premonition effect) and executed as an effect that ends before the end of the effect reception period, it becomes possible to recognize whether the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function at a high rate only immediately before, and it becomes possible to provide an effect with a sense of tension. In this regard, if the "another specific effect" is to be generated before the start of the effect acceptance period (preferably the premonition effect), then if the "another specific effect" is performed multiple times within one pattern change, it will be executed even when the effect acceptance period does not occur, so that it is possible to create tension as to whether the effect acceptance period will occur while the automatic effect function is functioning at a high rate when the "another specific effect" is executed.

In addition, when in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), until the number of executions of missing variations according to the result of the jackpot determination reaches a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive missing variations are executed and the 1000th missing variation), a presentation acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of multiple operation means) based on the result of the jackpot determination can be generated with a predetermined probability, and even if the presentation acceptance period occurs, if there is no operation by the player, the above-mentioned automatic presentation function may or may not be activated. In contrast, when in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), if the number of times the failure variations according to the result of the big win determination are consumed in sequence and reach a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive failure variations are executed, resulting in the 1000th failure variation), the pattern variation (presentation pattern) that has reached the specific value will always generate a presentation acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the multiple operation means) regardless of the result of the big win determination, and even if there is no operation by the player during the presentation acceptance period, the above-mentioned automatic presentation function may be activated to always generate the same post-operation presentation as when there is an operation by the player during the presentation acceptance period. According to this configuration, when the number of consecutive executions of the failure variations reaches a specific value, the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as a presentation that always activates the automatic presentation function even if there is no operation by the player, as if it felt responsible for the past "having urged the player to operate every time a presentation acceptance period occurred while the failure variations were being executed consecutively, but no results were achieved." This makes it possible to maintain the interest in the game in a good condition. In this case, during the performance acceptance period that occurs when the losing variations are sequentially consumed and the number of times they are executed reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th losing variation), it is desirable to display a special display image (for example, "If it is too much trouble, I will operate it for you") different from the display image (for example, "Operate it") that appeared during the performance acceptance period until the losing variations are sequentially consumed and the number of times they are executed reaches a specific value (for example, up to 999 losing variations). Furthermore, even after a pattern change (presentation pattern) that has reached a specific value has been consumed, each time a pattern change is consumed until a specific condition (for example, the occurrence of a jackpot game state) is met, a presentation acceptance period is always generated within the pattern change (presentation pattern) during which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of multiple operation means) regardless of the result of the jackpot determination, and a special display image (for example, "If it's too much trouble, I'll operate it for you") appears, and it is desirable to execute a process that causes the above-mentioned automatic presentation function to function and always generates a post-operation presentation according to the presentation acceptance even if the player does not operate the game during the presentation acceptance period.

In addition, when in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), the number of remaining variations may be displayed until the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive executions of missing variations and the 1000th missing variation) as the missing variations corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination are consumed in sequence.

In addition, when in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), during the pattern change, until the number of executions of the miss variations corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially consumed and reaches a specific value, both the presentation acceptance period for the first operation means and the presentation acceptance period for the second operation means can occur, but in the pattern change when the miss variations are sequentially consumed and the number of executions reaches a specific value, only one of the presentation acceptance period for the first operation means and the presentation acceptance period for the second operation means always occurs, and the presentation can be advanced so that the other cannot occur. With such a configuration, since an operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of expectations regarding the occurrence of a presentation acceptance period itself. However, considering that this example of presentation is realized as a presentation in which the pachinko machine 1 itself ensures that the automatic presentation function will function even if there is no operation by the player, as if the manufacturer felt responsible for the fact that "the player was prompted to operate each time a presentation acceptance period occurred while the losing variations were being executed continuously, but no results were achieved," it is preferable to generate a presentation acceptance period for the first operating means (e.g., operation button 410), which has a relatively low level of expectation when it occurs, and not generate a presentation acceptance period for the second operating means (e.g., sword decoration 5001), so as not to create excessive expectations any further.

The first effect acceptance period during which an operation opportunity is given to a first operation means (e.g., operation button 410) among the multiple operation means can occur both when the operation means is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) and when the operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), but the second effect acceptance period during which an operation opportunity is given to a second operation means (e.g., sword ornament 5001) among the multiple operation means may be configured to not occur when the operation means is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) but to occur when the operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). With this configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect when the operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and to maintain the interest in playing when the operation means is in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a performance acceptance period is generated based on the result of the jackpot determination,
Displaying a mock image of an operating means (an operation target suggesting image suggesting an operating means to be operated) (a mock image display means);
After the effect reception period has occurred, when a player performs an operation while the model image is being displayed, a post-operation effect can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means),
After the performance reception period has occurred, if a specific timing arrives without the player performing any operation while the model image is being displayed, the post-operation performance can be executed without the player performing any operation (automatic performance reception means).
However, it is desirable that the mock image can be displayed in one of a number of modes with different rates (expectations) of execution of the post-operation effect in a "mode advantageous to the player" when the effect is accepted. With this configuration, in either case of the post-operation effect being generated by the player operation accepting means or the post-operation effect being generated by the automatic effect accepting means, it becomes possible to generate the post-operation effect while the expectation is recognizable.

In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the automatic effect function, the post-operation effect is automatically generated without the player having any involvement in the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) that is the operation target, so there is a concern that the player will not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the automatic effect function is operated to generate a post-operation effect, it is desirable to first display a mock image (an operation target suggestion image that suggests the operation means to be operated) during the effect acceptance period, and to generate the post-operation effect with the mock image displayed, rather than hiding it, even if the automatic effect function has functioned. In this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transparency, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image before and after the post-operation effect occurs does not necessarily have to be the same, as long as it is possible to recognize which operation means was the operation target even in the state in which the post-operation effect occurs. On the other hand, if a post-operation effect occurs due to an operation by the player during the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden when the post-operation effect occurs, or, as in the case where the automatic effect function described above has functioned, the operation target suggestion image may not be hidden but may be displayed when the post-operation effect occurs. The post-operation effect may be performed using at least an area of the effect display device 1600 that is different from the area where the mock image is displayed, or may be performed by lighting a lamp provided on the game board 5 or by operating a movable decoration.

In this case, if the model image is displayed in one of multiple modes with different expectation levels, it will be possible to check the expectation level (model image display mode) that was suggested during the performance acceptance period even when the post-operation performance has occurred.

The imitation image that continues to be displayed in this way will be hidden after the post-operation performance occurs. However, it is desirable that the time from when the post-operation performance is performed until the imitation image is hidden be different between the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is performed when a specific time has elapsed since the first-side performance reception period has occurred and the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is performed when a time different from the specific time has elapsed since the first-side performance reception period has occurred. With this configuration, even if it is not possible to recognize whether the post-operation performance occurred by automatic processing when a specific time has elapsed or when a time different from the specific time has elapsed, it is possible to recognize at what time the post-operation performance occurred by checking the time from when the post-operation performance was performed until the imitation image was hidden.

The likelihood of a jackpot being obtained in the jackpot determination may be different when a post-operation effect occurs through automatic processing after a specific time has elapsed and when a post-operation effect occurs through automatic processing after a time other than the specific time has elapsed.

In addition, when a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) is controlled and a presentation acceptance period occurs during which the player is given an opportunity to operate, one of two display modes (e.g., a low expectation display mode with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot, and a high expectation display mode with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot) can appear during the presentation acceptance period, and when a high expectation display mode (e.g., a red operation image) appears, even if no operation is performed within the presentation acceptance period, the presentation is always accepted (the automatic presentation function always functions) and a post-operation presentation corresponding to the presentation acceptance is executed, but when a low expectation display mode (e.g., a blue operation image) appears, if no operation is performed within the presentation acceptance period, the presentation may progress in such a way that there are cases where the presentation is accepted (the automatic presentation function functions) and a post-operation presentation corresponding to the presentation acceptance is executed, and cases where the presentation is not accepted (the automatic presentation function functions) and a post-operation presentation is not executed. That is, if an operation is forgotten when a high-expectation display mode (e.g., a red operation image) appears, a decrease in interest in the game is inevitable due to the inability to confirm the post-operation performance, but it is assumed that an operation is forgotten when a low-expectation display mode (e.g., a blue operation image) appears, even if an operation is forgotten, the automatic performance function is always activated within the performance reception period to avoid a decrease in interest in the game due to an operation forgetting, while the automatic performance function is not always activated within the performance reception period to prevent an operation forgetting when a low-expectation display mode (e.g., a blue operation image) appears, so that a sense of tension is created in the game and a sense of participation of the player is increased so that an operation forgetting does not occur. Note that when not controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), a low-expectation display mode (e.g., a blue operation image) appears, but a high-expectation display mode (e.g., a red operation image) may not appear. Also, during the performance reception period, any of three or more display modes may appear.

[More possibilities for displaying mock-images]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the big win determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of executing a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) as to which of a plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-mentioned selected variation pattern may be executed in sequence, or none of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) may be executed.

When such a performance judgment (performance pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and a variable performance using decorative patterns according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with an expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of the movable body (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using decorative patterns is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player is allowed to play a jackpot game as a bonus.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation level (including 0% and 100%) of obtaining a jackpot." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, then no matter which result is obtained as the performance determination (such as a notice determination), when the pattern performance based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when a specified condition is met), an operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, as will be described later, the mode of the acceptance permission sound output when the operation acceptance performance occurs is set to differ depending on the result of the performance determination, thereby suggesting the percentage of times that the post-operation performance will be executed in a highly expected mode and the percentage of times that the jackpot pattern will be stopped.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is met), an operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, even if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) will not be generated. Also, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) generated in the predetermined variation pattern is executed as a performance different from the operation acceptance performance (valid period) generated when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach.

Note that, with regard to the variation patterns that generate an operation acceptance presentation (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the preview presentation judgment, other than the above-mentioned "specific variation patterns" may be provided. However, with regard to the variation patterns that generate an operation acceptance presentation (valid period) at a predetermined timing regardless of which result is obtained as the preview presentation judgment, it is preferable that they are not included in the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns), or that their selection rate is made low.

However, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc., simply executes a post-operation performance that generates a predetermined change to the performance component that is the target of the performance (at least one of a display change on the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change on the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable decorative body) as long as the operation is detected within the set time (valid period). Therefore, the performance quality of the operation acceptance performance (valid period) itself is poor, and there is a concern that interest in playing the game will decrease until the post-operation performance is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the operation reception performance,
As mentioned above, various measures have been taken, such as making it possible to at least generate a low-expectation non-suppressed acceptance performance in which, during the execution period of a pattern performance (performance pattern) based on a low-expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (performance pattern) is output in a non-suppressed mode and an operation opportunity is provided while the "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (performance pattern) is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or in a non-output state (the playback period in which audible sounds are recorded among the sound data has ended, or channel allocation has ended, etc.).

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further displays the Momo image displayed in the operation reception performance as an integrated Momo image integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the Momo image, thereby improving the interest in playing when the operation reception performance (valid period) occurs. It is desirable to display such an integrated Momo image in both the operation reception performance (valid period) that occurs when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, and the operation reception performance (valid period) that occurs in the above-mentioned specified variation pattern, and it is also desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high expectation suppression reception performance. In addition, in order to improve the interest in playing, it is desirable to replace the display mode of the exemplified Momo image in each of the performance examples described above with one of the integrated Momo images described below.

The case where the mock-up image is displayed as an "integrated mock-up image" will be described below.
First, to explain the "imitation image" once again, the operation means to which an operation opportunity is given in the operation reception performance has an "operation receiving portion" that receives the operation by the player and a "peripheral decoration portion" that decorates the periphery of the operation receiving portion. In this regard, the "imitation image" means an image that imitates the "operation receiving portion" of such an operation means. The "operation receiving portion" is usually provided so as to be displaced by the operation by the player, and the "peripheral decoration portion" is often provided as a non-movable member. For example, in the case of the operation means (performance operation unit 400) illustrated in Figures 39 and 40, the "operation receiving portion" corresponds to the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the "peripheral decoration portion" corresponds to the frame unit 415. Also, in the case of the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) illustrated in Figures 124 and 139, the "operation receiving portion" corresponds to the sword portion 5010, and the "peripheral decoration portion" corresponds to the sheath portion 5020.

Figure 144 shows an example of an "integrated model image" that is displayed when an operation reception effect (valid period) occurs for an operation means that has an "operation receiving portion" that receives a "pressing operation" by a player.

In this explanatory example, for ease of explanation, it is assumed that a push-type handle button 5014 is provided as an "operation receiving part" on the top surface of the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration 5001. In other words, when the handle button 5014 is "pushed" by the player, it is pushed into the handle portion 5012 and detected by a specified sensor (detection means), and the detection information is provided to the performance (such as the trigger for executing a post-operation performance). With this configuration, the sword decoration 5001 as an operation unit is provided with two operation receiving parts: the "handle button 5014" which can move (move up and down) relative to the handle portion 5012, and the "handle portion 5012" which can move (move up and down) relative to the sheath portion 5020.

In FIG. 144, the "integrated imitation image" will be described when a specific operation acceptance effect (valid period) occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014 when a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. However, in the examples described below, including FIG. 144, the "integrated imitation image" when an operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014 may be applied as the "integrated imitation image" when an operation acceptance effect (valid period) occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, not the pattern button 5014. In other words, in this case, the "imitation image of the operation button 410" illustrated in each of the above-mentioned performance examples can be replaced with the "integrated imitation image" described below, and in this case, the pattern button 5014 is not provided and is omitted as a component.

As shown in FIG. 144(a)-(d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific operation acceptance effect (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is generated, the effect display device 1600 displays the button model image BMG, which is modeled after the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410), as integrated model images IGa-IGd integrated with the border decoration image SSG that decorates the border. In the example shown in FIG. 144(a)-(d), the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are not prepared separately as image data, and are displayed only as one integrated image data (integrated model images IGa-IGd). In addition, when the integrated model images IGa-IGd are displayed, operation promotion displays such as "press" and "down arrow" are also displayed, but for convenience of explanation, they are omitted here.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple presentation modes including a "first presentation mode with relatively low expectation" and a "second presentation mode with relatively high expectation" are prepared as post-operation presentations to be executed when an operation is accepted during a specific operation acceptance presentation (valid period), and one of these presentation modes is executed based on the result of the big win judgment (presentation judgment). In this regard, in the examples shown in Figures 144(a) to 144(d),
During a specific operation reception effect (validity period), the appearance rate of the "relatively highly anticipated second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher when the mode shown in FIG. 144(b) (integrated model image IGb) appears than when the mode shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated model image IGa) appears.
During a specific operation reception effect (validity period), the appearance rate of the "relatively highly anticipated second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher when the mode shown in FIG. 144(c) (integrated model image IGc) appears than when the mode shown in FIG. 144(b) (integrated model image IGb) appears.
In order to establish a relationship in which the appearance rate of the "second performance mode with a relatively high expectation" as a post-operation performance is higher when the mode shown in FIG. 144(d) (integrated model image IGd) appears than when the mode shown in FIG. 144(c) (integrated model image IGc) appears during a specific operation acceptance performance (validity period), one of the integrated model images IGa to IGd is displayed based on the result of a jackpot determination (performance determination).

It is not necessary to prepare all four of the integrated model images IGa to IGd. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the post-operation performance during the valid period by preparing at least two of the models. In addition, it is also possible to prepare a model different from the above four models (integrated model images IGa to IGd) and display any one of the prepared models.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
An operation means (sword decoration 5001, performance operation unit 400) having an operation receiving part (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) that is displaced by the operation of the player and a peripheral decoration part (handle part 5012, frame unit 415) provided on the periphery thereof;
an integrated model image display means for displaying a model image representing an operation receiving portion as integrated model images IGa to IGd integrated with a border decoration image that decorates the border of the model image;
- It is equipped with an operation reception execution means that can cause a display change (post-operation performance) when a player performs an operation while the integrated model image is displayed, causing a predetermined displacement in the operation receiving section, and the integrated model image can be displayed in any of a number of forms (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

Details about the "integrated model images" shown in Figures 144 (a) to (d) will be explained separately for each of these aspects (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

First, the "integrated model image IGa" shown in FIG. 144(a) is composed of a normal button model image BMGa and a normal border decoration image SSGa that decorates its periphery. However, in the "integrated model image IGa", the normal button model image BMGa is displayed as an image that imitates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given, whereas the normal border decoration image SSGa does not imitate the border decoration part (pattern part 5012 or frame unit 415) that is actually provided on the periphery of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given, but decorates the periphery of the normal button model image BMGa as a virtual decoration in the display performance of the performance display device 1600.

According to this configuration, firstly, even if a plurality of operating means are provided, it is possible to easily recognize which of the operating means is given an opportunity to operate by visually checking the normal button imitation image BMGa which imitates (a part of) the operating means to be operated. Moreover, since the normal button imitation image BMGa itself is not displayed as an actual peripheral decoration part, but as a gorgeous and large image (integrated imitation image IGa) integrated with a peripheral decoration image which is preferable for improving decorativeness and presentation, it is expected that the presentation impact when the normal button imitation image BMGa is displayed will be large and the interest in the game will be improved. In addition, there is no need to worry about the cost and installation space required to make the actual peripheral decoration part gorgeous, and it is possible to realize a presentation with a high degree of freedom that is not limited by the shape of the actual peripheral decoration part.

In the "integrated model image IGa" shown in FIG. 144(a), the normal border decoration image SSGa is expressed as a base for placing a button (normal button model image BMGa), and the top surface of the base is decorated with a specified decoration to warn that the button is highly dangerous. As mentioned above, this "base" and "specified decoration" have a different shape from the actual border decoration and are expressed as a different decoration.

In this regard, in the "integrated model image IGa" according to this embodiment, a display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal border decoration image SSGa. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 145 and the like, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that the display area within the display target area decreases over time. More specifically, when no operation is accepted within the valid period, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so that the display area decreases over time from a predetermined maximum value to a predetermined minimum value (including "0"). That is, in this case, the normal border decoration image SSGa not only has the function of suggesting the operation means that is the object of operation, but also has the remaining time suggesting function of suggesting the remaining time until the state in which operation acceptance is permitted (valid period) ends.

In the normal border decoration image SSGa shown in FIG. 144(a), a partition image KG is provided which separates the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas within the normal border decoration image SSGa. The area surrounded by this partition image KG functions as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG." However, the partition image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range within the normal border decoration image SSGa may be the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG."

In the example shown in FIG. 144(a), a predetermined decoration (here, a "black and white striped pattern") is applied within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and a gauge image (here, a "gray" gauge image) GG with a predetermined transparency is displayed so as to overlap the display target area with the predetermined decoration. With this configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden but is visible even in the area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, so that interest in the game can be maintained throughout the entire period from when the gauge image GG changes from full to empty.

When realizing such a display mode within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, in addition to a method of displaying a gauge image GG with a predetermined transmittance by superimposing it on the display target area with the predetermined decoration, a method of displaying the display target area with the predetermined decoration by changing the color of the display target area itself between the part with the gauge and the part without the gauge may be adopted. In this case, the gauge image GG itself does not exist as standalone image data, and the gauge image GG can be expressed only by changing the color of the predetermined decoration within the display target area.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 144(a), the specified decoration (here, a "black and white striped pattern") applied within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is applied in a manner that spans other areas within the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa, which further enhances the integrated decorativeness of the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself, and is expected to more favorably increase interest in playing when the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 144(a), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) occurs in which the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) that is the object of operation is illuminated in the same color (e.g., "blue") as the normal button model image BMGa in the "integrated model image IGa". That is, as will be described later, the button model image BMG has multiple modes with different degrees of expectation, and the normal button model image BMGa is displayed as one of these modes. By adopting such an illumination mode, it becomes possible to recognize the mode (expectation) of the button model image BMG by simply checking the pattern button 5014 that is the object of operation, without visually checking the normal button model image BMGa.

The "button imitation image BMGa (Fig. 144(a))" does not necessarily have to be an exact imitation of the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the object of operation; the point is that it should be displayed with a level of imitation (deformation, etc.) that allows the user to recognize which operation tool is the object of operation.

In contrast, the "integrated model image IGb" shown in FIG. 144(b) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated model image IGa," and is configured as an image in which a button model image BMG representing the object to be operated and a peripheral decoration image SSG decorating its periphery are integrated. However, in this "integrated model image IGb," the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa," but the button model image BMG is displayed not as the above-mentioned "button model image BMGa," but as a "special button model image BMGb" having a different shape.

More specifically, in the "integrated model image IGb" shown in FIG. 144(b), the special button model image BMGb does not model the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the object of operation, and is displayed as an image having a different shape from the "button model image BMGa (FIG. 144(a))" that models the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410). However, if such a display method is simply adopted, there is a concern that it will be difficult to recognize which of multiple operation means is the object of operation when the "integrated model image IGb" is displayed.

However, as described above, in the "integrated model image IGa", the "button model image BMGa" modeled after the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the object of operation is displayed integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa", so the "normal border decoration image SSGa" itself naturally has the function of suggesting that the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) is the object of operation. In this regard, in the "integrated model image IGb", the "special button model image BMGb" is displayed integrated with such a "normal border decoration image SSGa", so even if the "special button model image BMGb" does not properly model the object of operation, the "integrated model image IGb" as a whole can suggest that the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) is the object of operation. To obtain this effect (the function of suggesting the operation target by the normal border decoration image SSGa), it is important that the "normal border decoration image SSGa" is not displayed when the operation target is an operation means (such as the handle portion 5012) other than the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410).

With this configuration, the button model image BMG, which represents the operation receiving portion, and the peripheral decoration image SSG, which decorates the peripheral portion, are displayed as an integrated model image. This makes it possible to display the button model image BMG, which is only a part of the integrated model image, in a more flexible manner that is not necessarily bound by the shape of the operating means to be operated, and is expected to increase interest in the game through more distinctive presentation and decorativeness.

The "special button image BMGb" shown in FIG. 144(b) is depicted as a button with a streamlined shape in a more stylish design than the "button image BMGa," and has the word "DANGER" written on the top. The appearance of this "special button image BMGb," which does not actually exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1, makes it easier for players to feel a sense of premium, and is expected to make them instinctively sense that there is a higher level of anticipation than when the "button image BMGa" appears.

Also, as shown in FIG. 144(b), when a specific operation acceptance effect (validity period) occurs in which the "integrated model image IGb" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is made to emit light in the same color (e.g., "red") as the special button model image BMGb in the "integrated model image IGb". In other words, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a manner according to the type of button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG", so that the appearance (expectation level) of the button model image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the pattern button 5014 to be operated, without visually checking the button model image BMG.

On the other hand, the "integrated model image IGc" shown in FIG. 144(c) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated model image IGa," and is configured as an image in which a button model image BMG representing the object to be operated and a peripheral decoration image SSG decorating its periphery are integrated. However, in the "integrated model image IGc," the button model image BMG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal button model image BMGa," but the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed not as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa," but as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a different shape.

However, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is similar to the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" in the following respects.
"The actual peripheral decorative portion (the handle portion 5012 or the frame unit 415) provided on the periphery of the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given is not imitated, but the periphery of the button-imitated image BMG is decorated as a virtual decoration for the display performance on the performance display device 1600.
A display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided.

With this "integrated model image IGc (Fig. 144(c))", it is possible to significantly change the overall shape of the "integrated model image IGc (Fig. 144(c))" without causing any change in the shape of the "button model image BMG" which suggests which operating means will be given an operating opportunity when the "integrated model image IGa (Fig. 144(a))" is used as a reference. This makes it possible to realize decorativeness and presentation with a high degree of freedom by causing shape changes without sacrificing the suggestive function of the operation target.

In addition, in this embodiment, at least a portion of the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Fig. 144(c))" is displayed as an image having the same decoration as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Fig. 144(a))". Therefore, when the "integrated model image IGa (Fig. 144(a))" appears and when the "integrated model image IGc (Fig. 144(c))" appears, it is possible to suggest that this is a specific operation acceptance performance (validity period) targeting the same post-operation performance.

In particular, in the "special border decoration image SSGb (Fig. 144(c))" according to this embodiment, a separate component with special decoration is added to the "normal border decoration image SSGa (Fig. 144(a))" and the whole is displayed as a larger image in an expanded form. Therefore, it is easy to recognize that the "special border decoration image SSGb" is displayed as an advanced version of the "normal border decoration image SSGa", and it is expected that the user will instinctively sense that there is a higher level of anticipation than when the "button pattern image BMGa" appears.

In addition, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Figure 144 (c))" has a different shape and decoration from the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Figure 144 (a))", but no changes are made to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself.

In other words, if a portion of such an integrated model image IG is used as the display target area of the gauge image GG, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the display target area or the gauge image is merely "part of the decoration" or "a part with the function of indicating the remaining time." In this regard, in the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Fig. 144(a))" and the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Fig. 144(c))," the display target area of the gauge image (prescribed image) GG, which has the important function of "indicating the remaining time," is not changed in shape, but the other parts are changed in shape, making it possible to realize highly flexible decorativeness and presentation by causing shape changes without sacrificing the function of indicating the remaining time.

Also, as shown in FIG. 144(c), when a specific operation reception performance (valid period) occurs in which the "integrated model image IGc" is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is made to emit light in the same color (e.g., "blue") as the normal button model image BMGa in the "integrated model image IGc". In other words, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a manner according to the type of the button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG", so that the appearance (expectation level) of the button model image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the pattern button 5014 to be operated without visually checking the button model image BMG. However, the normal button model image BMGa when the "integrated model image IGc" is displayed may be displayed in a color (e.g., "green") different from that when the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed. In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) will also emit green light.

On the other hand, the "integrated model image IGd" shown in FIG. 144(d) is basically the same as the "integrated model image IGa" described above, and is configured as an image in which a button model image BMG representing the object to be operated and a border decoration image SSG decorating its border are integrated. However, in the "integrated model image IGd", the button model image BMG is not displayed as the "normal button model image BMGa" described above, but as a "special button model image BMGb" having a different shape, and the border decoration image SSG is not displayed as the "normal border decoration image SSGa" described above, but as a "special border decoration image SSGb" having a different shape.

That is, in the "integrated model image IGd (FIG. 144(d))," the "special button model image BMGb" used in the "integrated model image IGb (FIG. 144(b))" and the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" used in the "integrated model image IGc (FIG. 144(c))" are displayed as an integrated image. With this configuration, not only can the effects of the "special button model image BMGb" described above for the "integrated model image IGb (FIG. 144(b))" and the effects of the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" described above for the "integrated model image IGc (FIG. 144(c))" be obtained, but also, when the "integrated model image IGa (FIG. 144(a))" is used as a reference, the appearance of both the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are changed, so that it is expected that the user will instinctively feel that there is a high level of expectation.

On the other hand, while both the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are modified in appearance, the same decoration and shape appear in some areas of the peripheral decoration image SSG, so that when an "integrated model image IGa (Figure 144(a))" appears and when an "integrated model image IGd (Figure 144(d))" appears, it can be suggested that a specific operation acceptance performance (validity period) is targeted at the same post-operation performance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 144(d), when a specific operation reception performance (valid period) in which the "integrated model image IGd" is displayed occurs on the performance display device 1600, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is made to emit light in the same color (e.g., "red") as the special button model image BMGb in the "integrated model image IGd". In other words, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a manner according to the type of the button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG", so that the appearance (expectation) of the button model image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the pattern button 5014 to be operated without visually checking the button model image BMG. However, the special button model image BMGb when the "integrated model image IGd" is displayed may be displayed in a color (e.g., "rainbow color") different from that when the "integrated model image IGb" is displayed. In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) will also emit light in rainbow colors.

As shown in Figures 144 (a) to (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the pattern presentation based on a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing and a predetermined operation acceptance presentation (valid period) occurs, an integrated button model image IG in which the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are integrated is displayed, and when one side of the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed in one manner, the other side can be displayed in any of a number of manners. For example, when the button model image BMG is displayed as a "normal button model image BMGa", the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed as either a "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" or a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" (Figures 144 (a) and (c)). Also, when the button model image BMG is displayed as a "special button model image BMGb", the border decoration image SSG can be displayed as either a "normal border decoration image SSGa" or a "special border decoration image SSGb" (Fig. 144 (b) and (d)). Also, when the border decoration image SSG is displayed as a "normal border decoration image SSGa", the button model image BMG can be displayed as either a "normal button model image BMGa" or a "special button model image BMGb" (Fig. 144 (a) and (b)). Also, when the border decoration image SSG is displayed as a "special border decoration image SSGb", the button model image BMG can be displayed as either a "normal button model image BMGa" or a "special button model image BMGb" (Fig. 144 (a) and (b)).

With this configuration, even though the button-like image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are displayed as one, when the appearance changes, only one side of them is displayed. Therefore, by looking at one side where the appearance has not changed, it is easy to recognize that a predetermined operation reception performance (valid period) is occurring, regardless of the appearance of the other side, and by looking at the other side where the appearance has changed, the degree of expectation can also be appropriately recognized. Note that it is also possible to have one side of the button-like image BMG and the border decoration image SSG not change in appearance, and only the other side change in appearance.

In the integrated model image IG shown in Fig. 144 (a) to (d), the border decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When the integrated model image IG is displayed during the operation reception performance (valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that its display area within the display target area decreases with time. In other words, in this case, the "border decoration image SSG" has a remaining time indication function that indicates the remaining time until the operation reception-permitted state ends, and is displayed as an integrated model image IG integrated with the "button model image BMG" that has a function of indicating which operation means is the operation target. This allows the player to grasp the remaining time and the operation target, and further recognize which of the multiple modes has appeared, and is expected to maintain the interest in playing when the operation reception performance (valid period) is occurring.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Fig. 144 (a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG (there are both a portion with a remaining time indication function and a portion without a remaining time indication function). In other words, the peripheral decoration image SSG is not intended only to indicate the remaining time of the operation reception performance (validity period), and since it is possible to actively adopt a display mode aimed at "enhancing the decorativeness of the button model image BMG" in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed, it is possible to significantly improve the performance when the operation reception performance, which is an important performance, occurs while indicating the remaining time. In order to obtain such an effect, it is more desirable to display the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as a larger area than the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode, the button model image BMG can be displayed in one of multiple modes, but in reality, when the "pattern portion 5012" which is the peripheral decoration is in one mode, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410), which is the operation receiving portion, changes to one of multiple modes (multiple light-emitting colors). Therefore, when the button model image BMG changes, it can be confirmed by simply checking the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) which is the object to be copied.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), when the button model image BMG is displayed in one mode, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed in one of multiple modes, but in reality, the peripheral decoration part "handle part 5012" does not change to one of multiple modes. That is, as described above, the peripheral decoration image SSG decorates the periphery of the button model image BMG as a virtual decoration that does not actually exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the peripheral decoration image SSG does not need to match the mode of the peripheral decoration part "handle part 5012", and can be depicted in a variety of ways that are preferable for livening up the performance. Note that the peripheral decoration part "handle part 5012" may be provided as something that cannot be changed into multiple modes in the first place, such as being non-luminous.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), there are cases where the appearance of both the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG changes (Figure 144(d)), but in reality, it is desirable to have the appearance of both the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change when the peripheral decoration part, the "handle part 5012", is in one aspect.

The "pattern portion 5012" of the peripheral decoration may have different appearances when the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and when the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". However, while the peripheral decoration image SSG at least changes in shape when the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and when the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb", it is preferable that the "pattern portion 5012" of the peripheral decoration only changes in appearance (such as a change in the light emission mode) without changing the shape. It can be said that it is preferable to provide the peripheral decoration as something that cannot change its shape in the first place, in order to highlight the virtual presentation function of the peripheral decoration image SSG.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the model images, in addition to the button model image BMG modeled after the model button 5014 (or the operation button 410), a pattern model image TMG modeled after the pattern portion 5012 is prepared, and the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG is made to differ depending on which of these model images is displayed. In other words, in this case, the peripheral decoration images SSGa, b that decorate the periphery of the button model image BMG cannot be displayed when a model image other than the button model image BMG is displayed, so that the peripheral decoration images SSGa, b themselves can be expected to have the "function of suggesting which operating means is the object of operation."

When the form of the border decoration image SSG differs depending on the form of the model image (button model image BMG, pattern model image TMG), it is preferable to make the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG included in the border decoration image different as well. The operation reception effect in which the button model image BMG is displayed and the operation reception effect in which the pattern model image TMG is displayed may be effects that occur at the same timing within the same change pattern (one of them is selected according to the performance judgment), or may be effects that occur in different change patterns or at different timing. The border decoration image SSG that appears when the button model image BMG is displayed may not be an image of the border decoration part, and the border decoration image SSG that appears when the pattern model image TMG is displayed may be an image of the border decoration part. However, it is preferable that the set time of the operation reception effect (validity period) may be the same even if the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and other areas in the peripheral decoration image SSG are decorated with a predetermined decoration (here, a "striped pattern") that spans these areas, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed overlapping the predetermined decoration. In other words, in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the exposed predetermined decoration increases, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, a gauge image (here, a "gray" gauge image) GG with a predetermined transparency is displayed by being superimposed on the display target area to which the predetermined decoration has been applied. With this configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden but is visible even in the area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, so that interest in the game can be maintained throughout the entire period from when the gauge image GG goes from full to empty.

However, the predetermined decoration does not necessarily have to be displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Also, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may have (serve as) the predetermined decoration, in which case the display area of the predetermined decoration will decrease as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, encouraging players who dislike the reduction in the predetermined decoration to perform an operation early.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144 (a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG does not model the peripheral decoration (handle portion 5012 or frame unit 415) provided on the periphery of the operation receiving portion (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) that is the object of operation, but is an image that represents an object that does not have substance as an amusement machine part. Therefore, it is possible to realize decorativeness and presentation with a higher degree of freedom that is not bound by the substance of an amusement machine part.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), of the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG, at least the peripheral decoration image SSG has a plurality of shapes. In other words, in this case, it is possible to change the shape of only the peripheral decoration image SSG, which represents an insubstantial object, without changing the shape of the button model image BMG, so that it is possible to realize a display with higher presentation and decorativeness by varying the shape of the integrated model image IG while properly indicating which of the multiple operating means is being operated.

The border decoration image SSG may be designed so that when the button-like image BMG is in one state, the shape does not necessarily change, but only the color is changed. However, the reason that shape change is permitted is because the border decoration image SSG represents an insubstantial object, and the border decoration image SSG is displayed as an image integrated with the button-like image BMG, and in this sense, it can be said that changing the shape of the border decoration image SSG has great technical value.

In the integrated model image IG shown in Fig. 144(a)-(d), the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG is changed to be larger. As will be described later, methods of changing the shape can include increasing the number of objects represented as images (such as the number of decorations), displaying them in one of a number of different shapes with different contour shapes (such as a rectangular parallelepiped or a sphere), or expanding the range of objects displayed among the objects represented as images. As will be described later, the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG can be changed in stages from a low expectation shape to a high expectation shape as a premonition effect, and then operation acceptance in the operation acceptance effect can be allowed while the final changed shape is maintained.

In addition, in the integrated image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), no matter what form the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG included in the peripheral decoration image SSG is not changed (at least the shape is not changed) and is displayed in the same form. Therefore, even if the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG changes, it is possible to preferably maintain the indication function of how much time is remaining, and while maintaining this important function, it becomes possible to also indicate the degree of expectation by changing the shape of other areas different from the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

Depending on which of the above-mentioned effects is to be achieved, the border decoration image SSG does not necessarily have to represent an insubstantial object, but may be displayed as an image that imitates a border decoration provided on the periphery of the operation receiving portion.

The integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d) can be dynamically displayed during the "valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted" such as a specific operation acceptance presentation, thereby encouraging the player to perform an operation.

However, in the integrated model image IG according to this embodiment, although the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed as an integrated image, only one side of the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed dynamically, while the other side is displayed as if it is stationary. With this configuration, one side contributes to improving the presentation when a button performance, which is an important performance, occurs by using dynamic expression, while the other side is displayed as if it remains in place, so that it does not move when the integrated model image IG is viewed as a whole, thereby ensuring good visibility.

In the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144 (a) to (d), the button model image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict the state in which the operation receiving part to which an operation opportunity is assigned is displaced within its movable range, and the peripheral decoration image SSG is not dynamically displayed. Then, on the side that is not dynamically displayed (peripheral decoration image SSG), a display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided, and when the integrated model image IG is displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that its display area within the display target area decreases over time.

In this way, by including the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG on the side of the integrated mock-up image IG that has the best visibility (the side that is not dynamically displayed, the peripheral decoration image SSG), it is possible to improve the presentation quality when an important operation acceptance presentation occurs by dynamically displaying the button mock-up image BMG, while also making it easy to recognize how much time is left in which the presentation acceptance is permitted.

The side of the integrated model image IG that has good visibility (the peripheral decoration image SSG that is not dynamically displayed) includes not only the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, but also an area in which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. In other words, in this case, when performing a presentation that suggests the degree of expectation on the side of the integrated model image IG that has good visibility, the presentation is performed in an area in which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed, thereby making it possible to avoid adverse effects on the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

The area of the border decoration image SSG that is different from the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the shape of the border decoration image SSG itself, and the button pattern image BMG are provided with multiple modes with different degrees of expectation, and one of these modes is displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (presentation determination). However, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may also be provided with multiple modes with different degrees of expectation, and one of these modes may be displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (presentation determination).

However, as shown in Figures 144 (a) to (d), when the button model image BMG is displayed as an integrated model image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery, and the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, there is a concern that it will be difficult to grasp whether the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is merely a decoration or pattern within the peripheral decoration image SSG, or whether it has a function to indicate the remaining time. There is also a concern that interest in playing the game will decrease because it will be difficult to grasp how far the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has decreased due to its being mixed with the decoration and pattern applied to the peripheral decoration image SSG.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511), at least when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced (within the valid period), an image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or an image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed, can be displayed in the display target area in which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed.

More specifically, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is displayed at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Then, in accordance with the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display position of the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is displayed so as to displace in the same manner.

According to this configuration, the valid period ends when the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is displaced to a predetermined position, so even if it is not possible to recognize whether the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is merely decorative or indicates the remaining time, it is possible to recognize the remaining time by checking the position of the "specific image." In this sense, when displaying such a "specific image," it can be said that it is not necessarily necessary to display the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

Figure 145 shows an example of the display of the integrated model image IG from the start of the valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted to the end of the period.

As shown in FIG. 145, if the timing A0 arrives at which a valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted (a specified operation acceptance presentation) begins within a specified variation pattern, the presentation display device 1600 displays an integrated model image IG and operation promotion images such as "Press!" and "Downward arrow".

In this example, the integrated model image IG is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated model image IGa), but it may be displayed in any of the forms shown in FIG. 144(b)-(d) based on the results of the performance determination. Regardless of which form the integrated model image IG is displayed in, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG during the valid period and the display of a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the form of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" will change in the form described below over time.

As shown in FIG. 145(a), first, in the integrated image IG at timing A0 (start timing of the valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire display target area. By displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in this full state, it becomes possible to recognize that the valid period has just started.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 145(a), at timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. With this configuration, simply by checking whether "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is displayed, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether a specific time has already passed since operation acceptance was permitted (a situation in which the remaining crotch is decreasing).

However, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is first displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in such a manner that "the display area increases by an amount corresponding to the elapsed time" from timing A0 (the start timing of the valid period) until a predetermined time (the time required for the entirety of the specific image to finish appearing) has elapsed.

For example, in the integrated image IG at time A1, a short time after time A0 (the start of the valid period), as shown in FIG. 145(b), a "specific image TG" that is "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" has appeared to the point where about half of the image is visible, indicating that the display area is increasing with the passage of time.

As shown in Figures 145(c) and (d), in the integrated image IG at timings A2 and A3 when a large amount of time has passed, the "specific image TG" as "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" has already appeared in its entirety and is displaced within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG without increasing the display area.

That is, as described above, the "specific image TG" is displayed at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG that displaces when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and is displayed so that its display position displaces in accordance with (following) the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

The "specific image TG" in this embodiment is an image with a star-shaped mark in a white square space, which is displayed at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, the "specific image TG" does not have to be displayed as a separate image at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and may be displayed in a manner in which the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed, such as an image in which the image gradually fades from the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG over a predetermined length. Or, it may be displayed as an effect image that appears at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In any case, the "specific image TG" does not originally function as part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, which indicates that there is no time left when its display area reaches a minimum value (here, "0"), so even when there is no time left (when the valid period ends), at least a part of it (or it could be all of it) will not be hidden and will remain displayed.

As shown in FIG. 145(e), in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, in the integrated model image IG at timing A4, which is the end timing of the valid period, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is "0", and the display area of the "specific image TG" remains at about half. Then, if no operation is accepted until this state is reached, the period during which operation acceptance is permitted ends in this state, and the integrated model image IG is made invisible.

However, as mentioned above, the "specific image TG" does not originally function as part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, in the integrated model image IG at timing A4, which is the end timing of the valid period, it is most desirable to display the "specific image TG" so that the entire display area remains, and such a configuration may be adopted.

However, it is difficult to realize a display in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG becomes exactly "0" when the valid period ends. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the "specific image TG" is displayed so that its display position is displaced in accordance with (continuously with) the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, so that when viewed from the player's side, it becomes unclear which part of the image displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In other words, although the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the valid period ends, and most (more than half, or all) of its display area remains, from the player's perspective it also appears to be part of the gauge image (prescribed image) GG, whose display area is set to the minimum (hidden in this case) when the valid period ends. With this configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (prescribed image) GG appear to be a longer image than it actually is, and therefore it is possible to make it appear as if more time remains than it actually is, making it possible to maintain interest in the game while the operation acceptance presentation is being carried out.

On the other hand, since the effective period of the operation reception presentation ends with at least a portion of the "specific image TG" remaining, even if the period does not end immediately after the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden, it is possible to display the "specific image TG" so that the display area thereof is reduced, thereby making it less likely that a sense of discomfort will arise due to a discrepancy between the timing at which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden and the timing at which the effective period ends. In other words, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to act as a buffer that can absorb such a time discrepancy.

In the example shown in FIG. 145, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" may be displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

This configuration makes it possible to make a "specific image that is different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" appear as if it were part of the gauge image GG, so that it appears as if the valid period is set to a longer period than it appears, which is expected to increase interest in the game when the valid period occurs.

[Acceptance period having at least one of configurations 1A to 40A]
As illustrated in FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (reserved consumption). Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of executing a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) as to which of a plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-mentioned selected variation pattern may be executed in sequence, or none of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) may be executed.

As described above, when such a performance judgment (variation pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and the variable performance using the decorative pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with the expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movable body movement (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movable body movement, etc., and the jackpot pattern (special pattern combination) is stopped and displayed, the player can be given a special jackpot game or a transition to a high probability game state.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation of a jackpot being obtained, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, regardless of which result is obtained as the performance determination (such as a preview determination), when the pattern performance based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when a specified condition is met), an acceptance permission state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is met), an acceptance permission state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, the acceptance permission state (valid period) does not occur even if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. In addition, the acceptance permission state (valid period) generated in the predetermined variation pattern is executed as a different performance (post-reception display, post-reception output sound, etc.) from the acceptance permission state (valid period) generated when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is met, a state of acceptance that allows the acceptance of an action (operation) by a player can be generated, and when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within this state of acceptance, a post-acceptance change (such as a display change, an acceptance output sound, or light emission for a special effect) can occur according to the type of the state of acceptance that has been generated.

In addition, in the reception-permitted state, it is possible to display an operation-related display mode that can only appear when the operation reception for the operation unit is permitted (reception-permitted period) or when the operation reception is permitted (reception-permitted period). Such an operation-related display mode is often, for example, a mock image display in which the object (operation means) that is the target of the player's action (operation) is expressed as an image, but is not limited to this, and any image display that, when displayed, always gives the player an opportunity to operate may be used. The "operation-related display (mock image display)" may have multiple modes with different degrees of expectation (for example, multiple color schemes such as white and red), and any of these multiple modes may be selectively displayed.

Moreover, since an "operation-related display mode" can only appear when the operation reception to the operation unit is permitted (reception permitted period) or when the operation reception is permitted (reception permitted period), it is sufficient that at least when the "operation-related display mode" is displayed, the reception permitted state always occurs or is in the permitted state at the time of its display. Therefore, while the "operation-related display mode" is displayed, the reception permitted state may end before it is hidden. Furthermore, multiple types of image displays may be prepared as such "operation-related display modes," and both of these image displays may be displayed in the reception permitted state.

In addition, in the acceptance-permitted state, a remaining time display can be displayed to indicate the time remaining for which acceptance of the player's action (operation) is permitted. Such a remaining time display can be implemented, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of a gauge image displayed within a frame image is reduced over time. At least one of the frame image and the gauge image can be implemented in multiple modes (for example, the rate at which the display area of the gauge image is reduced, an indication of the degree of expectation, an indication of the type of operation means, etc.), and the game can be implemented in any of these modes. In this case, a different degree of expectation (the rate at which a jackpot symbol will appear) can be suggested depending on which mode is implemented.

In addition, when the acceptance-permitting state occurs, a pre-effect (premonition effect) can be executed before this, suggesting that the player will be given an opportunity to act (suggesting that the acceptance-permitting state will occur). The pre-effect is executed, for example, by displaying an effect on the effect display device 1600 and outputting a corresponding effect sound.

Note that, in addition to the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern," a variation pattern that generates an acceptance permission state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment may be provided. Also, in addition to the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern," a variation pattern that generates an acceptance permission state (valid period) at a predetermined timing before the SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment may be provided.

In addition, including the examples mentioned above and below, the "operation (action) by the player" to be detected is not limited to those that are directly operated by the player (pressing or unsheathing the sword), such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", but also includes "contact action by the player on a specific part" to be detected by a touch sensor, and "action by the player in a specific space" to be detected by a non-contact sensor. Essentially, the "operation means" is anything that has one or more reception means (operation unit) that accepts actions by the player (pressing, unsheathing the sword, touching, non-contact, etc.).

Incidentally, various types of acceptance allowance states (valid periods) are available in this embodiment, such as different types of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance output sound, whether output is present, different audible BGM output status, different number of times operation acceptance is permitted within the acceptance allowance state (valid period), and whether the auto-repeat function or automatic button function is enabled.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with the following special presentation characteristics between multiple reception-permitting states, thereby enhancing the presentation characteristics when a reception-permitting state occurs and maintaining a suitable sense of tension when a reception-permitting state occurs. It is not necessary to provide all of the presentation characteristics (configurations) described below. For example, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in playing by providing only one of the presentation characteristics (any configuration), or it may selectively provide several configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it may appropriately adopt a configuration that is described as applicable (desirable) to another configuration. Furthermore, the presentation characteristics (configurations) described below are merely examples, and it is sufficient that they have any one configuration that can suppress a decrease in interest in playing related to the reception-permitting state.

[Configuration 1-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. Also, a message display that encourages the operation of the specific operation means can be displayed. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state is prepared in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and in the multiple operation effective state, there are both cases in which the message display is displayed and cases in which the message display is not displayed. In addition, among such multiple operation effective states, in the multiple operation effective state of the type in which the message display is displayed, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed in response to the detection, so that it is expected that a sense of tension as to whether or not to continue operating the specific operation means when the message display is displayed can be appropriately maintained. Note that the "specific operation means" in the configuration 1-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in the other configurations, or it may mean a different operation means. It may also mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in the other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which a message display is not displayed among the multiple operation valid states, and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state is not changed in response to the detection, but may be changed without being triggered by the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). With this configuration, in the multiple operation valid state, it is possible to suggest whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state through whether or not a message display is displayed, and it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition.

As will be described later, in this case, particularly in the case where it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which a message display is not displayed among the multiple operation valid states and a post-operation output sound corresponding thereto is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is performed without being triggered by the detection (for example, the sound is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated), whereas in the case where it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which a message display is displayed among the multiple operation valid states and a post-operation output sound corresponding thereto is output, when it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state may be triggered by the detection or may be performed without being triggered by the detection (for example, the sound is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). According to this configuration, when the message display is not displayed in the multiple operation enabled state, it is suitably indicated that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, whereas when the message display is displayed in the multiple operation enabled state, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there will be a change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, which is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

In order to favorably achieve the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state when a message display is displayed in a multiple operation enabled state," it is desirable to have both a case where the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state when one mode of the message display appears, and a case where the post-operation output sound does not change. However, this configuration does not necessarily have to be adopted, and even if, for example, different modes of the message display appear, such as a different size, color, or display mode, and there are cases where the post-operation output sound changes or there is no change in the post-operation output sound depending on the mode, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize to a certain degree whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound, compared to a case where the message display itself is not displayed at all. However, it is desirable (not a required configuration) to display the message display encouraging multiple operations in a mode that cannot appear in an operation enabled state in which only one operation is accepted.

[Configuration 2-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is prepared, and the multiple operation effective state includes a type of multiple operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, and a type of multiple operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. In addition, in the multiple operation effective state of the type in which the specific operation means is simply maintained in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed in response to the detection, so that it is expected that the tension as to whether the operation state of the specific operation means should be maintained can be appropriately maintained. Note that the "specific operation means" in the configuration 2-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in the other configurations, or it may mean a different operation means. It may also mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in the other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state and the corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not changed as a result of the detection, but may be changed without being triggered by the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then ended). According to this configuration, in the multiple operation valid state, it is possible to suggest whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state through whether or not the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, particularly in the multiple operation valid state of a type in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is performed without being triggered by the detection (for example, the sound is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). ), in the multiple operation effective state, in which the specific operation means is detected to be in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, if the specific operation means is detected to have changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state may be triggered by the detection or may not be triggered by the detection (for example, the output is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). According to this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled in the multiple operation effective state, it is suitably suggested that the post-operation output sound will not change when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, whereas when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled in the multiple operation effective state, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the post-operation output sound will change when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

In the configuration 2-A, it is assumed that the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are both the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when an imitation image display imitating an operation means for which multiple operations are permitted is displayed in the multiple operation enabled state, a configuration may be adopted that relates to "whether or not a change occurs in the output sound after operation" between a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled when the operation means corresponding to the imitation image display is maintained in an operated state, and a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled when the operation means corresponding to the imitation image display is maintained in an operated state.

[Configuration 3-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and an imitation image display simulating the specific operation means can be displayed. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is prepared, and the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the multiple operation effective state, and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units of less than a predetermined time, and cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. In addition, in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which the periodic change of the imitation image display appears in a time unit longer than the predetermined time, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed in response to the detection, so that it is expected that the sense of tension when the periodic change of the imitation image display is displayed in a time unit longer than the predetermined time can be appropriately maintained. Note that the "specific operation means" and "predetermined time" in the configuration 3-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means and time as the "specific operation means" and "predetermined time" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation means and time. They may also mean the same "operation means" and "time" as the operation means and time with different names in other configurations. Furthermore, as the "time period longer than a predetermined time period," only one time period may be prepared, or a plurality of different time periods may be prepared.

In this case, as described later, in the multiple operation valid states of the type in which the periodic change in the imitation image display appears in units of time less than the predetermined time, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state is not changed in response to the detection, but may be changed without being triggered by the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). With this configuration, in the multiple operation valid state, it is possible to suggest whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state through the length of time required for the periodic change in the imitation image display, and it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, particularly in the multiple operation enabled state of the type in which the periodic change in the mock image display appears in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is performed without being triggered by the detection (for example, the sound is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). On the other hand, in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which a periodic change in the simulated image display appears in units of time longer than the specified time, among the multiple operation valid states, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is in the state in which it is being output, the post-operation output sound in that output state may be terminated either in response to the detection or without being triggered by the detection (for example, in the case where the sound is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). According to this configuration, when the time required for the imitation image display to change periodically in the multiple operation enabled state is relatively short, it is suitably indicated that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state. On the other hand, when the time required for the imitation image display to change periodically in the multiple operation enabled state is relatively long, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there will be a change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, so it is expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

In this configuration 3-A, it is assumed that the operation means when the periodic change in the mock image display appears in units of time less than the predetermined time in the multiple operations enabled state, and the operation means when the periodic change in the mock image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time in the multiple operations enabled state, are both the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. In other words, whether the periodic change in the mock image display appears in units of time less than the predetermined time in the multiple operations enabled state or the periodic change in the mock image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time in the multiple operations enabled state, the operation means corresponding to that mock image display may be the operation target, and a configuration related to "whether or not a change occurs in the output sound after operation" may be adopted.

In addition, in configuration 3-A, the above-mentioned "time equal to or less than the predetermined time" may have multiple times prepared, or only one time (e.g., the "predetermined time") prepared. Similarly, the above-mentioned "time longer than the predetermined time" may have multiple times prepared, or only one time prepared.

[Configuration 4-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and an imitation image display imitating the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, as an imitation image operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display is in an operating state, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of the operating state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is provided, and a first operating means and a second operating means are provided as the operating means. In addition, in the multiple operation valid states of the type in which at least the imitation image display imitating the first operation means is displayed, when it is detected that the first operation means is in an operating state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, when it is detected that the first operation means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed in response to the detection, so that it is expected that the sense of tension when the imitation image display imitating the first operation means is displayed can be appropriately maintained. Note that the "first operation means" and "second operation means" in the configuration 4-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 4-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means as the "first operation means" and "second operation means" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation means. They may also mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the second operating means is detected to be in an operating state in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which at least an imitation image display imitating the second operating means is displayed among the multiple operation valid states, and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, even if it is detected that the second operating means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state is not changed in response to the detection, but may be changed without being triggered by the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). With this configuration, in the multiple operation valid state, it is possible to suggest whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state through the type of operating means for which multiple operations are permitted, and it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition.

As will be described later, in this case, particularly in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which at least an imitation image display imitating the second operation means is displayed among the multiple operation valid states, when it is detected that the second operation means is in an operating state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, even if it is detected that the second operation means has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is performed without being triggered by the detection (for example, it is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). On the other hand, in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which at least an imitation image display imitating the first operation means is displayed among the multiple operation valid states, when it is detected that the first operation means is in an operating state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, if it is detected that the first operation means has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is in the state in which it is being output, the post-operation output sound in that output state may be terminated either in response to the detection or without being triggered by the detection (for example, in the case where the sound is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). With this configuration, in the multiple operation enabled state, when the second operation means is the target of the imitation image display and the second operation means is operated, it is preferably indicated that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the second operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, whereas when the first operation means is the target of the imitation image display and the first operation means is operated, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there will be a change in the post-operation output sound when the first operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, which is expected to preferably maintain a sense of tension.

[Configuration 5-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation change corresponding to the detection can be executed. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation change can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times is prepared, and as one of the post-operation changes, a post-operation output sound can be output, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in the multiple operation effective state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, when it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state may change in response to the detection or may not change in response to the detection, so that it is expected that the tension when in the multiple operation effective state can be appropriately maintained. The "specific operation means" in the configuration 5-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in another configuration, or it may mean a different operation means. It may also mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in another configuration.

In this case, as described later, a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state are prepared as the multiple operation valid states, and in the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation change in response to the detection can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, but at this time, the interval until the post-operation change is newly started in response to the detection is set to an indefinite time, in the second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation change in response to the detection cannot be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and in the third multiple operation valid state, the post-operation change in response to the detection can be newly started at regular intervals simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state. In addition, in the case where it is detected in the first multiple-times operation valid state that the specific operation means is in an operation state and a post-operation output sound corresponding thereto is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state can be made in response to the detection. In the case where it is detected in the second multiple-times operation valid state that the specific operation means is in an operation state and a post-operation output sound corresponding thereto is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state can be made in response to the detection. The end of the post-operation output sound in the forced state is not triggered by the detection, but is performed without being triggered by the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then terminated), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state in the third multiple operation effective state and a post-operation output sound corresponding thereto is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is performed without being triggered by the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). According to such a configuration, first, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operating state, it is possible to suitably suggest that there is no change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. In this regard, when the post-operation output sound in response to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means in an operating state, there are cases where the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and cases where the post-operation output sound does not change. However, depending on whether the post-operation output sound is output at regular intervals when the specific operating means is maintained in an operating state, it becomes possible to suggest whether the post-operation output sound will change when the specific operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, which is expected to maintain interest in the game in an appropriate manner.

In this configuration 5-A, it is assumed that the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is represented as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 6-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation change corresponding to the detection can be executed. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation change can be started to be executed when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state is prepared in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times, and as one of the post-operation changes, a post-operation output sound can be output, and as the multiple operation effective state, a first multiple operation effective state and a second multiple operation effective state are prepared. In addition, the first multiple operation effective state is one in which the post-operation change corresponding to the detection can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and the second multiple operation effective state is one in which the post-operation change corresponding to the detection cannot be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in the multiple operation effective state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state may change in response to the detection or may not change in response to the detection, so that it is expected that the tension when in the multiple operation effective state can be appropriately maintained. Note that the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation effective state", and "second multiple operation effective state" in the configuration 6-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means or multiple operation valid state as the "specific operation means" or the "first multiple operation valid state" or the "second multiple operation valid state" according to another configuration, or it may mean a different operation means or multiple operation valid state. Also, it may mean the same "operation means" or "multiple operation valid state" as an operation means or multiple operation valid state with a different name according to another configuration.

In this case, as described later, a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state are prepared as the multiple operation valid state. In the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation change in response to the detection can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation change is newly started in response to the detection is always longer than the specific time. In the second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation change in response to the detection cannot be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state. In the third multiple operation valid state, the post-operation change in response to the detection can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation change is newly started in response to the detection is always shorter than the specific time. In the first multiple operation valid state, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, while the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated. When it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state can be triggered by the detection. When it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state in the second multiple-operation valid state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is not triggered by the detection (for example, the output is output for a predetermined output time and then ended). When it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state in the third multiple-operation valid state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state can be triggered by the detection, but is not triggered by the detection (for example, the output is output for a predetermined output time and then ended). According to this configuration, first, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operating state, it is possible to suitably suggest that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. In this regard, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operating state, there are both cases where the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and cases where the post-operation output sound does not change. However, it is possible to suggest whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state based on whether or not the interval between the output of the post-operation output sound and the new output is longer than a specific time when the specific operation means is maintained in an operating state, and it is expected that interest in the game will be suitably maintained.

In the configuration 6-A, the operation means when the so-called auto-tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operation means when the so-called auto-tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are assumed to be the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. In addition, the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are assumed to be the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state to realize this. In addition, the "specific time" in the configuration 6-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "specific time" in the other configurations, or it may mean a different time. It may also mean the same "time" as a differently named time in the other configurations. In addition, the "time longer than the specific time" in the configuration 6-A may be provided in multiple times, or only one time. Similarly, there may be multiple "times less than or equal to a specific time" for configuration 6-A, or only one.

[Configuration 7-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, a multiple operation effective state is provided in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state. In addition, in such multiple operation effective states, in a type of multiple operation effective state in which the operation effective state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed in response to the detection, so that it is expected that the tension in the multiple operation effective state can be appropriately maintained. Note that the "specific operation means" in the configuration 7-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in another configuration, or it may mean a different operation means. It may also mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in another configuration.

In this case, as described later, in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state is not changed in response to the detection, but may be changed without being triggered by the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). With this configuration, in the multiple operation valid state, it is possible to suggest whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state based on whether or not the operation valid state is terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is made without being triggered by the detection. In a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be ended based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, if the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state may be ended in either a case in which the detection is used as a trigger or a case in which the detection is not used as a trigger (not being used as a trigger). According to this configuration, in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, it is preferably suggested that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, whereas in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there will be a change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, which is expected to preferably maintain a sense of tension.

In the configuration 7-A, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated multiple times in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the valid operation state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, and the operation means to be operated multiple times in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the valid operation state may be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, are both the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration according to the present invention may be specified as whether or not the "operation means" represented as a mock image display in the multiple operation valid state is a type in which the valid operation state may be terminated as a result of the operation of the "operation means" in the multiple operation valid state. In addition, even if a multiple operation valid state is one that will not end before the arrival of a predetermined end timing depending on the result of a jackpot determination or the like, if the multiple operation valid state may end before the arrival of a predetermined end timing depending on the result of a jackpot determination or the like, then the multiple operation valid state corresponds to the above-mentioned "multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state may end."

[Configuration 8-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and a message display that encourages the operation of the specific operation means can be displayed. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state is prepared in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and in the multiple operation effective state, there are both cases in which a message display is displayed and cases in which a message display is not displayed. In addition, in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which a message display is displayed, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a post-operation output sound is output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the timing when the specific operation means is changed to the non-operation state to the time when the post-operation output sound is changed to an inaudible state is not a fixed time" so that, when the post-operation output sound is in an output state and a message display is displayed, even if the operation on the specific operation means is terminated, it is difficult to guess how much time has passed since the non-operation state when the post-operation output sound in the output state is terminated. Note that the "specific operation means" in the configuration 8-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 8-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in another configuration, or it may mean a different operation means. It may also mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in another configuration.

In this case, as will be described later, in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which a message display is not displayed among the multiple operation enabled states, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state, only "a sound for which the time from the time when the specific operation means is in the non-operated state to the time when the post-operation output sound is in an inaudible state is not a fixed time (a sound for which the time is not processed as a fixed time and is an indefinite time)" can be output as the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is in an operated state and the message display is displayed among the multiple operation enabled states. When it is detected that the post-operation output sound is a sound in which "when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the timing when the specific operation means is changed to the non-operated state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time" is output as the post-operation output sound, or "when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the timing when the specific operation means is changed to the non-operated state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time" is output as the post-operation output sound.

According to this configuration, in the multiple operation effective state, when the post-operation output sound is in an output state and the message display is not displayed, it is difficult to guess how much time will elapse after the post-operation output sound in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state before it ends, and for example, it is possible to suitably suggest that the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state is low in terms of noteworthy performance in a situation where the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state immediately after the operation. On the other hand, in the multiple operation effective state, when the post-operation output sound is in an output state and the message display is displayed, it is possible to guess how much time will elapse after the post-operation output sound in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state before it ends, and it is difficult to guess. Therefore, for example, while suggesting that the performance of the specific operation means after changing from an operating state to a non-operating state may be worth noting, the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the non-operating state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to the non-operating state is suitably maintained.

In order to achieve such an advantageous effect, it is desirable to have both a case where, when a certain aspect of the message display appears, the post-operation output sound is output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated, the time from the timing when the specific operation means is changed to the non-operating state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time" and a case where "when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated, the time from the timing when the specific operation means is changed to the non-operating state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time" when the post-operation output sound is output. However, this configuration does not necessarily have to be adopted, and for example, when different aspects of the message display appear, such as when the message display has a different size, color, or display aspect, even if one of the sounds is output according to that aspect, it can be expected that the above-mentioned effect will be achieved to a certain level compared to when the message display itself is not displayed at all. However, it is desirable (but not essential) to display messages that prompt multiple operations in a manner that would not appear in an operation-enabled state in which only one operation is accepted.

[Configuration 9-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, a multiple operation valid state in which the detection of the operation state multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is provided as an operation valid state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state. Among the multiple operation valid states, in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, "when the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means becomes the non-operation state to the time when the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time" can be output as the post-operation output sound. Therefore, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, it can be suggested that it is difficult to guess how much time will pass since the non-operation state when the post-operation output sound in the output state will be terminated, even if the operation of the specific operation means is terminated. The "specific operation means" in the configuration 9-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in another configuration, or it may mean a different operation means. It may also mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in another configuration.

In this case, as will be described later, in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, only "a sound for which the time from the time when the specific operation means is in the non-operation state until the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound for which the time is not processed as a fixed time and is an indefinite time)" can be output as the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which the post-operation output sound is made inaudible while the post-operation output sound is being output, when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which the post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, among the multiple operation enabled states, When it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state, the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operating state to the time when the post-operation output sound is inaudible is a fixed time (a sound that is processed as a fixed time)," or the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operating state to the time when the post-operation output sound is inaudible is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite (a sound that is not a fixed time)."

According to this configuration, when the so-called auto-tap function is not enabled in the multiple operations enabled state, it is difficult to predict how much time will elapse after the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state before the post-operation output sound in the output state ends, for example, it is possible to suitably suggest that the post-operation output sound in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state has little noteworthy performance in a situation where the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state shortly thereafter. In contrast, when the so-called auto-tap function is enabled in the multiple operations enabled state, there are both cases where it is possible to predict how much time will elapse after the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state before the post-operation output sound in the output state ends, and cases where it is difficult to predict. For example, while suggesting that the performance of the specific operation means after being changed from an operating state to a non-operating state may be worth noting, the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has elapsed after being changed to a non-operating state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to a non-operating state is suitably maintained.

In the configuration 9-A, it is assumed that the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are both the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when an imitation image display that imitates an operation means that allows multiple operations is displayed in the multiple operation enabled state, the configuration 9-A may be adopted in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled when the operation means corresponding to the imitation image display is maintained in an operated state, and in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled when the operation means corresponding to the imitation image display is maintained in an operated state.

[Configuration 10-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and an imitation image display simulating the specific operation means can be displayed. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is prepared, and the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the multiple operation effective state, and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units of less than a predetermined time, and cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. In addition, in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which the periodic change of the imitation image display appears in a time unit longer than the predetermined time, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state, the post-operation output sound is output as "a sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means becomes in the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not constant when the specific operation means becomes in the non-operating state while the post-operation output sound is being outputted," so that when the periodic change of the imitation image display is displayed in a time unit longer than the predetermined time, it is difficult to guess how much time has passed since the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound in the output state ends, even if the operation of the specific operation means is ended. Note that the "specific operation means" and "predetermined time" in the configuration 10-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 10-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means or time as the "specific operating means" or "predetermined time" in another configuration, or it may mean a different operating means or time. It may also mean the same "operating means" or "time" as an operating means or time with a different name in another configuration. Furthermore, as the "time longer than the predetermined time," only one time may be prepared, or multiple different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic change in the imitation image display appears in units of time less than the predetermined time, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state, only a sound in which "when the specific operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operating state to when the post-operation output sound is in an inaudible state is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is an indefinite time)" can be output as the post-operation output sound, and in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic change in the imitation image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, When it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state, the post-operation output sound may be output in either of two ways: "when the specific operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to the time when the post-operation output sound is inaudible is treated as a fixed time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is inaudible is not treated as a fixed time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is inaudible while the post-operation output sound is being output"; or "when the specific operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to the time when the post-operation output sound is inaudible is not treated as a fixed time and is indefinite (a sound that is not of fixed time)."

According to this configuration, when the time required for the periodic change of the imitation image display in the multiple operation effective state is relatively short, it is difficult to guess how much time will elapse after the non-operation state for the post-operation output sound in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state to end, and it is possible to suitably suggest that, for example, the noteworthy performance is low in a situation where the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state immediately after it is changed from the operation state. On the other hand, when the time required for the periodic change of the imitation image display in the multiple operation effective state is relatively long, there are both cases where it is possible to guess how much time will elapse after the non-operation state for the post-operation output sound in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state to end, and cases where it is difficult to guess. Therefore, for example, while suggesting that the performance after the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state may be worth noting, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound in the output state will end after a certain amount of time has elapsed since it is changed to the non-operation state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to the non-operation state will be suitably maintained.

In the configuration 10-A, it is assumed that the operation means when the periodic change in the mock image display appears in units of time less than the predetermined time in the multiple operations enabled state and the operation means when the periodic change in the mock image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time in the multiple operations enabled state are both the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. In other words, in the multiple operations enabled state, whether the periodic change in the mock image display appears in units of time less than the predetermined time or the periodic change in the mock image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operation means corresponding to the mock image display may be the operation target, and the configuration according to the configuration 10-A may be adopted.

In addition, in configuration 10-A, the above-mentioned "time equal to or less than the predetermined time" may have multiple times prepared, or only one time (e.g., the "predetermined time") prepared. Similarly, the above-mentioned "time longer than the predetermined time" may have multiple times prepared, or only one time prepared.

[Configuration 11-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and an imitation image display imitating the operation means can be displayed. In this regard, as an imitation image operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is provided, and a first operation means and a second operation means are provided as the operation means. In addition, in the multiple operation valid states of the type in which at least the imitation image display imitating the first operation means is displayed, when it is detected that the first operation means is in an operation state, a sound in which "when the first operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the timing when the first operation means changes to the non-operation state to the time when the post-operation output sound is in an inaudible state is not a fixed time" can be output as the post-operation output sound. Therefore, when the imitation image display imitating the first operation means is displayed as an operation means in which multiple operations are permitted, even if the operation of the first operation means is terminated, it is difficult to guess how much time has passed since the non-operation state when the post-operation output sound in the output state is terminated. Note that the "first operation means" and "second operation means" in the configuration 11-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 11-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "first operation means" or the "second operation means" in another configuration, or it may mean a different operation means. Also, it may mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in another configuration.

In this case, as will be described later, in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which at least an imitation image display imitating the second operation means is displayed, when it is detected that the second operation means is in an operating state, only a sound "in the case where the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the second operation means changes to the non-operating state to when the post-operation output sound is in an inaudible state is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite)" can be output as the post-operation output sound, and in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which at least an imitation image display imitating the first operation means is displayed, it is detected that the first operation means is in an operating state. As the post-operation output sound, there may be two cases: a case where "when the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from the timing when the first operating means changes to the non-operated state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is a fixed time (a sound that is processed as a fixed time)" is output; and a case where "when the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from the timing when the first operating means changes to the non-operated state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite)" is output.

With this configuration, when the second operating means is the target of the mock image display in the multiple operation enabled state and the second operating means is operated, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the second operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operated state until the post-operation output sound that is in an output state when the second operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operated state ends; for example, it is possible to preferably suggest that there is little noteworthy dramatic effect in a situation where the second operating means has just been changed from an operating state to a non-operated state. In contrast, when the first operating means is the target of the mock image display and the first operating means is operated, it is possible to predict how much time will elapse after the first operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state until the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end, and it is difficult to predict this time. For example, while it is possible to suggest that the performance of the first operating means from an operating state to a non-operating state may be worth paying attention to, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the non-operating state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the first operating means is changed to a non-operating state will be appropriately maintained.

[Configuration 12-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is prepared, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, as the post-operation output sound, "when the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means becomes the non-operation state to the time when the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is a certain time" is output as the post-operation output sound. "When the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means is changed to the non-operating state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time" is output. Therefore, while suggesting the possibility that the performance of the specific operation means from the operating state to the non-operating state may be worth noting, the post-operation output sound in the output state is not necessarily terminated after a fixed time has elapsed since the non-operating state, and it is expected that the tension when the non-operating state is changed to the non-operating state will be appropriately maintained. Note that the "specific operation means" in the configuration 12-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in another configuration, or it may mean a different operation means. It may also mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in another configuration.

In this case, as described later, a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state are prepared as multiple operation valid states, and in the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to be an indefinite time, but the post-operation output sound is generated in a manner such that "when the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the time the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state to the time the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is set to be a constant time. In the second multiple operation valid state, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated at predetermined time intervals simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, but the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means is in the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound is inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite) when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output."

According to this configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state among the multiple operation valid states, it is difficult to predict how much time will elapse after the non-operated state for the post-operation output sound in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operated state to end, and for example, it is possible to suitably suggest that the noteworthy performance is low in a situation where the specific operation means has just been changed from the operation state to the non-operated state. In contrast, in the first multiple operation valid state, it is possible to predict how much time will elapse after the non-operated state for the post-operation output sound in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operated state to end, and it is possible to suggest, for example, that the performance after the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operated state may be worth noting.

As will be described later, in this case, particularly in the first multiple operation valid state, while there is one valid period, the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to the time when the post-operation output sound is inaudible is a fixed time (a sound that is processed as a fixed time)" or "in which, when the specific operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to the time when the post-operation output sound is inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite)."

According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state among the multiple operation valid states, it is possible to predict how much time will elapse after the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state until the post-operation output sound in the output state ends when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and it is difficult to predict this. For example, while it is possible to suggest that the performance of the specific operation means after being changed from an operation state to a non-operation state may be worth paying attention to, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound in the output state ends after a certain amount of time has elapsed since being changed to a non-operation state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to a non-operation state will be appropriately maintained.

In this configuration 12-A, it is assumed that the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is represented as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 13-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state is provided in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and in the multiple operation effective state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. In this regard, in the multiple operation effective state, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, there are two cases where the post-operation output sound is output: "when the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound for which the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is a fixed time (a sound processed as a fixed time)" and "when the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound for which the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite)." Therefore, for example, while suggesting the possibility that the performance of the specific operation means after changing from an operation state to a non-operation state may be worth paying attention to, the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end a fixed time after the non-operation state, and it is expected that the tension when changing to the non-operation state will be preferably maintained. The "specific operation means" in the configuration 13-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 13-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in another configuration, or it may mean a different operation means. It may also mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in another configuration.

In this case, as described later, a first multiple operation valid state is prepared as the multiple operation valid state, and in the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to be longer than the specific time, and the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state to when the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is a fixed time (a sound that is processed as a fixed time)."

As described later, a second multiple operation valid state is prepared as the multiple operation valid state, and in the second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is not generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means is in the non-operation state to when the post-operation output sound is in an inaudible state is not a fixed time (a sound that is not treated as a fixed time and is indefinite) when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output."

As described later, a third multiple operation valid state is prepared as the multiple operation valid state, and in the third multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state. In this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to a specific time or less, and the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means is in the non-operation state to when the post-operation output sound is in an inaudible state is not a fixed time (a sound that is not treated as a fixed time and is indefinite) when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output."

In the configuration 13-A, the operation means when the so-called auto-tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operation means when the so-called auto-tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are assumed to be the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. In addition, the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are assumed to be the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state to achieve this. In addition, the "specific time" in the configuration 13-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 13-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "specific time" in another configuration, or it may mean a different time. It may also mean the same "time" as the time with a different name in another configuration. Furthermore, there may be multiple "times longer than the specific time" for configuration 13-A, or only one. Similarly, there may be multiple "times equal to or shorter than the specific time" for configuration 13-A, or only one.

[Configuration 14-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is provided, and among the multiple operation effective states, in a type of multiple operation effective state in which the operation effective state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, the post-operation output sound is output as "the specific operation means is in an operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output." In the case where the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated, a sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means is changed to the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound is changed to an inaudible state is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite) can be output. Therefore, in the multiple operation effective state of the type, it is difficult to estimate how much time will elapse after the non-operating state when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state before the post-operation output sound in the output state ends, and it is possible to suitably suggest that, for example, the performance that is worthy of attention is low in a situation where the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state shortly after. Note that the "specific operation means" in the configuration 14-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 14-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in another configuration, or it may mean a different operation means. It may also mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in another configuration.

In this case, as described later, in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means becomes in the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite) when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state in the multiple operation valid state that is not terminated is difficult to estimate how much time has passed since the post-operation output sound in the output state was changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, for example, it can be suitably suggested that the performance that is worthy of attention is low in a situation where the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state shortly after.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing among the multiple operation valid states, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, only "a sound in which the time from the time when the specific operation means becomes in the non-operation state until the time when the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite)" can be output as the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is in an operation state from the operation state to the non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, and when the specific operation means is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing among the multiple operation valid states, In a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a post-operation output sound may be output in either of two ways: "when the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state to the time when the post-operation output sound is in an inaudible state is a fixed time (a sound that is processed as a fixed time)" or "when the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state to the time when the post-operation output sound is in an inaudible state is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite)" may be output.

According to this configuration, in the multiple operation valid state of the type that is not terminated, it is difficult to guess how much time will elapse after the non-operation state for the post-operation output sound in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, and it is possible to suitably suggest, for example, that the performance worthy of attention is low in the situation immediately after the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. On the other hand, in the multiple operation valid state of the type that is terminated, there are both cases where it is possible to guess how much time will elapse after the non-operation state for the post-operation output sound in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, and cases where it is difficult to guess. Therefore, while suggesting, for example, that the performance worthy of attention may be due to the change from the operation state to the non-operation state of the specific operation means, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound in the output state will be terminated after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the non-operation state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to the non-operation state is suitably maintained.

In the configuration 14-A, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated multiple times in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the valid operation state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, and the operation means to be operated multiple times in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the valid operation state may be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, are both the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration according to the present invention may be specified as whether or not the "operation means" represented as a mock image display in the multiple operation valid state is a type in which the valid operation state may be terminated as a result of the operation of the "operation means" in the multiple operation valid state. In addition, even if a multiple operation valid state is one that will not end before the arrival of a predetermined end timing depending on the result of a jackpot determination or the like, if the multiple operation valid state may end before the arrival of a predetermined end timing depending on the result of a jackpot determination or the like, then the multiple operation valid state corresponds to the above-mentioned "multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state may end."

[Configuration 15-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state is prepared in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and as the multiple operation effective state, a first multiple operation effective state and a second multiple operation effective state, which have different generation conditions from each other, are prepared. Furthermore, in both the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state, it is possible to play in such a way as to create a situation in which the specific operation means is in a non-operated state in which it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state; if, in the first multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be changed as a result of this, but if, in a situation in which the specific operation means is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may not be changed as a result of this. That is, in this case, in the first multiple operation valid state, even if the specific operation means in the operation state is changed to the non-operation state, the post-operation output sound that was in the output state until then does not change due to this, so that it is expected that the operation will be interrupted with a light heart, but when the specific operation means in the non-operation state is changed to the operation state, the post-operation output sound that was in the output state until then can be changed, so that it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably provided when operating again. Note that the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" in the configuration 15-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 15-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means or effective operation state as the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation means or effective operation states. They may also mean the same "operation means" or "effective operation state" as the operation means or effective operation state with a different name in the other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in a situation in which, in the first multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, there may be cases in which, as the post-operation output sound, both a sound that may cause a change in its output state in response to the specific operation means provisionally changing from a non-operated state to an operated state and a sound that does not cause a change in its output state are in an output state; however, if the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in a situation in which the specific operation means is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state may not be changed in response to this, regardless of the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound. According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state, even if the specific operation means in the operation state is changed to the non-operation state, the post-operation output sound that was in the output state until then does not change as a result, so it is expected that the operation will be interrupted without hesitation. However, when the specific operation means in the non-operation state is changed to the operation state, there are cases where the post-operation output sound that was in the output state until then changes and cases where it does not change. Therefore, while encouraging re-operation, the possibility of a change in the post-operation output sound is expected to provide a good sense of tension about re-operation.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, particularly in a situation in which the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, as the post-operation output sound, a sound that does not cause a change in its output state as a result of the specific operation means provisionally changing from a non-operated state to an operated state is in an output state (although a sound that may cause a change in the output state is not output as the post-operation output sound), but if the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while in a situation in which the specific operation means is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, this may be used as a trigger for either a change or a non-change depending on the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound. According to this configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state, when the specific operation means in the operation state is changed to the non-operation state, the post-operation output sound that was in the output state until then may or may not change, so that while encouraging the interruption of the operation, the possibility of a change in the post-operation output sound is suitably provided, while at the same time, when the specific operation means in the non-operation state is changed to the operation state, the post-operation output sound that was in the output state until then is not changed, so it is expected that the user will operate it again with ease.

In the configuration 15-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

[Configuration 16-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and an imitation image display simulating the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, as an imitation image operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display is in an operating state, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of being in an operating state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is prepared, and as the multiple operation effective state, a first multiple operation effective state and a second multiple operation effective state having different generation conditions are prepared. The first multiple-times valid operation state occurs as an effective operation state in which at least an imitation image display imitating a first operation means of the operation means is displayed, and it is possible to play so as to create a situation in which a first-side post-operation output sound is in an output state in response to detection that the first operation means has entered an operation state in which it is being operated, and the first operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not being operated; and the second multiple-times valid operation state occurs as an effective operation state in which at least an imitation image display imitating a second operation means of the operation means is displayed, and a second-side post-operation output sound is in an output state in response to detection that the second operation means has entered an operation state in which it is being operated, and the second operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not being operated. In the first multiple operation effective state, when the first operation means is in a non-operated state and the first-side post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the first-side post-operation output sound can be changed by this trigger, but when the first operation means is in an operated state and the first-side post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the first-side post-operation output sound can be prevented from being changed by this trigger, so that the first operation means in a non-operated state can be more actively encouraged to be put in an operated state. Note that the "first operation means", "second operation means", "first multiple operation effective state", and "second multiple operation effective state" in the configuration 16-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 16-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means or valid operating state as the "first operating means", "second operating means", "first multiple operation valid state", or "second multiple operation valid state" in another configuration, or it may mean a different operating means or valid operating state. Also, it may mean the same "operating means" or "valid operating state" as an operating means or valid operating state with a different name in another configuration.

In this case, as described later, in a situation in which the first operating means is in a non-operated state and the first-side post-operation output sound is in an output state, as the first-side post-operation output sound, when the first operating means is provisionally changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, only a sound that causes a change in the output state is output as the first-side post-operation output sound (although a process that causes a change in the sound in the output state is possible), but if the first operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the first operating means is in an operating state and the first-side post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the first-side post-operation output sound may not change as a result (processing that causes a change in the sound in the output state is not possible). With this configuration, it is possible to more actively encourage the first operating means in a non-operated state to be changed to an operated state.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, particularly in a situation in which the second operating means is in a non-operating state and the second-side post-operating output sound is in an output state, only a sound that does not cause a change in the output state when the second operating means is provisionally changed from a non-operating state to an operating state is output as the second-side post-operating output sound (a sound that may cause a change in the output state is not output as the second-side post-operating output sound), but when the second operating means is in an operating state and the second-side post-operating output sound is in an output state, the second operating means may be changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and the type of sound output as the second-side post-operating output sound may or may not be changed. According to such a configuration, when the second multiple-operating effective state occurs, it is expected that the tension will be maintained in a favorable manner, since it is possible that a sound that does not cause a change is output when the second operating means is in a non-operating state while more actively encouraging the second operating means in the operating state to be changed to a non-operating state.

[Configuration 17-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation change corresponding to the detection can be executed, and an imitation image display imitating the operation means can be displayed. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation change can be started to be executed when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times is prepared, and as one of the post-operation changes, a post-operation output sound can be output, and as the multiple operation effective state, a first multiple operation effective state and a second multiple operation effective state, each of which has a different generation condition, are prepared. The second multiple operation valid state can be ended when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state before a predetermined end timing arrives, whereas the first multiple operation valid state cannot be ended when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operated state before a predetermined end timing arrives. In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state, if the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed when this happens, but if the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the specific operation means is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be prevented from being changed when this happens. This makes it possible to more actively encourage the specific operation means in a non-operated state to be changed into an operated state. Note that the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" in configuration 17-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of configuration 17-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means or valid operation state as the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation means or valid operation states. Furthermore, they may mean the same "operation means" or "valid operation state" as an operation means or valid operation state with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be changed as a result of this. However, when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the specific operation means is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change as a result of this. In the second multiple operation valid state, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change as a result of this. However, when the specific operation means is in the operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may or may not change as a result of this, depending on the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound. With this configuration, when a "first multiple operation valid state" that is not terminated by a player's operation occurs, it is possible to more actively urge the player to change the specific operation means that is in a non-operated state to an operated state. Also, when a "second multiple operation valid state" that may be terminated by a player's operation occurs, it is possible to more actively urge the player to change the specific operation means that is in an operated state to a non-operated state, but since there is a possibility that a sound that does not cause a change in response to the non-operated state is output, it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

In the configuration 17-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be realized by replacing it with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

[Configuration 18-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state is prepared in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and as the multiple operation effective state, a first multiple operation effective state and a second multiple operation effective state, which have different generation conditions from each other, are prepared. In addition, in both the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state, it is possible to play the game so as to make the situation appear in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state where it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and when the specific operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state while the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound can be either a fixed time or a fixed time, so that the performance when the operation of the specific operation means is ended is complicated, and it is expected that the sense of tension is preferably maintained. Note that the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" in the configuration 18-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 18-A. Therefore, the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" in the other configurations may mean the same operation means or operation valid state, or may mean different operation means or operation valid states. In addition, it may mean the same "operation means" or "operation valid state" as the operation means or operation valid state with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as described later, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state in the first multiple operation valid state, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound may be fixed or indefinite depending on the type of post-operation output sound in the output state, but when the specific operation means is in an operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from the non-operated state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound may be indefinite. According to such a configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state, it is difficult to estimate how much time will pass after the post-operation output sound in the output state is ended when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operated state, and it is possible to suitably suggest that, for example, the performance that is noteworthy is low in a situation where the specific operation means has just been changed from the operating state to the non-operated state. In contrast, when a specific operating means is changed from a non-operating state to an operating state, the amount of time that will elapse after the specific operating means is put into an operating state until the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end is both possible and difficult to predict. For example, while it is possible to suggest that the performance after the specific operating means is put into an operating state again may be worth paying attention to, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end after a certain amount of time has elapsed after the specific operating means is put into an operating state again, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the operating state is put into a state again will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, particularly in the second multiple operation valid state, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound is indefinite, but when the specific operation means is in an operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from the non-operated state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound may be fixed or indefinite depending on the type of post-operation output sound in the output state. According to such a configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state, it is difficult to predict how much time will elapse after the post-operation output sound in the output state is ended when the specific operation means is changed from a non-operated state to an operating state, and it is possible to suitably suggest that the performance that requires attention is low in a situation where the specific operation means has just been changed from a non-operated state to an operating state. In contrast, when a specific operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, the time that will elapse after the specific operating means is changed to the non-operating state for the post-operation output sound in the output state to end is both predictable and difficult to predict. For example, while it is possible to suggest that the performance after the specific operating means is changed to the non-operating state may be worth paying attention to, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound in the output state will end a certain amount of time after the non-operating state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to the non-operating state will be appropriately maintained.

[Configuration 19-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and an imitation image display imitating the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, as an imitation image operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display is in an operating state, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of being in an operating state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is prepared, and as the operating means, a first multiple operation effective state and a second multiple operation effective state having different occurrence conditions are prepared as the multiple operation effective state. The first multiple operation valid state occurs as an operation valid state in which at least an imitation image display imitating the first operation means is displayed, and it is possible to play so as to make appear a situation in which a first-side post-operation output sound is in an output state in response to detection that the first operation means has entered an operation state in which it is being operated, and the first operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not being operated; the second multiple operation valid state occurs as an operation valid state in which at least an imitation image display imitating the second operation means is displayed, and a second-side post-operation output sound is in an output state in response to detection that the second operation means has entered an operation state in which it is being operated, and the second operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not being operated. In addition to making it possible to play a game so as to make a certain situation appear, when the first operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state in a state in which the first-side post-operation output sound is in an output state and the first operating means is in a non-operated state in the first multiple-operation effective state, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the first-side post-operation output sound is set to be a fixed time, so that in a state in which the first-side post-operation output sound is in an output state and the first operating means is in a non-operated state, it is possible to provide a performance regarding the timing at which the first operating means should be operated, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained. Note that the "first operating means", "second operating means", "first multiple-operation effective state", and "second multiple-operation effective state" in the configuration 19-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 19-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means or valid operating state as the "first operating means", "second operating means", "first multiple operation valid state", or "second multiple operation valid state" in another configuration, or it may mean a different operating means or valid operating state. Also, it may mean the same "operating means" or "valid operating state" as an operating means or valid operating state with a different name in another configuration.

In this case, as described later, in the second multiple operation valid state, when the second operation means is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state while the second side post-operation output sound is in an output state and the second operation means is in a non-operated state, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the second side post-operation output sound may be indefinite (without being treated as a fixed time). With this configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the operation state when the second operation means is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state before the post-operation output sound in the output state ends, and it is possible to suitably suggest, for example, that there is little noteworthy performance in a situation where the second operation means has just been changed from a non-operated state to an operated state.

Also, as will be described later, in this case, particularly in the first multiple operation valid state, when the first operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the first side post-operation output sound is in an output state and the first operating means is in a non-operated state, the time from when the first operating means changes from an operated state to when the output state of the first side post-operation output sound is terminated can be treated as a fixed time, but when the first operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the first side post-operation output sound is in an output state and the first operating means is in an operated state, the time from when the first operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state to when the output state of the first side post-operation output sound is terminated may be indefinite (not treated as a fixed time). According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound that is in an output state when the first operating means is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state can be estimated as to how much time will elapse after the operation state is reached before it ends, which preferably suggests, for example, that there is noteworthy dramatic effect even in a situation where the first operating means is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state shortly thereafter. In contrast, the post-operation output sound that is in an output state when the first operating means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state can be estimated as to how much time will elapse after the non-operated state before it ends, which preferably suggests, for example, that there is little noteworthy dramatic effect in a situation where the first operating means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state shortly thereafter.

Also, as will be described later, in the second multiple operation valid state, if the second operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the second side post-operation output sound is in an output state and the second operating means is in a non-operated state, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the second side post-operation output sound is indefinite, but if the second operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the second side post-operation output sound is in an output state and the second operating means is in an operated state, the time from the non-operated state to the end of the output state of the second side post-operation output sound may be fixed or indefinite depending on the type of second side post-operation output sound in the output state. According to this configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state, when the second operating means is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, it is difficult to guess how much time will elapse after the operation state for the post-operation output sound in the output state to end, and it can be suitably suggested that, for example, the performance worth noting is low in a situation where the second operating means is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state soon after, whereas when the second operating means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, it is possible to guess how much time will elapse after the non-operated state for the post-operation output sound in the output state to end, and it is difficult to guess. For example, while suggesting that the performance worth noting after the second operating means is changed to a non-operated state, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound in the output state will end after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the non-operated state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to the non-operated state will be suitably maintained.

[Configuration 20-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is prepared, and as the multiple operation effective state, a first multiple operation effective state, a second multiple operation effective state, and a third multiple operation effective state are prepared, and in all of these operation effective states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple-times operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state. At that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to an indefinite time (not treated as a fixed time). In the second multiple-times operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state. In the third multiple-times operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state. It is possible to change the output state of the post-operation output sound by setting the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated to a certain time, and in the multiple operation effective state, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the specific operation means is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed by this trigger. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suitably suggest that there is a noteworthy performance even in a situation where the specific operation means is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state again soon after. Note that the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation effective state", "second multiple operation effective state", and "third multiple operation effective state" in the configuration 20-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 20-A. Therefore, the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation effective state", "second multiple operation effective state", and "third multiple operation effective state" in other configurations may mean the same operation means or operation effective state, or may mean different operation means or operation effective states. In addition, it may mean the same "operation means" or "operation valid state" as the operation means or operation valid state with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, among the multiple operation effective states in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operating state, in the first multiple operation effective state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time, if the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is not changed as a result of this, whereas in the third multiple operation effective state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is a fixed time In the second multiple operation effective state in which the specific operation means is merely maintained in an operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be changed as a result of the change, and in the second multiple operation effective state in which the specific operation means is merely maintained in an operating state and the post-operation output sound in response to the detection is not generated multiple times, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be changed as a result of the change. According to this configuration, in both cases where the player performs a re-operation in the second multiple operation effective state in which the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is not enabled and where the player performs a re-operation in the third multiple operation effective state in which the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is enabled at regular intervals, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be changed as a result of the change, making it difficult to recognize whether or not the situation is subject to the enablement of the auto-repeated-hit function, and thus it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained. In contrast, in the first multiple operation enabled state, if the specific operation means is operated again while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, it is possible to recognize that the so-called auto-hit function is not enabled (second multiple operation enabled state), that is, that the player is not in a situation in which the auto-hit function is enabled, and thus, while making it difficult to recognize whether the auto-hit function is enabled by not enabling the so-called auto-hit function at regular intervals, the decrease in interest in the game due to the configuration can be suppressed.

In the configuration 20-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are all the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be realized by replacing it with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

[Configuration 21-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is prepared, and as the multiple operation effective state, a first multiple operation effective state and a second multiple operation effective state are prepared, and in both of these operation effective states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operated state, but at this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to an indefinite time, and in the second multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operated state, but at this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated can be treated as a constant time, and in the multiple-operation valid state, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed using this as a trigger, so that, for example, it can be suitably suggested that there is noteworthy performance even in a situation where it has only been a short time since the specific operation means was changed from a non-operated state to an operated state again. Note that the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" in configuration 21-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of configuration 21-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means or valid operation state as the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation means or valid operation states. Furthermore, they may mean the same "operation means" or "valid operation state" as an operation means or valid operation state with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time, when the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is not changed as a result of this, and in the second multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is a fixed time, when the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may or may not be changed as a result of this, depending on the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound. According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled at regular intervals, even if the specific operation means is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change as a result of this, and coupled with the fact that the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to an indefinite time, it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained by making it difficult for the player to recognize whether the operation by the player has been properly accepted. In contrast, in the second multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled at regular intervals, while suggesting that the performance after the specific operation means is changed back to the operated state may be worth paying attention to, the post-operation output sound in the output state is not necessarily changed as a result of the operation being changed back to the operated state, so that the tension when the operation state is changed back to the operated state is also expected to be appropriately maintained.

In the configuration 21-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be realized by replacing it with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

[Configuration 22-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state is prepared in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and as the multiple operation effective state, a first multiple operation effective state, a second multiple operation effective state, and a third multiple operation effective state are prepared, and in all of these operation effective states, it is possible to play so as to create a situation in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, but at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to an indefinite time, in the second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can not be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, and in the third multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, but at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated can be processed to be a fixed time, so that the range of performance is expanded and it is expected that the interest in the game is appropriately maintained. Note that the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", and "third multiple operation valid state" in the configuration 22-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 22-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means or valid operation state as the "specific operation means" or the "first valid operation state", "second valid operation state", or "third valid operation state" according to another configuration, or it may mean a different operation means or valid operation state. Also, it may mean the same "operation means" or "valid operation state" as an operation means or valid operation state with a different name according to another configuration.

In this case, as will be described later, among the multiple operation effective states in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, in the first multiple operation effective state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to an indefinite time, when the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state and the specific operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound is indefinite (not treated as a fixed time), whereas in the third multiple operation effective state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to a fixed time, when the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, In the second multiple operation enabled state in which the specific operation means is merely maintained in an operation state and the post-operation output sound is not enabled to be generated multiple times in response to the detection, when the specific operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state while the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is ended can be treated as a fixed time rather than an indefinite time. In the second multiple operation enabled state in which the specific operation means is merely maintained in an operation state and the post-operation output sound is not enabled to be generated multiple times in response to the detection, when the specific operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state while the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is ended can be treated as a fixed time. According to this configuration, in both cases where the player performs a re-operation in the second multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled and where the player performs a re-operation in the third multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled at regular intervals, the time from when the player performs a re-operation to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is constant, so that it is expected that the player will find it difficult to recognize whether or not the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled and that the sense of tension will be maintained in a good condition. In contrast, in the first multiple operation enabled state, if the specific operation means is re-operated in a state in which the post-operation output sound is in an output state, it is possible to recognize that the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled (second multiple operation enabled state), that is, that the player is in a state in which the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled. Therefore, while making it difficult to recognize whether or not the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled by not enabling the so-called auto-repeated tapping function at regular intervals, the decrease in interest in the game due to the configuration can be suppressed.

In the configuration 22-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are all the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be realized by replacing it with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

[Configuration 23-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is prepared, and as the multiple operation effective state, a first multiple operation effective state and a second multiple operation effective state are prepared, and in both of these operation effective states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, but at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to an indefinite time, and in the second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, but at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated can be processed to be a fixed time, so that the range of performance is expanded and it is expected that the interest in the game is preferably maintained. Note that the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" in the configuration 23-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 23-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means or operation valid state as the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation means or operation valid states. In addition, it may mean the same "operation means" or "operation valid state" as the operation means or operation valid state with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time, when the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated may be indefinite, and in the second multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is a fixed time, when the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated may be indefinite or fixed. According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled at regular intervals, even if the specific operation means is changed from a non-operated state to an operating state again, the time from the operating state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is indefinite, and coupled with the fact that the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time, it is expected that the tension will be preferably maintained by making it difficult for the player to recognize whether the operation by the player has been properly accepted. In contrast, in the second multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled at regular intervals, it is expected that the tension when the specific operation means is changed back to the operating state will be preferably maintained by making it so that the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end at a fixed time after the specific operation means is changed back to the operating state.

In the configuration 23-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

[Configuration 24-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is prepared as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can start to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state. As the multiple operation valid state, there are provided an indefinitely-changed multiple operation valid state in which a post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated can be processed to be an indefinite time, and a fixed-changed multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated can be processed to be a fixed time.The fixed-changed multiple operation valid state is configured to be generated as a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives, so that it is possible to suggest the possibility that the state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state, through the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated. The "specific operation means", "indefinite-change multiple operation valid state", and "fixed-change multiple operation valid state" in the configuration 24-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 24-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means or effective operation state as the "specific operation means", "indefinite-change multiple operation valid state", and "fixed-change multiple operation valid state" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation means or effective operation states. They may also mean the same "operation means" or "effective operation state" as the operation means or effective operation state with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, the indefinitely-changing multiple operation valid state can occur as a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the state can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before a predetermined end timing arrives, whereas the fixed-changing multiple operation valid state can occur either as a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the state can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before a predetermined end timing arrives, or as a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the state can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before a predetermined end timing arrives. According to this configuration, if the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated when the specific operation means is maintained in an operating state is set to an indefinite time, it is possible to suitably suggest that the state is in a situation where the detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state is triggered by the fact that the specific operation means is in an operating state. On the other hand, if the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated when the specific operation means is maintained in an operating state is set to a fixed time, it is difficult to recognize whether the state is in a situation where the detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state is triggered by the fact that the specific operation means is in an operating state, or whether the state is in a situation where the detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state is triggered by the fact that the specific operation means is in an operating state, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

In the configuration 24-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the indefinite-change multiple operation enabled state and the fixed-change multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be realized by replacing it with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 25-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is prepared, and as the multiple operation effective state, a first multiple operation effective state, a second multiple operation effective state, and a third multiple operation effective state are prepared, and in all of these operation effective states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time. In the second multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can not be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state. In the third multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always shorter than the specific time. In the multiple-operation valid state, when the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the specific operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed using this as a trigger, so that it can be suggested that the performance after the specific operation means is again in an operation state may be worth paying attention to. In addition, the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", "third multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" in the configuration 25-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 25-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means, operation valid state, and time as the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", "third multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" in other configurations, or may mean different operation means, operation valid state, and time. In addition, they may mean the same "operation means", "operation valid state", and "time" as the operation means, operation valid state, and time with different names in other configurations. In addition, "time equal to or less than a specific time" includes "specific time", and as "time longer than a specific time" and "time equal to or less than a specific time", only one time may be prepared, or multiple different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the multiple operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operating state, in the first multiple operation effective state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time, when the specific operation means changes from a non-operating state to the operating state under a situation in which the specific operation means is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is not changed as a result of this, and in the third multiple operation effective state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always shorter than the specific time. In the operation-enabled state, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be changed triggered by this. In the second multiple-operation-enabled state, in which the specific operation means is merely maintained in an operated state and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is not generated multiple times, if the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be changed triggered by this.

According to this configuration, in both cases where the player performs a re-operation in the second multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-hit function is not enabled, and where the player performs a re-operation in the third multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-hit function is enabled and a new post-operation output is started only after a specific time or less has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, the post-operation output sound that was in an output state is changed by the re-operation by the player, so that it is expected that the player will find it difficult to recognize whether or not the situation is a target for the activation of the auto-hit function and that the sense of tension will be maintained in a good condition. In contrast, in the first multiple operation enabled state, if the specific operation means is re-operated in a situation in which the post-operation output sound is in an output state, it is possible to recognize that the so-called auto-hit function is not enabled (second multiple operation enabled state), that is, that the situation is a target for the activation of the auto-hit function. Therefore, the so-called auto-hit function is not enabled unless a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, making it difficult to recognize that the auto-hit function is enabled, while suppressing a decrease in interest in the game due to the configuration.

In the configuration 25-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are all the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

[Configuration 26-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is prepared, and as the multiple operation effective state, a first multiple operation effective state and a second multiple operation effective state are prepared, and in both of these operation effective states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. The first multiple operation effective state is such that the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operating state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time, and the second multiple operation effective state is such that the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operating state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always shorter than the specific time, and in the multiple operation effective state, when the specific operation means is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the specific operation means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed by this as a trigger, so that it is possible to suggest the possibility that the performance after the specific operation means is again in an operating state is worth paying attention to. Note that the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation effective state", "second multiple operation effective state", and "specific time" in the configuration 26-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 26-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means, valid operation state, or time as the "specific operation means,""first multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state," or "specific time" according to another configuration, or it may mean a different operation means, valid operation state, or time. Also, it may mean the same "operation means,""valid operation state," or "time" as an operation means, valid operation state, or time with a different name according to another configuration. Furthermore, "a time equal to or less than a specific time" includes a "specific time," and as "a time longer than a specific time" and "a time equal to or less than a specific time," only one time may be prepared, or multiple different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than a specific time, when the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is not changed as a result of this, and in the second multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always shorter than the specific time, when the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may or may not be changed as a result of this, depending on the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound. According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state in which a new post-operation output is not started by the so-called auto-tap function unless a time longer than a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, even if the specific operation means is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change as a result of this, and coupled with the fact that the so-called auto-tap function is not activated unless a time longer than a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained by making it difficult for the player to recognize whether the operation by the player has been properly accepted. In contrast, in the second multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-tap function is activated and a new post-operation output is started only when a time shorter than a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, it is expected that the tension when the specific operation means is changed back to the operation state will be appropriately maintained by not necessarily changing the post-operation output sound in the output state as a result of the specific operation means being changed back to the operation state, while suggesting that the performance after the specific operation means is changed back to the operation state may be worth paying attention to.

In the configuration 26-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be realized by replacing it with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

[Configuration 27-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state is prepared in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and as the multiple operation effective state, a first multiple operation effective state, a second multiple operation effective state, and a third multiple operation effective state are prepared, and in all of these operation effective states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. The first multiple operation valid state is such that the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time, the second multiple operation valid state is such that the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, and the third multiple operation valid state is such that the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always shorter than the specific time, so that the range of performance is expanded and it can be expected that the interest in the game is appropriately maintained. Note that the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", "third multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" in the configuration 27-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 27-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means, valid operation state, or time as the "specific operation means,""first multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state,""third multiple operation valid state," or "specific time" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation means, valid operation state, or time. Also, it may mean the same "operation means,""valid operation state," or "time" as an operation means, valid operation state, or time with a different name according to other configurations. Furthermore, "a time equal to or less than a specific time" includes a "specific time," and as "a time longer than a specific time" and "a time equal to or less than a specific time," only one time may be prepared, or multiple different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, among the multiple operation effective states in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, in the first multiple operation effective state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than a specific time, when the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state and the higher-level specific operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound is indefinite (it is not treated as a fixed time), whereas in the third multiple operation effective state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always less than the specific time, when the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state and the higher-level specific operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is ended after the operation state is In the second multiple-operation valid state in which the specific operation means is merely maintained in an operation state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is not enabled to be generated multiple times, when the specific operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state while the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the operation state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated can be treated as a fixed time, and in the second multiple-operation valid state in which the specific operation means is merely maintained in an operation state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is not enabled to be generated multiple times, when the specific operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state while the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the operation state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated can be treated as a fixed time. With this configuration, in both cases, the time from when the player performs a second operation to when the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is constant between when the player performs a second operation in the second multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated operation function is not enabled, and when the player performs a second operation in the third multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated operation function is enabled and a new post-operation output is started only after a specific time or less has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, making it difficult to recognize whether or not the player is in a situation in which the auto-repeated operation function is enabled, and it is expected that tension will be maintained in an optimal manner. In contrast, in the first multiple operation enabled state, if the specific operation means is operated again while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, it is possible to recognize that the so-called auto-hit function is not enabled (second multiple operation enabled state), that is, that the player is not in a situation in which the auto-hit function is enabled, and therefore the auto-hit function is not enabled until a time longer than a specific time has passed since the start of the post-operation output, making it difficult to recognize that the auto-hit function is enabled, while at the same time preventing a decline in interest in the game due to the configuration.

In the configuration 27-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are all the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

[Configuration 28-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is prepared, and as the multiple operation effective state, a first multiple operation effective state and a second multiple operation effective state are prepared, and in both of these operation effective states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. The first multiple operation valid state is such that the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, and the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time, and the second multiple operation valid state is such that the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, and the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always shorter than the specific time, so that the range of performance is widened and it is expected that the interest in the game is appropriately maintained. Note that the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" in the configuration 28-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 28-A. Therefore, the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" in the other configurations may mean the same operation means, operation valid state, and time, or may mean different operation means, operation valid state, and time. Also, it may mean the same "operation means", "operation valid state", or "time" as the operation means, the operation valid state, or the time with different names according to other configurations. Furthermore, "a time equal to or less than a specific time" includes "a specific time", and as "a time longer than a specific time" and "a time equal to or less than a specific time", only one time may be prepared, or multiple different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled unless a time longer than a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state and the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound may be indefinite (not processed as a fixed time), and in the second multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled and a new post-operation output is started simply by the passage of a specific time or less since the start of the previous post-operation output, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state and the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound may be indefinite (not processed as a fixed time) or may be a fixed time (can be processed as a fixed time). According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-tap function is not enabled until a time longer than a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, even if the specific operation means is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state again, the time from the operation state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is indefinite, and coupled with the fact that the so-called auto-tap function is not enabled until a time longer than a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained by making it difficult for the player to recognize whether the operation by the player has been properly accepted. In contrast, in the second multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-tap function is enabled and a new post-operation output is started only after a time shorter than a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, it is expected that the tension when the specific operation means is changed back to the operation state will be appropriately maintained by making it so that the performance after the specific operation means is changed back to the operation state may be worth paying attention to, while the post-operation output sound in the output state is not necessarily terminated within a certain time after the operation state is changed back to the operation state.

In the configuration 28-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be realized by replacing it with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

[Configuration 29-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, a multiple operation effective state is provided in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times as an operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state. As the multiple operation valid state, there are provided a long-change multiple operation valid state in which a post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than a specific time, and a short-change multiple operation valid state in which a post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always equal to or shorter than the specific time.The short-change multiple operation valid state can be generated as a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives, so that it is possible to suggest the possibility that the state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state, through the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated. In addition, the "specific operation means", "long-change multiple operation valid state", "short-change multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" in the configuration 29-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 29-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means, operation valid state, and time as the "specific operation means", "long-change multiple operation valid state", "short-change multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation means, operation valid state, and time. In addition, they may mean the same "operation means", "operation valid state", and "time" as the operation means, operation valid state, and time with different names in other configurations. In addition, "time equal to or less than a specific time" includes "specific time", and as "time longer than a specific time" and "time equal to or less than a specific time", only one time may be prepared, or multiple different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, the long-change multiple operation valid state may occur as a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the state may be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives, and the short-change multiple operation valid state may occur as a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the state may not be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives, or as a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the state may be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives. With this configuration, if the auto-tap function is enabled but the auto-tap function is not enabled until a time longer than a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, it is possible to suitably suggest that the state may be terminated when the detection of the specific operation means being in an operating state is triggered. On the other hand, if the auto-tap function is enabled and a new post-operation output is started only when a time shorter than a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, it is difficult to recognize whether the state may be terminated when the detection of the specific operation means being in an operating state is triggered, or whether the state will not be terminated when the detection of the specific operation means being in an operating state is triggered, which is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

In the configuration 29-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the short-change multiple operation enabled state and the long-change multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be realized by replacing it with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 30-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and an imitation image display imitating the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, a multiple operation valid state is prepared as an imitation image operation valid state in which the operation state can be detected multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times when the operation means that is the subject of the imitation image display is detected to be in an operation state, and the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the multiple operation valid state, and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed to appear in time units equal to or less than a predetermined time and cases in which the periodic change is displayed to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. As the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state are prepared, and in all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the operation means that is the subject of the imitation image display is in a non-operational state where it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple-operation valid state, the periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operated state; in the second multiple-operation valid state, the periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, but the post-operation output sound in response to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operated state; and in the third multiple-operation valid state, the periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operated state. The operation means can be displayed so as to appear in the following time units, and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state of the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display, and in the multiple operation valid state, when the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state under such a situation that the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed by this as a trigger, so that it is possible to suggest the possibility that the performance after the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display is again in an operation state is worth paying attention to. Note that the "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", "third multiple operation valid state", and "predetermined time" in the configuration 30-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 30-A. Therefore, the "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", "third multiple operation valid state", and "predetermined time" in the other configurations may mean the same operation valid state or time, or may mean different operation valid states or times. Also, it may mean a different name for an effective operation state according to another configuration, an "effective operation state" that is the same as the time, or "time." Also, for the "time equal to or shorter than a predetermined time" and the "time longer than a predetermined time," only one time may be prepared, or multiple different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operating state, in the first multiple operation enabled state in which the periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, when the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state and the operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is not changed as a result of this, and in the third multiple operation enabled state in which the periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed to appear in units of time shorter than the predetermined time, When a certain operating means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed triggered by this, and the periodic change in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, but in the second multiple operation enabled state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display in the operated state, if the operating means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed triggered by this.

According to this configuration, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled for the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display, the first multiple operation enabled state is configured in the same way as the second multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled in that the periodic changes in the imitation image display appear in time units longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time. This makes it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation is subject to the auto-repeated tapping function, thereby maintaining a sense of tension. However, if a second operation is performed while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, unlike the second multiple operation enabled state, this does not cause the output state of the post-operation output sound to change as a result. Therefore, it is expected that the presence or absence of such a change at the time of second operation will appropriately suggest that the situation is one in which the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, thereby suppressing a decline in interest in the game. In addition, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled for the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display, the third multiple operation enabled state is configured in the same way as the second multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled in that if another operation is performed while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed as a result. This makes it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation is subject to the auto-repeated tapping function, and maintains the sense of tension, but unlike the second multiple operation enabled state, the periodic changes in the imitation image display can be displayed in time units of less than the above-mentioned predetermined time. Therefore, it is expected that the length of such periodic changes in the imitation image display will appropriately suggest that the situation is one in which the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, thereby suppressing a decline in interest in the game.

[Configuration 31-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and an imitation image display imitating the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, a multiple operation valid state is prepared as an imitation image operation valid state in which the operation state is permitted to be detected multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times when it is detected that the operation means that is the subject of the imitation image display is in an operation state, and the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the multiple operation valid state, and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units equal to or less than a predetermined time and cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. A first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state are prepared as the multiple operation valid state, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the operation means that is the subject of the imitation image display is in a non-operational state where it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple operation valid state, the periodic change in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, so that a post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display in an operated state, and in the second multiple operation valid state, the periodic change in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in time units shorter than the predetermined time, so that a post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display in an operated state.In the multiple operation valid state, when the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed as a result of this, so that it can be suggested that the performance after the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display is again in an operated state may be worth paying attention to. The "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", and "predetermined time" in the configuration 31-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 31-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operation valid state or time as the "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", and "predetermined time" in other configurations, or may mean a different operation valid state or time. They may also mean the same "operation valid state" or "time" as the operation valid state or time with a different name in other configurations. Furthermore, for the "time less than the predetermined time" and the "time longer than the predetermined time", only one time may be prepared, or multiple different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation enabled state, the periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound in response to the above-mentioned detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operating state. If the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, this is used as a trigger to prevent the output state of the post-operation output sound from changing. In the second multiple operation enabled state, In the first multiple operation valid state, in which the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display in an operation state, and when the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the operation means changes from a non-operation state to an operation state under the circumstances that the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may or may not change depending on the type of sound output as the post-operation output sound. According to such a configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state, in which the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, even if the operation means is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change as a result of this, so that it is expected that the player will have difficulty in recognizing whether the operation by the player has been properly accepted, and the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained. In contrast, in the second multiple operation valid state in which the periodic change in the mock image display appears in units of time less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, it is intended to suggest that the performance that will emerge after the specific operating means is put into an operating state again may be worth paying attention to, while the post-operation output sound in the output state is not necessarily changed in response to the return to the operating state, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the operating state is returned to.

[Configuration 32-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and an imitation image display simulating the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, as an imitation image operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display is in an operating state, a multiple operation effective state in which detection of being in an operating state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is prepared, and the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the multiple operation effective state, and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units of less than a predetermined time and cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and the multiple operation effective state includes a first multiple operation effective state, a second multiple operation effective state, and a third multiple operation effective state. A first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state are provided, and in any of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the operating means that is the subject of the imitation image display is in a non-operated state where it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. As the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state are provided, and in any of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the operating means that is the subject of the imitation image display is in a non-operated state where it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. Furthermore, in the first multiple-operation valid state, the periodic change in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and a post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display in an operated state; in the second multiple-operation valid state, the periodic change in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, but a post-operation output sound in response to the detection can not be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display in an operated state; and in the third multiple-operation valid state, the periodic change in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in time units equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, and a post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display in an operated state. This is expected to broaden the range of presentation and to maintain interest in the game in a favorable manner. The "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", "third multiple operation valid state", and "predetermined time" in the configuration 32-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 32-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operation valid state and time as the "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", and "predetermined time" in other configurations, or may mean a different operation valid state and time. They may also mean the same "operation valid state" or "time" as the operation valid state or time with a different name in the other configuration. In addition, for the "time less than the predetermined time" and the "time longer than the predetermined time", only one time may be prepared, or multiple different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, among the multiple operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operating state, in the first multiple operation valid state in which the periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, when the operation means that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state and the operation means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is indefinite (not processed as a fixed time), whereas in the third multiple operation valid state in which the periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed to appear in units of time shorter than the predetermined time, In the second multiple operation enabled state, in which the operation means that is the subject of the simulated image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the operation means changes to the operated state to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated can be treated as a fixed time (not an indefinite time), and in the second multiple operation enabled state, in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can not be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the subject of the simulated image display in an operated state, if the operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when the operation means changes to an operated state to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated can be treated as a fixed time (not an indefinite time).

According to this configuration, among the multiple operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display in an operating state, the first multiple operation valid state, like the second multiple operation valid state, makes it difficult to recognize whether it is subject to the auto-repeated tapping function in that the periodic changes in the imitation image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, thereby maintaining a sense of tension. However, if a second operation is performed while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, unlike the second multiple operation valid state, the time from the second operation to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound is indefinite (not treated as a fixed time). Therefore, by checking the output state of the post-operation output sound at the time of such a second operation, it can be expected that the player's interest in playing the game will be suppressed by appropriately suggesting that the player is in a situation in which the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled. In addition, among the multiple operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound in response to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display in an operating state, the third multiple operation valid state is similar to the second multiple operation valid state in that, if a second operation is performed while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from the second operation to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound can be treated as a fixed time (not an indefinite time) so that it is difficult to recognize whether it is subject to the auto-repeated hits function and a sense of tension is maintained. However, unlike the second multiple operation valid state, the periodic change in the imitation image display can be displayed to appear in time units of less than the above-mentioned predetermined time. Therefore, it is expected that the length of such periodic change in the imitation image display will appropriately suggest that the situation is subject to the activation of the auto-repeated hits function, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[Configuration 33-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and an imitation image display imitating the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, a multiple operation valid state is provided as an imitation image operation valid state in which the operation state can be detected multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times when the operation means that is the subject of the imitation image display is detected to be in an operation state, and the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the multiple operation valid state, and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed to appear in time units equal to or less than a predetermined time and cases in which the periodic change is displayed to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. A first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state are provided as the multiple operation valid state, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the operation means that is the subject of the imitation image display is in a non-operational state where it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state, the periodic change of the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above-mentioned detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display in the operation state, and in the second multiple operation valid state, the periodic change of the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit shorter than the above-mentioned predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above-mentioned detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display in the operation state, so that the range of performance is expanded and it is expected that the interest in the game is preferably maintained. Note that the "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", and "predetermined time" in the configuration 33-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 33-A. Therefore, the "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", and "predetermined time" in the other configurations may mean the same operation valid state or time, or may mean a different operation valid state or time. Also, it may mean a different name for an effective operation state according to another configuration, an "effective operation state" that is the same as the time, or "time." Also, for the "time equal to or shorter than a predetermined time" and the "time longer than a predetermined time," only one time may be prepared, or multiple different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operating state, in the first multiple operation enabled state in which the periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, when the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the operating state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is In contrast to the second multiple operation valid state in which the periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed in units of time less than the predetermined time, when the operating means that is the subject of the simulated image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state and the operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the operating state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound ends may be treated as a fixed time, or the time may be treated as an indefinite time without being treated as a fixed time.

According to this configuration, among the multiple operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display in the operation state, in the first multiple operation valid state in which the periodic change in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, even if the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state again, the time from the operation state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is indefinite, so it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained by making it difficult for the player to recognize whether the operation by the player has been properly accepted. In contrast, in the second multiple operation valid state in which the periodic change in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time shorter than the predetermined time, the possibility of a new performance appearing after the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display is changed back to the operation state is suggested, but the post-operation output sound in the output state is not necessarily terminated in a certain time after the operation state is changed back to the operation state, so that the tension when the operation state is changed back to the operation state is also expected to be appropriately maintained.

[Configuration 34-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and an imitation image display imitating the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the detection of an operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times as an imitation image operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can be started when it is detected that the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display is in an operation state. The imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the multiple operation valid state, and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units equal to or less than a predetermined time, and cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. Among the multiple operation valid states, in a multiple operation valid state in which a periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed so as to appear in time units equal to or less than the predetermined time, when the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display is maintained in an operation state, the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times with a fixed interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated, so that it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition. The "predetermined time" of the configuration 34-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 34-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" of another configuration, or it may mean a different time. It may also mean the same "time" as a differently named time of another configuration. Furthermore, for the "time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time" and the "time longer than the predetermined time", only one time may be prepared, or multiple different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic change in the imitation image display appears in units of time less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, when the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display is maintained in an operating state, the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times with a fixed interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated (there is no case in which the post-operation output sound cannot be output multiple times simply by maintaining the operating state), and in the multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic change in the imitation image display appears in units of time less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times with a fixed interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated (there is no case in which the post-operation output sound cannot be output multiple times just by maintaining the operating state), and In the multiple operation enabled state of the type displayed as shown in, when the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operating state, there may be both cases where the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times with an indefinite interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated (as an output sound based on separate data read out based on detection) (without the case where the post-operation output sound is output multiple times with a fixed interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated) and cases where the post-operation output sound cannot be output multiple times just by maintaining the operating state.

According to this configuration, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of time less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, it is possible to suitably suggest that the so-called auto-hit function is to be enabled. In addition, when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, a post-acceptance output sound is output at regular intervals, making it easier to feel that the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, and it is expected that interest in playing will be suitably maintained. In contrast, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, in addition to there being both cases where the so-called auto-hit function is enabled and cases where it is not enabled, even if the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, a post-acceptance output sound is only output at irregular intervals, making it difficult to feel that the auto-hit function is enabled, it is expected that tension will be suitably maintained.

[Configuration 35-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and an imitation image display simulating the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, as an imitation image operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display is in an operating state, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of being in an operating state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is prepared, and the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the multiple operation effective state, and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units of less than a predetermined time, and cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and in the multiple operation effective state, Among the above states, in the multiple operation enabled state of the type in which the periodic change of the simulated image display appears in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times by simply maintaining the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display in the operating state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to be equal to or less than the specific time. Therefore, when the periodic change of the simulated image display is relatively fast, it can be suitably suggested that the state is "under a situation in which the post-operation output sound can be continuously output at relatively short intervals by simply maintaining the operating means in the operating state". Note that the "predetermined time" and "specific time" in the configuration 35-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 35-A. Therefore, they may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" and "specific time" in other configurations, or they may mean different times. They may also mean the same "time" as the time with a different name in other configurations. Also, for the "time equal to or less than the predetermined time", "time longer than the predetermined time", and "time equal to or less than the specific time", only one time may be prepared, or multiple different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, among the multiple operation enabled states, in a "multiple operation enabled state of a type in which a periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed so as to appear in time units less than the predetermined time", a post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to be less than the specific time, whereas in a "multiple operation enabled state of a type in which a periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time", there are both cases in which a post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state of the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display, and cases in which the post-operation output sound cannot be output multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state, but in cases in which a post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated may always be set to be longer than the specific time. According to this configuration, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of time less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, it is possible to suitably suggest that the so-called auto-hit function is to be enabled. In addition, when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, new post-acceptance output sounds are output one after another within a relatively short time, making it easy to feel that the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, and it is expected that interest in playing will be suitably maintained. On the other hand, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, in addition to there being both cases where the so-called auto-hit function is enabled and cases where it is not enabled, even if the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, new post-acceptance output sounds are not output until a relatively long time has passed, making it difficult to feel that the auto-hit function is enabled, it is expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

[Configuration 36-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state in which it is being operated, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and an imitation image display simulating the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, as an imitation image operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display is in an operating state, a multiple operation effective state is prepared in which the detection of being in an operating state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the multiple operation effective state, and there are cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units of less than a predetermined time, and cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and in the multiple operation effective state, the periodic change of the imitation image display can be displayed so that a periodic change of the imitation image display appears in the multiple operation effective state. In the multiple operation valid state of the type in which the periodic change of the mock image display is displayed in a time unit equal to or less than the predetermined time, if the periodic change of the mock image display is displayed in a time unit longer than the predetermined time in the multiple operation valid state, the state can be terminated when the operation means that is the target of the mock image display is detected to be in an operating state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the state can be terminated when the operation means is detected to be in an operating state through the length of time required for the periodic change of the mock image display. Note that the "predetermined time" in the configuration 36-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 36-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in the other configurations, or it may mean a different time. It may also mean the same "time" as the time of another name in the other configurations. In addition, only one time may be prepared for the "time equal to or less than the predetermined time" and the "time longer than the predetermined time", or multiple different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed so as to appear in units of time equal to or less than the above-mentioned predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state, it is assumed that a multiple operation enabled state of a type that may be terminated when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing is occurring ((a multiple operation enabled state of a type that is not terminated is not occurring), and when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed so as to appear in units of time equal to or more than the above-mentioned predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state, it is assumed that a multiple operation enabled state of a type that may be terminated when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing is occurring, and It may be possible to have both a situation where the state is in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the state is not terminated and a situation where a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the state is not terminated. According to this configuration, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of time equal to or less than the above-mentioned predetermined time in the multiple operation valid state, it is possible to suitably suggest that the state is in a situation in which the state can be terminated in response to the detection that the operating means that is the target of the model image display is in an operating state, whereas when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time in the multiple operation valid state, it is difficult to recognize whether the state is in a situation in which the state can be terminated in response to the detection that the operating means that is the target of the model image display is in an operating state, or whether the state is in a situation in which the state cannot be terminated in response to the detection that the operating means that is the target of the model image display is in an operating state, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

[Configuration 37-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation change can be executed in response to the detection of the operation state. In this regard, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times is prepared as an operation effective state in which the post-operation change can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state. Among the multiple operation valid states, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation change corresponding to the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state cannot be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state, but when the specific operation means changes from the operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated, a corresponding post-operation display is not displayed. On the other hand, in a specific type of multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation change corresponding to the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, A post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on detection that the means is in an operating state, and when the specific operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-operation display can be displayed, and in a specific type of multiple operation effective state, the specific operation means is in a non-operating state and the non-operation display is displayed in response to detection that the non-operating state has been entered, and a situation in which the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is maintained in an output state can be generated by the player's play, so that the range of performance when the specific operation means is maintained in an operating state is expanded, and it can be expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained. Note that the "specific operation means,""predetermined type of multiple operation effective state," and "specific type of multiple operation effective state" in the configuration 37-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 37-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means or effective operation state as the "specific operation means", "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state", or "specific type of multiple operation valid state" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation means or effective operation state. It may also mean the same "operation means" or "effective operation state" as the operation means or effective operation state with a different name according to other configurations. Furthermore, the "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state" means "a multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation change in response to the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state cannot be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state", but as such a multiple operation valid state, multiple states with different occurrence conditions may be prepared, or only one state may be prepared. Similarly, the "specific type of multiple operation valid state" means "a multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation change in response to the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state", but as such a multiple operation valid state, multiple states with different occurrence conditions may be prepared, or only one state may be prepared.

In this case, as described later, in the specific type of multiple operation enabled state, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state, the non-operated display in response to the detection of the non-operated state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes maintains an output state, when it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the detection may be used as a trigger to cause a change to the non-operated display that had been in a displayed state, but the post-operation output sound that had been in an output state may not be changed and may be maintained in its output state. According to this configuration, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state, the non-operated display in response to the detection of the non-operated state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes maintains an output state, if the player performs another operation while the post-operation change is being executed, some of the previous post-operation changes are continued to be executed, but some are changed, so that it is possible to suitably give a sense of expectation that a new performance will start.

In the configuration 37-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state and the specific type of multiple operation enabled state are all "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 38-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation change can be executed in response to the detection of the operation state. In this regard, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times is prepared as an operation effective state in which the post-operation change can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state. Among the multiple operation valid states, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state in which the state is not terminated in response to detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before a predetermined end timing arrives, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state, but when the specific operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated, a post-non-operation display corresponding to this is not displayed. On the other hand, in a specific type of multiple operation valid state in which the state can be terminated in response to detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before a predetermined end timing arrives, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state. A post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state, and when the specific operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-operation display can be displayed, and in a specific type of multiple operation valid state, a situation in which the specific operation means is in a non-operating state and a post-non-operation display is displayed in response to detection that the specific operation means has changed to the non-operating state, and a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, maintains an output state can be caused to appear by a player's play, so that when the situation appears, it can be expected to suitably suggest that the situation is one in which the detection that the specific operation means is in the operating state is triggered by the situation. Note that the "specific operation means", "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state", and "specific type of multiple operation valid state" in the configuration 38-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 38-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means or effective operation state as the "specific operation means", "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state", or "specific type of multiple operation valid state" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation means or effective operation state. It may also mean the same "operation means" or "effective operation state" as the operation means or effective operation state with a different name according to other configurations. Furthermore, the "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state" means "a multiple operation valid state in which the state is not terminated when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives", but as such a multiple operation valid state, multiple states with different occurrence conditions may be prepared, or only one state may be prepared. Similarly, the "specific type of multiple operation valid state" means "a multiple operation valid state in which the state may be terminated when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives", but as such a multiple operation valid state, multiple states with different occurrence conditions may be prepared, or only one state may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the specific type of multiple operation enabled state, the specific operation means is in a non-operated state, and the non-operated display is displayed in response to the detection of the non-operated state, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes is maintained in an output state. When it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the detection may be used as a trigger to cause a change to the non-operated display that was in a displayed state until then, but the post-operation output sound that was in an output state until then may not be changed and its output state may be maintained. With this configuration, when the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, some of the aspects of the post-operation change until then are continued, but some are changed, so that it is possible to appropriately create a sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In the configuration 38-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state and the specific type of multiple operation enabled state are all "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 39-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation change can be executed in response to the detection of the operation state. In this regard, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times is prepared as an operation effective state in which the post-operation change can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state. Among the multiple operation effective states, in a predetermined type of multiple operation effective state in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times with a fixed interval until a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly output when the specific operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state, but even if the specific operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, there are at least some cases in which a corresponding post-operation display is not displayed. On the other hand, in a predetermined type of multiple operation effective state in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times with a fixed interval until a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly output when the specific operation means is maintained in an operating state, In the multiple operation valid state, not only is it possible to display a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state, but also when it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, a post-non-operation display corresponding to the detection that the non-operating state has been detected can be displayed, and in the specific type of multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is in a non-operating state, and the post-non-operation display corresponding to the detection that the non-operating state has been detected is displayed, and a situation in which the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is maintained in an output state can be generated by the player's play, so that the range of presentations when the specific operation means is maintained in an operating state is expanded, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained. Note that the "specific operation means", "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state", and "specific type of multiple operation valid state" in the configuration 39-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 39-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means or effective operation state as the "specific operation means", "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state", or "specific type of multiple operation valid state" according to another configuration, or it may mean a different operation means or effective operation state. It may also mean the same "operation means" or "effective operation state" as an operation means or effective operation state with a different name according to another configuration. Furthermore, the "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state" means "a multiple operation valid state in which a post-operation change can be executed multiple times with a fixed interval until a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly output when the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state", but as such a multiple operation valid state, multiple states with different occurrence conditions may be prepared, or only one may be prepared. Similarly, the "specific type of multiple operation valid state" refers to "a multiple operation valid state in which, when a specific operation means is maintained in an operation state, a post-operation change can be executed multiple times with an indefinite interval until a post-operation output sound, which is one of the above-mentioned post-operation changes, is newly started to be output." However, as such a multiple operation valid state, multiple states with different occurrence conditions may be prepared, or only one may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the specific type of multiple operation enabled state, the specific operation means is in a non-operated state, and the non-operated display is displayed in response to the detection of the non-operated state, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes is maintained in an output state. When it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the detection may be used as a trigger to cause a change to the non-operated display that was in a displayed state until then, but the post-operation output sound that was in an output state until then may not be changed and its output state may be maintained. With this configuration, when the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, some of the previous post-operation change aspects are continued, but some are changed, so that it is possible to appropriately create a sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In the configuration 39-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state and the specific type of multiple operation enabled state are all "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 40-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which it is being operated, a post-operation change can be executed in response to the detection of the operation state. In this regard, a multiple operation effective state in which the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times is prepared as an operation effective state in which the post-operation change can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state. Among the multiple operation valid states, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times such that the interval until a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, starts to be newly output is always a specific time or less when the specific operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state, but even if the specific operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, there are at least some cases in which a post-operation display corresponding to this is not displayed, whereas in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times such that the interval until a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, starts to be newly output is always a time longer than the specific time when the specific operation means is maintained in an operating state. In the specific type of multiple operation valid state, not only is a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, made displayable based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state, but also when it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, a post-non-operation display in response to detection that the non-operating state has been detected can be displayed, and in the specific type of multiple operation valid state, a situation in which the specific operation means is in a non-operating state and the post-non-operation display in response to detection that the non-operating state has been detected is displayed, and the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is maintained in an output state can be generated by the player's play, so that the range of presentations when the specific operation means is maintained in an operating state is expanded, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained. Note that the "specific operation means", "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state", "specific type of multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" in the configuration 40-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 40-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means, operation effective state, or time as the "specific operation means", "predetermined type of multiple operation effective state", "specific type of multiple operation effective state", or "particular time" according to another configuration, or it may mean a different operation means, operation effective state, or time. It may also mean the same "operation means", "operation effective state", or "time" as the operation means, operation effective state, or time with a different name according to another configuration. Furthermore, the "predetermined type of multiple operation effective state" means "a multiple operation effective state in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in such a manner that the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly output is always equal to or shorter than a specific time when the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state", but as such a multiple operation effective state, multiple states with different occurrence conditions may be prepared, or only one may be prepared. Similarly, the "specific type of multiple operation valid state" refers to a "multiple operation valid state in which, when a specific operation means is maintained in the operation state, the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in such a manner that the interval until a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly output is always longer than the specific time", and as such a multiple operation valid state, multiple states with different occurrence conditions may be prepared, or only one may be prepared. Furthermore, the "time equal to or shorter than the specific time" naturally includes the "specific time", and as the "time longer than the specific time" and the "time equal to or shorter than the specific time", only one time may be prepared, or multiple different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the specific type of multiple operation enabled state, the specific operation means is in a non-operated state, and the non-operated display is displayed in response to the detection of the non-operated state, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes is maintained in an output state. When it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the detection may be used as a trigger to cause a change to the non-operated display that was in a displayed state until then, but the post-operation output sound that was in an output state until then may not be changed and its output state may be maintained. With this configuration, when the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, some of the previous post-operation change aspects are continued, but some are changed, so that it is possible to appropriately create a sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In the configuration 40-A, it is assumed that the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state and the specific type of multiple operation enabled state are all "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Incidentally, although some of the above configurations 1-A to 40-A tout the effect of "suggesting that the presentation is worth noting," it is not essential that the presentation actually has something worth noting. It is expected that interest in the game will be maintained simply by providing a presentation that suggests "a worthwhile presentation may be executed."

[Other configurations]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when an acceptance allowance period (operation allowance state) occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the operation unit, an operation-related display related to the occurrence of the acceptance allowance period (for example, a model image display modeled on the operation receiving unit, or an image displayed with the occurrence of a valid period (ally character, enemy character, etc.)) is displayed. For example, the model image display may be displayed as an integrated model image display (see FIG. 144) integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery. It is desirable to display such an integrated model image display in both the acceptance allowance period (operation allowance state) that occurs when the pattern performance progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, and the acceptance allowance period (operation allowance state) that occurs as a result of a notice judgment in a variation pattern that does not develop into an SP reach, and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression acceptance performance and the high expectation suppression acceptance performance.

Incidentally, such operation-related displays are as explained with reference to Figures 144 and 145, or as other examples or modified examples thereof, so details will be omitted, but for example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decorative image.
In addition, as the operation-related display, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) with different expectation levels are prepared, and the display is configured to be one of these modes. However, such a model image display does not necessarily have to be displayed as an integrated model image display integrated with the border decoration image.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when an acceptance allowance period (operation allowance state) occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the operation unit, an operation-related sound (such as an acceptance allowance sound) related to the occurrence of the acceptance allowance period may be audibly output, thereby making it difficult to forget to operate. Here, the "acceptance allowance sound" refers to a sound that, when the output of the sound starts, will necessarily cause an acceptance allowance period (acceptance period) to occur while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or a sound that is already in a state where an acceptance allowance period (acceptance period) has occurred. In other words, the "acceptance allowance sound" suggests that an operation acceptance state has been entered, or will be entered, and can be said to be a sound that is not output in a situation where a performance that has nothing to do with the acceptance allowance period (acceptance period) is being performed.

As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 provides multiple acceptance allowable periods (operation allowable states) with different types (e.g., conversation notice, cut-in notice, moving object notice, etc.) of post-acceptance changes (e.g., post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, etc.) that appear when an acceptance is made. Each acceptance allowable period (operation allowable state) has a respective occurrence condition, and when any one of these occurrence conditions is met, an acceptance allowable period (operation allowable state) of a type corresponding to the occurrence condition that has been met can occur.

Also, as mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with multiple operation units (e.g., operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) that receive operation by the player. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example is capable of generating an acceptance period (multiple operation acceptance period) during which not only one operation unit, but several (multiple) operation units are permitted to be in an operation acceptance state. However, this configuration is not essential.

The details of the pachinko machine 1 including the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-A" to "Configuration 40-A" will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, when realizing these inventions, it is only necessary to select and partially include only the configurations necessary to obtain the desired action and effect from each of the configurations described below, and it is not necessary to include all of them. For example, depending on the type (type of invention) of the problem to be solved (target action and effect), it may be a machine in which the acceptance period (multiple operation acceptance period) during which several (multiple) operation units are acceptable as being in an operation acceptance state (acceptance period during which only one operation unit is acceptable as being in an operation acceptance state) does not necessarily occur, it may not have an operation unit that is acceptable for accepting multiple operations, it may not have an operation unit that is acceptable for accepting only one operation, or it may not have an automatic button function or an auto-repeated function that is not enabled. Also, with reference to FIG. 145, it is not necessary to include each of the above-mentioned acceptance periods, or it may be a machine in which only the configurations necessary to obtain the desired action and effect are appropriately selected and partially included from each of the configurations. In other words, for each of the configurations described in the specification below, when it is desired to obtain an additional effect in addition to any one of the above "Configuration 1-A" to "Configuration 40-A," it is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the corresponding configuration.

First, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "1A reception permissible state" as the reception permissible period (operation permissible state). FIG. 146 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "1A reception permissible state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "condition 1A" as the occurrence condition and an operation is performed by the player. FIG. 147 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "1A reception permissible state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the "1A reception permissible state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "1A fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the "1A fluctuation pattern". After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 1A fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 1A fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "1A fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 146(c), during the execution period of the variable performance related to the "1A variable pattern", based on the arrival of timing tAa2 when the 1A time has elapsed since the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ was started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 1A"), the above-mentioned 1A reception permissible state (valid period) in which "operation acceptance to the 1A operation unit regarding changes after 1A acceptance (such as the 1A performance status indication display JA1, the 1A continuous tapping display HA1, and the output sounds SA1, SB1 after 1A acceptance)" is permitted can be generated (the situation shown in FIG. 148(a)).

Here, in the 1A reception permission state according to this embodiment, the "1A operation unit" for which operation reception is permitted is set as the operation button 410, and multiple operations are permitted to be received until the 1A reception permission state is terminated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this presentation example, as shown in Figures 146(b) to (e), when the 1A reception allowable state occurs, a model image display MG-A1 modeling the object to be operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 1A operation unit), a message display MA1 related to the operation of the object to be operated (here, the "operation button 410" as the 1A operation unit), and a status suggestion display JA1 suggesting the status of the operation are displayed at the arrival of timing tAa1 before the 1A reception allowable state occurs (before operation reception for the 1A operation unit is allowed).

However, the model image display MG-A1, message display MA1, and situation suggestion display JA1 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the first A reception permission state occurs, and may be displayed at the same time as the first A reception permission state occurs, or slightly after the occurrence. In particular, the situation suggestion display JA1 may not be displayed until the first operation reception is made to the first A operation unit in the first A reception permission state, that is, it may be realized as appearing and being displayed in response to the reception of an operation to the first A operation unit. Furthermore, the timing at which the model image display MG-A1 is displayed and the timing at which the message display MA1 is displayed may be different from each other. For example, the message display MA1 may be displayed before the model image display MG-A1 is displayed.

After the mock image display MG-A1, message display MA1, and status indication display JA1 start to be displayed, they will continue to be displayed at least until the 1A reception permission state is terminated, regardless of the operation state of the 1A operation unit.

Here, the "mock image display MG-A1" corresponding to the 1A reception permission state can selectively use either the "first color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" or the "second color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme, and is displayed using a color scheme determined based on the results of, for example, a performance determination.

In addition, the "imitation image display MG-A1" corresponding to the 1A reception permission state is such that when a moving image in which a part simulating the "operation receiving part" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 144(β) to (σ)" is considered as one periodic change, this periodic change appears repeatedly in a form that requires a predetermined period 1A time. As will be described later, this period 1A time is set to a shorter time (short cycle) than the periodic times used in many of the other reception permission states, so in this 1A reception permission state, the "operation receiving part" is depicted moving quickly up and down within its movable range.

Also, the 1A reception permission state is originally intended to continue until timing tAa3 arrives when there is no operation reception to the 1A operation unit, as shown in FIG. 147(b), and to end based on the arrival of timing tAa3. Therefore, while the 1A reception permission state continues, a gauge image (in this example, an image in the model image display MG-A1) indicating the remaining time until timing tAa3 arrives, at which the 1A reception permission state ends, is depicted as decreasing with the passage of time, but this depiction is not necessarily required.

When the "mock image display MG-A1" corresponding to the 1A reception permissible state is started to be displayed prior to timing tAa2 when the 1A reception permissible state occurs, it is desirable to wait until timing tAa2 before starting the periodic changes and the changes in the gauge image. In other words, in this case, the "mock image display MG-A1" corresponding to the 1A reception permissible state is displayed in a manner that maintains the appearance shown in FIG. 144 (α) until timing tAa2 arrives.

In addition, in the 1A reception acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figs. 146(c), (d) and 148(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-A1, a message display related to the reception of operations for the 1A operation unit (here, operation button 410) (here, message display MA1 displayed as "Defeat the bat! Press the button repeatedly!!").

Furthermore, in the 1A reception allowance state in this example, as shown in Figures 146 (e) and 148 (a), a situation suggestion display JA1 indicating the status of operation in the 1A reception allowance state is displayed, which includes an ally character corresponding to the type of the 1A reception allowance state (here, ally character YS-A1), an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 1A reception allowance state (here, enemy character BOSS-A1 depicted as a giant bat), and a gauge image HP-A1 indicating their remaining HP gauge. In the first A reception-permitted state, the expectation of a big win can be suggested through the presentation of whether or not the ally character YS-A1 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A1 by receiving multiple operations on the first A operation unit (whether or not the gauge image HP-A1 can be set to 0). In other words, each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the first A operation unit (here, the operation button 410), a presentation can be executed in which the ally character YS-A1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A1. Note that in this example, the ally character YS-A1, the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image HP-A1 are displayed as the situation suggestion display JA1, but it is not necessary to display all of these displays. As long as at least one of the ally character YS-A1, the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image HP-A1 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation situation.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 146, it is assumed that the first operation is received for the "1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAa2-A1 in the 1A reception permitted state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 148(b)).

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAa2-A1 in the 1A acceptance permitted state, a "change after 1A acceptance (post-1A acceptance performance)" in response to the operation acceptance is generated, as shown in Figures 146(f) and (g) (the performance situation shown in Figure 148(b)).

More specifically, when an operation is accepted for the "first A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAa2-A1 in the first A acceptance permitted state, as shown in Figs. 146(f) and (g), a "first A post-acceptance output sound" in response to the operation acceptance for the "first A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output as a change after first A acceptance, and a "first A post-acceptance display" in response to the operation acceptance for the "first A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

That is, when a single operation is accepted on the "1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 1A acceptance state, as the above-mentioned "display after 1A acceptance", as shown in FIG. 148(b), a single animated display is displayed in which the "ally character YS-A1" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A1" with ice magic (such as a smoke effect or the generation of ice magic). However, as will be described later, in the 1A acceptance state, based on the result of the performance judgment when the operation is accepted, there is a possibility that the "enemy character BOSS-A1" will be injured, the strength of the ice magic will increase, or the remaining HP gauge of the gauge image HP-A1 will decrease (the performance content may progress depending on the performance judgment, etc.). When the performance content has progressed in this way, the state when the operation is accepted at the first A operation unit (here, the state in which the "ally character YS-A1" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A1" with ice-based magic) will appear as one video display changed to the progressed performance content (see Figs. 146(e) and (f) and Fig. 148(f)). After the performance content has progressed in this way, as long as the first A acceptance permission state continues, the degree of progress of the performance content will not be returned to the state before the progress. Therefore, even when an operation acceptance is again made at the first A operation unit after the one video display changed to the progressed performance content has ended, the state when the operation is accepted at the first A operation unit (here, the state in which the "ally character YS-A1" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A1" with ice-based magic) can appear as one video display changed to the progressed performance content. Each time the performance progresses, it may be suggested that there is a high probability (expectation) of hitting the jackpot.

In this example, when an operation is accepted once for the "1A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 1A acceptance permitted state, in addition to the above-mentioned "1A acceptance display", the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 can be output as the above-mentioned "1A acceptance output sound" as shown in FIG. 146(g). The first post-acceptance output sound SA1 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which the ally character YS-A1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (such as smoke effect or generation of ice magic)" that appears as the above-mentioned "1A acceptance display". In addition, at this time, as described later, there is a possibility that the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 may be further output as the "1A acceptance output sound". The second post-acceptance output sound SB1 in this example is output when the performance content of the above-mentioned "1A acceptance display" progresses. Note that, here, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 is realized as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; in short, it only needs to be able to suggest that an operation by the player has been accepted, and that the first A operating unit is being maintained in an operating state when the auto-repeated function is enabled.

In this way, in the 1A reception permitted state, each time an operation is received from the "1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)," a depiction of "ally character YS-A1" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A1" and associated sound effects are displayed; that is, multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A1" reduce the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A1" (the presentation progresses), and when the HP reaches 0 as a result, it means that "enemy character BOSS-A1" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests high expectations. However, in this case, if the HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-A1" cannot be defeated, it suggests low expectations.

This example assumes that the operation by the player (operation state of the 1A operation unit) that begins at timing tAa2-A1 is continued until timing tAa2-A2, as shown in FIG. 146(a).

In this regard, the 1A reception-permitted state is classified as a "multiple operation-enabled state (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated-tap function is enabled) in which the corresponding post-reception change (e.g., post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, post-reception role operation, etc.) is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the operation unit (1A operation unit) in the operation state." Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 146(a), during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 (the period in which the 1A operation unit is maintained in the operation state), operation is accepted multiple times for the 1A operation unit, and each time, a post-reception change (e.g., post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, post-reception role operation, etc.) corresponding to the operation acceptance is executed.

As described above, when an operation is accepted once for the 1A operation unit in the 1A acceptance acceptance state, the post-1A acceptance display is a display (one animation display) of the ally character YS-A1 attacking the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (smoke effects, the generation of ice magic, etc.), as shown in FIG. 148(b). Therefore, from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, this "one animation display" is first played multiple times, the number of times that an operation was accepted.

As mentioned above, when an operation is accepted once for the 1A operation unit in the 1A acceptance permitted state, the post-1A acceptance output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to "the manner in which the ally character YS-A1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (such as a smoke effect or the generation of ice magic)" that appears as the "post-1A acceptance display." Therefore, in the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, in addition to the "one video display," a sound effect corresponding to such a "one video display" is played multiple times, the number of times the operation was accepted.

However, in the 1A acceptance permitted state, when the operation unit (1A operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-tap function is enabled, the ally character YS-A1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (one animation display) and the sound effect corresponding to this "one animation display" (sound output after 1A acceptance) are newly executed at regular intervals (predetermined intervals) as the above-mentioned post-acceptance change.

In addition, in the 1A acceptance permitted state, when the operation unit (1A operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-tap function is enabled, the ally character YS-A1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (one animation display) and the sound effect (1A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the "one animation display" can be executed multiple times as the post-acceptance change, but in this case, the interval until the post-acceptance change is newly started in response to the detection (the interval from the start of execution of the previous post-acceptance change to the start of execution of the next post-acceptance change) is always set to a specific time or less.

In this case, from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 146, the auto-hit function will start a new "one animation display" at regular intervals, in which ally character YS-A1 attacks enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic, and this repeated display of "one animation display" is represented in the figure as "hit display HA1a."

Similarly, in the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 146, the sound effect (first A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" will start to be output anew at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the figure as the "first post-acceptance output sound SA1a."

In this regard, in the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 146, although multiple operations are accepted by the auto-tap function, it is assumed that the performance content corresponding to the 1A acceptance acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, during this period, neither the "status indication display JA1 (see FIG. 146(e))" which indicates the status of the operation in the 1A reception-permitted state nor the "second post-reception output sound (see FIG. 146(h))" which indicates the status of the operation in the 1A reception-permitted state will change or be started as a result of the operation reception.

In this configuration, during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 146, the "ice magic attack" and "smoke effect" shown in FIG. 148 are displayed and the corresponding sound effects are output repeatedly at regular intervals by the auto-hit function (hit display HA1a, first post-acceptance output sound SA1a), but no change occurs in the "situation suggestion display JA1 (see FIG. 146(e))". This makes it possible to confirm that the same presentation content as when the player performed the operation, or that the presentation content did not progress, without performing monotonous repetitive operations, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

As for the "situation suggestion display JA1 (see FIG. 146(e))," at least one of the ally character YS-A1, the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image HP-A1 may be changed in response to the operation reception. In this case, however, it is necessary to change to a different state from the "state when the performance content progresses," and when the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 (the period during which the 1A operation unit is maintained in the operating state) ends without the performance content progressing (when the operation is interrupted), this will be the trigger for returning to the "display state before the operation." As described above, the "situation suggestion display JA1 (see FIG. 146(e))" of the ally character YS-A1, the enemy character BOSS-A1, the gauge image HP-A1, etc. may not be displayed until the operation is received, and may be realized as appearing and displayed in response to the operation reception (until the effective period ends or for a predetermined period of time).

In addition, during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2, the "status suggestion display JA1 (see FIG. 146(e))" which suggests the status of the operation in the 1A reception-permitted state, and the "second post-reception output sound (see FIG. 146(h))" which suggests the status of the operation in the 1A reception-permitted state, do not change or start to be executed as a result of the operation reception, so it is possible to appropriately suggest that the performance content is not progressing.

However, when the rapid-fire display HA1a is being executed by this auto rapid-fire function (the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2), as shown in FIG. 148(b), the rapid-fire display HA1a will repeatedly show "ally character YS-A1 attacking enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (such as smoke effects or the generation of ice magic)" at regular intervals, which may make the "situation suggestion display JA1" less visible or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the status of the operation in the 1A acceptance permission state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of effects shown in Figures 146 and 148 are based on the assumption that the player temporarily suspends operation of the 1A operation unit at timing tAa2-A2 and disables the auto-repeat function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 1A reception-permitted state.

Here, in the 1A reception acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 146(f) and FIG. 148(c), even if the operation state of the 1A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tAa2-A2 and the auto-tap function is disabled, the tapping display HA1a, which had been in an active state until then, is not made invisible as a result of this. In other words, in this case, the tapping display HA1a will continue to be in an active state even after timing tAa2-A2 (even after the 1A operation unit becomes non-operated), for example, until the "one video display" that was in an active state is executed and displayed for a predetermined display time and is finished, or for a predetermined time from the non-operated state.

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 1A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-tap function is disabled, the tapping display HA1a, which had been in an active state until then, is not immediately made invisible, so it takes time for the operation status in the 1A reception-permitted state to become easy to recognize. This means that a large amount of the remaining time in the 1A reception-permitted state is consumed, so it is expected that a suitable sense of tension will be created in the act of temporarily interrupting the operation state of the 1A operation unit to more easily check the operation status in the 1A reception-permitted state.

In addition, in this example, if the operation of the 1A operation unit is interrupted while the rapid-hit display HA1a is displayed and the operation unit is put into a non-operated state, the time from the non-operated state to the time the rapid-hit display HA1a is made invisible is not set to a fixed time but is made indefinite.

With this configuration, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point in time when the operation state of the 1A operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, at which the rapid-fire display HA1a will be hidden and a state will appear in which the operation status in the 1A reception-permitting state can be easily recognized. This means that it is difficult to predict how much time will be consumed remaining in the 1A reception-permitting state, so it is expected that a suitable sense of tension will be created in the act of temporarily suspending the operation state of the 1A operation unit in order to more easily confirm the operation status in the 1A reception-permitting state.

In addition, in the 1A reception permission state, as shown in FIG. 146(g) and the like, the first post-reception output sound SA1a, which had been in an execution state up until that point, is not rendered inaudible when the operation state of the 1A operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operation state) at timing tAa2-A2 and the auto-hit function is disabled, just like the hit-in-progress display HA1a. In other words, in this case, the first post-reception output sound SA1a will continue to be output even after timing tAa2-A2 (even after the 1A operation unit becomes non-operational), until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an execution state is executed and output for a predetermined output time and is finished, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the first A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeat function is disabled, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a that had been in an active state until then is not immediately put into a non-output state. In this case, it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained because it appears as if the auto-repeat function is still active.

In addition, in this example, if the operation of the 1A operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operating state while the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is being output, the time from when the non-operating state is put into a non-output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point in time when the operation state of the 1A operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled, until the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is no longer output, i.e., until it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated tap function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 1A acceptance permitted state, and it is expected that this will create a suitable sense of tension in the act of temporarily suspending the operation state of the 1A operation unit.

In addition, in the first A reception permission state according to this embodiment, when the operation state of the first A operation unit is interrupted (set to a non-operation state) while the continuous hitting display HA1a and the first post-reception output sound SA1a are in the execution state, the timing at which the continuous hitting display HA1a is set to a non-display state and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA1a is set to a non-output state are set to be different from each other, as shown in Fig. 146 (f) and (g). In the figure, the timing at which the continuous hitting display HA1a is set to a non-display state is set to be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA1a is set to a non-output state, but the relationship may be set to be the opposite. Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned nature that the time until the display is set to a non-display or non-output state is indefinite, the timing at which the continuous hitting display HA1a is set to a non-display state may be set to be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA1a is set to a non-output state, or after that timing. It may also be possible for the timing to be the same.

According to such a configuration, in the first A reception permission state according to this embodiment, when the operation state of the first A operation unit is interrupted (when it is put into a non-operation state) while the continuous hitting display HA1a and the first post-reception output sound SA1a are in the execution state, as shown in Figures 146 (f), (g) and 148 (c), a situation will appear in which the continuous hitting display HA1a continues to be displayed and the first post-reception output sound SA1a continues to be output while the first A operation unit is in the non-operation state. However, after this, as time passes after the first A operation unit is put into the non-operation state, as shown in Figures 146 (f), (g) and 148 (d), the continuous continuous hitting display HA1a will be made invisible and the first post-reception output sound SA1a will be made non-output. This not only allows the player to easily recognize that the auto-hit function has been disabled, but also makes it easy to recognize the state of the status indication JA1 (here, state JA1a) that indicates the operating state, such as the ally character YS-A1, enemy character BOSS-A1, and gauge image HP-A1 (see FIG. 148(d)).

However, as mentioned above, in the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 146, although multiple operations are accepted by the auto-tap function, it is assumed that the performance content corresponding to the 1A acceptance permission state does not progress.

Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 148(d), the form of the situation suggesting display JA1 suggesting the operation status (here, form JA1a), such as the ally character YS-A1, enemy character BOSS-A1, and gauge image HP-A1, can be easily recognized, but these forms are the same as the state before the operation (see FIG. 148(a)), which suggests that the performance content has not progressed. Note that the form of the situation suggesting display JA1 suggesting the operation status, such as the ally character YS-A1, enemy character BOSS-A1, and gauge image HP-A1, need not necessarily be the same as the form before the operation (see FIG. 148(a)), as long as it can suggest that the performance content has not progressed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 146(a), it is assumed that the "1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operation state at timing tAa2-B1 in the 1A reception-permitting state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 148(e)).

In this example, if the "1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAa2-B1 within the 1A acceptance acceptance state, this will trigger a "change after 1A acceptance (post-1A acceptance performance)" in response to the operation acceptance to occur again, as shown in Figures 146(f) and (g) (the performance situation shown in Figure 148(e)).

More specifically, when an operation is accepted for the "first A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAa2-B1 in the first A acceptance permitted state, as shown in FIG. 146(f) and (g), a change after first A acceptance is caused in which the "first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" in response to the operation acceptance for the "first A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "first A post-acceptance display (one video display)" in response to the operation acceptance for the "first A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

In this example, it is assumed that even when operation on the 1A operation unit is started again at timing tAa2-B1 within the 1A reception permitted state, the performance content corresponding to the 1A reception permitted state has not progressed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 148(e), the post-1A reception change (post-1A reception display, post-1A reception sound, etc.) will start to be executed in the same manner as when the post-1A reception change was first started to be executed based on the operation reception on the 1A operation unit at timing tAa2-A1. The details of the performance are as described above, so a description will be omitted here.

In this regard, the examples of effects shown in Figures 146 and 148 assume that the operation by the player (operation state of the 1A operation unit) that begins at timing tAa2-B1 is also maintained until timing tAa2-B3, activating the auto-repeated function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 (the period during which the 1A operation unit is again maintained in the operating state), the 1A operation unit receives operations multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and each time, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception (for example, a post-acceptance display, a post-acceptance output sound, a post-acceptance light emission, a post-acceptance role operation, etc.) is executed.

And even during the "period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 (the period during which the first A operation unit is again maintained in the operating state)," the appearance when such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function (such as the repetitive tapping display HA1a and the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a) is the same as in the above-mentioned "period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2" (see FIG. 148(b)), unless the performance content progresses. Note that the details of the performance are as described above, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

However, in the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 146, it is assumed that the performance content corresponding to the 1A reception permission state progresses based on the operation reception at timing tAa2-B2 within that period, out of the multiple operations received by the auto-repeated-tap function (the performance situation shown in FIG. 148(f)).

Therefore, during the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 146, during the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B2, the "1st A post-acceptance change (1st A post-acceptance performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has not progressed, whereas during the period from timing tAa2-B2 to timing tAa2-B3, the "1st A post-acceptance change (1st A post-acceptance performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has progressed.

More specifically, at "timing tAa2-B2", which is the timing at which the performance content progresses during the period from timing tAa2-B2 to timing tAa2-B3, a display change is executed to change the state of the situation suggestion display JA1, which suggests the operation state, from the previously displayed "state JA1a" to a different "state JA1b" based on the operation reception to the 1A operation unit, as shown in Figure 146(e) and Figure 148(f). Here, as shown in Figure 148(f), the enemy character BOSS-A1 is changed to an injured state, the ice magic cast by ally character YS-A1 is changed to a state of higher strength, and the gauge image HP-A1 is changed to an state in which the remaining HP gauge has decreased. With this configuration, the change in the state of the situation suggestion display JA1 indicates that the performance content corresponding to the 1A reception permission state has progressed due to (the result of performance determination based on) the operation reception (by the auto-tap function) performed at timing tAa2-B2.

After the performance has progressed in this way, when one operation is accepted by the 1A operation unit, the "one animation display" will be displayed as the "1A post-acceptance display" in a manner in which the performance has progressed, such as "ally character YS-A1 uses stronger ice magic to attack the injured enemy character BOSS-A1," as shown in FIG. 148(f) as the "1A post-acceptance display."

In this example, once the performance content has progressed, the degree of progress of the performance content will not be returned to the state before the progress was made as long as the 1A reception-permitted state continues. Therefore, even when an operation is received again at the 1A operation unit after the one video display that has changed to the above-mentioned advanced performance content has ended, the state when the operation was received at the 1A operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-A1" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A1" with ice-based magic) will appear as one video display that has changed to the advanced performance content.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, during the period from timing tAa2-B2 onwards when the performance content has progressed, the "one video display" in which such a change in appearance has occurred will be played multiple times, the number of times that operations have been accepted by the auto-hit function.

In addition, even during the period after timing tAa2-B2 when the performance has progressed, the mode (one animation display) of ally character YS-A1 attacking enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic is set to be newly executed at regular intervals (predetermined intervals) as the above-mentioned post-acceptance change. Therefore, the above-mentioned "one animation display" of the performance when the performance has progressed is also newly executed at regular intervals by the auto-hit function, and the repeated display of the "one animation display" of such a progress mode is represented in the figure as "hit display HA1b".

In this way, in the performance display device 1600 of this example, when "timing tAa2-B2" arrives, which is the timing at which the performance content progresses, the state of the situation suggestion display JA1 changes from "state JA1a" to "state JA1b," and the state of the rapid-hitting display HA1 also changes from "state HA1a" to "state HA1b," as shown in Figures 146(e), (f) and 148(e), (f). From this point on, while the auto rapid-hitting function is enabled (timing tAa2-B2 to tAa2-B3), the situation suggestion display JA1 is displayed in "state JA1b," while the rapid-hitting display HA1 is executed in "state HA1b."

In this example, the state of the rapid-hit display HA1 is changed according to the progress of the presentation content, but it may not change according to the progress of the presentation content. In other words, even if the rapid-hit display HA1 is allowed to continue to run in the same state regardless of the progress of the presentation content, the player can check through the rapid-hit display HA1 that the auto rapid-hit function is enabled and the number of times (frequency) that operations are being accepted, and can also check the degree of progress of the presentation content through the state of the situation suggestion display JA1.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is accepted once for the "1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 1A acceptance permission state, in addition to the above-mentioned "1A acceptance post display", a first post-acceptance output sound can be output as the above-mentioned "1A acceptance post output sound" as shown in FIG. 146(g). As described above, as this "1A acceptance post output sound", in addition to the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display", a second post-acceptance output sound SB1 that suggests that the performance content corresponding to the 1A acceptance permission state has progressed can be output as shown in FIG. 146(h).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 146, when timing tAa2-B2 arrives, at which the performance content progresses, as shown in FIG. 146(h), the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 starts to be output in mode SB1b-1 based on the operation acceptance (performance progress) at timing tAa2-B2. This allows the player to recognize that the performance content has progressed through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound. It is desirable to set the output time of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 to be longer than that of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 in response to the operation acceptance.

However, in this example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display", is realized as being output in the same manner before and after the performance content progresses. Therefore, when timing tAa2-B2 arrives, which is the timing at which the performance content progresses, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 will begin to be output as a new "sound effect" based on the operation being accepted, but the manner in which it is output will be the same as when the operation was accepted before timing tAa2-B2 (the manner of execution is the same whether or not performance progress occurs at timing tAa2-B2).

In this case, the sound effect (first post-acceptance output sound SA1) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" will be newly output in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-tap function throughout the entire period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 when the so-called auto-tap function is enabled, and this repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the figure as the "first post-acceptance output sound SA1a." Note that the output manner of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a during this period is the same as in the above-mentioned "period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2," so a description thereof will be omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is not changed according to the progress of the performance content, but it may be changed according to the progress of the performance content.

However, even when the rapid-fire display HA1b is being executed by this auto rapid-fire function (the period from timing tAa2-B2 to timing tAa2-B3), as shown in FIG. 148(f), the rapid-fire display HA1b repeatedly shows "ally character YS-A1 attacking injured enemy character BOSS-A1 with powerful ice magic (smoke effect, generation of ice magic, etc.)" at regular intervals, which may make the "situation suggestion display JA1" difficult to see or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the status of the operation in the 1A acceptance permission state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of effects shown in Figures 146 and 148 are based on the assumption that the player again interrupts operation of the 1A operation unit at timing tAa2-B3 and disables the auto-repeat function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 1A reception-permitted state.

As described above, in the 1A reception permission state, even if the operation state of the 1A operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) and the auto-tap function is disabled while the 1A reception permission state continues, the tapping display HA1, which had been in an active state until then, is not made invisible as a result of this. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 146(f) and FIG. 148(g), even if the operation state of the 1A operation unit is interrupted at timing tAa2-B3, the tapping display HA1b will continue to be in an active state even after timing tAa2-B3 (even after the 1A operation unit becomes non-operated), for example, until the "one video display" that was in an active state is executed and displayed for a predetermined display time and is finished, or for a predetermined time from the non-operated state.

Also, similarly to the case of the rapid-hitting display HA1a, if the operation of the 1A operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operating state while the rapid-hitting display HA1b is being displayed, the time from the non-operating state to the time the rapid-hitting display HA1b is made invisible is not set to a fixed time but is made indefinite.

As described above, in the 1A reception permission state, even if the operation state of the 1A operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the 1A reception permission state continues and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled, the first post-reception output sound SA1a that was in an output state until then will not be put into a non-output state as a result. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 146(g) and the like, even if the operation state of the 1A operation unit is interrupted once at timing tAa2-B3, the first post-reception output sound SA1a will continue to be output after timing tAa2-B3 (even after the 1A operation unit becomes non-operated), until the above-mentioned "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an execution state is executed and output for a predetermined output time and is finished, or for a predetermined time from the non-operated state.

However, the timing tAa2-B3 shown in FIG. 146 is intended to be a case in which the operation state of the first A operation unit is interrupted while the second post-acceptance output sound SB1, which started to be output at the timing tAa2-B2, continues to be output.

In this regard, in the first A reception permitted state, like the first post-reception output sound SA1, the second post-reception output sound SB1 is not terminated (made inaudible) when the operation state of the first A operation unit is interrupted (made into a non-operated state). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 146(h) and the like, even if the operation state of the first A operation unit is interrupted at timing tAa2-B3, the second post-reception output sound SB1b-1 will continue to be output after timing tAa2-B3 (even after the first A operation unit becomes non-operated), until it is executed and output for a predetermined output time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operated state.

In this example, if the operation of the first A operation unit is interrupted while the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 is being output and the unit is put into a non-operated state, the time from when the non-operated state is entered until the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is put into a non-output state is not set to a fixed time but is made indefinite. Similarly, for the second post-acceptance output sound SB1, if the operation of the first A operation unit is interrupted while the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is being output and the unit is put into a non-operated state, the time from when the non-operated state is entered until the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is put into a non-output state is not set to a fixed time but is made indefinite.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point in time when the operation state of the 1A operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-tap function is disabled, before the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 become inaudible, i.e., when it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-tap function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 1A acceptance permitted state, and it is expected that this will create a suitable sense of tension in the act of temporarily suspending the operation state of the 1A operation unit.

In addition, in the first A reception permission state according to this embodiment, even if the operation state of the first A operation unit is interrupted (set to a non-operation state) while the continuous hitting display HA1b and the first post-reception output sound SA1a are in an execution state, the timing at which the continuous hitting display HA1b is set to a non-display state and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA1a is set to a non-output state are different from each other, as shown in Fig. 146 (f) and (g). In the figure, the timing at which the continuous hitting display HA1b is set to a non-display state is set to an earlier timing than the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA1a is set to a non-output state, but the relationship may be set to the opposite. Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned nature that the time until the display is set to a non-display or non-output state is indefinite, the timing at which the continuous hitting display HA1b is set to a non-display state may be set to an earlier timing than the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA1a is set to a non-output state, or may be set to an later timing than the timing. Also, the timings may be the same. This relationship between the rapid-hit display HA1b and the first post-reception output sound SA1a also holds true between the rapid-hit display HA1b and the second post-reception output sound SB1, and between the first post-reception output sound SA1a and the second post-reception output sound SB1, and the same can be said for other examples.

According to such a configuration, in the first A reception permission state according to this embodiment, when the operation state of the first A operation unit is interrupted (when the operation state is set to a non-operation state) while the continuous hitting display HA1b, the first post-reception output sound SA1a, and the second post-reception output sound SB1b-1 are each in an execution state, as shown in Figures 146 (f), (g), (h) and Figure 148 (g), a situation will appear in which the continuous hitting display HA1b continues to be displayed while the first A operation unit is set to a non-operation state, the first post-reception output sound SA1a continues to be output, and the second post-reception output sound SB1b-1 continues to be output. However, after this, as time passes since the first A operation unit is set to a non-operation state (time passes from timing tAa2-B3), the continuous continuous hitting display HA1b will be made non-displayed, as shown in Figures 146 (f) and 148 (h). This not only allows the player to easily recognize that the auto-hit function has been disabled, but also allows the player to easily recognize the state of the status indication JA1 (here, the state JA1b where the presentation content has progressed) that indicates the operating state, such as the ally character YS-A1, enemy character BOSS-A1, and gauge image HP-A1 (see Figure 148 (h)).

Also, normally, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 will both end (become inaudible) as the time elapses since the first A operating unit is put into a non-operated state (the time elapses from timing tAa2-B3).

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 146(a), it is assumed that the 1A operation unit is put into an operating state again at timing tAa2-C1 (the performance situation shown in FIG. 148(i)) after timing tAa2-B3 when the 1A operation unit is put into a non-operated state and when both the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 are in an audible state (before the output state is ended).

In this example, even if the "1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAa2-C1 within the 1A acceptance permitted state, this will again trigger a "change after 1A acceptance (post-1A acceptance performance)" in response to the operation acceptance, as shown in Figs. 146(f) and (g) (the performance situation shown in Fig. 148(i)), just as in the case of timing tAa2-B1 described above.

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "first A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAa2-C1 in the first A acceptance permitted state, as shown in FIG. 146(f) and (g), a change after first A acceptance is caused in which the "first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" in response to the operation acceptance for the "first A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "first A post-acceptance display (one video display)" in response to the operation acceptance for the "first A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

In this example, it is assumed that when operation is started again on the 1A operation unit at timing tAa2-C1 in the 1A reception permission state, the performance content corresponding to the 1A reception permission state does not progress from the state shown in FIG. 148(h) (first stage progress state). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 148(i), the execution of the 1A post-reception change (1A post-reception display, 1A post-reception output sound, etc.) will start in the same state as when the 1A post-reception change was first started based on the operation reception on the 1A operation unit at timing tAa-B2. The details of the performance are as described above, so a description will be omitted here.

However, as described above, this example assumes that the timing tAa2-C1 at which operation of the first A operation unit is started again occurs while both the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 are in an audible state.

In this regard, for the first post-acceptance output sound SA1, the previous output state is terminated based on the fact that operation on the first A operation unit is started again at timing tAa2-C1 (operation acceptance has been made), and a new output is started in response to the new operation acceptance. In contrast, for the second post-acceptance output sound SB1, the previous output state is continued without any change based on the fact that operation on the first A operation unit is started again at timing tAa2-C1 (operation acceptance has been made).

With this configuration, in the 1A reception permitted state, when an operation is received for the 1A operation unit that was previously in a non-operated state while the 1A post-reception output sound is being output in response to the operation reception, this will either cause the 1A post-reception output sound to end (first post-reception output sound SA1) or not end (second post-reception output sound SB1), so it is possible to provide an ideal sense of tension when the 1A operation unit that was previously in a non-operated state is put into an operating state again.

The repeated tap display HA1 may also be configured to continue to be displayed at timing tAa2-C1. In this case, when an operation is received from the first A operation unit that had not been operated up until that point, it is desirable to end the previous "one-shot video display" that was in progress and start a new display (one-shot video display) in response to the new operation reception instead.

The examples of effects shown in Figures 146 and 148 also assume that the operation by the player (operation state of the 1A operation unit) that begins at timing tAa2-C1 is maintained until timing tAa2-C2, activating the auto-repeated function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 (the period during which the 1A operation unit is again maintained in the operating state), the 1A operation unit receives operations multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and each time, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception (for example, a post-acceptance display, a post-acceptance output sound, a post-acceptance light emission, a post-acceptance role operation, etc.) is executed.

And even during the "period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 (the period during which the first A operation unit is again maintained in the operating state)", the appearance when such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function (such as the repetitive tapping display HA1b and the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a) is the same as in the above-mentioned "period from timing tAa2-B2 to timing tAa2-B3" (see FIG. 148(f)), unless there is any further progress in the presentation content. Note that the details of the presentation are as described above, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

However, in the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 in the example shown in FIG. 146, it is assumed that the performance content corresponding to the 1A reception permission state has progressed further (a second stage has progressed) based on the operation reception (result of the performance judgment, etc.) at timing tAa2-C2 within the period among the multiple operation receptions made by the auto-repeated tapping function (the performance situation shown in FIG. 148(j)). In particular, at timing tAa2-C2 in this example, it is assumed that the performance content corresponding to the 1A reception permission state has progressed to the final stage of the performance mode, and it is assumed that the 1A reception permission state will be terminated as a result of the operation reception at timing tAa2-C2 (see FIG. 146(a) and FIG. 148(j)).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 in the example shown in FIG. 146, the "1A post-reception change (1A post-reception performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a state in which the performance content has progressed only once (see FIG. 148(i)), whereas from timing tAa2-C2 onwards, the "1A post-reception change (1A post-reception performance)" is executed in a state in which the performance content has progressed further (final stage performance mode) while a state is set in which operation reception to the 1A operation unit is not permitted (see FIG. 148(j)).

More specifically, at timing tAa2-C2, as shown in FIG. 146(e) and FIG. 148(j), a display change is executed to change the state of the status suggestion display JA1, which indicates the status of the operation, from the previously displayed "state JA1b" to a different "state JA1c" based on the operation acceptance to the 1A operation unit. Here, as shown in FIG. 148(j), the enemy character BOSS-A1 is changed to a state in which it has been defeated, the ice magic of the ally character YS-A1 is changed to a state in which it is exploding around the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image HP-A1 is changed to a state in which the remaining HP gauge is further decreased (here, "0"). With this configuration, through the change in state of the status suggestion display JA1, it is suggested that the performance content corresponding to the 1A acceptance permission state has progressed due to (the result of the performance judgment based on) the operation acceptance (by the auto-repeated tapping function) made at timing tAa2-C2.

However, as described above, this "mode JA1c" as the status indication display JA1 corresponds to the "final stage presentation mode" among the presentation contents corresponding to the 1A reception permission state, and appears only when the 1A reception permission state is terminated by operation reception. Therefore, after "mode JA1c" as the status indication display JA1 starts to be executed based on the operation reception performed at timing tAa2-C1, it will be executed for a predetermined time and then hidden, regardless of whether or not the player has operated during that execution period. Note that here, only "mode JA1c" is prepared as the presentation mode of the final stage of the status indication display JA1, but multiple modes with different expectations of a jackpot being obtained may be prepared, and a mode according to the expectation level (according to the result of the presentation judgment) may be selectively made to appear.

In addition, when an operation is accepted at timing tAa2-C2, the auto-hit function that had been active up until that point is disabled as the 1A acceptance permission state is terminated as a result of this. In this regard, when the auto-hit function is disabled at timing tAa2-A2 or timing tAa2-B3, the hit-in-progress display HA1 that had been displayed by the auto-hit function up until that point is not made invisible (it is made invisible an indefinite amount of time after the auto-hit function is disabled), but when the auto-hit function is disabled at timing tAa2-C2, the hit-in-progress display HA1 that had been displayed by the auto-hit function up until that point is made invisible (a fixed amount of time (e.g. 0 seconds) after the operation is accepted).

In this example, when the auto-tap function is disabled at timing tAa2-A2 or timing tAa2-B3, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a that was previously output by the auto-tap function is not made inaudible (it is made inaudible an indefinite time after the auto-tap function is disabled), but when the auto-tap function is disabled at timing tAa2-C2, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a that was previously output by the auto-tap function is made inaudible (a fixed time after the operation is accepted). With this configuration, it becomes possible to indicate whether the first A acceptance permission state has ended based on the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a after the auto-tap function is disabled.

However, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a may be made inaudible (a certain period of time from when the operation is accepted) when the auto-hit function is disabled at timing tAa2-C2, or may not be made inaudible. For example, if the sound is made inaudible when the expectation of a jackpot is high, but is not made inaudible when the expectation of a jackpot is low, the sound will not be made inaudible at timing tAa2-A2 or tAa2-B3, when the final state has not yet appeared (high expectation cannot be suggested), and the output status of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a after the auto-hit function is disabled can suggest the expectation of a jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the first post-acceptance output sound SA1, as the first A post-acceptance output sound in response to operation acceptance, it is possible to output a second post-acceptance output sound SB1, which indicates that the performance content corresponding to the first A acceptance permitted state has progressed, as shown in FIG. 146(h).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 in the example shown in FIG. 146, when timing tAa2-C2 arrives, at which the performance content progresses, as shown in FIG. 146(h), the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 starts to be output in mode SB1b-2 based on the operation acceptance (performance progress) at timing tAa2-C2. This allows the player to recognize the degree of progress of the performance content through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound. It is desirable to set the output time of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 to be longer than the output time of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 corresponding to the operation acceptance.

In this example, it is assumed that timing tAa2-C2 arrives after the second post-acceptance output sound SB1b-1, which began to be output at timing tAa2-B2, has become inaudible, but it may also arrive while the second post-acceptance output sound SB1b-1 is being audibly output. In this case, the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 may be output in a form that changes from "mode SB1b-1" to a different "mode SB1b-2" at timing tAa2-C2 (mode SB1b-1 is terminated and mode SB1b-2 is used instead).

As described above, the 1A reception allowable state is originally continued until the arrival of timing tAa3 when there is no operation reception to the 1A operation unit, as shown in FIG. 147(b), and is terminated based on the arrival of timing tAa3. In this regard, the 1A reception allowable state occurs as a reception allowable state in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 147, when there is no operation reception to the 1A operation unit until the arrival of timing tAa3 in the 1A reception allowable state, not only is the 1A reception allowable state terminated based on the arrival of timing tAa3, but also, as a post-1A reception change that appears when an operation is performed on the 1A operation unit, the final stage of the performance mode (see FIG. 147(e), (h), FIG. 148(j), etc.) among the performance contents corresponding to the 1A reception allowable state is started to be executed.

The 1A reception permission state may be generated as a reception permission state in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled. In other words, in this case, the 1A reception permission state is simply ended based on the arrival of timing tAa3, and the 1A post-reception change that appears when an operation is performed on the 1A operation unit is not started.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "2A reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). FIG. 149 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "2A reception permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "condition 2A" as the occurrence condition and an operation is performed by the player. FIG. 150 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "2A reception permitted state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIG. 151 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the "2A reception permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "2nd A fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the "2nd A fluctuation pattern". After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 2nd A fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 2nd A fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "2nd A fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 149(c), during the execution period of the variable performance related to the "2nd A variable pattern", based on the arrival of timing tAb2 when the 2nd A time has elapsed since the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 2A"), the above-mentioned 2nd A reception permissible state (valid period) in which "operation acceptance to the 2nd A operation unit regarding changes after 2nd A acceptance (such as the 2nd A performance status suggestion display JA2, the 2nd A continuous tapping display HA2, and the output sounds SA2, SB2 after 2nd A acceptance)" is permitted (the situation shown in FIG. 151(a)).

Here, in the second A reception permission state according to this embodiment, the "second A operation unit" that is permitted to receive operations is set as the same operation means (operation button 410) as in the first A reception permission state, and multiple operations are permitted to be received until the second A reception permission state is terminated. However, the second A operation unit may be set as an operation means different from that in the first A reception permission state.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this presentation example, as shown in Figures 149(b) to (e), when the 2A reception permission state occurs, a model image display MG-A2 modeling the object to be operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 2A operation unit), a message display MA2 related to the operation of the object to be operated (here, the "operation button 410" as the 2A operation unit), and a status suggestion display JA2 suggesting the status of the operation are displayed at the arrival of timing tAb1 before the 2A reception permission state occurs (before operation reception for the 2A operation unit is permitted).

However, the model image display MG-A2, message display MA2, and situation suggestion display JA2 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the second A reception allowable state occurs, and may be displayed at the same time as the second A reception allowable state occurs, or slightly after the occurrence. In particular, the situation suggestion display JA2 may not be displayed until the first operation reception is made to the second A operation unit in the second A reception allowable state, that is, it may be realized as appearing and being displayed in response to the reception of an operation to the second A operation unit. Furthermore, the timing at which the model image display MG-A2 is displayed and the timing at which the message display MA2 is displayed may be different from each other. For example, the message display MA2 may be displayed before the model image display MG-A2 is displayed.

After the mock image display MG-A2, message display MA2, and status indication display JA2 start to be displayed, they will continue to be displayed at least until the 2A reception permission state is terminated, regardless of the operation state of the 2A operation unit.

Here, the "mock image display MG-A2" corresponding to the 2A reception permission state can selectively use either the "first color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" or the "second color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme, and is displayed using a color scheme determined based on the results of, for example, a performance determination. However, these color schemes may be different from those of the 1A reception permission state.

In addition, the "imitation image display MG-A2" corresponding to the 2A reception acceptance state is such that, when a moving image in which a part simulating the "operation receiving part" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the manners shown in FIG. 144(β) to (σ)" is considered as one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form that requires a predetermined period of 2A time. However, since this period of 2A time is set as a longer time (long cycle) than the period of 1A time that appears in the 1A reception acceptance state, in the 2A reception acceptance state, the "operation receiving part" is depicted moving up and down its movable range more slowly than in the above-mentioned 1A reception acceptance state.

Also, the 2A reception permission state is originally intended to continue until timing tAb3 arrives when there is no operation reception to the 2A operation unit, as shown in FIG. 150(b), and to end based on the arrival of timing tAb3. Therefore, while the 2A reception permission state continues, a gauge image (in this example, an image in the model image display MG-A2) indicating the remaining time until timing tAb3 arrives, at which the 2A reception permission state ends, is depicted as decreasing with the passage of time, but this depiction is not necessarily required.

When the "mock image display MG-A2" corresponding to the 2A reception permission state is started to be displayed before the timing tAb2 at which the 2A reception permission state occurs, it is desirable to wait until the timing tAb2 before starting the periodic change and the change in the gauge image. In other words, in this case, the "mock image display MG-A2" corresponding to the 2A reception permission state will be displayed in a manner that maintains the appearance shown in FIG. 144 (α) until the timing tAb2 arrives.

Furthermore, in the 2A reception permission state in this example, as shown in Figs. 149(c), (d) and 151(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-A2, a message display related to the reception of operations for the 2A operation unit (here, operation button 410) (here, message display MA2 displayed as "Defeat Tiger! Press the button repeatedly!!").

Furthermore, in the second A reception allowance state in this example, as shown in Figures 149 (e) and 151 (a), a situation suggestion display JA2 indicating the status of operation in the second A reception allowance state is displayed, which includes an ally character corresponding to the type of the second A reception allowance state (here, the ally character YS-A2) and an enemy character corresponding to the type of the second A reception allowance state (here, the enemy character BOSS-A2 depicted as a tiger), as well as a gauge image HP-A2 indicating their remaining HP gauge. In the second A reception allowance state, the expectation of a big win can be suggested through the performance of "whether or not the ally character YS-A2 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A2 by receiving multiple operations on the second A operation unit (whether or not the gauge image HP-A2 can be set to 0)." In other words, each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "second A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)," a performance can be executed in which the "ally character YS-A2" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A2." In this example, the ally character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, and the gauge image HP-A2 are displayed as the situation suggestion display JA2, but it is not necessary to display all of these displays. As long as at least one of the ally character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, and the gauge image HP-A2 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation situation. Additionally, the ally character YS-A2 may be displayed as a different image from the ally character YS-A1 that appears in the above-mentioned 1A reception acceptance state.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 149, it is assumed that the first operation is received for the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAb2-A1 in the 2A reception permitted state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 151(b)).

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAb2-A1 in the 2A acceptance permitted state, a "change after 2A acceptance (post 2A acceptance performance)" in response to the operation acceptance is generated as shown in Figs. 149(f) and (g) (the performance situation shown in Fig. 151(b)).

More specifically, when an operation is accepted for the "second A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAb2-A1 in the second A acceptance permitted state, as shown in Figs. 149(f) and (g), a "second A post-acceptance output sound" in response to the operation acceptance for the "second A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output as a change after second A acceptance, and a "second A post-acceptance display" in response to the operation acceptance for the "second A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

That is, when a single operation is accepted on the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 2A acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 151(b), a single animated display of "ally character YS-A2" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A2" with fire magic (such as smoke effects or the generation of fire magic) is displayed as the "display after 2A acceptance". However, as will be described later, in the 2A acceptance state, based on the results of the performance judgment at the time the operation is accepted, there is a possibility that the "enemy character BOSS-A2" will be injured, the strength of the fire magic will increase, or the remaining HP gauge of the gauge image HP-A2 will decrease (the performance content may progress depending on the performance judgment, etc.). When the performance content has progressed in this way, the state when the operation is accepted at the second A operation unit (here, the state in which the "ally character YS-A2" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A2" with fire-based magic) will appear as one video display changed to the progressed performance content (see, for example, Figs. 149(e) and (f) and Fig. 151(e)). After the performance content has progressed in this way, as long as the second A acceptance permission state continues, the degree of progress of the performance content will not be returned to the state before the progress. Therefore, even when an operation acceptance is made again at the second A operation unit after the one video display changed to the progressed performance content has ended, the state when the operation is accepted at the second A operation unit (here, the state in which the "ally character YS-A2" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A2" with fire-based magic) can appear as one video display changed to the progressed performance content. Each time the performance progresses, it may be suggested that there is a high probability (expectation) of hitting the jackpot.

In this example, when an operation is accepted once for the "2A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 2A acceptance permitted state, in addition to the above-mentioned "2A acceptance display", the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 can be output as the above-mentioned "2A acceptance output sound" as shown in FIG. 149(g). The first post-acceptance output sound SA2 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which the ally character YS-A2 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic (such as smoke effect or generation of fire magic)" that appears as the above-mentioned "2A acceptance display", and is a different sound from the above-mentioned "first post-acceptance output sound SA1". In this case, as will be described later, there is a possibility that the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 may be further output as the "2A acceptance output sound". The second post-acceptance output sound SB2 in this example is output when the performance content of the above-mentioned "2A acceptance display" progresses. Note that, here, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 is realized as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; in short, it only needs to be able to suggest that an operation by the player has been accepted, and that the second A operation unit is being maintained in an operating state when the auto-repeated function is enabled.

In this way, in the 2A reception permitted state, each time an operation is received from the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)," a depiction of "ally character YS-A2" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A2" and associated sound effects are displayed; that is, multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A2" reduce the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A2" (the presentation progresses), and when the HP reaches 0 as a result, it means that "enemy character BOSS-A2" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests high expectations. However, in this case, if the HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-A2" cannot be defeated, this suggests low expectations.

This example assumes that the operation by the player (operation state of the 2A operation unit) that is started at timing tAb2-A1 is continued until timing tAb2-A2, as shown in FIG. 149(a).

In this regard, the 2A reception-permitted state is classified as a "multiple operation-enabled state (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated-tap function is enabled) in which the corresponding post-reception change (e.g., post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, post-reception role operation, etc.) is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the operation unit (2A operation unit) in the operating state." Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 149(a), during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 (the period in which the 2A operation unit is maintained in the operating state), operation is accepted multiple times for the 2A operation unit, and each time, a post-reception change corresponding to the operation acceptance (e.g., post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, post-reception role operation, etc.) is executed.

As described above, when an operation is accepted once for the 2A operation unit in the 2A acceptance acceptance state, the post-2A acceptance display is a display (one animation display) of the ally character YS-A2 attacking the enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic (smoke effects, the generation of fire magic, etc.), as shown in FIG. 151(b). Therefore, from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, this "one animation display" is first played multiple times, the number of times that the operation was accepted.

As mentioned above, when an operation is accepted once for the 2A operation unit in the 2A acceptance permitted state, the post-2A acceptance output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to "the manner in which the ally character YS-A2 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic (such as a smoke effect or the generation of fire magic)" that appears as the "post-2A acceptance display" mentioned above. Therefore, in the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, in addition to the "one video display" mentioned above, a sound effect corresponding to such a "one video display" is played multiple times for the number of times that an operation was accepted.

However, in the 2A acceptance permitted state, when the operation unit (2A operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, such post-acceptance changes (such as one video display, sound effect (2A post-acceptance output sound), etc.) are executed multiple times, but the execution intervals (the interval from when the previous post-acceptance change begins to be executed until the next post-acceptance change begins to be executed) are set to an indefinite time (a time not determined in advance).

In addition, in the 2A acceptance state, when the operation unit (2A operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-repeated function is enabled, the ally character YS-A2 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic (one animation display) and the sound effect (2A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the "one animation display" can be executed multiple times as the post-acceptance change, but in this case, the interval until the post-acceptance change is newly started in response to the detection (the interval from the start of execution of the previous post-acceptance change to the start of execution of the next post-acceptance change) is always set to be longer than the specific time (the time used in the 1A acceptance state and the 3A acceptance state).

In this case, from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 149, a "one animation display" of ally character YS-A2 attacking enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic will be newly executed at indefinite intervals by the auto-hit function, and this repeated display of a "one animation display" will be represented in the figure as a "hit display HA2a."

Similarly, in the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 149, the sound effect (second A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" will start to be output anew at irregular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the figure as the "first post-acceptance output sound SA2a."

In this regard, in the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 149, although multiple operations are accepted by the auto-tap function, it is assumed that the performance content corresponding to the 2A acceptance permission state does not progress.

Therefore, during this period, neither the "status suggestion display JA2 (see FIG. 149(e))" which indicates the status of the operation in the second A reception-permitted state nor the "second post-reception output sound (see FIG. 149(h))" which indicates the status of the operation in the second A reception-permitted state will change or start to be executed (in a manner that progresses the performance) as a result of the operation reception.

In this configuration, during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 149, the "fire magic attack" and "smoke effect" shown in FIG. 151 are displayed and the corresponding sound effects are output repeatedly at indefinite intervals by the auto-hit function (hit display HA2a, first post-acceptance output sound SA2a), but no change occurs in the "situation suggestion display JA2 (see FIG. 149(e))". This makes it possible to confirm the presentation content according to multiple operation acceptances and the lack of progress in the presentation content simply by maintaining the operation state, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

As for the "situation suggestion display JA2 (see FIG. 149(e))," at least one of the ally character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, and the gauge image HP-A2 may be changed in response to the operation reception. In this case, however, it is necessary to change to a different state from the "state when the performance content progresses," and when the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 (the period during which the second A operation unit is maintained in the operating state) ends without the performance content progressing (when the operation is interrupted), this will trigger the return to the "display state before the operation." As described above, the "situation suggestion display JA2 (see FIG. 149(e))" of the ally character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, the gauge image HP-A2, etc. are not displayed until the operation is received, and may be realized as appearing and displayed in response to the operation reception (until the effective period ends or for a predetermined period of time).

In addition, during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2, the "status suggestion display JA2 (see FIG. 149(e))" which suggests the status of the operation in the second A reception permitted state, and the "second post-reception output sound (see FIG. 149(h))" which suggests the status of the operation in the second A reception permitted state, do not change or start to be executed as a result of the reception of the operation, so it is possible to appropriately suggest that the performance content is not progressing.

However, when the rapid-fire display HA2a is being executed by this auto rapid-fire function (the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2), as shown in FIG. 151(b), the rapid-fire display HA2a will repeatedly show "ally character YS-A2 attacking enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic (such as smoke effects or the generation of fire magic)" at irregular intervals, which may make the "situation suggestion display JA2" difficult to see or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the status of the operation in the 2A acceptance permission state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of effects shown in Figures 149 and 151 are based on the assumption that the player temporarily suspends operation of the 2A operation unit at timing tAb2-A2 and disables the auto-repeat function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 2A reception-permitted state.

Here, in the 2A reception acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 149(f) and FIG. 151(c), when the operation state of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tAb2-A2 to disable the auto rapid-fire function, the rapid-fire display HA2a, which had been in an active state until then, is switched to a non-display state as a result. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire display HA2a ends its active state as a result of the arrival of timing tAb2-A2 (the 2A operation unit being put into a non-operated state).

With this configuration, when the operation state of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-tap function is disabled, the tapping display HA2a, which had been in an active state until then, is immediately made invisible, so that the operation status in the 2A reception-permitted state can be recognized quickly and easily. This means that the remaining time in the 2A reception-permitted state is not consumed very much, so it is expected that the action of temporarily interrupting the operation state of the 2A operation unit to more easily check the operation status in the 2A reception-permitted state will be facilitated.

In addition, in this example, if the operation of the 2A operation unit is interrupted while the rapid-hit display HA2a is displayed and the operation unit is put into a non-operated state, the time from the non-operated state until the rapid-hit display HA2a is made invisible is set to a fixed time (here, "0 seconds").

According to this configuration, it becomes easier to predict how much time will elapse from the point in time when the operation state of the 2A operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-tap function is disabled, at which the tapping display HA2a will be hidden and the operation status in the 2A reception-permitting state will be easily recognized. This means that it becomes easier to predict how much time will be consumed remaining in the 2A reception-permitting state, so it is expected that the action of temporarily suspending the operation state of the 2A operation unit to more easily check the operation status in the 2A reception-permitting state will be facilitated. This effect can be obtained even when the above-mentioned fixed time is set to "1 second," so the time from the non-operating state until the tapping display HA2a is hidden does not necessarily have to be set to "0 seconds."

In addition, in the 2A reception permitted state, as shown in FIG. 149(g) and the like, the first post-reception output sound SA2a, which had been in an active state up until that point, is also made inaudible when the operation state of the 2A operating unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) at timing tAb2-A2 and the auto-repeat function is disabled, in the same manner as the repeated tapping display HA2a. In other words, in this case, the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA2a is terminated when timing tAb2-A2 arrives (when the 2A operating unit is put into a non-operating state).

With this configuration, when the operation state of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeat function is disabled, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a that had been in an active state until then is immediately put into a non-output state, which is expected to provide an appropriate indication that the auto-repeat function has been disabled.

In addition, in this example, if the operation of the 2A operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operated state while the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is being output, the time from when the non-operated state is put into a state where the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is not output is set to a fixed time (here, "0 seconds").

With this configuration, it becomes easier to predict how much time will pass from the point in time when the operation state of the second A operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operated state) and the auto-repeated function is disabled, before the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is put into a non-output state. This means that it becomes easier to predict how much time will be consumed in the second A acceptance-permitted state, and it is expected that the gaming technique of temporarily suspending the operation state of the second A operation unit will be simplified. This effect can be obtained even if the above-mentioned fixed time is set to "0.5 seconds," for example, so the time from the non-operated state until the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is put into a non-output state does not necessarily have to be set to "0 seconds."

Moreover, in the 2A reception permission state according to this example, as shown in FIG. 149(f) and FIG. 151(c), when the operation state of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) at timing tAb2-A2 to disable the auto-tap function, a new display change is triggered.

Here, the display change triggered by the second A operation unit being put into a non-operated state does not mean that "the tapping display HA2a, which was previously in a displayed state, is made invisible, and the display image that was originally displayed behind it becomes visible," but rather means that some new aspect appears by performing processing triggered by the second A operation unit being put into a non-operated state. In this example, the display change appears by performing processing to newly start displaying the "post-non-operation display HB2" as a cut-in image shown in FIG. 151(c). With this configuration, it becomes possible to more reliably indicate that the second A operation unit is in a non-operated state and the auto tapping function is disabled.

Note that the "non-operation display HB2" in this example has multiple modes that differ depending on the degree of progress of the performance, and at timing tAb2-A2, it is displayed in mode HB2a, which suggests that the performance has not progressed. However, the "non-operation display HB2" does not necessarily have to have multiple modes that suggest the degree of progress of the performance. Alternatively, both a first non-operation display of a type that is displayed in one of multiple modes that suggest the degree of progress of the performance, and a second non-operation display of a type that is displayed only in one mode that does not suggest the degree of progress of the performance, may be displayed as the "non-operation display HB2".

In this regard, in the 2A reception permission state according to this example, when the 2A operation unit is put into a non-operated state, this triggers the display of a new display (non-operated display HB2), but does not cause the sound corresponding to this display to be newly output.

In addition, in the situation shown in FIG. 151(c), the appearance of the situation suggesting display JA2 suggesting the operation status, such as the ally character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, the gauge image HP-A2, etc. (here, appearance JA2a) is the same as the state before the operation (see FIG. 151(a)), which also suggests that the performance content has not progressed. Note that the appearance of the situation suggesting display JA2 suggesting the operation status, such as the ally character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, the gauge image HP-A2, etc., does not necessarily have to be the same as the appearance before the operation (see FIG. 151(a)) as long as it can suggest that the performance content has not progressed.

In this example, the gauge image HP-A2 of the situation suggestion display JA2 is not made difficult to see by the "display after no operation HB2", so that the progress of the performance content can be easily grasped through the state of the situation suggestion display JA2. The ally character YS-A2 and enemy character BOSS-A2 may also not be made difficult to see by the "display after no operation HB2".

Regarding this, the "non-operation display HB2" may be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the 2A operation unit was put into a non-operation state, regardless of the mode. In this example, however, the display state is continued while the 2A reception allowing state continues, and is hidden when the timing tAb3 at which the 2A reception allowing state ends arrives, or when a new operation is accepted by the player. With this configuration, even if the player loses the intention to continue operation halfway through the continuation of the 2A reception allowing state, the display state of the non-operation display HB2 continues until the timing tAb3 at which the 2A reception allowing state ends, so that it is possible to make it appear as if the performance results of the operations performed up to that point are being displayed, which is expected to maintain the interest in the game.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 149(a), it is assumed that the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operation state at timing tAb2-B1 in the 2A reception-permitted state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 151(d)).

In this example, if the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAb2-B1 in the 2A acceptance permitted state, this will trigger a "change after 2A acceptance (post 2A acceptance performance)" in response to the operation acceptance again, as shown in Figs. 149(f) and (g) (the performance situation shown in Fig. 151(d)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "second A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAb2-B1 in the second A acceptance permitted state, then, as shown in Figs. 149(f) and (g), the non-operation post-display HB2 (mode HB2a) is hidden, and as a second A post-acceptance change, the "first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" in response to the operation acceptance for the "second A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output again, and the "second A post-acceptance display (one video display)" in response to the operation acceptance for the "second A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

In this example, it is assumed that even when operation on the 2A operation unit is started again at timing tAb2-B1 within the 2A reception permitted state, the performance content corresponding to the 2A reception permitted state has not progressed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 151(d), the execution of the 2A post-reception change (post-2A reception display, post-2A reception sound, etc.) will start in the same manner as when the post-2A reception change was first started based on the operation reception on the 2A operation unit at timing tAb-A1. The details of the performance are as described above, so a description will be omitted here.

In this regard, the examples of effects shown in Figures 149 and 151 are based on the assumption that the operation by the player (operation state of the 2A operation unit) that is started at timing tAb2-B1 is also maintained until timing tAb2-B3, activating the auto-repeated function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 (the period during which the 2A operation unit is again maintained in the operating state), the 2A operation unit receives operations multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and each time, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception (for example, a post-acceptance display, a post-acceptance output sound, a post-acceptance light emission, a post-acceptance role operation, etc.) is executed.

And even during the "period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 (the period during which the 2A operation unit is again maintained in the operating state)", the appearance when such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function (such as the repetitive tapping display HA2a and the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a) is the same as in the above-mentioned "period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2" (see FIG. 151(b)) unless the performance content progresses. Note that the details of the performance are as described above, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

However, in the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 149, it is assumed that the performance content corresponding to the 2nd A reception permission state progresses based on the operation reception at timing tAb2-B2 within that period, out of the multiple operations received by the auto-rapid-tap function (the performance situation shown in FIG. 151(e)).

Therefore, during the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 149, during the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B2, the "second A post-acceptance change (second A post-acceptance performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has not progressed, whereas during the period from timing tAb2-B2 to timing tAb2-B3, the "second A post-acceptance change (second A post-acceptance performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has progressed.

More specifically, during the period from timing tAb2-B2 to timing tAb2-B3, at "timing tAb2-B2" when the performance content progresses, as shown in Figures 149(e) and 151(e), a display change is executed to change the state of the situation suggestion display JA2, which suggests the operation state, from the previously displayed "state JA2a" to a different "state JA2b" based on the operation reception to the 2A operation unit. Here, as shown in Figure 151(e), the enemy character BOSS-A2 is changed to an injured state, the fire magic cast by ally character YS-A2 is changed to a state of higher strength, and the gauge image HP-A2 is changed to an state where the remaining HP gauge has decreased. With this configuration, the change in the state of the situation suggestion display JA2 indicates that the performance content corresponding to the second A reception permission state has progressed due to (the result of performance determination based on) the operation reception (by the auto-tap function) performed at timing tAb2-B2.

After the performance has progressed in this way, when one operation is accepted by the second A operation unit, the "one animation display" will be displayed as the "display after second A acceptance" in the above-mentioned manner, in which the performance has progressed, such as "ally character YS-A2 uses stronger fire magic to attack the injured enemy character BOSS-A2," as shown in FIG. 151(e).

In this example, once the performance content has progressed, the degree of progress of the performance content will not be returned to the state before the progress was made as long as the second A reception permission state continues. Therefore, even when an operation is received again at the second A operation unit after the one video display that has changed to the above-mentioned advanced performance content has ended, the state when the operation was received at the second A operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-A2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A2" with fire magic) will appear as one video display that has changed to the advanced performance content.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, during the period from timing tAb2-B2 onwards when the performance content has progressed, the "one video display" in which such a change in appearance has occurred will be played multiple times, the number of times that operations have been accepted by the auto-hit function.

In addition, even during the period after timing tAb2-B2 when the performance has progressed, the mode (one animation display) in which ally character YS-A2 attacks enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic is set to be newly executed at indefinite intervals (unpredetermined time) as the above-mentioned post-acceptance change. Therefore, the above-mentioned "one animation display" of the performance when the performance has progressed is also newly executed at indefinite intervals by the auto-hit function, and the repeated display of the "one animation display" of such a progress mode is represented in the figure as "hit display HA2b".

Thus, in the performance display device 1600 of this example, when "timing tAb2-B2" arrives, which is the timing at which the performance content progresses, the state of the situation suggestion display JA2 changes from "state JA2a" to "state JA2b," and the state of the rapid-hitting display HA2 also changes from "state HA2a" to "state HA2b," as shown in Figures 149(e), (f) and 151(d), (e). From this point on, while the auto rapid-hitting function is enabled (timing tAb2-B2 to tAb2-B3), while the situation suggestion display JA2 is displayed in "state JA2b," the rapid-hitting display HA2 is executed in "state HA2b."

In this example, the state of the rapid-hit display HA2 is changed according to the progress of the presentation content, but it may not change according to the progress of the presentation content. In other words, even if the rapid-hit display HA2 is allowed to continue to be executed in the same state regardless of the progress of the presentation content, the player can check through the rapid-hit display HA2 that the auto rapid-hit function is enabled and the number of times (frequency) that operations are being accepted, and can also check the degree of progress of the presentation content through the state of the situation suggestion display JA2.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is accepted once for the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 2A acceptance permitted state, in addition to the above-mentioned "2A acceptance post-display", a first post-acceptance output sound can be output as the above-mentioned "2A acceptance post-output sound" as shown in FIG. 149(g). As described above, as this "2A acceptance post-output sound", in addition to the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display", a second post-acceptance output sound SB2 that suggests that the performance content corresponding to the 2A acceptance permitted state has progressed can be output as shown in FIG. 149(h).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 149, when timing tAb2-B2 arrives, at which the performance content progresses, as shown in FIG. 149(h), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 starts to be output in mode SB2b-1 based on the operation acceptance (performance progress) at timing tAb2-B2. This allows the player to recognize that the performance content has progressed through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound. It is desirable to set the output time of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 to be longer than that of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 for one operation in response to the operation acceptance.

However, in this example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display", is realized as being output in the same manner before and after the performance content progresses. Therefore, when timing tAb2-B2 arrives, which is the timing at which the performance content progresses, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 will begin to be output as a new "sound effect" based on the operation being accepted, but the manner in which it is output will be the same as when the operation was accepted before timing tAb2-B2 (the manner of execution is the same whether or not performance progress occurs at timing tAb2-B2).

In this case, the sound effect (first post-acceptance output sound SA2) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" will be newly output in the same manner at irregular intervals by the auto-tap function throughout the entire period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 when the so-called auto-tap function is enabled, and this repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the figure as the "first post-acceptance output sound SA2a." Note that the output manner of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a during this period is the same as in the above-mentioned "period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2," so a description thereof will be omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is not changed according to the progress of the performance content, but it may be changed according to the progress of the performance content.

However, even when the rapid-fire display HA2b is being executed by this auto rapid-fire function (the period from timing tAb2-B2 to timing tAb2-B3), as shown in FIG. 151(e), the rapid-fire display HA2b repeatedly shows "ally character YS-A2 attacking injured enemy character BOSS-A2 with high-power fire magic (smoke effect, generation of fire magic, etc.)" at irregular intervals, which may make the "situation suggestion display JA2" difficult to see or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the status of the operation in the 2A acceptance permission state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of effects shown in Figures 149 and 151 are based on the assumption that the player again interrupts operation of the 2A operation unit at timing tAb2-B3 and disables the auto-repeat function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 2A reception-permitted state.

As described above, in the 2A reception permission state, when the operation state of the 2A operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the 2A reception permission state continues and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, the rapid-fire display HA2, which had been in an active state until then, is switched to a non-display state as a result. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire display HA2b ends its active state as a result of the arrival of timing tAb2-B3 (as a result of the 2A operation unit being put into a non-operated state).

Also, similarly to the case of the rapid-hitting display HA2a, if the operation of the 2A operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operating state while the rapid-hitting display HA2b is being displayed, the time from the non-operating state to the time the rapid-hitting display HA2b is made invisible is set to a fixed time (here, "0 seconds").

Moreover, as described above, in the 2A reception permission state in this example, when the operation state of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put in a non-operating state) and the auto-hit function is disabled, this triggers a new display change. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 149(f) and FIG. 151(f), even when the operation state of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put in a non-operating state) and the auto-hit function is disabled at timing tAb2-B3, this triggers a process to start displaying a new "display after non-operation HB2" as a cut-in image shown in FIG. 151(f). As also described above, the "display after non-operation HB2" in this example has multiple modes that differ depending on the progress of the performance, and at timing tAb2-B3, it is displayed in mode HB2b, which suggests that the performance content has progressed by one step.

In the situation shown in FIG. 151(f), the appearance of the situation suggesting display JA2 (in this case, appearance JA2b) that indicates the operating situation, such as the ally character YS-A2, enemy character BOSS-A2, and gauge image HP-A2, also suggests that the presentation has progressed by one step.

As described above, in the 2A reception permission state, when the operation state of the 2A operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the 2A reception permission state continues and the auto-repeated function is disabled, the first post-reception output sound SA2 that was in an output state until then is made inaudible as a result. In other words, in this case, the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA2a is ended as a result of the arrival of timing tAb2-B3 (as a result of the 2A operation unit being put into a non-operated state).

However, the timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149 is intended to cover the case where the operation state of the second A operation unit is interrupted while the second post-acceptance output sound SB2, which started to be output at the timing tAb2-B2, continues to be output.

In this regard, in the second A reception permitted state, unlike the first post-reception output sound SA2, the second post-reception output sound SB2 does not end its output state (it is not made audible) when the operation state of the second A operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) as a trigger, as shown in FIG. 149(h) and the like, even if the operation state of the second A operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tAb2-B3, the second post-reception output sound SB2b-1 will continue to be output after timing tAb2-B3 (even after the second A operation unit is put into a non-operated state) until it is executed and output for a predetermined output time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operated state.

In this example, when the operation of the second A operation unit is interrupted while the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is being output and the second A operation unit is put into a non-operation state, the time from the non-operation state until the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is put into a non-output state is set to a fixed time (here, "0 seconds"). In contrast, when the operation of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is interrupted while the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is being output and the second operation unit is put into a non-operation state, the time from the non-operation state until the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is put into a non-output state is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite. In other words, in this case, when the operation of the second A operation unit is interrupted, different performances are provided between the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 that were in an output state until then.

With this configuration, even in the 2A reception permitted state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the 2A operation unit is interrupted (set to a non-operated state) while the 2A post-reception output sound (second post-reception output sound SB2b) is in an execution state, as shown in FIG. 149(h), a situation will appear in which the 2A post-reception output sound (second post-reception output sound SB2b) continues to be executed while the 2A operation unit is in a non-operated state. However, after this, as time passes since the 2A operation unit is set to a non-operated state (time passes from timing tAb2-B3), the continued 2A post-reception output sound (second post-reception output sound SB2b) will be set to a non-output state, as shown in FIG. 149(h) and other figures.

In this regard, in this performance example, as shown in FIG. 149(a), it is assumed that the second A operation unit is again put into an operating state at timing tAb2-C1 (the performance situation shown in FIG. 151(g)) after timing tAb2-B3 when the second A operation unit is put into a non-operated state and when the second A post-acceptance output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2b) is in an audible state (before the output state ends).

In this example, even if the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAb2-C1 within the 2A acceptance permitted state, this will again trigger a "2A post-acceptance change (2A post-acceptance performance)" in response to the operation acceptance, as shown in Figs. 149(f) and (g) (performance situation shown in Fig. 151(g)), just as in the case of timing tAb2-B1 described above.

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "second A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAb2-C1 in the second A acceptance permitted state, then, as shown in FIG. 149(f) and (g), the non-operation post-display HB2 (mode HB2b) is hidden, and as a second A post-acceptance change, the "first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" in response to the operation acceptance for the "second A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "second A post-acceptance display (one video display)" in response to the operation acceptance for the "second A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

In this example, it is assumed that when operation is started again on the 2A operation unit at timing tAb2-C1 within the 2A reception permitted state, the performance content corresponding to the 2A reception permitted state does not progress from the first stage of progression. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 151(g), the post-2A reception change (post-2A reception display, post-2A reception sound, etc.) will start to be executed in the same manner as when the post-2A reception change was first started to be executed (the manner shown in FIG. 151(e)) based on the operation reception on the 2A operation unit at timing tAb2-B2. The details of the performance are as described above, so a description will be omitted here.

However, as described above, this example assumes that the timing tAb2-C1 at which operation of the second A operation unit is started again occurs while the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is in an audible state.

In this case, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 continues in the previous output state without any change based on the fact that operation on the second A operation unit has been started again (operation acceptance has been made) at timing tAb2-C1. Note that the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 corresponding to the second A acceptance permitted state is made inaudible when the second A operation unit is put into a non-operated state, and is therefore not made audible when the second A operation unit is operated again.

With this configuration, in the second A reception permitted state, when a second A post-reception output sound is being output in response to the reception of an operation, if an operation is received for the second A operation unit that had been in a non-operated state up until that point, the second A post-reception output sound will never be terminated as a result of this, and will always be not terminated (second post-reception output sound SB2).

As with the first post-acceptance output sound SA2, the rapid-hit display HA2 is made invisible when the second A operating unit is put into a non-operated state, so it is not made visible when the second A operating unit is operated again.

The examples of effects shown in Figures 149 and 151 also assume that the operation by the player (operation state of the 2A operation unit) that begins at timing tAb2-C1 is maintained until timing tAb2-C2, activating the auto-repeated function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 (the period during which the second A operation unit is again maintained in the operating state), the second A operation unit receives operations multiple times by the auto-tap function, and each time, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception (for example, a post-acceptance display, a post-acceptance output sound, a post-acceptance light emission, a post-acceptance role operation, etc.) is executed.

And even during the "period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 (the period during which the 2A operation unit is again maintained in the operating state)", the appearance when such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function (such as the repetitive tapping display HA2b and the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a) is the same as in the above-mentioned "period from timing tAb2-B2 to timing tAb2-B3" (see FIG. 151(f)), unless there is any further progress in the presentation content. Note that the details of the presentation are as described above, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

However, in the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 in the example shown in FIG. 149, it is assumed that the performance content corresponding to the 2A reception permission state has progressed further (a second stage has progressed) based on the operation reception (result of the performance judgment, etc.) at timing tAb2-C2 within the period among the multiple operation receptions made by the auto-repeated tapping function (the performance situation shown in FIG. 151(h)). In particular, at timing tAb2-C2 in this example, it is assumed that the performance content corresponding to the 2A reception permission state has progressed to the final stage of the performance mode, and it is assumed that the 2A reception permission state will be terminated as a result of the operation reception at timing tAb2-C2 (see FIG. 149(a) and FIG. 151(h)).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 in the example shown in FIG. 149, the "2nd A post-acceptance change (2nd A post-acceptance performance)" in response to the operation acceptance is executed in a state in which the performance content has progressed only once (see FIG. 151(h)), whereas from timing tAb2-C2 onwards, the "2nd A post-acceptance change (2nd A post-acceptance performance)" is executed in a state in which the performance content has progressed further (final stage performance mode) under a state in which operation acceptance to the 2nd A operation unit is not permitted (see FIG. 151(h)).

More specifically, at timing tAb2-C2, as shown in FIG. 149(e) and FIG. 151(h), a display change is executed to change the state of the status suggestion display JA2, which indicates the status of the operation, from the previously displayed "state JA2b" to a different "state JA2c" based on the operation acceptance to the 2A operation unit. Here, as shown in FIG. 151(h), the enemy character BOSS-A2 is changed to a state in which it has been defeated, the fire magic of the ally character YS-A2 is changed to a state in which it is exploding around the enemy character BOSS-A2, and the gauge image HP-A2 is changed to a state in which the remaining HP gauge is further decreased. With this configuration, through the change in state of the status suggestion display JA2, it is suggested that the performance content corresponding to the 2A acceptance permission state has progressed due to (the result of the performance judgment based on) the operation acceptance (by the auto-repeated tapping function) made at timing tAb2-C2.

However, as mentioned above, this "mode JA2c" as the status indication display JA2 corresponds to the "final stage presentation mode" among the presentation contents corresponding to the 2A reception permission state, and appears only when the 2A reception permission state is ended by receiving an operation. Therefore, after "mode JA2c" as the status indication display JA2 starts to be executed based on the operation reception performed at timing tAb2-C1, it will be executed for a predetermined period of time and then made invisible, regardless of whether or not the player has performed an operation during that execution period. Note that here, only "mode JA2c" is prepared as the presentation mode of the final stage of the status indication display JA2, and multiple modes with different expectations of a jackpot being obtained are not prepared.

In addition, when an operation is accepted at timing tAb2-C2, the auto-hit repeat function that had been active up until that point is disabled as the second A acceptance permission state ends at this point. In this regard, when the auto-hit repeat function is disabled at timing tAb2-C2, the hit-repeated display HA2 that had been displayed by the auto-hit repeat function up until that point is also made invisible at this point.

In this example, when the auto-tap function is disabled at timing tAb2-C2, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a that had been output by the auto-tap function until then is made inaudible (a certain period of time after the operation is accepted).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the first post-acceptance output sound SA2, as the second A post-acceptance output sound in response to operation acceptance, it is possible to output a second post-acceptance output sound SB2, which indicates that the performance content corresponding to the second A acceptance permitted state has progressed, as shown in FIG. 149(h).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 in the example shown in FIG. 149, when timing tAb2-C2 arrives, at which the performance content progresses, as shown in FIG. 149(h), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 starts to be output in mode SB2b-2 based on the operation acceptance (performance progress) at timing tAb2-C2. This allows the player to recognize the degree of progress of the performance content through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound. It is desirable to set the output time of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 to be longer than that of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2.

In this example, it is assumed that timing tAb2-C2 arrives after the second post-acceptance output sound SB2b-1, which began to be output at timing tAb2-B2, has become inaudible, but it may also arrive while the second post-acceptance output sound SB2b-1 is being audibly output. In this case, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 may be output in a form that changes from "mode SB2b-1" to a different "mode SB2b-2" at timing tAb2-C2 (mode SB2b-1 is terminated and mode SB2b-2 is used instead).

As described above, the second A reception allowing state is originally continued until the arrival of timing tAb3 when there is no operation reception to the second A operation unit, as shown in FIG. 150(b), and is terminated based on the arrival of timing tAb3. In this regard, the second A reception allowing state occurs as a reception allowing state in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 150, when there is no operation reception to the second A operation unit until the arrival of timing tAb3 in the second A reception allowing state, not only is the second A reception allowing state terminated based on the arrival of timing tAb3, but also, as a post-second A reception change that appears when an operation is performed to the second A operation unit, the final stage of the performance mode (see FIG. 150(e), (h), FIG. 151(h), etc.) among the performance contents corresponding to the second A reception allowing state is started to be executed.

The second A reception permission state may be generated as a reception permission state in which the automatic button function described above is not enabled. In other words, in this case, the second A reception permission state is simply ended based on the arrival of timing tAb3, and the second A post-reception change that appears when an operation is performed on the second A operation unit will no longer be started.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "3A reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). FIG. 152 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "3A reception permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "condition 3A" as the occurrence condition and an operation is performed by the player. FIG. 153 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "3A reception permitted state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the "3A reception permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "3A fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the "3A fluctuation pattern". After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 3A fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 3A fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "3A fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 152(c), during the execution period of the variable performance related to the "3A variable pattern", based on the arrival of timing tAc2 when the 3A time has elapsed since the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 3A"), it is possible to generate the above-mentioned 3A reception permissible state (valid period) in which "operation acceptance to the 3A operation unit regarding changes after 3A acceptance (such as the 3A performance status suggestion display JA3, the 3A continuous tapping display HA3, and the output sounds SA3 and SB3 after 3A acceptance)" is permitted (the situation shown in FIG. 154(a)).

Here, in the 3A reception permission state according to this embodiment, the "3A operation unit" that is permitted to receive operations is set as the above-mentioned operation button 410, and multiple operations are permitted to be received until the 3A reception permission state is terminated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this presentation example, as shown in Figures 152(b) to (e), when the 3A reception permission state occurs, a model image display MG-A3 modeling the object to be operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 3A operation unit) and a status suggestion display JA3 suggesting the status of the operation are displayed at the arrival of timing tAc1 before the 3A reception permission state occurs (before operation reception for the 3A operation unit is permitted).

However, the mock image display MG-A3 and the status suggestion display JA3 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the 3A reception permission state occurs, but may be displayed at the same time as the 3A reception permission state occurs, or slightly after the occurrence. In particular, the status suggestion display JA3 may not be displayed until the first operation is accepted for the 3A operation unit in the 3A reception permission state, that is, it may be realized as something that appears and is displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation for the 3A operation unit.

After the mock image display MG-A3 and the status indication display JA3 start to be displayed, they will continue to be displayed at least until the 3A reception permission state is terminated, regardless of the operation state of the 3A operation unit.

Here, the "mock image display MG-A3" corresponding to the 3A reception permission state can selectively use either the "first color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" or the "second color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme, and is displayed using a color scheme determined based on the results of, for example, a performance determination.

In addition, the "imitation image display MG-A3" corresponding to the 3A reception acceptance state is such that when a moving image in which a part simulating the "operation receiving part" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the form shown in FIG. 144(α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the forms shown in FIG. 144(β) to (σ)" is considered as one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period 3A time. Note that this period 3A time is set as a shorter time (short cycle) than the above-mentioned period 2A time, and may be set as the same time as the above-mentioned period 1A time, for example. Therefore, in the 3A reception acceptance state, the "operation receiving part" is depicted as quickly moving up and down within its movable range.

As shown in FIG. 153(b), the 3A reception permission state continues until timing tAc3 arrives when there is no operation reception to the 3A operation unit, and ends when timing tAc3 arrives. Therefore, while the 3A reception permission state continues, a gauge image (in this example, an image in the model image display MG-A3) indicating the remaining time until timing tAc3 arrives at which the 3A reception permission state ends is depicted as decreasing with the passage of time, but this depiction does not necessarily have to be performed.

When the "mock image display MG-A3" corresponding to the 3A reception permission state is started to be displayed before timing tAc2 when the 3A reception permission state occurs, it is desirable to wait until timing tAc2 before starting the periodic changes and the changes in the gauge image. In other words, in this case, the "mock image display MG-A3" corresponding to the 3A reception permission state will be displayed in a manner that maintains the appearance shown in FIG. 144 (α) until timing tAc2 arrives.

Note that, in the 3A reception permission state in this example, as shown in FIG. 152(d) and FIG. 154(a), unlike the 1A reception permission state and the 2A reception permission state, messages related to the reception of operations to the 3A operation unit (here, operation button 410) are not displayed.

Furthermore, in the 3A reception allowance state in this example, as shown in Figures 152 (e) and 154 (a), a situation suggestion display JA3 indicating the status of operation in the 3A reception allowance state is displayed, which includes an ally character corresponding to the type of the 3A reception allowance state (here, ally character YS-A3) and an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 3A reception allowance state (here, enemy character BOSS-A3 depicted as a ghost), as well as a gauge image HP-A3 indicating their remaining HP gauge. In the 3A reception permitted state, the expectation of a big win can be suggested through the presentation of "whether or not the ally character YS-A3 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A3 by receiving multiple operations on the 3A operation unit (whether or not the gauge image HP-A3 can be set to 0)." In other words, each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "3A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)," a presentation can be executed in which the "ally character YS-A3" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A3." In this example, the ally character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image HP-A3 are displayed as the situation suggestion display JA3, but it is not necessary to display all of these displays. As long as at least one of the ally character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image HP-A3 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation situation.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 152, it is assumed that the first operation is received for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAc2-A1 in the 3A reception permitted state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 154(b)).

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAc2-A1 in the 3A acceptance permitted state, a "change after 3A acceptance (post-3A acceptance performance)" will occur in response to the operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 152(f) and (g) (the performance situation shown in Figure 154(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAc2-A1 in the 3A acceptance permitted state, as shown in Figs. 152(f) and (g), a "3A post-acceptance output sound" in response to the operation acceptance for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output as a change after 3A acceptance, and a "3A post-acceptance display" in response to the operation acceptance for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

That is, when a single operation is accepted on the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 3A acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 154(b), a single animated display of "ally character YS-A3" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A3" with lightning magic is displayed as the "display after 3A acceptance". However, as will be described later, in the 3A acceptance state, based on the result of the performance judgment at the time the operation is accepted, there is a possibility that the "enemy character BOSS-A3" will be injured, the strength of the lightning magic will increase, or the remaining HP gauge of the gauge image HP-A3 will decrease (the performance content may progress depending on the performance judgment, etc.). When the performance content has progressed in this way, the state when the operation is accepted at the 3A operation unit (here, the state in which the "ally character YS-A3" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A3" with lightning-based magic) will appear as one video display changed to the advanced performance content (see Figs. 152(e) and (f) and Fig. 154(f)). After the performance content has progressed in this way, as long as the 3A acceptance permission state continues, the degree of progress of the performance content will not be returned to the state before the progress. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted again at the 3A operation unit after the one video display changed to the advanced performance content has ended, the state when the operation is accepted at the 3A operation unit (here, the state in which the "ally character YS-A3" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A3" with lightning-based magic) can appear as one video display changed to the advanced performance content. Each time the performance progresses, it may be suggested that there is a high probability (expectation) of hitting the jackpot.

In this example, when an operation is accepted once for the "3A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 3A acceptance permitted state, in addition to the above-mentioned "3A acceptance display", the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 can be output as the above-mentioned "3A acceptance output sound" as shown in FIG. 152(g). The first post-acceptance output sound SA3 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which the ally character YS-A3 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A3 with a lightning-based magic (such as the generation of a lightning-based magic spell)" that appears as the above-mentioned "3A acceptance display". In addition, at this time, as will be described later, there is a possibility that the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 may be further output as the "3A acceptance output sound". The second post-acceptance output sound SB3 in this example is output when the performance content of the above-mentioned "3A acceptance display" progresses. Note that, here, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 is realized as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; in short, it only needs to be able to suggest that an operation by the player has been accepted, and that the 3A operating unit is being maintained in an operating state when the auto-repeated function is enabled.

In this way, in the 3A reception permitted state, each time an operation is received from the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)," a depiction of "ally character YS-A3" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A3" and associated sound effects are displayed; that is, multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A3" reduce the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A3" (the presentation progresses), and when the HP reaches 0 as a result, it means that "enemy character BOSS-A3" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests high expectations. However, in this case, if the HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and the "enemy character BOSS-A3" cannot be defeated, it suggests low expectations.

This example assumes that the operation by the player (operation state of the 3A operation unit) that is started at timing tAc2-A1 is continued until timing tAc2-A2, as shown in FIG. 152(a).

In this regard, the 3A reception-permitted state is classified as a "multiple operation-enabled state (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated-tap function is enabled) in which the corresponding post-reception change (e.g., post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, post-reception role operation, etc.) is executed multiple times simply by maintaining the operation unit (3A operation unit) in the operating state." Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 152(a), during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 (the period in which the 3A operation unit is maintained in the operating state), operation is accepted multiple times for the 3A operation unit, and each time, a post-reception change corresponding to the operation acceptance (e.g., post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, post-reception role operation, etc.) is executed.

As described above, when a single operation is accepted on the 3A operation unit in the 3A acceptance permitted state, the post-3A acceptance display shows (one animation display) the ally character YS-A3 attacking the enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning magic, as shown in FIG. 154(b). Therefore, from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, this "one animation display" is first played multiple times, the number of times that an operation was accepted.

As mentioned above, when an operation is accepted once for the 3A operation unit in the 3A acceptance permitted state, the post-3A acceptance output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to "the manner in which the ally character YS-A3 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning magic (such as a smoke effect or the generation of lightning magic)" that appears as the "post-3A acceptance display." Therefore, in the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, in addition to the "one video display," a sound effect corresponding to such a "one video display" is played multiple times, the number of times that an operation was accepted.

However, in the 3A acceptance permitted state, when the operation unit (3A operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-tap function is enabled, the ally character YS-A3 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning magic (one animation display) and the sound effect corresponding to this "one animation display" (output sound after 3A acceptance) are newly executed at regular intervals (predetermined intervals) as the above-mentioned post-acceptance change.

In addition, in the 3A acceptance permitted state, when the operation unit (3A operation unit) is maintained in an operating state and the auto-repeated-tap function is enabled, the ally character YS-A1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning magic (one animation display) and the sound effect (3A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the "one animation display" can be executed multiple times as the post-acceptance change, but in this case, the interval until the post-acceptance change is newly started in response to the detection (the interval from the start of execution of the previous post-acceptance change to the start of execution of the next post-acceptance change) is always set to a specific time or less.

In this case, from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 152, a "one animation display" of ally character YS-A3 attacking enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning magic is newly executed at regular intervals by the auto-hit function, and this repeated display of a "one animation display" is represented in the figure as a "hit display HA3a."

Similarly, in the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 152, the sound effect (third A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" will start to be output anew at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function, and this repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the figure as the "first post-acceptance output sound SA3a."

In this regard, in the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 152, although multiple operations are accepted by the auto-tap function, it is assumed that the performance content corresponding to the 3A acceptance acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, during this period, neither the "status indication display JA3 (see FIG. 152(e))" which indicates the status of the operation in the 3A reception-permitted state nor the "second post-reception output sound (see FIG. 152(h))" which indicates the status of the operation in the 3A reception-permitted state will change or be started as a result of the operation reception.

In this configuration, during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 152, the display of a "lightning magic attack" as shown in FIG. 154 and the output of the corresponding sound effect are repeatedly executed at regular intervals by the auto-hit function (hit display HA3a, first post-acceptance output sound SA3a), but no change occurs in the "situation suggestion display JA3 (see FIG. 152(e))". This makes it possible to confirm that the same presentation content as when the player performed the operation, or that the presentation content did not progress, without performing monotonous repetitive operations, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

As for the "situation suggestion display JA3 (see FIG. 152(e))," at least one of the ally character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image HP-A3 may be changed in response to the operation reception. In this case, however, it is necessary to change to a different state from the "state when the performance content progresses," and when the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 (the period during which the 3A operation unit is maintained in the operating state) ends without the performance content progressing (when the operation is interrupted), this will be the trigger for returning to the "display state before the operation." As described above, the "situation suggestion display JA3 (see FIG. 152(e))" of the ally character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, the gauge image HP-A3, etc. are not displayed until the operation is received, and may be realized as appearing and displayed in response to the operation reception (until the effective period ends or for a predetermined period of time).

In addition, during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2, neither the "status suggestion display JA3 (see FIG. 152(e))" which suggests the status of the operation in the 3A reception permitted state nor the "second post-reception output sound (see FIG. 152(h))" which suggests the status of the operation in the 3A reception permitted state changes or starts to be executed as a result of the operation reception, so it is possible to appropriately suggest that the performance content is not progressing.

However, when the rapid-fire display HA3a is being executed by this auto rapid-fire function (the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2), as shown in FIG. 154(b), the rapid-fire display HA3a will repeatedly show an image of ally character YS-A3 attacking enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning magic at regular intervals, which may make the "situation suggestion display JA3" less visible or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the status of the operation in the 3A acceptance permitted state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of effects shown in Figures 152 and 154 are based on the assumption that the player temporarily suspends operation of the 3A operation unit at timing tAc2-A2 and disables the auto-repeat function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 3A reception-permitted state.

Here, in the 3A reception acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 152(f) and FIG. 154(c), even if the operation state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operated state) at timing tAc2-A2 and the auto-tap function is disabled, the tapping display HA3a, which had been in an active state until then, is not made invisible as a result of this. In other words, in this case, the tapping display HA3a will continue to be in an active state even after timing tAc2-A2 (even after the 3A operation unit becomes non-operated), for example, until the "one video display" that was in an active state is executed and displayed for a predetermined display time and is finished, or for a predetermined time from the non-operated state.

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-tap function is disabled, the tapping display HA3a, which had been in an active state until then, is not immediately made invisible, so it takes time for the operation status in the 3A reception-permitted state to become easy to recognize. This means that a large amount of the remaining time in the 3A reception-permitted state is consumed, so it is expected that a suitable sense of tension will be created in the act of temporarily interrupting the operation state of the 3A operation unit to more easily check the operation status in the 3A reception-permitted state.

In addition, in this example, if the operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted while the rapid-hit display HA3a is displayed and the operation unit is put into a non-operated state, the time from the non-operated state to the time the rapid-hit display HA3a is made invisible is not set to a fixed time but is made indefinite.

With this configuration, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point in time when the operation state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto rapid-fire function is disabled, at which the rapid-fire display HA3a will be hidden and a state will appear in which the operation status in the 3A reception-permitted state can be easily recognized. This means that it is difficult to predict how much time will be consumed remaining in the 3A reception-permitted state, so it is expected that a suitable sense of tension will be created in the act of temporarily suspending the operation state of the 3A operation unit in order to more easily confirm the operation status in the 3A reception-permitted state.

Also, in the 3A reception permitted state, as shown in FIG. 152(g) and the like, the first post-reception output sound SA3a, which had been in an execution state up until then, is not made inaudible when the operation state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) at timing tAc2-A2 and the auto-hit function is disabled, as with the hit-in-progress display HA3a. In other words, in this case, the first post-reception output sound SA3a will continue to be output even after timing tAc2-A2 (even after the 3A operation unit becomes non-operating), until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" which had been in an execution state is executed and output for a predetermined output time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operating state.

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeat function is disabled, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a that had been in an active state until then is not immediately put into a non-output state. In this case, it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained because it appears as if the auto-repeat function is still active.

In addition, in this example, if the operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operating state while the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is being output, the time from when the non-operating state is put into a non-output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point in time when the operation state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled, until the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is no longer output, i.e., until it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated tap function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 3A acceptance permitted state, and it is expected that this will create a suitable sense of tension in the act of temporarily suspending the operation state of the 3A operation unit.

In addition, in the 3A reception permission state according to this embodiment, when the operation state of the 3A operation unit is interrupted (set to a non-operation state) while the continuous hitting display HA3a and the first post-reception output sound SA3a are in the execution state, the timing at which the continuous hitting display HA3a is made to be in the non-display state and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is made to be in the non-output state are made to be different from each other, as shown in Fig. 152 (f) and (g), etc. In the same figure, the timing at which the continuous hitting display HA3a is made to be in the non-display state is set to be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is made to be in the non-output state, but the relationship may be set to be the opposite. Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned nature that the time until the display is made to be in the non-display or non-output state is indefinite, the timing at which the continuous hitting display HA3a is made to be in the non-display state may be set to be both before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is made to be in the non-output state and after that timing. It may also be possible for the timing to be the same.

According to such a configuration, in the 3A reception permission state according to this embodiment, when the operation state of the 3A operation unit is interrupted (when the operation state is set to a non-operation state) while the continuous hitting display HA3a and the first post-reception output sound SA3a are each in an execution state, as shown in Figures 152 (f), (g) and 154 (c), a situation will appear in which the continuous hitting display HA3a continues to be displayed and the first post-reception output sound SA3a continues to be output while the 3A operation unit is set to a non-operation state. However, after this, as time passes after the 3A operation unit is set to a non-operation state, the continuous hitting display HA3a, which had been continued, will be set to a non-display state and the first post-reception output sound SA3a will be set to a non-output state, as shown in Figures 152 (f), (g) and 154 (d). This not only allows the player to easily recognize that the auto-hit function has been disabled, but also makes it easy to recognize the state of the status indication JA3 (here, state JA3a) that indicates the operating state, such as the ally character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image HP-A3 (see FIG. 154(d)).

However, as mentioned above, in the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 152, although multiple operations are accepted by the auto-tap function, it is assumed that the performance content corresponding to the 3A acceptance acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 154(d), the appearance of the situation suggesting display JA3 suggesting the operation status, such as the ally character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, the gauge image HP-A3, etc. (here, appearance JA3a) can be easily recognized, but these appearances are the same as the state before the operation (see FIG. 154(a)), which suggests that the performance content has not progressed. Note that the appearance of the situation suggesting display JA3 suggesting the operation status, such as the ally character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, the gauge image HP-A3, etc., does not necessarily have to be the same as the appearance before the operation (see FIG. 154(a)) as long as it can suggest that the performance content has not progressed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 152(a), it is assumed that the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operation state at timing tAc2-B1 in the 3A reception-permitted state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 154(e)).

In this example, if the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAc2-B1 within the 3A acceptance permitted state, this will trigger a "change after 3A acceptance (post-3A acceptance performance)" in response to the operation acceptance to occur again, as shown in Figures 152(f) and (g) (the performance situation shown in Figure 154(e)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAc2-B1 in the 3A acceptance permitted state, as shown in FIG. 152(f) and (g), a change after 3A acceptance is caused in which the "first post-acceptance output sound SA3 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" in response to the operation acceptance for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "3A post-acceptance display (one video display)" in response to the operation acceptance for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

In this example, it is assumed that even when operation on the 3A operation unit is started again at timing tAc2-B1 within the 3A reception permitted state, the performance content corresponding to the 3A reception permitted state has not progressed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 154(e), the post-3A reception change (post-3A reception display, post-3A reception sound, etc.) will start to be executed in the same manner as when the post-3A reception change was first started based on the operation reception on the 3A operation unit at timing tAc2-A1. The details of the performance are as described above, so a description will be omitted here.

In this regard, the examples of effects shown in Figures 152 and 154 are based on the assumption that the operation by the player (operation state of the 3A operation unit) that begins at timing tAc2-B1 will be maintained until timing tAc2-B3, activating the auto-repeated function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 (the period during which the 3A operation unit is again maintained in the operating state), the 3A operation unit receives operations multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function, and each time, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception (for example, a post-acceptance display, a post-acceptance output sound, a post-acceptance light emission, a post-acceptance role operation, etc.) is executed.

And even during the "period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 (the period during which the 3A operation unit is again maintained in the operating state)," the appearance when such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function (such as the repetitive tapping display HA3a and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a) is the same as in the above-mentioned "period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2" (see FIG. 154(b)), unless the performance content progresses. Note that the details of the performance are as described above, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

However, in the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 152, it is assumed that the performance content corresponding to the 3A reception permission state progresses based on the operation reception at timing tAc2-B2 within that period, out of the multiple operations received by the auto-repeat function (the performance situation shown in FIG. 154(f)).

Therefore, during the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 152, during the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B2, the "Third A post-acceptance change (third A post-acceptance performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has not progressed, whereas during the period from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3, the "Third A post-acceptance change (third A post-acceptance performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has progressed.

More specifically, during the period from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3, at "timing tAc2-B2" when the performance content progresses, as shown in Figures 152(e) and 154(f), a display change is executed in which the state of the situation suggestion display JA3, which suggests the operation state, is changed from the previously displayed "state JA3a" to a different "state JA3b" based on the operation reception to the 3A operation unit. Here, as shown in Figure 154(f), the enemy character BOSS-A3 is changed to an injured state, the lightning magic cast by ally character YS-A3 is changed to a state of higher strength, and the gauge image HP-A3 is changed to an state in which the remaining HP gauge has decreased. With this configuration, the change in state of the status suggestion display JA3 indicates that the performance content corresponding to the 3A reception permission state has progressed due to (the result of performance determination based on) the operation reception (by the auto-tap function) performed at timing tAc2-B2.

After the performance has progressed in this way, when one operation is accepted at the 3A operation unit, the "one animation display" will be displayed as the "display after 3A acceptance" in the above-mentioned manner, in which the performance has progressed, such as "ally character YS-A3 uses stronger lightning magic to attack the injured enemy character BOSS-A3," as shown in FIG. 154(f).

In this example, once the performance content has progressed, the degree of progress of the performance content will not be returned to the state before the progress was made as long as the 3A reception permission state continues. Therefore, even when an operation is received again at the 3A operation unit after the one video display that has changed to the above-mentioned advanced performance content has ended, the state when the operation was received at the 3A operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-A3" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A3" with lightning magic) appears as one video display that has changed to the advanced performance content.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, during the period from timing tAc2-B2 onwards when the performance content has progressed, the "one video display" in which such a change in appearance has occurred will be played multiple times, the number of times that operations have been accepted by the auto-hit function.

In addition, even during the period after timing tAc2-B2 when the performance has progressed, the mode (one animation display) of ally character YS-A3 attacking enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning magic is set to be newly executed at regular intervals (predetermined intervals) as the above-mentioned post-acceptance change. Therefore, the above-mentioned "one animation display" of the performance when the performance has progressed is also newly executed at regular intervals by the auto-hit function, and the repeated display of the "one animation display" of such a progress mode is represented in the figure as "hit display HA3b".

In this way, in the performance display device 1600 of this example, when "timing tAc2-B2" arrives, which is the timing at which the performance content progresses, the state of the situation suggestion display JA3 changes from "state JA3a" to "state JA3b," and the state of the rapid-hitting display HA3 also changes from "state HA3a" to "state HA3b," as shown in Figures 152(e) and (f) and 154(e) and (f). From this point on, while the auto rapid-hitting function is enabled (timing tAc2-B2 to tAc2-B3), while the situation suggestion display JA3 is displayed in "state JA3b," the rapid-hitting display HA3 is executed in "state HA3b."

In this example, the state of the rapid-hit display HA3 is changed according to the progress of the presentation content, but it may not change according to the progress of the presentation content. In other words, even if the rapid-hit display HA3 is allowed to continue to be executed in one state regardless of the progress of the presentation content, the player can check through the rapid-hit display HA3 that the auto rapid-hit function is enabled and the number of times (frequency) that operations are being accepted, and can also check the degree of progress of the presentation content through the state of the status suggestion display JA3.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is accepted once for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 3A acceptance permitted state, in addition to the above-mentioned "3A acceptance post-display", a first post-acceptance output sound can be output as the above-mentioned "3A acceptance post-output sound" as shown in FIG. 152(g). As described above, such "3A acceptance post-output sound" can be the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display", as well as the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 that suggests that the performance content corresponding to the 3A acceptance permitted state has progressed, as shown in FIG. 152(h).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 152, when timing tAc2-B2 arrives, at which the performance content progresses, as shown in FIG. 152(h), the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 starts to be output in mode SB3b-1 based on the operation acceptance (performance progress) at timing tAc2-B2. This allows the player to recognize that the performance content has progressed through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound. It is desirable to set the output time of the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 to be longer than that of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 in response to the operation acceptance.

However, in this example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display", is realized as being output in the same manner before and after the performance content progresses. Therefore, when timing tAc2-B2 arrives, which is the timing at which the performance content progresses, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 will begin to be output as a new "sound effect" based on the operation being accepted, but the manner in which it is output will be the same as when the operation was accepted before timing tAc2-B2 (the manner of execution is the same whether or not performance progress occurs at timing tAc2-B2).

In this case, the sound effect (first post-acceptance output sound SA3) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" will be newly output in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-tap function throughout the entire period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 when the so-called auto-tap function is enabled, and this repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the figure as the "first post-acceptance output sound SA3a." Note that the output manner of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a during this period is the same as in the above-mentioned "period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2," so a description thereof will be omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is not changed according to the progress of the performance content, but it may be changed according to the progress of the performance content.

However, even when the rapid-fire display HA3b is being executed by this auto rapid-fire function (the period from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3), as shown in FIG. 154(f), the rapid-fire display HA3b repeatedly shows "ally character YS-A3 attacking injured enemy character BOSS-A3 with high-power lightning magic" at regular intervals, which may make the "situation suggestion display JA3" less visible or less noticeable, making it difficult to recognize the status of the operation in the 3A acceptance permitted state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples shown in Figures 152 and 154 are based on the assumption that the player again interrupts operation of the 3A operation unit at timing tAc2-B3 and disables the auto-repeat function in order to more actively check the operation status in the 3A reception-permitted state.

As described above, in the 3A reception permission state, even if the operation state of the 3A operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) and the auto-tap function is disabled while the 3A reception permission state continues, the tapping display HA3, which had been in an active state until then, is not made invisible as a result of this. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(f) and FIG. 154(g), even if the operation state of the 3A operation unit is interrupted at timing tAc2-B3, the tapping display HA3b will continue to be in an active state even after timing tAc2-B3 (even after the 3A operation unit becomes non-operated), for example, until the "one video display" that was in an active state is executed and displayed for a predetermined display time and is finished, or for a predetermined time from the non-operated state.

Also, similarly to the case of the rapid-hitting display HA3a, if the operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operating state while the rapid-hitting display HA3b is being displayed, the time from the non-operating state to the time the rapid-hitting display HA3b is made invisible is not set to a fixed time but is made indefinite.

As described above, in the 3A reception permission state, even if the operation state of the 3A operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operated state) while the 3A reception permission state continues and the auto-repeated tap function is disabled, the first post-reception output sound SA3a that was in the output state until then will not be put into a non-output state as a result. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(g) and the like, even if the operation state of the 3A operation unit is interrupted once at timing tAc2-B3, the first post-reception output sound SA3a will continue to be output after timing tAc2-B3 (even after the 3A operation unit becomes non-operated), until the above-mentioned "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in the execution state is executed and output for a predetermined output time and is finished, or for a predetermined time from the non-operated state.

However, the timing tAc2-B3 shown in FIG. 152 is intended to cover the case where the operation state of the 3A operation unit is interrupted while the second post-acceptance output sound SB3, which started to be output at the timing tAc2-B2, continues to be output.

In this regard, in the 3A reception permission state, like the first post-reception output sound SA3, the second post-reception output sound SB3 is not terminated (made inaudible) when the operation state of the 3A operation unit is interrupted (made into a non-operated state) as a trigger. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(h) and the like, even if the operation state of the 3A operation unit is interrupted once at timing tAc2-B3, the second post-reception output sound SB3b-1 will continue to be output after timing tAc2-B3 (even after the 3A operation unit becomes non-operated), until it is executed and output for a predetermined output time or for a predetermined time from the non-operated state.

In this example, if the operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted while the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 is being output and the operation is put into a non-operated state, the time from the non-operated state until the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is not output is set to a fixed time, but is indefinite. Similarly, for the second post-acceptance output sound SB3, if the operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted while the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is being output and the operation is put into a non-operated state, the time from the non-operated state until the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is not output is set to a fixed time, but is indefinite.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass from the point in time when the operation state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily suspended (put into a non-operating state) and the auto-tap function is disabled, before the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 become inaudible, i.e., when it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-tap function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 3A acceptance permission state, and it is expected that this will create a suitable sense of tension in the act of temporarily suspending the operation state of the 3A operation unit.

In addition, in the 3A reception permission state according to this embodiment, even if the operation state of the 3A operation unit is interrupted (set to a non-operation state) while the continuous hitting display HA3b and the first post-reception output sound SA3a are in the execution state, the timing at which the continuous hitting display HA3b is made to be in the non-display state and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is made to be in the non-output state are made to be different from each other, as shown in Fig. 152 (f) and (g), etc. In the same figure, the timing at which the continuous hitting display HA3b is made to be in the non-display state is set to be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is made to be in the non-output state, but the relationship may be set to be the opposite. Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned nature that the time until the display is made to be in the non-display or non-output state is indefinite, the timing at which the continuous hitting display HA3b is made to be in the non-display state may be both before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is made to be in the non-output state and after that timing. Also, the timings may be the same. This relationship between the rapid-hit display HA3b and the first post-reception output sound SA3a also holds true between the rapid-hit display HA3b and the second post-reception output sound SB3, and between the first post-reception output sound SA3a and the second post-reception output sound SB3, and the same can be said for other examples.

According to such a configuration, in the 3A reception allowable state according to this embodiment, when the operation state of the 3A operation unit is interrupted (when the operation state is set to a non-operation state) while the continuous hitting display HA3b, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-1 are each in an execution state, as shown in Figures 152 (f), (g), (h) and Figure 154 (g), a situation will appear in which the continuous hitting display HA3b continues to be displayed, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a continues to be output, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-1 continues to be output while the 3A operation unit is set to a non-operation state. However, after this, as time passes since the 3A operation unit is set to a non-operation state (time passes from timing tAc2-B3), the continuous continuous hitting display HA3b will be made non-displayed, as shown in Figures 152 (f) and 154 (h), etc. This not only allows the player to easily recognize that the auto-hit function has been disabled, but also allows the player to easily recognize the state of the status indication JA3 (here, the state JA3b where the presentation content has progressed) that indicates the operating state, such as the ally character YS-A3, enemy character BOSS-A3, and gauge image HP-A3 (see FIG. 154 (h)).

Also, normally, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 will both end (become inaudible) as the time elapses since the 3A operation unit is put into a non-operated state (the time elapses from timing tAc2-B3).

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 152(a), it is assumed that the 3A operation unit is again put into an operating state at timing tAc2-C1 (the performance situation shown in FIG. 154(i)) after timing tAc2-B3 when the 3A operation unit is put into a non-operated state and when both the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 are in an audible state (before the output state is ended).

In this example, even if the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAc2-C1 within the 3A acceptance permitted state, this will again trigger a "change after 3A acceptance (post-3A acceptance performance)" in response to the operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 152(f) and (g) (the performance situation shown in Figure 154(i)), just as in the case of timing tAc2-B1 described above.

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAc2-C1 in the 3A acceptance permitted state, as shown in FIG. 152(f) and (g), a change after 3A acceptance is caused in which the "first post-acceptance output sound SA3 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" in response to the operation acceptance for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "3A post-acceptance display (one video display)" in response to the operation acceptance for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed again.

In this example, it is assumed that when operation of the 3A operation unit is started again at timing tAc2-C1 in the 3A reception permission state, the performance content corresponding to the 3A reception permission state does not progress from the state shown in FIG. 154(h) (first stage progress state). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 154(i), the post-3A reception change (post-3A reception display, post-3A reception sound, etc.) will start to be executed in the same state as when the post-3A reception change was first started to be executed based on the operation reception of the 3A operation unit at timing tAc-B2. The details of the performance are as described above, so the explanation will be omitted here.

However, as described above, in this example, it is assumed that the timing tAc2-C1 at which operation of the 3A operation unit is started again occurs while both the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 are in an audible state.

In this regard, for the first post-acceptance output sound SA3, the previous output state is terminated based on the fact that an operation on the 3A operation unit is started again at timing tAc2-C1 (operation acceptance has been made), and a new output is started in response to the new operation acceptance. In contrast, for the second post-acceptance output sound SB3, the previous output state is continued without any change based on the fact that an operation on the 3A operation unit is started again at timing tAc2-C1 (operation acceptance has been made).

With this configuration, in the 3A reception permitted state, when an operation is received for a 3A operation unit that was previously in a non-operated state while a 3A post-reception output sound is being output in response to the operation reception, this triggers either the 3A post-reception output sound to end (first post-reception output sound SA3) or not to end (second post-reception output sound SB3), so it is possible to provide an ideal sense of tension when the 3A operation unit that was previously in a non-operated state is put into an operating state again.

The repeated tap display HA3 may also be configured to continue to be displayed at timing tAc2-C1. In this case, when an operation is received from the 3A operation unit that had not been operated up until that point, it is desirable to end the previous "one-shot video display" that was in progress and start a new display (one-shot video display) in response to the new operation reception instead.

The presentation examples shown in Figures 152 and 154 assume that the operation by the player (operation state of the 3A operation unit) that begins at timing tAc2-C1 is maintained until timing tAc3 when the 3A acceptance acceptance state ends, activating the auto-repeated function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 (the period during which the 3A operation unit is again maintained in the operating state), the 3A operation unit receives operations multiple times by the auto-tap function, and each time, a post-acceptance change in response to the operation reception (for example, a post-acceptance display, a post-acceptance output sound, a post-acceptance light emission, a post-acceptance role operation, etc.) is executed.

And even during the "period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 (the period during which the 3A operation unit is again maintained in the operating state)", the appearance when such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated tapping function (such as the repetitive tapping display HA3b and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a) is the same as in the above-mentioned "period from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3" (see FIG. 154(f)), unless there is any further progress in the presentation content. Note that the details of the presentation are as described above, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

However, in the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 in the example shown in FIG. 152, it is assumed that the performance content corresponding to the 3A reception permission state will progress further (a second stage of progress will be made) based on the operation reception (such as the result of the performance determination) made at timing tAc2-C2 within that period out of the multiple operation receptions made by the auto-rapid tapping function (the performance situation shown in FIG. 154(j)). In particular, in the period from timing tAc2-C2 in this example, it is assumed that the performance content corresponding to the 3A reception permission state will progress to the final stage of the performance mode.

In this regard, the third A reception permission state differs from the first A reception permission state and the second A reception permission state described above in that the valid period is not terminated midway even if the performance content corresponding to the third A reception permission state progresses to the final performance state, and occurs as a type of valid period that is guaranteed to continue until timing tAc3 (see, for example, Figures 152 (a) and (e) and Figure 154 (j)).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc2-C2 in the example shown in FIG. 152, the "3A post-acceptance change (3A post-acceptance performance)" in response to the operation acceptance is executed in a state in which the performance content has progressed only once (see FIG. 154(i)), whereas in the period from timing tAc2-C2 to timing tAc3, while the state in which operation acceptance to the 3A operation unit is permitted continues, the "3A post-acceptance change (3A post-acceptance performance)" is executed in a state in which the performance content has progressed further (final stage performance mode) (see FIG. 154(j)).

More specifically, at timing tAc2-C2, as shown in FIG. 152(e) and FIG. 154(j), a display change is executed to change the state of the status suggestion display JA3, which indicates the status of the operation, from the previously displayed "state JA3b" to a different "state JA3c" based on the operation acceptance to the 3A operation unit. Here, as shown in FIG. 154(j), the enemy character BOSS-A3 is changed to a state in which it has been defeated, the lightning magic of the ally character YS-A3 is changed to a state in which it is exploding around the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image HP-A3 is changed to a state in which the remaining HP gauge is further decreased (here, "0"). With this configuration, through the change in state of the status suggestion display JA3, it is suggested that the performance content corresponding to the 3A acceptance permission state has progressed due to the operation acceptance (by the auto-tap function) (the result of the performance judgment based on) performed at timing tAc2-C2.

As mentioned above, the "mode JA3c" as the status indication JA3 corresponds to the "final stage performance mode" among the performance contents corresponding to the 3A reception permission state.

After further development of the presentation in this way, when one operation is accepted at the 3A operation unit, the "one animation display" will be displayed as the "display after 3A acceptance" in the above-mentioned manner, with the presentation being further advanced, such as "ally character YS-A3 uses a stronger lightning magic spell to defeat enemy character BOSS-A3," as shown in FIG. 154(j).

In this example, once the performance content has progressed further, the degree of progress of the performance content will not be returned to the state before the progress was made as long as the 3A reception permission state continues. Therefore, even when an operation is received again at the 3A operation unit after the one video display that has changed to the further advanced performance content has ended, the state when the operation was received at the 3A operation unit (here, the state in which the ally character YS-A3 uses a stronger lightning magic spell to defeat the enemy character BOSS-A3) appears as one video display that has changed to the further advanced performance content.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, during the period from timing tAc2-C2 onwards when the performance content has progressed, the "one video display" in which further changes in appearance have occurred will be played multiple times, the number of times that operations have been accepted by the auto-hit function.

Even during the period after timing tAc2-C2, the mode (one animation display) in which ally character YS-A3 uses even stronger lightning magic to defeat enemy character BOSS-A3 is set to be newly executed at regular intervals (predetermined intervals) as the above-mentioned post-acceptance change. Therefore, the above-mentioned "one animation display" of the further advanced performance content is also newly executed at regular intervals by the auto-hit function, and the repeated display of the "one animation display" of such an advanced mode is represented in the figure as "hit display HA3c".

Thus, in this example of the performance display device 1600, when "timing tAc2-C2" arrives, at which the performance content is further advanced, the state of the situation suggestion display JA3 changes from "state JA3b" to "state JA3c," and the state of the rapid-hitting display HA3 also changes from "state HA3b" to "state HA3c," as shown in Figures 152(e), (f) and 154(i), (j). From this point on, while the auto rapid-hitting function is enabled (timing tAc2-C2 to tAc3), the situation suggestion display JA3 is displayed in "state JA3c," while the rapid-hitting display HA3 is executed in "state HA3c."

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is accepted once for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 3A acceptance permitted state, in addition to the above-mentioned "3A acceptance post-display", a first post-acceptance output sound can be output as the above-mentioned "3A acceptance post-output sound" as shown in FIG. 152(g). As described above, such "3A acceptance post-output sound" can be the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display", as well as the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 that suggests that the performance content corresponding to the 3A acceptance permitted state has progressed, as shown in FIG. 152(h).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 in the example shown in FIG. 152, when timing tAc2-C2 arrives, at which the presentation content progresses, as shown in FIG. 152(h), the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 begins to be output in mode SB3b-2 based on the operation acceptance (presentation progress) at timing tAc2-C2. This allows the player to recognize that the presentation content has progressed through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound.

However, in this example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display", is realized as being output in the same manner before and after the performance content progresses. Therefore, when timing tAc2-C2 arrives, which is the timing at which the performance content progresses, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 will begin to be output as a new "sound effect" based on the operation being accepted, but the manner in which it is output will be the same as when the operation was accepted before timing tAc2-C2 (the manner of execution is the same whether or not performance progress occurs at timing tAc2-C2).

In this case, the sound effect (first post-acceptance output sound SA3) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" will be newly output in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-tap function throughout the entire period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 when the so-called auto-tap function is enabled, and this repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the figure as the "first post-acceptance output sound SA3a." Note that the output manner of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a during this period is the same as in the above-mentioned "period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2," so a description thereof will be omitted here.

In this regard, the examples of effects shown in Figures 152 and 154 are based on the assumption that the auto-hit function enabled at timing tAc2-C1 continues, and timing tAc3 arrives, ending the 3A acceptance permission state.

In this case, the 3A reception permission state will end while the status indication JA3 and rapid-hitting indication HA3 are displayed, and the first post-reception output sound SA3 and the second post-reception output sound SB3 are being output, as shown in Figures 152 (e) to (h), and the auto rapid-hitting function will also be disabled.

Here, as shown in FIG. 152(e) and FIG. 154(k), the status suggestion display JA3 is made to be in a non-display state based on the termination of the 3A reception permission state. In the examples shown in FIG. 152(e) and FIG. 154(k), the status suggestion display JA3 is made to be in a non-display state when the 3A reception permission state is terminated, but this is not limited to this. For example, if the status suggestion display JA3 is made to be in a non-display state when a certain time (a time longer than 0 seconds) has elapsed from the timing tAc3 at which the 3A reception permission state is terminated, it is possible to preferably secure time to confirm the progress of the performance even if it is made just before the termination of the 3A reception permission state. In this case, it is desirable to always make the timing at which the status suggestion display JA3 is made to be in a non-display state later than the timing at which the hit-in-progress display HA3 described later is made to be in a non-display state.

Furthermore, unlike the above-mentioned first A reception permission state (repeated tapping display HA1) and the above-mentioned second A reception permission state (repeated tapping display HA2), the repeated tapping display HA3 is not made to be in a non-display state when the third A reception permission state is ended. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(f) and FIG. 154(k), the repeated tapping display HA3b will continue in its execution state even after timing tAc3 (even after the third A reception permission state is ended), for example, until the "one video display" that was in the execution state is executed and displayed for a predetermined display time and is finished, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

In addition, when the 3A reception permission state is ended while the rapid tap display HA3 is displayed, unlike the 1A reception permission state (repeated tap display HA1) and the 2A reception permission state (repeated tap display HA2), the time from when the 3A reception permission state is ended to when the rapid tap display HA3 is hidden is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

Furthermore, unlike the above-mentioned first A reception permission state (repeated tap display HA1) and the above-mentioned second A reception permission state (repeated tap display HA2), the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is not made to be in a non-output state when the third A reception permission state is ended. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(g) and the like, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a will continue in its output state even after timing tAc3 (even after the third A reception permission state is ended) until the above-mentioned "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in the output state is executed and output for a predetermined output time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Furthermore, as in the case of the above-mentioned first A reception permission state (repeated tap display HA1) and the above-mentioned second A reception permission state (repeated tap display HA2), the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is not made to be in a non-output state when the third A reception permission state ends. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(h) and the like, the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 will continue in its output state even after timing tAc3 (even after the third A reception permission state ends) until it has been executed and output for a predetermined output time, or for a predetermined time from a non-operation state.

In this example, when the 3A reception permission state is ended while the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 is being output, the time from the end of the 3A reception permission state to when the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is not output is not set to a fixed time but is made indefinite. Similarly, when the 3A reception permission state is ended while the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is being output, the time from the end of the 3A reception permission state to when the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is not output is not set to a fixed time but is made indefinite.

In addition, in the third A reception permission state according to this embodiment, even when the third A reception permission state is terminated while the continuous hitting display HA3 and the first post-reception output sound SA3a are in the execution state, the timing at which the continuous hitting display HA3 is made invisible and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is made non-output are made different from each other, as shown in FIG. 152(f) and (g). In the figure, the timing at which the continuous hitting display HA3 is made invisible is before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is made non-output, but the relationship may be set to the opposite. Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned nature that the time until the display is made invisible or non-output is indefinite, the timing at which the continuous hitting display HA3 is made invisible may be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is made non-output, or after that timing. Also, the timing may be the same. This relationship between the rapid-hit display HA3 and the first post-reception output sound SA3a also holds true between the rapid-hit display HA3 and the second post-reception output sound SB3, and between the first post-reception output sound SA3a and the second post-reception output sound SB3, and the same can be said for other examples.

According to this configuration, in the 3A reception permission state according to this embodiment, when the player plays to interrupt the operation state of the 3A operation unit while the continuous hitting display HA3c, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-2 are each in an execution state (when the operation state is set to a non-operation state), as shown in Figures 152 (f), (g), and (h) and Figure 154 (k), a situation will appear in which the continuous hitting display HA3c continues to be displayed, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a continues to be output, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-2 continues to be output. However, after this, as time passes since the end of the 3A reception permission state (time passes from timing tAc3), the continuous continuous hitting display HA3b is made invisible, and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-2 are made non-output.

In this example, it is assumed that timing tAc2-C2 arrives after the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-1, which began to be output at timing tAc2-B2, has become inaudible, but it may also arrive while the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-1 is being audibly output. In this case, the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 may be output in a form that changes from "mode SB3b-1" to a different "mode SB3b-2" at timing tAc2-C2 (mode SB3b-1 is terminated and mode SB3b-2 is used instead).

The 3A reception-permitted state occurs as a reception-permitted state in which the automatic button function described above is not enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 153, when no operation is received on the 3A operation unit until timing tAc3 arrives in the 3A reception-permitted state, the 3A reception-permitted state is simply ended based on the arrival of timing tAc3, and the post-3A reception change that appears when an operation is performed on the 3A operation unit is not started.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "4A reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). FIG. 155 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "4A reception permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "condition 4A" as the occurrence condition and an operation is performed by the player. FIG. 156 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "4A reception permitted state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the "4A reception permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "4th A fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the "4th A fluctuation pattern". After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 4th A fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 4th A fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "4th A fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 155(c), during the execution period of the variable performance related to the "4A variable pattern", based on the arrival of timing tAd2 when the 4A time has elapsed since the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 4A"), it is possible to generate the above-mentioned 4A reception permission state (valid period) in which "acceptance of operations to the 4A operation unit regarding changes after 4A acceptance (such as the 4A performance status indication display JA4, the 4A single-shot display TA4, and the output sounds SA4 and SB4 after 4A acceptance)" is permitted (the situation shown in FIG. 157(a)).

Here, in the 4A reception permission state according to this embodiment, the "4A operation unit" for which operation reception is permitted is set as the above-mentioned operation button 410, and multiple operations are permitted to be received until the 4A reception permission state is terminated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this presentation example, as shown in Figs. 155(b)-(e), when the 4A reception permission state occurs, a model image display MG-A4 modeling the object to be operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 4A operation unit), a message display MA4 related to the operation of the object to be operated (here, the "operation button 410" as the 4A operation unit), and a status suggestion display JA4 suggesting the status of the operation are displayed at the arrival of timing tAd1 before the 4A reception permission state occurs (before operation reception for the 4A operation unit is permitted).

However, the model image display MG-A4, message display MA4, and situation suggestion display JA4 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the 4A reception permission state occurs, and may be displayed at the same time as the 4A reception permission state occurs, or slightly after the occurrence. However, in this example, it is particularly desirable for the situation suggestion display JA4 to be realized as being displayed before the first operation reception is made to the 4A operation unit in the 4A reception permission state. Also, the timing at which the model image display MG-A4 is displayed and the timing at which the message display MA4 is displayed may be different from each other. For example, the message display MA4 may be displayed before the model image display MG-A4 is displayed.

After the model image display MG-A4, message display MA4, and status indication display JA4 start to be displayed, they will continue to be displayed at least until the 4A reception permission state is terminated, regardless of the operation state of the 4A operation unit.

Here, the "Mock image display MG-A4" corresponding to the 4A reception permission state uses only the "first color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" as its color scheme.

In addition, the "imitation image display MG-A4" corresponding to the 4A reception acceptance state is such that when a moving image in which a part simulating the "operation receiving part" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the form shown in FIG. 144(α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the forms shown in FIG. 144(β) to (σ)" is considered as one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 5A time. However, this period of 5A time is set as a longer time (long cycle) than the period of 1A time that appears in the 1A reception acceptance state, and may be set as the same time as the period of 2A time, for example. Therefore, in the 4A reception acceptance state, the "operation receiving part" is depicted slowly moving up and down within its movable range.

As shown in FIG. 156(b), the 4A reception permission state continues until timing tAd3 arrives when there is no operation reception to the 4A operation unit, and ends when timing tAd3 arrives. Therefore, while the 4A reception permission state continues, a gauge image (in this example, an image in the model image display MG-A4) indicating the remaining time until timing tAd3 arrives at which the 4A reception permission state ends is depicted as decreasing over time, but this depiction does not necessarily have to be done.

When the "mock image display MG-A4" corresponding to the 4A reception permission state is started to be displayed before the timing tAd2 at which the 4A reception permission state occurs, it is desirable to wait until the timing tAd2 before starting the periodic changes and the changes in the gauge image. In other words, in this case, the "mock image display MG-A4" corresponding to the 4A reception permission state will be displayed in a manner that maintains the appearance shown in FIG. 144 (α) until the timing tAd2 arrives.

Furthermore, in the 4A reception permission state according to this example, as shown in Figs. 155(c), (d) and 157(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-A4, a message display related to the reception of operations on the 4A operation unit (here, operation button 410) (here, message display MA4 displayed as "Defeat the demon! Press the button repeatedly!!").

Furthermore, in the 4A reception allowance state in this example, as shown in Figures 155 (e) and 157 (a), a situation suggestion display JA4 indicating the status of operation in the 4A reception allowance state is displayed, which includes an ally character corresponding to the type of the 4A reception allowance state (here, ally character YS-A4) and an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 4A reception allowance state (here, enemy character BOSS-A4 depicted as a demon), as well as a gauge image HP-A4 showing their remaining HP gauge. In the 4A reception permission state, the expectation of a big win can be suggested through the presentation of "whether or not the ally character YS-A4 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A4 by receiving multiple operations on the 4A operation unit (whether or not the gauge image HP-A4 can be set to 0)." In other words, each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "4A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)," a presentation can be executed in which the "ally character YS-A4" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A4." In this example, the ally character YS-A4, the enemy character BOSS-A4, and the gauge image HP-A4 are displayed as the situation suggestion display JA4, but it is not necessary to display all of these displays. As long as at least one of the ally character YS-A4, the enemy character BOSS-A4, and the gauge image HP-A4 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation situation.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 155, it is assumed that the first operation is received for the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAd2-A1 in the 4A reception permitted state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 157(b)).

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAd2-A1 in the 4A acceptance permitted state, a "change after 4A acceptance (post 4A acceptance performance)" will occur in response to the operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 155(e), (g), and (h) (the performance situation shown in Figure 157(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAd2-A1 in the 4A acceptance permitted state, as shown in Figs. 155(f) and (g), a "4A post-acceptance output sound" in response to the operation acceptance for the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output as a change after 4A acceptance, and a "4A post-acceptance display" in response to the operation acceptance for the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

That is, when an operation is accepted once for the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 4A acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 157(b), a single animated display of "ally character YS-A4" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A4" with wind-based magic (such as smoke effects or the generation of wind-based magic) is displayed as the "display after 4A acceptance". However, as will be described later, in the 4A acceptance state, each time an operation is accepted, "enemy character BOSS-A4" is injured, the strength of the wind-based magic increases, and the remaining HP gauge of gauge image HP-A4 decreases (the performance content progresses). When the performance content has progressed in this way, the state when the operation was subsequently accepted by the 4A operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-A4" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A4" with wind-based magic) will be displayed as a single animated display that has changed to the progressed performance content (see, for example, Figures 155(e) and (f) and Figures 157(d), (f), and (h)).

However, as will be described later, the 4A reception allowing state in this example, like the above-mentioned third reception allowing state, occurs as a valid period of a type that does not end early due to operation reception (before timing tAd3 when the 4A reception allowing state ends due to the passage of time). In other words, in this case, if during the valid period of such a type (4A reception allowing state), the performance content corresponding to the 4A reception allowing state is necessarily changed (advanced) each time an operation is received, the processing when the performance content progresses to the final state becomes problematic.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned 3A reception allowable state, when an operation is further accepted under a situation in which the performance content corresponding to the 3A reception allowable state has progressed to the final state, the post-acceptance change to the final state is repeatedly caused each time the operation is accepted. In contrast, in the 4A reception allowable state according to this example, when an operation is further accepted under a situation in which the performance content corresponding to the 4A reception allowable state has progressed to the final state, the operation acceptance is used as a trigger to cause the first performance mode (predetermined performance mode) to appear, and the performance is redone from the situation in which the first performance mode (predetermined performance mode) appears. The first performance mode (predetermined performance mode) may be a mode that appears when the 3A reception allowable state occurs, or may be a mode that appears based on the first operation acceptance having been made since the 3A reception allowable state occurred. With this configuration, even after the performance content has progressed to the final state, it becomes possible to repeatedly enjoy the performance progress from the first performance mode to the final mode. It may be possible to suggest that the possibility (expectation) of a jackpot being obtained is high each time the performance content progresses. In this case, if no big win has been obtained, the initial presentation mode (predetermined presentation mode) will appear in response to an operation received before the game progresses to the final mode, and the performance will be restarted from the state where the initial presentation mode (predetermined presentation mode) appears.

In this example, when an operation is accepted once for the "4A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 4A acceptance permitted state, in addition to the above-mentioned "4A acceptance display", the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 can be output as the above-mentioned "4A acceptance output sound" as shown in FIG. 155(g). The first post-acceptance output sound SA4 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which the ally character YS-A4 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A4 with a wind-based magic (such as a smoke effect or the generation of a wind-based magic)" that appears as the above-mentioned "4A acceptance display". In addition, at this time, as described later, there is a possibility that the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 may be further output as the "4A acceptance output sound". The second post-acceptance output sound SB4 in this example is output when the performance content of the above-mentioned "4A acceptance display" progresses. Note that here, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is realized as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; the point is that it should be something that can suggest that an operation by the player has been accepted.

In this way, in the 4A reception permitted state, each time an operation is received from the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)," a depiction of "ally character YS-A4" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A4" and associated sound effects are displayed; that is, multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A4" reduce the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A4" (the presentation progresses), and when the HP reaches 0 as a result, it means that "enemy character BOSS-A4" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests high expectations. However, in this case, if the HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-A4" cannot be defeated, this suggests low expectations.

This example assumes that the operation by the player (operation state of the 4A operation unit) that is started at timing tAd2-A1 is continued until timing tAd2-A2, as shown in FIG. 155(a).

However, unlike the 1A reception allowance state, the 2A reception allowance state, and the 3A reception allowance state, the 4A reception allowance state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state in which even if the operation unit (4A operation unit) is maintained in an operation state, the corresponding post-reception change (e.g., post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, post-reception role operation, etc.) is not executed multiple times (the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled)." Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 155(a), during the period from timing tAd2-A1 to timing tAd2-A2 (the period in which the 4A operation unit is maintained in an operation state), the operation acceptance for the 4A operation unit is only performed once at timing tAd2-A1, and only one post-reception change (e.g., post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, post-reception role operation, etc.) corresponding to the operation acceptance at timing tAd2-A1 is executed.

Therefore, in this example, at timing tAd2-A1, as the display after receipt of the above-mentioned 4A, as shown in FIG. 157(b), a display (one animation display) of ally character YS-A4 attacking enemy character BOSS-A4 with wind-based magic (smoke effects, the generation of wind-based magic, etc.) will begin.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 157(b), as the display after the 4A acceptance, the enemy character BOSS-A4 is changed to a state in which it has received a first stage of wounds, the wind magic of the ally character YS-A4 is displayed as a single display TA4 (state TA4a), and the gauge image HP-A4 is changed to a state in which the remaining HP gauge has decreased by one stage. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA4 (enemy character BOSS-A4, ally character YS-A4, gauge image HP-A4) changes from the "state JA4a" before the operation to "state JA4b," which suggests that the performance content corresponding to the 4A acceptance permission state has progressed based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAd2-A1.

As described above, the status indication display JA4 that has changed in this way will continue to be displayed at least until the 4A reception permission state is terminated, so the player can easily recognize what operating situation they are currently in while the 4A reception permission state continues.

In contrast, the single display TA4 depicted as a wind-based magic by the ally character YS-A4 is hidden after a predetermined time (a certain amount of time) has passed. The performance examples shown in Figures 155 and 157 are based on the assumption that the time has passed before the timing tAd2-A2 arrives and the single display TA4 (mode TA4a) is hidden. In this example, the single display TA4 is displayed in different modes depending on the progress of the performance content, but it may be displayed in one mode (the same mode) regardless of the progress of the performance content. Alternatively, in the 4A reception-permitting state according to this example, when an operation is received, the mode of the situation suggesting display JA4 always changes, and considering that it is possible to indicate that an operation has been received, the single display TA4 may not necessarily be displayed.

In addition, at timing tAd2-A1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) begins to be output so as to function as a sound effect corresponding to this 4A post-acceptance display (attacking mode), and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) begins to be output in mode SB4b-1 to indicate that the performance content corresponding to the 4A acceptance permission state has progressed to the first stage mode.

In this regard, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 corresponding to the 4A acceptance permission state is output continuously at least until the 4A acceptance permission state is terminated, and as a result, while the 4A acceptance permission state continues, the player can easily recognize what operating situation the player is currently in through its appearance. However, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 does not necessarily have to be output in an output state while the 4A acceptance permission state continues, and may be output, for example, as being output for a predetermined output time (a time shorter than the time between timings tAd2 and tAd3) and then switched to a non-output state.

In contrast, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is switched to a non-output state after a predetermined time (a fixed time) has elapsed. The performance example shown in FIG. 155 assumes that the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is switched to a non-output state after the time tAd2-A2 has arrived and that time has elapsed.

In other words, in this case, timing tAd2-A2 arrives while the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 are both in an output state. However, in this example, neither the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 nor the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 undergoes any change when the 4A operating unit is put into a non-operated state (when timing tAd2-A2 arrives).

In this example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is realized as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect, and it is sufficient if it can suggest that an operation by the player has been accepted. In addition, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is output in one form (the same form) regardless of the degree of progress of the presentation content, but it may be output in different forms depending on the degree of progress of the presentation content. Alternatively, in the 4A acceptance permission state in this example, when an operation is accepted, the second post-acceptance output sound SA4 is always output, and considering that this can suggest that an operation has been accepted, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 may not necessarily be output.

Here, in the 4A reception permission state, there may be cases where the player performs an operation to put the 4A operation unit into a non-operating state and an operation to put the 4A operation unit into an operating state again from the non-operating state before the time required for the "one video display (single display TA4)" in response to the operation reception has elapsed (while the one-time display TA4 is being displayed). In this case, the "single display TA4" is executed in such a manner that the "certain time" elapses between the start and end of the "one video display" in response to the operation reception, and a new "one video display" is started. In this case, the new "one video display" may be executed in place of the previous "one video display" that was in the middle of being executed and terminated.

Similarly, in the 4A reception permission state, there may be cases where the player performs an operation to put the 4A operation unit into a non-operating state and an operation to put the 4A operation unit into an operating state again from the non-operating state before the time required for the "sound effect corresponding to one video display (first post-reception output sound SA4)" in response to the operation reception has elapsed (while the first post-reception output sound SA4 is being output). In this case, the "first post-reception output sound SA4" is executed in such a manner that the "certain time" elapses and a new "single sound effect" is executed at a timing before the "single sound effect" in response to the operation reception is started and finished, but at this time, the new "single sound effect" may be executed in place of the previous "single sound effect" that was in the middle of being executed and ended midway.

As mentioned above, the "situation suggestion display JA4 (see FIG. 155(e))" of the ally character YS-A4, enemy character BOSS-A4, gauge image HP-A4, etc. is not displayed until an operation is accepted, and may be realized as appearing and displayed when an operation is accepted (until the valid period ends, or for a predetermined period of time).

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to such an example of presentation, at the timing tAd2-A2 when the 4A operation unit is put into a non-operated state, the presentation situation shown in FIG. 157(c) appears, but this presentation situation does not appear as a result of the 4A operation unit being put into a non-operated state. It is just that, among the 4A post-acceptance displays and 4A post-acceptance output sounds (situation suggestion display JA4, single-shot display TA4, first post-acceptance output sound SA4, second post-acceptance output sound SB4) that started to be executed at the timing tAd2-A1, those for which the conditions for terminating the execution state have not yet been satisfied at the time when the timing tAd2-A2 arrives continue to be executed (situation suggestion display JA4, first post-acceptance output sound SA4, second post-acceptance output sound SB4), and those for which the conditions for terminating the execution state have been satisfied before the arrival of the timing tAd2-A2 end their execution state at that time (a time before the timing tAd2-A2).

In addition, in this example, if the operation of the 4A operation unit is interrupted while the single-shot display TA4 is displayed and the operation unit is put into a non-operated state, the time from the non-operated state to the time the single-shot display TA4 is put into a hidden state is not set to a fixed time but is made variable.

In addition, in this example, if the operation of the 4A operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operated state while the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is being output, the time from when the non-operated state is put into a state where the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is not output is set to a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite.

In addition, in the 4A reception permission state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the 4A operation unit is interrupted (set to a non-operation state) while the one-off display TA4 and the first post-reception output sound SA4 are both in an execution state, the timing at which the one-off display TA4 is set to a non-display state and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA4 is set to a non-output state are made to differ from each other. In this example, the relationship between which of the one-off display TA4 and the first post-reception output sound SA4 is terminated first is not reversed, and for example, the one-off display TA4 is always terminated before the first post-reception output sound SA4.

In this configuration, in the 4A reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, if the player plays in such a way that the operation state of the 4A operation unit is interrupted (set to a non-operating state) while the single-shot display TA4 and the first post-reception output sound SA4 are both in an execution state, a situation will appear in which the single-shot display TA4 continues to be displayed and the first post-reception output sound SA4 continues to be output while the 4A operation unit is in a non-operating state.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 155(a), it is assumed that at timing tAd2-B1 in the 4A reception-permitting state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 157(d)), the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state, and this operating state continues until timing tAd2-B2.

In this example, if the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAd2-B1 in the 4A acceptance acceptance state, this will trigger a "change after 4A acceptance (post 4A acceptance performance)" in response to that operation acceptance to occur again for the amount corresponding to one operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 155(e)-(h) (the performance situation shown in Figure 157(d)).

However, as mentioned above, in this example, even if operation on the 4A operation unit is started again at timing tAd2-B1 within the 4A reception permitted state, the performance content corresponding to that 4A reception permitted state will progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 157(d), the post-4A reception changes (post-4A reception display, post-4A reception sound, etc.) will start to be executed in a manner that indicates a second stage of progress based on the reception of an operation on the 4A operation unit.

Therefore, in this example, at timing tAd2-B1, as the display after the reception of the above 4A, as shown in FIG. 157(d), in the second stage of progression, a display (one animation display) of ally character YS-A4 attacking enemy character BOSS-A4 with wind magic (smoke effects, the generation of wind magic, etc.) will begin.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 157(d), as the display after the 4A acceptance, the enemy character BOSS-A4 is changed to a state in which he is wounded to the second stage, the wind magic of the ally character YS-A4 is displayed as a single display TA4 in the second stage state TA4b, and the gauge image HP-A4 is changed to a state in which the HP gauge remains and has decreased by two stages. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA4 (enemy character BOSS-A4, ally character YS-A4, gauge image HP-A4) changes from "state JA4b" before the second operation to "state JA4c", which suggests that the performance content corresponding to the 4A acceptance permission state has progressed based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAd2-B1.

In addition, at timing tAd2-B1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) begins to be output to function as a sound effect corresponding to this 4A post-acceptance display (attacking mode), and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) begins to be output in mode SB4b-2 to indicate that the performance content corresponding to the 4A acceptance permission state has progressed to the second stage.

Here, in this example of the performance, timing tAd2-B1 arrives while the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (fourth A post-acceptance output sound) that began to be output at timing tAd2-A1 is in an output state. At this time, at said timing tAd2-B1, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (fourth A post-acceptance output sound) ends the first-stage mode SB4b-1 that was in an output state, and instead begins outputting in the second-stage mode SB4b-2.

In addition, timing tAd2-B2 is based on the assumption that while the single display TA4 is displayed, operation of the 4A operation unit is interrupted and the unit is put into a non-operated state. As described above, the time from the non-operated state to the non-display of the single display TA4 is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

Then, at timing tAd2-B2 when the 4A operation unit is again put into a non-operated state, the presentation status shown in FIG. 157(e) will appear, but this presentation status does not appear as a result of the 4A operation unit being put into a non-operated state. It is simply that the conditions for terminating the execution state of the 4A post-acceptance display and 4A post-acceptance output sound (situation suggestion display JA4, single display TA4, first post-acceptance output sound SA4, and second post-acceptance output sound SB4) that began execution at timing tAd2-B1 have not yet been met even at the time when timing tAd2-B2 arrives, and so the execution state continues.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 155(a), it is assumed that at timing tAd2-C1 in the 4A reception-permitting state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 157(f)), the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is once again put into an operating state, and this operating state continues until timing tAd2-C2.

In this example, if the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAd2-C1 within the 4A acceptance acceptance state, this will trigger a "4A post-acceptance change (4A post-acceptance performance)" in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 155(e)-(h), once again for the amount corresponding to one operation acceptance (the performance situation shown in Figure 157(f)).

However, as mentioned above, in this example, even if an operation is started again on the 4A operation unit at timing tAd2-C1 within the 4A reception permitted state, the performance content corresponding to that 4A reception permitted state will progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 157(f), a post-4A reception change (post-4A reception display, post-4A reception sound, etc.) will start to be executed in a manner that indicates a third stage of progress based on the reception of an operation on the 4A operation unit.

Therefore, in this example, at timing tAd2-C1, as the display after the reception of the above 4A, as shown in FIG. 157(f), in the third stage of progression, the display (one animation display) will begin in which ally character YS-A4 attacks enemy character BOSS-A4 with wind magic (smoke effects, the generation of wind magic, etc.).

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 157(f), as the display after the 4A acceptance, the enemy character BOSS-A4 is changed to a state in which he is wounded to the third stage, the wind magic of the ally character YS-A4 is displayed as a single display TA4 in the third stage state TA4c, and the gauge image HP-A4 is changed to a state in which the HP gauge remains and has decreased by three stages. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA4 (enemy character BOSS-A4, ally character YS-A4, gauge image HP-A4) changes from "state JA4c" before the second operation to "state JA4d," which suggests that the performance content corresponding to the 4A acceptance permission state has progressed based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAd2-C1.

In addition, at timing tAd2-C1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) begins to be output to function as a sound effect corresponding to this 4A post-acceptance display (attacking mode), and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) begins to be output in mode SB4b-3 to indicate that the performance content corresponding to the 4A acceptance permission state has progressed to the third stage.

In this example, timing tAd2-C1 arrives while the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4, which began output at timing tAd2-B1, are both in an output state. At this time, at timing tAd2-C1, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) ends the second-stage mode SB4b-2 that was in an output state and starts outputting in the second-stage mode SB4b-3 in its place. Also, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) ends the sound that was in an output state and starts outputting again from the beginning in its place.

Then, at timing tAd2-C2 when the 4A operation unit is again put into a non-operated state, the presentation status shown in FIG. 157(g) appears, but this presentation status does not appear as a result of the 4A operation unit being put into a non-operated state. It is just that, of the 4A post-acceptance displays and 4A post-acceptance output sounds (situation suggestion display JA4, single display TA4, first post-acceptance output sound SA4, second post-acceptance output sound SB4) that began execution at timing tAd2-C1, those for which the conditions for terminating their execution state have not yet been met at the time when timing tAd2-C2 arrives continue to be executed (situation suggestion display JA4, first post-acceptance output sound SA4, second post-acceptance output sound SB4), and those for which the conditions for terminating their execution state have been met before the arrival of timing tAd2-C2 end their execution state at that time (a time before timing tAd2-C2).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 155(a), at timing tAd2-D1 in the 4A reception-permitting state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 157(h)), the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is once again put into an operating state, and this operating state is assumed to continue at least until timing tAd3.

In this example, if the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAd2-D1 in the 4A acceptance permitted state, this will trigger a "change after 4A acceptance (post 4A acceptance performance)" in response to that operation acceptance to occur once again, for the amount corresponding to one operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 155(e)-(h) (the performance situation shown in Figure 157(h)).

However, as mentioned above, in this example, even if an operation is once again started on the 4A operation unit at timing tAd2-D1 within the 4A reception permitted state, the performance content corresponding to that 4A reception permitted state will progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 157(h), a change after 4A reception (such as a display after 4A reception or a sound output after 4A reception) will start to be executed in a manner that corresponds to a fourth stage of progress based on the reception of an operation on the 4A operation unit.

In this example, at timing tAd2-D1, as the display after the acceptance of the above 4A, as shown in FIG. 157(h), in the final (fourth stage) progression state, the display (one animation display) will begin in which ally character YS-A4 attacks enemy character BOSS-A4 with wind magic (smoke effects, the generation of wind magic, etc.).

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 157(h), the display after the 4A acceptance is changed to one in which the enemy character BOSS-A4 has been defeated, the wind magic of the ally character YS-A4 is displayed in the final state TA4d as a single-shot display TA4, and the gauge image HP-A4 is changed to one in which the remaining HP gauge is 0. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA4 (enemy character BOSS-A4, ally character YS-A4, gauge image HP-A4) changes from "state JA4d" before the second operation to "state JA4e," suggesting that the performance content corresponding to the 4A acceptance permission state has progressed based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAd2-D1.

In addition, at timing tAd2-D1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) starts to be output so as to function as a sound effect corresponding to this 4A post-acceptance display (attacking mode), and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) starts to be output in mode SB4b-4 to suggest that the performance content corresponding to the 4A acceptance permission state has progressed to the final stage (fourth stage).

In this example, timing tAd2-D1 arrives while the second post-acceptance output sound SB4, which began output at timing tAd2-C1, is in an output state. At this time, at timing tAd2-D1, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (fourth A post-acceptance output sound) ends the third stage mode SB4b-3 that was in an output state, and starts outputting in the final stage (fourth stage) mode SB4b-4 instead.

The examples of effects shown in Figures 155 and 157 are based on the assumption that, among the 4A post-acceptance display and 4A post-acceptance output sound (situation suggestion display JA4, one-off display TA4, first post-acceptance output sound SA4, and second post-acceptance output sound SB4) that were started to be executed at timing tAd2-D1, timing tAd3 arrives when the 4A acceptance permission state ends while the situation suggestion display JA4, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 are each in an execution state.

In this case, the 4A reception permission state is ended while the situation suggestion display JA4 is displayed and the first post-reception output sound SA4 and the second post-reception output sound SB4 are being output, as shown in Figures 155 (e) to (h).

Here, as shown in FIG. 155(e) and FIG. 157(i), the status indication JA4e that was in a displayed state is made non-displayed based on the termination of the 4A reception permission state.

However, as shown in FIG. 155 and FIG. 157(i), the status indication JA4 may be changed (advanced) from the status that was being displayed until the timing tAd3 arrives to status JA4L, and the status JA4L may be displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the 4A reception permission state ends.

As for the status JA4L of the situation suggestion display JA4, a number of types (JA4La-JA4Le) may be prepared as necessary to correspond to the statuses (JA4a-JA4e) of the situation suggestion display JA4 that may be in a display state at the timing tAd3, and when the timing tAd3 arrives, the status JA4L corresponding to the status displayed at that time may be selectively executed. Incidentally, the examples shown in Figures 155 and 157 are based on the assumption that the status JA4e of the situation suggestion display JA4 is changed (advanced) to status JA4Le when the timing tAd3 arrives, in response to the status JA4e of the situation suggestion display JA that was displayed at the time the timing tAd3 arrives.

In the examples shown in FIG. 155 and FIG. 157(i), the single display TA4 is in a hidden state, but if timing tAd3 arrives while the single display TA4 is being displayed, the end of the 4A reception permission state will trigger the single display TA4 not to be hidden. In other words, in this case, the single display TA4 will continue to be in an execution state even after timing tAd3 (even after the 4A reception permission state ends), for example, until the "one video display" that was in an execution state is executed and displayed for a predetermined display time and is finished, or for a predetermined time from a non-operation state.

In addition, if the 4A reception permission state is ended while the one-off display TA4 is displayed, the time from when the 4A reception permission state is ended to when the one-off display TA4 is made invisible is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

The first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is not put into a non-output state when the 4A acceptance permission state is ended. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 155(g) and the like, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 will continue in its output state even after timing tAd3 (even after the 4A acceptance permission state is ended) until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in the output state has been executed for a predetermined output time and output is completed, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

The second post-acceptance output sound SB4 is not put into a non-output state when the 4A acceptance permission state is ended. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 155(h) and the like, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 continues to be output after timing tAd3 (after the 4A acceptance permission state is ended) until it is executed and output for a predetermined output time, or for a predetermined time from a non-operation state.

In this example, when the 4A reception permission state is ended while the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is being output, the time from the end of the 4A reception permission state to the time when the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is not output is set to be a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite. Similarly, when the 4A reception permission state is ended while the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 is being output, the time from the end of the 4A reception permission state to the time when the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is not output is set to be a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite.

In addition, in the 4A reception permission state according to this embodiment, even when the 4A reception permission state is terminated while the single display TA4 and the first post-reception output sound SA4 are both in an execution state, the timing at which the single display TA4 is made invisible and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA4 is made non-output are made different from each other. In this example, the relationship between which of the single display TA4 and the first post-reception output sound SA4 is terminated first is not reversed, and for example, the single display TA4 is always terminated before the first post-reception output sound SA4. Note that such a relationship between the single display TA4 and the first post-reception output sound SA4 also holds true between the single display TA4 and the second post-reception output sound SB4, and between the first post-reception output sound SA4 and the second post-reception output sound SB4, and the same can be said for other examples.

The 4A reception-permitted state occurs as a reception-permitted state in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 156, when no operation is received on the 4A operation unit until timing tAd3 arrives in the 4A reception-permitted state, the 4A reception-permitted state is simply ended based on the arrival of timing tAd3, and the 4A post-reception change that appears when an operation is performed on the 4A operation unit is not started.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "5A reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). FIG. 158 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "5A reception permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "condition 5A" as the occurrence condition and an operation is performed by the player. FIG. 159 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "5A reception permitted state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the "5A reception permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "5A fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the "5A fluctuation pattern". After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 5A fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 5A fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "5A fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 158(c), during the execution period of the variable performance related to the "5A variable pattern", based on the arrival of timing tAe2 when the 5A time has elapsed since the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ started (based on the satisfaction of "condition 5A"), it is possible to generate the above-mentioned 5A reception permission state (valid period) in which "acceptance of operations to the 5A operation unit regarding changes after 5A acceptance (such as the 5A performance status indication display JA5, the 5A single-shot display TA5, and the post-5A acceptance output sounds SA5, SB5)" is permitted (the situation shown in FIG. 160(a)).

Here, in the 5A reception permission state according to this embodiment, the "5A operation section" that is permitted to receive multiple operations is set as the sword ornament 5001, not the operation button 410, and multiple operations are permitted to be received until the 5A reception permission state is terminated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this presentation example, as shown in Figures 158(b) to (e), when the 5A reception permission state occurs, a model image display MG-A5 modeling the object of operation by the player (here, the "sword decoration 5001" as the 5A operation unit), a message display MA5 related to the operation on the object of operation (here, the "sword decoration 5001" as the 5A operation unit), and a status suggestion display JA5 suggesting the status of the operation are displayed at the arrival of timing tAe1 before the 5A reception permission state occurs (before operation reception on the 5A operation unit is permitted).

However, the model image display MG-A5, message display MA5, and situation suggestion display JA5 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the occurrence of the 5A reception permission state, but may be displayed at the same time as the 5A reception permission state occurs, or slightly after the occurrence. Also, the timing at which the model image display MG-A5 is displayed and the timing at which the message display MA5 is displayed may be different from each other. For example, the message display MA5 may be displayed before the model image display MG-A5 is displayed.

In this example, the mock image display MG-A5 and message display MA5 will continue to be displayed at least until the 5A reception permission state ends, regardless of the operation state of the 5A operation unit, after they have started to be displayed, but the situation suggestion display JA5 will be hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed.

Here, the "Mock image display MG-A5" corresponding to the 5A reception permission state is configured to use only a "specific color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" as its color scheme.

In addition, the "imitation image display MG-A5" corresponding to the 5A reception acceptance state is such that when a moving image in which a part simulating the "operation receiving part" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the form shown in FIG. 144(α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the forms shown in FIG. 144(β) to (σ)" is considered as one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 5A time. This period of 5A time is set as a longer time (long cycle) than the period of 1A time that appears in the 1A reception acceptance state, and may be set as the same time as the period of 2A time, for example. Therefore, in the 5A reception acceptance state, the "operation receiving part" is depicted slowly moving up and down within its movable range.

However, as mentioned above, in the 5A reception-permitted state, an image modeled after the sword ornament 5001 is displayed as the "model image display MG-A5" instead of the operation button 410. Therefore, the "model image display MG-A5" is not actually displayed in the "form shown in FIG. 144(α)", but appears as a form in which the "form shown in FIG. 144(α)" has been replaced with an image modeled after the sword ornament 5001, rather than the operation button 410.

As shown in FIG. 159(b), the 5A reception permission state continues until timing tAe3 arrives when there is no reception of operation to the 5A operation unit, and ends when timing tAe3 arrives. Therefore, while the 5A reception permission state continues, a gauge image (in this example, an image in the model image display MG-A5) indicating the remaining time until timing tAe3 arrives at which the 5A reception permission state ends is depicted as decreasing over time, but this depiction does not necessarily have to be done.

When the "mock image display MG-A5" corresponding to the 5A reception acceptance state is started to be displayed before the timing tAe2 at which the 5A reception acceptance state occurs, it is desirable to wait until the timing tAe2 before starting the periodic changes and the changes in the gauge image. In other words, in this case, the "mock image display MG-A5" corresponding to the 5A reception acceptance state will be displayed in a manner that maintains the appearance shown in FIG. 144 (α) (actually, replaced with an image that imitates the sword decoration 5001) until the timing tAe2 arrives.

Furthermore, in the 5A reception permission state according to this example, as shown in Figs. 158(c), (d) and 160(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-A5, a message display related to the reception of operations for the 5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001) (here, the message display MA5 displayed as "Defeat the goblins! 'Strike' the sword!!").

Furthermore, in the 5A reception acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 158 (e) and 160 (a), a situation suggestion display JA5 indicating the status of operation in the 5A reception acceptance state is displayed, which includes an ally character corresponding to the type of the 5A reception acceptance state (here, the ally character YS-A5) and an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 5A reception acceptance state (here, the enemy character BOSS-A5 depicted as a goblin), as well as a gauge image HP-A5 showing their remaining HP gauge. In the 5A reception permission state, the expectation of a big win can be suggested through the presentation of "whether or not the ally character YS-A5 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A5 by receiving multiple operations on the 5A operation unit (whether or not the gauge image HP-A5 can be set to 0)." In other words, each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "5A operation unit (here, the sword decoration 5001)," a presentation can be executed in which the "ally character YS-A5" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A5." In this example, the ally character YS-A5, the enemy character BOSS-A5, and the gauge image HP-A5 are displayed as the situation suggestion display JA5, but it is not necessary to display all of these displays. As long as at least one of the ally character YS-A5, the enemy character BOSS-A5, and the gauge image HP-A5 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation situation.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 158, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted for the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tAe2-A1 in the 5A acceptance acceptance state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 160(b)).

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tAe2-A1 within the 5A acceptance acceptance state, a "change after 5A acceptance (post 5A acceptance performance)" will occur in response to that operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 158 (e) to (h) (the performance situation shown in Figure 160 (b)).

More specifically, when an operation is accepted for the "5A operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001)" at timing tAe2-A1 in the 5A acceptance acceptance state, as shown in Figures 158 (f) and (g), a "5A post-acceptance output sound" in response to the operation acceptance for the "5A operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001)" is audibly output as a change after 5A acceptance, and a "5A post-acceptance display" in response to the operation acceptance for the "5A operation unit (here, the sword decorative body 5001)" begins to be displayed.

That is, when an operation is accepted once for the "5A operation unit (here, sword decoration 5001)" in the 5A acceptance state, as the "display after 5A acceptance", as shown in FIG. 160(b), one animated display is displayed in which "ally character YS-A5" uses swordsmanship to attack "enemy character BOSS-A5" (such as the generation of smoke effects or slashing effects). However, as will be described later, in the 5A acceptance state, each time an operation is accepted, "enemy character BOSS-A5" is wounded, the strength of the swordsmanship increases, and the remaining HP gauge of gauge image HP-A5 decreases (the performance content progresses). When the performance content has progressed in this way, the state when the operation was subsequently accepted by the 5A operation unit (here, the state in which "ally character YS-A5" uses swordsmanship to attack "enemy character BOSS-A5") will be displayed as a single animated display that has changed to the progressed performance content (see, for example, Figures 158 (e) and (f) and Figures 160 (d) and (f)).

However, as will be described later, the 5A reception allowance state in this example, like the third reception allowance state and the fourth reception allowance state described above, occurs as a valid period of a type that does not end early due to operation reception (before timing tAe3 when the 5A reception allowance state ends due to the passage of time). In other words, in this case, if during the valid period of such a type (5A reception allowance state), the performance content corresponding to the 5A reception allowance state is necessarily changed (advanced) each time an operation is received, the processing when the performance content progresses to the final state becomes problematic.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned 3A reception allowing state, when an operation is further accepted in a situation where the performance content corresponding to the 3A reception allowing state has progressed to the final state, the post-acceptance change related to the final state is repeatedly generated each time the operation is accepted. In contrast, in the 5A reception allowing state according to this example, when an operation is further accepted in a situation where the performance content corresponding to the 5A reception allowing state has progressed to the final state, the post-acceptance change related to the final state may be repeatedly generated each time the operation is accepted. However, as will be described later, in the 5A reception allowing state according to this example, when an operation is further accepted while the post-acceptance display (5A post-acceptance display) is displayed due to the post-acceptance change related to the final state, the post-acceptance display related to the final state is not redisplayed, and the display state of the displayed post-acceptance display is maintained and continued. In addition, once the post-acceptance output sound (5A post-acceptance output sound) has been output in the final state, it will not be output again even if further operation acceptance is made, regardless of the output status of the post-acceptance output sound in the final state. With this configuration, once the performance content has progressed to the final state, even if further operation acceptance is made, post-acceptance changes in the final state are less likely to occur, or the execution mode is restricted (at least the post-acceptance output sound will not be output), so that the "5A operation unit (here, sword decoration 5001)" can be prevented from being handled carelessly.

In addition, in this example, when an operation is accepted once for the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the 5A acceptance permitted state, in addition to the above-mentioned "5A acceptance display", the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 can be output as the above-mentioned "5A acceptance output sound" as shown in FIG. 158(g). The first post-acceptance output sound SA5 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which the ally character YS-A5 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A5 using swordsmanship (such as the generation of a smoke effect or a slashing effect)" that appears as the above-mentioned "5A acceptance display". In addition, at this time, as will be described later, there is a possibility that the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 may be further output as the "5A acceptance output sound". The second post-acceptance output sound SB5 in this example is output when the performance content of the above-mentioned "5A acceptance display" progresses. Note that here, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 is realized as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; in short, it is sufficient if it can indicate that an operation by the player has been accepted.

In this way, in the 5A reception permitted state, each time an operation is received from the "5A operation unit (here, the sword decoration 5001)," a depiction of "ally character YS-A5" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A5" and associated sound effects are displayed; that is, multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A5" reduce the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A5" (the presentation progresses), and when the HP reaches 0 as a result, it means that "enemy character BOSS-A5" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests high expectations. However, in this case, if the HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and the "enemy character BOSS-A5" cannot be defeated, this suggests low expectations.

This example assumes that the operation by the player (operation state of the 5A operation unit) that begins at timing tAe2-A1 is continued until timing tAe2-A2, as shown in FIG. 158(a).

However, unlike the 1A reception allowance state, the 2A reception allowance state, and the 3A reception allowance state, the 5A reception allowance state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state in which even if the operation unit (5A operation unit) is maintained in an operation state, the corresponding post-reception change (e.g., post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, post-reception role operation, etc.) is not executed multiple times (the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled)." Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158(a), during the period from timing tAe2-A1 to timing tAe2-A2 (the period in which the 5A operation unit is maintained in an operation state), the operation acceptance for the 5A operation unit is only performed once at timing tAe2-A1, and only one post-reception change (e.g., post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, post-reception role operation, etc.) corresponding to the operation acceptance at timing tAe2-A1 is executed.

Therefore, in this example, at timing tAe2-A1, as the display after receipt of the above-mentioned 5A, as shown in FIG. 160(b), a display (one video display) of ally character YS-A5 using swordsmanship to attack enemy character BOSS-A5 (such as the generation of smoke effects and slashing effects) will begin.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 160(b), as the display after the 5A acceptance, the enemy character BOSS-A5 is changed to a state in which it has received a first stage of wounds, an attack using swordsmanship by ally character YS-A5 is displayed as a single display TA5 (state TA5a), and the gauge image HP-A5 is changed to a state in which the remaining HP gauge has decreased by one stage. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA5 (enemy character BOSS-A5, ally character YS-A5, gauge image HP-A5) changes from "state JA5a" before the operation to "state JA5b," which suggests that the performance content corresponding to the 5A acceptance permission state has progressed based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAe2-A1.

However, as mentioned above, the status indication display JA5 that has changed in this way will not necessarily continue to be displayed until the 5A reception permission state is terminated; in other words, it will be displayed for a predetermined period of time (a fixed period of time) from the time the status change occurs (from the time the operation is received) and then will be made non-displayed.

The single-shot display TA5, which is depicted as an attack by friendly character YS-A5 using swordsmanship, is also hidden after a predetermined time (a certain time). The performance examples shown in FIG. 158 and FIG. 160 are based on the assumption that the time has passed before timing tAe2-A2 arrives and the single-shot display TA5 (mode TA5a) is hidden. In this example, the single-shot display TA5 is displayed in different modes depending on the progress of the performance content, but it may be displayed in one mode (the same mode) regardless of the progress of the performance content. Alternatively, in the 5A reception-permitting state according to this example, when an operation is received, the mode of the situation suggesting display JA5 always changes, and considering that it is possible to indicate that an operation has been received, the single-shot display TA5 may not necessarily be displayed.

In addition, at timing tAe2-A1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 (5A post-acceptance output sound) begins to be output to function as a sound effect corresponding to this 5A post-acceptance display (attacking mode), and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 (5A post-acceptance output sound) begins to be output in mode SB5b-1 to indicate that the performance content corresponding to the 5A acceptance permission state has progressed to the first stage mode.

In this regard, the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 corresponding to the 5A acceptance permission state is output for a predetermined time (a fixed time shorter than the time between timings tAe2 and tAe3) from when the performance progresses (when an operation that causes the performance progress is accepted) and then is made non-output. Similarly, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 is made non-output when a predetermined time (fixed time) has elapsed.

The example of the performance shown in FIG. 158 assumes that the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 are put into a non-output state after the timing tAe2-A2 arrives.

In other words, in this case, timing tAe2-A2 arrives while the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 are both in an output state. However, in this example, neither the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 nor the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 undergoes any change when the 5A operating unit is put into a non-operated state (when timing tAe2-A2 arrives).

In this example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 is realized as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect, and it is sufficient if it can suggest that an operation by the player has been accepted. In addition, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 is output in one form (the same form) regardless of the progress of the presentation content, but it may be output in different forms depending on the progress of the presentation content. Alternatively, in the 5A acceptance permission state in this example, when an operation is accepted, the second post-acceptance output sound SA5 is always output, and considering that this can suggest that an operation has been accepted, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 may not necessarily be output.

Here, in the 5A reception permission state, there may be cases where the player performs an operation to put the 5A operation unit into a non-operating state and an operation to put the 5A operation unit into an operating state again from the non-operating state before the time required for the "one video display (single display TA5)" in response to the operation reception has elapsed (while the one-shot display TA5 is being displayed). In this case, the "single display TA5" is executed in such a manner that the "certain time" elapses between the start and end of the "one video display" in response to the operation reception, and a new "one video display" is started to be executed. In this case, the new "one video display" may be executed in place of the previous "one video display" that was in the middle of being executed and terminated.

Similarly, in the 5A reception-permitted state, the player may perform an operation to put the 5A operation unit into a non-operating state and an operation to put the 5A operation unit into an operating state again before the time required for the "sound effect corresponding to one video display (first post-reception output sound SA5)" in response to the operation reception has elapsed (while the first post-reception output sound SA5 is being output). In this case, the "first post-reception output sound SA5" is executed in such a manner that the "certain time" elapses and a new "sound effect" is executed before the "sound effect" in response to the operation reception is started and finished, but in this case, the new "sound effect" may be executed in place of the previous "sound effect" that was in the middle of being executed and ended midway.

As mentioned above, the "situation suggestion display JA5 (see FIG. 158(e))" of the ally character YS-A5, enemy character BOSS-A5, gauge image HP-A5, etc. is not displayed until an operation is accepted, and may be realized as appearing and displayed when an operation is accepted (until the valid period ends, or for a predetermined period of time).

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to such an example of presentation, at the timing tAe2-A2 when the 5A operation unit is put into a non-operated state, the presentation situation shown in FIG. 160(c) appears, but this presentation situation does not appear as a result of the 5A operation unit being put into a non-operated state. It is just that, among the 5A post-acceptance display and the 5A post-acceptance output sound (situation suggestion display JA5, single-shot display TA5, first post-acceptance output sound SA5, second post-acceptance output sound SB5) that started to be executed at the timing tAe2-A1, those for which the conditions for terminating the execution state have not yet been satisfied at the time when the timing tAe2-A2 arrives continue to be executed (situation suggestion display JA5, first post-acceptance output sound SA5, second post-acceptance output sound SB5), and those for which the conditions for terminating the execution state have been satisfied before the arrival of the timing tAe2-A2 end their execution state at that time (a time before the timing tAe2-A2).

In addition, in this example, if the operation of the 5A operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operating state while the one-off display TA5 or the situation suggestion display JA5 is displayed, the time from the non-operating state to the time when the one-off display TA5 or the situation suggestion display JA5 is made invisible is not set to a fixed time but is made indefinite.

In addition, in this example, if the operation of the 5A operation unit is interrupted and put into a non-operated state while the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 or the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 is being output, the time from the non-operated state to the time when the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 or the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 is put into a non-output state is not set to a fixed time but is made indefinite.

In addition, in the 5A reception permission state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the 5A operation unit is interrupted (put into a non-operating state) while the one-off display TA5, the situation suggestion display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound SB5 are each in an execution state, the timing at which the one-off display TA5, the situation suggestion display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound SB5 are put into a non-executing (non-display, non-output) state is different from one another. In this example, the order in which they are terminated is not changed, and, for example, the one-off display TA5 is terminated the earliest of them all.

In this configuration, in the 5A reception-permitted state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the 5A operation unit is interrupted (set to a non-operating state) while the single-shot display TA5, the status suggestion display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound SB5 are each in an execution state, a situation will appear in which the single-shot display TA5, the status suggestion display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound SB5 continue to be in an execution state while the 5A operation unit is in a non-operating state.

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 158(a) and FIG. 160(d), it is assumed that even when the single display TA5, the situation suggestion display JA5, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 all end their execution states, no new operation is accepted by the 5A operation unit.

In this example, while the single-shot display TA5, the situation suggestion display JA5, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 are all in a non-executed state, as shown in FIG. 158(a), it is assumed that at timing tAe2-B1 in the 5A acceptance permitted state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 160(e)), the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is again put into an operating state, and this operating state continues until timing tAe2-B2.

In this example, if the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is again put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAe2-B1 within the 5A acceptance acceptance state, this will trigger a "change after 5A acceptance (performance after 5A acceptance)" in response to that operation acceptance, again for the amount corresponding to one operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 158 (e) to (h) (performance situation shown in Figure 160 (e)).

However, as mentioned above, in this example, even if operation on the 5A operation unit is started again at timing tAe2-B1 within the 5A reception permitted state, the performance content corresponding to that 5A reception permitted state will progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 160(e), the post-5A reception changes (post-5A reception display, post-5A reception sound, etc.) will start to be executed in a manner that indicates a second stage of progress based on the reception of an operation on the 5A operation unit.

Therefore, in this example, at timing tAe2-B1, as the display after accepting the above 5A, as shown in FIG. 160(e), in the second stage of progression, a display (one video display) will begin in which ally character YS-A5 uses swordsmanship to attack enemy character BOSS-A5 (such as smoke effects and slashing effects).

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 160(e), as the display after the 5A acceptance, the enemy character BOSS-A5 is changed to a state in which it has received a second stage of wounds, an attack using swordsmanship by the ally character YS-A5 is displayed in the second stage state TA5b as a single display TA5, and the gauge image HP-A5 is changed to a state in which the HP gauge remains and has decreased by two stages. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA5 (enemy character BOSS-A5, ally character YS-A5, gauge image HP-A5) changes from "state JA5b" before the second operation to "state JA5c", which suggests that the performance content corresponding to the 5A acceptance permission state has progressed based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAe2-B1.

In addition, at timing tAe2-B1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 (5A post-acceptance output sound) begins to be output to function as a sound effect corresponding to this 5A post-acceptance display (attacking mode), and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 (5A post-acceptance output sound) begins to be output in mode SB5b-2 to indicate that the performance content corresponding to the 5A acceptance permission state has progressed to the second stage.

Here, timing tAe2-B1 may arrive while the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 (5th A post-acceptance output sound) that began output at timing tAe2-A1 is in an output state. In this case, at timing tAe2-B1, the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 (5th A post-acceptance output sound) may end the first stage mode SB5b-1 that was in an output state and instead start outputting in the second stage mode SB5b-2.

In addition, timing tAe2-B2 is based on the assumption that while the single display TA5 is displayed, operation of the 5A operation unit is interrupted and the unit is put into a non-operated state. As described above, the time from the non-operated state to the non-display of the single display TA5 is not set to a fixed time but is set to be indefinite.

At timing tAe2-B2 when the 5A operation unit is again put into a non-operated state, the 5A post-acceptance display and the 5A post-acceptance output sound (situation suggestion display JA5, single display TA5, first post-acceptance output sound SA5, and second post-acceptance output sound SB5) that were started at timing tAe2-B1 continue to be executed because the conditions for terminating their execution have not yet been met, and no change will occur as a result of timing tAe2-B2.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 158(a), at timing tAe2-C1 in the 5A reception acceptance state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 160(f)), the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is once again put into an operation state, and this operation state is assumed to continue until timing tAe2-C2.

In this example, if the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is put into an operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAe2-C1 within the 5A acceptance acceptance state, this will trigger the "5A post-acceptance change (5A post-acceptance performance)" in response to that operation acceptance to occur once again, for the amount corresponding to one operation acceptance, as shown in Fig. 158 (e)-(h) (the performance situation shown in Fig. 160 (f)).

However, as mentioned above, in this example, even if an operation is started again on the 5A operation unit at timing tAe2-C1 within the 5A reception permitted state, the performance content corresponding to that 5A reception permitted state will progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 160(f), a post-5A reception change (post-5A reception display, post-5A reception sound, etc.) will start to be executed in a manner that corresponds to the third stage of progress (here, the final stage of progress) based on the reception of an operation on the 5A operation unit.

Therefore, in this example, at timing tAe2-C1, as the display after the acceptance of the above-mentioned 5A, as shown in FIG. 160(f), in the final (third stage) progression state, a display (one animation display) will begin in which ally character YS-A5 uses swordsmanship to defeat enemy character BOSS-A5 (such as the generation of smoke effects and slashing effects).

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 160(f), the display after the 5A acceptance is changed to one in which the enemy character BOSS-A5 has been defeated, an attack using swordsmanship by the ally character YS-A5 is displayed as a single display TA5 in the third stage TA5c, and the gauge image HP-A5 is changed to one in which the remaining HP gauge has decreased to 0. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA5 (enemy character BOSS-A5, ally character YS-A5, gauge image HP-A5) changes from "mode JA5c" before the second operation to "mode JA5d," thereby suggesting that the performance content corresponding to the 5A acceptance permission state has progressed based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAe2-C1.

In addition, at timing tAe2-C1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 (5A post-acceptance output sound) begins to be output to function as a sound effect corresponding to this 5A post-acceptance display (attacking mode), and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 (5A post-acceptance output sound) begins to be output in mode SB5b-3 to indicate that the performance content corresponding to the 5A acceptance permission state has progressed to the third stage.

Here, in this performance example, timing tAe2-C1 arrives while the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5, which began output at timing tAe2-B1, are both in an output state. At this time, at said timing tAe2-C1, the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 (5th A post-acceptance output sound) will end the second-stage mode SB5b-2 that was in an output state and start outputting in the second-stage mode SB5b-3 in its place. Also, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 (5th A post-acceptance output sound) will end the sound that was in an output state and start outputting again from the beginning in its place.

Then, at timing tAe2-C2 when the 5A operation unit is again put into a non-operated state, the presentation status shown in FIG. 160(g) appears, but this presentation status does not appear as a result of the 5A operation unit being put into a non-operated state. It is just that among the 5A post-acceptance display and the 5A post-acceptance output sound (situation suggestion display JA5, single display TA5, first post-acceptance output sound SA5, second post-acceptance output sound SB5) that started to be executed at timing tAe2-C1, those for which the conditions for terminating the execution state have not yet been satisfied at the time when timing tAe2-C2 arrives continue to be executed (situation suggestion display JA5, first post-acceptance output sound SA5, second post-acceptance output sound SB5), and those for which the conditions for terminating the execution state have been satisfied before the arrival of timing tAe2-C2 end their execution state at that time (a time before timing tAe2-C2).

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 158(a) and FIG. 160(h), it is assumed that even when the single display TA5, the situation suggestion display JA5, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 all end their execution states, no new operation is accepted by the 5A operation unit.

In this example, while the single-shot display TA5, the situation suggestion display JA5, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 are all in a non-executed state, as shown in FIG. 158(a), at timing tAe2-D1 in the 5A acceptance permitted state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 160(i)), the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is once again put into an operating state, and this operating state is assumed to continue at least until timing tAe3.

As described above, the performance content corresponding to the 5A reception-permitting state has already progressed to its final state due to the operation reception made at timing tAe2-C1. In this performance example, even if an operation is further received at timing tAe2-D1 under such circumstances, as shown in Figures 158(a) and 160(i), the situation suggestion display JA5 and single display TA5 will start to execute in the same state (final state) as when execution was started at timing tAe2-C1, corresponding to one operation reception.

However, as mentioned above, in this performance example, once the 5A post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA5, second post-acceptance output sound SB5) has been output in the final mode, it will not be output in response to further operation acceptance, regardless of the output status of the post-acceptance output sound in the final mode. Therefore, when an operation is accepted at timing tAe2-D1, the operation acceptance will be used as a trigger to start the 5A post-acceptance display (single display TA5, situation suggestion display JA5), but the 5A post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA5, second post-acceptance output sound SB5) will not be executed.

In this example, it is assumed that the situation suggestion display JA5d (final mode) that started to be displayed at timing tAe2-C1 is hidden and then timing tAe2-D1 arrives. However, it is also possible that the situation suggestion display JA5d (final mode) that started to be displayed at timing tAe2-C1 is still displayed when timing tAe2-D1 arrives (operation acceptance occurs). In this case, at timing tAe2-D1, the situation suggestion display JA5d (final mode) that was displayed up until that point may be made invisible and not redisplayed, but may be allowed to continue in that displayed state. In this case, the time for which the display state is maintained and continued may be reset based on timing tAe2-D1, not on timing tAe2-C1. In this case, not only will the output sound not be newly output after the 5A acceptance at timing tAe2-D1, but the situation suggestion display JA5d (final mode) will not be newly redisplayed.

The examples of effects shown in Figures 158 and 160 assume that the 5A post-acceptance display, which was started at timing tAe2-D1, is put into a non-executing state, and then timing tAe3 arrives, at which the 5A acceptance permission state ends.

However, there may be cases where the timing tAe3 arrives while the 5A post-reception display is in a displayed state. In this case, the 5A post-reception display that was in a displayed state until then may be switched to a hidden state based on the arrival of the timing tAe3.

There may also be cases where timing tAe3 arrives while the post-reception 5A output sound is in an output state. In this case, the post-reception 5A output sound that was in an output state until then may be switched to a non-output state based on the arrival of timing tAe3. However, the post-reception 5A display that was in a displayed state until then may be switched to a hidden state based on the arrival of timing tAe3, but the post-reception 5A output sound that was in an output state until then may be allowed to continue without being switched to a non-output state.

The 5A reception-permitted state occurs as a reception-permitted state in which the automatic button function described above is not enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 159, if no operation is received on the 5A operation unit until timing tAe3 arrives in the 5A reception-permitted state, the 5A reception-permitted state is simply ended based on the arrival of timing tAe3, and the 5A post-reception change that appears when an operation is performed on the 5A operation unit is not started.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of generating a "6A reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). FIG. 161 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "6A reception permitted state" occurs based on the satisfaction of "condition 6A" as the occurrence condition and an operation is performed by the player. FIG. 162 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "6A reception permitted state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the "6A reception permitted state" occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and the "6A fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the "6A fluctuation pattern". After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 6A fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback (normal BGM playback when not in reach, etc.) according to the 6A fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "6A fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 161(c), during the execution period of the variable performance related to the "6A variable pattern", based on the arrival of timing tAf2 when 6A time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ (based on the satisfaction of "condition 6A"), the above-mentioned 6A reception permission state (valid period) in which "operation acceptance to the 6A operation unit regarding changes after 6A acceptance (such as the 6A performance status indication display JA6, the 6A single-shot display TA6, and the post-6A acceptance output sounds SA6, SB6)" is permitted can be generated (the situation shown in FIG. 163(a)).

The 6A reception permission state in this embodiment allows reception of an operation to the "6A operation unit" only once until the 6A reception permission state is terminated, and the above-mentioned operation button 410 is set as the "6A operation unit."

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this presentation example, as shown in Figures 161(b) to (e), when the 6A acceptance acceptance state occurs, a model image display MG-A6 modeling the object to be operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 6A operation unit), a message display MA6 related to the operation of the object to be operated (here, the "operation button 410" as the 6A operation unit), and a status suggestion display JA6 suggesting the status of the operation are displayed at the arrival of timing tAf1 before the 6A acceptance acceptance state occurs (before acceptance of operations on the 6A operation unit is permitted).

However, the model image display MG-A6, message display MA6, and situation suggestion display JA6 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the 6A reception permission state occurs, and may be displayed at the same time as the 6A reception permission state occurs or slightly after the occurrence. Also, the timing at which the model image display MG-A6 is displayed and the timing at which the message display MA6 is displayed may be different from each other. For example, the message display MA6 may be displayed before the model image display MG-A6 is displayed.

Here, the "Mock image display MG-A6" corresponding to the 6A reception permission state can selectively use either the "first color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" or the "second color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme.

In addition, the "imitation image display MG-A6" corresponding to the 6A reception acceptance state is such that, when a moving image in which a part simulating the "operation receiving portion" that is the object of operation is "displayed in the form shown in FIG. 144(α) and then sequentially displayed in each of the forms shown in FIG. 144(β) to (σ)" is regarded as a periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 6A time. This period of 6A time is set as a longer time (long cycle) than the period of 1A time that appears in the 1A reception acceptance state, and may be set as the same time as the period of 2A time, for example. Thus, in the 6A reception acceptance state, the "operation receiving portion" is depicted slowly moving up and down within its movable range.

As shown in FIG. 162(b), the 6A reception permission state continues until timing tAf3 arrives when there is no operation reception to the 6A operation unit, and ends when timing tAf3 arrives. Therefore, while the 6A reception permission state continues, a gauge image (in this example, an image in the model image display MG-A6) indicating the remaining time until timing tAf3 arrives at which the 6A reception permission state ends is depicted as decreasing over time, but this depiction does not necessarily have to be done.

When the "imitation image display MG-A6" corresponding to the 6A reception permission state is started to be displayed before the timing tAf2 at which the 6A reception permission state occurs, it is desirable to wait until the timing tAf2 before starting the periodic change and the change in the gauge image. In other words, in this case, the "imitation image display MG-A6" corresponding to the 6A reception permission state is displayed in a manner that maintains the appearance shown in FIG. 144 (α) (actually, replaced with an image simulating the operation button 410) until the timing tAf2 arrives.

Furthermore, in the 6A reception acceptance state according to this example, as shown in Figs. 161(c), (d) and 163(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-A6, a message display related to the reception of operations on the 6A operation unit (here, operation button 410) (here, message display MA6 displayed as "Defeat the wizard! 'One hit' with the hammer!!") is displayed.

Furthermore, in the 6A reception acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 161 (e) and 163 (a), a situation suggestion display JA6 indicating the status of operation in the 6A reception acceptance state is displayed, which includes an ally character corresponding to the type of the 6A reception acceptance state (here, the ally character YS-A6) and an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 6A reception acceptance state (here, the enemy character BOSS-A6 depicted as a wizard), as well as a gauge image HP-A6 indicating their remaining HP gauge. In the 6A reception permission state, the expectation of a big win can be suggested through the presentation of "whether or not the ally character YS-A6 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A6 by one operation reception to the 6A operation unit (whether or not the gauge image HP-A6 can be set to 0)." In other words, when an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "6A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)," a presentation can be executed in which the "ally character YS-A6" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A6." In this example, the ally character YS-A6, the enemy character BOSS-A6, and the gauge image HP-A6 are displayed as the situation suggestion display JA6, but it is not necessary to display all of these displays. As long as at least one of the ally character YS-A6, the enemy character BOSS-A6, and the gauge image HP-A6 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation situation.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 161, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted for the "6A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAf2-A1 in the 6A acceptance acceptance state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 163(b)).

In this example, if an operation is accepted for the "6A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAf2-A1 in the 6A acceptance permitted state, a "change after 6A acceptance (post 6A acceptance performance)" will occur in response to the operation acceptance, as shown in Figures 161 (e) to (h) (the performance situation shown in Figure 163 (b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "6A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAf2-A1 in the 6A acceptance permitted state, as shown in FIG. 161(e)-(h), a "6A post-acceptance output sound" in response to the operation acceptance for the "6A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is audibly output as a post-6A acceptance change, and a "6A post-acceptance display (single display TA6, situation suggestion display JA6)" in response to the operation acceptance for the "6A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" begins to be displayed.

In other words, when an operation is accepted once for the "6A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 6A acceptance permitted state, a single animated display is displayed as the above-mentioned "display after 6A acceptance" in which "ally character YS-A6" uses a hammer to attack "enemy character BOSS-A6" (such as the generation of an impact effect), as shown in FIG. 163(b).

In this example, a single video display first displays an attack by friendly character YS-A6 using a hammer as a single display TA6. As a result, two modes are provided: one in which the enemy character BOSS-A6 is defeated, and one in which the enemy character BOSS-A6 is not defeated. The example shown in FIG. 163(b) is intended to be a display in which the enemy character BOSS-A6 is defeated.

More specifically, in the example shown in Figures 161 and 163, the "enemy character BOSS-A6" is defeated, the strength of the hammer increases, and the remaining HP gauge in the gauge image HP-A6 changes to 0. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA6 (enemy character BOSS-A6, ally character YS-A6, gauge image HP-A6) changes from the "status JA6a" before the operation to "status JA6b," suggesting that the player is now in an operational situation in which it has been possible to defeat the enemy character BOSS-A6 (suggesting that there is a high possibility that a jackpot has been obtained).

Although not shown in the figure, an attack using a hammer by friendly character YS-A6 is displayed as a single shot display TA6, and if the result is that the enemy character BOSS-A6 cannot be defeated, the "enemy character BOSS-A6" survives, the strength of the hammer decreases, and the gauge image HP-A6 is changed so that some of the remaining HP gauge remains. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA6 (enemy character BOSS-A6, friendly character YS-A6, gauge image HP-A6) changes from the "state JA6a" before the operation to a state different from "state JA6b", which suggests that the enemy character BOSS-A6 cannot be defeated (suggesting that the possibility of a jackpot being obtained is low).

In this example, when an operation is accepted for the "6A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 6A acceptance permitted state, in addition to the above-mentioned "6A post-acceptance display", a first post-acceptance output sound SA6 can be output as the above-mentioned "6A post-acceptance output sound" as shown in FIG. 161(g). Note that the first post-acceptance output sound SA6 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode (single display TA6) in which the ally character YS-A6 uses a hammer to attack the enemy character BOSS-A6" that appears as the above-mentioned "6A post-acceptance display". Note that in this example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA6 is realized as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect, and in short, it is sufficient if it can suggest that an operation has been accepted by the player.

In addition, at this time, a second post-acceptance output sound SB6 is also output as the "6th A post-acceptance output sound." In this example, the second post-acceptance output sound SB6 is provided in different forms for when the enemy character BOSS-A6 has been defeated (when the expectation level is high) and when the enemy character BOSS-A6 has not been defeated (when the expectation level is low), and is output in one of these forms.

In this way, in the 6A reception permitted state, when an operation is received from the "6A operation unit (here, operation button 410)," a depiction of "ally character YS-A6" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A6" and associated sound effects are displayed; in other words, when the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A6" drops to 0 with a single attack by "ally character YS-A6," it means that "enemy character BOSS-A6" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests high expectations. However, in this case, if the HP does not drop to 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-A6" cannot be defeated, it suggests low expectations.

This example assumes that the operation by the player (operation state of the 6A operation unit) that is started at timing tAf2-A1 is continued until timing tAf2-A2, as shown in FIG. 161(a).

However, the 6A acceptance permitted state is one in which acceptance of an operation to the 6A operation unit is permitted only once. Therefore, a second acceptance of an operation will not occur in the period from timing tAf2-A1 to timing tAf2-A2, and timing tAf2-A2 will not cause any change to the performance in the execution state.

The single display TA6, the situation suggestion display JA6, the first post-acceptance output sound SA6, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB6, which began execution at timing tAf2-A1, are each executed for a predetermined period of time before being put into a non-executing state. These effects are each executed for a different period of time, and each ends their execution state at a different timing.

In addition, the execution states of the single display TA6, the situation suggestion display JA6, the first post-acceptance output sound SA6, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB6, which began at timing tAf2-A1, end an indefinite period of time from timing tAf2-A2.

In this example, the single display TA6 is displayed in the same display mode when it appears that the enemy character BOSS-A6 has been defeated and when it appears that the enemy character BOSS-A6 has not been defeated. However, the single display TA6 does not necessarily have to be displayed. The first post-acceptance output sound SA6 is also output in the same mode when it appears that the enemy character BOSS-A6 has been defeated and when it appears that the enemy character BOSS-A6 has not been defeated. However, the first post-acceptance output sound SA6 does not necessarily have to be output.

The 6A reception-permitted state occurs as a reception-permitted state in which the automatic button function described above is enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 162, when no operation is received on the 6A operation unit until timing tAf3 arrives in the 6A reception-permitted state, not only is the 6A reception-permitted state terminated based on the arrival of timing tAf3, but the 6A post-reception change is also started in a manner that appears when an operation is performed on the 6A operation unit.

The 6A reception permission state may be generated as a reception permission state in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled. In other words, in this case, the 6A reception permission state is simply ended based on the arrival of timing tAb3, and the 6A post-reception change that appears when an operation is performed on the 6A operation unit will no longer be executed.

In addition, although the "1A operation unit", "2A operation unit", "3A operation unit", "4A operation unit", and "6A operation unit" in the above-mentioned performance example are all realized as "operation buttons 410", some of these operation units may be realized as operation units different from the "operation buttons 410". For example, they may be replaced with the configuration when the operation units expressed as imitation image displays in each reception allowance state are operated. That is, the "1A operation unit", "2A operation unit", "3A operation unit", and "4A operation unit" may be displayed as imitation image displays and allow multiple operation receptions, and the "6A operation unit" may be displayed as imitation image displays and allow only one operation reception. However, the "1A operation unit", "2A operation unit", "3A operation unit", "4A operation unit", and "6A operation unit" are all prepared as operation units different from the "5A operation unit".

In addition, the "post-acceptance change (post-acceptance display)" in response to the operation acceptance during each acceptance period (acceptance permitted state) in the above-mentioned performance example does not necessarily have to indicate the expectation of winning a jackpot. For example, it may occur as an acceptance period for determining whether the probability fluctuation function is enabled during the execution period of the jackpot game and be executed as the post-acceptance display, or it may occur as an acceptance period in a simple mini-game that has nothing to do with the expectation suggestion regarding the game and be executed as the post-acceptance display. Or it may occur based on the establishment of a predetermined condition during various interval periods, etc. and be executed as the post-acceptance display. Therefore, the acceptance period in the above-mentioned performance example does not necessarily have to occur during the period in which the pattern fluctuation is being executed. Also, even if it is displayed as a post-acceptance display that does not indicate such expectation, multiple modes may be prepared for the post-acceptance display and it may be displayed in any of the multiple modes.

In addition, the mock image display can be displayed in the same form (or a similar form) when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" and when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time". However, when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", the mock image display may at least be displayed in the first form and in the second form, and when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to occur in units of "predetermined time", it may not be displayed in the second form (or a similar form) but may be displayed in the first form (or a similar form).

Incidentally, unlike color schemes or light emission, periodic changes in the imitation image display are a phenomenon that occurs over time, so it takes a relatively long time to distinguish whether they are long or short, and it can be said to be difficult to distinguish with certainty whether the periodic change currently appearing in the imitation image display is long or short (because not both long and short cycles are displayed). On the other hand, however, if the player is able to distinguish between them, they will be able to enjoy their value as a new source of information, and so it is possible to provide new dramatic effects through this difficulty in distinguishing between them and their value as an information source.

In addition, in the 2A reception permitted state according to the above-mentioned performance example, when the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, the first post-reception output sound SA2a is triggered to start outputting a new "sound effect" when timing tAb2-B2, which is the timing at which the performance content progresses, arrives. However, instead of this, it is also possible to continue the output (sound effect) in the manner that had been executed up until that point, without starting to output a new "sound effect" when timing tAb2-B2 arrives.

That is, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a does not necessarily have to be realized as a repeated output of a sound effect, and may be realized as an output in such a manner that, for example, "the effect sound based on one data that was started to be output when an operation was accepted is continued on the condition that the operation state is maintained (by the judgment of the operation acceptance detected each time) (on the condition that the auto-tap function is enabled), and is terminated when the operation state is no longer maintained." In this case, even if timing tAb2-B2, which is the timing at which the performance content is advanced by the so-called auto-tap function, arrives while such a first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is being output, this may be used as a trigger to cause no change in the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a (the effect sound based on one data) and the playback state may be continued. In this sense, the auto-tap function according to this performance example can be said to be a function that periodically judges that the operation state is in place just by maintaining the operation state. Even if the second A reception permission state is realized in this configuration, new post-reception changes (second post-reception output sound SB2) will occur multiple times at indefinite intervals and at intervals longer than the specific time, at least the number of times the performance has progressed.

In addition, it is preferable that the interval at which the auto-tap function determines whether or not the device is in an operating state in the reception-permitting state is set to a time shorter than any of the cycle 1A time, cycle 2A time, cycle 3A time, cycle 4A time, cycle 5A time, and cycle 6A time. However, the interval at which the auto-tap function determines whether or not the device is in an operating state in the reception-permitting state may be different depending on the type of reception-permitting state. For example, the interval at which the auto-tap function determines whether or not the device is in an operating state (operation reception) in the 2A reception-permitting state may be different from the interval at which the auto-tap function determines whether or not the device is in an operating state (operation reception) in the 1A reception-permitting state or the 3A reception-permitting state. Also, the interval at which the auto-tap function determines whether or not the device is in an operating state (operation reception) may be the same in the 1A reception-permitting state and the 3A reception-permitting state.

In addition, when an operation target for which the so-called auto-tap function is enabled is maintained in an operation state, in a type of acceptance permission state (such as the first A acceptance permission state or the third A acceptance permission state) in which the above-mentioned post-acceptance change is newly started at regular intervals (predetermined intervals), it is desirable to make the above-mentioned post-acceptance change occur more frequently in that acceptance permission state than in a type of acceptance permission state (such as the second A acceptance permission state) in which the above-mentioned post-acceptance change is newly started at irregular intervals (unpredetermined intervals).

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example is configured to display a post-acceptance display on the performance display device 1600 as one of the above-mentioned post-acceptance changes, but the post-acceptance display is not a required configuration as one of the above-mentioned post-acceptance changes. For example, it is possible to realize a performance mode similar to the post-acceptance change due to the above-mentioned post-acceptance display by a change in the light emission mode of the performance lamp or a change in the drive of the movable body.

As described above, the first A reception permission state and the second A reception permission state are prepared as "a type of reception permission state in which the reception permission state can be terminated early based on the fact that an operation has been accepted (the final performance mode appears)". However, in the first A reception permission state and the second A reception permission state, for example, when a predetermined judgment result is not obtained as a result of a jackpot judgment or a performance judgment, the reception permission state is not terminated early (the final performance mode does not appear) no matter how many operations are accepted, and the reception permission state may be terminated early (the final performance mode appears) only when a predetermined judgment result is obtained as a result of a jackpot judgment or a performance judgment. Even with such a configuration, it can be said that the reception permission state is realized as "a type of reception permission state in which the reception permission state can be terminated early based on the fact that an operation has been accepted (the final performance mode appears)".

In addition, the interval at which the auto-repeated-tap function determines whether or not the device is in an operating state (operation acceptance) (the interval at which a new change occurs after acceptance when the operating state is maintained) may be different between the 1A acceptance state and the 3A acceptance state.

In addition, the number of times that the second-A post-reception output sound can be generated multiple times in the second-A reception permissible state when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state in the second-A reception permissible state may be set to be less than the number of times that the first-A post-reception output sound can be generated multiple times in the first-A reception permissible state when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state in the first-A reception permissible state.

In addition, the number of times that the post-2A reception output sound can be generated multiple times in the secondA reception permissible state when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state in the secondA reception permissible state may be set to be less than the number of times that the post-3A reception output sound can be generated multiple times in the thirdA reception permissible state when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state in the thirdA reception permissible state.

In addition, in the 2nd A reception permitted state, the upper limit number of times that the 2nd A post-reception output sound can be generated multiple times by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state may be set to be less than the upper limit number of times that the 2nd A post-reception output sound can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the operation button 410 without maintaining it in an operation state.

In addition, in the 1A reception permitted state, the upper limit number of times that the 1A post-reception output sound can be generated multiple times by maintaining the operation button 410 in an operated state may be set to be the same as or greater than the upper limit number of times that the 1A post-reception output sound can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the operation button 410 without maintaining it in an operated state.

In addition, in the 3A reception permitted state, the upper limit number of times that the post-3A reception output sound can be generated multiple times by maintaining the operation button 410 in an operated state may be set to be the same as or greater than the upper limit number of times that the post-3A reception output sound can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the operation button 410 without maintaining it in an operated state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the type of post-operation output sound that changes (ends) when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) can be output in either a state where the type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state or a state where it is not in an output state. The post-operation output sound of a type that does not change (end) when the button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) may be configured to start being output when the post-operation output sound of a type that changes (ends) when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is in an output state, rather than starting to be output alone when the post-operation output sound of a type that changes (ends) when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in an output state, but to start being output when the post-operation output sound of the type that does change (end) when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is in an output state (or at the same time).

In addition, in the second A reception permission state according to the above-mentioned performance example, even if the output condition of the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied while the operation button 410 is maintained in the operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may not end its output state or start a new output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not interrupted and a sound based on new data (one sound effect) is not output or replayed.

In the first A reception permission state according to the above-mentioned performance example, when the output condition of the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the operation button 410 is maintained in the operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2, whereas the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived (here, one sound effect) is interrupted, and the sound (one sound effect) based on the new data (here, data of one sound effect) starts to be output.

In addition, in the third A reception permission state according to the above-mentioned performance example, when the output condition of the third post-reception output sound SB3 is satisfied while the operation button 410 is maintained in the operation state (timing tAc2-B2 shown in FIG. 152), the second post-reception output sound SB3 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAc2-B2, while the third post-reception output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAc2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAc2-B2 arrived (here, one sound effect) is interrupted, and the sound (one sound effect) based on the new data (here, one sound effect data) starts to be output.

In addition, "the post-operation output sound is generated multiple times" means that there are multiple timings at which the post-operation output sound starts to be newly output simply by maintaining the operation state. In other words, when the operation state is maintained, while the post-operation output sound based on one piece of data continues to be played, the post-operation output sound is generated only once.

Also, in the reception permission state, the model image display does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, the model image display may not be displayed in at least one of the reception permission states described above (the 1A reception permission state to the 6A reception permission state). For example, the model image display may not be displayed in the 1A reception permission state. Or, the model image display may not be displayed in the 3A reception permission state, but not in the 1A reception permission state.

In addition, in each of the reception permission states described above (first A reception permission state to sixth A reception permission state), two types of sounds (first post-reception output sound, second post-reception output sound) can be output simultaneously as post-operation output sounds based on the reception of an operation. However, both types of sounds (first post-reception output sound, second post-reception output sound) are not output simultaneously, and only one of the sounds may be selectively output when an operation is received, or only one of the sounds may be output, with the other not necessarily being provided.

In addition, in the second A reception allowing state, the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is not processed to be a fixed time, but is only processed to be an indefinite time, but in the first A reception allowing state and the third A reception allowing state, it is sufficient that at least the processing in which the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is a fixed time is executed, and both the processing in which the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is a fixed time (first post-reception output sound) and the processing in which the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is an indefinite time (second post-reception output sound) may be executed.

In the above-mentioned acceptance-permitted state, the rapid-fire or single-shot indication may not necessarily be displayed.

In addition, the above-mentioned "time less than a specific time" includes a specific time, and only a specific time may be provided as a "time less than a specific time." In addition, the above-mentioned "time longer than a specific time" may be provided as a single time.

In addition, the above-mentioned "time less than a specified time" includes a specified time, and only a specified time may be provided as the "time less than a specified time." In addition, only one time may be provided as the above-mentioned "time longer than a specified time."

It is preferable that the specific time is shorter than a predetermined time, and that the "time equal to or shorter than the specific time" is shorter than the "time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time." In contrast, it is preferable that the "time longer than the specific time" is longer than the "time longer than the predetermined time." Alternatively, if the "time longer than the specific time" is set as an indefinite time, then due to the indefiniteness, both the "time longer than the specified time" and the "time longer than the specified time" may occur.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 149(g), when it is detected that the operation button 410 has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state while the second A post-acceptance output sound is being output, the second A post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2) in that output state is terminated in response to this detection. However, instead of terminating the sound, it is also possible to change to a different output state (such as by changing the volume or sound quality, or changing the state of the output sound).

The post-operation output sound (post-acceptance output sound) may or may not indicate the degree of expectation. In fact, the first post-acceptance output sound SA is a sound that does not indicate the degree of expectation.

The pachinko machine 1 may further include reception allowance states different from the above-mentioned 1A reception allowance state to 6A reception allowance state. For example, the performance related to operation and non-operation is the same as in the 1A reception allowance state, but the type of enemy character that appears is different; the performance related to operation and non-operation is the same as in the 2A reception allowance state, but the type of enemy character that appears is different; and the performance related to operation and non-operation is the same as in the 3A reception allowance state, but the type of enemy character that appears is different.

In addition, this pachinko machine 1 is provided with all of the above-mentioned 1A reception permission state to 6A reception permission state, but it is not necessary to provide all of these reception permission states. Rather, it is desirable to provide only some of these reception permission states in an appropriate combination, taking into account the desired action and effect. By providing them in the "appropriate combinations" described separately in the configurations below, excellent action and effects can be achieved. In addition, in each of the configurations below, combinations of reception permission states that should be provided in order to achieve the action and effect of the configurations shown in the above-mentioned performance examples are illustrated, but the combinations are not limited to the examples, and combinations that are not illustrated may be used as long as the desired action and effect is achieved. In addition, configurations adopted by other reception permission states that are not related to the desired action and effect may be provided as appropriate, as long as they do not have a negative effect on the achievement of the desired action and effect.

For example, in the first configuration A1, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the reception of an operation for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a type of multiple operation valid state in which a message display (message display MA1, MA2, MA4) that prompts an operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is displayed (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146, second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149, fourth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155) and a type of multiple operation valid state in which a message display is not displayed (third A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152). In the multiple operation valid state in which the message display is displayed (first A reception permitted state, second A reception permitted state, fourth A reception permitted state), it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state, and a corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound, second A post-reception output sound, fourth A post-reception output sound) is output. 149(g) )。 In contrast, in the case where the post-operation output sound is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state may be changed triggered by the detection (the second-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). In contrast, in the case where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operating state in a multiple-operation enabled state (the third-A reception permitted state) in which no message display is displayed, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state is not changed triggered by the detection (the third-A post-reception output sound shown in FIGS. 152(g) and 152(h)). In the above example, the 3A post-reception output sound shown in Figures 152(g) and (h) is not triggered by the detection, but is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated. With this configuration, in the multiple operation enabled state, whether or not a message display is displayed can suggest whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, which is expected to maintain the interest in the game.

In addition, in the first configuration A1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, in particular, in the multiple operation enabled state of the above-mentioned multiple operation enabled state of a type in which a message display is not displayed (third A reception permitted state), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (third A reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound (third A reception output sound) is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound (third A reception output sound) in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is made without being triggered by the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then ended), whereas in the multiple operation enabled state of the above-mentioned multiple operation enabled state, when a message display ( In a multiple operation enabled state (first A reception allowing state, second A reception allowing state, fourth A reception allowing state) of a type in which a message display MA1, MA2, MA4 is displayed, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound, second A post-reception output sound, fourth A post-reception output sound) is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state may be made in either case of being triggered by the detection (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) or of being not triggered by the detection (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146, fourth A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155). According to this configuration, when the message display is not displayed in the multiple operations enabled state, it is suitably indicated that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, whereas when the message display is displayed in the multiple operations enabled state, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there will be a change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, which is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

Moreover, in the first configuration A1 of the above-mentioned performance example, when one form (message display MA2) appears as the message display, there are both cases where the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) changes when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149 (g)), and where the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) does not change (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149 (h)). This makes it more effective to achieve the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state when a message display is displayed in the multiple operations enabled state". However, this configuration does not necessarily have to be adopted. For example, when different message display modes appear, such as different message display sizes, different colors, or different display modes, depending on the mode, there may be cases where the post-operation output sound changes or there is no change in the post-operation output sound, but this is expected to make it somewhat more difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the post-operation output sound will change, compared to when the message display itself is not displayed at all. However, it is preferable (but not essential) that message displays that encourage multiple operations be displayed in a manner that would not appear in an operation-enabled state in which only one operation is accepted.

In addition, in the eighth configuration A8, among the multiple operation valid states, the multiple operation valid states of the type in which a message display is displayed (first A reception permitted state, second A reception permitted state) and the multiple operation valid states of the type in which a message display is not displayed (third A reception permitted state) may both be prepared as "multiple operation valid states in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining a specific operation means in an operation state." That is, in this case, even in the "multiple operation valid state in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining a specific operation means in an operation state," if the message display is not displayed, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is made without being triggered by the detection, and if the message display is displayed, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state may be made both as a trigger by the detection and as a trigger without being triggered by the detection.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

As described above, among the multiple operation valid states in which a message display is displayed, in the special multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), there are two cases in which, during a single valid period, a post-operation output sound (second post-operation output sound SB2) in which the output state is not terminated upon detection of a non-operation state is output, and a post-operation output sound (first post-operation output sound SA2) in which the output state is terminated upon detection of a non-operation state is output. Therefore, in the second A reception permitted state, the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state" is more suitably achieved.

In the first A reception permission state, the third A reception permission state, and the fourth A reception permission state in the above-mentioned performance examples, there are no cases where a post-operation output sound in which the output state is terminated upon detection of a non-operation state is output, and only cases where a post-operation output sound in which the post-operation output sound is not terminated upon detection of a non-operation state is output.

Furthermore, for the first configuration A1, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is subject to a mock image display and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

In addition, to realize the first configuration A1, the fourth A reception permission state does not necessarily have to be provided, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain each of the configurations and effects described above.

Also, for example, as the second configuration A2, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the reception of an operation for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, there is provided a multiple operation valid state of a type in which a post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state (4A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155), and a multiple operation valid state of a type in which a post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means (operation button 410) is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state (FIG. 14A reception permitted state). 149, and the third A reception allowing state shown in FIG. 152), in a multiple operation enabling state (first A reception allowing state, second A reception allowing state, third A reception allowing state) of a type in which a post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means (operation button 410) is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state, and a post-operation output sound corresponding thereto (first A post-reception output sound, second A post-reception output sound, third A post-reception output sound, etc.) is output. In the case where the post-operation output sound (3A post-acceptance output sound) is output, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed in response to the detection (the 2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). However, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed in response to the detection (the 2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). In contrast, when the post-operation output sound is output in the output state, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed in response to the detection (the 2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). In the case where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in the above-mentioned operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (4th A post-reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound (4th A post-reception output sound) in the output state is not changed due to the detection (4th A post-reception output sound shown in Fig. 155 (g) and (h)). In the above example, the 4th A post-reception output sound shown in Fig. 155 (g) and (h) is output for a predetermined output time and ends without being triggered by the detection. With this configuration, in the multiple operations enabled state, it is possible to suggest whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state through whether or not the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition.

In addition, in the second configuration A2 according to the above-mentioned performance example, in particular, in the multiple operation enabled state (4A reception permitted state) of the type in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is made without being triggered by the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then ended), whereas in the multiple operation enabled state, when the specific operation means In a multiple operation enable state (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state, third A reception allowable state) of a type in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the operation button (410) in an operation state, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound, second A post-reception output sound, third A post-reception output sound) is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state may be made in either case of being triggered by the detection (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) or of being triggered without the detection (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146, third A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 152). According to this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is not enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, it is suitably indicated that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, whereas when the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there will be a change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, which is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

In addition, in the second configuration A2 according to the above-mentioned performance example, in a type of multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state, second A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state) in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state, the imitation image display is displayed in both the first color scheme and the second color scheme (see Figures 146(c), 149(c), 152(c), etc.), but in a type of multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state) in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state, there are at least some cases in which the imitation image display is displayed in the first color scheme (it may be necessarily the first color scheme), but it may not be displayed in the second color scheme.

In this case, in a type of multiple operation enabled state (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state, third A reception allowable state) in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state, it is sufficient if the imitation image display is displayed in both the first color scheme and the second color scheme. For example, the multiple operation enabled state of this type may include a specified multiple operation enabled state in which the imitation image display is displayed only in the first color scheme, or may include a specific multiple operation enabled state in which the imitation image display is not displayed in either the first color scheme or the second color scheme.

As described above, among the types of multiple operation valid states in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, in the special multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), both a post-operation output sound (second post-operation output sound SB2) in which the output state is not terminated upon detection of a non-operation state is generated during one valid period, and a post-operation output sound (first post-operation output sound SA2) in which the output state is terminated upon detection of a non-operation state is generated, so that in the second A reception permitted state, the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state" is more suitably achieved.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

Furthermore, among the types of multiple operation enabled states in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, in a special multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state or third A reception permitted state), there are no cases in which a post-operation output sound in which the output state is terminated upon detection of a non-operation state is output, and only cases in which a post-operation output sound in which the post-operation output sound is not terminated upon detection of a non-operation state is output.

In addition, in the second configuration A2 according to the above-mentioned performance example, the multiple operation valid state of a type in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state includes a multiple operation valid state of a type (second A reception permitted state) in which, during one valid period, the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149 (h)) in which the output state is not changed (ended) upon detection of a non-operation state is generated, and a post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149 (g)) in which the output state is changed (ended) upon detection of a non-operation state is generated. Also, the multiple operation valid state of a type (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state) in which only the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound, third A reception output sound) in which the output state is not ended upon detection of a non-operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410) is generated. However, this does not apply to a type of multiple operation enabled state in which only a post-operation output sound is generated and the output state is terminated upon detection that a specific operating means (operation button 410) has entered a non-operated state.

Furthermore, for the second configuration A2, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is subject to a mock image display and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

In addition, to realize the second configuration A2, it is possible to have only one of the first A reception permission state and the third A reception permission state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain each of the configurations and effects described above.

For example, as a third configuration A3, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the reception of an operation for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, there are a multiple operation valid state of a type in which a periodic change in the mock image display is displayed in a time unit longer than a predetermined time (a second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149, a fourth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155) and a multiple operation valid state of a type in which a periodic change in the mock image display is displayed in a time unit shorter than the predetermined time (a fourth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 14 152), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operating state in a type of multiple operation valid state (second A reception allowable state, fourth A reception allowable state) in which a periodic change in the mock image display appears in a time unit longer than a predetermined time, and a post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound, fourth A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the operation is output, the post-operation output sound is output while the post-operation output sound is being output. When it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state, the post-operation output sound in the output state may change due to the detection (the second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). On the other hand, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state in a multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permitted state, third A acceptance permitted state) of a type in which a periodic change in the mock image display appears in a time unit of the predetermined time or less, In the case where a post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound, third A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the output is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound (fourth A post-reception output sound) in the output state is not changed due to the detection (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146, third A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 152). In the above example, the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146 and the third A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 152 are output for a predetermined output time and then ended without being triggered by the detection. With this configuration, in the multiple operation enabled state, it is possible to suggest whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state through the length of time required for the cyclical change in the model image display, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition.

In addition, in the third configuration A3 according to the above-mentioned performance example, in particular, in the multiple operation enabled states (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state) of a type in which a periodic change in the mock image display appears in units of time less than the predetermined time, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound, third A post-reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is made without being triggered by the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then ended). On the other hand, in the multiple operation valid states (second A reception allowable state, fourth A reception allowable state) of a type in which a periodic change in the mock image display appears in units of time longer than a predetermined time, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state and a post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound, fourth A post-reception output sound) corresponding thereto is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state may be triggered by the detection (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) or may be triggered without the detection (fourth A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155). According to this configuration, when the time required for the imitation image display to change periodically in the multiple operation enabled state is relatively short, it is suitably indicated that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, whereas when the time required for the imitation image display to change periodically in the multiple operation enabled state is relatively long, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there will be a change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, which is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

In addition, in the third configuration A3 according to the above-mentioned performance example, among the multiple operation enabled states, the multiple operation enabled states (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state) of the type in which the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed in a time unit less than the above-mentioned predetermined time are generated as "multiple operation enabled states in which the corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound, third A post-reception output sound) is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state", while the multiple operation enabled states (second A reception permitted state, fourth A reception permitted state) of the type in which the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed in a time unit longer than the predetermined time are generated as "multiple operation enabled states in which the specific operation means (operation button 4 10) in an operating state, the corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times" (second A reception permitted state), and the corresponding post-operation output sound is not generated multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state" (fourth A reception permitted state). Therefore, when the time required for the periodic change of the model image display is short, it is suggested that the so-called auto-hit function is to be enabled, and when the time required for the periodic change of the model image display is long, it is difficult to recognize whether the so-called auto-hit function is enabled or not. In this regard, even when the time required for the periodic change of the model image display is long, when the post-operation output sound changes (ends) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, it is suggested that the so-called auto-hit function is to be enabled, so that it is expected that the interest in the game can be maintained in a good condition.

As described above, among the types of multiple operation enabled states (second A reception permitted state, fourth A reception permitted state) in which the periodic change in the simulated image display appears in units of time longer than a predetermined time, in the special multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), there are two cases in which a post-operation output sound (second post-operation output sound SB2) in which the output state is not terminated upon detection of a non-operation state is generated, even during one valid period, and a post-operation output sound (first post-operation output sound SA2) in which the output state is terminated upon detection of a non-operation state is generated. Therefore, in the second A reception permitted state, the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state" is more suitably achieved.

Incidentally, among the types of multiple operation enabled states (second A reception permitted state, fourth A reception permitted state) in which the periodic change in the mock image display appears in units of time longer than a predetermined time, in a special multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state), there are no cases in which a post-operation output sound is generated that ends the output state in response to the detection of a non-operation state, and only cases in which a post-operation output sound is generated that does not end the output state in response to the detection of a non-operation state.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

Furthermore, for the third configuration A3, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is the subject of a mock image display and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

In the third configuration A3, the "time equal to or less than the predetermined time" may be provided in a plurality of times, or only one time (e.g., the "predetermined time"). Similarly, the "time longer than the predetermined time" may be provided in a plurality of times, or only one time.

In addition, to realize the third configuration A3, it is not necessary to have the third A reception permission state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain each of the configurations and effects described above.

For example, as a fourth configuration A4, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the operation reception of the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display is permitted multiple times, and a first operation means (operation button 410) and a second operation means (sword ornament 5001) are prepared as the above operation means, and as the multiple operation valid state, a multiple operation valid state of a type in which at least an imitation image display that imitates the above first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed (the first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146, the second A reception permitted state, the third A reception permitted state, and the fourth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149). ), and a multiple operation valid state (the fifth A reception permission state shown in FIG. 158) in which at least an imitation image display imitating the above-mentioned second operation means (the sword ornament 5001) is displayed, in the multiple operation valid state (the first A reception permission state, the second A reception permission state, the third A reception permission state, the fourth A reception permission state) in which at least an imitation image display imitating the above-mentioned first operation means (the operation button 410) is displayed, the first operation means (the operation button 410) is detected to be in an operating state, and a post-operation output sound (the first A post-operation output sound) is output in response to the above-mentioned multiple operation valid state (the first A reception permission state, the second A reception permission state, the third A reception permission state, the fourth A reception permission state). In the case where the post-operation output sound is output, when it is detected that the first operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state may change due to the detection (the second-A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), whereas the multiple operation enabled state (the fifth-A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) of the type in which at least a model image display modeling the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) is displayed may change due to the detection (the fifth-A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). In the case where the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) is detected to be in the above-mentioned operation state in the reception-permitted state, and the corresponding post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound) in the output state is not changed due to the detection (5A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 158). In the above example, the 5A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 158 is output for a predetermined output time and ends without being triggered by the detection. With this configuration, in the multiple operation enabled state, it is possible to suggest whether or not the post-operation output sound will change when the operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state through the type of the operation means that is permitted to be operated multiple times and is the target of the model image display, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition.

In addition, in the fourth configuration A4 according to the above-mentioned performance example, in particular, in the multiple operation enabled state (5A reception permitted state) of a type in which at least an imitation image display imitating the second operation means (sword decoration 5001) is displayed among the multiple operation enabled states, when it is detected that the second operation means (sword decoration 5001) is in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the second operation means (sword decoration 5001) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is made without being triggered by the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then ended), whereas in the multiple operation enabled state, when the imitation image display imitating the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed a little, When it is detected that the first operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state in a multiple operation valid state of a displayed type (first A reception allowing state, second A reception allowing state, third A reception allowing state, fourth A reception allowing state) and a post-operation output sound corresponding thereto (first A reception output sound, second A reception output sound, third A reception output sound, fourth A reception output sound) is output, if it is detected that the first operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state may be made in either of two ways: triggered by the detection (second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) or not triggered by the detection (first A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146, third A reception output sound shown in FIG. 152, fourth A reception output sound shown in FIG. 155). With this configuration, in the multiple operation enabled state, when the second operation means is the target of the imitation image display and the second operation means is operated, it is preferably indicated that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the second operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, whereas when the first operation means is the target of the imitation image display and the first operation means is operated, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there will be a change in the post-operation output sound when the first operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, which is expected to preferably maintain a sense of tension.

As described above, among the types of multiple operation enabled states (first A reception permitted state, second A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state, fourth A reception permitted state) in which at least an imitation image display imitating the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed, in the special multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), there are two cases in which a post-operation output sound (second post-operation output sound SB2) in which the output state is not terminated upon detection of a non-operation state is generated during one valid period, and a post-operation output sound (first post-operation output sound SA2) in which the output state is terminated upon detection of a non-operation state is generated. Therefore, in the second A reception permitted state, the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the first operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state" is more suitably achieved.

In addition, in the multiple operation enabled state (5A acceptance permitted state) in which at least an imitation image display of the second operation means (sword decoration 5001) is displayed, there is no case where a post-operation output sound that ends the output state is generated in response to the detection of a non-operation state, and there is only a case where a post-operation output sound that does not end the output state is generated in response to the detection of a non-operation state.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In addition, to realize the fourth configuration A4, the fourth A reception permission state does not necessarily have to be provided, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain each of the configurations and effects described above.

Furthermore, in order to realize the fourth configuration A4, it is possible to have only one of the first A reception permission state and the third A reception permission state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain each of the configurations and effects described above.

Also, for example, as a fifth configuration A5, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which operation reception for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, and the post-operation change in response to the detection can be executed multiple times. At that time, the interval until the post-operation change is newly started in response to the detection is set to an indefinite time, and the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) is set to a multiple operation valid state. In the third multiple-operation valid state (first A reception allowable state), if it is assumed that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is merely maintained in an operated state and a post-operation change corresponding to the detection is newly executable at regular intervals, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state in the first multiple-operation valid state (second A reception allowable state) and a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detected operation is outputted, while the post-operation output sound is being outputted, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated. When it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has been in an operated state in the second multiple-operation valid state (fourth-A reception permitted state), and a post-operation output sound (fourth-A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the operation is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is made without being triggered by the detection (for example, after a predetermined output time). 155), and in the third multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is made without being triggered by the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then ended) (first A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146).

According to such a configuration, first, when the post-operation output sound in response to the above detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, it becomes possible to preferably indicate that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound (post-reception output sound of 4A) when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state. In this regard, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, this is triggered in both cases where the post-operation output sound changes (2nd A post-reception output sound) and where the post-operation output sound does not change (1st A post-reception output sound). However, depending on whether the post-operation output sound is output at regular intervals when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, it becomes possible to suggest whether the post-operation output sound will change when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, and it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In the fifth configuration A5, it is assumed that the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is represented as a mock image display and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, to realize the fifth configuration A5, the multiple operation valid state may include the third A reception allowance state instead of the first A reception allowance state, and the third A reception allowance state may be realized as the third multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the first A reception allowance state and the third A reception allowance state.

Also, for example, as a sixth configuration A6, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which operation reception for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in an operating state, and a post-operation change in response to the detection can be executed multiple times. At that time, the interval until the post-operation change is newly started in response to the detection is always longer than the specific time, and in the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state), In the third multiple-operation valid state (first-A reception permitted state), the post-operation change in response to the detection is not made executable multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, and in the third multiple-operation valid state (first-A reception permitted state), the post-operation change in response to the detection is made executable multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation change is newly started in response to the detection is always a specific time or less. In the first multiple-operation valid state (second-A reception permitted state), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state and a post-operation output sound (second-A post-reception output sound) corresponding to this is output, while the post-operation output sound is being output, When it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated, a change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state can be made with the detection as a trigger (the second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). In the case where it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state in the second multiple-operation valid state (the fourth A acceptance permitted state) and a post-operation output sound (the fourth A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to this is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not made with the detection as a trigger, but is made without being triggered by the detection (for example, In the case where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operating state in the third multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) and a corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-operation output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is made without being triggered by the detection (for example, output is made for a predetermined output time and then terminated) (first A post-operation output sound shown in FIG. 146).

According to such a configuration, first, when the post-operation output sound in response to the above detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, it becomes possible to preferably indicate that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound (post-reception output sound of 4A) when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state. In this regard, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, there are two cases where the post-operation output sound changes (post-reception output sound after 2nd A) and where the post-operation output sound does not change (post-reception output sound after 1st A) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. However, depending on whether the interval between when the post-operation output sound is output and when it is newly output when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state is longer than a specific time, it is possible to suggest whether the post-operation output sound will change when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, which is expected to maintain the interest in the game.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In the sixth configuration A6, it is assumed that the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is represented as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, to realize the sixth configuration A6, the multiple operation valid state may include the third A reception allowance state instead of the first A reception allowance state, and the third A reception allowance state may be realized as the third multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the first A reception allowance state and the third A reception allowance state.

Also, for example, as the seventh configuration A7, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the reception of operations for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives (a first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146, a second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), and a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives. 152 and 155), in which the valid operation state is not terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operating state before a predetermined end timing arrives, the valid operation state may be terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operating state before a predetermined end timing arrives, in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operating state and a post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound, second A reception output sound) corresponding to the fact that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operating state is output. In the case where a post-operation output sound is output, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state may change due to the detection (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). On the other hand, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before a predetermined end timing arrives, the post-operation output sound in the output state may change due to the detection (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). In the case where it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the above-mentioned operation state and a post-operation output sound (third-A post-reception output sound, fourth-A post-reception output sound) corresponding thereto is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound (third-A post-reception output sound, fourth-A post-reception output sound) in the output state is not changed in response to the detection (third-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 152, fourth-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155). In the above-mentioned example, the third-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 152 and the fourth-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155 are output for a predetermined output time and then terminated without being triggered by the detection. With this configuration, in the multiple operation valid state, it is possible to suggest whether or not a change will occur in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state based on whether or not the operation valid state is terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In addition, in the seventh configuration A7 according to the above-mentioned performance example, in particular, in the multiple operation valid state (third A reception allowable state, fourth A reception allowable state) of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (third A post-reception output sound, fourth A post-reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is made without being triggered by the detection (for example, it is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). On the other hand, in the multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowing state, second A reception allowing state) of a type in which the operation valid state can be ended based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state and a post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound, second A post-reception output sound) corresponding thereto is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state may be triggered by the detection (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) or may be triggered without the detection (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146). According to this configuration, in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, it is preferably suggested that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, whereas in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there will be a change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, which is expected to preferably maintain a sense of tension.

In the seventh configuration A7, it is assumed that the operation means to be the object of multiple operations in the multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, and the operation means to be the object of multiple operations in the multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state may be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, are both the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the seventh configuration A7 may be specified as a type in which the operation valid state may be terminated by operating the "operation means" represented as a mock image display in the multiple operation valid state.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the seventh configuration A7 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

In addition, in the seventh configuration A7 according to the above-mentioned performance example, among the multiple operation valid states, the multiple operation valid states (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state) of the type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing are generated as "multiple operation valid states in which the corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound, second A post-reception output sound) is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state", but the above-mentioned multiple operation valid states are terminated before the arrival of the predetermined end timing. The multiple operation valid state (3A reception permitted state, 4A reception permitted state) of the type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state can occur either as a "multiple operation valid state in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state" (3A reception permitted state) or as a "multiple operation valid state in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state" (4A reception permitted state).

As described above, among the types of multiple operation valid states (first A reception permission state, second A reception permission state) in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, in the special multiple operation valid state (second A reception permission state), there are two cases in which a post-operation output sound (second post-reception output sound SB2) in which the output state is not terminated upon the detection of a non-operation state is generated, and a post-operation output sound (first post-reception output sound SA2) in which the output state is terminated upon the detection of a non-operation state is generated, even during one valid period. Therefore, in the second A reception permission state, the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state" is more suitably achieved.

In contrast, among the types of multiple operation valid states (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state) in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, in the special multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowable state), there are no cases in which a post-operation output sound is generated that ends the output state in response to detection that a non-operation state has been entered, and only cases in which a post-operation output sound is generated that does not end the output state in response to detection that a non-operation state has been entered.

In addition, in the seventh configuration A7, in a type of multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state) in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, the message display MA is always displayed (message display MA1, MA2). However, in a type of multiple operation valid state (third A reception allowable state, fourth A reception allowable state) in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, the message display MA is sometimes displayed (fourth A reception allowable state) and sometimes not displayed (third A reception allowable state).

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

Furthermore, for the seventh configuration A7, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is subject to a mock image display and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

In addition, to realize the seventh configuration A7, it is possible to have only one of the third A reception-permitting state and the fourth A reception-permitting state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain at least some of the configurations and effects described above.

For example, the eighth configuration A8 includes a multiple operation valid state in which the reception of an operation for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a type of multiple operation valid state in which a message display (message display MA1, MA2, MA4) prompting the user to operate the specific operation means (operation button 410) is displayed (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146, second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149, fourth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155) and a type of multiple operation valid state in which the message display is not displayed (third A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152). ), in the multiple operation enabled state (third A reception permitted state) of the type in which the message display is not displayed, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state, the post-operation output sound is "a sound in which the time from the time when the specific operation means becomes the non-operated state until the time when the post-operation output sound becomes an inaudible state is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is an indefinite time)" when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output. In contrast, in the multiple operation enabled state (the first A reception permitted state, the second A reception permitted state, the fourth A reception permitted state) of the type in which the message display is displayed, when it is detected that the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in an operation state, the post-operation output sound is set to "When the specific operation means (the operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound is made inaudible from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state." There are two cases where "a sound in which the time from the time the specific operation means becomes the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound with an indefinite time) is output when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output (a first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146, a fourth A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155). In the above example, the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g) is set to "0 seconds" as the fixed time from the time the specific operation means becomes the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible.

According to such a configuration, in the multiple operation enabled state, if the post-operation output sound is in an output state and no message display is being displayed, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state until the post-operation output sound that is in an output state ends; for example, it is possible to suitably suggest that there is little noteworthy dramatic effect in a situation where the specific operation means (operation button 410) has just been changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. In contrast, in the multiple operation enabled state, when the post-operation output sound is in an output state and a message display is being displayed, it is possible to guess how much time will elapse after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state before the post-operation output sound in the output state ends, and it is difficult to guess this. For example, while it is possible to suggest that the performance after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state may be worth paying attention to, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound in the output state ends after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the non-operation state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to the non-operation state will be appropriately maintained.

Moreover, in the first configuration A1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, when one form (message display MA2) appears as the message display, there are two cases in which the post-operation output sound is output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operated state in which it is not operated until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time" (second post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149 (g)), and "a sound in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operated state in which it is not operated until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time" (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149 (h)). In this configuration, for example, even when one form of message display (message display MA2) is displayed, it is possible to suggest that the performance that results from switching the specific operation means (operation button 410) from an operating state to a non-operating state may be worth noting, and the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will not necessarily end a certain amount of time after being switched to a non-operating state, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension when switching to a non-operating state.

In addition, in the eighth configuration A8, among the multiple operation valid states, the multiple operation valid states of the type in which a message display is displayed (first A reception permitted state, second A reception permitted state) and the multiple operation valid states of the type in which a message display is not displayed (third A reception permitted state) can both be prepared as "multiple operation valid states in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining a specific operation means in an operation state." That is, in this case, even if a message display is not displayed in the "multiple operation valid state in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining a specific operation means in an operation state," the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is made without being triggered by the detection, and when a message display is displayed, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state may be made both as a trigger by the detection and as a trigger without being triggered by the detection.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

As described above, among the multiple operation enabled states of the type in which a message display is displayed, in the special multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), while there is one valid period, the post-operation output sound is output in the following two cases: when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, and the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time (second post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)); and when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, and In the case where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is put into the non-operated state without being operated, a "sound in which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is put into the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time" is output (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)). Therefore, for example, in the second A acceptance allowing state, it is possible that the performance of the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state is worth paying attention to, while the post-operation output sound that is in the output state does not necessarily end a fixed time after being put into the non-operated state, which is expected to maintain a suitable sense of tension when being put into the non-operated state.

In the first A reception permission state, the third A reception permission state, and the fourth A reception permission state in the above-mentioned performance examples, there are no cases where a post-operation output sound in which the output state is terminated upon detection of a non-operation state is output, and only cases where a post-operation output sound in which the post-operation output sound is not terminated upon detection of a non-operation state is output.

In addition, the "time from when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is inaudible" may be set to any time, or may be "0 seconds."

Furthermore, for the eighth configuration A8, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is the subject of a mock image display and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

Furthermore, to realize the eighth configuration A8, the fourth A reception permission state does not necessarily have to be provided, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain each of the configurations and effects described above.

Also, for example, as a ninth configuration A9, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the reception of an operation for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a type of multiple operation valid state in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146, second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149, third A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152), and a type of multiple operation valid state in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state (fourth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155). In the case where the above-mentioned specific operation means (operation button 410) is provided with the above-mentioned, in a multiple operation enabled state (4A reception permitted state) of a type in which a post-operation output sound corresponding thereto is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, when it is detected that the above-mentioned specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state, as the post-operation output sound, "when the above-mentioned specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound that is not a fixed time from the timing when the above-mentioned specific operation means changes to the non-operation state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time)" is output as the post-operation output sound. In contrast, in the multiple operation enabled states (first A reception permitted state, second A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state) in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is merely maintained in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state, a post-operation output sound of "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time when the specific operation means is in the non-operation state" is output as the post-operation output sound. The second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g) is output in a case where "a sound in which the time from the timing of the specific operation means to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time" is output, and "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means is made in the non-operated state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound with an indefinite time)" is output (the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146 and the third A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 152). In the above example, the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g) is set to "0 seconds" as the fixed time from the timing when the specific operation means is made in the non-operated state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible.

According to this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled in the multiple operations enabled state, it is difficult to guess how much time will elapse after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state before the post-operation output sound in the output state ends, for example, in a situation where the specific operation means (operation button 410) has just been changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and it is possible to suitably suggest that the performance is low in terms of how much time will elapse after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. On the other hand, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled in the multiple operations enabled state, it is possible to guess how much time will elapse after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state before the post-operation output sound in the output state ends, and it is difficult to guess. For example, while suggesting that the performance of the specific operation means after being changed from an operating state to a non-operating state may be worth noting, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound in the output state ends after a certain amount of time has elapsed since being changed to a non-operating state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to a non-operating state is suitably maintained.

In addition, in the ninth configuration A9 according to the above-mentioned performance example, in a type of multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state, second A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state) in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state, the imitation image display may be displayed in both the first color scheme and the second color scheme (see Figures 146(c), 149(c), 152(c), etc.), but in a type of multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state) in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state, there are at least some cases in which the imitation image display is displayed in the first color scheme (it may be necessarily the first color scheme), but it may not be displayed in the second color scheme.

In this case, in a type of multiple operation enabled state (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state, third A reception allowable state) in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state, it is sufficient if the imitation image display is displayed in both the first color scheme and the second color scheme. For example, the type of multiple operation enabled state may include a specified multiple operation enabled state in which the imitation image display is displayed only in the first color scheme, or may include a specific multiple operation enabled state in which the imitation image display is not displayed in either the first color scheme or the second color scheme.

As described above, in the ninth configuration A9 according to the above-mentioned performance example, among the types of multiple operation valid states in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, in the special multiple operation valid state (second A reception allowable state), while there is one valid period, the post-operation output sound is output in a case where "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means becomes the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made in an inaudible state is treated as a fixed time" (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149 (g)) and "when the specific operation means When the operation button 410 is changed from an operating state to a non-operated state where it is not being operated, a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means is changed to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound of indefinite time) may be output (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)). Therefore, in a special multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance permitted state), it is possible to suggest that the performance of the specific operation means after being changed from an operating state to a non-operated state may be worth paying attention to, but the post-operation output sound in the output state will not necessarily end a fixed time after being changed to a non-operated state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to a non-operated state will be appropriately maintained.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In the ninth configuration A9 according to the above-mentioned performance example, among the types of multiple operation enabled states in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, in the special multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state or third A reception permitted state), there is no case where a post-operation output sound is output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the time the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state to the time the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time from the time the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state to the time the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is an indefinite time)" is output as the post-operation output sound.

In addition, the "time from when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is inaudible" may be set to any time, or may be "0 seconds."

Furthermore, with regard to the ninth configuration A9, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is subject to a mock image display and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

In addition, to realize the ninth configuration A9, it is possible to have only one of the first A reception permission state and the third A reception permission state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain each of the configurations and effects described above.

Also, for example, the tenth configuration A10 includes a multiple operation valid state in which the reception of an operation for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a type of multiple operation valid state in which a periodic change in the mock image display is displayed in a time unit longer than a predetermined time (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149, the fourth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155), and a type of multiple operation valid state in which a periodic change in the mock image display is displayed in a time unit shorter than the predetermined time (the first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146, the third A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152). In the case where, in the multiple operation valid state (first A reception permission state, third A reception permission state) of the type in which the periodic change of the mock image display appears in a time unit of less than the predetermined time, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state, the following is output as the post-operation output sound: "When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made to be in an inaudible state is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time In contrast, in the multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state, the fourth A reception permitted state) of the type in which the periodic change of the mock image display appears in units of time longer than a predetermined time, when it is detected that the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in an operating state, a post-operation output sound is output as "When the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means is output to the non-operating state." There are two cases where "a sound in which the time from the timing when the step is reached to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time" is output (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), and "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means is made in the non-operated state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound with an indefinite time)" can be output (the fourth A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155). In the above example, the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g) is set to "0 seconds" as the fixed time from the timing when the specific operation means is made in the non-operated state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible.

According to this configuration, when the time required for the periodic change of the imitation image display in the multiple operation effective state is relatively short, it is difficult to guess how much time will elapse after the non-operation state for the post-operation output sound in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state to end, and for example, it is possible to suitably suggest that the noteworthy performance is low in a situation where the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state immediately after it is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. On the other hand, when the time required for the periodic change of the imitation image display in the multiple operation effective state is relatively long, there are both cases where it is possible to guess how much time will elapse after the non-operation state for the post-operation output sound in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state to end, and cases where it is difficult to guess. Therefore, while suggesting the possibility that the performance of the specific operation means after changing from the operation state to the non-operation state is worth noting, the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has elapsed after the non-operation state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to the non-operation state is suitably maintained.

In addition, in the tenth configuration A10 according to the above-mentioned performance example, among the multiple operation enabled states, the multiple operation enabled states (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state) of the type in which the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed in a time unit less than the above-mentioned predetermined time are generated as "multiple operation enabled states in which the corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound, third A post-reception output sound) is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state", while the multiple operation enabled states (second A reception permitted state, fourth A reception permitted state) of the type in which the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed in a time unit longer than the predetermined time are generated as "multiple operation enabled states in which the specific operation means (operation button Since there are two cases where the state is generated as a "multiple operation enabled state in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining a specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state" (second A reception permissible state), and a "multiple operation enabled state in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is not generated multiple times simply by maintaining a specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state" (fourth A reception permissible state), when the time required for the cyclical change in the imitation image display is short, this suggests that the so-called auto rapid-fire function is a target for being enabled, and when the time required for the cyclical change in the imitation image display is long, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the so-called auto rapid-fire function is enabled or not. In this regard, even if the time required for the cyclical change of the model image display is long, when a post-operation output sound is output in the form of "a sound in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) goes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means goes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound goes to an inaudible state is treated as a fixed time," this suggests that the so-called auto-repeated function is to be activated, and it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition.

Furthermore, in the tenth configuration A10 according to the above-mentioned performance example, in the multiple operation enabled state of the type in which the periodic change of the imitation image display is displayed in a time unit longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the imitation image display may be displayed in both the first color scheme and the second color scheme, but in the multiple operation enabled state of the type in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operating state, there are at least some cases in which the imitation image display is displayed in the first color scheme (it does not necessarily have to be the first color scheme), but there are no cases in which it is displayed in the second color scheme.

As described above, among the multiple operation enabled states (second A reception permitted state, fourth A reception permitted state) of the type in which the periodic change in the mock image display appears in units of time longer than a predetermined time, in the special multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), even during one valid period, the post-operation output sound is output in the following cases: "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made in an inaudible state is treated as a fixed time" (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149 (g)); and "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made in an inaudible state is treated as a fixed time" (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149 (g)). ) from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not being operated, a sound in which the time from when the specific operating means is put into the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound of indefinite time) may be output (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)). Therefore, in a special multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance permitted state), for example, it is possible to suggest that the performance of the specific operating means after being put into the non-operated state from an operating state may be worth paying attention to, but the post-operation output sound in the output state will not necessarily end a fixed time after being put into the non-operated state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when being put into the non-operated state will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, among the multiple operation enabled states (2A reception permitted state, 4A reception permitted state) of the type in which the periodic change of the mock image display appears in units of time longer than a predetermined time, in the special multiple operation enabled state (4A reception permitted state), there are no cases in which the post-operation output sound is output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible while the post-operation output sound is being output, and only a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is an indefinite time)" is output.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

Furthermore, for the tenth configuration A10, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is subject to a mock image display and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

In the tenth configuration A10, the "time equal to or less than the specified time" may be provided in a number of times, or only one time (e.g., the "specified time"). Similarly, the "time longer than the specified time" may be provided in a number of times, or only one time.

In addition, to realize the tenth configuration A10, the third A reception permission state does not necessarily have to be provided, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain each of the configurations and effects described above.

For example, as the 11th configuration A11, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the operation reception of the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display is permitted multiple times, and a first operation means (operation button 410) and a second operation means (sword decoration 5001) are prepared as the above operation means, and the multiple operation valid state includes a multiple operation valid state of a type in which at least an imitation image display imitating the above first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146, second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149, third A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152, fourth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155) and a type in which at least an imitation image display imitating the above second operation means (sword decoration 5001) is displayed. In the case where the second operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is detected to be in an operating state in a multiple operation effective state (5A reception permission state) of a type in which at least an imitation image display imitating the second operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is displayed, the post-operation output sound is a sound that is not a fixed time (a fixed time) when the second operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output. 158), when it is detected that the first operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state in a type of multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state, second A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state, fourth A reception permitted state) in which at least an imitation image display simulating the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed, a post-operation output sound is output as "When the first operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the operation output sound is output from the timing when the first operation means (operation button 410) becomes the non-operation state. There are two cases where "a sound in which the time from the timing when the first operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which the first operating means is not operated to a non-operating state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time" is output (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) and "a sound in which the time from the timing when the first operating means (operation button 410) is changed to the non-operating state in which the first operating means is not operated to the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not fixed (a sound with an indefinite time)" can be output (the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146, the third A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 152, and the fourth A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155). In the above example, the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g) is set to "0 seconds" as the fixed time from the timing when the first operating means (operation button 410) is changed to the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible.

With this configuration, when the second operating means (sword decoration 5001) is the target of the mock image display in the multiple operation enabled state and the second operating means (sword decoration 5001) is operated, it is difficult to predict how much time will pass after the non-operated state for the post-operation output sound that is in an output state when the second operating means (sword decoration 5001) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state to end; for example, it is possible to suitably suggest that there is little noteworthy dramatic effect in a situation where the second operating means (sword decoration 5001) has just been changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. In contrast, when the first operating means (operation button 410) is the subject of the mock image display and the first operating means (operation button 410) is operated, it is possible to predict how much time will elapse after the first operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end, and it is difficult to predict this. For example, while it is possible to suggest that the performance of the first operating means (operation button 410) when it is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state may be worth paying attention to, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the non-operating state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the first operating means is changed to a non-operating state will be appropriately maintained.

As described above, among the multiple operation enabled states (first A reception permitted state, second A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state, fourth A reception permitted state) of the type in which at least an imitation image display imitating the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed, in the special multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), even during one effective period, the post-operation output sound is output in the following two cases: when the first operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from when the first operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)); and when the first operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output. When the first operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operated state, a sound may be output in which the time from when the first operating means (operation button 410) is changed to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound of indefinite time) (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)). Therefore, in a special multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance permitted state), for example, it is possible to suggest that the performance after the first operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operated state may be worth noting, but the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will not necessarily end a fixed time after being changed to a non-operated state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to a non-operated state will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, in the multiple operation enabled state (5A reception permitted state) of the type in which at least an imitation image display of the second operation means (sword decoration 5001) is displayed, there is no case in which the post-operation output sound is output as "a sound in which, when the second operation means (sword decoration 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the second operation means (sword decoration 5001) changes to the non-operating state in which it is not operated until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is treated as a fixed time from the time when the second operation means (sword decoration 5001) changes to the non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, and there is only a case in which the post-operation output sound is output as "a sound in which, when the second operation means (sword decoration 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the second operation means (sword decoration 5001) changes to the non-operating state in which it is not operated until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is an indefinite time)."

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In addition, to realize the 11th configuration A11, the 4th A reception permission state does not necessarily have to be provided, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain each of the configurations and effects described above.

In addition, to realize the 11th configuration A11, it is possible to have only one of the 1st A reception permission state and the 3rd A reception permission state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain each of the configurations and effects described above.

Also, for example, as the 12th configuration A12, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the operation reception for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. In the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in an operating state, and a post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) in response to the detection is preset. The post-operation output sound can be generated at a set time interval, but the post-operation output sound is output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the timing when the specific operation means is changed to the non-operated state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite)" (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146), whereas in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permitted state), the post-operation output sound is output as "a sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means is changed to the non-operated state to the timing when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite)" (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146). The post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to be an indefinite time. However, the post-operation output sound is a sound that is generated for a certain period of time from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state where it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output (the period of time is set to be a certain period of time). The second A post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h) may be output as a sound that is processed as a "sound ...

According to this configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state) among the multiple operation valid states, it is difficult to predict how much time will elapse after the non-operated state for the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) that is in an output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state to end, and it is possible to preferably suggest, for example, that there is little noteworthy dramatic effect in a situation where the specific operation means (operation button 410) has just been changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) among the multiple operation valid states, it is possible to guess how much time will elapse after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state before the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) in the output state ends when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and it is difficult to guess this. For example, while it is possible to suggest that the performance after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state may be worth paying attention to, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound in the output state ends after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the non-operation state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to the non-operation state will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, in the 12th configuration A12, a third multiple operation valid state (4A reception permitted state) is further provided as a multiple operation valid state, and in the third multiple operation valid state (4A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) in response to detection is not enabled to be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, and the post-operation output sound is output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operation state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not processed as a fixed time but is indefinite." With this configuration, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, it is possible to preferably suggest that the post-operation output sound is output as a sound that "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not treated as a fixed time but is indefinite."

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In addition, the intervals at which the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is generated multiple times when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state in the first multiple operations enabled state (second A reception permitted state) are indefinite, but the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is not generated at intervals shorter than a predetermined time (fixed time) which is the intervals at which the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is generated multiple times when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state in the second multiple operations enabled state (first A reception permitted state), but is generated only at intervals longer than the predetermined time. That is, in this case, the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) is different from the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state), in that the interval when the output is repeated by the auto-repeated tap function is indefinite, and the time required for that interval (shortest time) is also long, making it difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated tap function is enabled, making it difficult to recognize whether the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) or the third multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state) is occurring, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, the number of times that the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) can be generated multiple times in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) is set to be less than the number of times that the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) can be generated multiple times in the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state in the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state). That is, in this case, it becomes even more difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), and it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) or the third multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state) is generated.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), the upper limit number of times that the post-operation output sound (second A post-operation output sound) can be generated multiple times by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state is set to be less than the upper limit number of times that the post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the specific operation means (operation button 410) without maintaining it in an operation state. With this configuration, the characteristics of the performance as the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) become closer to the third multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled, making it difficult to recognize whether the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) or the third multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state) is generated, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state), the upper limit number of times that the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) can be generated multiple times by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state is set to be the same as or greater than the upper limit number of times that the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the specific operation means (operation button 410) without maintaining it in an operation state.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) and the third multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound is not output as "a sound that is processed as a fixed time from the time the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible, with the time being a fixed time from the time the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to the time the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible" (sound that is processed as a fixed time).

In addition, in the twelfth configuration A12, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

In addition, in order to realize the twelfth configuration A12, the multiple operation valid state may include the third A reception allowance state instead of the first A reception allowance state, and the third A reception allowance state may be realized as the second multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the first A reception allowance state and the third A reception allowance state.

Also, for example, as a 13th configuration A13, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the reception of operations for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is merely maintained in an operating state, and a post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times. At that time, the post-operation output sound is generated anew. The interval until the post-operation output sound is generated is always longer than the specific time, and the post-operation output sound (second-A post-reception output sound) can be output as "a sound (a sound processed as a specific time) from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed to the non-operated state in which it is not operated, until the post-operation output sound is changed to an inaudible state" (second-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). In the second multiple operations valid state (fourth-A reception permitted state), the above-mentioned The post-operation output sound (fourth A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the detection is not allowed to be generated multiple times, and the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is output as "a sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operated state from the operation state to the time when the post-operation output sound is inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operated state from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output (fourth A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155 ), and in the third multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state), The post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times by simply maintaining the state, but in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to a specific time or less, and the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) can be output as "a sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) becomes the non-operation state from the operation state to the time when the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) becomes the non-operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146). In the above example, the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g) is set to "0 seconds" as the fixed time from the timing when the first operation means (operation button 410) becomes the non-operation state to the time when the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible.

According to this configuration, first, when the post-operation output sound in response to the above detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, it is suggested that the post-operation output sound is output as a sound "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite)." In this regard, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, the post-operation output sound will be output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is a fixed time (a sound processed as a fixed time)" (a second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) and as "a sound in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is a fixed time (a sound processed as a fixed time)" (a second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). When the specific operation means (operation button 410) is placed in a non-operated state, the post-operation output sound is output as a "sound that is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite)" (the first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146) in either case, or when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, it is possible to suggest the nature of the sound that the post-operation output sound will be output as by checking whether the interval between when the post-operation output sound is output and when it is newly output is longer than the specified time, which is expected to maintain the interest in the game.

In addition, in the thirteenth configuration A13, in particular, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception allowable state) is output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the timing when the specific operation means becomes the non-operated state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is a fixed time (a sound processed as a fixed time)" (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149 (g)), or as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) becomes the non-operated state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is an indefinite time)" (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149 (h). That is, in this case, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), it is possible to guess how much time will elapse after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state before the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) that is in an output state will end when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and it is difficult to guess this. For example, while it is possible to suggest that the performance after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state may be worth paying attention to, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end a certain amount of time after being changed to a non-operation state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to a non-operation state will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In addition, in the 13th configuration A13, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), the interval between occurrences of the post-operation output sound (second A reception permitted state) is an indefinite time, and when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state in the third multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state), the interval between occurrences of the post-operation output sound is a fixed time. That is, in this case, the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) is different from the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state), in that the interval when the output is repeated by the auto-repeated tap function is indefinite, and the time required for that interval (shortest time) is also long, making it difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated tap function is enabled, making it difficult to recognize whether the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) or the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state) is occurring, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, the number of times that the post-operation output sound (2nd A post-reception output sound) can be generated multiple times in the first multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permitted state) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state in the first multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permitted state) is set to be less than the number of times that the post-operation output sound (1st A post-reception output sound) can be generated multiple times in the third multiple operation valid state (1st A reception permitted state) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state in the third multiple operation valid state (1st A reception permitted state). That is, in this case, it becomes even more difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the first multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permitted state), and it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether the first multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permitted state) or the second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception permitted state) is generated.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), the upper limit number of times that the post-operation output sound (second A post-operation output sound) can be generated multiple times by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state is set to be less than the upper limit number of times that the post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the specific operation means (operation button 410) without maintaining it in an operation state. With this configuration, the characteristics of the performance as the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) become closer to the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled, making it difficult to recognize whether the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) or the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state) is generated, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, in the third multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state), the upper limit number of times that the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) can be generated multiple times by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state is set to be the same as or greater than the upper limit number of times that the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the specific operation means (operation button 410) without maintaining it in an operation state.

In addition, in the third multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) and the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound is not output as "a sound that is processed as a fixed time from the time when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible, in which the time is a fixed time from the time when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state to the time when the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible" (sound that is processed as a fixed time).

In addition, in the thirteenth configuration A13, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

In addition, in order to realize the thirteenth configuration A13, the multiple operation valid state may include the third A reception allowance state instead of the first A reception allowance state, and the third A reception allowance state may be realized as the third multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the first A reception allowance state and the third A reception allowance state.

Also, for example, as a 14th configuration A14, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the operation reception for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a type of multiple operation valid state in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before a predetermined end timing arrives (a first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146, a second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), and a type of multiple operation valid state in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before a predetermined end timing arrives (a third A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152). 155 ), in the multiple operation valid state (the 3rd A reception allowable state, the 4th A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 155 ) of the type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, when it is detected that the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in an operation state, the following is output as the post-operation output sound: "When the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the time when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time." 152, and the fourth A reception output sound shown in FIG. 155). In contrast, in the multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state) of the type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state, the post-operation output sound is output as the post-operation output sound, and when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound is output as the post-operation output sound. The post-operation output sound may be output in two ways: a sound in which the time from the timing when the first operation means (operation button 410) is turned on until the post-operation output sound is turned inaudible is a fixed time (a sound that is processed as a fixed time) is output (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)); and a sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is turned on until the post-operation output sound is turned inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite) is output as the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is turned from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output (the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146). In the above example, the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g) is set to "0 seconds" as the fixed time from the timing when the first operation means (operation button 410) is turned on until the post-operation output sound is turned inaudible.

According to such a configuration, in the multiple operation enabled state of the type that cannot be terminated (the third A reception permitted state, the fourth A reception permitted state), it is difficult to predict how much time will elapse after the non-operated state for the post-operation output sound that is in an output state when the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operated state to terminate. For example, it is possible to suitably suggest that there is little noteworthy dramatic effect immediately after the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operated state. On the other hand, in the multiple operation enabled state of the type that can be terminated (the first A reception permitted state, the second A reception permitted state), it is difficult to predict how much time will elapse after the post-operation output sound that is in an output state when the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operated state to terminate. When the operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, the amount of time that will elapse after the operation button 410 is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state before the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end is both possible and difficult to predict. For example, while it is possible to suggest that the performance that occurs after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state may be worth noting, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound that is in an output state will end a certain amount of time after the non-operating state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the button is changed to the non-operating state will be appropriately maintained.

As described above, among the types of multiple operation valid states (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state) in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, in the special multiple operation valid state (second A reception allowable state), even during one valid period, the post-operation output sound is output in the case where "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means becomes in the non-operation state to when the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is treated as a fixed time" (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149 (g)) and "when the post-operation output sound is output, When the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated, a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means is changed to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound of indefinite time) may be output (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)). Therefore, in a special multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance permitted state), for example, it is possible to suggest that the performance of the specific operation means after being changed from an operating state to a non-operated state may be worth paying attention to, but the post-operation output sound in the output state will not necessarily end a fixed time after being changed to a non-operated state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to a non-operated state will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, among the types of multiple operation valid states (first A reception permission state, second A reception permission state) in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, in a special multiple operation valid state (first A reception permission state), there is no case where a post-operation output sound is output as "a sound in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the time when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state to the time when the post-operation output sound is in an inaudible state is treated as a fixed time from the time when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state to the time when the post-operation output sound is in an inaudible state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, and only a sound in which the time from the time when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state to the time when the post-operation output sound is in an inaudible state is not a fixed time (a sound with an indefinite time)" is output.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In addition, in the 14th configuration A14, among the multiple operation valid states, the multiple operation valid states (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state) of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing are generated as "multiple operation valid states in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state", but the multiple operation valid states (third A reception allowable state) of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing are generated as "multiple operation valid states in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state". The reception permissible state, 4A reception permissible state) can occur either as a "multiple operation valid state in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining a specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state" or as a "multiple operation valid state in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is not generated multiple times simply by maintaining a specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state", so it is expected that in a multiple operation valid state in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state before the arrival of a predetermined termination timing, it will be difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated-hit function is enabled or not.

In addition, in the 14th configuration A14, in the multiple operation valid state (1A reception allowable state, 2A reception allowable state) of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, the message display MA is always displayed (message display MA1, MA2). However, in the multiple operation valid state (3A reception allowable state, 4A reception allowable state) of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, the message display MA is displayed in some cases (4A reception allowable state) and not displayed in other cases (3A reception allowable state). Therefore, when the message display MA is displayed, it is difficult to recognize which type of multiple operation valid state has occurred, and it is expected that the sense of tension can be appropriately maintained.

Furthermore, for the 14th configuration A14, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is the subject of a mock image display and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the 14th configuration A14 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

In addition, to realize the 14th configuration A14, it is possible to have only one of the 3A reception permission state and the 4A reception permission state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain each of the configurations and effects described above.

Also, for example, as a 15th configuration A15, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the reception of an operation for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) and a second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) having different occurrence conditions are prepared. In both the first multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state) and the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated, and the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146, second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) is in an output state (for example, during the period from timing tAa2-B3 to tAa2-C1 in FIG. 146 or the timing In the first multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowable state), in a situation where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, as the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is provisionally changed from a non-operation state to an operation state, both of a sound that may cause a change (end) in the output state (first post-reception output sound SA1 (timing tAa2-C1) shown in FIG. 146(g)) and a sound that does not cause a change in the output state (second post-reception output sound SB1 shown in FIG. 146(h)) may be in an output state, but when the specific operation means is in an operation state, Moreover, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state is prevented from changing regardless of the type of sound output as the post-operation output sound (first-A post-acceptance output sound) (for example, see timing tAa2-A2 and timing tAa2-B3 in Figs. 146(g) and 146(h)). On the other hand, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (first-A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state during the second multiple-operation valid state (second-A acceptance permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is provisionally changed from a non-operating state to an operating state (for example, see timing See timing tAb-C1, etc.) A sound that does not cause a change in the output state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state (although a sound that may cause a change in the output state is not being output as the post-operation output sound), if the specific operation means (operation button 410) goes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state and the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, then this is used as a trigger to cause either a change (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) or no change (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) depending on the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound (see, for example, timing tAb2-B3, etc.).

According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state), even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state is changed to a non-operation state, the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) that was in the output state until then does not change (end) as a result, so it is expected that the operation will be interrupted without hesitation. However, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the non-operation state is changed to an operation state, there are both cases where the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) that was in the output state until then changes (ends) and cases where no change (ends) occurs. Therefore, while encouraging re-operation, the possibility of a change in the post-operation output sound is also provided, so that it is expected that a sense of tension regarding re-operation can be suitably provided. In contrast, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state is changed to a non-operation state, there are cases where the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) that was in the output state until then changes, and cases where no change (end) occurs. Therefore, while encouraging interruption of the operation, the possibility of a change in the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is suitably provided to create a sense of tension regarding interrupting the operation, while when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the non-operation state is changed to an operation state, there is no change (end) in the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) that was in the output state until then, so it is expected that the operation will be performed again with ease.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, this is used as a trigger to change (end) the post-operation display (repeated tap display HA2) that was displayed up until that point, but at this time, a display different from the post-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) is made to appear (see Figures 151 (c) and (f), etc.), making it possible to more proactively encourage the user to stop operating.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state is changed to the non-operation state, this triggers the display of the non-operation display HB2. However, at this time, the sound effect corresponding to the non-operation display HB2 is not newly output, so it is possible to suggest that the display of the non-operation display HB2 was not displayed as a result of the operation state being changed, but was displayed as a result of the non-operation state being changed.

In addition, in the fifteenth configuration A15, as the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), a type of post-operation output sound (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state is changed when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a type of post-operation output sound (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state is not changed (ended) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state are prepared, and a situation in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in the output state can occur. In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) that was in the output state until then changes (ends), so that it is possible to provide a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the interruption of the operation.

In addition, in the fifteenth configuration A15, the post-operation output sound of the type that is changed (ended) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) can be output in either a state in which the post-operation output sound of the type that is not changed (ended) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state or a state in which it is not in an output state, but the specific operation means (operation button 410) The type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) does not start being output alone when the type of post-operation output sound that does change (end) when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in an output state, but can start being output when it is in an output state (or at the same time), so that it is possible to provide an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to stop operating.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) of the 15th configuration A15, even if the output condition of the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2, whereas the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may not be terminated or new output may not be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not interrupted to start outputting a sound based on new data (one sound effect) or to start playing again.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) of the 15th configuration A15, when the output condition of the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2, while the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived (here, one sound effect) is interrupted, and the sound (one sound effect) based on the new data (here, one sound effect data) starts to be output.

Furthermore, for the fifteenth configuration A15, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is the subject of a mock image display and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the fifteenth configuration A15 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

In addition, to realize the fifteenth configuration A15, the third A reception-permitted state may be provided as the first multiple operation enabled state instead of the first A reception-permitted state. Alternatively, both the first A reception-permitted state and the third A reception-permitted state may be provided.

Also, for example, as a 16th configuration A16, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times for the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (5A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 158) and a second multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149) are prepared, which have different occurrence conditions from each other, and the first multiple operation valid state (5A acceptance permitted state) is generated as an operation valid state in which at least an imitation image display that imitates the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) among the operating means is displayed, and a first side post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 158) in response to detection that the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) has entered an operation state in which it is operated is in an output state and the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is operated. It is possible to play the game so that a situation where the second operation means (operation button 410) is not being operated and is in a non-operation state (for example, the period from timing tAe2-B2 to tAe2-C1 shown in FIG. 158) appears, and the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) occurs as an operation valid state in which at least an imitation image display imitating the second operation means (operation button 410) of the above operation means is displayed, and it is possible to play the game so that a situation where the second side post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) is in an output state in response to detection that the second operation means (operation button 410) has entered an operation state in which it is being operated and the second operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state in which it is not being operated (for example, the period from timing tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149) appears.

In this regard, in the 16th configuration A16, in the first multiple operation valid state (5A reception permitted state), in a situation where the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in a non-operated state and the first side post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, only a sound (5A post-reception output sound shown in Fig. 158 (g) and (h)) that causes a change (end) in the output state when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is provisionally changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (for example, when timing tAe-C1 arrives) is output as the first side post-operation output sound. In some cases (although a process that changes the sound in the output state is possible), if the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) goes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is in an operating state and the first side post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving 5A) is in an output state, the output state of the first side post-operation output sound (sword decorative body 5001) does not change as a result of this (processing that changes the sound in the output state is not possible) (for example, see timing tAe2-A2 shown in Figures 158 (g) and (h)).

According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state (5A reception permitted state), even if the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) in the operating state is put into a non-operating state, the post-operation output sound (output sound after 5A reception) that was in the output state until then does not change (end) as a result, so it is expected that the operation will be interrupted without hesitation, but when the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) in the non-operating state is put into an operating state, there is a possibility that the post-operation output sound (output sound after 5A reception) that was in the output state until then will change (end), so it is expected that this will provide a good sense of tension when operating again.

In addition, in the 16th configuration A16, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), in a situation where the second operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the second side post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is provisionally changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (for example, when timing tAb-C1 arrives), only a sound that does not cause a change (end) in the output state in response to this (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) is output as the second side post-operation output sound (sounds that may cause a change in the output state are not output as described above). The second side post-operation output sound is not output as the second side post-operation output sound), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state and the second side post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, if the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may be used as a trigger to cause the type of sound output as the second side post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) to change (end) (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) or not to change (end) (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)).

According to this configuration, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), while the interruption of the operation is encouraged, there is a possibility that the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) may change (end), which appropriately creates a sense of tension regarding interrupting the operation, while when the second operating means (operation button 410) in a non-operating state is put into an operating state, the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) that was in an output state up until that point is not changed (ended), so it is expected that the user will operate again with ease.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the second operating means (operation button 410) in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, this is used as a trigger to change (end) the post-operation display (repeated tap display HA2) that was displayed up until that point, but at this time, a display different from the post-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) is made to appear (see Figures 151 (c) and (f), etc.), making it possible to more proactively encourage the user to stop operating.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the second operating means (operation button 410) in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, this triggers the display of the non-operating display HB2. However, at this time, the sound effect corresponding to the non-operating display HB2 is not newly output, so it is possible to suggest that the non-operating display HB2 was not displayed as a result of the second operating means being changed to an operating state, but was displayed as a result of the second operating means being changed to a non-operating state.

In addition, in the 16th configuration A16, as the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), a type of post-operation output sound (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state is changed when the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, and a type of post-operation output sound (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state is not changed (ended) when the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state are prepared, and a situation in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in the output state can occur. In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) that was in the output state until then changes (ends), so that it is possible to provide a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the interruption of the operation.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) according to the 16th configuration A16, the type of post-operation output sound that is changed (ended) when the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) can be output in both situations when the type of post-operation output sound that is not changed (ended) when the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state and when it is not in an output state. The type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (end) when the operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is not output alone when the type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that changes (ends) when the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is not in an output state, but is output when (or at the same time as) it is in an output state, so that it is possible to provide an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the interruption of operation.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) of the 16th configuration A16, even if the output condition of the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2, whereas the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may not be terminated or new output may not be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not terminated halfway to start outputting a sound based on new data (one sound effect) or to start playing again.

Also, for example, as a 17th configuration A17, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which operation reception for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (3A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152) and a second multiple operation valid state (2A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) having different occurrence conditions are prepared, and the second multiple operation valid state (2A reception permitted state) is a state in which the state can be terminated when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before a predetermined end timing arrives, but the first multiple operation valid state (3A reception permitted state) is not a state in which the state can be terminated when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before a predetermined end timing arrives. In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (third A reception permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (third A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change (end) as a result of this (first post-reception output sound SA3 shown at timing tAc2-C1 in FIG. 152(g)), but when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound (third A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, In the case where the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the post-operation output sound (third A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is prevented from changing (ending) as a result of this (see, for example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 shown at timing tAc2-B3 in FIG. 152(g) and (h)). In the case where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (third A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is prevented from changing (ending) as a result of this (see, for example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 shown at timing tAc2-B3 in FIG. 152(g) and (h)). In a situation where the sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is provisionally changed from a non-operation state to an operation state (see, for example, timing tAb-C1 shown in FIG. 149 ), a sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149 (h)) that does not cause a change (end) in the output state is in an output state (although a sound that may cause a change (end) in the output state is not output as the post-operation output sound), as the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound), When the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state and the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this triggers either a change (end) depending on the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) or no change (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) (see, for example, timing tAb2-B3, etc.).

With this configuration, when the "first multiple operation valid state (third A reception permitted state)" that is not terminated by the player's operation occurs, it is possible to more actively urge the player to change the specific operation means that is in a non-operated state to an operated state. Also, when the "second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state)" that may be terminated by the player's operation occurs, it is possible to more actively urge the player to change the specific operation means that is in an operated state to a non-operated state, while also outputting a sound that does not cause a change (termination) in response to the non-operated state, so it is expected that the sense of tension will also be appropriately maintained.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, this is used as a trigger to change (end) the post-operation display (repeated tap display HA2) that was displayed up until that point, but at this time, a display different from the post-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) is made to appear (see Figures 151 (c) and (f), etc.), making it possible to more proactively encourage the user to stop operating.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state is changed to the non-operation state, this triggers the display of the non-operation display HB2. However, at this time, the sound effect corresponding to the non-operation display HB2 is not newly output, so it is possible to suggest that the display of the non-operation display HB2 was not displayed as a result of the operation state being changed, but was displayed as a result of the non-operation state being changed.

In addition, in the 17th configuration A17, as the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), a type of post-operation output sound (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state is changed when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a type of post-operation output sound (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state is not changed (ended) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state are prepared, and a situation in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in the output state can occur. In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) that was in the output state until then changes (ends), so that it is possible to provide a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the interruption of the operation.

In addition, in the 17th configuration A17, the post-operation output sound of the type that is changed (ended) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) can be output in either a state where the post-operation output sound of the type that is not changed (ended) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state or a state where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not in an output state. The type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) does not start being output alone when the type of post-operation output sound that does change (end) when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in an output state, but can start being output when it is in an output state (or at the same time), so that it is possible to provide an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to stop operating.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) of the 17th configuration A17, even if the output condition of the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2, whereas the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may not be terminated or new output may not be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not interrupted to start outputting a sound based on new data (one sound effect) or to start playing again.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (3A reception permitted state) of the 17th configuration A17, when the output condition of the first post-reception output sound SB3 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAc2-B2 shown in FIG. 152), the second post-reception output sound SB3 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAc2-B2, while the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAc2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAc2-B2 arrived (here, one sound effect) is interrupted, and the sound (one sound effect) based on the new data (here, one sound effect data) starts to be output.

Furthermore, for the seventeenth configuration A17, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is the subject of a mock image display and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the seventeenth configuration A17 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Also, for example, as an 18th configuration A18, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the reception of operations for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) and a second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) having different occurrence conditions are prepared, and in both the first multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state) and the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state in which it is not operated, and the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146, second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) is in an output state (for example, at timings tAa2-B3 to tAa2-C1 in FIG. 146). 149) appears, and when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state under a circumstance in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and a post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state during the first multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permitted state), the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes to the operation state until the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) is terminated may be fixed (first post-acceptance output sound SA1 shown in FIG. 146(g)) or indefinite (second post-acceptance output sound SB1 shown in FIG. 146(h)) depending on the type of the post-operation output sound in the output state (the timings shown in FIGS. 146(g) and 146(h)). 146(g) and (h), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state and the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) becomes a non-operating state to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is indefinite (see timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g) and (h)). On the other hand, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) becomes a non-operating state to an operating state while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in an output state during the second multiple operations valid state (second A reception permitted state), the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) becomes a non-operating state to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is indefinite (see timing tAa2-B3 shown in FIG. 146(g) and (h)). The time until the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is terminated is indefinite (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(h)), but when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state under a situation where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state and the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, the time from the non-operating state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is either fixed (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) or indefinite (first post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) depending on the type of post-operation output sound in the output state (see timing tAa2-B3 shown in FIG. 149(g) and (h)). In the above example, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time.

According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state), it is difficult to guess how much time will elapse after the non-operated state for the post-operation output sound in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operated state before it ends, and it is possible to suitably suggest, for example, that the noteworthy performance is low in a situation where the specific operation means has just been changed from the operation state to the non-operated state. In contrast, there are both cases where it is possible to guess how much time will elapse after the operation state for the post-operation output sound in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the non-operated state to the operation state before it ends, and cases where it is difficult to guess. Therefore, for example, while suggesting that the performance after the specific operation means is changed back to the operation state may be worth noting, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound in the output state will end after a certain amount of time has elapsed after the operation state is changed back, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the operation state is changed back to the operation state will be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), it is difficult to guess how much time will elapse after the operation state for the post-operation output sound in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state before it ends, and it is possible to suitably suggest that, for example, the performance worth noting is low in a situation where the specific operation means is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state shortly after it has been changed from a non-operation state. In contrast, there are both cases where it is possible to guess how much time will elapse after the non-operation state for the post-operation output sound in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state before it ends, and cases where it is difficult to guess. Therefore, for example, while suggesting that the performance worth noting after the specific operation means is changed to a non-operation state, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound in the output state ends after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the non-operation state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to a non-operation state is suitably maintained.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, this is used as a trigger to change (end) the post-operation display (repeated tap display HA2) that was displayed up until that point, but at this time, a display different from the post-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) is made to appear (see Figures 151 (c) and (f), etc.), making it possible to more proactively encourage the user to stop operating.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, this triggers the display of the non-operating display HB2. However, at this time, the sound effect corresponding to the non-operating display HB2 is not newly output, so it is possible to suggest that the non-operating display HB2 was not displayed as a result of the operation state being changed, but was displayed as a result of the non-operating state being changed.

In addition, in the 18th configuration A18, as the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), a type of post-operation output sound (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state ends a certain time after the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, and a type of post-operation output sound (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state ends an indefinite time, not a certain time, after the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state are prepared, and a situation in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in the output state can occur. In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) that was in the output state until then is terminated in a certain time, so that it is possible to provide a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the interruption of the operation.

In addition, in the 18th configuration A18, the post-operation output sound of a type that ends a fixed time after the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) can be output in either a state where the post-operation output sound of a type that ends an indefinite time, not a fixed time, after the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state or a state where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not in an output state. The type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that ends a fixed time, not a fixed time, after a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is not output alone when the type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that ends a fixed time, after a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, is not output alone when it is not in the output state, but is output when it is in the output state (or at the same time), so that it is possible to encourage an interruption to the operation while providing an appropriate sense of tension.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) of the 18th configuration A18, even if the output condition of the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2, whereas the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may not be terminated or new output may not be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not interrupted to start outputting a sound based on new data (one sound effect) or to start playing again.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) of the 18th configuration A18, when the output condition of the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2, while the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived (here, one sound effect) is interrupted, and the sound (one sound effect) based on the new data (here, one sound effect data) starts to be output.

Furthermore, for the 18th configuration A18, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is subject to a mock image display and that allows multiple operations to be accepted."

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the 18th configuration A18 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

In addition, to realize the 18th configuration A18, the 3A reception-permitted state may be provided as the first multiple operation enabled state instead of the 1A reception-permitted state. Alternatively, both the 1A reception-permitted state and the 3A reception-permitted state may be provided.

Also, for example, as a 19th configuration A19, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times for the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (5A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 158) and a second multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149) are prepared, which have different occurrence conditions from each other, and the above-mentioned first multiple operation valid state (5A acceptance permitted state) occurs as an operation valid state in which at least an imitation image display that imitates the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) among the operating means is displayed, and a first side post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 158) in response to detection that the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) has entered an operation state in which it is operated is in an output state and the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is operated. It is possible to play the game so that a situation where the second operation means (operation button 410) is not being operated and is in a non-operation state (for example, the period from timing tAe2-B2 to tAe2-C1 shown in FIG. 158) appears, and the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) occurs as an operation valid state in which at least an imitation image display imitating the second operation means (operation button 410) of the above operation means is displayed, and it is possible to play the game so that a situation where the second side post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) is in an output state in response to detection that the second operation means (operation button 410) has entered an operation state in which it is being operated and the second operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state in which it is not being operated (for example, the period from timing tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149) appears.

In this regard, in the 19th configuration A19, in the first multiple operation enabled state (5A reception permitted state), when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is in a non-operated state and the first side post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the first side post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound) is terminated can be treated as a fixed time, but When the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the first side operation output sound (5th A post-reception output sound) is in an output state and the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is in an operating state, the time from the non-operating state to the end of the output state of the first side operation output sound (5th A post-reception output sound) is indefinite (not treated as a fixed time) (for example, see timing tAe2-A2 shown in Figures 158 (g) and (h)). In the above example, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time.

With this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state (5A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound (5A reception output sound) in the output state when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state makes it possible to guess how much time will pass after the operation state when it ends, and for example, it suitably suggests that there is noteworthy performance even shortly after the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, whereas it is difficult to guess how much time will pass after the non-operated state when the post-operation output sound (5A reception output sound) in the output state when the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state when it ends, and for example, it suitably suggests that there is little noteworthy performance shortly after the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state.

In addition, in the 19th configuration A19, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception allowable state), when the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state while the second side post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is in an output state and the second operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the second side post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is indefinite, but the second side post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is output. When the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operating means (operation button 410) is in a forced state and the second operating means (operation button 410) is in an operating state, the time from when the non-operating state is reached to when the output state of the second side post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is terminated is either fixed (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) or indefinite (first post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) depending on the type of the second side post-operation output sound in the output state.

According to this configuration, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state, it is difficult to guess how much time will elapse after the operation state for the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) in the output state to end. For example, it is possible to suitably suggest that the noteworthy performance is low in a situation where the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state immediately after the non-operation state. On the other hand, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, the post-operation output sound (operation button 410) in the output state is made to have both a guessable time elapsed after the non-operation state and a difficult time elapsed after the non-operation state. Therefore, while it is possible to suggest that the performance after the second operation means is changed to a non-operation state may be worth noting, the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain time has elapsed after the non-operation state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the second operation means is changed to a non-operation state is also suitably maintained.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the second operating means (operation button 410) in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, this is used as a trigger to end the post-operation display (repeated tap display HA2) that was displayed up until that point. At this time, a display different from the post-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) is made to appear (see Figs. 151(c) and (f), etc.), so that it becomes possible to more proactively encourage the interruption of operation.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when the second operating means (operation button 410) in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, this triggers the display of the non-operating display HB2. However, at this time, the sound effect corresponding to the non-operating display HB2 is not newly output, so it is possible to suggest that the non-operating display HB2 was not displayed as a result of the second operating means being changed to an operating state, but was displayed as a result of the second operating means being changed to a non-operating state.

In addition, in the 19th configuration A19, as the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), a type of post-operation output sound (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state ends a certain time after the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, and a type of post-operation output sound (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state ends an indefinite time, not a certain time, after the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state are prepared, and a situation in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in an output state can occur. In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) that was in an output state until then is terminated in a certain time, so that it is possible to provide a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the interruption of the operation.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) according to the 19th configuration A19, the post-operation output sound of the type that ends a certain time after the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) can be output in either a state in which the post-operation output sound of the type that ends an indefinite time, not a certain time, after the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state or a state in which it is not in an output state. The type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that ends a variable amount of time, not a fixed amount of time, after the operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is not output alone when the type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that ends a fixed amount of time after the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is not output alone when it is not in the output state, but is output when it is in the output state (or at the same time), so that it is possible to encourage an interruption of operation while providing a moderate sense of tension.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) of the 19th configuration A19, even if the output condition of the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2, whereas the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may not be terminated or new output may not be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not interrupted to start outputting a sound based on new data (one sound effect) or to start playing again.

Also, for example, as the 20th configuration A20, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the reception of operations on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. In all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated and a post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in an operation state, and the post-operation output sound in response to the detection is not generated. In the second multiple-operation enabled state (fourth-A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound (the fourth-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, but at this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to an indefinite time (not processed as a fixed time). In the third multiple-operation enabled state (first-A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound (the first-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state. At this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is processed to be a fixed time. In addition, among the multiple operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to an indefinite time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is in an output state, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is not changed (ended) as a result of this (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(g) and (h)). In contrast, in the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to a fixed time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is not changed (ended) as a result of this (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(g) and (h)). When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is changed (ended) by this (see, for example, timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)). Thus, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state. In the second multiple operation enabled state (4A reception permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed (ended) as a result (see, for example, timing tAd2-C1 shown in Figures 155 (g) and (h)).

With this configuration, in both cases where the player performs another operation in the second multiple operation enabled state (4th A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is not enabled, and where the player performs another operation in the third multiple operation enabled state (1st A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-rapid tap function is enabled at regular intervals, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed (ended) as a result, which is expected to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the player is in a situation in which the auto-rapid tap function is enabled, thereby maintaining a sense of tension in an optimal manner. In contrast, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), if the specific operation means is operated again while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, it is possible to recognize that the so-called auto-hit function is not enabled (second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state)), that is, that the player is in a situation in which the auto-hit function is enabled. Therefore, while making it difficult to recognize whether the auto-hit function is enabled by not enabling the so-called auto-hit function at regular intervals, the decrease in interest in playing the game due to this configuration can be suppressed.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), there are two cases where a post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) in which the output state does not change (end) upon detection of a non-operation state is output, and there are also cases where a post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) in which the output state changes (ends) upon detection of a non-operation state is output. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), whose output state is changed (terminated) upon detection of a non-operated state, will no longer be in an output state at the time when another operation is performed thereafter, and only the post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)), whose output state is not changed (terminated) upon detection of a non-operated state, can be made to be in an output state as a sound that is not changed (terminated) by the second operation at the time when the second operation is performed.

In the above-mentioned performance example, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation enabled state (the 4th A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple operation enabled state (the 1st A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146), no post-operation output sound of the type that does not maintain the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state and uses this as an opportunity to change (end) the output state is provided, but only a post-operation output sound of the type that does not change (end) the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is provided.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In the twentieth configuration A20, it is assumed that the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is represented as a mock image display and that is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, in order to realize the twentieth configuration A20, the multiple operation valid state may include the third A reception allowance state instead of the first A reception allowance state, and the third A reception allowance state may be realized as the third multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the first A reception allowance state and the third A reception allowance state.

For example, as the 21st configuration A21, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the reception of operations for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. In both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state in which it is not operated and an output sound is in an output state after operation. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), A post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times by simply maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, but at this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to an indefinite time (not processed as a fixed time), and in the second multiple operations enabled state (the first A reception allowed state), a post-operation output sound (the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, but at this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is processed to be a fixed time. In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time, when the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state under a situation in which the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound) is not changed (ended) as a result of this (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and 149(h) and the like), and the post-operation output sound is newly generated. In the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146), in which the interval until the sound is generated is a fixed time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) is in an output state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, this triggers either a change (first A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(g)) or no change (first A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)) depending on the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound).

According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance allowed state shown in FIG. 149) in which the so-called auto rapid-fire function is not enabled at regular intervals, even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) does not change (end) as a result of this, and coupled with the fact that the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is an indefinite time, it is expected that tension will be maintained in an optimal manner by making it difficult for the player to recognize whether their operation has been properly accepted. In contrast, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled at regular intervals, for example, while suggesting that the performance after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is put into an operation state again may be worth noting, the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) in the output state is not necessarily changed (ended) when the operation state is again put into the operation state, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the operation state is again put into the operation state.

In addition, as the post-operation output sound (post-second A reception output sound) corresponding to the first multiple operation valid state (post-second A reception state shown in FIG. 149), a type of post-operation output sound (post-second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state is changed (ended) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, and a type of post-operation output sound (post-second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state is not changed (ended) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state are prepared, and a situation in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in the output state can occur. In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (post-second A reception output sound) that was in the output state until then changes (ended), so that it is possible to encourage the interruption of the operation while providing a moderate sense of tension.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), the type of post-operation output sound that is changed (ended) when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is in an output state and in an output state, regardless of whether the type of post-operation output sound that is not changed (ended) when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state or not. A type of post-operation output sound that can be started to be output but that does not change (end) when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) may be configured to not be output alone when a type of post-operation output sound that changes (ends) when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in an output state, but to be output when it is in an output state (or simultaneously).

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) of the 21st configuration A21, even if the output condition of the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2, whereas the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may not be terminated or new output may not be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not interrupted to start outputting a sound based on new data (one sound effect) or to start playing again.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) of the 21st configuration A21, when the output condition of the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2, while the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived (here, one sound effect) is interrupted, and the sound (one sound effect) based on the new data (here, one sound effect data) starts to be output.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In the 21st configuration A21, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the 21st configuration A21 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

In addition, in order to realize the 21st configuration A21, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3A reception allowance state instead of the 1A reception allowance state, and the 3A reception allowance state may be realized as the second multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1A reception allowance state and the 3A reception allowance state.

Also, for example, as the 22nd configuration A22, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the reception of operations on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. In all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated and a post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in an operation state, and a post-operation output sound in response to the detection is not generated. In the second multiple-operation enabled state (fourth-A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound (the fourth-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, but at this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to an indefinite time (not processed as a fixed time). In the third multiple-operation enabled state (first-A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound (the first-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state. At this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is processed to be a fixed time. In addition, among the multiple operation effective states in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, in the first multiple operation effective state (second A reception permitted state) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to an indefinite time, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (second A reception post-output sound) is in an output state. 149(h)), the time from when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state to when the output state of the post-operation output sound (the output sound after the second A reception) is terminated is indefinite (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(h)). In contrast, in the third multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is a fixed time, the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (the output sound after the first A reception) is terminated. When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes to the operated state to when the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is terminated can be treated as a fixed time rather than an indefinite time (see, for example, timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)). In the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state) in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is merely maintained in an operated state and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is not allowed to be generated multiple times, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while in a situation in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (fourth A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes to the operated state to when the output state of the post-operation output is terminated can be treated as a fixed time (see, for example, timing tAd2-C1 shown in FIGS. 155(g) and 155(h)). In the above example, the fixed time from when the operation state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is set to "0 seconds."

With this configuration, in both cases where the player performs a second operation in the second multiple operation enabled state (4th A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled, and where the player performs a second operation in the third multiple operation enabled state (1st A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled at regular intervals, the time from when the player performs a second operation to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is constant, making it difficult to recognize whether or not the player is in a situation in which the auto-repeated tap function is enabled, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner. In contrast, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), if the specific operation means is operated again while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, it is possible to recognize that the so-called auto-hit function is not enabled (second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state)), that is, that the player is in a situation in which the auto-hit function is enabled. Therefore, while making it difficult to recognize whether the auto-hit function is enabled by not enabling the so-called auto-hit function at regular intervals, the decrease in interest in playing the game due to the configuration can be suppressed.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is an indefinite time, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is output, the post-operation output sound is processed as being indefinite from the time when the specific operation means (operation button 410) goes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated (for example, see timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149(h)), and as being processed as being constant until the output state is terminated (for example, see timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149(g)). In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) that was in an output state until then is terminated in a fixed time, so that it is possible to provide a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the interruption of the operation.

In the above-mentioned performance example, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation valid state (the 4th A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple operation valid state (the 1st A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146), no post-operation output sound of a type in which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state until the output state is terminated is fixed is provided, but only a post-operation output sound of a type in which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state until the output state is terminated can be treated as a fixed time is provided.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In the 22nd configuration A22, it is assumed that the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is represented as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, in order to realize the 22nd configuration A22, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3A reception allowance state instead of the 1A reception allowance state, and the 3A reception allowance state may be realized as the 3rd multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1A reception allowance state and the 3A reception allowance state.

For example, as the 23rd configuration A23, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the reception of operations on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. In both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state in which it is not operated and an output sound is in an output state after operation. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), A post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times by simply maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, but at this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to an indefinite time (not processed as a fixed time), and in the second multiple operations enabled state (the first A reception allowed state), a post-operation output sound (the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, but at this time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is processed to be a fixed time. In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149 ) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time, when the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state under a situation in which the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound) is in an output state, the time from when the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in the operated state to when the output state of the post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound) is terminated is indefinite (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149( g) and 149( h) and the like), and the post-operation output sound In the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) in which the interval until a new operation is generated is a fixed time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state under the circumstances in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) is in an output state, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) may be an indefinite time (first A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)) or a fixed time (first A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(g)). In the above example, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound.

According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled at regular intervals, even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state again, the time from the operation state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is indefinite, and coupled with the fact that the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time, it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained by making it difficult for the player to recognize whether the operation by the player has been properly accepted. In contrast, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled at regular intervals, for example, while suggesting that the performance after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed back to the operated state may be worth paying attention to, the post-operation output sound in the output state is not necessarily terminated at a fixed time after the operation state is changed back to the operated state, so that the tension when the operation state is changed back to the operated state is also expected to be appropriately maintained.

In addition, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the first multiple operation valid state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), a situation can occur in which both a post-operation output sound of a type in which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is not treated as a fixed time but is indefinite (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) and a post-operation output sound of a type in which the time until the output state is terminated is treated as a fixed time (0 seconds in the above example) (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) are in an output state.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), the post-operation output sound of the type that ends a certain time (0 seconds in the above example) after the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is terminated in a certain time after the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, regardless of whether the post-operation output sound of the type that ends in an indefinite time, but not a certain time after the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state or not in an output state. A type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that can be started to be output but is not terminated a fixed time after the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state and is terminated at an indefinite time, may be configured not to be output alone when a type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that is terminated a fixed time (0 seconds in the above example) after the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is not in an output state, but to be output when it is in an output state (or simultaneously).

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) of the 23rd configuration A23, even if the output condition of the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2, whereas the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may not be terminated or new output may not be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not interrupted to start outputting a sound based on new data (one sound effect) or to start playing again.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) of the 23rd configuration A23, when the output condition of the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2, while the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived (here, one sound effect) is interrupted, and the sound (one sound effect) based on the new data (here, one sound effect data) starts to be output.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In the 23rd configuration A23, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the 23rd configuration A23 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

In addition, in order to realize the 23rd configuration A23, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3A reception allowance state instead of the 1A reception allowance state, and the 3A reception allowance state may be realized as the second multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1A reception allowance state and the 3A reception allowance state.

Also, for example, as the 24th configuration A24, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the operation reception for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, an indefinitely changed multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated can be processed to be an indefinite time, and a fixed change multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146, third A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152) in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated can be processed to be a fixed time, and The operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) occurs as a type of multiple operation valid state that can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, whereas the fixed change multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state) occurs as a type of multiple operation valid state that cannot be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing (third A reception permitted state), and occurs as a type of multiple operation valid state that can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing (third A reception permitted state).

According to this configuration, if the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state is an indefinite time, it is possible to suitably suggest that the state is in a situation where the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state is triggered by the detection. On the other hand, if the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state is a fixed time, it is difficult to recognize whether the state is in a situation where the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state is triggered by the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state, or whether the state is in a situation where the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state is triggered by the detection, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

In the indefinitely-changing multiple operations enabled state (second A reception permitted state), the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation is not processed to be a fixed time, but is only processed to be an indefinite time, but in the fixedly-changing multiple operations enabled state (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state), it is sufficient that at least a process is executed in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation is a fixed time, and both a process in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation is a fixed time (first post-reception output sound) and a process in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation is an indefinite time (second post-reception output sound) may be executed.

In the indefinitely changing multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, the post-operation output sound is configured to either maintain its output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) goes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)), or not maintain its output state and end the output state using this as an opportunity (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) that was in an output state up until then changes (ends), so it is possible to encourage the interruption of the operation while providing a moderate sense of tension.

In the fixed change multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound does not end its output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) goes from an operating state to a non-operating state, making it easier to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the indefinite-change multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), there are no cases where the message display is not displayed, and the message display is always displayed, but in the fixed-change multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state), there are both cases where the message display is displayed and cases where the message display is not displayed, so it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In the 24th configuration A24, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the fixed-change multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state) and the indefinite-change multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the 24th configuration A24 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Also, for example, as the 25th configuration A25, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the reception of operations on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. In all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state in which it is not operated and an output sound is in an output state after operation. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in an operated state, and a sound in response to the detection is generated. A post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) can be generated multiple times, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to be longer than the specific time. In the second multiple operations enabled state (the fourth A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound (the fourth A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155) in response to the detection is not generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (the operation button 410) in an operation state. In the third multiple operations enabled state (the first A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound (the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (the operation button 410) in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to be shorter than the specific time. In addition, among the multiple operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than a specific time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is in an output state, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is not changed (ended) by this (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(g) and (h)). In contrast, in the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always shorter than the specific time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is not changed (ended) by this (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(g) and (h)). When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is changed (ended) by this (see, for example, timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)). The post-operation output sound in response to the detection is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state. In the second multiple operation enabled state (4A reception permitted state) in which this is not possible, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, and the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed (ended) as a result (see, for example, timing tAd2-C1 shown in Figures 155 (g) and (h)).

With this configuration, in both cases where the player performs another operation in the second multiple operation enabled state (4th A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated hit function is not enabled, and where the player performs another operation in the third multiple operation enabled state (1st A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated hit function is enabled and a new post-operation output is started simply when a specific amount of time or less has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, the post-operation output sound that was in the output state is changed (ended) in response to the player's second operation, making it difficult to recognize whether or not the player is in a situation in which the auto-repeated hit function is enabled, and it is expected that tension will be maintained in an optimal manner. In contrast, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), if the specific operation means is operated again while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, it is possible to recognize that the so-called auto-hit function is not enabled (second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state)), that is, that the player is not in a situation in which the auto-hit function is enabled. Therefore, since the so-called auto-hit function is not enabled until a time longer than a specific time has passed since the start of the post-operation output from the previous operation, it is difficult to recognize that the auto-hit function is enabled, and this configuration can prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), there are two cases where a post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) in which the output state does not change (end) upon detection of a non-operation state is output, and there are also cases where a post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) in which the output state changes (ends) upon detection of a non-operation state is output. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), whose output state is changed (terminated) upon detection of a non-operated state, will no longer be in an output state at the time when another operation is performed thereafter, and only the post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)), whose output state is not changed (terminated) upon detection of a non-operated state, can be made to be in an output state as a sound that is not changed (terminated) by the second operation at the time when the second operation is performed.

In the above-mentioned performance example, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation enabled state (the 4th A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple operation enabled state (the 1st A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146), no post-operation output sound of the type that does not maintain the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state and uses this as an opportunity to change (end) the output state is provided, but only a post-operation output sound of the type that does not change (end) the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is provided.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In the 25th configuration A25, it is assumed that the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is represented as a mock image display and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, in order to realize the 25th configuration A25, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3A reception allowance state instead of the 1A reception allowance state, and the 3A reception allowance state may be realized as the 3rd multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1A reception allowance state and the 3A reception allowance state.

For example, as the 26th configuration A26, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the reception of operations on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. In both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state in which it is not operated and an output sound is in an output state after operation. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), By merely maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, a post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to be longer than the specific time. In the second multiple operations enabled state (first A reception allowed state), by merely maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, a post-operation output sound (the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to be shorter than the specific time. In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state under a situation in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is not changed (ended) as a result of this (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and 149(h) and the like), and the post-operation output sound is not newly generated. In the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146), in which the interval until the sound is generated is always equal to or shorter than the specific time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) is in an output state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, this triggers either a change (first A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(g)) or a change (first A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)) depending on the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound).

According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which a new post-operation output is not started by the so-called auto rapid-fire function unless a time longer than a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) does not change (end) as a result of this, and this, combined with the fact that the so-called auto rapid-fire function does not become active (function) unless a time longer than a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, is expected to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether their operation has been accepted properly, thereby maintaining a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. In contrast, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146), in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled (functions) and a new post-operation output is started simply when a specific time or less has elapsed since the start of the previous post-operation output, for example, while suggesting that the performance after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is again put into the operation state may be worth noting, the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) in the output state is not necessarily changed (ended) when the operation state is resumed, so that the sense of tension when the operation state is resumed is expected to be appropriately maintained.

In addition, as the post-operation output sound (post-second A reception output sound) corresponding to the first multiple operation valid state (post-second A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149), a type of post-operation output sound (post-second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state is changed (ended) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, and a type of post-operation output sound (post-second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state is not changed (ended) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state are prepared, and a situation in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in the output state can occur. In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (post-second A reception output sound) that was in the output state until then changes (ended), so that it is possible to provide a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the interruption of the operation.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), the type of post-operation output sound that is changed (ended) when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is in an output state and in an output state, regardless of whether the type of post-operation output sound that is not changed (ended) when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state or not. A type of post-operation output sound that can be started to be output but that does not change (end) when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) may be configured to not be output alone when a type of post-operation output sound that changes (ends) when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in an output state, but to be output when it is in an output state (or simultaneously).

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) of the 26th configuration A26, even if the output condition of the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2, whereas the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may not be terminated or new output may not be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not terminated halfway to start outputting a sound based on new data (one sound effect) or to start playing again.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) of the 26th configuration A26, when the output condition of the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2, while the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived (here, one sound effect) is interrupted, and the sound (one sound effect) based on the new data (here, one sound effect data) starts to be output.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In the 26th configuration A26, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the 26th configuration A26 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

In addition, in order to realize the 26th configuration A26, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3A reception allowance state instead of the 1A reception allowance state, and the 3A reception allowance state may be realized as the second multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1A reception allowance state and the 3A reception allowance state.

Also, for example, as the 27th configuration A27, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the reception of operations on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. In all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state in which it is not operated and an output sound is in an output state after operation. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in an operated state, and in response to the detection, a post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) can be generated multiple times, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to be longer than the specific time. In the second multiple operations enabled state (the fourth A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound (the fourth A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155) in response to the detection is not generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (the operation button 410) in an operation state. In the third multiple operations enabled state (the first A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound (the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (the operation button 410) in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to be shorter than the specific time. In addition, among the multiple operation effective states in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, in the first multiple operation effective state (second A reception permitted state) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than a specific time, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is in an output state. In the case where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is indefinite (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(h)). In contrast, in the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state) in which the interval until the new generation of the post-operation output sound is always the specific time or less, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A reception permitted state) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state. In the case where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state while the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, the time from when the operation state is changed to when the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) is terminated can be treated as a fixed time rather than an indefinite time (see, for example, timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)). Therefore, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state. In the second multiple operation valid state (4A reception permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output is terminated can be treated as a fixed time (for example, see timing tAd2-C1 shown in FIG. 155(g) and (h)). In the above example, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated.

With this configuration, in both cases where the player performs a second operation in the second multiple operation enabled state (4th A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled, and where the player performs a second operation in the third multiple operation enabled state (1st A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled (functions) at regular intervals, the time from when the player performs a second operation to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is constant, making it difficult to recognize whether or not the player is in a situation in which the auto-repeated tap function is enabled, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner. In contrast, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), if the specific operation means is operated again while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, it is possible to recognize that the so-called auto-hit function is not enabled (second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state)), that is, that the player is in a situation in which the auto-hit function is enabled. Therefore, while making it difficult to recognize whether the auto-hit function is enabled by not enabling the so-called auto-hit function at regular intervals, the decrease in interest in playing the game due to the configuration can be suppressed.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is always longer than the specific time, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is output, the post-operation output sound is processed as an indefinite time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) goes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated (for example, see timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149(h)) or as a fixed time until the output state is terminated (for example, see timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149(g)). In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) that was in an output state until then is terminated in a fixed time, so that it is possible to provide a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the interruption of the operation.

In the above-mentioned performance example, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation valid state (the 4th A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple operation valid state (the 1st A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146), no post-operation output sound of a type in which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state until the output state is terminated is fixed is provided, but only a post-operation output sound of a type in which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state until the output state is terminated can be treated as a fixed time is provided.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In the 27th configuration A27, it is assumed that the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is represented as a mock image display and that allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, in order to realize the 27th configuration A27, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3A reception allowance state instead of the 1A reception allowance state, and the 3A reception allowance state may be realized as the 3rd multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1A reception allowance state and the 3A reception allowance state.

Also, for example, as the 28th configuration A28, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the reception of operations on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state in which it is not operated and an output sound is in an output state after operation. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), By simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, a post-operation output sound (the second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to be longer than the specific time. In the second multiple operations enabled state (first A acceptance allowed state), by simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, a post-operation output sound (the first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to be shorter than the specific time. In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is not enabled unless a time longer than a specific time has elapsed since the start of the previous post-operation output, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is in an output state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the operation state is changed to when the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is terminated is indefinite (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and 149(h)). In the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146), in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled and a new post-operation output is started only after a specific time or less has elapsed since the operation is started, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) is in an output state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) may be an indefinite time (first A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)) or a fixed time (first A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(g)). In the above example, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound.

According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled unless a time longer than a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state again, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound is indefinite, and coupled with the fact that the interval until the new generation of the post-operation output sound is set to an indefinite time, it is expected that the player will find it difficult to recognize whether the operation by the player has been properly accepted and that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained. In contrast, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled and a new post-operation output is started only when a time equal to or less than a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, for example, while suggesting that the performance after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed back to the operation state may be worth paying attention to, the post-operation output sound in the output state is not necessarily ended in a certain time after the operation state is changed back to the operation state, so that the sense of tension when the operation state is changed back to the operation state is also expected to be appropriately maintained.

In addition, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the first multiple operation valid state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), a situation can occur in which both a type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) in which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is not processed as a fixed time but is indefinite, and a type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) in which the time until the output state is terminated is processed as a fixed time (0 seconds in the above example).

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), the post-operation output sound of the type that ends a certain time (0 seconds in the above example) after the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is terminated in a certain time after the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, regardless of whether the post-operation output sound of the type that ends in an indefinite time, but not a certain time after the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state or not in an output state. A type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that can be started to be output but is not terminated a fixed time after the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state and is terminated at an indefinite time, may be configured not to be output alone when a type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that is terminated a fixed time (0 seconds in the above example) after the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is not in an output state, but to be output when it is in an output state (or simultaneously).

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) of the 28th configuration A28, even if the output condition of the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2, whereas the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may not be terminated or new output may not be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not interrupted to start outputting a sound based on new data (one sound effect) or to start playing again.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) of the 28th configuration A28, when the output condition of the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2, while the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived (here, one sound effect) is interrupted, and the sound (one sound effect) based on the new data (here, one sound effect data) starts to be output.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In the 28th configuration A28, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation valid state.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the 28th configuration A28 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

In addition, in order to realize the 28th configuration A28, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3A reception allowance state instead of the 1A reception allowance state, and the 3A reception allowance state may be realized as the second multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1A reception allowance state and the 3A reception allowance state.

Also, for example, as the 29th configuration A29, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the reception of operations for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a long change multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which a post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time, and a short change multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146, third A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152) in which a post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always shorter than the specific time, are provided. The operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) occurs as a type of multiple operation valid state that can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, whereas the short-change multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state) occurs as a type of multiple operation valid state that cannot be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing (third A reception permitted state), and occurs as a type of multiple operation valid state that can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing (third A reception permitted state).

According to this configuration, if the so-called auto-hit function is not enabled unless a time longer than a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, even though the device is subject to the auto-hit function, it is possible to suitably indicate that the state is in a situation in which the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state is triggered, whereas if the so-called auto-hit function is enabled and a new post-operation output is started only after a time shorter than a specific time has passed since the start of the previous post-operation output, it is difficult to recognize whether the state is in a situation in which the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state is triggered, or whether the state is in a situation in which the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state is triggered, and it is expected that the sense of tension is suitably maintained.

In the long-change multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation is not processed to be a fixed time, but is only processed to be an indefinite time, but in the short-change multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state), it is sufficient that at least a process is executed in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation is a fixed time, and both a process in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation is a fixed time (first post-reception output sound) and a process in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation is an indefinite time (second post-reception output sound) may be executed.

In the long-change multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, the post-operation output sound is configured to either maintain its output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) goes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)), or not maintain its output state and end the output state using this as an opportunity (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) that was in an output state up until then changes (ends), so that it is possible to encourage the interruption of the operation while providing a moderate sense of tension.

In the short-change multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound does not end its output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) goes from an operating state to a non-operating state, making it easier to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the long-change multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), there are no cases where the message display is not displayed, and the message display is always displayed, but in the short-change multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state), there are both cases where the message display is displayed and cases where the message display is not displayed, so it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In the 29th configuration A29, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the short change multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state) and the long change multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is expressed as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the 29th configuration A29 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

For example, as the 30th configuration A30, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the operation reception for the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. In all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play so that a situation appears in which the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated and the output sound after the operation is in an output state. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), it is possible to display so that the periodic change in the mock image display appears in a time unit longer than a predetermined time, and the operation means (operation button In the second multiple-operation enabled state (fourth-A reception permitted state), a periodic change in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, but a post-operation output sound (fourth-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the imitation image display in an operated state. In the third multiple-operation enabled state (first-A reception permitted state), a periodic change in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time shorter than the predetermined time, and a post-operation output sound (first-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the imitation image display in an operated state. In addition, among the multiple operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display in an operated state, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) in which the periodic change of the simulated image display can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time, the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in an output state. When the operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is not changed (ended) as a result of this (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(g) and (h)). In contrast, in the third multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permitted state) in which the periodic change of the simulated image display can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit of the predetermined time or less, the operation means (operation button 410) which is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operated state and the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is not changed (ended) as a result of this (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(g) and (h)). When the operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while a sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is changed (ended) as a result of this (see, for example, timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)), and the periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed in a time unit longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time. However, the above detection is not possible if the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display is simply maintained in an operated state. In the second multiple operation enabled state (4A reception permitted state) in which the corresponding post-operation output sound cannot be generated multiple times, if the operation means (operation button 410) that is the subject of the mock image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, when the operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed (ended) as a result (see, for example, timing tAd2-C1 shown in Figures 155 (g) and (h)).

According to this configuration, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled for the operating means that is the target of the model image display, the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) is configured the same as the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled in that the periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. This makes it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation is subject to the auto-repeated tapping function, thereby maintaining a sense of tension. However, if a second operation is performed while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, unlike the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state) (see timing tAd2-C1 shown in Figures 155 (g) and (h)), the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change as a result of this (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in Figure 149 (h)). Therefore, the presence or absence of such a change at the time of the second operation can be expected to appropriately suggest that the situation is one in which the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, thereby suppressing a decline in interest in the game. In addition, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled for the operating means that is the target of the model image display, the third multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) is configured in the same way as the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled, in that if another operation is performed while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed as a result of this. This makes it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation is subject to the auto-repeated tapping function, maintaining the sense of tension (see timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)), but unlike the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state), the periodic change in the model image display can be displayed in time units of the above-mentioned predetermined time or less. Therefore, it is expected that the length of such periodic changes in the model image display will appropriately suggest that the situation is one in which the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, thereby suppressing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the periodic change in the mock image display appears in units of time longer than the above-mentioned specified time, there are two cases in which a post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) in which the output state does not change (end) upon detection of a non-operation state is output, and a post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) in which the output state changes (ends) upon detection of a non-operation state is output. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), whose output state is changed (terminated) upon detection of a non-operated state, will already be in a non-output state at that point, even if another operation is performed thereafter, i.e., it will no longer be in an output state, and only the post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)), whose output state is not changed (terminated) upon detection of a non-operated state, can be made to be in an output state as a sound that is not changed (terminated) by the second operation, at the point when the second operation is performed.

In the above-mentioned performance example, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation valid state (the 4th A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple operation valid state (the 1st A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146), no post-operation output sound of the type that does not maintain the output state when the operating means that is the subject of the mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state and uses this as an opportunity to change (end) the output state is provided, but only a post-operation output sound of the type that does not change (end) the output state when the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is provided.

In addition, in the 30th configuration A30, as the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, a post-operation output sound of a type in which the output state is changed (ended) when the operating means to be the target of the imitation image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149 (g)) and a post-operation output sound of a type in which the output state is not changed (ended) when the operating means to be the target of the imitation image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149 (h)) are provided, and a situation in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in the output state can occur. In other words, in this case, if you interrupt the operation, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that was in an output state until then will be terminated when it goes into a non-operation state, so it is possible to encourage the interruption of the operation while providing a moderate sense of tension.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) of the 30th configuration A30, the type of post-operation output sound that is changed (ended) when the operation means that is the target of the mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) can be output in either a state where the type of post-operation output sound that is not changed (ended) when the operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state or a state where it is not in an output state. The type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) when the operating means to be displayed changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is not output alone when the type of post-operation output sound that changes (ends) when the operating means to be displayed as a mock image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in an output state, but is output when (or at the same time as) it is in an output state, so that it is possible to provide an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to stop operating.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state of the 30th configuration A30 (the 2A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), even if the output condition of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is satisfied while the operating means to be the target of the simulated image display is maintained in an operating state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 begins to be output based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state up until then may not be terminated or a new output may not be started based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not interrupted and a sound based on new data (one sound effect) is not started to be output, nor is playback restarted.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the 30th configuration A30 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the operating means (operation button 410) that is the subject of the simulated image display is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

In the 30th configuration A30, it is assumed that the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in order to realize the 30th configuration A30, the multiple operation enabled state may include the 5A reception permitted state (see Figures 158 to 160) instead of the 4A reception permitted state, and the 5A reception permitted state may be realized as the second multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (4A reception permitted state or 5A reception permitted state) in which the periodic change of the imitation image display can be displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time and the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled, a specific type of output sound may be prepared as a post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation enabled state. And, although the specific type of output sound is a single type, it may be configured so that there are both cases in which the output state changes (ends) when the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, and cases in which the output state does not change (end). In this case, the presence or absence of such a change (end) of the output state may be determined based on a judgment (performance judgment) according to the operation reception, may be determined based on the number of times the operation is received, or may be determined according to the type of display mode that appears as the post-reception display.

For example, as the 31st configuration A31, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the operation reception of the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the imitation image display is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the imitation image display is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state ), periodic changes in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in time units longer than a predetermined time, and a post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the imitation image display in an operated state, and in the second multiple-operation enabled state (first A reception allowed state), periodic changes in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in time units shorter than the predetermined time, and a post-operation output sound (the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the imitation image display in an operated state. In addition, in the first multiple operations valid state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), the periodic change of the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time, and when the operation means (operation button 410) which is the target of the imitation image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound) is in an output state, when the operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound) is not changed (ended) by this (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and 149(h) and the like). In the second multiple operations valid state (FIG. 146 In the first A reception allowing state shown in FIG. 146), the periodic change in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, and when the operation means (operation button 410) that is the subject of the imitation image display is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, when the operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state, this triggers either a change (termination) of the output state (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146(g)) or a change (termination) of the output state (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)) depending on the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound).

According to this configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the periodic changes in the mock image display are displayed in units of time longer than the specified time, even if the operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operation state to an operation state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) does not change (end) as a result of this, so it is expected that tension will be maintained in an optimal manner by making it difficult for the player to recognize whether their operation has been properly accepted. In contrast, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) in which the periodic change in the mock image display appears in units of time less than the predetermined time, for example, it is suggested that the performance after the operation means (operation button 410) is put into the operation state again may be worth noting, while the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) in the output state is not necessarily changed (ended) when the operation state is put into the operation state again, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the operation state is put into the operation state again.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the periodic change in the mock image display appears in units of time longer than the above-mentioned specified time, there are two cases in which a post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) in which the output state does not change (end) upon detection of a non-operation state is output, and a post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) in which the output state changes (ends) upon detection of a non-operation state is output. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), whose output state is changed (terminated) upon detection of a non-operated state, will no longer be in an output state at the time when another operation is performed thereafter, and only the post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)), whose output state is not changed (terminated) upon detection of a non-operated state, can be made to be in an output state as a sound that is not changed (terminated) by the second operation at the time when the second operation is performed.

In the above-mentioned performance example, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation valid state (the first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146), no post-operation output sound of the type that does not maintain the output state when the operating means that is the subject of the mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state and uses this as an opportunity to change (end) the output state, is provided; only a post-operation output sound of the type that does not change (end) the output state when the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is provided.

In addition, in the 31st configuration A31, as the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, a post-operation output sound of a type in which the output state is changed (ended) when the operating means to be the target of the imitation image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149 (g)) and a post-operation output sound of a type in which the output state is not changed (ended) when the operating means to be the target of the imitation image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149 (h)) are provided, and a situation in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in the output state can occur. In other words, in this case, if the operation is interrupted, the output state will not change (end) when only a portion of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that was in an output state until then becomes a non-operation state, which provides an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) of the 31st configuration A31, the type of post-operation output sound that is changed (ended) when the operation means that is the target of the mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) can be output in either a state where the type of post-operation output sound that is not changed (ended) when the operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state or a state where it is not in an output state. The type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) when the operating means to be displayed changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is not output alone when the type of post-operation output sound that changes (ends) when the operating means to be displayed as a mock image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in an output state, but is output when (or at the same time as) it is in an output state, so that it is possible to provide an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to stop operating.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) of the 31st configuration A31, even if the output condition for the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied while the operating means to be the target of the simulated image display is maintained in an operating state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 begins to be output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state up until then may not be terminated or a new output may not be started based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not interrupted and a sound based on new data (one sound effect) is not started to be output, nor is playback restarted.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) of the 31st configuration A31, when the output condition of the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the operation means (operation button 410) to be the target of the mock image display is maintained in the operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2, while the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived (here, one sound effect) is interrupted, and the sound (one sound effect) based on the new data (here, one sound effect data) starts to be output.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the operating means (operation button 410) that is the subject of the simulated image display is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the 31st configuration A31 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Note that, in the 31st configuration A31, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, as the 32nd configuration A32, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the operation reception for the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. In all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play so as to make appear a situation in which the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is in a non-operated state in which it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), it is possible to display so that the periodic change in the mock image display appears in a time unit longer than the predetermined time, and the operation means (operation In the second multiple-operation enabled state (fourth-A reception permitted state), a periodic change in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, but a post-operation output sound (fourth-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the imitation image display in an operated state. In the third multiple-operation enabled state (first-A reception permitted state), a periodic change in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time shorter than the predetermined time, and a post-operation output sound (first-A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the imitation image display in an operated state. In addition, among the multiple operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display in an operated state, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) in which the periodic change of the simulated image display can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time, the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in an output state. When the operating means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is indefinite (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(h)). In contrast, in the third multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permitted state) in which the periodic change of the simulated image display can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit of less than the predetermined time, the operating means (operation button 410) which is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operated state and the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is indefinite (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(h)). When the operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the input sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, the time from when the operation means changes to the operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is terminated can be treated as a fixed time rather than an indefinite time (see, for example, timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)). Therefore, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state of the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display. In the second multiple operation valid state (4A reception permitted state) that is not included in the above, when the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display changes from a non-operation state to an operation state while the operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, the time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output is terminated can be processed as a fixed time (for example, see timing tAd2-C1 shown in FIG. 155(g) and (h)). In the above example, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated.

According to this configuration, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the so-called automatic repeated tapping function is enabled for the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display, the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state) is configured in the same manner as the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state) in which the so-called automatic repeated tapping function is not enabled in that the periodic change in the simulated image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the operating means is the target of the automatic repeated tapping function, thereby maintaining a sense of tension, while allowing the user to operate the operating means again while the output sound is in the output state after the operation. In this case, unlike the case of the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance permitted state) (see timing tAd2-C1 shown in Figures 155 (g) and (h)), the time from the second operation to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is not processed as a fixed time but is processed as an indefinite time (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in Figure 149 (h)). Therefore, through this processing mode at the time of the second operation, it is expected that a decline in interest in the game will be suppressed by suitably suggesting that the auto-repeated-operation function is to be enabled. In addition, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is enabled for the operating means that is the target of the model image display, the third multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) is configured in the same way as the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state) in which the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is not enabled, in that if a second operation is performed while the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the time from the second operation to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound can be treated as a fixed time. This makes it difficult to recognize whether or not the player is the target of the auto-repeated tapping function, and maintains the sense of tension (see timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)). However, unlike the second multiple operation enabled state (fourth A reception permitted state), the periodic change in the model image display can be displayed in time units of less than the above-mentioned predetermined time. Therefore, it is expected that the length of such periodic changes in the model image display will appropriately suggest that the player is in a situation in which the auto-repeated tapping function is enabled, thereby suppressing a decline in interest in the game.

In the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the periodic change in the mock image display appears in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, there are two cases: a post-operation output sound of a type in which the time from when the non-operation state is entered until the output state is terminated is processed as a fixed time (second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) is output, and a post-operation output sound of a type in which the time from when the non-operation state is entered until the output state is terminated is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite (second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). In the above example, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time from when the non-operation state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated.

In the above-mentioned performance example, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation valid state (the 4th A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple operation valid state (the 1st A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146), when the operating means that is the subject of the mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, no post-operation output sound of the type in which the time from when the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is processed as a fixed time is provided, but only post-operation output sounds of the type in which the time from when the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is not processed as a fixed time is provided.

In addition, in the 32nd configuration A32, as the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, a post-operation output sound of a type in which the operation means to be the subject of the imitation image display is processed so that the time from when the operation state is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149 (g)) and a post-operation output sound of a type in which the operation means to be the subject of the imitation image display is processed so that the time from when the operation state is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149 (h)) are not processed so that the time from when the operation state is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time are provided, and a situation in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in the output state can occur. In other words, in this case, if the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that had been in an output state until then will end after a certain period of time, so it is possible to encourage the interruption of the operation while providing a moderate sense of tension.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) of the 32nd configuration A32, the type of post-operation output sound (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that can be processed so that the time from when the operating means to be the target of the mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state to when the output state is terminated is a fixed time can be started to be output in both situations when the type of post-operation output sound (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that cannot be processed so that the time from when the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state to when the output state is terminated is a fixed time can be started to be output in both situations when the operating means is in an output state and when it is not in an output state. The type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that cannot be processed so that the time from when the operating means to be displayed changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time is not output alone when the type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that can be processed so that the time from when the operating means to be displayed from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time is not output alone when the operating means to be displayed as a mock image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is set to be output when the operating means is in an output state (or at the same time), so that it is possible to encourage the interruption of the operation while providing an appropriate sense of tension.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the 32nd configuration A32 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a process for a change (end) is executed when the operating means (operation button 410) that is the subject of the simulated image display is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a process for a change (end) is executed when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, are based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

In the 32nd configuration A32, it is assumed that the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operation means when the so-called auto-repeated tap function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. Also, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in order to realize the 32nd configuration A32, the multiple operation enabled state may include the 5A reception permitted state (see Figures 158 to 160) instead of the 4A reception permitted state, and the 5A reception permitted state may be realized as the second multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (4A reception permitted state or 5A reception permitted state) in which the periodic change of the imitation image display can be displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time and the so-called auto-repeated tap function is not enabled, a specific type of output sound may be prepared as a post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation enabled state. And, although the specific type of output sound is one type, it may be processed so that the time from when the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display changes from a non-operation state to an operation state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time, or it may not be processed so that the time until the output state is terminated is a fixed time. In this case, whether or not to execute the process related to such a change (termination) of the output state may be determined based on a judgment (performance judgment) according to the operation reception, may be determined based on the number of times the operation is received, or may be determined according to the type of display mode that appears as the post-reception display.

For example, as the 33rd configuration A33, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the operation reception of the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the imitation image display is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in such a way that a situation appears in which the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the imitation image display is in a non-operation state in which it is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) ), periodic changes in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in time units longer than a predetermined time, and a post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the imitation image display in an operated state, and in the second multiple-operation enabled state (first A reception allowed state), periodic changes in the imitation image display can be displayed so as to appear in time units shorter than the predetermined time, and a post-operation output sound (the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the imitation image display in an operated state. In addition, in the first multiple operations valid state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), the periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time, and when the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound) is in an output state, if the operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound) is terminated is indefinite (not processed as a fixed time) (for example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and 149(h) and the like), and in the second multiple operations valid state In the first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146, the periodic change in the simulated image display can be displayed in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, and when the operation means (operation button 410) that is the subject of the simulated image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, if the operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the operation state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) ends is treated as a fixed time (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(g)), and the time is not treated as a fixed time but is an indefinite time (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)).

According to this configuration, among the multiple operation enabled states in which the post-operation output sound in response to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means (operation button 410) that is the subject of the imitation image display in an operating state, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which periodic changes in the imitation image display are displayed in units of time longer than the specified time, even if the operating means (operation button 410) that is the subject of the imitation image display is changed from a non-operating state to an operating state again, the time from when the operating state is entered to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is indefinite, so it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether the operation by the player has been properly accepted, thereby maintaining a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. In contrast, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) in which the periodic change in the mock image display appears in units of time less than the predetermined time, for example, it is intended to suggest that the performance after the operation means (operation button 410) is put into the operation state again may be worth noting, while the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) in the output state is not necessarily terminated within a certain time after the operation state is put into the operation state again, which is expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when the operation state is put into the operation state again.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, there are two cases in which a post-operation output sound is output that is not processed so that the time from when the non-operation state is entered until the output state is terminated is a fixed time (second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)), and a post-operation output sound that can be processed so that the time from when the non-operation state is entered until the output state is terminated is a fixed time (second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)).

In the above-mentioned performance example, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation valid state (the first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146), no post-operation output sound of a type that can be processed so that the time from when the operating means that is the subject of the mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time is provided, but only a post-operation output sound of a type that cannot be processed so that the time from when the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time is provided.

In addition, in the 33rd configuration A33, as the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the periodic change in the imitation image display is displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, a type of post-operation output sound (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that can be processed so that the time from when the operating means to be the subject of the imitation image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time, and a type of post-operation output sound (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that is not processed so that the time from when the operating means to be the subject of the imitation image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time are provided, and a situation in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in the output state can occur. In other words, in this case, if the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that had been in an output state until then will end after a certain period of time, so it is possible to encourage the interruption of the operation while providing a moderate sense of tension.

In addition, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149) of the 33rd configuration A33, the type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that can be processed so that the time from when the operating means that is the subject of the mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time can be started to be output in both situations when the type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that is not processed so that the time from when the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time can be started to be output in both situations when the operating means is in an output state and when it is not in an output state. The type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that cannot be processed so that the time from when the target operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time is not output alone when the type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that can be processed so that the time from when the target operating means for the mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time is not output alone when the operating means is not in an output state, but is output when the operating means is in an output state (or at the same time), so that it is possible to encourage the user to stop operating while providing an appropriate sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) of the thirty-third configuration A33, even if the output condition for the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied while the operating means to be the target of the simulated image display is maintained in an operating state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 begins to be output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state up until that point (here, one sound effect) may not be terminated or a new output may not be started based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not interrupted and a sound based on new data (one sound effect) is not started to be output, nor is playback restarted.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state) of the 33rd configuration A33, when the output condition of the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the operation means (operation button 410) to be the target of the mock image display is maintained in the operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2, while the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived (here, one sound effect) is interrupted, and the sound (one sound effect) based on the new data (here, one sound effect data) starts to be output.

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the operating means (operation button 410) that is the subject of the simulated image display is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the 33rd configuration A33 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Note that, in the 33rd configuration A33, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, as the 34th configuration A34, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the operation reception of the operation means that is the target of the simulated image display is permitted multiple times, and among the multiple operation valid states, in a type of multiple operation valid state (for example, the 1A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) in which the periodic change in the simulated image display appears in units of time less than a predetermined time, the post-operation output sound (the 1A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) can be output multiple times by simply maintaining the operation means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operating state, and the post-operation output sound (the 1A post-reception output sound) can be output multiple times with a fixed interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated, whereas in the multiple operation valid state, in which the periodic change in the simulated image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, In the multiple operation enabled state of the type shown (for example, the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149, the fourth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155, the fifth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 158, etc.), when the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in the operating state, the post-operation output sound (the first A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) can be output multiple times, but there are both cases where the post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound) can be output multiple times in a form in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is not processed to be a fixed time but is an indefinite time (the second A reception permitted state), and cases where the post-operation output sound (the fourth A reception output sound, the fifth A reception output sound) cannot be output multiple times just by maintaining the operating state (the fourth A reception permitted state, the fifth A reception permitted state).

According to this configuration, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of time less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, it is possible to suitably suggest that the so-called auto-hit function is to be enabled. In addition, when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, a post-acceptance output sound is output at regular intervals, making it easier to feel that the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, and it is expected that interest in playing will be suitably maintained. In contrast, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, in addition to there being both cases where the so-called auto-hit function is enabled and cases where it is not enabled, even if the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, a post-acceptance output sound is only output at irregular intervals, making it difficult to feel that the auto-hit function is enabled, it is expected that tension will be suitably maintained.

In addition, in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic change in the imitation image display appears in units of time longer than the above-mentioned specified time, while the post-operation output sound is being output, which is not output multiple times simply because the operating means that is the subject of the imitation image display is maintained in an operating state, if the operating means in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, the time from when the non-operating state is entered to when the post-operation output sound that had been in an output state is terminated is not processed to be a fixed time but is always made to be an indefinite time (4A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155, 5A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 158). In contrast, in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic change of the imitation image display appears in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display is maintained in an operating state, and the post-operation output sound (the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) is output multiple times at indefinite intervals. When the operation means in the operating state is changed to a non-operating state, the time from the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound that was in the output state until then is terminated is processed to be a fixed time (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), and the time from the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound that was in the output state until then is terminated is not processed to be a fixed time but is an indefinite time (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)). In the above example, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time from the non-operating state until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated.

According to this configuration, when the operating means in the operating state is changed to the non-operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output, if the time from when the non-operating state is entered until the post-operation output sound that was in the output state is terminated is processed to be a certain time (a predetermined time), it can be suggested that the so-called auto-repeated tap function is to be enabled. However, even if the so-called auto-repeated tap function is to be enabled (the second A acceptance allowance state shown in FIG. 149), the time from when the non-operating state is entered until the post-operation output sound that was in the output state is terminated is not necessarily processed to be a certain time, so that the sense of tension when switching to the non-operating state can be appropriately maintained.

In addition, in the multiple operation enabled state of the type in which the periodic change of the imitation image display appears in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, when the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display is maintained in the operation state, and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146) is output multiple times at indefinite intervals, if the operation means in the operation state is changed to the non-operation state, the post-operation output sound of the type that can be processed so that the time from when the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display changes from the operation state to the non-operation state to when the output state is terminated is a fixed time (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not processed so that the time from when the operation means changes from the operation state to the non-operation state to when the output state is terminated is a fixed time (FIG. 14 149(h)) may be output in either the output state or not, but the type of post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that cannot be processed so that the time from when the operating means that is the subject of the simulated image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time may not be output alone when the type of post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that can be processed so that the time from when the operating means that is the subject of the simulated image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time, but may be output when the operating means is in the output state (or simultaneously).

It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the operating means targeted for the simulated image display is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when the non-operating state is changed to an operating state, is based on the assumption that the reception-enabled state continues.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the 34th configuration A34 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in order to realize the 34th configuration A34, it is possible to have only one of the 4A reception permission state and the 5A reception permission state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain each of the configurations and effects described above.

Also, for example, as the 35th configuration A35, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the operation reception of the operation means that is the target of the simulated image display is permitted multiple times, and among the multiple operation valid states, in a type of multiple operation valid state (for example, the 1A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) in which a periodic change in the simulated image display appears in a time unit of less than a predetermined time, a post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound) in response to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operating state, and at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to be less than a specific time, whereas a periodic change in the simulated image display appears in a time unit longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time. In the multiple operation enabled state of the type displayed as shown in FIG. 149, there are cases where the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the mock image display in an operating state (for example, the second A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 149), and cases where the post-operation output sound cannot be output multiple times simply by maintaining the operating state (for example, the fourth A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 155, the fifth A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 158). However, when the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating state (the second A reception allowed state), the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time.

According to this configuration, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of time less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, it is possible to suitably suggest that the so-called auto-hit function is to be enabled. In addition, when the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, new post-acceptance output sounds are output one after another within a relatively short time, making it easy to feel that the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, and it is expected that interest in playing will be suitably maintained. On the other hand, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, in addition to there being both cases where the so-called auto-hit function is enabled and cases where it is not enabled, even if the so-called auto-hit function is enabled, new post-acceptance output sounds are not output until a relatively long time has passed, making it difficult to feel that the auto-hit function is enabled, it is expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the 35th configuration A35, when the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display is maintained in an operating state in a type of multiple operation enabled state (for example, the 1A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146) in which the periodic change in the imitation image display appears in units of time less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the interval until a new output sound is generated after the operation may be made shorter than the time required for the periodic change in the imitation image display that appears in units of time less than the above-mentioned predetermined time. In other words, in this case, when an operation is performed, repeated changes appear in units of time shorter than when no operation is performed, so it is possible to provide a presentation advantage that makes it easier to recognize that the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is enabled.

In addition, in the 35th configuration A35, in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic change in the imitation image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, if the operation means that is the target of the imitation image display is merely maintained in an operating state, the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times (the 2A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated may be set to be longer than the time required for the periodic change in the imitation image display that appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time. In other words, in this case, even if the situation is one in which the operation is performed, only repeated changes appear in units of time longer than when the operation is not performed, so it is possible to suggest that the situation is one in which the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is enabled while maintaining a favorable sense of tension.

In addition, in a multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic change in the imitation image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, if the post-operation output sound in response to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the imitation image display in an operating state (the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated may be either "longer than the predetermined time" or "longer than the predetermined time". With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make it both easy and difficult to recognize that the so-called auto-repeated-hit function is enabled.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the 35th configuration A35 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

In addition, to realize the 35th configuration A35, it is possible to have only one of the 4A reception permission state and the 5A reception permission state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain each of the configurations and effects described above.

Also, for example, as the 36th configuration A36, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the reception of operations for the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display is permitted multiple times, and in the multiple operation valid state, when a periodic change in the simulated image display is displayed to appear in units of time less than a predetermined time, it is set to a state in which "a type of multiple operation valid state in which the state may be terminated when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display is in an operating state before a predetermined end timing arrives (for example, the 1A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146)" has occurred (a case in which a type of multiple operation valid state that is not terminated has not occurred is avoided), and in the multiple operation valid state In the case where the periodic change in the simulated image display is displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, there may be both a case where a "multiple operation valid state of a type in which the state may be terminated when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing (for example, the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149)" occurs, and a case where a "multiple operation valid state of a type in which the state is not terminated when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state (for example, the fourth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155 or the fifth A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 158)" occurs.

According to this configuration, when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed in a time unit equal to or less than the above-mentioned predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state, it is possible to suitably suggest that the state is in a situation in which the detection of the operating means that is the target of the mock image display being in an operating state is triggered by the state in which the operating means is in operation. On the other hand, when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed in a time unit longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state, it is difficult to recognize whether the state is in a situation in which the detection of the operating means that is the target of the mock image display being in an operating state is triggered by the state in which the operating means is in operation, or whether the state is in a situation in which the detection of the operating means that is the target of the mock image display being in an operating state is triggered by the state in which the operating means is in operation, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

It goes without saying that if the 36th configuration A36 is provided, then the 3A reception permission state will not be provided as a rule. However, it is possible to provide the 3A reception permission state by, for example, modifying the periodic change in the mock image display so that it appears in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time. Alternatively, the 3A reception permission state may be provided as a reception permission state in which the mock image display itself does not appear.

In the above-mentioned performance example, when a multiple operation valid state occurs, an acceptance permission sound may be output, which indicates that operation acceptance is permitted. The acceptance permission sound may be output in the same manner when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in time units equal to or less than the predetermined time in the multiple operation valid state, and when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time in the multiple operation valid state. However, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time in the multiple operation valid state, the acceptance permission sound may be output in a manner that cannot be output when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in time units equal to or less than the predetermined time in the multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, conversely, when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to appear in units of a predetermined time or less in the multiple operation enabled state, the reception permission sound may be output in a manner that cannot be output when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to appear in units of a time longer than the predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state. Also, when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to appear in units of a predetermined time or less in the multiple operation enabled state, the reception permission sound is always output, but when the periodic change in the mock image display is displayed to appear in units of a time longer than the predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state, the reception permission sound may or may not be output.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, in either case where the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of time equal to or less than the above-mentioned predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state, or where the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state, even if no operation is accepted until the multiple operation enabled state is terminated, the same post-acceptance change as when the operation is accepted may occur (see, for example, FIG. 147, FIG. 150, etc.). In this regard, in the multiple operation enabled state, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of time equal to or less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, even if no operation is accepted until the multiple operation enabled state is terminated, the same post-acceptance change as when the operation is accepted will always occur, but in the multiple operation enabled state, when the periodic change in the model image display is displayed to appear in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, when no operation is accepted until the multiple operation enabled state is terminated, both the post-acceptance change as when the operation is accepted and the post-acceptance change as when the operation is accepted may not occur.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the 36th configuration A36 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in order to realize the 36th configuration A36, it is possible to have only one of the 4A reception permission state and the 5A reception permission state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain each of the configurations and effects described above.

Also, for example, as the 37th configuration A37, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the reception of operations for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and among the multiple operation valid states, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state (4A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155) in which the post-operation change in response to the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state is not permitted to be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, is permitted to be displayed based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state, but in a non-operation state in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated from the operation state, On the other hand, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state, a corresponding non-operation display is not displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 155(e) and (f) and 157(c), (e) and (g)). In contrast, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state (the first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146, the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149, and the third A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152), in which the post-operation change in response to detection of the specific operation means (operation button 410) being in the operating state can be executed multiple times, the post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on detection of the specific operation means (operation button 410) being in the operating state. When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, a corresponding post-no-operation display HB2 (see FIG. 149(f), FIG. 151(c), (f), etc.) can be displayed. In addition, in a specific type of multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state, second A reception permitted state, third A reception permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state, and the post-no-operation display (post-no-operation display HB2) corresponding to the detection of the non-operated state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) among the post-operation changes maintains an output state (for example, the post-operation display HB2 shown in FIG. 149). In this situation, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the detection is used as a trigger to cause a change (end) to the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) that was in a displayed state until then, but the post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that was in an output state until then is not changed (ended) and its output state is maintained (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(f) and (h), FIG. 151(g), etc.).

According to this configuration, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state (the first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146, the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149, and the third A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152) in which the post-operation change in response to detection of the specific operation means (operation button 410) being in the operation state can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, if the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, some of the previous post-operation changes will continue to be executed, but some may also change (end), so that a sense of tension is provided when the operation is performed again, while also providing an appropriate sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In addition, in the specific type of multiple operation enabled state (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state, third A reception allowable state) according to the 37th configuration A37, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, there are both cases where a corresponding post-non-operation display is displayed (second A reception allowable state) and where the post-non-operation display is not displayed (first A reception allowable state, third A reception allowable state), so that it is possible to provide an ideal sense of tension when changing to a non-operation state.

In addition, in the 37th configuration A37, in a specific type of multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowable state, second A reception allowable state, third A reception allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state, and the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) is displayed in response to the detection of the non-operated state, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes is maintained in an output state (for example, timing tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149). In this situation, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the detection is used as a trigger to necessarily cause a change (end) to the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) that was in a displayed state until then, while the output of the post-operation output sound (post-second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149 (h)) that was in an output state until then is not changed. The force state is always maintained without any change, but in a situation where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state, the post-non-operation display in response to the detection of the non-operated state is not displayed, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes is maintaining an output state (for example, timing tAa2-B3 to tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the detection is used as a trigger to cause a change in the output state of the post-operation output sound (post-first A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) that was in an output state up until then, depending on its type (post-first A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(g)), or the output state is maintained without any change (post-first A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)).

According to this configuration, among the specific types of multiple operation valid states (the first A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146, the second A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149, and the third A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 152) in which the post-operation change in response to the detection of the specific operation means (operation button 410) being in the operation state can be executed multiple times, even in the multiple operation valid states in which the non-post-operation display is not displayed (the first A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146 and the third A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 152), if the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, some of the previous post-operation change modes will continue to be executed, but some changes may occur, so that a sense of tension is provided when the operation is performed again, while also providing a good sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In the above-mentioned performance example, the above-mentioned 1A reception allowable state may be generated as a reception allowable state in which a corresponding post-non-operation display is displayed when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in the same manner as the above-mentioned 2A reception allowable state. In this case, the conditions for displaying the post-non-operation display and the conditions for hiding it may be the same as the post-non-operation display HB2 described in the above-mentioned 2A reception allowable state. However, even in this case, it is preferable to generate the above-mentioned 3A reception allowable state as a reception allowable state in which a corresponding post-non-operation display is not displayed when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the presentation, when the post-no-operation display is displayed, no sound corresponding to this is output, so it is possible to suggest that the post-no-operation display is not displayed as a result of being triggered by being switched to an operating state, but rather as a result of being switched to a non-operation state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the specific type of multiple operation enabled state (the first A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146, the second A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149, and the third A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 152) in which the above-mentioned post-operation change in response to the detection of the specific operation means (operation button 410) being in the operation state can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state includes a first reception allowable state (the first A reception allowable state or the third A reception allowable state) and a second reception allowable state (the second A reception allowable state).

In the second reception permission state (second A reception permission state), the type of post-operation output sound that is changed (ended) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-operation output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149 (g)) can be output in either a state where the type of post-operation output sound that is not changed (ended) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-operation output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149 (h)) is in an output state or a state where it is not in an output state. The type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (end) when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is not output alone when the type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that ends when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is not in an output state, but is output when (or at the same time as) it is in an output state, so that it is possible to provide an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to stop operating.

In addition, in the second reception-permitted state (second A reception-permitted state) of the 37th configuration A37, even if the output condition of the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 starts to be output based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAb2-B2, whereas the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may not be terminated or new output may not be started based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAb2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not interrupted to start outputting a sound based on new data (one sound effect) or to start playing again.

In addition, when the first reception permission state of the 37th configuration A37 is the "1A reception permission state", in the first reception permission state (1A reception permission state), when the output condition of the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the operation button 410 is maintained in the operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2, while the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived (here, one sound effect) is interrupted, and the sound (one sound effect) based on the new data (here, data of one sound effect) starts to be output.

In addition, when the first reception permission state of the 37th configuration A37 is the "3A reception permission state", in the first reception permission state (3A reception permission state), when the output condition of the third post-reception output sound SB3 is satisfied while the operation button 410 is maintained in the operation state (timing tAc2-B2 shown in FIG. 152), the second post-reception output sound SB3 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAc2-B2, while the third post-reception output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAc2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAc2-B2 arrived (here, one sound effect) is interrupted, and the sound (one sound effect) based on the new data (here, one sound effect data) starts to be output.

In the 37th configuration A37, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the multiple operation enabled state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is represented as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the 37th configuration A37 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

In addition, to realize the 37th configuration A37, it is possible to have only one of the 1A reception permission state and the 3A reception permission state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain each of the configurations and effects described above.

Also, for example, as the 38th configuration A38, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the operation reception of a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and among the multiple operation valid states, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state (the 3A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152, the 4A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155), in which the state is not terminated when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before a predetermined end timing arrives, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state, but In contrast, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (see Figs. 152(e), (f), 154(c), (g), 155(e), (f), 157(c), (e), (g), etc.), in a specific type of multiple operation valid state (the first A reception permission state shown in Fig. 146 and the second A reception permission state shown in Fig. 149) in which the state can be ended upon detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state before a predetermined end timing arrives, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state, and the corresponding display after non-operation is not displayed (see Figs. 152(e), (f), 154(c), (g), etc.). Based on the detection, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed, and when the specific operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-operation display HB2 can be displayed. In the specific type of multiple operation enabled state (the first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146, the second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state, and the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) corresponding to the detection of the non-operating state is displayed, and a post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound), which is one of the post-operation changes, is maintained in an output state (for example, in the state shown in FIG. 149). In this situation, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the detection is used as a trigger to cause a change (end) to the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) that was in a displayed state until then, but the post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that was in an output state until then is not changed (ended) and its output state is maintained (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(f) and (h), FIG. 151(g), etc.).

According to this configuration, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146, second A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the state can be ended when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, if the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, some of the previous post-operation changes will continue to be executed, but some may also change (end), so that a sense of tension is provided when the operation is executed again, while also providing an anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In addition, in the specific type of multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state or second A reception permitted state) according to the 38th configuration A38, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, a corresponding post-non-operation display is displayed (second A reception permitted state) and the post-non-operation display is not displayed (first A reception permitted state), so that it is possible to provide an ideal sense of tension when changing to a non-operation state.

In addition, in the 38th configuration A38, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state (first A reception permitted state or second A reception permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state, and the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) is displayed in response to the detection of the non-operated state, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes is maintained in an output state (for example, timing tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149). In this situation, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the detection is used as a trigger to necessarily cause a change (end) to the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) that was in a displayed state until then, while the post-operation output sound (post-second A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149 (h)) that was in an output state until then is changed to its output state. However, in a situation where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state, the post-non-operation display in response to the detection of the non-operated state is not displayed, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes is maintaining an output state (for example, timing tAa2-B3 to tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the detection is used as a trigger to cause a change in the output state of the post-operation output sound (post-first A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) that was in an output state up until then, depending on the type of the sound (post-first A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(g)), or the output state is maintained without any change (post-first A reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)).

According to this configuration, among the specific types of multiple operation valid states (the first A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146 and the second A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149) in which the post-operation change in response to the detection of the specific operation means (operation button 410) being in the operation state can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, even in the multiple operation valid state in which the non-post-operation display is not displayed (the first A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146), if the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, some of the previous post-operation change modes will continue to be executed, but some changes may occur, so that a sense of tension is provided when the operation is performed again, while also providing an appropriate sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In the above-mentioned performance example, the above-mentioned 1A reception allowable state may be generated as a reception allowable state in which a corresponding post-non-operation display is displayed when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, similar to the above-mentioned 2A reception allowable state. In this case, the conditions for displaying the post-non-operation display and the conditions for hiding it may be the same as the post-non-operation display HB2 described in the above-mentioned 2A reception allowable state. In the specific type of multiple operation enabled state (1A reception allowable state or 2A reception allowable state) according to the 38th configuration A38 employing such a modified example, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, the corresponding post-non-operation display is always displayed, and there is no case where the post-non-operation display is not displayed. Even in this case, it is preferable to generate the above-mentioned 3A reception allowable state and the 4A reception allowable state as a reception allowable state in which the corresponding post-non-operation display is not displayed when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the presentation, when the post-no-operation display is displayed, no sound corresponding to this is output, so it is possible to suggest that the post-no-operation display is not displayed as a result of being triggered by being switched to an operating state, but rather is displayed as a result of being switched to a non-operation state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the specific type of multiple operation enabled state (the first A reception-permitted state shown in FIG. 146 and the second A reception-permitted state shown in FIG. 149) which can be ended when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing, includes the first reception-permitted state (the first A reception-permitted state) and the second reception-permitted state (the second A reception-permitted state).

In the second reception permission state (second A reception permission state), the type of post-operation output sound that is changed (ended) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-operation output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149 (g)) can be output in either a state where the type of post-operation output sound that is not changed (ended) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-operation output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149 (h)) is in an output state or a state where it is not in an output state. The type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (end) when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is not output alone when the type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that ends when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is not in an output state, but is output when (or at the same time as) it is in an output state, so that it is possible to provide an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to stop operating.

In addition, in the second reception-permitted state (second A reception-permitted state) of the 38th configuration A38, even if the output condition of the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 starts to be output based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAb2-B2, whereas the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may not be terminated or new output may not be started based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAb2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not interrupted to start outputting a sound based on new data (one sound effect) or to start playing again.

In addition, in the first reception-permitted state (1A reception-permitted state) of the 38th configuration A38, when the output condition of the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the operation button 410 is maintained in the operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2, while the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may be terminated and a new output may be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAa2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived (here, one sound effect) is interrupted, and the sound (one sound effect) based on the new data (here, data of one sound effect) starts to be output.

In the 38th configuration A38, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the multiple operation enabled state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is represented as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the 38th configuration A38 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

In addition, to realize the 38th configuration A38, it is possible to have only one of the 3A reception permission state and the 4A reception permission state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain each of the configurations and effects described above.

For example, as a 39th configuration A39, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the reception of operations for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and among the multiple operation valid states, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state (the first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146 or the third A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in such a manner that when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the interval until a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly started to be output is set to a fixed time, the post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state. However, even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, there are at least some cases where a corresponding post-operation display is not displayed (see Figs. 146(e) and (f) and Figs. 148(c) and (g)). In contrast, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state (a second A acceptance permitted state shown in Fig. 149) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times with an interval until a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly outputted, being an indefinite time when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, is not displayed based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state. In addition to the above, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, a post-non-operation display HB2 (see FIG. 149(f), FIG. 151(c), (f), etc.) in response to the detection of the non-operated state can be displayed. In the specific type of multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state, and the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) in response to the detection of the non-operated state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) among the post-operation changes maintains an output state (for example, in FIG. 14 9) can appear depending on the player's play, and in that situation, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the detection triggers a change (end) to the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) that was in a displayed state until then, but the post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that was in an output state until then is not changed (ended) and its output state is maintained (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(f) and (h), FIG. 151(g), etc.).

According to this configuration, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times with an indefinite interval until a new post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is started to be output when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, if the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, some of the previous post-operation changes will continue to be executed, but some may change (end), so that a sense of tension is provided when the operation is performed again, while also providing an appropriate sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In the above-mentioned performance example, the above-mentioned 1A reception allowable state may be generated as a reception allowable state in which a corresponding post-non-operation display is displayed when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in the same manner as the above-mentioned 2A reception allowable state. In this case, the conditions for displaying the post-non-operation display and the conditions for hiding it may be the same as the post-non-operation display HB2 described in the above-mentioned 2A reception allowable state. However, even in this case, it is preferable to generate the above-mentioned 3A reception allowable state as a reception allowable state in which a corresponding post-non-operation display is not displayed when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated.

According to such a configuration, among the multiple operation effective states according to the 39th configuration A39, in a predetermined type of multiple operation effective state (the first A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146 or the third A reception permission state shown in FIG. 152) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in a manner that the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly output is set to a certain time when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is output based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state. There are two cases: a display can be displayed, but even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, the corresponding post-operation display is not displayed (third A reception allowable state); and not only is the post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, displayable based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state, but also a post-non-operation display in response to the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state can be displayed. In this case, even in the predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state of the 39th configuration A39 (the 1A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146 or the 3A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152), a situation may occur due to the player's play in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state, a post-non-operation display is displayed in response to the detection of the non-operated state, and the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, maintains an output state. In this situation, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the detection will necessarily cause a change to be made to the post-operation display that was in a displayed state until then, while there will be a case where the output state of the post-operation output sound that was in an output state until then will be changed depending on its type (the 1A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(g)) or a case where the output state will be maintained without any change (the 1A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)).

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the presentation, when the post-no-operation display is displayed, no sound corresponding to this is output, so it is possible to suggest that the post-no-operation display is not displayed as a result of being triggered by being switched to an operating state, but rather is displayed as a result of being switched to a non-operation state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, when the above-mentioned specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the specific type of multiple operation enabled state in which the above-mentioned post-operation change can be executed multiple times with an indefinite interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the above-mentioned post-operation changes, is newly output, is included in a special reception permission state (second A reception permission state).

In the special reception permission state (second A reception permission state), the type of post-operation output sound that is changed (ended) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-operation output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) can be output in both situations, when a type of post-operation output sound that is not changed (ended) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-operation output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state and when it is not in an output state. The type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (end) when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is not output alone when the type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that ends when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is not in an output state, but is output when (or at the same time as) it is in an output state, so that it is possible to provide an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to stop operating.

In addition, in the special reception permission state (second A reception permission state) of the 39th configuration A39, even if the output condition of the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2, whereas the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may not be terminated or new output may not be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not terminated halfway to start outputting a sound based on new data (one sound effect) or to start playing again.

In the 39th configuration A39, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the multiple operation enabled state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is represented as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the 39th configuration A39 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

In addition, to realize the 39th configuration A39, it is possible to have only one of the 1A reception-permitting state and the 3A reception-permitting state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain at least a part of the configurations and effects described above.

Also, for example, as the 40th configuration A40, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which the operation reception of a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and among the multiple operation valid states, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in such a manner that the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is always set to a specific time or less, and in the multiple operation valid state of a predetermined type (the first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146 or the third A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152), a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state. However, even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, there are at least some cases where a corresponding post-operation display is not displayed (see Figs. 146(e) and (f) and Figs. 148(c) and (g)). In contrast, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state (a second A reception permitted state shown in Fig. 149) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in such a manner that the interval until a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly output is always longer than the specific time when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, the post-operation display is displayed based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state. Not only can a post-operation display, which is one of the changes, be displayed, but also when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, a post-non-operation display HB2 (see FIG. 149(f), FIG. 151(c), (f), etc.) in response to the detection of the non-operated state can be displayed. In the specific type of multiple operation enabled state (second A reception permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state, and the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) in response to the detection of the non-operated state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) among the post-operation changes maintains an output state (for example, For example, timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149 can appear depending on the player's play, and in that situation, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the detection is used as a trigger to cause a change (end) to the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) that was in a displayed state until then, but the post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that was in an output state until then is not changed (ended) and its output state is maintained (see timings tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(f) and (h), FIG. 151(g), etc.).

According to this configuration, in a specific type of multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 149) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in such a way that when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly output is always longer than the specific time, if the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, some of the previous post-operation changes will continue to be executed, but some may change (end), so that a sense of tension is provided when the operation is performed again, while also providing an appropriate sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In the above-mentioned performance example, the above-mentioned 1A reception allowable state may be generated as a reception allowable state in which a corresponding post-non-operation display is displayed when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in the same manner as the above-mentioned 2A reception allowable state. In this case, the conditions for displaying the post-non-operation display and the conditions for hiding it may be the same as the post-non-operation display HB2 described in the above-mentioned 2A reception allowable state. However, even in this case, it is preferable to generate the above-mentioned 3A reception allowable state as a reception allowable state in which a corresponding post-non-operation display is not displayed when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated.

According to such a configuration, among the multiple operation enabled states according to the 40th configuration A40, in a predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state (the first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146 or the third A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152) in which the above-mentioned post-operation change can be executed multiple times in such a manner that when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the above-mentioned post-operation changes, is always set to a specific time or less, one of the post-operation changes is detected based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state. However, there are two cases: a case in which a post-operation display corresponding to a change in the non-operation state of a specific operation means (operation button 410) from an operated state is not displayed even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (third A reception allowable state); and a case in which not only a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, is displayed based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state, but also a case in which a post-non-operation display corresponding to the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state is displayed. In this case, even in a predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state of the 40th configuration A40 (the 1A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146 or the 3A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152), a situation may occur due to the player's play in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state, a post-non-operation display is displayed in response to the detection of the non-operated state, and the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, maintains an output state. In this situation, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the detection will necessarily cause a change to be made to the post-operation display that was in a displayed state until then, while there will be a case where the output state of the post-operation output sound that was in an output state until then will be changed depending on its type (the 1A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(g)) or a case where the output state will be maintained without any change (the 1A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)).

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the presentation, when the post-no-operation display is displayed, no sound corresponding to this is output, so it is possible to suggest that the post-no-operation display is not displayed as a result of being triggered by being switched to an operating state, but rather is displayed as a result of being switched to a non-operation state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, when the above-mentioned specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the specific type of multiple operation enabled state in which the above-mentioned post-operation change can be executed multiple times in such a way that the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the above-mentioned post-operation changes, is newly started to be output is always longer than the above-mentioned specific time, includes a special acceptance permission state (second A acceptance permission state).

In the special reception permission state (second A reception permission state), the type of post-operation output sound that is changed (ended) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-operation output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) can be output in both situations, when a type of post-operation output sound that is not changed (ended) when a specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second post-operation output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in an output state and when it is not in an output state. The type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (end) when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is not output alone when the type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that ends when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is not in an output state, but is output when (or at the same time as) it is in an output state, so that it is possible to provide an appropriate sense of tension while encouraging the user to stop operating.

In addition, in the special reception permission state (second A reception permission state) of the 40th configuration A40, even if the output condition of the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 starts to be output based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2, whereas the output state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then may not be terminated or new output may not be started based on the operation reception made at the timing tAb2-B2. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not interrupted to start outputting a sound based on new data (one sound effect) or to start playing again.

In the 40th configuration A40, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the multiple operation enabled state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be realized by replacing the "specific operation means" with "an operation means that is represented as a mock image display and that is permitted to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" in the 40th configuration A40 may be a valid period that occurs during the pattern change based on the jackpot determination.

In addition, to realize the 40th configuration A40, it is possible to have only one of the 1A reception-permitting state and the 3A reception-permitting state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain at least a part of the configurations and effects described above.

Incidentally, although some of the above first configuration A1 to fortieth configuration A40 claim to have an effect of "suggesting that the presentation is worth noting," it is not essential that the presentation actually has something worth noting. It is expected that interest in the game will be maintained simply by providing a presentation that suggests "a worthwhile presentation may be executed."

Furthermore, the first configuration A1 to the fortieth configuration A40 may be partially applied to each other.

Although the present invention has been described above using several embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention, as described below.

In the reception period according to the above-mentioned performance example, the method of not displaying the same post-acceptance display as when an operation is accepted on the operation unit (not causing the same post-acceptance change) when no operation is accepted on the operation unit may be to "not generate the performance related to the reception period itself", or to "not display the same post-acceptance display as when an operation is accepted (does not cause the same post-acceptance change), but may display a post-acceptance display different from when an operation is accepted (may cause a different post-acceptance change)".

If multiple operation sections that are permitted to accept operations are provided during the reception period for the above-mentioned performance example, those operation sections may be provided as different operation units, or may be provided as different parts within a single operation unit.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example presentation, the display simulating the operation part may be an image display in which the part is at least represented as an image, and a part other than the operation part may also be represented within the same image display.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, depending on the type of acceptance period, when the acceptance period occurs, the acceptance permission sound may be output in one of several ways with different expectation levels (expectation level for the granting of a bonus such as a jackpot), but in the acceptance period of the type in which the acceptance permission sound is output in such a way, if an operation is performed on a specific operation unit while the acceptance permission sound is being output, the acceptance permission sound may be made inaudible (this is not a required configuration). In other words, in this case, if an operation is performed early after the acceptance period occurs, there is a risk that the expectation level information provided by the acceptance permission sound will not be recognized early, so it is expected that careless playing such as repeated operation will be suppressed before the acceptance period occurs.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, depending on the type of the acceptance period, the acceptance allowance sound may always be output in the same manner when the acceptance period occurs, but in the acceptance period of the type in which the acceptance allowance sound is output in such a manner, when a specific operation unit is operated while the acceptance allowance sound is being output, the acceptance allowance sound may be made inaudible, or the acceptance allowance sound may not be made inaudible (this is not a required configuration). In other words, in this case, if the acceptance allowance sound is not made inaudible, it is possible to recognize that the acceptance allowance sound was not a type of acceptance allowance sound that suggests the degree of expectation when it is operated early by mistake, and therefore it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. In addition, when the acceptance allowance sound is made inaudible, since it is not a type of acceptance allowance sound that suggests the degree of expectation in the first place, there is no disadvantage to operating early, but the player will be aware of the possibility that it was a type of acceptance allowance sound that suggests the degree of expectation, so it is expected that even if it is such a type of acceptance allowance sound, it will be suppressed from playing the above-mentioned careless game.

For example, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects related to the automatic effect function, a display such as "Auto button setting in progress" may be displayed, but this display is not necessarily required. In particular, when a pachinko machine 1 is realized as one that is not set to the automatic effect mode, but is always in a state where the automatic effect function can be enabled and does not have a process such as "setting to effect state" installed, it is desirable not to display a display such as "Auto button setting in progress." In a pachinko machine 1 that does not have a process such as "setting to effect state" installed, an effective period during which the automatic effect function is performed and an effective period during which the automatic effect function is not performed may be generated according to the type of operation acceptance effect that is permitted to be operated by the player.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the "operation-related display (e.g., a mock image display, etc.)" can only appear when the operation reception to the operation unit is permitted (reception permitted period) or when the operation reception is permitted (reception permitted period), so at least when the "operation-related display" is displayed, the reception permitted period must occur or the display must be in a permitted state at the time of its display. Therefore, it may be possible for the reception permitted period to end before the "operation-related display" is hidden while it is displayed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects, the "imitation image" may be any image that prompts the player to perform an operation, and does not necessarily have to be an image that imitates the operating means that is the object of operation, such as an arrow image that points downward and moves up and down.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, the "operation (action) by the player" to be detected is not limited to those that are directly operated by the player (pressing or unsheathing the sword), such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", but also includes "contact action by the player on a specific part" to be detected by a touch sensor, and "action by the player in a specific space" to be detected by a non-contact sensor. In short, it is sufficient to have one or more reception means (operation unit) that accepts actions by the player (pressing, unsheathing the sword, touching, non-contact, etc.).

In addition, when the automatic performance function is adopted in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the timing for automatically generating (automatically accepting) the operation reception within the operation valid period may be set to any timing within the operation valid period. In order to provide the player with an operation opportunity in a favorable manner, it is desirable that the operation reception is automatically generated (automatically accepted) when no operation is detected until a predetermined timing that arrives after more than half of the operation valid period has elapsed, and that the post-operation performance is started based on the automatically generated operation acceptance. In this sense, it is most desirable that the operation reception is automatically generated (automatically accepted) when no operation is detected until the remaining time within the operation valid period becomes one frame, and that the post-operation performance is started based on the automatically generated operation acceptance. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples related to the automatic performance function, if the bar display is not hidden but is maintained even after the valid period has ended, it is desirable to execute a performance that changes the state of the operation means to be operated in accordance with the timing at which the valid period ends (for example, vibration or turning off the LED). This is expected to prevent players from misunderstanding that the validity period is still in effect, even if the bar display is not hidden but is instead displayed continuously.

In each of the above examples of effects, when "period," "time," or "state" is mentioned, it may be the smallest unit of control, such as the period, time, or state of one frame.

In addition, the "post-acceptance change (post-acceptance display)" in response to the operation acceptance during each acceptance period (operation-permitted state) in the above-mentioned performance example and its modified example does not necessarily have to indicate the expectation of winning a jackpot. For example, it may occur as an acceptance period for determining whether the probability fluctuation function is enabled during the execution period of the jackpot game and be executed as the post-acceptance display, or it may occur as an acceptance period in a simple mini-game that has nothing to do with the expectation suggestion regarding the game and be executed as the post-acceptance display. Or it may occur based on the establishment of a predetermined condition during various interval periods, etc. and be executed as the post-acceptance display. Therefore, the acceptance period in the above-mentioned performance example and its modified example does not necessarily have to occur during the period in which the pattern fluctuation is being executed. In addition, even if it is displayed as a post-acceptance display that does not indicate such expectation, multiple modes may be prepared for the mode when the post-acceptance display is displayed, and it may be displayed in any of the multiple modes. Furthermore, each acceptance period (operation permitted state) in the above-mentioned performance examples and their variations may not be a finite period with a predetermined set time, but may include a type of acceptance period (operation permitted state) that continues indefinitely unless a predetermined condition unrelated to the passage of time is met.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects, the effects sounds such as "BGM effect sound" and "BMG playback sound" refer to sounds whose audible output can be initiated based on the start winning, and which can be output so that the audible state can be maintained across multiple pattern changes.

The model image representing the operation receiving portion that receives the operation and the border decoration image that decorates the border of the image may be prepared separately as image data, and the image data may be combined to display as an integrated model image.

In the example shown in FIG. 144, when an operation opportunity is given to one operation means, there are two cases: a "normal button imitation image BMGa" is displayed (FIG. 144(a) and (c)), and a "special button imitation image BMGb" having a different shape is displayed (FIG. 144(b) and (d)). However, when the "normal button imitation image BMGa" is displayed (FIG. 144(a) and (c)), an operation opportunity may be given to the first operation means (first operation receiving unit), and when the "special button imitation image BMGb" is displayed (FIG. 144(b) and (d)), an operation opportunity may be given to a second operation means (second operation receiving unit) different from the first operation means (first operation receiving unit).

In each of the above-mentioned examples, the components (operation means) prepared as the object of operation may be realized as those requiring a pressing operation (pressing action) (such as a button), those requiring an insertion/removal operation (such as a sword decoration), or those requiring a player action such as non-contact or touching (such as a proximity sensor).

The peripheral decoration image SSG does not imitate the peripheral decoration that is actually provided on the periphery of the "operation receiving portion that is the subject of the operation opportunity," but it is sufficient if at least a portion of it does not imitate the peripheral decoration, and there may be a portion that imitates the peripheral decoration.

If the specific image TG is displayed within the validity period, the gauge image GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

For the "automatic reception performance (reception period during which the automatic button function is enabled)" described in FIG. 144 and subsequent figures, any of the implementation methods for the "automatic reception performance" exemplified earlier may be adopted. Regarding how the model image and gauge image are displayed during the automatic reception performance, any of the implementation methods described above may be adopted. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a reception performance occurs, depending on the type of performance state when the performance occurs, or the type of the reception performance (post-operation performance) itself, or the conditions under which the reception performance occurs, there are cases where the same post-operation performance as when the operation is performed is executed even if there is no operation by the player during the valid period (the "automatic performance function" is enabled), and cases where the post-operation performance is not executed if there is no operation by the player during the valid period (the "automatic performance function" is not enabled). The timing at which the automatic performance function is enabled may be a predetermined timing during the valid period, may be the timing at which the valid period ends, or may be the timing a little while after the valid period ends.

The acceptance period (operation permission state) illustrated in each of the above-mentioned performance examples does not necessarily have to occur within a performance pattern corresponding to the result of a jackpot determination (performance determination). For example, it may occur (based on the establishment of a predetermined condition) during a period when a pattern change is not being performed (for example, a period when a jackpot game is being performed or various interval periods) rather than during a period when a pattern change is being performed.

In addition, the acceptance period exemplified in each of the above-mentioned performance examples does not necessarily have to have the end condition of the acceptance period set to "the passage of a predetermined time value", and the acceptance period may end when a predetermined end condition is met (for example, when 10 game balls are received in the large prize opening).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the disappearance EF performance (disappearance effect image, overlapping performance display, etc.) can be used in common (can be executed in the same performance mode) for multiple reception periods with different types of post-reception performance (conversation announcement in which the expectation level is suggested depending on which conversation appears, movement performance in which the expectation level is suggested depending on whether the movable body moves or not, cut-in announcement in which the expectation level is suggested depending on which mode the cut-in display appears, etc.), thereby making it possible to recognize that the operation reception (operation reception) is in a state where it has been properly performed (a state where the reception period has ended). In other words, since the post-reception performance differs depending on the type of reception period, it is difficult to recognize when looking at the performance content whether it is being performed within the reception period or is being performed as a result of the reception period having ended. In this regard, by preparing a disappearance EF performance that can appear in a common (same) performance mode when the reception period ends, regardless of the type of reception period, it becomes possible to appropriately indicate that the operation reception (operation reception) has been properly performed and the post-reception performance is being performed. However, as a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), it is sufficient if there are cases where a disappearance EF performance (disappearance effect image, overlapping performance display, etc.) that is common to multiple types of post-acceptance performance is executed, and for example, a dedicated disappearance EF performance (overlapping performance display) that can be executed only when a specific type of post-acceptance performance occurs may be prepared.

Unless otherwise specified, the configurations described in each of the above examples of effects apply when the game is being played normally, and do not apply when some abnormal condition occurs.

The acceptance permission state in each of the above-mentioned examples of performance does not have to occur based on a judgment, for example, it may occur due to the passage of time, and the display after acceptance does not have to indicate the result of the judgment, for example, a mini-game during a jackpot.

The term "mochi (mochi image)" used in explaining each of the above-mentioned production examples is synonymous with "mock (mochi image)."

The above-mentioned "multiple operation permitted state" may be a state in which the selection target (e.g., character, etc.) changes each time an operation is performed.

The above-mentioned "auto-repeated tap function" can be realized as a repeated tap mode in which a new post-acceptance change occurs at regular intervals simply by maintaining the operating state, or as a long press mode in which one post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance continues without ending (the execution time is extended) if the operating state is maintained.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned examples of performance, variations, notes, etc., the items described as "desirable" are merely descriptions of the additional effects that may be obtained when the same configuration is provided, and it goes without saying that the same configuration does not necessarily have to be provided.

In other words, in the embodiment, the invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine, but this is not limited to this, and the invention may also be applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, and in this case too, the same effects can be achieved.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Playing board 5a Playing area 1402 Normal symbol display 1403 First special symbol display 1404 First special reserved number display 1405 Second special symbol display 1406 Second special reserved number display 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 2001 General winning port 2002 First starting port 2003 Gate section 2004 Second starting port 2005 Big winning port

Claims (1)

A specific operation means operable by a player;
A determination means for making a determination;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judging means;
an operation state detection means for detecting a state of the specific operation means;
a post-operation sound output means for outputting a post-operation output sound in response to detection by the operation state detection means that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which the specific operation means is operated,
A gaming machine in which a multiple operation effective state is prepared as an operation effective state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, and the detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times, so that the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times,
As the multiple operation valid state,
an indefinitely variable multiple operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operating state, and at that time, the post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times so that the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated does not become a constant time ;
a constant-change multiple-operation effective state is provided in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operating state, and at this time, the post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times so that the interval until a new output sound is generated is a constant time;
the indefinitely-changing multiple-operation valid state is generated as a multiple-operation valid state of a type that can be ended based on the fact that it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives,
The fixed-change multiple operation valid state may occur as a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives, or as a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the state may be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images